new consumer marketing: managing a living demand system

220
New Consumer Marketing Managing a Living Demand System Susan Baker with Margrit Bass

Upload: others

Post on 11-Sep-2021

1 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System

New Consumer Marketing

Managing a Living Demand System

Susan Baker

with

Margrit Bass

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page iii

Innodata
0470868414jpg

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page ii

New Consumer Marketing

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page i

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page ii

New Consumer Marketing

Managing a Living Demand System

Susan Baker

with

Margrit Bass

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page iii

Copyright copy 2003 John Wiley amp Sons Ltd The Atrium Southern Gate ChichesterWest Sussex PO19 8SQ England

Telephone (+44) 1243 779777

Email (for orders and customer service enquiries) cs-bookswileycoukVisit our Home Page on wwwwileyeuropecom or wwwwileycom

All Rights Reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system ortransmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording scanning orotherwise except under the terms of the Copyright Designs and Patents Act 1988 or under the terms ofa licence issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency Ltd 90 Tottenham Court Road London W1T 4LPUK without the permission in writing of the Publisher Requests to the Publisher should be addressedto the Permissions Department John Wiley amp Sons Ltd The Atrium Southern Gate Chichester WestSussex PO19 8SQ England or emailed to permreqwileycouk or faxed to (+44) 1243 770620

This publication is designed to provide accurate and authoritative information in regard to the subjectmatter covered It is sold on the understanding that the Publisher is not engaged in renderingprofessional services If professional advice or other expert assistance is required the services of acompetent professional should be sought

Other Wiley Editorial Offices

John Wiley amp Sons Inc 111 River Street Hoboken NJ 07030 USA

Jossey-Bass 989 Market Street San Francisco CA 94103-1741 USA

Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Boschstr 12 D-69469 Weinheim Germany

John Wiley amp Sons Australia Ltd 33 Park Road Milton Queensland 4064 Australia

John Wiley amp Sons (Asia) Pte Ltd 2 Clementi Loop 02-01 Jin Xing Distripark Singapore 129809

John Wiley amp Sons Canada Ltd 22 Worcester Road Etobicoke Ontario Canada M9W 1L1

Wiley also publishes its books in a variety of electronic formats Some content that appears in print maynot be available in electronic books

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Baker SusanNew consumer marketing managing a living demand systemby Susan Baker

p cmIncludes bibliographical references and index

ISBN 0-470-84482-5 (cloth alk paper)1 Marketing I Title

HF5415B279 20036588mdashdc21 2003007455

British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data

A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library

ISBN 0-470-84482-5

Typeset in 1214 Garamond by Footnote Graphics Ltd Warminster WiltshirePrinted and bound in Great Britain by TJ International Ltd Padstow CornwallThis book is printed on acid-free paper responsibly manufactured from sustainable forestry in which at least two trees are planted for each one used for paper production

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page iv

Contents

Foreword ixAcknowledgements xiAbout the Author xiii

Introduction 1Meeting the Challenges 3Overview of the Book 6

1 Earthquake 9Marketing in Crisis 10The Evolution of Marketing 12

The Rise of Relationship Marketing 14The Test of CRM 15

Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment 18Implications for Consumer Marketing 21Summary Points 22

2 The New Consumer 23Consumption in Transformation 23

Expansion of the Consumer Concept 24Defence of Consumer Rights 25

Consumption Management in Question 27A New Kind of Consumer 27

New Consumers Are Exercised By Time 28New Consumers Lead Complex Lives 30New Consumers Seek Experiences 31New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding 31New Consumers Are IT Enabled 32

Implications for Consumer Marketing 33Summary Points 34

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page v

3 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers 37Key Issues for Brand Owners 37

The Force of Globalization 38The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing 39The Growth in Retailer Power 40The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth 41The Search for Innovation 42

The Retailersrsquo Response 42Trading across Multiple Locations 43Trading across Multiple Formats 44Use of Multiple Channels 44Editing Choice in Store 44Enhancing Retail Branding 45Developing Multinational Operations 45Pursuing Customer Loyalty 45

Implications for Consumer Marketing 48Summary Points 48

4 New Consumer Marketing 51New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it 51

A Response to the New Consumer 52A Response to the Interactive Marketplace 53A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management 54

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 55Adopting Value-Centricity 55Applying Science 57Breaking out of Binary Thinking 58

New Consumer Marketing ndash Who Is Involved 60Implications for Consumer Marketing 61Summary Points 61

5 A Model of New Consumer Marketing 63To Recap 63Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing 65

Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers 65Embracing the New Consumer 66Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness 66Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis 67

The New Consumer Marketing Model 67

vi Contents

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page vi

6 Value Definition 73The Role of Insight in Value Definition 74

Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value 74Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors 78

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 79Using Quantitative Research 80Using Qualitative Research 82Need-States Analysis 86

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 88Using Database Systems 88Using CRM Systems 89Using Front-line Staff 91

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 91Creating a Segmentation Analysis 93

The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition 97Summary Points 99

7 Value Creation 101The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 102

Consumers as Innovators 104Innovation through Process or People 106Innovation as a Dynamic Capability 107A Radical Approach to Innovation 109

The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation 111The Role of Branding in Value Creation 113

Building Successful Brands 116Emerging Brand Issues 119

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 120Drawing out the Emotional Message 121The Positioning Process 123

The Role of Price in Value Creation 125The Evaluation of Value 127

Summary Points 129

8 Value Delivery 131The Role of Agility in Value Delivery 131The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 133

Making the Most of Media Choices 136Making the Most of Channel Choices 139

Contents vii

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page vii

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 141Creating a Service Strategy 142Recruiting and Motivating Staff 143Empowering Employees to Live the Brand 146

The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery 148The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 152

Competing through the Supply Chain 153Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression 154

Summary Points 159

9 Demand System Management 161The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management 163The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 165

Culture 165Structure 168

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values in Demand System Management 170

Leadership 170Vision 171Values 172

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 175The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System

Management 179The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 181The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management 185Summary Points 187Concluding Remarks 188

Notes 189References 191Index 197

viii Contents

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page viii

Foreword

Samuel Curtis Johnson first built his reputation as a maker of parquet floorsand then became better known for creating a new way to care for them Hislegacy was a company with a small portfolio of wax-based products whichevolved into the global concern that SC Johnson is today with its globalhousehold name brands such as PledgeGlade and Mr Muscle

One of the basic principles that has guided the successful developmentof the company since its founding over a hundred years ago has been thebelief that we must earn the enduring goodwill of consumers and users ofour products and services

Consumers make up one of five key groups of people to whom we believewe are responsible and whose trust we have to earn (the others beingemployees the general public neighbours and hosts in the countries andcommunities where we conduct business and the world community) Inparticular we are committed to providing useful products and servicesthroughout the world by

Monitoring the changing wants and needs of consumers and users Maintaining close and effective business relationships with the trade to

ensure that our products and services are readily available to consumersand users

Continuing our research and development commitment to provide a strong technical base for innovative and superior products andservices

With our strong corporate emphasis on understanding consumers andproviding them with what they want I found this book enormously appeal-ing because it offers a very clear summary of todayrsquos context for consumermarketing and identifies the real challenges facing those of us seeking toexpand markets market share and profits

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page ix

Susan depicts for us the tectonic shift that has taken place in theeconomy describing this as a move from production-driven to consumption-led In doing so she raises relevant questions about how marketing needs toundergo a consequent shift Most of the marketing frameworks wersquore alltoo familiar with emerged in the production-driven era and we have to askhow relevant they are in this age of the lsquonew consumerrsquo This is a consumerwho is active confident and knowledgeable one who looks for brandexperiences and whose life is being transformed by developments in IT

The marketplace before us is no longer static and homogenous andSusan links neatly into business trends that are being played out here Sheoffers a framework for organising marketing to deliver the value thatconsumers are looking for In doing so she draws on thinking from theemerging discipline of complexity science

This is a timely and relevant book Its stimulating content makesabsorbing reading for both practitioners and scholars Irsquom delighted to becontinuing an SC Johnson tradition of championing consumer marketingin robustly endorsing this thought-provoking work

Steven P StanbrookPresidentndashAsia PacificSC Johnson

x Foreword

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page x

Acknowledgements

lsquoWhy have you got so many books in herersquo asked my son Mark then aged five and ahalf years on entering my study at home one day lsquoBecause Irsquom writing a bookrsquo I replied lsquoWhy do you need so many books to write a bookrsquo he asked

It was a good question and I went on to explain that it wasnrsquot just the booksI needed as reference material but copies of academic papers notes ofmeetings with leading practitioners conference presentations seminarnotes copies of student projects and dissertations and so on and so forthFor the fact of the matter is that this book has emerged out of my years asboth a practitioner and an academic and a debt of gratitude is due to theeclectic group that has contributed to my thinking Working at CranfieldSchool of Management has been a particular source of inspiration and manyof my colleagues will find themselves quoted for good reason My work inestablishing the New Marketing Research Group at the School (visitwwwnew-marketingorg) has helped in pulling many of my ideastogether Irsquom grateful to Professor Malcolm McDonald for supporting mein this venture and to Dr Louise Humphries and Debbie Roberts forhelping me make the Group happen

In making this book a reality Irsquod like to acknowledge the patience ofClaire Plimmer and her team at Wiley the secretarial assistance fromHayley Tedder at Cranfield the creative effort on the graphics from JoannaEnglish and the help given by Marion Cooper with several of the casestudies Margrit Bass who edited this as I wrote it was always encouragingand the book has benefited enormously from her input

Finally I would like to dedicate this book to the three most importantpeople in my life ndash my husband Chris and our sons James and Mark Thankyou for living this book with me

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xi

My concluding words are again attributed to Mark He came into mystudy again a week or so ago and asked why the can of polish was sitting onthe floor lsquoBecause now the bookrsquos finished Irsquom clearing uprsquo I replied Helooked about and then said disdainfully lsquoWell you havenrsquot finished yethave yoursquo Proving therersquos nothing like children to keep your feet on theground

Susan BakerMay 2003

xii Acknowledgements

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xii

About the Author

Dr Susan BakerAt Cranfield School of Management where she is a full time member offaculty Susan specializes in consumer marketing in particular under-standing consumer markets branding and international marketing Shefounded and directs the New Marketing Research Group which workstogether with a consortium of client organizations to understand theimpact on marketing of the New Consumer (wwwnew-marketingorg)

A frequent keynote speaker at conferences and seminars Susan teacheson the MBA programme and works on a variety of management develop-ment programmes for companies across all sectors ndash consumer business-to-business and professional services

Prior to Cranfield Susan pursued a ten-year career in services marketingin leisure retailing from which she gained senior management experienceon both client and agency sides of the business in the UK and overseas

Outside Cranfield she was a trustee of Consumersrsquo Association for manyyears and has more recently become a trustee of Beating Bowel Cancer

She can be contacted at slbakercranfieldacuk

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xiii

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xiv

As a member of faculty at Cranfield School of Management I have metmany senior marketers over recent years who have become frustrated thatlsquomarketing doesnrsquot seem to be working any morersquo Companies are finding itharder to connect with consumers CRM systems that promised so muchhave delivered so little The conventional tools and techniques ofmarketing no longer appear to be relevant Added to all of this market-ingrsquos contribution to a business is constantly under question In effect thecertainties of the marketing environment have been replaced with theuncertainties of a dynamically complex marketplace

So what has changedThe answer is a lot The ground beneath our feet feels shaky because we

are experiencing the after effects of an lsquoearthquakersquo Almost imperceptiblythe economic plates are shifting sending tremors through the players(brand owners and retailers on the one side and consumers on the other)rearranging a landscape that had appeared static and immovable for so longEquilibrium is being replaced with a state of continual change anduncertainty In a variety of small ways the fault lines are emerging withsudden clarity We are moving from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy where the nature of the exchange is different and thisdifference is exacerbated by the force of the internet and e-commerce Thisshift is creating a number of key challenges for consumer marketing

These challenges can be summarized as the need to

bull embrace the New Consumerbull address the concerns of brand owners and retailersbull help organizations develop real consumer responsivenessbull lift marketing out of its crisis

Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 1

Companies are confronted with a new kind of consumer one that hasvariously been described as lsquoactiversquo lsquoknowledgeablersquo and lsquopostmodernrsquo Inessence this is a New Consumer a creature distinctly different andidentifiable from its predecessors For this New Consumer time is aprecious commodity in lives that are becoming increasingly complex Intheir purchasing behaviour New Consumers now look for brandlsquoexperiencesrsquo over and above bundles of features and benefits They are moremarketing literate than ever before and IT enabled New Consumersinhabit an interactive marketplace characterized by high levels ofheterogeneity which disputes the assumptions of conventional marketingthinking

Faced with this new marketplace brand owners and retailers are lookingto enrich and expand the strategic options open to them The growth ofretailer power is of particular concern to brand owners who have beenfeeling the threat posed by industry consolidation Further stress in therelationship stems from the continuing downward pressure on price Andadding to this is the force of globalization and debate about the viability ofmanufacturing Above all there is an imperative to balance cost reductionand sales growth

Retailers are themselves facing daunting challenges and first and fore-most among these is a long-term pattern of declining spend Over the pastten years the retail sector has come to represent less than half the percentageof GDP it used to command This trend varies across sectors forcingretailers to shift their strategies to remain profitable Other challenges havearisen in respect to the difficulties associated with acquiring a businesslocation and consumer expectations of price

The aim for both brand owners and retailers is to develop greater con-sumer responsiveness This means focusing on the demand side of theirbusinesses doing the same thing better or doing something new Toachieve this organizations need to connect better with consumers theyneed to get close enough to consumers to understand how to deliver thevalue that consumers are seeking in a continually adaptive and innovativeway Organizations need to learn how to work in the consumerrsquos lsquospacersquo

Finally criticism about the lack of clarity surrounding marketingrsquoscontribution to a business has been a feature of reports and articles overrecent years This is in part driven by the difficulties surrounding themeasurement of marketing effectiveness but also by the fact that

2 Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 2

marketing is both equated with business unit strategy and located withinthe marketing mix Without a clear emphasis as to its role marketinglanguishes in a lsquono manrsquos landrsquo and is badly placed to provide strategicleadership

MEETING THE CHALLENGES

Meeting these challenges head on requires a different way ofconceptualizing the marketing process and a different approach toimplementation This book proposes the adoption of a value-centricapproach to marketing and connecting with the new science of complexityto enable business to find a way of surviving in the face of continual change

As the practice of marketing has evolved in response to market con-ditions the underlying philosophy of a business in relation to the customersit serves has shifted Transaction marketing was based on a sales orientationwith the aim of acquiring as many new customers as possible Profit wasgenerated through increased sales volume Relationship Marketing thenswitched the emphasis to developing greater profitability through customersatisfaction underpinned by a retention orientation The realities of theconsumption-led economy demand that the focus of a business shifts againto consumer responsiveness based on superior processes of insight innova-tion and agility to achieve profitability This means replacing the focus oncustomer retention with a value-centric orientation

A value-centric orientation means delivering the value consumers wantto buy into and the organization wants to deliver that is value on theconsumerrsquos terms as demanded and maybe even dictated by them This valuecomponent marks the process of exchange that takes place between theconsumer and the organization it is the lsquothingrsquo that consumers get inreturn for what they give It means moving beyond a relationship emphasisto one that has at its core the definition creation and delivery of value If anorganization can meet the value expectations of the consumer then a long-term and profitable relationship is more likely to follow The key is havingvalue as the starting point otherwise the relationship developmentstrategy (and the CRM tools perhaps used to deliver it) will not work asintended

This however is not sufficient on its own to make marketing moreeffective Organizations need to reconceptualize the marketing process to

Meeting the Challenges 3

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 3

take account of the dynamically complex new marketplace Business needsto learn how to understand complexity and find ways of respondingdynamically to change This is where marketing connects with the newscience of complexity The appeal of this to business theorists is that itprovides a way of thinking about how the underlying processes andrelationships in a company can be organized to survive in the face ofcontinual change

New Consumer Marketing emerges at the confluence of these twostreams of thinking ndash the evolving discipline of marketing and the scienceof complexity New Consumer Marketing is therefore different from theprevailing marketing paradigm It is a business discipline that enables theorganization to master the increasingly dynamic and complex process ofgoing to market in a systemic and holistic way It provides managers witha means of identifying and mobilizing people and processes to help thembecome as adaptive and creative as possible against the background of acomplex marketing environment

The New Consumer Marketing model is presented in Figure 01 and itshows quite clearly how consumer marketing can be conceptualized asconsisting of the three key processes underpinned by a value-centric orienta-tion The model is organic in nature reflected in the use of honeycomb-shaped cells each of which has a nucleus The model encourages the synergyof emphasizing both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo enabling organizations to breakout of the binary thinking that has long constrained management theory Inshort the static marketing function of the production-driven economybecomes a living demand system in the consumption-led economy leavingbehind the mechanistic approaches of the former era

The first cell in the demand system is concerned with the process of valuedefinition that is the process of generating and identifying insight inorder to describe and demonstrate value This covers both traditional andnon-traditional ways of generating insight and the process of turning thatinsight into something actionable through segmentation

The next cell is concerned with the process of value creation Innovationforms the nucleus of this cell and is of strategic significance Other sub-processes include new product development branding positioning andpricing

The third key process in a demand system is value delivery This is to dowith how value is communicated and conveyed by an organization to a

4 Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 4

specific audience Media and channels obviously play a role alongsideservice technology integration and supply-chain management Thewatchword here is organizational agility

The seven elements needed to make a demand system viable aredescribed as the organizational DNA The interrelationships of intuitionculture and structure leadership vision and values employees knowledgemanagement planning and measurement work within the cells tooptimize performance and ensure competitive survival

The New Consumer Marketing model therefore lifts marketing out ofits crisis in terms of presenting a conceptual guide for practitioners forgenerating and managing the exchange process under conditions ofcompetition The model provides a framework that enables an organizationto describe and position its marketing strategy In doing this it identifiesthe consumer segments it seeks to serve determining where and how itwill compete

Meeting the Challenges 5

Figure 01 The New Consumer Marketing model

13

13

13 $

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 5

OVERVIEW OF THE BOOK

The structure of this book is outlined below

Figure 02 Structure of the book

6 Introduction

A

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 6

Chapter 1 provides an overview of the changing competitive landscapeand places marketing within the business context Chapter 2 describes theprofile of New Consumers highlighting the challenges they pose tobusiness Chapter 3 then explores the concerns of brand owners andretailers who in the face of change must meet these challenges in order tosurvive

Chapter 4 introduces New Consumer Marketing as an emergingbusiness discipline New Consumer Marketing is not simply another wayof managing the marketing mix but a viable means of addressing the rangeof issues that enable an organization to compete successfully in a particularmarket Its key objective is to help the organization establish sustainablecompetitive advantage by means of superior performance High levels ofperformance are achieved and maintained through the processes of valuedefinition value creation and value delivery

A framework for conceptualizing New Consumer Marketing as themanagement of a demand system is presented in Chapter 5 Chapters 6 7and 8 then focus on each of the three key processes that form the workinglsquocellsrsquo of the New Consumer Marketing model value definition valuecreation and value delivery The concluding chapter Chapter 9 identifiesthe elements that make up the organizational DNA ndash the genetic code thatdrives the cellsrsquo performance and determines the overall success of thedemand system

References to source material and Notes on further reading are to befound at the back of the book

Overview of the Book 7

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 7

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 8

The current crisis in marketing is underscored by profound change in themarketing environment

A new marketplace is emerging and bringing with it a host of challengesnever before encountered For marketers this event is both exciting andunnerving opportunities for innovation and growth parallel threats toproven methodologies and the status quo The challenges posed by thechanging competitive arena are not restricted to a particular industry orsector but span the gamut of enterprises operating today All businessesare being affected to some degree by the root-and-branch upheaval that isoccurring in the wider marketing environment At the start of the thirdmillennium a paradigm shift in commerce is clear we have moved from aproduction-driven to a consumption-led economy

While the forces of demand and supply continue to regulate theeconomy the nature of the exchange has altered beyond all recognitionThe lsquothem and usrsquo adversarial approach to trade is giving way to consumerinvolvement in all aspects of product and service development anddelivery Supplying organizations use increasingly clever methods to wooconsumer loyalty and maintain competitive edge High-powered anddynamic data technology helps produce finely tuned marketing strategieswhich can be implemented on a one-to-one basis through an ever-expanding choice of traditional and electronic media Customers andconsumers exploit this greater access to information and the ability toachieve dialogue with suppliers exercising their new found empowermentby increasingly leveraging sales propositions in their own favour Theresult is a mutually influenced beneficial interaction

Earthquake 1

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 9

This radical transition in the way commercial transactions areconducted is evident no more so than in the rise of the buyerndashsellerrelationship Managing an ongoing relationship is an entirely differentmatter to managing a single transaction and the challenge for marketerstoday is compounded by the growing complexity of the context in which ittakes place Marketing especially consumer marketing faces a dauntingprospect quickly undergo profound change or prepare for certain death

MARKETING IN CRISIS

hellip there was a moment of pregnant stillness then a sibilant whisper a sort offaint seismic exhalation and then the world lurched

Ben Macintyre The Times 23 March 2002

This is the description a journalist gave after experiencing a majorearthquake If one had been listening in the mid-1990s they would haveheard similar rumblings throughout the marketing profession An articlepublished in the McKinsey Quarterly in 1993 claimed lsquoMany consumergoods CEOs are beginning to think that marketing is no longerdeliveringrsquo suggesting that lsquomarketers are simply not picking up the rightsignals any morersquo A Coopers amp Lybrand survey of the same year foundcomparable consensus among senior executives within fast movingconsumer goods (fmcg) retail and service sector organizations Quotingtheir non-marketing managers respondents expressed concern about therole and value of marketing lsquoMarketing is increasingly living a lie in myorganizationrsquo lsquoIf marketing departments disappeared would anybodynotice Would it really matterrsquo

A growing number of articles on the subject of marketing then appearedin the media stimulating debate among academics and practitioners as towhether or not this lsquobad pressrsquo was warranted In late 1993 the UKrsquosChartered Institute of Marketing (CIM) commissioned a report on thefuture of marketing in key British enterprises (Chartered Institute ofMarketing 1994) Boldly entitled The Challenge of Change the CIMinvestigation into marketingrsquos performance and promise delivered mixedtidings A multitude of research reports and commentaries from precedingdecades as well as the then current clutch revealed that marketing was set tobecome increasingly relevant and strategically important as a managementfunction but that it remained on the whole poorly executed in Britain

10 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 10

The last decade of the twentieth century was symbolically brought to aclose with a decisive report by the Marketing Forum the UKrsquos leadingauthority on the role and status of marketing With the objectives ofidentifying the key drivers and core responsibilities of the marketingdiscipline the report sought to address the growing unease amongmarketers Original research attempted to answer the following questions

In the post-dotcom boom what are the new drivers of marketing focus How does the arrival of the information era affect how we as marketers

operate What is our remit now and what new responsibilities can we expect to

assume in future

From the strength of response the message was clear the conventionaltools of marketing were no longer applicable and there was a pressing needfor fresh thinking The research showed that marketing appeared to belosing its way thrown off course by the myriad of unprecedented pressuresand developments in the now global marketplace It was felt that the futureof marketing if there was to be one rested firmly on the adoption of newapproaches and new attitudes While the underlying principles ofmarketing remained for the most part intact the practical tools andtechniques employed required radical revision

Traditional marketing devices such as the 4Ps (product place price andpromotion) had emerged in the production-driven era of the 1950sndash1970sThe subsequent globalization of market activity and explosion in theavailability and use of new-wave technologies particularly the Internet toname but two key drivers of change turned the existing business premiseon its head Instead of being the focus of persuasion to buy what producerswished to produce consumers became the focus of production itself theycould influence to a great extent the nature of products Business prosperityrelied on retaining valuable customer relationships not revving theengines of production

To grasp the full weight of this seismic shift in the rules of commercialengagement it is useful to look back briefly at the development ofmarketing as an established management discipline Its evolution issuffused with hard lessons and valuable learning Only by understandingmarketingrsquos role at different points in time can we anchor the debate aboutits future in a meaningful context

Marketing in Crisis 11

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 11

THE EVOLUTION OF MARKETING

While the application of marketing has existed since people first tradedwith one another its emergence as a distinct business discipline hashappened relatively recently in the period between the First and SecondWorld Wars In the UK for example modern-day marketing becamesynonymous with brand marketing as practised in the 1950s and 1960s byfmcg companies such as Unilever and Procter amp Gamble Marketing stoodfor a business philosophy based on meeting the needs of customers andcreating sustainable competitive advantage It was supported by a businessfunction bearing the same name

Marketers drew on an operational framework rooted in the 4Ps and themost knowledgeable had at their disposal an expanding toolbox ofconceptual diagnostic and predictive tools It is worth considering some ofthese briefly to appreciate marketingrsquos integral role The product life cycle(PLC) introduced in 1950 promulgated the notion that products passthrough typical phases from lsquolaunchrsquo to lsquomaturityrsquo to lsquodeclinersquo and finallylsquoexitrsquo from the marketplace The PLC was followed by a range of modelsdeveloped by rival management consultancies such as the BostonConsulting Group (BCG) and McKinsey amp Co to aid the marketer in themanagement of both single products and product portfolios The mostenduring of these analytical devices are BCGrsquos Boston Matrix andMcKinseyrsquos Directional Policy Matrix (DPM) designed in conjunctionwith General Electric in the USA and Shell in Europe

The four-box Boston Matrix (see Figure 11a) considered products interms of their relative market share and market growth rate It held thatthe perfect conglomerate needed a mix of three types of product Profitfrom the steady earners (lsquocash cowsrsquo) could be used to invest in productswith huge growth potential (lsquostarsrsquo) and underwrite those underdevelopment (lsquoquestion marksrsquo) The fourth quadrant of the matrix wasallocated to product failures (lsquodogsrsquo) whose poor performance or excessivecash consumption justifies their being discarded altogether The DPM (seeFigure 11b) expanded the number of variables used in the Boston Matrixadding market attractiveness and business strengths in order to analyseproduct performance in greater depth

As marketing tools and techniques aimed at understanding productbehaviour became more refined the need to understand consumer

12 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 12

behaviour became more pronounced Demand in consumer markets in the1950s and 1960s was buoyant due to rising levels of disposable income andthe influence of new forms of communication notably televisionMarketing was harnessed as a means of persuading masses of consumers tobuy what was manufactured and the lsquomakendashsellrsquo philosophy of businessestablished itself as consonant with the production-driven era

The guiding principle for developing mass consumer markets was toacquire ever-greater numbers of consumers and take maximum market share

The Evolution of Marketing 13

Figure 11 (a) The Boston Matrix and (b) the Directional Policy Matrix

lsquoStarsrsquo

A selected few

lsquoCash cowsrsquo lsquoDogsrsquo

lsquoQuestion marksrsquo

Marketgrowthshare

Relative competitive position (market share)

Remainder

divested

Liquidated

(a)

(b)

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 13

This strategy was underpinned by research from PIMS (Profit Impact ofMarket Strategy) which showed that the greater the market share achievedthe bigger the profits that would accrue to the company The pace and scopeof mass marketing were set by the American consumer goods giants forwhom the market appeared to be an ever-climbing sales curve until theworld was jolted out of this misapprehension by a series of oil crises in the1970s The consequent international economic downturn followed by highinflation at home had a serious impact on consumers Consumer spendinghabits displayed prudence and sophistication in much larger measure

The Rise of Relationship Marketing

Supplying organizations responded to the constrained economicenvironment of the 1970s by re-examining what they were offering tocustomers To increase product appeal differentiation and value formoney many augmented their product offerings by incorporating a serviceelement This spawned the development of services marketing as a businessfunction In mature markets where the rate of growth had slowed or evenstopped it became more difficult for organizations to pursue a strategy ofgaining market share With the pool of new prospects diminishedmarketing attention steered towards retaining and growing existingcustomer relationships Consequently lsquocustomer loyaltyrsquo achievedpriority and its prime strategic importance remains to this day

The shift in marketing emphasis from customer acquisition to customerretention became enshrined in the principles of Relationship Marketing(RM) RM unlike transaction marketing recognizes that commercialtransactions are not isolated events but that they take place within a liveand continuous context of engagement ndash a lsquorelationshiprsquo between buyerand seller Underpinning the idea of an enduring and potentiallylsquogrowablersquo relationship with a customer is the concept of customer valuethat is the customer has an intrinsic and dynamic value to the supplyingorganization and vice versa

Measures of marketing success then turned from numbers of customers(market share) to share of customer expenditure (share of lsquowalletrsquo) andpotential customer value (customer lifetime value) The work of Bainconsultants Frederick Reichheld and Earl Sasser was seminal indemonstrating the large impact on profitability of small increases in

14 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 14

customer retention rates Further research by Reichheld and Teal (1996)showing the increasing profitability of customers the longer therelationship lasts added strength to the argument for a relationshipmarketing approach

Issues surrounding RM implementation were less clear and businesstheorists usually advocated relationship building via the identification of anumber of key groups or market domains For example the MultipleMarkets Model developed by Christopher Payne and Ballantyne (19912002) recommends that marketing activity should be focused on six mainmarkets

1 consumer markets (or customer markets in the business-to-businesssector)

2 internal markets ie employees3 supplier and alliance markets eg business partners suppliers

consultants contractors4 influencer markets eg venture capitalists regulators lobbyists and

litigators5 referral markets eg customer advocates intermediaries business

advisors6 recruitment markets eg employment agencies graduates the pool of

potential employees

This multiple-markets approach embraces a more holistic view of themarketplace It forces marketers to think beyond managing one marketmade up of consumers (or customers) and extends the marketing mix toinclude the increasingly important elements of people process and theprovision of customer service

As RM became more widely accepted during the 1990s developmentscontinued apace in IT and computational methodologies resulting in theconvergence of database marketing and customer service delivery This ledto the concept of Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

The Test of CRM1

CRM was the last big idea of the twentieth century to grab the attention ofmarketers It appeared to present the magic formula for marketing successndash the opportunity to galvanize the business behind a marketing-led

The Evolution of Marketing 15

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 15

strategy Moreover as commentators have observed it offered lsquothemystique of new technologies and a new three letter acronymrsquo The theorybehind CRM is that managing customer relationships is an integratedbusiness process involving the consolidation of individual customer datafrom multiple sources to create a mutually valuable proposition CRMrsquosemphasis on using IT to monitor customersrsquo transaction histories andexploit their purchasing behaviour serves to reinforce the impact ofcustomer retention strategies With real-time access to customer-specificinformation organizations can segment customers by value targetmarketing strategies towards the most promising opportunities andpersonalize marketing communications Consequently service levels areguided by customer profitability CRM seemed to provide at last themeans of implementing RM effectively and as an incrementaldevelopment served to extend the marketing life cycle (see Figure 12)

Investment in CRM systems across Europe is such that it is one of thefastest growing markets in the IT industry However those organizationsthat interpreted CRM as simply the purchase of an expensive softwareprogram found little succour in the smart new technology It has beenclaimed that up to 97 of CRM installations fail to deliver the anticipated

16 Earthquake

Figure 12 The marketing life cycle

Production-driven economy Consumption-led economy

Marketingemerges asa business

function

Post-warconsumer

boom

Series ofoil crises

Functionalmarketing

Servicesmarketing

Relationshipmarketing

1920s30s 1950s60s 1970s 1980s 1990s 2000

Demandsystem

marketing

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 16

benefits Problems stem from a lack of clarity about what CRM actually isand how to implement it successfully For some it has meant bettermarketing communications providing a means of escaping from theconstraints of mass communications and of achieving more personalizeddialogue Others have taken a broader view using the terms CRM andmarketing almost interchangeably A third school of thought hashighlighted the IT aspect regarding CRM as the technologicalenhancement of business processes Each interpretation of CRM offers anequal number of implementation models and with so many options andinterpretations it is little wonder that CRM has failed to meetexpectations

Current research shows that there are a number of preconditions thatneed to be satisfied prior to implementing a CRM strategy Organizationsmust have a clearly defined marketing strategy in place IT systems that arealigned to the goals of the marketing strategy and an organizationalculture which ably supports the implementation of CRM A misalignmentin any of these relationships leads to a failure of CRM creating waste anddisappointing performance

It is clear that most CRM systems are not conceived with the activedemanding IT-literate consumer in mind Their main focus is onproviding information about the customer to the company They seldomoffer the consumer direct access to information about the supplier orvendor or their own account As business theorist Patricia Seybold assertslsquoCRM systems should be designed with customers as the design centerCustomers should have the ability to maintain (though not theresponsibility of maintaining) information related to their relationshipsrsquo(Seybold et al 2001) This view is in keeping with the prediction ofresearch firm Gartner that by 2005 consumers will start to take control of their own data Together these assertions suggest that CMR ndash orcustomer-managed relationships ndash rather than CRM should be theguiding notion in devising relationship management systems

Whether or not CRM survives as a formal discipline it has been avaluable step in marketingrsquos development It has established the businesscase for adopting the customerrsquos perspective and involving the customer inthe formulation of product and service strategies The timing of thisrealization is no coincidence it is a creative response to the eruption ofdramatic change within the macro-marketing environment

The Evolution of Marketing 17

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 17

CHANGES IN THE MACRO-MARKETING ENVIRONMENT2

The present trend towards more customer-centric ways of doing business isbeing propelled and directed by a fundamental change in the marketingenvironment Using the earthquake metaphor the two lsquotectonic platesrsquothat shape the marketing landscape are the production-driven economyand the consumption-led economy As our manufacturing base declines wecan see that it is consumption and not production which is emerging asthe central motor of contemporary society

Of course we have to look at production and consumption as two sidesof the same coin Production does not take place without a correspondinglevel of consumption and similarly no consumption can take place unlesssomething is produced For some supplying organizations the boundarybetween these two sets of activities erodes and they fuse into what AlvinToffler so presciently described as lsquoprosumptionrsquo in his best-seller FutureShock As long ago as 1970 Toffler foresaw that consumers would soon befaced with the greatest variety of unstandardized goods and services everseen He believed this increasing diversity of products would beencouraged by two economic factors lsquoFirst consumers have more money tolavish on their specialized wants second and even more important astechnology becomes more sophisticated the cost of introducing variations declinesrsquo[his italics]

Today leading organizations such as Landsrsquo End Dell Procter ampGamble and Pearson the TV company demonstrate the wisdom ofTofflerrsquos vision

bull Clothing retailer Landsrsquo End started offering online tailoring inOctober 2000 in the USA A year later the company claimed that 40of all chino and jeans sales on its website were custom ordersCustomers would enter their measurements onscreen including theirweight height and hipndashthigh proportions An inbuilt computerprogram would analyse the information given and calculate the idealdimensions of the trousers The order specifications would be sentdirect to a manufacturing plant in Mexico where the fabric patternwould be produced by a computerized cutting machine and thenpassed to a sewing machinist Two to four weeks after the order wasplaced the customer would receive the trousers

18 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 18

bull Dell one of Fortune magazinersquos top ten lsquomost admiredrsquo companiesdesigns manufactures and customizes computing products andservices to customersrsquo requirements Using the online lsquoConfigure ampBuyrsquo facility customers can create the computer system that best meetstheir needs by a process of selecting options from drop-down menusAs they do so the total price changes accordingly at the bottom of theirscreen

bull Procter amp Gamble has a website called lsquoCommunity Cornerrsquo that it usesto build relationships with consumers or marketing partners as theyare known internally The website is an online forum in whichconsumers can talk about existing brands suggest ideas and changesand contribute to surveys There is also a chance for people with patentsfor new products to discuss them with Procter amp Gamble

bull The television programme Pop Idol created by Pearson enabledviewers to vote in their favourite pop star from a preselected shortlist

Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment 19

Figure 13 Landsrsquo Endcom online tailoring

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 19

In the final show of the UK series nine million viewers voted bytelephone awarding Will Young celebrity status Young thenachieved the fastest-selling debut single in the UK as more than 11 million fans went out to buy the record by the star they had createdThe programmersquos format has since been adopted by televisionproducers in the USA with similar success

The predominance of a consumption-led economy is reflected in a numberof macro market statistics For example in the UK the proportion of grossdomestic product (GDP) provided by manufacturing has been on adownward trend since the mid-1970s This position is reflected in each ofthe G7 industrialized economies (Germany France Italy Japan Canadathe USA and the UK) In the case of the UK manufacturing accounted foraround one third of the economyrsquos total output in 1960 However by thestart of the new millennium this had fallen to less than one fifth with onlythe USA showing a fall below this figure This has been driven in part bythe allocation of an increasing proportion of disposable income to expend-iture on a wide range of services and luxury goods Sectors such as bankingtourism leisure entertainment and telecommunications have been themain beneficiaries

This economic position is mirrored in employment patterns Significantjob losses are expected in the primary sector of the economy (agriculturemining and utilities) over the next couple of years while manufacturingcan expect to lose around 80000 employees each year between 2000 and2005 when the loss is expected to slow to 50000 employees per annumThe decline in engineering will be seen as the biggest contributor to theselosses On the other hand distribution hotels the transport sector andcommunications can expect an increase of 40000 new jobs annually to2005 However the biggest job increases are expected to come in othermarket sectors where growth in professional services in particular willmean an increase of around 140000 new jobs each year to 2005

Not surprisingly these employment trends find equal expression inqualification statistics The number of students graduating in engineeringand technology are down by 9 from 35700 to 32400 over the period1997 to 2001 In contrast degrees received in law and the arts both showincreases Graduates in business and administration now dominate the jobmarket growing from 61700 in 1997 to 65300 in 2001 Those with

20 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 20

degrees in creative arts and design however show the biggestproportionate jump from 24800 in 1997 to 29500 in 2001

These facts and figures stress the fundamental change in marketdynamics from a production to a consumption focus Consumption andthe servicing of consumption increasingly form the basis of businessplanning The economic sector becomes ever more tightly tied tobusinesses that have an asset base made up of intangible services asopposed to hard and fast production This shift has significantramifications for marketers ndash consumer marketers in particular ndash who needactively to acknowledge that new ways of thinking and operating areneeded if we are to meet unrivalled market and management demands

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

A substantial amount of soul searching has gone on in marketing circlesover the past decade as marketingrsquos role and contribution to businessperformance have been challenged by both change and a lack of it Thediminished sense of influence power and value among marketingpractitioners and shared frustration about what to do next is rooted in thefact that the certainties of the production-driven economy have beenreplaced with the uncertainties of the consumption-led economy andmarketing thinking has not kept pace The tools techniques and theoriestaught in business schools today largely promote a mechanistic approach tomarketing which as the following chapters will show is not relevant tothe organic nature of present-day trade relations

While Relationship Marketing and its offshoot Customer RelationshipManagement have revolutionized marketing practice much more needsto be done to manage the matching of supply and demand synergisticallyMarketers whose role has always been located at the critical interfacebetween buyers and sellers are well placed to lead the thought processConsumer markets especially offer valuable insight and testing groundfor the development of more appropriate concepts and codes of practiceThere the customer base is usually more numerous remote and capriciousand the use of intermediaries is commonplace As the tremors shaking themarketing landscape grow stronger and more frequent the imperative tofind new meaning for marketers becomes an unenviable unavoidable andurgent responsibility

Implications for Consumer Marketing 21

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 21

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Marketers are operating in a context of fundamental transition Thecertainties of the production-driven economy have been replaced bythe uncertainties of the consumption-led economy

bull Consumption and the servicing of consumption now form the centralmotor of contemporary society

bull Many of the conventional tools and techniques of marketingdeveloped mainly in the production-driven era no longer apply andmarketingrsquos contribution to business is increasingly unclear

bull Relationship Marketing moved marketing focus from customeracquisition to customer retention

bull The implementation of Relationship Marketing through CRMsystems has been largely unsuccessful and there is an outstandingrequirement for greater clarity in terms of CRM definition andpractice

bull Consumer markets offer insight and testing ground for the futuredevelopment of marketing

22 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 22

Consumption and consumption management are being redefined by the NewConsumer

Consumption (the act or process of consuming) has always been acharacteristic of human nature But consumption as it relates to consuminggoods and services that do not merely fulfil needs but satisfy wants anddesires is a modern-day development one that accelerated after the SecondWorld War Since then a growing range of businesses have come to seetheir interactions with consumers as the execution of a formalized processof consumption They have engaged the marketing profession to hone thisprocess to optimum effect In parallel with this development consumerrights have evolved to the point where the advocacy of consumer interestsis no longer the sole remit of consumer organizations consumersthemselves are leading the cause

In order to manage the process of consumption effectively in the contextof transition described in Chapter 1 marketers traditionally have adoptedthe classic marketing approach of the 4Ps (product place price andpromotion) They have used these elements of the marketing mix tofacilitate their command-and-control philosophy However the advent ofa new kind of consumer is showing this traditional marketing approach tobe out of date lsquoNew Consumersrsquo are well informed and highly empoweredThey are increasingly influencing the shape and form of products andservices as well as the future of market players

CONSUMPTION IN TRANSFORMATION

lsquoConsumptionrsquo is often considered a contemporary word whose arrival wasmarked by the conspicuous consumption patterns of the 1980s Yet some

The New Consumer 2

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 23

commentators point to an earlier era the 1950s when the Marshall Planhelped to rebuild Europe The economic boom that followed the SecondWorld War lasting some 25 years ensured that many members of thelower social classes could have all sorts of goods and services their parentscould only dream of

Other commentators look still further back Sociologist GrantMcCracken (1988) for example turns to the reign of Queen Elizabeth I ofEngland and the prosperity of the last quarter of the sixteenth century1 Atthat time an explosion of consumerist behaviour was fuelled by membersof a social elite who became caught up in a lsquoriot of consumptionrsquo as theyvied for the attention of the monarch The accumulation of expenses bynoblemen at court meant they had less to spend on their families ndash and anew phenomenon was born The individual rather than the family beganto feature as the basic unit of consumption motivated rather more by asense of buying for the here-and-now than for the longer term

The beginnings of consumer society might also be found in the wave ofeconomic prosperity that hit eighteenth-century England and promptedthe emergence of a middle class For these consumers the possession offashionable goods represented an important index of their social standingMoreover new marketing and advertising techniques accompanied thesedifferent patterns of buying behaviour by new groups of consumers

Expansion of the Consumer Concept

Regardless of where in time we position the first signs of consumptionwhat is important is to acknowledge its pervasive influence The concept ofthe consumer and the building of businesses around it is no longerconfined to those who produce lsquothingsrsquo ie manufacturers Organizationsas diverse as charities utilities suppliers government bodies and evenreligious orders have become attuned to thinking of the individuals theyinteract with as consumers

British GasBritish Gas was privatized in 1986 and demerged from British Gas plc in1997 Today it is part of Centrica the holding company for a range ofbusinesses including the AA Goldfish and OneTel in the UK and EnergyAmerica and Luminus overseas For most consumers of gas fuel it is an

24 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 24

unexciting product Their gas-fired stoves break down and the bills alwaysseem disproportionately large to the burning small flame in their boilers As apart of Centrica British Gas set out to turn around a loss-making operationoptimize the use of its sales force and maintain brand presence Now thebusiness is highly profitable the result of a strategy that has included detailedwork on customer segmentation and the use of marketing campaigns tosmooth out peaks and troughs in consumer demand for maintenance andinstallation

Caldey IslandOn Caldey Island off the Welsh coast a group of Cistercian monks isdeveloping an e-business in an attempt to make the monastery financiallyself-sufficient The brothers produce a range of perfumes bath oils handcreams and menrsquos aftershaves as well as shortbread made to an old recipeThe idea of a web shop grew from the problem of geographical remotenessthe holy island is only accessible by licensed boat services between themonths of April and October making for a short selling season Earlyindications are that the site (wwwcaldey-islandcouk) is succeeding

Defence of Consumer Rights

Alongside the growth in consumer numbers products and expenditurethere has been growth in a consciousness of consumer rights The process ofadvancing the cause of consumersrsquo interests in relation to the producer orsupplying organization is known as consumerism and should be seen asdistinct from consumption or the act of consuming the products and servicesproduced

The lsquoconsumer movementrsquo loosely defined as the ongoing campaign tosecure consumer rights began in the late 1950s and early 1960s when anincreasing interest in consumer and environmental issues seeded the ideathat consumers possess the power to influence manufacturers (andsubsequently many others such as retailers and service providers)2 TheUK Consumersrsquo Association founded in 1957 set out to emulate theAmerican Consumersrsquo Union (CU) Within a few years consumersrsquoassociations had formed in several other European countries notablyHolland and Belgium All were based on the CU model of an organizationcarrying out product tests and making public the results to informconsumers (see Figure 21) The consumer voice was given further impetusby President John F Kennedyrsquos groundbreaking address to Congress in

Consumption in Transformation 25

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 25

March 1962 where he asserted the rights of consumers lsquoto safety to beinformed to choose and to be heardrsquo

Today consumer advocacy no longer resides solely with consumergroups The language of consumer rights has entered the corporate worldlsquoWhen people pay money for a brand or to a company they feel they arebuying rights to how they are treated ndash rights to be respected treatedhonestly and fairly and to have their points of view appreciatedrsquo This wasa comment made by Lucy Purdy planning director at Publicis when hercommunications agency published its findings on consumer attitudes toregistering complaints about poor goods and services

In order to create a business culture that meets these expectations on thepart of the consumer Mohanibar Sawhney and Philip Kotler from KelloggUniversity advocate implementing a Customer Bill of Rights for theInformation Age (Sawhney and Kotler 2001) Their proposed draft billsupports a consumer right to anonymity to be remembered and to share in pay-offs among other things They warn that lsquoViolating thesefundamental rights while tempting and even profitable in the short runwill be disastrous in the long runrsquo

26 The New Consumer

Figure 21 Which online

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 26

CONSUMPTION MANAGEMENT IN QUESTION

The management of consumption has traditionally been undertakenthrough the adoption of the lsquomakendashsellrsquo approach characteristic of the production-driven economy described in Chapter 1 Supplyingorganizations (ie manufacturers) made things and it was the task of themarketer to persuade consumers to buy them Their instruments ofpersuasion were the 4Ps The challenge for these organizations was tosatisfy customer needs by producing the right product at the right pricemaking it available in the right place at the right time and promoting itswinning features through the right means of communication

This mechanistic model of consumption management was laterenhanced by the principles of Relationship Marketing (RM) born out of afocus on services marketing RM stressed that the management ofconsumption was about far more than simply putting products into themarketplace The dawning realization that a manufacturer is not so much aproduct company but a service company with a product offeringintroduced the idea of building relationships with consumers over timebased on meeting their needs in relation to both the functional aspects ofthe product and the more intangible aspects of the service elements

In parallel with this development a growing consciousness of consumerrights and consumer power has created more confident consumers oneswho are finding their voice and have at their disposal the means ofexpressing it At the point of confluence of these two trends ndash RM on theone hand and consumer rights on the other ndash the way in whichconsumption is managed comes under question The lsquomakendashsellrsquo approachenhanced through RM does not meet with the expectations of this newempowered consumer Organizations need to acknowledge this change anddevise new ways of managing consumption based on consumersthemselves

A NEW KIND OF CONSUMER

The present consumer-driven marketplace is characterized by a new kindof consumer one who has been variously described as lsquoactiversquolsquoknowledgeablersquo and lsquopost-modernrsquo3 In essence this is a lsquoNew Consumerrsquoa creature distinctly different and identifiable from its predecessors

Consumption Management in Question 27

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 27

Marketers need to develop a deep understanding of the attitudes andbehaviours of this New Consumer if they are to break away from themechanistic models of the production-driven era and develop a relevantapproach to exploiting the business potential of current consumer cultureNew Consumers possess a number of distinguishing features the mostsignificant of which are highlighted here

New Consumers Are Exercised By Time

The first step in understanding changing cultures of consumption is torecognize the different ways in which New Consumers relate to the conceptof time Time has become a precious commodity and many products andservices reflect this insight capitalizing on the time-poorcash-rich trade-off many consumers make Consumers with little time and high levels ofdisposable income have become lsquooutsourcersrsquo ndash their clothes go to the drycleaners nannies look after their children cleaners and tradespeople keeptheir house in good order and so on Businesses that have spotted thismarket niche include enterprising property developers whose new-buildhomes come fitted with fake lawns and supermarkets which offer pre-packaged pre-cooked ready-made meals Personal full-service agencyEnviego goes further and has created a PA (personal assistant) service thatwill take care of everything from actively remembering birthdays toorganizing walking the dog

Contemporary consumer behaviour also illustrates that consumersappear to either actively embrace the pace of change and the constantstream of new products and services or want to run and hide The formerare living life to the max and desirous of anything but routine These lsquotimetouristsrsquo give themselves away by their pursuit of agelessness disregard forgender boundaries and delight in the finer things in life For brand ownerstime tourists represent new markets and marketing opportunitiesClinique for example cleverly acknowledges male buyers with theadvertisement lsquoDonrsquot say the word ldquocosmeticsrdquo Cliniquersquos ldquoSkin suppliesfor menrdquorsquo (see Figure 22a)

lsquoTime refugeesrsquo on the other hand display characteristics best describedas defensive in the face of the pace of change These consumers seek securityand a sense of belonging They want to find and maintain a home be itspiritual or physical They want to feel part of a community and form

28 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 28

A New Kind of Consumer 29

Figure 22 (a) Clinique woos the men (b) LrsquoOreal rewards you

(a)

(b)

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 29

relationship bonds with other people Buying certain brands thereforebecomes a way of linking with like-minded consumers The worldwidemarketing success of Harley-Davidson and its 600000-strong HarleyOwnersrsquo Group demonstrates this drive to belong to a tribe or group Forsome time refugees purchases become a sort of reward LrsquoOreal forexample targets this group with the strapline lsquoBecause yoursquore worth itrsquo(see Figure 22b) Time refugees are looking to anchor themselves in atransient world The website wwwfriendsreunitedcom which reunitesformer school friends has successfully captured their imagination

New Consumers Lead Complex Lives

The marketplace of the New Consumer is highly fragmented and this is inlarge part due to the highly complex lives consumers lead On one levelthey display multiple personalities seeming to dip in and out of differentstereotypic personality types The prevalence of this consumer behaviourwas exemplified by a piece of advice from Cosmopolitan magazine to itsfemale readership lsquoBe an it-girl on Saturday a kitten on Sunday a careerwoman on Monday a devoted girlfriend on Tuesday helliprsquo It is as ifconsumers can take on chameleon-like properties and adapt their projectedpersonas to suit the situation

This complex behaviour creates problems for marketers whosesegmentation analyses are constructed on the premise that consumers canbe categorized permanently in one of a number of predefined lsquoboxesrsquoHowever in displaying multiple personalities consumers can appear tooccupy a number of different boxes depending on the occasion Forexample in the airline industry a passenger might choose to fly businessclass or first class for business travel economy class for family holidays andwith a special ticket (discount or promotion) for a long weekendDesigning a marketing strategy to capture or keep this customer is analmost impossible task if simple demographics are used as the basisMaking sense of this apparent chaos requires marketers to abandon theirneed for certainty and to develop a tolerance of ambiguity and a skill inadaptability In addition to recognizing consumersrsquo changing attitudes totime marketers must respect their preferences and different needs anddesires

30 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 30

New Consumers Seek Experiences

Marketing theorists have for some time pointed out that consumers donrsquotbuy product features they buy product benefits As marketing guruTheodore Levitt famously commented lsquoCustomers donrsquot buy frac14 inch drillsthey buy frac14 inch holesrsquo In the case of New Consumers their purchasingbehaviour is further distinguished by the desire to buy an lsquoexperiencersquo It isnow possible to purchase such an experience off the shelf in high streetretailers W H Smith for example offers them in a catalogue Their rangeincludes a day driving a Ferrari or a JCB a visit to a health farm and aphotographic makeover Prices range from pound9999 to pound299999 the latterbuys the thrill of diving with sharks in South Africa Children under 17years of age are offered their own choice of lsquofirstrsquo experiences such asdriving a car or being a TV presenter

In response to this desire to lsquoconsumersquo experiences many retailers havemoved from simply offering ranges of products to also offering ranges ofexperiences In the pub market for example consumers can enjoy an Irishpub experience one evening followed by an Australian bar experience thenext and an American bar experience resembling the television sit-comCheers after that Except that these experiences are not lsquorealrsquo in the sense ofbeing non-contrived Instead they are formulaic and themed reality isdeliberately blurred with hyper-reality

US consultants Joseph Pine and James Gilmore (1998 see also Pine andGilmore 1999) describe this lsquoexperience economyrsquo as one where lsquoInstead ofrelying on our own wherewithal to experience the new and wondrous ndash ashas been done for ages ndash we will increasingly pay companies to stageexperiences for us just as we now pay companies for services we oncedelivered ourselves goods we once made ourselves and commodities weonce extracted ourselvesrsquo Clearly consumer offerings and marketingmessages addressed to New Consumers must take this trend on board

New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding

The command-and-control philosophy traditionally adopted by marketersto manage the consumption process is inappropriate today As everymarketer who engages consumers in research will know consumers arebecoming more marketing literate and less easy to please They candeconstruct marketing activities with almost as much insight as most

A New Kind of Consumer 31

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 31

marketers For example the average consumer can quickly sort the daily postinto three piles personal mail business mail and unsolicited or lsquojunkrsquo mailThey are capable of identifying each without even opening the envelope

Consumers are no longer passive absorbers of marketing messages Inthe words of author Alan Mitchell (2001) lsquoThe observed have startedplaying games with the observerrsquo At one extreme these lsquogamesrsquo take theform of protests and demonstrations against globalization such as thedisruption of the World Trade negotiations in Seattle in 1999 and the G8summit in Genoa in 2001 Naomi Kleinrsquos book No Logo Taking Aim at theBrand Bullies (2000) is another example It is a highly acclaimedassessment of multinational brand-name corporations labour abuses andanti-corporate resistance which quickly became the bible of the anti-globalization movement after its publication in the USA

At the other extreme consumers make their views known in less violentways For example those who are unhappy with their purchases and intentupon standing up for their rights can turn to consumer watchdogs andother advocacy groups which operate through traditional as well aselectronic media In fact consumer redress has become a source oflsquoinfotainmentrsquo ndash part information and part entertainment Consumers alsohave the wherewithal to take direct action such as setting up lsquovigilantersquowebsites Marketers should monitor these sites carefully as they canprovide a rich seam of consumer feedback Equally their impact onconsumer and corporate perception should be managed carefully In 1999Dunkinrsquo Donuts the fast food retailer bought out the lsquogripe sitersquo set uptwo years earlier by a customer who had been upset at the absence of anyskimmed milk for his coffee

Such consumer activity reflects a knowledge on the part of consumersabout how marketing works and a new-found confidence in expressingdissatisfaction It is imperative therefore that the New Consumer beequally involved in the consumption management process and that apartnership of open dialogue and mutual respect be developed between thetrading parties

New Consumers Are IT Enabled

Underpinning the way New Consumers live their lives and make and usetheir purchases are of course developments in information technology

32 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 32

(IT) This fundamental feature of the New Consumer raises issues formarketers about how to connect with consumers who live in atechnologically interactive and integrated world The exponential growthin the use of mobile phones (devices first developed by Bell Laboratories inthe 1940s) has presented particular challenges Consumers worldwide haveneeded little persuading of the benefits of the mobile phone which unlikelandline systems links people rather than locations In the UK 28 millionpeople owned mobile handsets in 2001 and this figure is predicted to rise to405 million by 2005 according to research firm Gartner Thefundamental appeal of the mobile phone is that it extends a basic humanquality ndash the ability to communicate Teenagers in particular havebecome the main conduits through which mobile phones have found theirway into wider society and they were also the first group to realize thepotential of text messaging The Japanese teenage generation has even beendubbed oya yubi sedai meaning the thumb tribe on account of thedexterity with which they text message

Throughout this growth in mobile phone ownership consumers haveshown themselves to be one step ahead of marketers who have yet to reallydemonstrate that they understand the market drivers and how this mobilechannel can be most effectively integrated into the communications mixEquipped with mobile phones and other handheld mobile devicesconsumers are no longer static and fixed in time and space relative tobrands They have a choice of channels through which to connect with abrand and will exercise individual preference in using them For exampleconsumers may prefer to purchase some categories of goods online such asCDs videos books and software but use the Internet to browse for otherproducts and services In the US it is estimated that only 1 of new cars arepurchased online while half of the nationrsquos car buyers use the Internetsolely to research and compare automotive product options

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

In todayrsquos consumption-led economy using the 4Ps (or even the 7Ps of aRelationship Marketing approach) as the basis for marketing strategymisses a fundamental point consumption is enacted by consumers andtherefore they ndash and not products ndash should be the starting point ofmarketing strategy origination Robert Lauterborn (1991) described the

Implications for Consumer Marketing 33

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 33

need to focus instead on the 4Cs consumer needs and wants costs to the consumer (time money effort etc) convenience factors andcommunication (how the consumer wishes to be communicated with bythe supplying organization) With the arrival of the New Consumer thecommand-and-control approach to consumption management so typicalof the production-driven era is no longer applicable

Marketers need to accept that the marketplace is no longer stable andpredictable but is instead dynamic and complex and as a consequencetheir need for certainty must become replaced by a tolerance of ambiguityThis is driven for the most part by the heterogeneity of the NewConsumer Consumers today no longer resemble the conventionalperceptions formed in the era of mass marketing and traditionalapproaches to consumer research and segmentation do not adequatelycapture their essence New Consumers have minds of their own and are notreluctant to make their views known New Consumers are empowered tomake their purchases through an ever-expanding choice of media andchannels Moreover they change suppliers easily and often without anysense of disloyalty They even assemble in groups to influence the offer andget the best price or contract terms The New Consumer demands adifferent kind of customer relationship one that warrants an entirelydifferent approach to strategic consumer marketing

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Consumption today is about the satisfaction of consumer wants anddesires rather than the fulfilment of consumer needs

bull The process of consumption is widely recognized as a managementissue rather than simply a market phenomenon

bull The starting point for managing the consumption process should be theconsumer not the product and marketing strategy needs to reflect this

bull New Consumers are exercised by time lead complex lives seekexperiences are marketing literate and highly demanding and are ITenabled This creates a different set of expectations to be met in the newmarketplace

bull The New Consumer represents unprecedented challenges formarketers

34 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 34

bull Rethinking the consumer means rethinking marketing

bull The traditional command-and-control approach to consumptionmanagement must be replaced by more collaborative methods thatinvolve and value the consumer

Summary Points 35

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 35

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 36

The challenge for brand owners and retailers is lsquoinnovate or diersquo

While many consumer brand owners recognize the symptoms ofrevolutionary change within the marketing environment few have beenable to interpret and respond to them meaningfully because of seeminglymore pressing business demands Among these immediate issues is theneed to address concerns about the manufacturerndashretailer relationshipConsolidation within the retail sector is continuing to increase thedownward pressure on price making it difficult for manufacturers tomanoeuvre in terms of market position Added to this the impact ofglobalization has placed the future of manufacturing in question Overrecent years the focus of producers and retailers has been supply chainmanagement However for many organizations simply improvingefficiencies is no longer enough to achieve sustainability Todayrsquos keybusiness imperative is to balance cost reduction and sales growth

Retailers are facing major challenges Retail spending as a proportion ofgross domestic product (GDP) has fallen significantly over the past coupleof decades This disturbing trend and the emergence of the New Consumerare forcing retailers to abandon their lsquoone size fits allrsquo approach and to focusinstead on managing consumer heterogeneity through marketingstrategies resulting in narrower and deeper retail concepts

KEY ISSUES FOR BRAND OWNERS

Research into the key business issues concerning fmcg brand owners byconsultants Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young1 in 2001 underlined the overridingchallenge of dealing with change in the competitive environment Four

Concerns of Brand Owners 3and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 37

main concerns were identified the force of globalization debate about thefuture of manufacturing the growth in retailer power and the need tomanage the balance between cutting costs and growing sales

The Force of Globalization

Organizational profitability and growth are the key drivers of a marketingstrategy that has at its core the standardization of business structuresproducts and processes along global (or at least regional) lines For manyglobal brand manufacturers a policy of standardization means adoptingthe philosophy that investments in product development and promotionsprovide greater returns if they are not limited to a single national marketThe internationalization or globalization of business activity can lead tothe de-duplication of roles and factories across several countries serving tomake the organization leaner For consumers the first visible sign of such astrategy in operation is often the subtle name change of a well-knownproduct In the UK for example Jif became Cif (see Figure 31) Oil ofUlay became Oil of Olay and Marathon became Snickers

Production-driven supply-chain thinking usually dominates aglobalization strategy as producers seek to rationalize their number ofstock-keeping units (SKUs) so as to avoid adding complexity to the supplychain Several fmcg companies worldwide are involved in programmes thatwill severely reduce the number of SKUs they have to support Unileverfor example is currently amputating its long tail of under-performingbrands a process that will leave it with 400 strong-growth lsquopower brandsrsquoas compared to the heavily diluted pool of 1600 it started with

The main problem with a strategy of standardization is that it seldomacknowledges the consumption-led economy Consumers themselves arenot standard they differ from one market to another Fmcg giants riskalienation by offering a lsquoone size fits allrsquo product range Coca-Colarecognized this when it abandoned the mantra lsquothink global act localrsquo infavour of lsquothink local act localrsquo The company wisely decided thatmanufacturing operations should be embedded in the local culture

Global brand owners also have to deal with the fact that in some nationalmarkets brands can remain strong and profitable even though they maynever become international players This can create conflict between localand global management over whether or not the brand in question should

38 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 38

be retained within the global portfolio Success in managing a globalportfolio is therefore marked by finding the right balance betweenstandardization and customization

The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing

In order to deal with the increasingly competitive environment andrespond effectively to shareholder demands fmcg companies have beenforced to take a long hard look at their businesses Many are questioningthe value brought to their company and brands by retaining ownership ofthe actual manufacturing process and are evaluating outsourcing as aserious proposition That this debate is taking place at all signifies a radicalchange in thinking for fmcg manufacturers who have long regarded themanufacturing process as something of a sacred cow

Nike Ericsson and Sara Lee are among those brand owners providingindications of a possible way forward Nike for example famously sees

Key Issues for Brand Owners 39

Figure 31 Jif changed to Cif as a result of globalization

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 39

itself as a provider of lifestyles conveyed through sportswear innovationdesign and styling It has never regarded production as a core competenceThe manufacturing strategy implied by Nikersquos approach is one focused on coordinating access to external resources and ensuring effectivecollaboration between internal functions and contract manufacturersparticularly in the areas of new product development The management ofthese crucial relationships is therefore key

In taking the decision to follow a manufacturing strategy of lsquoinnovateand coordinatersquo rather than lsquoown and operatersquo the brand owner is makingproduct innovation and development a core competence and is focusing onthe areas that drive growth and shareholder value Use of such a strategyamong fmcg manufacturers also demonstrates that they no longer seethemselves as product companies and are repositioning themselves asservice companies with a product offering This move resonates with theeconomic trend away from a pure manufacturing base to an over-whelmingly services oriented economy Those brand owners treading boldlyinto this new realm are effectively launching themselves into a new way ofthinking to ensure their survival

The Growth in Retailer Power

Brand owners are increasingly feeling the threat posed by industryconsolidation as the balance of power is tipped in favour of savvy retailersIt is becoming commonplace for retailers to use their intermediate positionto negotiate prices trade terms shorter delivery times and tailoredpromotions securing a winndashwin situation for themselves and theircustomers They are also managing to persuade manufacturers to enter intovendor-managed inventory agreements where the supplier activelymanages the customerrsquos inventory The fear factor is intensifying in the UKamid speculation about whether AsdaWal-Mart are planning furtheracquisitions that would bring them head-to-head with Tesco Britainrsquosbiggest supermarket chain Wal-Mart is the worldrsquos biggest retailer withannual sales of more than pound140 billion It possesses massive purchasingpower and can buy goods very cheaply from Asia and developing nations

Further stress in the manufacturerndashretailer relationship stems from thepressure to standardize pricing and trade terms (following the introductionof the Euro) the competitive threat of high-quality own-label products

40 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 40

and the shrinking shelf space available for brands When retailerndashsuppliernegotiations come down to pure muscle power the retailers have the edgesimply because the fmcg sector is more fragmented Manufacturers havetried to improve their position by maximizing the power of their lsquomuststockrsquo brands but very few of these represent brands that retailers wouldgenuinely fear losing

In some cases a more collaborative relationship is developing where themanufacturer recognizes that the retailer incurs an opportunity cost (of notachieving maximum potential sales) and works with the retailer to addressthis by supplying not just products but also value-added services thatsupport the products The key to such cooperation is the mutual sharing ofinformation Private web-based exchanges which require the integrationof both internal systems are often used to share data and ideas In this wayNestleacute improved its on-shelf availability in Sainsburyrsquos stores to 97 whileits overstocking fell by 25

The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth

Brand owners especially food manufacturers are under increasing pressurefrom the large retail multiples to reduce their trade prices and increasetheir service levels In response manufacturers are trying to eliminatewastage and excess costs from all corners of their cost base At the sametime they are trying to find additional sales volumes to meet analystsrsquo salesforecasts and shareholdersrsquo expected return on investment So how well arethey managing the balance between cutting costs and growing sales

Unileverrsquos strategy is typical The company plans to eliminate 100 of its380 manufacturing sites as part of its well-publicized lsquoPath to Growthrsquoinitiative It is targeting top-line growth of 5ndash6 by 2004 through itsfocus on cost reduction and brand rationalization However cost reductionprogrammes come at a price euro6 billion of restructuring costs in Unileverrsquoscase Unilever chairman Niall Fitzgerald is confident the targeted savingsof euro15 billion together with purchasing savings of the same magnitudewill finance the companyrsquos ambitious growth plans

The growth strategies of major fmcg companies all share an emphasis oncost reduction and service improvement Achieving competitive advantageis becoming harder as both quality and cost-efficient production are nolonger distinguishing factors in the marketplace For decades now most

Key Issues for Brand Owners 41

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 41

manufacturers have been addressing the issue of resource wastage and fewwould stand out as inefficient The proportion of savings that they cangenerate for reinvestment in growth therefore depends on the effectivenesswith which they implement their respective cost reduction programmesTaking cost out of a business has historically been a more traumatic ndash butalso a more predictable ndash fiscal strategy than trying to grow revenues Andwhile corporate acquisition can offer significant scope for investmentcapital most would agree that innovation and organic growth representmore prudent options

The Search for Innovation

All of these issues combined with low inflation and price transparencythroughout Europe mean there is no end in sight to the price debate formanufacturers Low-cost production and distribution become theminimum requirements for staying in the game Achieving a step changein performance requires a radical solution and it is focused innovation thatoffers the most promising source of organic growth There should beinnovation in the relationship between manufacturer and retailer and inthe creation of the next wave of products and services The solution lies inadaptability that is the ability to concentrate on short product cycles andproduct innovation based on profound insight into the value consumers areseeking For consumer marketers this means having a value-centricorientation in the business and a way of managing that enables innovation

THE RETAILERSrsquo RESPONSE2

While many brand owners see retailers as the cause of their key businessconcerns retailers themselves face daunting challenges First and foremostamong these is a long-term pattern of declining spend In 1980 the retailsector represented 466 of GDP Today that figure has roughly halvedThis is because most consumers have everything they need and retailexpenditure is essentially concentrated on lsquonon-essentialsrsquo in satisfyingtheir wants and desires As a result retailers compete with an ever-expanding range of competitors encompassing such areas of expenditure asholidays eating out and personal luxuries

42 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 42

A closer look at this trend shows variations across different types ofbusiness In food retail this trend is typical of developed economies asthere is a limit to how much people can eat and eating out of home hasbecome increasingly popular This is why the grocery retailers are so keento develop their non-food businesses In clothing retail there has been aloss of share since the late 1990s probably driven more by a lack ofexcitement in the product offers than anything else In contrast the homeimprovement retail business has been a success story sales in do-it-yourself(DIY) and electrical products and furniture and soft furnishings haveshown significant growth

Retailers are also facing challenges in respect to business location In theUK there has been an escalation in out-of-town shopping forcing manytraditional high-street retailers out of business Non-central sites carrylower rents and opportunities for larger stores making for a more attractiveproposition At the same time the cost of siting businesses in towns andcities is rising for two important reasons the introduction of inflexibleupwards only rental arrangements and the rapid expansion of fast-foodoutlets coffee shops and mobile phone retailers

However this current trend is likely to be reversed with the propertyindustryrsquos proposed introduction of a code of practice that will enableretailers to negotiate more favourable rental agreements and the naturaleffects of market saturation Furthermore out-of-town rents are beingdriven upwards by buoyant demand for DIY and electrical goods as well asnew interest from clothing retailers

In store price is still a significant issue for retailers Continuation in theuse of lsquoevery day low pricingrsquo (EDLP) and promotions to leverage consumerinterest and revenueprofit is being questioned as consumer expectationsheighten and additional demands are placed on finite resources So caughtunder mounting pressure from intensifying competition and lsquomarginsqueezersquo what should the retailerrsquos strategy for survival be Several optionsexist and these may be used in isolation or combination

Trading across Multiple Locations

In the UK the rule of thumb for selecting the right sales location used to bethat if you could see McDonaldrsquos out of one eye and Marks amp Spencer out ofthe other somewhere in the middle was probably just right It is no longer

The Retailersrsquo Response 43

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 43

that simple as location and store format have become linked to segmentationstrategy The major multiples for example are increasingly tapping thepotential of smaller convenience and food-to-go stores in neighbourhoodand suburban locations In 2002 Tesco acquired the convenience storechains One Stop and Nite-and-Day with the intention of rebranding themto increase the number of Tesco Express outlets from 100 to more than 500

Trading across Multiple Formats

Major retailers across a range of industries no longer confine themselves tosingle-store formats but have developed a number of approaches tomaximize trading opportunities Larger store formats are becoming morecommon for retailing groceries clothing DIY and electrical goodsAmong smaller format stores retail growth is expected to come from newbuilds (mainly grocery) concession units (electricals and furniture) andstore lsquoimplantsrsquo such as the Health amp Beauty which Boots is trialling as anlsquoimplantrsquo in Sainsburyrsquos supermarkets

Use of Multiple Channels

With the rapid take-up of new technologies retailers are utilizing an ever-expanding mix of channels For example Next is one of a number ofcompanies to offer its goods across a range of channels online mail andtelephone ordering services are available to its customers Overall thenature of the online offer will probably continue to differ across the range ofproduct categories For example it is transactional in nature in clothinggrocery and electricals and more focused on promotion and the provisionof information to consumers in the areas of DIY furniture and health andbeauty Despite the hype surrounding e-commerce experts predict that by2005 little more than 5 of retail sales will be online The majority ofthese purchases will be made by consumers in the 26ndash45-year-old agebracket and the over 50s or lsquosilver surfersrsquo

Editing Choice in Store

The attention of retail managers is increasingly focusing on how consumersfind their way around product ranges within stores as well as how they

44 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 44

navigate store aisles New Consumers are looking for lsquoedited choicersquo thatis visible guidelines to help them save time and effort Smart retailers whounderstand this particular consumer want are targeting specific groupingsof products to appeal to specific segments of New Consumers For examplea range of specialist additive-free products will be grouped together withina supermarket rather than following the traditional practice of locatingadditive-free biscuits with other biscuits and additive-free bread withother breads

Enhancing Retail Branding

Retailers are developing their brands by creating new retail brandidentities targeted at particular market segments A retail brand such asThe Link a new Dixons Group brand works best in heterogeneousmarkets where economies of scale are of limited significance In contrastretail brand extensions are more commonly used where the core retailbrand has built up a strong level of consumer equity such as the strategyBoots is pursuing with its Boots Opticians brand

Developing Multinational Operations

Taking retail concepts overseas is a seductive proposition but few retailershave made a success of it Failed attempts to recreate business success inother countries usually result from a lack of understanding andappreciation of the way that markets operate There may be crucialdifferences in the way property is owned and managed or how employersand employees interact Sometimes it is a simple misreading of localconsumer needs However some retailers do manage to succeed inestablishing multinational operations and certain markets have becomethe focus of highly competitive activity Tesco and Wal-Mart for instanceare both aggressively expanding in central Europe and the Asia Pacificregion

Pursuing Customer Loyalty

Customer loyalty represents the Holy Grail for retailers who now have thepotential to use consumer data to build powerful knowledge-based

The Retailersrsquo Response 45

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 45

consumer relationships However as market analyst Verdict concludesconsumer loyalty is eroding across most sectors Consumer churn isgrowing most strongly in the areas of clothing housewares and footwearfollowed by DIY and food Figure 32 illustrates this decline in loyalty (thechange in the average number of people saying they were loyal to oneretailer) In order to arrest this trend retailers have introduced a variety ofloyalty schemes and programmes In the UK current benchmarks havebeen set by Tesco and Boots whose Clubcard and Advantage Cardrespectively are carried by a majority of consumers

The launch of Nectar a lsquonext-generationrsquo loyalty scheme backed bySainsburyrsquos BP Debenhams and Barclaycard introduced in 2002invigorated the battle for consumer loyalty (see Table 31) Nectarrsquos rewardsoffer focuses on frequently consumed lsquolow ticketrsquo items Loyalty points maybe redeemed by founding partners Sainsburyrsquos and Argos or by alliancepartners McDonaldrsquos Blockbuster Legoland and Odeon Cinemas

Critics of these loyalty schemes argue that what is being created is alsquoloyalty currencyrsquo rather than any genuine sense of affiliation with andsupport for a particular retailer They claim that successful loyalty schemesonly work because retailers are able to take consumer information and turnit into actions which in turn provide the consumer with recognizablebenefits These benefits strengthen the consumerrsquos bond with the company

46 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

6

4

2

0

ndash2

ndash4

ndash6

ndash8

ndash10

Change ()

Personal Music Electricals Food DIY Footwear House- Clothingcare video grocery ware

64 34

ndash41 ndash48 ndash83 ndash93 ndash99

01

Figure 32 The decline in loyalty 1999ndash2002 Adapted from Verdict 2002

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 46

The Retailersrsquo Response 47

Tab

le 3

1T

he b

attle

of t

he lo

yalty

car

ds (a

t Nec

tarrsquos

laun

ch)

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 47

[Text not available in this electronic edition]

because the consumer can see that the company cares about them enough toreward their business However a scheme that simply rewards theconsumer but fails to capture in a meaningful way the vital flow ofinformation from consumer transactions is a sales promotion schemehowever large it might be

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

The mass markets of the production-driven economy have given way to thediverse demanding markets of the consumption-led economy In responsebrand owners and retailers are replacing their lsquoone size fits allrsquo consumermarketing strategies with ones that are more customized and personalizedThe era of maximizing scale is over and the future of retailing looks to beabout creating retail concepts that appeal to smaller clusters of consumersWhile certain lsquocategory killersrsquo (giant out-of-town superstore brands thatfocus on retailing a single category of products such as BampQ in DIY) willsurvive as they currently stand most retailers are taking radical actionThey are creating a lsquonarrower and deeperrsquo type of offer in the hope ofgaining a higher penetration of consumer spend Micro-retailing whereretailers make a limited range of products available in a small store to ahighly targeted audience can only be successful if it is based on meaningfulinsights into the value being sought by the New Consumer Of course thispresupposes that a value-centric orientation exists within the business

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Both brand owners and retailers need to adopt a value-centricorientation and an approach to marketing that enables adaptabilitycreativity and innovation

bull The impact of globalization and questions surrounding manufactur-ing cost-effectiveness and competition are causing brand owners torationalize their portfolios

bull There is no end in sight to the trade price issue as retailers consolidateand continue to exert downward pressure on prices

bull To achieve improvements in brand performance brand owners mustdeliver consumer-focused innovation

48 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 48

bull Faced with a declining share of GDP and lower levels of consumerloyalty retailers are increasingly adopting multi-location multi-format multi-channel and multinational strategies

bull Micro-retailing is creating narrower and deeper retail offerings

Summary Points 49

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 49

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 50

New Consumer Marketing champions a new and viable way of marketing

New Consumer Marketing (NCM) does not just advocate a new focus formarketing it champions a new way of doing marketing It breaks awayfrom the mechanistic models of the production-driven era and providesfresh thinking on managing new patterns of consumer growth It focuseson the demand side of business taking the consumer as its starting pointnot its final destination As a concept NCM combines the strengths of anorganizationrsquos people and processes and enables marketers to break out ofthe binary thinking that has seen businesses swing between a singularemphasis on process or on people

NCM is at an early stage of development Its evolution as a specificmanagement discipline is being influenced by an eclectic body ofindividuals who recognize that new marketing approaches and attitudesare needed Most established marketing thinking has grown out of themechanistic age of marketing where the certainties of mass marketsprovided a sense of security for brand owners and retailers The presentmarketing environment is no longer as static and certain as it used to beand there is a growing need to find more appropriate marketing tools andtechniques to connect better with consumers

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHAT IS IT

New Consumer Marketing is not simply another way of managing themarketing mix It is an emerging business discipline that addresses a rangeof issues relevant to competing successfully in a particular market Its keyobjective is to establish sustainable competitive advantage through

New Consumer Marketing 4

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 51

superior processes of value definition value creation and value delivery Atthe heart of each of these processes is a core capability ndash insight innovationand agility These capabilities enable the organization to develop consumerresponsiveness that is to deliver the value required by its consumersegments cost-effectively

NCM helps marketers make sense of the complexity and apparent chaosthat defines todayrsquos consumer markets In this post-quake economymanagers find themselves searching for frameworks and tools that willenable them to master very different market conditions NCM providesfresh thinking on where and how to focus marketing attention andresources in this consumption-led economy It is a response by leading-edge marketers to the outstanding challenges posed by the NewConsumer whose arrival is marked by heightened competitiontechnological developments that have created an interactive marketplaceand increasingly irrelevant consumption management practice that isstruggling to succeed through Relationship Marketing (RM) andCustomer Relationship Management (CRM)

A Response to the New Consumer

Consumers today are faced with overwhelming choice For the most parttheir needs are taken care of and their discretionary expenditure is focusedon satisfying their wants and desires As discussed in Chapter 2 NewConsumersrsquo expectations of products services and brands extend beyondlsquofeaturesrsquo and lsquobenefitsrsquo to lsquoexperiencesrsquo Even with this insight brandowners and retailers face an uphill struggle in connecting with consumersTheir brand messages compete for the attention of an increasinglysophisticated audience who are bombarded with information from rivalsources As author Seth Godin (1999) has noted a wealth of data becomes apoverty of attention

Furthermore it is harder to reach consumers who live highlyfragmented lives and display multiple personalities and who changesuppliers at the click of button Such sophisticated and demandingconsumers are not confined to a static marketplace but roam freely withinan interactive one New routes to market emerge all the time making iteasier for consumers to go to market They can research products and maketheir purchases offline or online or both as is their preference For the

52 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 52

consumer controlling the relationship in this interactive marketplaceextends to controlling the value proposition more directly and forcefullythan ever before For instance the web can easily support build-to-ordermanufacturing where consumers specify the colour size or configurationof a product they want

A Response to the Interactive Marketplace

Developments in IT bring with them both opportunities and threats Forexample as we move from a state of interaction into an age of integrationconsumers will increasingly have access to information on the move and theability to demand faster better and cheaper service At the same timemobile commerce makes it possible for marketers to communicate moreeffectively with consumers marketing messages can be targeted andconsistent and consumer feedback can be received and assimilated

For the consumer the costs of doing business are likely to fall as IT offersan opportunity to find the best value for money offers For examplewwwcarsurveyorg and wwwmoneysupermarketcom enable consumersto make comparisons at the click of a mouse while other websites bringindividual consumers together empowering them to use their collectivebargaining power The next step on from this is the development ofpersonal agents or sites that coordinate and control the access of suppliersto meet an individualrsquos specific requirements for example a domesticservices agent that manages suppliers of utilities groceries mortgage andbanking services etc

The Internet opens up business transparency and effectively transfers thepower in the relationship to consumers Economists suggest that underthese conditions firms will end up as price takers in a near perfect market(markets in which conditions of free and open competition more or lessexist) The so-called lsquorate tartrsquo ndash the informed confident consumer whoswitches between companies to gain the benefit of the best financial dealson offer ndash is already a reality for suppliers of personal financial services Inthe music industry consumers have taken control of both production andconsumption Music lovers have exploited the advantages of MP3 astandard file format that enables digital music files to be compressed sothey can be downloaded via the Internet in a reasonable time and withoutlosing too much audio quality Consumers can e-copy songs and entire

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it 53

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 53

audio CDs without having to pay for the music (an opportunity for musicalartists to flaunt their talent a threat to the music industry in lost income)

A significant effect of the pace of change in IT has been the emergenceof time as a competitive dimension Organizations find themselveshaving to operate in lsquoMartini modersquo or ndash in the words of the drinkrsquosadvert ndash lsquoany time any place any wherersquo The term lsquo247rsquo has entered theEnglish language superseding the earlier phrase lsquoopen all hoursrsquoCompeting on the basis of time demands a rapid response capabilityOrganizations need to develop business strategies that ensureadaptability The turbulent marketplace means there is no certainty inlong-term demand forecasts

A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management

While the evolution of the consumer and IT were beginning to challengethe marketing status quo marketing focus shifted from managingindividual transactions to building consumer relationships RelationshipMarketing concentrated on retaining customers rather than acquiringthem simply because there were fewer lsquonewrsquo customers left to acquirecompetition was tougher and the correlation between profitability andlong-term customer relationships had been made

As a framework RM provided much useful learning about the benefitsof focusing on retention and developing relationships over time withcustomers and other stakeholders It introduced the idea that all of theserelationships are interdependent and it has encouraged managers tovisualize the marketing space as a web or network of interconnectedrelationships based on mutual interests However RM falls short ofenabling organizations to deal effectively with the New Consumer in theconsumption-led economy that is characterized by a dynamic complexity

In many organizations developments in IT and computationaltechnology were applied to the business of developing a CRM strategy It isnow widely accepted that the vast majority of expenditure on CRMsystems has failed to meet expectations This is because CRM is a poorlydefined concept and there is little agreement on how to implement itRecent research suggests that CRM should not be attempted by anorganization unless there is congruence between its marketing strategy ITstrategy and corporate culture The challenge for CRM systems is

54 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 54

delivering value into consumer markets characterized by high levels ofheterogeneity

NCM implies that the challenges thrown up by changing cultures ofconsumption and an increasingly competitive environment can only bemet through a step change in strategic thinking which in essence meansmoving the consumer up the corporate agenda The boardrsquos focus mustswitch from supply-chain management to managing the demand systemand that starts with the 4Cs (consumer needs and wants cost convenienceand communication) rather than the 4Ps (price product place andpromotion) Marketers who manage the critical interface between the newmarketplace and the organization are best placed to bring about thischange in focus NCM therefore offers an opportunity to overcome a decadeor so of debate about the contribution marketing makes to the success of abusiness by redefining marketingrsquos role and status in a way that also sendsit to new heights and into a new realm

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHAT DOES IT MEAN

NCM means adopting a value-centric orientation in the organization anddrawing on learning from the new science of complexity In this waymarketing can be conceptualized as a business discipline that enables anorganic approach focused around key processes of value definition creationand delivery and one that combines an emphasis on people and process

Adopting Value-Centricity

As the practice of marketing has evolved in response to market conditionsthe underlying philosophy of a business in relation to the customers itserves has shifted (see Table 41) Transaction marketing was based on asales orientation with the aim of acquiring as many new customers as possible Profit was generated through increased sales volumeRelationship Marketing switched the emphasis to developing greaterprofitability through customer satisfaction underpinned by a retentionorientation The realities of the consumption-led economy demand thatthe focus of a business shift again to insight innovation and agility toachieve profitability based on having a value-centric orientation in thebusiness

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 55

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 55

Value-centricity generates revenue growth and improved profitabilitythrough a focus on the demand side of the business It means movingbeyond a relationship emphasis to one that has at its core the definitioncreation and delivery of value If an organization can meet the valueexpectations of the consumer then a long-term and profitable relationshipis more likely to follow The key is having value as the starting pointotherwise the relationship development strategy (and the CRM toolsperhaps used to deliver it) will not work as intended

In NCM value-centricity therefore replaces the focus on customerretention as the underlying orientation of a business Profitability isgenerated through delivering the value consumers want to buy into and theorganization wants to deliver that is value on the consumerrsquos terms asdemanded and maybe even dictated by them This value component marksthe process of exchange that takes place between the consumer and theorganization it is the lsquothingrsquo that the consumer gets in return for what theygive Organizations must learn how to operate in this consumer lsquospacersquo

In order to meet New Consumersrsquo expectations organizations need tofine-tune their understanding of the factors that create this value thosethat maintain it and equally those that destroy it Understanding thenature of the different value factors is also an opportunity to review thelsquophantomsrsquo that exist in every organization that is those features of a brandthat the organization believes add value but which are not rated at all byconsumers These are the lsquotaken for grantedrsquo elements that can beeliminated from the process resulting in cost savings for the organization

56 New Consumer Marketing

Table 41 The evolution of the marketing orientation

Focus Means End

Sales orientation Transactional marketing Profits through acquiring customers

Retention orientation Relationship Marketing Profits through customerand CRM satisfaction

Value orientation Demand system management Profits through insightinnovation agility

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 56

Applying Science

Organizational understanding of the make-up of value consumers areseeking has to be continuously updated This is because the newmarketplace is dynamically complex The Internet is perhaps the moststriking example of this Experts believe that the speed scope and scale ofmarket change will be driven by two laws relating to technology The firstwas described by Intel founder Gordon Moore who declared that every 18months chip density (and therefore computing power) would double whilecosts would remain unchanged The second law is attributed to RobertMetcalfe the founder of 3Com Corporation and inventor of EthernetWhat he describes as the experienced utility of belonging to an electronicnetwork increases exponentially with the number of users In other wordsthe more who join a network the more sense it makes for others to do thesame Those who choose not to join miss out in more ways than oneMeeting the challenges posed by cheaper computing power and anemphasis on networks are expected to characterize future developments inconsumer marketing strategy

To make a value-centric orientation a reality in this new marketplacerequires a shift in mindset about the way an organization is capable offunctioning It means moving from thinking linearly and mechanisticallyto thinking organically as this holds the key to consumer responsivenessLiving entities are more capable of adaptability the key requirement forsurvival in the new marketplace Marketing needs to adjust to these newrealities and become a systemic holistic and above all dynamicallycomplex activity

This view connects with the new science of complexity in whichinteraction is characterized as a near chaotic state Complexity science isabout searching for patterns among an abundance of seemingly randomphenomena in the universe and about establishing how order emergesfrom the apparent chaos To use an example down in the garden pond in spring a mass of froglets experiencing the growth of new legs and thedisappearance of a tail will emerge from the water in a cacophony ofsound and hop haphazardly on to dry land To an observer this mayappear a chaotic scene but the froglets are actually only demonstratingcomplex adaptive system behaviour based on principles of self-organization

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 57

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 57

Complexity science is aptly named and has spawned two major sub-strands of research chaos theory and complex adaptive systems (Gleick1987 Pascale 1990) It was advances in computational technology in the1960s that made the science possible led by the work of Edward Lorenz onchaos theory His contribution is based on research into weather systemsand left the idea that lsquosmall changes can produce large resultsrsquo in thepopular mind Edification in this field came later in James Gleickrsquos 1987best-seller Chaos Making a New Science although these ideas were nottransferred to the business arena The behaviour of complex adaptivesystems however offers more scope for parallels with the world ofcommerce These systems are found everywhere and comprise independentbut dynamically interacting agents that develop their optimumperformance by continually learning changing and adapting to theirenvironments However chaotic the process looks at any point it alwaysevolves to a state of creative order one famously described by NormanPackard as the lsquoedge of chaosrsquo

The appeal of complexity science to business theorists is that it providesa way of thinking about how the underlying processes and relationships ina company can be organized to enable the company to become as adaptiveand creative as possible in the face of continual change This convergence ofscience and business provides a rich seam to be mined And RichardPascale in his 1990 book Managing on the Edge is credited with leading theway here although other authors also advocate this emerging biologicalthesis Champions of this scientific analogy are not however suggestingthat commerce will start behaving as nature does but instead believe that itcan be helpful in finding a different way of looking at business issuesBusiness may be able to learn how to understand complexity and find a wayof responding dynamically to change

Breaking out of Binary Thinking

NCM emerges at the confluence of these two streams of thinking ndash the newscience of complexity and the evolving discipline of marketing NCM istherefore different from the prevailing marketing paradigm It is abusiness discipline that enables the organization to master the increasinglydynamic and complex process of going to market in a systemic and holisticway It provides managers with a means of identifying and mobilizing

58 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 58

people and processes to help them become as adaptive and creative aspossible against the background of a complex marketing environment

A systemic approach to managing the dynamic complexity of the newmarketplace enables organizations to break out of the binary thinking thathas seen businesses swing between a singular emphasis on process or onpeople Marketing thinking has been heavily influenced by themechanistic models that emerged in the era of the production-driveneconomy These reductionist approaches are epitomized by the 1936 silentmovie Modern Times starring Charlie Chaplin Behind the slapstick and thesentiment in this film the little tramp finds himself at odds with societyand fights to hold onto the remnants of his tattered dignity andindividuality It is a pointed spoof of the dehumanization of man in anindustrialized society It derides mechanization as we see Charlie on theassembly line tightening nuts at breakneck speed ndash the perfect cog in awheel of misfortune Eventually a nervous breakdown forces him to leavethe factory but he cannot stop tightening nuts even when there are none totighten

Frederick Taylor and his book The Principles of Scientific Management aremost closely associated with these approaches to management (Taylor1967) His ideas influenced generations of business theorists from HenryFord and his mass production of the Model T-Ford automobile through toadvocates of more recent marketing trends (including the qualitymovement benchmarking BPR McDonaldization and lean production)right up to the current flirtation with Six Sigma (an approach that focuseson minimizing production errors) At the heart of these developments is abelief that there is only one right way to complete a task and that a businessshould be driven by efficiency based on the standardization of processes

In between these emphases on process the management pendulum hasswung back to a stress on people to achieve business success In the 1950sDouglas McGregor identified two contrasting styles of managementcommand-and-control and self-management which he termed Theory Xand Theory Y (McGregor 1960) He advocated a more participativeapproach and influenced many theorists who followed him among themCharles Handy (1989 1994 1997) These humanist approaches tomanagement found their expression in the concept of empowermentVolvo was among the first to implement them replacing individual carworkers with teams of workers who were given decision-making roles in

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 59

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 59

the business This must have been enough of a change to make Henry Fordturn in his grave

NCM encourages the synergy of both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo combined bytaking a systemic and holistic approach to marketing This way of thinkingoffers an opportunity to identify the key underlying processes andrelationships that help an organization function organically enabling it toadapt create and respond appropriately to the changing marketingenvironment

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHO IS INVOLVED

New Consumer Marketing has come about as result of the thinking of aneclectic body of managers consultants and academics These individuals aredrawn from a number of different spheres These spheres include thedevelopment of networks and network thinking where Tim Berners-Leeinventor of the World Wide Web Bill Gates whose company Microsofttouches all our lives Nicholas Negroponte founder-director of MITrsquos MediaLab Don Tapscott management consultant and John Seely Brown chiefscientist at Xerox PARC have made significant contributions (Berners-Leeand Fischetti 1999 Gates and Hemingway 1999 Negroponte 1995Tapscott 1996 1998 Tapscott et al 2000 Brown and Duguid 2000)

Other ideas have come from insights emanating from work that drawsmanagement closer to the world of the living sciences Stanford professorRichard Pascale for example sets out to draw a new management modelbased on complex living systems in Surfing the Edge of Chaos (Pascale et al2000) while Arie de Geus former head of planning at Shell originated theconcept of the learning organization and presents a gardenerrsquos organic viewof managing business in The Living Company (Geus 1999)

Two further strands of thought have come from academia where firstwork on interpreting contemporary consumer behaviour has thrown lighton the New Consumer1 and second there is a growing body of research andwork that highlights value as the new key driver of strategy2

Finally there are managers and consultants who are simply doing it orpreaching it in some form or another Many of these individuals and thecompanies they work for are mentioned or become the focus of short casestudies in the following chapters What starts to distinguish thosepractising NCM is that they share a common vision of a virtual compass

60 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 60

giving direction as to how best to manage the process of marketing to NewConsumers Unlike a traditional compass where the needle always settles ondue North the New Consumer marketing compass uses lsquovaluersquo as a referencepoint This guides thinking in managing the processes of value definitioncreation and delivery ensuring that the organization produces the value thatconsumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

New Consumer Marketing has important implications for consumermarketing It introduces a new approach and a new way of doing it NCMgoes beyond the management of the marketing mix and concerns itselfwith major business issues relating to the organizationrsquos positioning in themarketplace and the consumers it seeks to serve determining how andwhere it competes These issues are of a company-wide and high-levelnature that will impact the business in the long run How well anorganization masters NCM has significant consequences for its futureprofitability Mastery of NCM is dependent on having a framework inplace to enable the organization to describe and position its marketingstrategy This is considered in Chapter 5

SUMMARY POINTS

bull New Consumer Marketing (NCM) is a response to the arrival of theNew Consumer the development of the interactive marketplace andineffective consumption management

bull NCM is a business discipline whose key objective is creatingsustainable competitive advantage through superior processes of valuedefinition value creation and value delivery It demands a change instrategic thinking that moves the consumer up the corporate agenda

bull NCM draws on thinking from the new science of complexityOrganizations need to develop adaptability to survive in the newdynamic marketplace The key is achieving consumer responsivenessthrough insight innovation and organizational agility

bull NCM means rethinking marketing as a living demand system that hasat its core a value-centric orientation

Implications for Consumer Marketing 61

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 61

bull Value is defined as value on the consumerrsquos terms it is the lsquothingrsquo thatconsumers get in return for what they give Brand owners and retailersmust learn how to operate in this customer lsquospacersquo

62 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 62

A New Consumer Marketing model conceptualizes New ConsumerMarketing practice

No management learning is complete without the development of a modelor two Models help in conveying complex ideas but are more than simplevisual aids Business models normally fall into one of two types operationalor conceptual Operational business models offer a way of linking inputsand outputs within the managerial context to improve performance basedon empirical evidence Conceptual business models on the other handprecede this stage of development and assist in making sense of a large bodyof scholarly knowledge and management insight The New ConsumerMarketing model presented in this book is of the conceptual type Itrepresents a collection of assertions that identify important variables andspecifies how they are interrelated and why As such it provides a usefultool for marketers to formulate the way forward

TO RECAP

Chapter 1 established that businesses today are operating in a time ofradical transition the certainties of the production-driven economy havebeen replaced by the uncertainties of the consumption-led economyConsumption and the servicing of consumption now form the centralmotor of contemporary society The tools and techniques of marketingdeveloped mainly in the production-driven era are no longer applicable inthe marketplace of the New Consumer Furthermore marketingrsquoscontribution to business is unclear

Relationship Marketing (RM) was a strategic response by producerswho found themselves operating in mature markets where greater

A Model of New Consumer 5Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 63

profitability was shown to come from developing long-term relationshipswith customers RM theory shifted marketing focus from customeracquisition to customer retention While RM usefully highlighted theimportance of building relationships with customers consumers and otherstakeholders it fell short of enabling organizations to deal effectively withthe New Consumer in a consumption-led economy The implementationof RM strategies through CRM systems has also failed to meetexpectations leaving many marketers and non-marketers unclear aboutwhether they should be focusing on people or process

Chapter 2 showed that consumption management today is about thesatisfaction of consumersrsquo wants and desires rather than solely thefulfilment of their needs A wide range of organizations is recognizing thatconsumers not products drive the process of consumption and thereforethe consumer should be the starting point for developing strategies tomanage consumption In other words consumer marketers should basetheir activities on the 4Cs rather than the 4Ps

The chapter also introduced New Consumersrsquo characteristic attitudes totime their fragmented lifestyles and their motivating desire forexperiences New Consumers challenge current marketing thinking andpractice because they are marketing literate highly demanding and IT enabled In effect the lsquomakendashsellrsquo model of the old production-driven economy has given way to the lsquotellndashmakersquo model of the newconsumption-led economy To succeed now and in the future marketingstrategy must actively address the heterogeneity of these empoweredconsumers

Chapter 3 looked at the key concerns of brand owners and retailers andfound that despite differences in the challenges they face both are seekingsimilar solutions that focus on innovation The impact of globalization iscausing brand owners to rationalize their product portfolios and toquestion the wisdom of keeping manufacturing in-house Should theylsquoown and operatersquo or lsquoinnovate and coordinatersquo Price is a key issue asretailers consolidate and continue to exert downward pressure on pricesRetailers for their part are suffering a decline in share of GDP matched bya decline in consumer loyalty They are increasingly choosing to tradeacross multiple locations formats channels and countries Their partialsolution to satisfying New Consumers ndash micro-retailing ndash is leading to thecreation of narrower and deeper retail offerings

64 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 64

In Chapter 4 New Consumer Marketing was positioned as a response tothe challenges thrown up by changes in consumer culture and the widercompetitive environment It has emerged at the point where the evolutionof consumer marketing meets with the new science of complexity NewConsumer Marketing places the consumer at the centre of the consumermarketing process and works to ensure that the consumerrsquos perception ofvalue is the yardstick of success But this emergent business disciplinediffers from traditional marketing approaches in that it is about managingconsumer demand in an organic manner rather than managing consumersupply in a mechanistic fashion

KEY CHALLENGES FACING NEW CONSUMER MARKETING

The key challenges facing consumer marketers have been thrown up by thetectonic change that has impacted the macro-marketing environment Inthe shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economyconventional approaches to consumer marketing are not succeeding inenabling organizations to master the dynamic complexity of the newmarketplace These key challenges can be summarized as the need to

bull address the concerns of brand owners and retailersbull embrace the New Consumerbull help organizations develop real consumer responsivenessbull lift marketing out of its crisis

Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

Brand owners are facing a period of significant change as a result ofchanging consumer demand This combined with consolidation amongtheir customer base has put them under increased pressure to satisfy thesechanging needs While they would like to be focusing resources oninnovation and new product development instead they have no choice butto ruthlessly attack their cost base in order to meet retailersrsquo price demandsLow-cost production and distribution become the minimum requirementsfor meeting these demands and staying in the game competitiveadvantage is found elsewhere

Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing 65

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 65

Retailers face their own challenges driven by the declining proportionof GDP now attributed to retail spending As the consumer base becomesmore autonomous and diverse the lsquoone size fits allrsquo approach to developingretail concepts is no longer appropriate Both brand owners and retailersare looking to enrich and expand the strategic options open to them Theyneed to adopt a value-centric orientation and an approach to marketingthat enables adaptability and creativity This will empower manufacturersto manoeuvre within the relationship and work towards deliveringdemand-led profit growth while for retailers it will enable them toprofitably master the point of confluence where societal and economicchanges and changes in consumer culture are being played out

Embracing the New Consumer

What is clear is that there is an urgent need for fresh thinking in consumermarketing to find different ways of managing the realities of the newmarketplace The management of consumption now the driving force inthe economy needs to be rethought in light of the New ConsumerSophisticated and demanding at large in an interactive rather than a staticmarketplace the New Consumer creates new challenges for organizationswhich find the conventional tools of strategy making and tactical solutionsdeveloped in the mechanistic age of marketing of little help

Success or failure will ultimately depend on their abilities to understandconsumer behaviour in a time of continuous economic social andtechnological change and at the same time to manage the organizationrsquosresponse However developing understanding is becoming more difficult asthe approach of the production-driven era which characterized consumersby using basic demographics no longer gets us close enough to reallycomprehending buying motivations The predictive power of thesetraditional categories has been eroded and segmentation analyses that breakbuyers into simple caricatures of five or six types for entire markets oftencreate more barriers to effectively connecting with them than they facilitate

Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness

Growth is a business imperative Organizations have learned that theylsquocannot shrink their way to greatnessrsquo Gary Hamel and CK Prahalad in

66 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 66

their book Competing for the Future (1994) came up with the term lsquocorporateanorexiarsquo to describe the state many organizations found themselves inafter the accountants had seized on concepts such as Business Process Re-engineering (BPR) and lean production (known as lsquoleannessrsquo1) andintroduced rationalization and downsizing programmes which left little toinvest in new growth An internally focused cost-cutting strategy deliversshort-term gains but does not address the issue of long-term growthBreaking out of the cost-cutting cycle requires a more far-reaching strategythat anticipates the broader issues that will influence future performance

Growth comes from the demand side of the business which means doingthe same thing better or doing something new To achieve thisorganizations need to connect better with consumers they need tounderstand how to deliver the value that consumers are seeking in acontinually adaptive and creative way For many supply-chain managementhas been the name of the game over recent years However in contrast tosupply-chain thinking New Consumer Marketing takes the consumer as thepoint of departure for the organization not the final destination In effect thelsquopipelinersquo is reversed and organizations become forced to see the deliverycreation and definition of their offering from the consumerrsquos point of viewNew Consumer Marketing goes beyond simply renaming this lsquodemandchain managementrsquo by advocating drawing on learning from the newsciences and conceptualizing marketing as a demand system

Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis

Criticism about the lack of clarity surrounding marketingrsquos contributionto a business has been a feature of reports and articles over recent years Thisis in part driven by the difficulties surrounding the measurement ofmarketing effectiveness but also by the fact that marketing is both equatedwith business unit strategy and located within the marketing mixWithout a clear emphasis as to its role marketing languishes in a lsquono manrsquoslandrsquo and is badly placed to provide strategic leadership

THE NEW CONSUMER MARKETING MODEL

The NCM model recognizes and tackles ndash on a conceptual level ndash theseoutstanding challenges It advocates that organizations embrace the New

The New Consumer Marketing Model 67

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 67

Consumer by adopting a value-centric orientation and refocus theirstructures on the three key processes of value definition creation anddelivery These make up a demand system The central component of avalue-centric strategy is value on the consumersrsquo terms as demanded ndash maybeeven dictated ndash by them This value component marks the process ofexchange that takes place between consumers and the organization it is thelsquothingrsquo that consumers get in return for what they give

A process is defined as an activity or group of activities that takes aninput adds value to it and provides an output to an internal or externalcustomer At the heart of each of these key processes is a core capability ndashinsight innovation and agility These are the capabilities that enable brandowners and retailers to become adaptable and able to offer real consumerresponsiveness

Adopting a process approach entails a different way of working to thatassociated with traditional vertical hierarchical structures of functionaldepartments These static structures act as a barrier to performance Infocusing on processes organizations take on a flatter horizontal structurethat enables them to be more responsive by speeding up decision-makingprocesses and encouraging cross-functional collaboration which helpsmaximize consumer value and operational cost-effectiveness With anemphasis on understanding consumers and their value preferences value-centric organizations draw key employees together in autonomousmultidisciplinary teams to focus resources around the main processesOften these teams are temporary enabling the organization to combineand recombine assets according to the nature of the opportunities thatarise These are firms that regard the organizational whole as greater thanthe sum of its parts However this does not mean that organizations cannotgrow big Tesco for example is one of a number of organizations that hassucceeded in building the virtues of smallness into a large organization

The NCM model adopts the principles of the new science to suggest anorganic approach to consumer marketing Where marketing is viewed as asystemic holistic and dynamically complex activity adaptability becomesan achievable goal In business systemic thinking offers a way ofidentifying the key underlying processes and relationships that help theorganization to adapt create and respond appropriately to the changingmarketing environment In this way organizations are able to break out ofthe binary thinking that has long constrained management theory and the

68 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 68

model encourages the synergy of both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo combined Inshort the static marketing function of the production-driven economybecomes a living demand system in the consumption-led economy

The NCM model lifts marketing out of its crisis in terms of presenting aconceptual guide for practitioners for generating and managing theexchange process under conditions of competition The NCM modelprovides a framework that enables an organization to describe and positionits marketing strategy In doing this it identifies the consumer segments itseeks to serve determining where and how it will compete Working at thelevel of competitive strategy substantiates NCM as a business discipline

Marketers are best placed to provide strategic leadership in themanagement of this critical interface between the organization and the newmarketplace They oversee the exchange process and the necessary alignmentof internal and external factors They are in the best position to understandand interpret emerging trends for the benefit of the organization

The New Consumer Marketing model is presented in Figure 51 and itshows quite clearly how consumer marketing can be conceptualized asconsisting of the three key processes underpinned by a value-centricorientation The model is organic in nature reflected in the use ofhoneycomb-shaped cells each of which has a nucleus

The honeycomb with its familiar six-sided shape provides a usefulmetaphor for explaining how marketing can be visualized as a livingdemand system The honey-bee is well known to us all This is a creaturethat is renowned for its productivity and the fact that it creates its ownvalue proposition in the form of honey Honey manufacture is a task sharedamong various types of bee and each contributes its own instinctiveexpertise The hive members work in harmony to ensure the survival of thecolony Of course this is just a metaphor and there are limits to how far itcan be taken but because it is dynamic iterative and flexible thehoneycomb offers an example of working where people and process arecombined in a continually productive system

The capabilities at the heart of each key process and the seven elementsthat make up the organizational DNA demonstrate the company-widehigh-level approach that is taken by the NCM model By offering a holisticapproach to managing the exchange process in a dynamic marketplace themodel aims to assist managers in developing and implementing successfulconsumer marketing strategies

The New Consumer Marketing Model 69

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 69

The first cell in the demand system is concerned with the process of valuedefinition that is the process of generating and identifying insight in orderto describe and demonstrate value Chapter 6 covers the traditional andnon-traditional ways of generating insight Segmentation then considershow insight is made actionable Finally the importance of re-evaluatingthe role and status of the insight generators within an organization isexplored

The next cell in the demand system is value creation Chapter 7 exploresthe process of creating value that results in a value proposition for a specificaudience Innovation forms the nucleus of this cell and the strategicsignificance of this is covered Other elements in the process include newproduct development branding positioning and pricing Branding isportrayed as the consumerrsquos experience of value and the implications ofthis are discussed through a number of cases

The third key process in a demand system is value delivery Chapter 8discusses how value is communicated and conveyed by an organization to a

70 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

13

13

13 $

Figure 51 The New Consumer Marketing model

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 70

specific audience Media and channels are explored alongside the roles ofservice technology integration and supply-chain management Thewatchword here is organizational agility

Finally Chapter 9 describes the seven elements of the organizationallsquoDNArsquo that makes a demand system viable This chapter describes how thecells of the living system are managed through an exploration of the natureand interrelationships of intuition culture and structure leadershipvision and values employees knowledge management planning andmeasurement These are the elements that instruct and inform the threecells of the living demand system about how to optimize performance andensure competitive survival

The New Consumer Marketing Model 71

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 71

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 72

The process of defining value from the consumerrsquos perspective

Defining value = generating and identifying insight in order to describeand demonstrate value specifically

Watchword = insight

In the production-driven era marketing was informed by a seller-centricorientation In todayrsquos consumption-led economy New Consumers aremore demanding and sophisticated and they inhabit an interactivemarketplace Marketing in this business environment requires a differentorientation New Consumer Marketing is founded on a value-centricphilosophy that focuses on defining creating and delivering the value thatconsumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver Themutuality of the benefits gained by both parties is recognized and asymbiotic relationship is established

Managing this relationship between organization and New Consumerrequires an alternative approach to the command-and-control practices ofthe production-driven era Mechanistic models are no longer appropriateand more organic models are being developed such as the New ConsumerMarketing model presented in this book

Value definition the first cell in the New Consumer Marketing modelis concerned with the process of defining the value consumers are seekingInsight forms the cellrsquos nucleus Insight is described as lsquothe power of seeinginto and understanding things imaginative penetration practicalknowledge and awarenessrsquo It enables the organization to begin the processof connecting with New Consumers in a way that will deliver sustainablecompetitive advantage

Value Definition 6

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 73

In generating knowledge about New Consumers many organizationsclaim that the traditional tools and techniques of market research do notseem to be working as well as they did in former times and marketers are looking to broaden the range they use The aim is to get underneath the skin of consumers in a way that provides insight into theirunarticulated needs and desires To achieve this organizations areincreasingly adopting a bricolage approach in which investigative andinterpretative market research methods drawn from different disciplinesare pieced together In best-practice organizations the insight generated isapplied to the consumer base through the process of segmentation in orderto identify the value that is required by the organizationrsquos most promisingprospects

THE ROLE OF INSIGHT IN VALUE DEFINITION

Although insight is derived from the obvious it is not the same as factInsight is the capacity to penetrate the human condition and see hiddentruths For example it is a fact that snowboarding is a sport but it is aninsight that snowboarders are the only sportsmen and women who feeltreated like outcasts on the slopes Where an insight is turned into acompelling marketing idea it can work to create a powerful bond betweenthe consumer and the brand Brands of clothing for snowboarders thatpromote the idea of belonging to a rebellious tribe have been highlysuccessful for example

Insight provides the means for defining value from the consumerrsquosperspective To interpret consumer insight in a way that is meaningfulorganizations need to understand what are the component factors thatconstitute value These factors will serve one of three purposes for theconsumer they will enhance value maintain value or destroy value Thisvalue concept is illustrated in Figure 61

Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value

Identifying these value-influencing factors and the way in which theyinterrelate is the fundamental aim of all insight-generation activitiesFactors that create or enhance value for the consumer are those that aremould-breaking or have never before been offered in the marketplace

74 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 74

They are the key discriminating factors that set the organization apart fromcompetitors in the eyes of consumers Occasionally these value-enhancersmay be lsquoadoptedrsquo by consumers and become lsquotalking pointsrsquo creating greatword-of-mouth marketing A good example of this is Krispy KremeDoughnuts

Krispy Kreme DoughnutsKrispy Kreme Doughnuts is one of the top five fastest-growing businesses inthe quick-service restaurant sector in North America with plans for expansioninto Europe Krispy Kreme aficionados swear by the companyrsquos hot OriginalGlazed doughnuts which are lsquomanufacturedrsquo before the customerrsquos eyes inthe Doughnut Theater (a visible conveyor belt-based operation) The KrispyKreme Doughnut experience receives popular acclaim (including thatcontributed by cartoon character Homer Simpson who is famous for hislsquoMmm donuts helliprsquo phrase) This strong word-of-mouth marketing has played asignificant role in building consumer awareness of the brand In Canada forinstance the impulse to purchase fresh hot Krispy Kreme doughnuts is sostrong that according to the Canadian marketing director people will driveon average 14 miles to reach a Krispy Kreme store

The Role of Insight in Value Definition 75

V

V

V

C

I

-

T

Figure 61 The value concept

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 75

Companies offering lsquovalue-enhancersrsquo will build market share quicklyrearranging the competitive forces in the marketplace as they do so Forexample the Woolwich Building Society has seen its business improve atthe expense of rivals as a direct consequence of introducing a new kind ofaccount ndash the Openplan Account Openplan creates value for customers byplacing customers in control of their money and enabling them to managetheir complex financial matters easily through using the one account Itallows customers to personalize the names of their various savings lsquopotsrsquoand to tell the Woolwich when to move funds into higher-interestaccounts For consumers Openplan was a welcome change from thetraditional way of banking where customers would be told how theirmoney was being handled and has now been adopted by the Barclays groupof the Woolwich Building Society

Factors that maintain value are the lsquohygienersquo factors or the core featuresand attributes that all competitors must offer to be considered players inthe marketplace These lsquovalue-maintainersrsquo work in combination with thelsquovalue-enhancersrsquo to affirm value with consumers They should be subject

76 Value Definition

Figure 62 Krispy Kreme Doughnuts are a talking point

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 76

to regular sense checking to ensure that they continue to perform thissupportive role It may be the case that one or more of these value-maintaining factors has the potential to be developed into a value-enhancing factor Alternatively some of these factors may have to bedropped from the offering if they show signs of actually reducing itsconsumer value

The third category of factors that make up the consumerrsquos concept ofvalue encompasses those that diminish and destroy value These are thelsquoturn-offsrsquo for consumers Once identified these lsquovalue-destroyersrsquo shouldbe eliminated from the offering but not before the company has anunderstanding of why they have a destructive influence Their significancecan be overlooked where there is not a dynamic approach to generatinginsight Laura Ashleyrsquos experience provides a useful example

Laura AshleyIn the early 1990s Laura Ashley the fashions and furnishings retail chainresearched the behaviour of its own shoppers and noted that if shoppersmade a purchase of curtains particularly made-to-measure curtains from thestore they had a higher propensity to go on to buy matching wallpaper andother home furnishing items as well A pound300 purchase could easily becomethe first of a series of transactions with a combined value of several thousandpounds The purchase of curtains was in effect a trigger to other salesHowever the study revealed that customers were increasingly put off frompurchasing curtains when expert staff were not available This occurred mostoften on Saturdays when the stores used part-time relatively inexperiencedstaff Clearly ordering made-to-measure curtains involves some fairlycomplicated calculations and there is a wide margin for error Customerswould only place an order with someone they believed was competentenough to check their own calculations and order the curtains correctly OnceLaura Ashley realized the impact of its staffing policy the company made thenecessary changes and this resulted in higher levels of customer satisfactionand greater sales of curtains By removing this particular value-destroyer thecompany was able to uphold its customersrsquo value perceptions of the brand

Source H Peck lsquoRelationship Marketing Lessons from Laura Ashleyrsquo casestudy Cranfield School of Management 1995

In some cases organizations have a misperception themselves about thefactors that create value spuriously believing that certain factors add valuewhen in fact they simply maintain or even destroy it These are thelsquophantom factorsrsquo in the value exchange and can often take on sacred status

The Role of Insight in Value Definition 77

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 77

within a business For example the Ford Motor Company believed for along time that it was necessary to include a spare wheel as part of a new caroffering However insight generated by its small car product strategyteam into the requirements of StreetKa buyers showed that a spare wheelwas not important in the purchase decision With this knowledge themisgivings of Ford engineers were overcome and the company went on tosuccessfully launch a model without a spare wheel Drivers are insteadsupplied with a canister of foam which will enable them to fix a puncturesufficiently well to drive to the nearest garage for repair or replacement

Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors

Having identified the components of value that factor in the consumerrsquosperception of value the organization then needs to understand exactlywhat meaning they have for consumers Consumers typically describe thesevalue factors in terms of tangible or intangible features The task formarketers is to delve deeper and question why consumers consider thesefeatures to be important The answers will lie in the benefits the featuresdeliver and the way in which some of these benefits in turn work at alsquohigher levelrsquo in satisfying consumersrsquo personal values Consumer researchinto how Nike trainers are purchased showed that while the inclusion ofthe air sole was a straightforward physical feature of the shoe manyconsumers considered it to be a value-enhancer Consumers felt that thecushioning effect of the sole would provide greater comfort and protectionon the sports ground and this in turn would enable them to play sportbetter The air sole thus satisfied personal values associated with a sense ofwell-being and keeping fit In this way product features benefits andpersonal values become interlinked in the consumerrsquos mind This is showngraphically in Figure 63

Mapping consumer perceptions of products in this way demonstrateswhy the various components of value are important It is a technique thatcan be used to understand how consumers perceive differences betweenproducts revealing to the organization the competitive set in which itoperates Mapping the component factors of value for consumers is basedon a well-established research approach known as meansndashend theory1 Thetheory suggests that consumers make the value exchange as a means ofachieving something else This lsquosomething elsersquo may be about product

78 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 78

benefits or it may be about the satisfaction of personal values Uncoveringthese linkages is key to creating positioning communicating anddelivering the value offer as explained in the next chapters

Insight then enables the organization to define value from theconsumerrsquos perspective It provides a means of identifying underlyingsources of buyer motivation Current thinking as to how this process ofgenerating insight should be undertaken is in a state of flux as traditionalmarket research is being augmented with a range of alternative practices

THE ROLE OF TRADITIONAL MARKET RESEARCH INVALUE DEFINITION

In seeking to get closer to New Consumers marketing managers todayhave an expanding box of tools and techniques at their disposal Thesegenerally fall into one of two categories traditional market research andnon-traditional approaches to market sensing The former comprisesestablished practices which are being updated by new thinking fromvarious disciplines The latter includes a range of approaches from old-fashioned reliance on front-line staff to the contemporary use of IT

As the staple method of insight generation market research aims toanswer fundamental questions about what makes consumers lsquotickrsquo so thatmanagers can refine existing marketing practice Market research emergedas a formalized business process in the latter part of the last centuryalthough the principles it encapsulates go back much further The primeobjective of the modern survey a standard tool of market research is to

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 79

Figure 63 Linking features benefits and personal values

Niketrainers

lsquoGoodhealthrsquo

lsquoEnhancedperformancersquo

lsquoSole with airpocketsrsquo

lsquoSupportfor footrsquo

Features Benefits Personalvalues

Deliver Satisfy

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 79

recapture the lsquodialoguersquo that took place between buyer and seller in the pre-industrial age where the local market or village shop dominated as theplace of buyerndashseller interactions

Formalized market research was first undertaken by manufacturers inthe fast moving consumer goods (fmcg) sector It enabled companies togain a structured and reliable view of the marketplace which they couldthen use to improve their competitiveness They studied markets byborrowing the statistical methods and principles developed by socialscientists to understand and quantify human behaviour They used these incombination with the sampling methods they already had in place toensure quality control on their production lines Some of the earliest bookson the subject of market research were in fact published by leading brandowners such as Cadbury and Shell These books were used as internaltraining manuals in the days before comprehensive reference texts wereavailable The tools and techniques developed then still form the staple ofmost market research plans today What is changing is the mix oftechniques used qualitative approaches are slowly gaining ground at theexpense of quantitative approaches

Using Quantitative Research

Generating insight means focusing largely on answering the lsquowhyrsquoquestion lsquowhy do people dothinkbuy what they dothinkbuyrsquo Data onlsquowho what where when and how manyrsquo on the other hand providesuseful information on context To generate this data organizations usuallyfall back on the use of quantitative surveys These routinely involve largenumbers of respondents who may be chosen on a quota basis to create astatistically representative selection of the larger population Respondentsare all asked the same questions in highly structured interviews to establishevidence of market preferences and trends Quantitative surveys can beconducted on an ad hoc or ongoing basis ndash the latter are often referred to aspanel surveys Ad hoc surveys can provide insight into a potential solutionto a specific business issue and may be repeated on lsquofreshrsquo groups ofrespondents at regular intervals For example Wallrsquos Ice Cream publishesan annual survey on the topic of childrenrsquos pocket money Panel surveys onthe other hand use the same set of respondents to provide regular (weeklyor monthly) feedback on grocery purchases for example Data is collected

80 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 80

in four main ways by post by telephone in face-to-face interviews andincreasingly via web-based surveys

While many marketing managers profess a preference for quantitativesurveys simply because they contain lsquohard numbersrsquo based on the science ofstatistics and sampling theory the pivotal issue is the robustness of thedata evidence David Smith and Jonathon Fletcher (2001) suggest there areseven questions to be answered before reassurance can be given

bull Was the design free of flawsbull Was the sample representativebull Did the questionnaire lsquoworkrsquobull Was the process free of interviewer biasbull Were there any data preparation errorsbull Were there any presentation andor reporting errorsbull Was the interpretation free of flaws

This traditional quantitative approach to research essentially deals withaverages it tells marketers what an average consumer wants But findingaverage consumers is difficult As is often quoted some consumers like icedtea others like hot tea but very few express a liking for lukewarm tea Thispractice of looking for lsquoaveragesrsquo is typical of an aggregate way of thinkingand as has been made clear so far in this book markets today aredisaggregated and characterized by high levels of heterogeneity The NewConsumer cannot be described as lsquoaveragersquo To generate meaningfulinsight into consumer needs and preferences researchers are turning to agreater use of qualitative approaches

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 81

Small numbers

Exploratorydiagnostic

Quota samples

More flexible

More costly per respondent

Large numbers

Confirmatorydefinitive

Representative samples

Less flexible

Less costly per respondent

Figure 64 Qualitative versus quantitative research

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 81

Using Qualitative Research

In seeking to answer the lsquowhyrsquo question researchers increasingly draw onan eclectic pot-pourri of qualitative techniques The roots of qualitativeresearch can be traced to the 1960s the height of the production-drivenera when marketers began to demand deeper insights into the purchasingbehaviour of consumers and motivational research an approach developedby Ernest Dichter gave birth to contemporary qualitative methods ofenquiry In effect the consumer was lsquoput on the couchrsquo and the researcherrsquosinterpretations of attitudes and behaviour were drawn from the fields ofpsychology and psychoanalysis Projective questioning (lsquoif this brand werean animal what kind of animal would it bersquo) and other techniques adaptedfrom these disciplines became the favoured tools for mainstreamqualitative researchers Over the next two decades researchers from otherdisciplines such as sociology and social anthropology added theircontributions introducing notions of humankind as social animals and asproducts of their culture

Today traditional qualitative research commonly features the use offocus groups and in-depth interviews These methods involve askingcomparatively small samples of respondents questions about what they doand think and listening to and interpreting the response The output ofqualitative research is exploratory or diagnostic in nature respondents arenot meant to be representative of the larger population but are intended toreflect the profile of known or desired consumers (Non-consumers are alsooften consulted for their independent input) The aim is to generateunderstanding of the things that bind groups of consumers together

Sadly the impressionistic and non-confirmatory nature of qualitativeresearch has received bad press over recent years to an extent where focusgroups have become demonized in some quarters of the national mediaSmall-sample statistical theory has never been robust enough to convincemany managers that the evidence produced by 36 or 48 people is asaccurate as the aggregated output of 2000 survey respondents There isoften confusion over the way in which the evidence should be used to shapethe strategy of an organization However the notion that it is acceptable towork with limited numbers of respondents is an accepted method in thesocial sciences Grounded Theory2 as this concept is known states thatresearchers should stop collecting fresh information when they get to a

82 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 82

point where it ceases to add anything to the conceptual understanding ofthe issue under investigation (usually after conducting a limited number ofinterviews)

These traditional approaches to quantitative and qualitative research arebased on an assumption that consumers can ndash and are willing to ndash articulatetheir thoughts beliefs feelings and behaviours Organizations wanting tomake breakthrough developments are rather more concerned withunderstanding latent unarticulated consumer wants and desires To meetthis demand on the part of organizations researchers have added to thetoolbox more lsquoin sitursquo investigative methods such as discourse semioticand ethnographic analyses These provide a deeper understanding of themeaning of value factors to consumers bringing organizations closer to thelsquoAharsquo moment when insight becomes obvious

Discourse Analysis

Discourse analysis is a market research technique that looks for patterns inpeoplersquos language such as the metaphors or figures of speech they use tocommunicate about the world around them It can also mean undertakinga review of individual words to gain a deep understanding of whatconsumers mean when they say something Discourse analysis demands adetailed examination of every utterance including those that aretraditionally discarded in the process of analysis This would include howrespondents use what linguists refer to as lsquodiscourse markersrsquo (non-semantic syntactically empty words such as lsquolikersquo lsquoumrsquo lsquoerrsquo lsquokind of rsquo lsquosortof rsquo lsquoyou knowrsquo in the English language) as they are often carriers of culturalmeaning Insight into how consumers use language can help marketersconnect more effectively with consumers as they can use consumersrsquo ownlanguage in creating and delivering value One of the most outstandingexamples of a business that was built on an insightful understanding ofconsumersrsquo language is the most successful pre-school televisionprogramme ever produced ndash Teletubbies

TeletubbiesTeletubbies was developed by Anne Wood and Andrew Davenport forRagdoll Productions (UK) Ltd Anne Woodrsquos worth today is estimated at pound150 million largely due to the success of the fictional made-for-televisioncharacters The success of the original idea can be traced to a combination ofWoodrsquos ideas and business acumen and Davenportrsquos expertise in speech

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 83

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 83

sciences and his understanding of the world of young children The brightlycoloured characters soon established themselves as firm favourites amongpre-school children and their parents with their empathetic use of the pre-schoolerrsquos language and their childlike wonder at the world around them

Semiotics Analysis

Another set of techniques for generating insight draws on the discipline ofsemiotics This is the science of decoding cultural signs which is used byresearchers to get into consumersrsquo subconscious and to predict whereconsumer trends are heading It is based on a belief that we are all shaped byour culture (and not the other way round) and that goods are charged withcultural meaning Consumers use this meaning as a form of expression tosay something about themselves to develop and sustain their lifestylesand to create and sustain social change The role of the researcher is todecode the symbols as a way of understanding culture and what consumersare saying about themselves This kind of insight provides managers with ameans of understanding the role of brands within a culture both theorganizationrsquos own brands and competitive offerings The well-establisheddrinks brand Guinness has successfully employed semiotics analysis

84 Value Definition

Figure 65 The Teletubbies online

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 84

GuinnessGuinness UDV tasked Malcolm Evans and the Added Value agency withdeveloping a user-friendly marketing tool that could be used around the worldto gain insight into the competitive environment (Evans 2001) Usingsemiotics analysis Evans and his team created a tool kit that guidesmarketers in various local markets through the same process This enablesthem to map an understanding of the meaning of beer to consumers in eachof their markets and then to analyse and interpret the advertisements in orderto understand the advertising proposition Having decoded the marketGuinness executives can then work on refining the positioning of their brandsin that market

Ethnographic Analysis

A third approach to generating insight into consumersrsquo latent wants anddesires that is arousing a lot of interest is brand ethnography This is basedon a technique developed in the social sciences in the late nineteenth andearly twentieth centuries where researchers went overseas to researchtraditional lsquotribesrsquo and cultures The underlying philosophy ofethnographic analysis is that the closer the researcher can get to consumersrsquohabitats the greater the chance he or she has of understanding consumersrsquorelationships with other people or with the things that surround them It isbased on a central belief that the researcherrsquos study of consumer behaviouris most accurate and revealing when consumers are immersed in theirnatural environment

This approach to generating insight means taking an analytical view ofconsumers over a long period of time Longitudinal studies as they areknown are not common in marketing because of the high costs involvedand because research results are generally required sooner than anethnographic study can deliver them However some companies such asUnilever consider the investment worthwhile

UnileverUnilever used this ethnographic analysis to understand the opportunitiesarising from the growth of sales of white goods in developing countries Theresults of its year-long study identified broad areas of opportunity forexample the types of clothes bought and worn how clothes are treated andcared for and consumer expectations of clothes care and product benefitsAll of this was set within a cultural context The study also identified astructured framework of issues that the company had not previously been

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 85

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 85

aware of to do with attitudes and behaviours relating to the process of caringfor clothes This new knowledge presented an opportunity to focussubsequent research more closely on these issues with the aim ofuncovering some latent wants and desires that were not being satisfied Thislater research opened up new commercial opportunities for Unilever

Source Lynn McKay New Futures Consumer Scientist lsquoCreatingcommercial value from ethnographic insightsrsquo presented at the Generatingand Leveraging Consumer Insight Conference IQPC London March 2002

As with more standard approaches to qualitative research these threeanalytical methods ndash discourse semiotic and ethnographic analysis ndash arenot designed to be representative of the wider population of consumersbut are intended instead to generate insight that could never be uncoveredthrough focus groups in-depth interviews and quantitative surveysCritics suggest the techniques are very dependent on the interpretationalskills of the individual researcher can often appear to be using asledgehammer to crack a nut and tend to produce more data than isusefully required However these research techniques can revealframeworks for further consumer analysis leading to meaningfulunderstanding of the value consumers are seeking within a wider culturalcontext

Need-States Analysis

As the consumption-led economy becomes more of a reality fororganizations debate about how best to generate insight intoconsumerndashbrand relationships moves on apace In 1994 qualitativeresearch expert Wendy Gordon revived the concept of need-states toexplain the fact that there are more differences between the same consumermaking a brand choice on two different occasions than between twodifferent consumers choosing the same brand on the same occasion Peoplechoose brands to fit a particular context For example consumers maychoose to buy a cheaper bottle of supermarket own-label wine from thesupermarket to drink with a partner at home yet they will choose a moreexpensive shipperrsquos labelled wine to take as a gift when dining at a friendrsquoshouse Their choice of product is influenced by a variety of factorsincluding the meaning of each occasion the environment in which the

86 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 86

wine will be consumed and the other people involved This leads to theidea that a brand can be positioned against a need-state and througheffective brand communications activity can become the brand mostassociated with that need-state

Need-states analysis has at its core an understanding of how consumersmake sense of the world Consumers create a model of the world in theirminds which psychologists refer to as a lsquomental modelrsquo It is theconsumerrsquos representation of how something is or how something happensA brand can be thought of as a type of mental model and this subject isdiscussed further in the next chapter However the notion of mentalmodels is relevant here as the task of the researcher is one of uncoveringconsumersrsquo mental models of the world Thinking about consumerndashbrandrelationships in this way draws on learning from cognitive science thebranch of psychology that deals with how the mind works from theindividualrsquos perspective

Today Wendy Gordon firmly believes that the future of cognitivescience lies in the newly merged disciplines of neuroscience and cognitivepsychology known as neuro-psychology (Gordon 2001) This branch oflearning brings together an understanding of the science of the brain itsphysiology and functions as well as psychological theories For her thisemerging discipline offers the opportunity to truly get inside theconsumerrsquos mind She believes it holds the promise of a scientific basis forunderstanding how human beings create store recall and relate to brandsin everyday life

What is evident from this discussion of the role of traditional(quantitative and qualitative) market research in generating insight is thatorganizations cannot rely on only one of the techniques to deliver absoluteinsight The reality is that both quantitative and qualitative research offermeaningful insight and they work in complementary ways As Gordon saysin her book on qualitative research Goodthinking (1999) lsquoThe case forusing bricolage (a pieced together set of investigative and interpretativemethods drawn from different disciplines) has never been strongerrsquoApproaches to bricolage also draw on non-traditional market sensingtechniques and these are considered next

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 87

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 87

THE ROLE OF NON-TRADITIONAL MARKET SENSING INVALUE DEFINITION

While market research provides a stream of invaluable knowledge aboutconsumers it is increasingly augmented with information derived fromthe use of database systems and technology that enables front-line staff toprovide instant feedback on consumer behaviour This data works in asupplementary fashion providing the organization with the opportunityto develop a more complete understanding of consumer motivation Thisunderstanding is vital for constructing successful value propositions

Using Database Systems

In the 1970s traditional market research methods were the only real sourceof consumer insight By the 1990s marketers were becoming spoilt forchoice as data flowed in ever greater quantities from scanners loyaltyschemes satisfaction surveys service requests account information and soon The challenge facing organizations today is how to fuse data inmeaningful ways so that a holistic or 360-degree picture of consumers iscreated This means understanding how and in what ways an individualconsumer interacts with an organization over time It entails building acorporate memory of the consumer so that the call centre agent is awarethat the customer on the telephone wrote to the companyrsquos head office twomonths earlier and that a subsequent home visit from a member of thecustomer services team went well Achieving a corporate memory meansadopting the philosophy that every encounter with consumers is a mutuallearning experience If they do this organizations can better managerelationships and in turn customer profitability

Customer databases built up through loyalty card schemes enableorganizations to turn consumer information into knowledge and totransform that knowledge into actionable propositions that provideconsumer benefits These benefits strengthen the consumerrsquos bond with the company From the companyrsquos point of view a loyalty scheme thatsimply rewards the consumer but ignores the vital flow of informationprovided by each transaction is a sales promotion scheme however large it might be Loyalty card information when mined effectively can reveal to the company the distinct and different groups of consumers it

88 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 88

serves In Tescorsquos case loyalty card data is central to the way in which thebusiness is run

Tesco ClubcardTesco Clubcard was introduced in February 1995 and today has over 10 million active members Although its start-up costs were high (judged byanalysts to be in the region of pound10 million in addition to the 1 discount onsales estimated at pound60 million) take-up of the loyalty card was significantWithin one month of its launch over 5 million people had joined the schemeand Tesco recorded a 7 increase in like-for-like sales This propelled Tescoto overtake Sainsburyrsquos as Britainrsquos leading retailer of packaged goods

Over the years Tesco has learned how to manage Clubcard data formaximum strategic effect The company admits to having been overwhelmedinitially at the deluge of data generated by the scheme Clubcard hadeffectively opened up a dialogue with members and hundreds of letters andup to 30000 phone calls a week had to be dealt with Specialist datamanagement consultants were brought in to manage the communicationprocess until Tescorsquos own in-house team had built up the necessaryexpertise In fact data-mining skills are so strongly valued at Tesco that thedata analysis firm engaged to analyse Clubcard data is now a subsidiary ofTesco

David Reid Tescorsquos deputy chairman has claimed that lsquoItrsquos very easy tomalign loyalty cards People are always rubbishing them because of theexpense But if you took our loyalty cards away from us it would be like flyingblind They tell us how to attract customers how secondary customersbehave how specific customers react to specific promotions how you caninfluence competitorsrsquo openings how you can spot new trends how you canconvert customersrsquo (Child 2002)

Source lsquoTesco Clubcard Foreverrsquo case study H Peck Cranfield School ofManagement 2002

Using CRM Systems

The introduction of Tesco Clubcard demonstrates that effective customerrelationship management (CRM) systems are not just about automating orspeeding up operations They are also about using data and information to intelligently manage customer relationships Tesco and otherorganizations have learned how to benefit from collecting and mining dataas well as using other techniques such as analytic profiling segmentationand predictive analyses to identify individuals and uncover consumer

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 89

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 89

preferences and propensities (so that optimal profitability can be attained)However despite the extent of the analysis provided by a CRM system it isonly market research that can provide a qualitative perspective MajorCRM system vendors such as Siebel Systems Oracle SAP and Peoplesoftare working on introducing analytical tools to enable their clientcompanies to understand their customers better in this way

The problem in practice is that mechanisms for generating bothquantitative and qualitative customer understanding have not been a partof the historical development of CRM systems This is because thedevelopment of databases to hold behavioural customer data has usuallybeen managed in organizations as a parallel process to that of marketresearch This way of operating evolved during the production-driven eraIn the new marketplace of the consumption-led economy insightgeneration is looked upon as a total process one that encompasses bothtraditional and non-traditional market sensing processes What isimportant is using consumer insight to inform strategic decisions thatimpact value creation and delivery

It should also be noted that fusing data from multiple sources raisesethical as well as technological issues These issues arise because data thathas been gathered anonymously for use in attitudinal and lifestyle surveyscan now be fused together with loyalty card data that has been collectedtogether with full personal details In the process of fusion it becomespossible to identify those individuals who gave their data anonymouslyThis makes them vulnerable to marketing approaches by companies andraises an ethical dilemma for the market researcher who would have givenan assurance to an individual respondent that the data would be handledconfidentially implying any personal details would not be used by theorganization Overall the market research industry has been careful intreading on what they perceive to be a potential landmine of personalprivacy This is acting as a brake on industry efforts to leverage multipleforms of data to generate total consumer insight

To deal with ethical issues professional codes of conduct relating to thepractice of market research were first established in the early 1960s inEurope by ESOMAR (a European association of market researchprofessionals) in association with the International Chambers ofCommerce and in the UK by the Market Research Society The keyprinciple in both sets of standards and in other codes of research practice

90 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 90

worldwide is consumer confidentiality The identities of surveyparticipants are not disclosed in analysis or reporting processes Theprotection of consumer confidentiality encourages respondents to providehonest responses about their attitudes and opinions It also serves to protectthem from unsolicited marketing approaches

In Europe today the professional bodies are working together with EUlegislators to find a way of regulating data protection The US and otherkey nations however have yet to enact any laws on data privacy therebycreating a potential minefield for global players

Using Front-line Staff

Finally insight can also be generated using a combination of front-linestaff and cutting-edge information technology Zara the Spanish fashioncompany that is rapidly expanding globally provides a useful example ofthe way in which insight generated on the shop floor can be used to createand deliver value for consumers in a seamless process Zararsquos strategy isbuilt on having a value-centric orientation in the business where insightprovides a continual flow of opportunity (Zara is also referred to later inChapter 8 and the management of employees including front-line staff iscovered in Chapter 9)

ZaraIn a sector where the average high-street retailer predicts trends often a yearor more in advance Zara can turn a trend around in a matter of days This ispartly because it has its own factories and also because of the emphasis itplaces on communication between the shop floor and the factory floor AsZara UKrsquos managing director Michael Shearwood points out lsquoWe donrsquot try topersuade customers to buy something we make We sell products that thecustomer wants to buyrsquo Store managers are offered fashion collections twicea week and they can select items according to what they feel will suit theirparticular customers They can also communicate specific customer fashiondesires to Zararsquos Spanish headquarters up to four times a day using handheldkeypads A few days later the requested clothes are delivered to the storeconcerned

The deployment of IT at the front line where it can directly impact customersatisfaction was ably demonstrated in one case involving a white blouse Theshirt was delivered to UK stores bearing decorative epaulettes The shirts didnot sell Feedback from customers indicated that women preferred the shirt

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 91

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 91

plain without the epaulettes This information was passed on to the shirtfactory which promptly manufactured an amended version and sent it out tothe UK stores whereupon it became a best seller

In order to know what trends are about to emerge Zara employs a team ofabout 200 designers dubbed the lsquocreation teamrsquo They travel around theworld and their task is to gather vital fashion intelligence from clubs discosuniversity campuses and catwalks The affordable clothes sold by the Zaramanufacturing and retail chain have become popular among leading fashioneditors who revere their quality fashionability and value-for-money prices

Source Based on lsquoThe mark of Zararsquo Linda Watson Style Magazine 2001

THE ROLE OF SEGMENTATION IN VALUE DEFINITION

In best practice organizations consumer insight is turned into marketingaction through the process of consumer segmentation By segmentingconsumers into groups sharing the same or similar needs on the basis ofvalue as defined in their own terms an organization can acquire up-to-the-minute understanding of its consumer base This can then be used todevelop more cost-effective consumer strategies Because consumerperceptions of value change it is important that both value definition andconsumer segmentation are undertaken on a regular and frequent basisOrganizations that can quickly react to change and anticipate shifts in thevalue demands of consumers have a head start on their competitors Suchflexibility and focus on demand lie at the heart of New ConsumerMarketing

Much of the current discussion about segmentation is informed by themechanistic approach of the production-driven era This is characterizedby the use of scientific and rational language and focuses on the way inwhich the organization should segment its market ie lsquochop it uprsquo intomanageable chunks The reality of the consumption-led economy is thatconsumers themselves unwittingly form loose groups whose members areseeking the same or similar sets of value factors In other words consumerssegment their market and form subgroups with their own sets ofrequirements The language associated with segmentation today is more todo with creativity and insight as organizations wrestle with the challengeof finding a means of exposing these segments of consumers and definingthe value that each is seeking

92 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 92

The process of value definition enables the organization to be confidentabout the market in which it operates Segmentation provides the answerto the simple but strategic question lsquoWhat business are we inrsquo Theimportance of answering this question correctly was highlighted back in1960 by Theodore Levitt in his seminal work Marketing Myopia in whichhe draws attention to the importance of viewing a business in a way that isappropriate to the markets in which it operates His classic exampleinvolved the railroads which defined themselves as being in the railwaybusiness rather than in the transportation business lsquoThe railroads did notstop growing because the need for passenger and freight transportationdeclined That grew The railroads are in trouble today not because theneed was filled by others (cars trucks aeroplanes even telephones) butbecause it was not filled by the railroads themselvesrsquo The railroadcompanies had a product-driven view of the marketplace and failed to seethat the value their customers were looking for was more to do with thebenefits derived from transportation and communication than what therailroads simply had to offer

Today too many businesses still define and segment their markets interms of the products they sell Personal financial services companies forexample typically take this product-driven approach defining markets aslsquoendowment policiesrsquo lsquosavings bondsrsquo or lsquosavings accountsrsquo They fail tounderstand the kinds of value their customers are seeking such as thedesire to save for retirement support a child through higher education orsimply have peace of mind

Correct market definition is crucial to the development of a value-centric orientation as it links directly with the mission vision and values ofthe company It enables the organization to accurately articulate what itaims to achieve and to measure its market share and market growthagainst relevant competitors as it does so These issues are consideredfurther in Chapter 9

Creating a Segmentation Analysis

Customer databases built up through loyalty card schemes such as thoseoperated by the major supermarkets can provide a rich source ofinformation on buying behaviour However it should always beremembered that a segmentation analysis built solely on this sort of data

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 93

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 93

can only reflect the motivations of existing customers It becomes a databasesegmentation and not any form of market segmentation Meaningfulsegmentation analysis takes into consideration different types of data

In terms of the ideal number of clusters or segments to aim for in asegmentation analysis the recommendation used to be no more than half adozen but developments in data analysis and data fusion mean thatcompanies can now work with a greater number Figure 66 illustrates howthis larger number can arise

A major supermarket may start with a small number of lsquosuper segmentsrsquoand then subdivide these further until it has reached a large butmanageable number of micro-segments Developments in IT make themanagement of large numbers of segments possible For example threesuper segments may be uncovered in the segmentation analysis shopperswho are quality oriented family oriented and value oriented These supersegments could then be further subdivided into a larger number of sub-segments known as lsquocategory one segmentsrsquo The quality-orientedsegment for example might be made up of four sub-segments time-poorcash-rich shoppers health conscious shoppers shoppers with apreference for organic foods and lsquofoodiesrsquo or shoppers who favour fine

94 Value Definition

Time poorcash rich

Keen onorganics

Qualityoriented

Healthconscious Foodies

VF

Incr

easi

ng g

ranu

larit

y

Figure 66 Segmenting consumer markets a hypothetical supermarket example

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 94

foods In this way the segmentation process would be continued buildingon insight generated through both traditional and non-traditional researchapproaches until an optimum number of segments is reached Theoptimum number of segments is reached when each segment is of anadequate size to provide the company with the desired return oninvestment members of the segment share a high degree of similarity intheir requirements yet are distinct from the rest of the market thesegments are reachable and they can be serviced by the organization interms of value creation and value delivery

Today in the UK the major supermarkets would typically work at ahigh level of segment granularity with up to as many as 3000 segmentscascaded down from their overarching super segments One-to-onemarketing may be talked about as a viable aim but the commercial realityis rather different as for most organizations the costs of delivering thisoutweigh the returns The challenge is to find new analytic approaches tosubdividing the market to an acceptable level of granularity These morecontemporary approaches to segmentation keep managerial focus onunderstanding the value sought by the individual segments and do so in away that prevents consumer profiling from becoming a barrier to consumerunderstanding Where an organization talks in terms of only four or fiveconsumer profiles these can actually hinder an organizationrsquos ability to dealwith the high levels of heterogeneity characteristic of the new marketplace

Having identified its different consumer segments the organization canthen move on to evaluate which segments offer the best businessopportunities Segments may be assessed in terms of market size andmarket trends market share current and future profitability consumersatisfaction andor consumer loyalty Companies usually manage aportfolio of segments made up of high earners steady earners and futurepotential earners Any low earners need to be managed carefully ndash often asmall increase in the number of times consumers forming this segmentmake a purchase can result in large improvements to the bottom line

Finally continuing with this supermarket segmentation example theanalysis could then be used to understand the shopper profile of existingstores and to define value for example through ascertaining whatpercentage of consumers in each of the category one segments frequentsparticular store types (eg large format versus convenience) or by location(out-of-town versus high-street stores) The resultant insight could be used

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 95

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 95

to specify new store developments and hence tailor the value offering moreclosely to the wants and needs of consumers Given that CRM systems canprovide constant streams of up-to-date consumer data segmentationanalyses can become a dynamic part of a demand system A recent projectjointly undertaken by Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp Gamble demonstrates thispoint

Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp GambleIn an innovative example of collaborative effort Sainsburyrsquos and Procter ampGamble worked together to exploit the wealth of data contained withinSainsburyrsquos Reward Card database in order to deliver a holistic segmentationanalysis of the health and beauty care (HampBC) shopper Their study linkedactual purchasing behaviour to attitudinal data using a big base sample Inthe UK the HampBC market was worth almost pound11 billion in 2002 and is forecastto grow 21 to 2006 with Sainsburyrsquos occupying third place behind Bootsand Tesco for sales A major challenge facing Sainsburyrsquos is the differencebetween the HampBC shopper and the grocery shopper Shoppers atSainsburyrsquos are typically aged 45 years plus while the HampBC shopper isgenerally younger Also the overall store shopper is more upmarket than theSainsburyrsquos HampBC shopper

Using loyalty card data Sainsburyrsquos identified eight segments of shoppersbased on their purchasing affinity to different product categories within theHampBC aisle To complement this understanding two additional pieces ofresearch were jointly carried out to provide data on the wider HampBC shoppingcontext Both Sainsburyrsquos shoppers and non-shoppers of the HampBC categorywere surveyed quantitatively in order to gain insights that would enableSainsburyrsquos to build greater penetration among non-shoppers and strengthenshopper loyalty among existing shoppers

Analysis of this data produced a rich source of insight that enabled bothparties to learn what each of the segments was looking for in terms of HampBCproducts their loyalty to Sainsburyrsquos who they perceived as the competitionand the type of marketing activity they preferred The segmentation analysisresulted in actionable results for both Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp Gamblewhich were then exploited jointly and separately The HampBC strategy that wassubsequently developed encompassed both existing and new shoppersrsquoneeds and helped grow Sainsburyrsquos HampBC category ahead of the market

Source Roger Allford Natalie Evans and Caroline Ward lsquoA step forward inunderstanding shoppers using segmentation techniquesrsquo paper presented at the ESOMAR Conference lsquoConsolidation or renewalrsquo BarcelonaSeptember 2002

96 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 96

As this case example shows an organizationrsquos approach to segmentationis about more than the analytical techniques it employs It makes astatement about the organizationrsquos market orientation the way it sees themarketplace and how well it understands the consumers it chooses to serveSegmentation enables the organization to create competitive advantage foritself by defining value in a way that makes clear how it can profitablycreate greater value for consumers New Consumers raise many challengesfor organizations and as this chapter demonstrates they are impacting theway in which insight into their needs and desires is generated This inturn raises questions about the role and status of the insight generatorswithin a business

THE ROLE OF INSIGHT GENERATORS3 IN VALUEDEFINITION

An acceptance of the vital importance of insight to successful NewConsumer Marketing makes it necessary to review the role and status ofthose people within the organization who are generating the insight Theseare traditionally staff who are members of the market research teamHowever given the wider understanding of how insight can best begenerated this classification should also include those responsible for theanalysis of CRM data All too often market research is perceived to be alow-grade commodity business with an output that does not go beyondcompleting surveys As commentators said over ten years ago there is aneed to prove that market research is about more than clipboards andopinion polls

If insight generators are to assume a real decision-making role then theyneed to be equipped with a skill set that enables them to draw on the mosteffective combination of data generation services externally as well as anability to communicate the learning internally These insight managersmust become proactive consultants within their organizations rather thanacting as simple reactive service providers They need to ensure that theinsight generated becomes the dynamic cornerstone of all marketingactivities In best-practice organizations this appears to be happeningHowever there are perhaps too many junior managers joining the marketresearch profession who are not being trained to take on this enhanced roleThis can only lead to the marginalization of the profession over time

The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition 97

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 97

Insight generators therefore occupy what is known as a lsquoboundary-spanningrsquo role in the New Consumer Marketing model These are staff wholsquoconnect an informal network with other parts of the company or withsimilar networks in other organizationsrsquo (Cross and Prusak 2002) Theyoperate at the periphery of the organization and their roles are strategicallyimportant as facilitators of linkage between the cells of a demand system Itis through their behaviour that the organization adapts (or fails to adapt) tochanges in the marketplace In short they function as lsquosensory organsrsquo Asthis role is seldom recognized within organizations there is no one titlethat identifies these influential staff

These boundary-spanning managers are charged with generating adynamic flow of insight so that insight generation becomes an ongoingprocess and is not simply seen as an annual or six monthly exercise Theyare responsible for ensuring that this insight informs the other two cells ofthe New Consumer Marketing model through the organizationrsquos approachto knowledge management (as explored in Chapter 9) Gaining amomentum in insight generation enables the organization to create aliving demand system as it gains a continuous source of insight on which tofocus its value creation and delivery processes The benefits of this processapproach to insight generation are that brands can retain their currencywith consumers as the organization adapts to shifts in consumerperceptions of value This ability of an organization to shift in line withchanging consumer perceptions of value is well demonstrated in the casesof Lucozade and Skoda

Lucozade and SkodaLucozadersquos success in the drinks industry is underpinned by its expertise inreading value trends and responding to them appropriately The Lucozadebrand has shifted from being a soft drink aimed at people who are unwellsummed up in the strapline lsquoLucozade aids recoveryrsquo to a sports drink thatlsquoreplaces lost energyrsquo to todayrsquos competition-conscious brand that serves asan lsquoenergy boostrsquo

Car manufacturer Skoda has worked in a similar fashion to remain relevantto consumers VW its parent company acquired the brand in 1991 and hasinvested in it alongside its other marques Volkswagen Audi and Seat Thevalue associated with Skoda vehicles has changed dramatically from onethat was the butt of jokes to one that gains consumer trust Skodarsquos popularitytoday builds on a simple but clever message lsquoWersquove changed can yoursquo

98 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 98

This first cell of the New Consumer Marketing model is concerned withthe process of defining the value consumers are seeking Value definitiondrives the demand system by generating relevant insight that provides afocus for the processes of value creation and value delivery To achieve valuedefinition organizations are increasingly adopting a bricolage approachthat pieces together investigative and interpretative methods drawn fromdifferent disciplines

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Insight provides the means of defining value from the consumerrsquosperspective

bull Consumer perceptions of value shift over time Adopting an ongoingdynamic approach to insight generation ensures that the organizationrsquosperspective of the marketplace does not remain fixed in time

bull Value is made up of component factors that work to enhance maintainand destroy value Certain value-enhancers may be adopted byconsumers as talking points delivering valuable word-of-mouthmarketing

bull Insight generation is a total process encompassing traditional marketresearch and non-traditional market sensing

bull Insight is made actionable through the process of segmentation whichhelps the organization answer the question lsquowhat business are we inrsquo

bull Segmentation enables an organization to achieve competitiveadvantage by clarifying how it can create greater value for consumers

bull Insight generators have an influential boundary-spanning role withinthe organization and should be valued as lsquosensory organsrsquo

Summary Points 99

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 99

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 100

The process of creating value resulting in a value proposition for a specificaudience

Creating value = bringing into being or form or investing with new form

Watchword = innovation

Value creation in the consumption-led economy must be informed by anunderstanding of the value that consumers are looking for and assessed interms of consumersrsquo value criteria Satisfying consumer demand today isabout winning the custom of discerning consumers and not simplyproducing good products This second cell of the New ConsumerMarketing model is a fundamental component of a demand system as itmoves the organization from defining value to actually creating andcommunicating that value effectively

Key to the process of creating value in the marketplace is identifying andutilizing the organizationrsquos value-producing resources (eg employeestechnological know-how and capital) to meet consumer needs andexpectations profitably At the heart of this process is the concept ofinnovation Derived from the Latin word innovare meaning to renew oralter innovation in consumer marketing is about creating new solutionsthat offer real value to consumers In many organizations innovation hasbecome separated from marketing giving rise in part to the crisis inmarketing New Consumer Marketing with its emphasis on market-ledinnovation recombines the two and provides a means of addressing both thedemands of New Consumers and the concerns of brand owners and retailers

The desired output of the value creation process is a value propositionthat consumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver The

Value Creation 7

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 101

value proposition sets out the value exchange between buyer and supplierand reinforces the mutuality of the relationship As stated in Chapter 6 theconstruction of a successful value proposition depends on first being able todefine value by generating relevant insight into consumer demand and therelative attractiveness of different consumer segments The organizationcan then work to create this value and ultimately to deliver it

In building a value proposition out of the value-producing resources ofthe organization there are a number of elements to consider These includenew product development branding positioning and price Each plays animportant role in the value creation process Of paramount importancehowever is the role of innovation for innovation is what underpins thesuccess of all the elements of value creation

THE ROLE OF INNOVATION IN VALUE CREATION

The business has two and only these two basic functions marketing andinnovation Marketing and innovation produce results all the rest are costs

(Peter Drucker 1985)

In the opening chapter of this book marketing was presented as adiscipline in crisis whose contribution to business is in question Thisstems from the fact that many managers see marketing as a cost rather thanan investment and this itself is driven by the lack of a common approach tomeasuring marketing effectiveness (a subject considered further in Chapter9) The issue for many managers today is that marketing no longer appearsto be delivering innovation somehow the two have become separatedNew Consumer Marketing which places innovation at the core of valuecreation offers a way of putting strategic intent back into marketing andso providing a means of lifting marketing out of its crisis

The value-centric organization is marked by a corporate environmentthat seeks performance improvement through superior value definitioncreation and delivery Innovation in business provides a way of creatingnew value-producing resources or endowing existing ones with anenhanced potential for yielding profit It is the result of a complex set ofprocesses involving organizational learning culture leadership andmanagement style Innovation is important on a macro-economic levelbecause it is associated with high rates of economic growth and high levels

102 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 102

of employment Within individual firms innovation enhancesorganizational performance The commercial significance of innovation issupported by the findings of PricewaterhouseCoopers (1999) whichsurveyed 80 companies in seven countries in 1999 It found that newproducts and services introduced in the preceding five years accounted for a10 increase in turnover and generated a 25 increase in the annual rateof revenue growth It also found that new products and services wereassociated with a 9 increase in annual total shareholder returns

While the firm that innovates first in a market obtains the early moveradvantage this is only sustainable while competitors cannot imitate orneutralize its lead To stay ahead the firm must ensure that innovation is adynamic capability fully embedded within the culture of the organizationThe roots of culture lie hidden in the deep-seated collection of beliefs andassumptions that are commonly held in an organization They are reflectedin everyday life as lsquothe way things get done around herersquo Innovation shouldnot be treated simply as a series of individual projects but as a continuoussearch for opportunities to improve the value proposition to such an extentthat new market space is opened up A value-centric orientation providesthe foundation for achieving this

Because of the clear business benefits of having an innovative approachto value creation innovation is something of a holy grail for businessesThis is especially true for brand owners and retailers who find themselveshaving to rethink their strategies in line with the macro-market shift froma production-driven to a consumption-led economy As discussed inChapter 3 brand owners are looking for improvements in brandperformance that will give them an opportunity to assert their positionwith retailers and to move away from a position where they can do littleother than ruthlessly attack their cost base in order to meet retailersrsquo pricedemands Brand owners want to outperform their rivals in terms ofcapturing market share developing consumer and brand loyalty andearning a rate of profit higher than the industry norm Retailers for theirpart are seeking step changes that will reverse current trends which haveseen retail decline as a percentage of GDP over recent years They need tofind new and innovative ways to manage retail offerings in highlyfragmented markets

For both brand owners and retailers a focus on innovation in valuecreation offers the most promising source of organic growth This means

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 103

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 103

working to create the next wave of brand and retail experiences based onhaving a consumer-relevant value-centric orientation in the business and amanagement culture that makes innovation possible

Consumers as Innovators

In the production-driven economy the role of the consumer in theinnovation process was highly limited ndash so much so in fact that in somecases of marketing consumers appeared to be forgotten altogether In theconsumption-led economy the active knowledgeable and demandingNew Consumer is the focal point of product and service innovationOrganizations that embrace New Consumer Marketing acknowledge thisand believe that the consumer can be a source of insight and innovationleading to greater business competence Such firms are characterized byhigh levels of consumer involvement they recognize consumers asinnovators

The concept of using consumers in direct interface with businessmanagers was termed lsquoTapping the creativity of consumersrsquoTM by theSynectics Corporation (wwwsynecticsworldcom) an internationalconsultancy specializing in innovation and change Synectics consultantsengage consumers in the problem-solving process in the search forbreakthrough initiatives For example one client the National FarmersrsquoUnion (NFU) was brought together with consumers at the point ofpurchase where it was observed that there was no easy way for consumersto identify the source of the food they were buying This was an issue ofserious concern in the UK following a number of high-profile food scaresThe insight generated from speaking to grocery shoppers directly was thatthey wanted a convenient way to ensure food safety This may seem anobvious requirement but it led to the idea of a new farm-assurancebranding scheme The Farm Assured brand authenticating how the foodhas been produced hit the shelves within a record nine months due to theinvolvement of all stakeholders (farmers consumers NFU staffwholesalers and retailers)

By eliciting consumersrsquo hidden desires and enabling them to participatefully in product development organizations can use consumers as agents ofchange in the same way that a grit of sand can develop into a pearl withinan oysterrsquos shell Cadbury Schweppes and Johnson Controls companies

104 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 104

working in diverse sectors have both made maximum use of consumers toshape and sell products successfully

Cadbury SchweppesCadbury Schweppes confectionery uses a five-stage process known aslsquoALICErsquo to drive innovation in its Consumer Planning and ResearchDepartment The acronym stands for alignment (A) of the objectives of theresearch with the consumer problem leverage (L) of existing knowledgewithin the business immersion (I) in the world of the potential consumerconnection (C) through insight and execution (E) to drive growth The launchof the Boost Guarana chocolate bar in September 2002 followed this strategicdevelopment pathway Its genesis was based on the insight that the highlydemanding lifestyle of todayrsquos consumers takes a heavy toll on their mentalenergy This learning was generated by a cross-functional team andsupported by desk research and consumer surveys that used a raft ofethnographic and direct questioning techniques The stimulant properties ofBoost Guarana match those of energy drinks that claim to deliver improvedattention alertness and concentration

Source Patsy Richardson Head of Consumer Planning and ResearchCadbury Schweppes lsquoHow to maximise the benefits of using consumerinsight to drive innovationrsquo paper presented at the lsquoUsing Consumer Insightfor Profitable Innovationrsquo Conference IQPC London October 2002

Johnson ControlsJohnson Controls is part of an automotive systems group that makes seatsand car interiors It operates in the business-to-business (B2B) sector as asupplier to well-known car manufacturers such as BMW and Nissan Thecompany believes that lsquoconsumer focused innovation and productdevelopment will become an increasingly important competitive differentiatorrsquoRecognizing that cars need to deliver more than lsquojust transportationrsquo and thatcar interiors need to surprise and delight end users Johnson Controls drawson the views of both automotive experts and car drivers to understand themotivating values of car drivers (eg family safety pragmatism harmony)Consumers are consulted on product design and associated issues such aswhat luxury means for car drivers and how drivers actually use the technologyavailable in cars This insight-turned-innovation is then used as a corecompetence by Johnson Controls in its relationships with its immediatecustomers the car manufacturers

Source Jemina Martinez Head of Advanced Consumer Research JohnsonControls lsquoGetting out of the car and into peoplersquos livesrsquo paper presented atthe lsquoUsing Consumer Insight for Profitable Innovationrsquo Conference IQPCLondon October 2002

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 105

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 105

Innovation through Process or People

Many companies take an overtly process-oriented approach to managinginnovation while others regard innovation as a capability vested in peopleManagerial thinking is currently caught between these two contrastingapproaches How should an organization seeking to improve itsperformance by becoming more innovative achieve this New ConsumerMarketing offers a way of seeing these two approaches as part of the samesolution to meeting the needs of New Consumers and providingbreakthrough opportunities in business development for brand owners andretailers

On the one hand there is a clearly identified and well-used process thatwas formalized by Robert Cooper an academic researcher known as thestagendashgate process (Cooper 1993) This is shown in Figure 71 Thestagendashgate process provides a way of screening and monitoring theprogression of projects to ensure that progress is linked to the successfulachievement of business goals It subdivides new product developmentactivities into a series of stages so that managers can lsquoownrsquo specific groups ofactivities and be responsible for achieving the objectives within thoseactivities In order to proceed from one stage to the next the project mustsatisfy the objectives that were set for that stage Failure at any stage in the process will result in the abandonment of the project The definition ofthe developmental stages and the evaluation criteria will be specific to theorganization concerned The stagendashgate process aims to reduce risk and isusually associated with an incremental approach to innovation

Figure 71 The stagendashgate process Adapted from Cooper (1993)

106 Value Creation

Initial Second Decision on Post- Precommercialization Post-screen screen business case development business implementation

review analysis review

Ideation Preliminary Detailed Development Testing and Full production andinvestigation investigation validation market launch

(build businesscase)

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 106

On the other hand there are many examples of organizations whereinnovation is directly attributable to the leadership and management styleof an individual (usually the CEO) whose commitment to innovation isreflected in the culture of the organization A common feature of theseorganizations is a focus on seeing things from the consumerrsquos perspectiveAs a result they tend to be more effective in the marketplace For exampleStelios Haji-Ioannou founder of the low-cost carrier easyJet used to takeup to four flights a week on easyJet to experience what it was like as apassenger using his airline The feedback and insight he gained from thisunusual routine was used to improve consumer value

Michael Dell1 founder and namesake of the worldrsquos leading computerservices provider says lsquoOne of the challenges of a company that issucceeding is that you run the risk of complacencyrsquo He encourages histeam to explore incremental improvements and to experiment with ideasthat add value primarily in terms of efficiency EasyJet and Delldemonstrate that fostering an innovative culture starts from the top it isdriven by the way that senior managers manage and relish risk setchallenging but measurable goals support employees who take a risk intrying something different champion new ideas and encourage diversityof thought and approach

Innovation as a Dynamic Capability

In order to synthesize this binary behaviour (seeking efficiency throughprocess or effectiveness through people) New Consumer Marketingencourages a systemic approach Drawing on learning from the livingsciences it helps in identifying the key underlying processes andrelationships within the organization that enable it to become as adaptiveand creative as possible in a changing market environment This approachis exemplified by 3M(UK)2 a company that continuously and consistentlydemonstrates success in innovation

3M(UK)The story of the 3M Post-itTM probably 3Mrsquos most well-known product hasbecome a classic example of innovation 3M manager Art Fry sought a way ofkeeping the bookmark in his hymn book from slipping out onto the floor Heconnected this desire to his knowledge of an adhesive that had beendiscovered by the company a number of years before but discarded as it was

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 107

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 107

considered to be ineffective at sticking With the support of the company Fryredeveloped the adhesive successfully and this led to the Post-itTM a hugelysuccessful stationery innovation

3M(UK) employees are given the freedom to take risks and try out newideas and this has led to a steady stream of new products John Muellerformer Chairman and CEO of 3M(UK) is quoted as saying lsquoWe want toinstitutionalize a bit of rebellion in our labs It has been said that thecompetition never knows what we are going to come up with next The factis neither do wersquo This is indicative of a mindset that actively encouragesradical innovation The difference between this mindset and one that leadsto incremental innovation is so current research suggests (Dyck 2002) todo with the way in which the organization experiences the complexity ofthe problem it is facing Where an organization perceives the problem tobe lsquouncertainrsquo it is essentially saying that it knows the variables at play butdoes not know how to configure them to find the solution Theorganization that perceives the problem to be one of lsquoambiguityrsquo is goingfarther and saying that it does not know what variables are at play and doesnot know the formula for solving the problem

This latter attitude is reflected in Muellerrsquos words and is associated withcompanies that seek to absorb complexity rather than simply to reduce itOrganizations that work to reduce complexity are constrained to anincremental approach Those whose starting point is that they do not knowhow to solve the problem can work to create options to develop potentialsolutions and in doing so learn as an organization Taking a broader viewof the complexity of the marketplace and the issues facing consumers is lesscomfortable for organizations as it throws up more challenges and greaterrisk but it can lead to more radical innovation where the rewards arepotentially superior

Therefore managers seeking to improve organizational performance bybecoming more innovative need to start by deciding whether they areuncertain or ambiguous about the complexity of the problem they arefacing Their answers will be based on their understanding of themarketplace and will determine whether they then work to reduce orabsorb the complexity This more reflective approach is not a capabilitythat was called for in the production-driven era where a command-and-control attitude dominated Then organizations produced goods andservices and persuaded consumers to buy them In todayrsquos consumption-

108 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 108

led economy where consumer markets are highly fragmented andchanging fast the successful players are those who are able to produce valuein a consistent and cost-effective way The market leaders however go onestep further ndash they constantly seek to differentiate themselves fromcompetitors by offering superior value in the form of new products andservices They are capable of absorbing complexity and mastering theorganizational response to market change

A Radical Approach to Innovation

Organizations can best distance themselves from the competition bychanging the rules of the marketplace This starts with generating insightinto consumersrsquo problems and expectations and then defining them in sucha way that creating the value consumers seek becomes obvious As discussedin the previous chapter this is the desired output of an effectively operatingfirst cell in a demand system To achieve value definition the organizationmay well find itself redefining the consumer needs the industry is focusingon and thus contributing to industry understanding of the value-addingfactors that matter to consumers These might then form the basis of newperformance criteria for companies in that sector Those companies that failto embrace the new criteria may risk losing out

Virgin GroupVirgin Group is an organization that has demonstrated time and again how tobring radically new products and services into the marketplace without beingthe first to market in a particular sector The companyrsquos understanding of thevalue-adding factors that matter to consumers has enabled it to successfullyoperate in markets where it has taken on established giants in a lsquoDavid versusGoliathrsquo battle for consumer loyalty For this reason Virgin has gained areputation as a challenger brand For example Virgin Mobile offeredconsumers a single simple tariff when other operators were confrontingconsumers with an array of complicated tariffs Virginrsquos uncomplicatedapproach won it 17 million customers by mid-2002 and catapulted thecompany into the position of the fifth largest mobile operator in the UK withinthree years of entering the market Virgin Mobilersquos competitors have sincecopied the simple tariff system effectively raising the key performancecriteria for the industry

Other Virgin businesses such as Virgin Atlantic and Virgin One haveimpacted their markets in a similar way When Virgin Atlantic launched its

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 109

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 109

lsquoUpper Classrsquo seating the idea of offering the large seats and legroom oftraditional First Class for the price of a business class ticket was new andwon Virgin Atlantic a lucrative market share of key international routes VirginOne again demonstrated the benefits of keeping it simple when it introducedthe Virgin One bank account (now known as One) which enabled consumersto manage all their finances including mortgages savings and income froma single account The new type of bank account made its mark in an industrythat had formerly offered consumers a range of banking products and wherecorporate emphasis was on persuading consumers to buy these productsrather than developing products to suit consumer needs Virginrsquos consistentlysimple and consumer-focused approach to innovation in value creation isindicative of a true value-orientation within the organization and also of amanagement culture that makes innovation possible

Organizations such as Virgin Group take the consumer as their startingpoint and not the final destination for their products and services They areless interested in simply building advantage over their competitors andrather keener on providing consumers with a step change in value thateffectively creates a new market The competition is left standing as oldsources of advantage are destroyed and new ones are created

W Chan Kim and Renee Mauborgne two professors from the Frenchbusiness school INSEAD have published extensively in this area and theyuse the term lsquovalue pioneersrsquo to describe the Virgin Group and similartypes of organization (1997 1999ab 2000) These are businesses engagedin what Kim and Mauborgne define as lsquovalue innovationrsquo a process thatmakes the competition irrelevant and creates new markets by focusing onwhat value needs to be produced They cite examples such as CallawayGolf the US golf club manufacturer which in 1991 launched its lsquoBigBertharsquo golf club The product rapidly rose to dominance taking marketshare from rivals and expanding the total golf club market because itsradically new design (the club has an unusually large head) offered playersa way of overcoming the difficulties associated with hitting a small golf ballwith a little golf club head For Kim and Mauborgne Callaway likeCharles Schwab amp Co in investment brokerage IKEA in home productsretail and Wal-Mart in discount retailing illustrates their thesis that thereis a clear link between high rates of business growth and a radical approachto innovation

This stance contrasts with the traditional view that consumers canprovide only limited help in innovative product and service development

110 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 110

as they are constrained by their experience and unable to articulateanything other than incremental ideas

THE ROLE OF NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT IN VALUECREATION

There is a lot of debate around the question how new does innovationreally have to be lsquoNewnessrsquo can be understood in a number of differentways The word lsquonewrsquo is often used in marketing communications forexample in advertisements and mailings or on product packagingHowever in many instances consumers could be forgiven for asking whatmight actually be new about certain products or services Newness is oftendefined by an incremental change to an existing product or service It maybe a barely discernible alteration to the pack size or ingredients base Sucha slight improvement in the value offering might make it lsquonew to thecompany but not new to the marketrsquo

Alternatively the newness element might be more extensive to thepoint where consumers change their purchase behaviour For examplewhen Mars launched its new Celebrations brand the Roses and QualityStreet brands already dominated the marketplace for boxed wrappedchocolates for everyday occasions But Mars had undertaken in-depthresearch into potential consumers and used the resulting insight toposition the new brand as lsquoall your favourite countline products inminiaturersquo The launch of Celebrations succeeded in attracting a youngerconsumer compared to rival brands and Mars captured a significant shareof the UKrsquos pound600 million boxed chocolate market within a short period oftime

In essence product newness is a spectrum carrying increasing amountsof business risk for the organization In their report New Product Managementfor the 1980s Booz Allen amp Hamilton (1982) provide a way of looking atinnovation in terms of product newness They identify six categories of newproduct development as defined by the productrsquos level of newness to thefirm and its perceived level of newness to consumers Their grid displayingthe various categories is shown in Figure 72

It is evident from Figure 72 that the new product developments withlowest risk are those created through cost reduction and brandrepositioning Cost reduction involves the organization in paring down the

The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation 111

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 111

content of the value proposition by a specific amount to save on costWhere the reduction is minimal it may not affect consumer perceptions ofvalue However excessive cost reduction or too many small reductions overtime does become noticeable Brand repositioning represents relativelyhigher risk as it usually involves presenting brand revisions of some form tothe consumer The organization may or may not succeed at realigning thebrand with consumer expectations but it is already familiar withmanaging the brand

New product developments that carry intermediate risk include lineextensions and product improvements The usual strategy here is toenhance consumer value by increasing product choice and productperformance respectively For example Muumlller the fourth largest grocerybrand in the UK has consistently increased the range of yoghurt varietiesto more than 20 in order to drive sales volume and market share A numberof other food brands have chosen to focus instead on product performanceand have altered their recipes to include added vitamins and fibre thusmoving their brands into the functional foods or lsquonutraceuticalsrsquo sector ofthe market

The highest risk new product developments are ones that are both newto the company and new to consumers These are known as lsquonew-to-the-

112 Value Creation

Figure 72 Categories of new product development Adapted from Booz Allen ampHamilton (1982)

P

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 112

worldrsquo introductions The annals of marketing are littered with examplesof unsuccessful new-to-the-world products such as Betamax videotape andClive Sinclairrsquos C5 electric car These new products failed to deliver anysubstantial consumer benefit and were therefore not adopted by consumersThese attempts at innovation were not anchored in any form of meaningfulconsumer insight

Many organizations mistakenly believe that adding more technology toa product or service will result in value-adding innovation However whatconsumers want from technology is new or enhanced value that will extendtheir abilities and provide them with greater ease of use and convenienceSuccessful new-to-the-world innovation succeeds because it represents agenuine breakthrough in delivering a value proposition based on a deepunderstanding of the nature of the value consumers seek This new-to-the-world form of innovation is also known as radical or discontinuousinnovation as referred to earlier The introduction of Mars Ice Cream is anexample of this type of approach

Mars Ice CreamIn the late 1980s ice cream was a price-sensitive seasonal commodity Themarket was large (pound587 million) but stagnant and dominated by Walls andLyons Maid which held 45 and 14 market share respectively Most icecream was vegetable-fat based and generally came in the form of ice-lolliescones and family brick packs Until Mars entered the market in 1988 icecream was viewed largely as a childrenrsquos snack and demographics showed itcould be a shrinking market However Mars identified a gap in the existingmarket for a premium-price branded ice cream It was the first to launch sucha product and gained a lead over other ice cream manufacturers The newproduct was sold in the same outlets that stocked the existing range of Marsconfectionery enabling the company to use the same sales force and existingresources This allowed significant economies and lessened the financialburden of entering a new market

THE ROLE OF BRANDING IN VALUE CREATION

Brands play an important role in the value-creation process and thechanging marketing landscape created by the shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy has already brought forth newthinking about them and their meaning for consumers Initially brandsemerged as a simple means of identifying the manufacturer of a product

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 113

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 113

For example in 1266 in medieval England bakers were required by law toput their mark on every loaf of bread sold so that if there were anydiscrepancies in weight the baker at fault could be traced The practice ofbranding a product with an lsquoidentityrsquo has continued and developed Todaythe brand concept is highly complex having evolved beyond the coreproduct to include various kinds of added value Brands are often depictedas a lsquofried eggrsquo with a functional centre surrounded by layers of lesstangible elements such as reputation pack design advertising guaranteesand so on This view of brands typified the approach of marketers in the1950s and 1960s when brands were seen as lsquolifeless manipulable artefactsrsquo(Hanby 1999) and consumers were seen as passive purchasers

Brand thinking moved ahead slowly until the early 1980s whenresearcher Judie Lannon and psychologist Peter Cooper (1983) expressedthe idea that lsquowhat turns a product into a brand is that the physical productis combined with something else ndash symbols images feelings ndash to producean idea which is more than the sum of the parts The two ndash product andsymbolism ndash live and grow with and on one another in a partnership ofmutual exchangersquo This concept began a process of seeing the brand notjust as the producerrsquos idea of the product but also as the consumerrsquos idea ofthe product giving rise to the notion of brands being co-created byproducers together with consumers

By the mid-1990s the nature of the intangible value inherent in thebrand had evolved to the extent that Harvard professor Susan Fournier(1996) described consumersrsquo relationships with mass brands as able tolsquosoothe the ldquoempty selvesrdquo left behind by societyrsquos abandonment of traditionand community and provide stable anchors in an otherwise changingworldrsquo At the close of the twentieth century John Grant author of theinfluential New Marketing Manifesto (1999) observed that lsquoBrands seem tohave taken on a life of their own They have become quite freestandingideas that take hold and spread So that Virgin can span many markets andViagra can become a potent icon even in markets where it is not yetavailable hellip A brand is a popular idea or set of ideas that people live byrsquo

These quotations by leading marketing commentators demonstrate thechanging way in which brands are believed to operate Today themetaphors used to describe the brand-building process are no longermechanistic but organic in nature in keeping with the discipline of NewConsumer Marketing Brands are now thought of as living entities that

114 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 114

take on a life of their own inside consumersrsquo minds creating somethingknown as a lsquomental modelrsquo Mental models as described in the previouschapter provide insight into how consumers create store recall and relateto brands in everyday life In effect a brand becomes a representation of anindividualrsquos collection of experiences at each of the lsquotouchpointsrsquo at whichthe brand wittingly or unwittingly engages the consumer Theseexperiences provide a mix of rational emotional social and culturalbenefits to the individual consumer If the supplying organization isdefining and creating value effectively then this bundle of complementarybenefits will be delivered through the value-adding factors associated withthe brand A brand is therefore the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition

Brands exist because people want them to exist As Niall FitzgeraldChairman of Unilever commented lsquoEven if the word ldquomarketingrdquo hadnever been invented and advertising was banned across the globe therewould still be brands because it is people who need themrsquo3 For consumersbrands provide a way of making a complicated world simpler Consumersbecome so familiar with them that brands provide a shorthand approach todecision making The dependable predisposition of consumers to purchasespecific brands provides brand owners with assets that offer the promise offuture cash flow It is consumers then and not companies who invest abrand with its value

If this is the case how is it that brands go into decline and die Theanswer is that companies kill them though not always deliberately orknowingly The decline and death of a brand can occur in a number ofdifferent ways for example through organizational arrogance greed orcomplacency Underlying this ebbing away of brand value is the absence ofa value-centric orientation in the organization A value-centric orientationenables the company to know understand and anticipate the valueconsumers are seeking so that it can then focus its value-producingresources on satisfying those needs thereby ensuring that brands surviveThe Barbie doll is one such example

BarbieBarbie began as an innovation and has remained relevant to young girlsthroughout the dollrsquos 40-year history The Barbie doll was created in 1959 andover 1 billion Barbies have been sold to date The brand is worth some $2 billion making it the most valuable toy brand in the world Mattel the

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 115

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 115

American toy giant that manufactures the doll claims the average Americangirl aged between 3 and 11 owns ten Barbies

When Barbie burst onto the scene in the 1960s the doll market consistedmainly of baby dolls designed for girls to cradle rock and feed In contrastBarbie had adult features and represented an independent young womanSince Barbiersquos launch as a teenage fashion model Mattel has worked to keepthe dollrsquos image fresh and to deliver the play value its ever-youngerconsumers demand Every year the company devises about 150 differentBarbie dolls and designs some 120 new doll outfits Barbiersquos image isconstantly updated mirroring the changing role of women in society She nowcomes in a multiplicity of guises from astronaut to army officer to dentist andmany more To reflect the growing diversity of populations African AmericanHispanic and Asian variations were introduced as early as the 1960s

Barbie has survived the challenges of lsquoage compressionrsquo or kids gettinglsquoolderrsquo at a younger age Girls now grow out of traditional play patternsincluding playing with dolls earlier than they did in the past Whereas ageneration ago 12-year-olds might have played with Barbie todayrsquos primeaudience is aged three to five Mattel is meeting this challenge head on byintroducing extensions to the Barbie brand For example Barbie in theNutcracker is a computer-animated video that has generated $150 millionfrom sales The company is dedicated to promoting Barbie as a lifestyle notjust a toy In addition to selling the dolls Mattel licenses Barbie in 30 differentproduct categories from furniture to make-up A girl can sleep in Barbiepyjamas under a Barbie duvet-cover in a bedroom covered in Barbiewallpaper There are even Barbie conventions fan clubs websitesmagazines and collectorsrsquo events To many commentators Barbietranscends the product category and is an icon representing lsquothe face of theAmerican dreamrsquo

Source lsquoLife in Plasticrsquo The Economist 21 December 2002

Building Successful Brands

As the meaning of brands has shifted over time so too has organizationalunderstanding of how to build brands In the production-driven era it wasbelieved that brand building was best achieved solely through marketingcommunications activities (namely advertising) Brand development wasseen as the transmission of messages to consumers the aim being to controltheir purchase behaviour Today brands are built on a much widerplatform that may for example involve alliance partners or staff

116 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 116

hellip through alliances ndash i-mode

i-mode is the most successful mobile data service in the world to date Sinceits launch in Japan in February 1999 i-mode has attracted 353 millionsubscribers (58 of market share) who each pay on average yen1540 permonth for services encompassing 3290 official and 59869 unofficial contentsites This success has been achieved through a value-centric approach to thedevelopment implementation and operation of i-mode services By keepingits offer simple maintaining effective content development and being first tomarket i-mode has gained significant competitive advantage and becomethe object of envy among mobile operators worldwide

Domoco the company behind the i-mode brand whose name is derivedfrom lsquodo communications over the mobilersquo has worked to define and satisfyconsumersrsquo needs through a relevant and appealing brand by forgingalliances with leading content providers The brand is based on theunderstanding that compelling entertainment content drives demand andthe technological aspects consequently take a back seat As TakeshiNatsuno director of i-modersquos strategy department explains lsquoWe neveremphasize words such as internet web browsing and mobile computing toconsumers i-mode users can get various information only with simpleoperations without recognizing they are using the internetrsquo

Putting this philosophy into practice Domoco carefully selects andcontrols lsquoofficialrsquo partner sites on the basis of freshness reliability depth ofcontent and clear user benefit and provides them with key services such as user verification joint marketing and technical assistance Thetechnological capabilities of i-mode allow content providers to chargeusers small incremental fees for the services provided These fees are billedby Domoco and then passed on to the content provider but Domocoretains a 9 commission This business model creates a positive feedbackloop whereby good content and compelling services attract fee-payingusers who in turn attract more content providers For example gamesmanufacturer Badai provides a new animated character every day as i-modescreen wallpaper (the background screen image for i-mode) With over 2 million i-mode users signing up for the service at yen100 per month this strategic alliance nets the company more than pound13 million per annum proving the strength of a partnership approach Similar agree-ments have been made with Sony allowing it to provide Playstation style

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 117

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 117

games over i-mode and Coca-Cola whereby i-mode users can use theirhandsets to pay for and acquire items from individual Coca-Cola vendingmachines

through staff ndash Singapore Airlines

Some companies are distinguished in their marketplace by the level of servicethey offer The way in which their employees deal with consumers becomesthe defining characteristic of the brand In essence the staff are the brandWith a proven profitability record over 30 years Singapore Airlines is one ofthe most successful airlines in the world and is consistently used by travellersand competitors as a benchmark for outstanding performance Key to thissuccess has been the delivery of the brand through the airlinersquos staff

The Singapore Airlines brand is intrinsically linked with the SingaporeGirl launched in 1972 whose serene face has become the heart of thecarrierrsquos advertising campaign No other airline has such a strong brandimage one that has even been immortalized in wax at Madame TussaudrsquosMuseum in London Ian Batey the creator of the Singapore Girl took a riskwhen he proposed that adverts should focus on service at a time when otherairlines were selling their tickets on the theme of safety Batey attributesthe success of the brand to its lsquocombination of silk and steel hellip the ever-changing cutting-edge body side of the brand hellip and the softer soul sideTogether you have a certain Asian humility graciousness and warmth aswell as being extremely fit fast modern and contemporaryrsquo The airlineoperates with a ratio of one flight attendant for every 22 passengers thehighest in the world and well above the industry average

Singapore Airlines has more than 14000 staff located in citiesthroughout the world People from different cultures must work togetherto produce a seamless and positive customer experience To unite thediverse and geographically separated workforce the airline has developed anumber of activities to encourage inter-office communication including avariety of department newsletters and a monthly company-wide internalmagazine A lsquoStaff Ideas in Actionrsquo scheme ensures that new suggestionsare constantly put forward The results of these and many other efforts addup to a staff culture that is vigorously committed to the airline toconsumers and to continuous improvement Staff pride and sense ofownership are evident in the way employees work to uphold the airlinersquosreputation which is built on a well-defined set of corporate values

118 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 118

Emerging Brand Issues

An emerging issue for brand owners and retailers in todayrsquos consumption-led economy is the growing debate about the impact of globalization andthe role of business versus government While this may not appear to belinked to the value-creation process in any obvious way it represents abreaking trend that needs to be monitored for its impact on the kind ofvalue that consumers seek and may be seeking in future Brands areincreasingly the targets of anti-corporation campaigns as is evidenced inthe protests against the World Trade Organization (WTO) in Seattle andGenoa and the boycotting of genetically modified (GM) foods In somecases consumer behaviour towards certain brands has been shown to be amore effective political weapon than the ballot box Shell for examplefound itself at the centre of controversy in 1995 when it sought to disposeof the Brent Spar oil platform at sea Consumers expressed their concern forthe environment by not buying Shell petrol especially in Germany whereShell sales declined by 50 on one day

Although these brand issues may seem far removed from their day-to-day remit marketers need to develop some sort of perspective on them Inseveral cases the monetary value of the value-creation activities of somecorporations exceeds that of a number of nation states An acknowledgedauthority in this area is socio-economist Dr Noreena Hertz She explains inher book The Silent Takeover (2001) how corporations are changing peoplersquoslives society and the democratic process She points out that of the worldrsquos100 largest economies 51 are now corporations and only 49 are nationstates Combined sales at General Motors and Ford are greater than theGDP of the whole of sub-Saharan Africa and Wal-Mart now has a turnoverhigher than the revenues of most states of Eastern Europe

At the heart of the debate about growing globalization and the role ofbusiness versus government lies the issue of trust is consumer marketingacting as a trustworthy agent in the economic system Brands are involvedin the economy and the production of national wealth because as discussedearlier they act as a label of guarantee and trust for consumers and thisvalue-enhancing aspect still plays a major role in motivating purchasestoday A small but demanding minority of New Consumers wants to makeinformed purchasing decisions and they have a growing interest in thecompany behind the brand Their concerns focus on wider societal issues

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 119

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 119

such as environmental vulnerability poverty and economic and politicalinstability and they have a desire to link their purchasing habits with thefuture of sustainable development This represents a significant change inthe kind of value that consumers want and challenges traditional value-creation activities

This wider agenda brings to the fore company reputation Brand ownershave always known that strong brands invite earn honour and reward thetrust of consumers but the signs are that to be a strong brand in the newmarketplace a brand has to demonstrate some form of corporate socialresponsibility The response of business has however been limited Whilemost companies are still trying to understand exactly how this trendimpacts the value creation process Body Shop is an example of a companythat has embraced brand ethics from its inception For many consumersBody Shop is not simply a retailer but a cause worth supporting BodyShoprsquos promotion of lsquobeauty without cruelty to animalsrsquo and lsquotrade not aidrsquopositions the brand as environmentally and socially responsible Othercompanies have developed social responsibility programmes as a means ofachieving profitability for their business and the environment in a way thatreflects the values of society Reputation management cannot howeversimply be regarded as a tactical activity Companies have to find ways ofembedding social responsibility into their organizations As researcherLance Moir (2001) comments lsquoThe best firms in this area ndash such as BPShell Johnson amp Johnson ndash are looking at their business processes in orderto ensure that the pure economic motive is not the sole determinant ofbusiness decisionsrsquo

THE ROLE OF POSITIONING IN VALUE CREATION

The positioning of a brand in the marketplace is a manifestation of where itsits vis-agrave-vis the competition and in the same way that consumers invest abrand with its value they also determine the positioning of a brand Just asthey carry in their minds a mental model of an individual brand they alsocarry a mental map of related brands Knowledge of this can reveal to theorganization the competitive set within which it operates The challengefacing the insight generators in a business is to find the right combinationof tools and techniques to uncover these maps (These issues were discussedin Chapter 6) However having generated this knowledge the

120 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 120

organization can then work to create the value proposition and ultimatelyto deliver it Positioning plays an important role in the value creationprocess because it helps build and sustain the value proposition Moreoverit does so in a way that factors in emotion the great intangible aspect ofbrand building

An example of a positioning map is shown in Figure 73 It shows thekey criteria that consumers use to discriminate between branded conceptsin the eating out market in this case the type of food on offer and theatmosphere of the outlet Consumers will then go on to opt for a lsquoFrenchrsquobrasserie versus a lsquodepartment storersquo cafeteria depending on the type ofeating-out occasion they are planning For example they may becontemplating a meal out with a small group of friends to celebrate aspecial occasion or they may be thinking of somewhere to go on their ownto pick up a snack as they are in a hurry New Consumers are ultradiscriminating and value creation should focus on their perceptions ofvalue which here includes type of outlet speed of service ambience etc

Drawing out the Emotional Message

New Consumers are motivated by the desire for experiences over featuresand benefits and the brand positioning process provides an important way of linking an emotional message to the physical characteristics of the brand Brands touch peoplersquos lives and consumers choose brands forthe emotional values they express as much as anything else The moredeeply embedded the emotions are the more strongly the consumer isconnected to the brand The example of Nike trainers given in Chapter 6showed how particular product features delivered certain benefits whichtogether provided an experience that satisfied a higher-level valuerequirement

Similar research4 carried out on purchasers of womenrsquos fine fragrancesshows in more detail how perceived value delivers an experience forconsumers The study illustrates how certain features of a brand ofperfume in this instance Chanel No 5 are linked with specific perceivedbenefits that satisfy personal values It can be seen from Figure 74 how thebrandrsquos country of origin (France) works as a positive feature providingreassurance to consumers Consumers regard Chanel No 5 as a low-riskhigh-quality purchase because of the trustworthy reputation French

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 121

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 121

perfumes have in the marketplace This feeling of reassurance promotes asense of well-being and feeling good about oneself For Chanel thelearning to be drawn from this is that it is important to retain thelsquoFrenchnessrsquo of the brand as it is integral to the brandrsquos positioning andcommunications strategies

These insights linking the physical attributes of the brand to theemotional benefits they deliver and in some cases to the higher-levelpersonal values that are satisfied through ownership can enable brandowners to be more innovative in their positioning strategies Certain brandowners explicitly use these sorts of insights to drive their value-creationprocesses For example motorbike manufacturer Harley-Davidson buildson the idea of ownership conferring a particular way of life From the bikesto the merchandise to the tattoos consumers see Harley-Davidson as a partof their identity enabling the brand to strongly differentiate itself in themarketplace In the personal computer (PC) sector the iMAC is positionedas a sensual product infused with mystery thereby engendering a warmthfor the brand among consumers For consumers of these brands theemotional switching costs are significant For the organizations behind thebrands their brand positioning is the result of an ongoing strategic process

122 Value Creation

Figure 73 A positioning map of the UK eating-out market

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 122

that informs the creation and delivery of the value proposition It is not theresult of an ad hoc tactical communications campaign

The Positioning Process

To guide the efforts of an organization in the positioning process it is usualto create a simple statement of what the brand is about and how thecommunications strategy should support its market positioning For mostorganizations the ease with which this statement is created is directlycorrelated with the way the positioning process is managed As SergioZyman former advertising VP at Coca-Cola once said lsquoIf you want toestablish a clear image in the minds of consumers you first need a clearimage in your own mindrsquo However this is seldom achieved for a numberof different reasons For instance some organizations seek to includeeverything in the positioning statement attempting to be all things to allpeople Others do not know where to start the process of articulation Yetothers insist on allowing everyone in the organization to have an opinionand try to reflect them all in a concise statement This process needs to bedriven by someone who has clear responsibility for the task resulting in anunambiguous brand positioning In addition the adoption of a simple

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 123

P

F

B

Figure 74 Mapping brand linkages

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 123

approach (where less is more) and the ability to take a long-term view aidthe successful completion of the task Burberry exemplifies the ability of anorganization to achieve a turnaround in fortunes based on a firmly managedrepositioning process

BurberryIn recent years Burberry has repositioned itself successfully by redefining thevalue consumers are seeking and creating an improved value proposition forthem In the mid-1990s Burberryrsquos unique British heritage and famoustrademark ndash the red black camel and white check pattern ndash was no longerenough to save the dysfunctional retailer Burberry had become over-relianton tired products and by 1997 trading profit collapsed In October 1997 RoseMarie Bravo took over as CEO and began a process of repositioning thebrand propelling it into luxury status Her aim was to turn the staid Britishbrand that was being eclipsed by competitors into an iconic and aspirationalbrand with cross-generational appeal By February 1999 Burberry was a firmfavourite on the catwalks of Milan Burberry designs ranging from the classictrench coat to funky pink kilts fuelled an explosion of accessories also in thetrademark check Since 1998 Burberry sales have doubled and the brand isnow seen as a financial success

The repositioning of Burberry was achieved by having a clear vision inplace Bravo recognized that although Burberry had become stale the public

124 Value Creation

Figure 75 Repositioning Burberry

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 124

still associated strongly with its heritage and quality Under her guidance thecompany began to reposition itself as the authentic British lifestyle brandThis moved it into competition with high-margin luxury design houses such asGucci Prada and Ralph Lauren with the opportunity for superior returns (seeFigure 75)

Burberryrsquos remarkable recovery was achieved through repositioning thebrand changing and expanding the product mix and changing the structureof distribution and sales channels Concentrating on the repositioning of thebrand Burberry retained its four core values (quality classic heritage iconic)and adopted four more (innovation style aspiration modernity) in order tocreate a modern spin to widen its appeal and raise global recognition A keysuccess factor was a coherent communications strategy across all mediaorchestrated to deliver a consistent image worldwide Leading models suchas Stella Tenant and Kate Moss were used to inspire more fashion-orientedadvertising Product design was improved with the input of RobertoMenichetti and then in 2001 Christopher Bailey as chief designer Sponsor-ship of high-profile events such as the Mario Testino Exhibition at the NationalPortrait Gallery and the Burberry Cup a polo match in association with thePrince of Wales reinforced the brandrsquos high class British pedigree

Other activities reinforced the brandrsquos revitalized position For example theproduct mix was expanded to include high-margin accessories childrens-wear and a perfume The range of menrsquos and womenrsquos apparel wasconsolidated distribution was reviewed and retail channels wererationalized As a part of this process a large number of product licenceswere terminated as they were judged to be inconsistent with the repositionedbrand image

THE ROLE OF PRICE IN VALUE CREATION

Price plays a key role in the value-creation process It can for exampleindicate value and quality In the case of a Rolex watch or a Pret A Mangersandwich the premium price reflects the lsquopremiumnessrsquo of the brandSimilarly price can be used to support brand positioning Stella Artois isadvertised as a lsquoreassuringly expensiversquo lager and easyJet occupies a well-defined value-for-money niche in the air travel market In other wordsprice works in combination with other elements of the marketing mix as a signal of value for consumers

Consumer goods companies are coming under increasing pressure toreview their pricing strategies as both consumers and trade customers

The Role of Price in Value Creation 125

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 125

sharpen their focus on value aided in many cases by the power of theInternet in their search for best value The introduction of the Euro andchanging European legislation have added to pricing complexity Whensetting pricing strategies it is important for managers to understand therole that price plays in the value proposition Price is used by consumers as acriterion for evaluating the value of the offer and by supplying organizationsas a competitive tool The effect of the shift from a production-driven to aconsumption-led economy has forced many organizations to replace theircost-plus approach to pricing with demand-led pricing policies

For brand owners price is a significant lever in ensuring that value isdefined created and delivered at a profit Revenue is after all the outcomeof volume multiplied by price (and volume itself is impacted by price)Increases in profitability can be gained by increasing prices reducing costsor increasing the volume sold However it is changes in price levels thathave the biggest impact on profitability due to the gearing ratio whichmeans that a greater amount of the benefit will flow through to the bottomline compared to the other two strategies Volume increases are counteredby variable costs and reducing costs usually applies to values significantlysmaller than turnover

Brand owners must take account of a number of factors when drawing upa pricing plan As depicted in Figure 76 these include internal coststargets and constraints pricing strategy (to be premium or not)competitor pricing strategy and consumer insight The outputs of thispricing decision-making process will impact the business case andinfluence how performance monitoring and scenario planning areundertaken Current pricing is often driven by past events rather than logicand consistency leading to a situation where pricing is inconsistent acrossmarkets For example prices may be set by individual countries or bycorporate divisions acting in isolation from the rest of the organization Asingle company may use several different approaches to pricing in order torespond to short-term or local market needs or it may be that differentprices have been agreed as part of key account management negotiations

The Evaluation of Value

It is not uncommon for prices to be set without reference to the consumerrsquosevaluation of the value proposition leading to a situation where consumers

126 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 126

believe price is out of line that is too expensive or even too cheap Thisincomplete approach to pricing can also undermine brand-positioningstrategies and may potentially damage the brand Furthermore it can leadto a situation where parallel trading develops leading to lost profitopportunities The way to prevent these issues arising is to base pricingstrategy on a rigorous analysis of all the elements inherent in complex pricedecision making Pricing strategy must take account of both theconsumerrsquos and the organizationrsquos evaluation of value as shown in Figure77 Clearly each player makes a trade-off in the value exchange Brandowners bear the costs of defining creating and delivering value and need ahealthy profit margin to remain in business while consumers incur costsassociated with evaluating the value proposition and gaining ownership ofthe brand

Consumers tend to evaluate the value proposition not in terms of theticket price but in terms of relative value that is whether the offer seemsexpensive cheap or fair to them This notion is not new Price as a reflectionof the value placed on a product or service by the consumer was an idea firstarticulated by the Victorian economist Alfred Marshall His beliefs aboutthe effects of consumer preferences on transactions dominated economic

The Role of Price in Value Creation 127

Figure 76 The complex pricing decision-making process Adapted from MarketingImprovements 2002

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 127

thinking until the middle of the twentieth century The concept of therational consumer or lsquohomo economicusrsquo held sway until the 1950s whenthe idea that product attributes other than price might be influencing thepurchase decision was promulgated It was suggested that price mighthave more than one meaning for consumers At about the same time theidea of psychological price emerged The underlying assumption here isthat price has a double meaning for consumers Besides the maximum pricethat they would be willing to pay it is believed that there is also aminimum price for the product to be credible In other words consumershave an upper and a lower price limit in mind

This concept has been refined through further research and pricingtheorists now talk about consumersrsquo lsquoindifference zonersquo The boundaries ofthis psychological zone are marked by a belief that at the upper limit ifsomething is too expensive then consumers will not buy it because theyfeel the price is unjustified while at the lower limit if something is toocheap they will not buy it because they feel the value is suspectUncovering this indifference zone can form the basis of a successfuldemand-led pricing strategy in line with the tenets of the New Consumer

128 Value Creation

Figure 77 The evaluation of value

C

C

CBP

CMP

PP

E

P

P

T

C

E

T

andandS

LSCO

P

MT

z

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 128

Marketing model Ryanair is one example of an organization that takes thisvalue-centric approach to pricing seriously

RyanairRyanair is now the most valuable and profitable airline in Europe It haspowered its way to success by identifying a large under-served customerbase the leisure traveller Ryanair segmented the travel market and onrecognizing that the key values of the leisure traveller are price andpunctuality implemented a strategy to deliver low prices and on-time flightsIn doing so the company evolved a successful low-yieldhigh-volumebusiness model

Ryanair created its value proposition to appeal to the price-consciousconsumer by choosing to compete on routes served by large full-pricecarriers such as Air France and Lufthansa These airlines are highlysubsidized and therefore have little incentive to reduce their operating costskeeping prices to consumers high By removing non-value-added items suchas meals assigned seating and the use of major airports Ryanair was able tooffer prices up to 80ndash90 lower than the flag carriers on numerous routes Asa result it was able to gain market share and brand recognition within eachroute market Ryanairrsquos low cost base also forms a significant barrier tocompetition from larger airlines with high fixed costs

Taking advantage of the deregulation of the European market and thegrowing demand for affordable and reliable air travel Ryanair has created abrand experience that delivers more for less Pricing is managed in real timeFlights booked months ahead of departure are made available at the lowestprices while those booked nearer to the travel date are more expensive Tokeep processing costs down consumers are also encouraged using financialinducements to book via the airlinersquos website rather than over the phone

This second cell of the New Consumer Marketing model is an essentialbuilding block in a demand system It enables the organization to movefrom defining value to creating and communicating that value effectivelyand eventually to delivering it While the process of value creation isdependent on the interplay of new product development brandingpositioning and pricing it is ultimately the role of innovation thatunderpins its success

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Innovation provides a way of creating new value-producing resources orendowing existing ones with an enhanced potential for yielding profit

The Role of Price in Value Creation 129

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 129

bull It is the consumer and not the competition that lies at the heart ofinnovation Providing consumers with a step change in value thateffectively creates a new market can leave the competition standing asold sources of advantage are destroyed and new ones created

bull Organizations that work to reduce marketplace complexity areconstrained to an incremental approach to innovation Those thatchoose to absorb it can then work to create options and learn as anorganization resulting in more radical forms of innovation

bull Brands have become the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition

bull Brands are no longer built just through advertising to consumers theyutilize other stakeholders including alliances and staff

bull The positioning of a brand in the marketplace is a manifestation ofwhere it sits vis-agrave-vis the competition and in the same way thatconsumers invest a brand with its value they also determine thepositioning of a brand

bull Price represents the evaluation of the value proposition and the effectof the shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy isforcing organizations to switch their strategy from a cost-plusapproach to demand-led pricing policies

130 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 130

The process of delivering value to a specified audience through the mediaand channels of their choice

Delivering value = communicating and distributing the value created

Watchword = agility

In the consumption-led economy value delivery is undergoing rapidchange for two important reasons the emergence of the New Consumerand the proliferation of media and channels This changing marketingenvironment poses new challenges for organizations particularly in respectto how they manage media and channel choices customer service and thesupply chain To be effective organizations must ensure that theirstrategies for each of these key areas are aligned with the overall strategy oftheir demand system As with the first two cells this means having a value-centric orientation in the business

Value delivery is concerned with how consumers get to own the productor service It involves the way in which the offer is presented thetransaction is handled and after-sales service and support are providedThe third cell of the New Consumer model focuses on communicating anddistributing value in order to achieve maximum consumer responsivenessand satisfaction The key to success here is organizational agility

THE ROLE OF AGILITY IN VALUE DELIVERY

For a company to be agile it is to be capable of operating profitably in acustomer environment of continually and unpredictable changing customeropportunities

(S Goldman et al 1995)

Value Delivery 8

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 131

In the new marketplace of proliferating media and channel choicescharacterized by an increasing number of new products and services and adecline in organizational ability to forecast sales organizations need to beable to respond rapidly and flexibly to consumer requirements Thisdemands a capability to change gear and immerse the organization in newopportunities on a continual basis The phrase that resonates withmanagers is lsquothe need to develop organizational agilityrsquo

The notion of organizational agility has its origins in flexiblemanufacturing systems where it was believed that automation alone wouldconfer this capability Over time a wider business application has emergedlargely through developments in supply-chain management Currentthinking defines organizational agility as lsquoa business-wide capability thatembraces organizational structures information systems logistics processesand in particular mindsetsrsquo1 The agile organization creates competitiveadvantage for itself by being able to adapt its people and processes to thecontinually changing needs of the marketplace increasingly with the supportof technical innovation The challenge for consumer-serving companies is tofuse people and process approaches in order to achieve cost-effective valuedelivery Competitive advantage today lies in recruiting and motivating theright people while at the same time constantly improving business processesWhen either element people or process fails to embrace change theorganization is less nimble and thus less able to compete successfully

Organizational culture plays a significant role in achieving andmaintaining such agility The fusion of people and processes can only takeplace in an environment conducive to effective change managementCreating an appropriate organizational culture involves a number of factorsincluding for example the management of employees the sharing ofknowledge and the choice of performance indicators These factors areconsidered in more depth in the next chapter but are raised here as they canbe seen to have an impact on organizational agility in the cases offered in thischapter

New Consumer Marketing promotes organizational agility byencouraging a value-centric orientation in the organization A businessthat is focused on defining creating and delivering value profitably is abusiness that can lsquoturn on a sixpencersquo and exploit opportunities

The Veterans Agency (VA) formerly known as the War PensionsAgency provides a useful example

132 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 132

The Veterans AgencyThe Veterans Agency (VA) is responsible for assessing and paying pensionsto disabled servicemen and women and their spouses in the UK It wasestablished in Elizabethan times (when soldiers were paid pound10 a year) butwas launched as an executive agency in the mid-1990s In November 2000when the UK Prime Minister Tony Blair announced that surviving formerprisoners of war in the Far East were to receive a pound10000 special paymentfrom the Government the VA was faced with the task of tracking downthousands of individuals dispersed across the world As an agileorganization one that had its people and processes focused on consumerresponsiveness its project plan enabled 14000 claims to be processed inless than three months

For many organizations adopting a market-responsive approach tovalue delivery is a daily challenge Building on organizational strengthssegmenting customers in a meaningful way and utilizing IT to meetspecific objectives are a few of the many ways in which organizations canimprove their flexibility and customer responsiveness Lastminutecom is agood example here

LastminutecomIn 2001 the web-based travel company handled some 800000 onlinetransactions which included travel hotel and restaurant bookings and giftpurchases Around 20 of the pound124 million transaction value was generatedoutside its key markets in the UK and France Lastminute constantlyredesigns its website (see Figure 81) brings in new suppliers and improvesthe customer experience Its investment in IT is high due to a concentrationon web design connectivity voice-recognition software and a sophisticatedCRM system that segments 5 million customers on a database according to their purchasing habits The CRM system enables Lastminute to emailspecial offers to selected customers based on the companyrsquos knowledge oftheir previous purchases Since its launch four years ago the company hasgrown quickly through the acquisition of rivals and the involvement of majorplayers (eg BAA Sony Music Deutsche Telekom France Telecom andIntel) who have bought equity stakes in the company

THE ROLE OF MEDIA AND CHANNELS IN VALUE DELIVERY

New Consumers live in a global marketplace where they are increasinglyoffered lower prices greater convenience and more choice This is in large

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 133

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 133

part due to the proliferation of media and channels which organizations useto market their brands products and services Media strategies have to dowith how the value proposition is communicated while channel strategieshave to do with how it is transacted The role of media and channels is ofvital importance in delivering the value proposition as it relates to how andwhere the exchange of value takes place With todayrsquos empoweredconsumers able to go to market more easily than ever before organizationscan no longer afford to manage media and channels as if they were stand-alone entities

In the production-driven era media and channels were distinguishablefrom one another For instance television was considered a medium andretail was considered a channel Now in the consumption-led economymedia and channels have become closely related and even interchangeableFor example the retailer is rapidly becoming the media ownerrsquos biggestcompetitor This is evident in the fact that the lsquobig fourrsquo food retailers ndashTesco Asda Safeway and Sainsburyrsquos ndash currently account for 70 of

134 Value Delivery

Figure 81 Lastminutecom

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 134

household food expenditure and the media issue facing brand owners iswhether to advertise on television or run a gondola end promotion as ameans of reaching a large number of relevant consumers with anappropriate message or offer For many brand owners the answer is to focuspromotional resources in-store thereby communicating directly withconsumers at the point of purchase as opposed to communicating withthem through another medium that is not so closely tied to the point ofpurchase

The convergence of media and channel choice is the result of the comingtogether of two trends progress in brand thinking and the inexorablemarch of developments in IT As outlined in Chapter 7 a brand used to bethought of as a lifeless manipulable entity that was built throughadvertising Today it is seen as a dynamic asset that lives in the consumerrsquosmind an experience of the value proposition that is created throughmultiple touchpoints where the organization wittingly or unwittinglyengages the consumer

As media choices have expanded and become more sophisticatedopportunities for dialogue with the consumer have grown in a stepwisefashion Supplying organizations and consumers are no longer restricted tocommunicating with each other by telephone facsimile or post or throughface-to-face encounters with in-store staff or sales representatives Newtechnologies have given rise to personal and interactive media such asemail the Internet personal digital assistants (PDAs) mobile phones and the next-generation smart phone In the process of enrichingcommunication these developments have expanded the role of IT IT isnow not only concerned with the exchange of information but also withinteraction and with the promise of integration in the near future Wheredialogue can take place so the option to transact also arises and the use ofmedia and channels become interwoven

New Consumer Marketing demands an approach to media and channelsthat builds on the benefits of media and channel integration First amongthese benefits is the ability to develop organizational agility and thusenhance consumer responsiveness The new range of media and channelchoices available offers organizations the opportunity to lower costsprovide better service and personalize the value proposition The collectionand analysis of previously unimaginable kinds of data through increasinglysophisticated technologies makes this possible

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 135

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 135

Making the Most of Media Choices

The proliferation of media choices is causing tectonic shifts in marketingthinking about how they can be used to build brands Media decisions inthe production-driven era were about how to advertise to consumerswhich was a largely one-way exercise motivated by the desire to controlconsumer response In a subsequent phase more interactive media choicessuch as direct response media (eg direct mail offers and direct responsetelephone lines) were used to encourage more continuous communicationbetween consumers and the organization In the consumption-led economythe aim is connectivity or the development of a shared understanding thatcomes from ongoing dialogues experiences and shared values that developbetween a marketer and consumers (Schultz and Lindberg-Repo 2002)The challenge for marketers today is selecting the most effective andefficient combination of media from the wealth of interactive and non-interactive media options The goal is to ensure that consumers have aperfect experience across whatever media they use to interact with theorganization

Connectivity enables brand owners to build deeper and more enduringrelationships with New Consumers These relationships are developedthrough the empowered engagement of both participants in a two-wayinteraction process one that is exemplified by Nokia

NokiaThe Nokia Game is a multimedia adventure-cum-espionage role-playinggame which Nokia has been running for the last four years in 18 countriesattracting over half a million players in 2001 Clues are given out to players ina range of ways including text messaging voicemail email the Internet (seeFigure 82) TV radio and the press The game is based on the lsquofuture ofcommunicationrsquo and it educates players on future technologies and applica-tions Players have to find out about everything from different ringtones andmenu systems through to GSM and GPRS in order to progress from onestage of the game to the next

More than just a form of play the Nokia Game is a marketing platform thatcreates Nokia brand advocates by being particularly relevant and credible toa specifically defined audience The game gets consumers highly involved inthe brand by engaging and rewarding them for their attention and therebycreating a virtual Nokia community In effect players give Nokia permission tomarket the companyrsquos products to them In this way the various levels ofdialogue ndash texting voicemail press for example ndash enable a mutual

136 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 136

understanding and reciprocal generation of the value proposition Playersgain knowledge and excitement from the game while Nokia benefits frombuilding knowledge of its consumers The game grows as the network ofplayers grows and the bonds between Nokia and the players develop

lsquoGaining permissionrsquo is a facet of media strategy that has emerged withthe coming of the consumption-led economy New Consumersrsquo highlyfragmented lifestyles and time pressures mean that they have less time tomeet all the demands on them They are not the passive subjects ofmarketers but discerning and demanding customers Part of the valueexchange in the consumption-led economy relates to the value theseconsumers get out of investing their attention As Herbert Simon NobelPrize winning economist has noted lsquoInformation consumes attention hellip awealth of information creates a poverty of attention hellip the only factor thatbecomes scarce in a world of abundance is human attentionrsquo Permissionmarketing (Godin 1999) has therefore developed out of the problemsassociated with gaining the attention of consumers Where a marketerreceives the consumerrsquos permission the conscious effort required by theconsumer to pay attention more often than not results in dialogue betweenthe two parties

The challenge for brand owners in making the most of media choices hasan external and an internal component Externally they are aiming to

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 137

Figure 82 The Nokia Game

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 137

replicate the experience of a one-to-one relationship where the consumerfeels they are being spoken to by the same person in every encounter Theinternal challenge is to generate data across the various media to create asingle unified view of the consumer This single view ensures thatregardless of the medium or channel through which the consumer interactswith the organization the consumer is recognized and the history of theirrelationship is remembered Achieving this single view demands clearobjectives in the management of data issues that are explored later inChapter 9

From a consumer perspective a perfect experience that replicates thefeeling of being spoken to by the same person in every brand encounter ismost likely to be delivered through a media-neutral strategy Theintegrated brand communications strategies adopted by Volkswagen andStella Artois provide good examples Volkswagenrsquos multimediamulti-agency approach has helped the brand double its new car sales and valueshare within six years The strategy which includes the use of PR directmarketing online marketing cinema and radio led directly to 151000extra sales and pound199 billion extra revenue for VW UK

Stella ArtoisStella Artoisrsquo communications strategy cleverly exploits knowledge ofconsumer lifestyles and the popular medium of film Research into thebrandrsquos largely young male (aged 18ndash34) consumer base had revealed that ahigh majority visited the cinema or rented videos on a regular basis At a timewhen most other lager beers were using sport to communicate their brandvalues Stella adopted the theme of film Its communications strategyincluded advertisements that possessed a cinematic feel film sponsorshipon Channel 4 film events around the UK and on-pack promotions forBlockbuster videos The task of making this theme work across a number ofagencies fell to the marketing manager who appointed a lead agency foreach cycle of the strategy The specialist agencies ndash in advertising salespromotions media buying consumer and trade public relations for examplendash then activated the element of the strategy within their particular mediumCrucial to this way of working is that everyone buys into the same definition ofthe brand echoing the need for brand clarity discussed in Chapter 7

As well as integrating media choices across channels some brand ownersare pioneering integration across a number of brand owners to deliver aperfect experience for consumers The aim of these brand owners is to cross-

138 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 138

promote their own operations and develop long-term marketingpartnerships Disney is one company that has pursued such an integrativeapproach

DisneyDisney has a number of cross-media deals with global partners such asHome Depot and McDonaldrsquos In 2001 the DIY chain Home Depot signed athree-year tie-up across Disneyrsquos ABC network ESPN sports channel andLifetime channel The deal was reported to be worth pound65 million to Disney Aspart of the agreement Disney is launching a range of branded childrenrsquospaints in Home Depot and has also agreed to purchase Home Depot productsfor its own operations Disneyrsquos ten-year deal with McDonaldrsquos successfullycross-promotes Disney films through childrenrsquos Happy Meal promotions inMcDonaldrsquos restaurants

Making the Most of Channel Choices

In the same way that the proliferation of media choices is causing a shift inthinking about how best to communicate the value proposition theexpansion of marketing channels is challenging thinking about how bestto transact value The brand owner must devise a channel strategy that isappealing to its target consumers and profitable to its business This mayinvolve the use of a single channel or a combination of channels The brandowner must choose from an ever-widening range of direct channels (egInternet telephone facsimile) and indirect channels (eg retailersdistributors and service providers)

As with media strategies the goal of channel strategies is to ensure thatthe consumer has a perfect experience across all the channels used One ofthe biggest issues for organizations here is to minimize channel conflictInteractive channels offer organizations the opportunity to transactdirectly with consumers faster and at a lower cost than most non-interactive channels do Consequently many organizations have decided tocut out the middlemen and have ceased using traditional intermediariesFor example call centre technology allows insurance companies such asDirect Line to offer and transact the value proposition by dealing withconsumers directly over the telephone This obviates the need for expensivenetworks of insurance brokers and keeps the premiums low creatingmutual benefit for both seller and buyer

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 139

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 139

While a strategy of lsquodisintermediationrsquo may appear seductive at firstsight channel strategy development should be based upon the optimumcombination of channels necessary to provide the most effective and efficientmeans of delivering the value proposition Different channels offer differentadvantages (see Figure 83) Norwich Union for example sells financialproducts directly to consumers through independent financial advisers(IFAs) The Guardian newspaper produces and sells newspapers throughintermediaries and also offers an online news service free of chargeThorntonrsquos the confectioner transacts its value proposition through anetwork of shops by phone fax and post and via the Internet

It is crucial for organizations to understand why their consumers preferto use one channel rather than another why for example some favourremote interaction while others prefer transacting face-to-face Identifyingand satisfying the channel preferences of New Consumers is particularlychallenging as these may change according to the type of purchase or thetime at which the transaction takes place For instance consumers may becontent to book a weekend trip to Europe using the online facility of adiscount airline but may prefer completing the transaction for a lengthiersummer trip abroad in a face-to-face encounter Above all New Consumersare looking for organizational agility ndash a supplier who can adapt to theirdiffering needs on different purchasing occasions Channel strategydecisions therefore need to be reviewed regularly and adjusted asappropriate

Another popular channel strategy in the consumption-led economy isreintermediation or the introduction of new types of intermediaryExamples of this include the use of web-enabled information agents alsoknown as lsquoinfomediariesrsquo who carry out information searches on behalf ofprospective purchasers Some infomediaries not only research products andservices on behalf of consumers but also manage sales transactions and post-sales service agreements Autobytel for example providesinformation about car prices and purchase availability and will evenfacilitate the sale and organize delivery This one-stop-shop approach isattractive to many New Consumers who have little time to shop aroundfor best value Some even engage lsquopersonal shoppersrsquo such as TenUK to actas their own purchasing agents across a number of sectors

Organizations such as Conciera which offers clients a technology platformon which to transform their businesses in line with this buyer-centric

140 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 140

philosophy believe that this is where the future of channel strategydevelopment lies ndash that by acting as the consumerrsquos partner and providingaccess to a new set of information tools across new media and telephonechannels agent-based businesses will create and deliver new forms ofsuperior customer service and consumer value

THE ROLE OF SERVICE IN VALUE DELIVERY

The arrival of the consumption-led economy has elevated the role of servicein the creation and delivery of the value proposition Increasinglyorganizations are recognizing service as a source of competitivedifferentiation Service excellence is seen as a key profitability driverSouthwest Airlines (SWA) and First Direct are examples of organizationsthat have used service to enhance the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition SWA has transformed cabin service into a form ofentertainment that is regularly promoted by word-of-mouthrecommendation Similarly First Direct now offers a remote bankingservice that consumers have warmed to and are keen to advocate In boththese cases the consumerrsquos experience of the brand is delivered through theactions and attitudes of staff In effect the service delivered by staff is thebrand

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 141

Figure 83 This Royal Mail advertisement shows the extent of channel choice

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 141

Despite wide acknowledgement of the value of providing high levels ofservice many customer-care activities fail to meet buyer and supplierexpectations New Consumers are more demanding and sophisticated intheir expectations of service and organizations need to be able to respondaccordingly This requires an ethos of consumer responsiveness within thebusiness and New Consumer Marketing proposes a living demand systemto enable this to flourish The NCM model acknowledges the importanceof employeesrsquo contribution to value creation and delivery this was exploredin Chapter 7 and is emphasized further in Chapter 9

Creating a Service Strategy

To optimize the role of service in the delivery process it is useful to breakservice down into its three component stages pre-transaction transactionand post-transaction The pre-transaction elements of service relate tocorporate policies or programmes involving written statements of servicepolicy and the planning of strategies for dealing with different types ofconsumers at various points in their relationship with the organization Thetransaction elements comprise the customer service variables that aredirectly involved in the delivery of the value proposition such as productavailability order cycle times service ambience and so on Post-transactionelements have to do with the support consumers receive once they takeownership of the product or service These may include warranties partsand repair services complaint procedures loyalty clubs and so on

To ensure a consistent approach across these three stages of the serviceencounter exemplary organizations create a service strategy As suggestedby Professor Martin Christopher in his book The Customer Service Planner(1992) service strategy involves the identification of a service mission inwhich the organization articulates its service pledge and the setting ofservice objectives These objectives should link back to the insightgenerated by the organization into the nature of the value consumers areseeking and the consequent analysis of opportunities available They willthus serve to highlight the importance of service quality variables such asreliability responsiveness assurance and empathy Service strategy canthen be refined for different consumer segments as different clusters ofconsumers will be looking for different service packages Once a servicepackage has been developed for each segment service programmes can be

142 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 142

implemented The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company is extremely focused oncreating exactly the right service levels for its customers

The Ritz-Carlton HotelThe Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company has created a value-centric service strategythat is implemented across the world by its 22000 employees The companywas awarded the Malcolm Baldridge National Quality Award in 1992 and1999 and is one of only two companies to have received the award twiceThis is a considerable achievement given that the company operates in anindustry where high staff turnover rates are the norm The companyrsquos strategyis characterized by an emphasis on generating employee satisfaction basedon a belief that this results in customer satisfaction which in turn deliversgreater profitability The strategy is pursued in a number of ways Forexample each day every member of staff has a meeting with their supervisormanager the vice-president or the chief executive at the start of their shiftAlthough the meeting lasts only 15 minutes it covers all the essential itemsfrom which VIPs are staying in the hotel to staff suggestions about serviceimprovements What sets this pre-shift briefing apart from the way other hotelchains organize is that every employee of the company across the worlddiscusses the same subject on the same day Each day the briefings focus onone of 20 basic service principles standards that were laid down when thecompany was formed The following are a few examples

No 10 ndash Each employee is empowered For example when a guest has aproblem or needs something special you should break away from yourregular duties to address and resolve the issueNo 11 ndash Uncompromising levels of cleanliness are the responsibility ofevery employeeNo 12 ndash To provide the finest personal service for our guests eachemployee is responsible for identifying and recording individual guestpreferences

Source Tony Mosely lsquoAre you being served The route to good customercarersquo Consumer Policy Review NovDec 2002

Recruiting and Motivating Staff

Acknowledgement of the importance of people in delivering service has ledto a greater interest in the recruitment motivation and retention of staffResearch shows that when employees identify with the norms and values ofan organization that reflect a commitment to customer service they are less

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 143

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 143

inclined to leave their jobs This reduction in employee turnover serves tostrengthen the organization It promotes a culture where service valuesbecome embedded in the way things are done and are more easily transmittedto successive generations of employees Recruitment is therefore of crucialimportance to organizations In order to attract and retain the highest qualityrecruits ndash those who share the organizationrsquos values and will make a majorcontribution to its future success ndash organizations have to market themselvesto potential recruits as employers of choice With changing demographicsthreatening the supply of young people in the West the so-called lsquowar fortalentrsquo (Michaels et al 2001) is an everyday reality for many companies

At the Ritz-Carlton recruitment is carried out using a number oftechniques Psychometric tests are used to identify candidates with theright work attitude and by matching their test scores against those of thebest performing staff the company is able to allocate jobs according toindividual suitability New employees undergo a minimum of fiveinterviews but provisional job offers are normally issued within 48 hours ofthe first interview so that good people are not lost to the competition

The Ritz-Carltonrsquos approach provides a rich contrast with the way Pret AManger recruits its staff Following application and interview Pret AMangerrsquos prospective candidates are paid to work for one day in one of thecompanyrsquos stores Staff already working in that store then make the finaldecision as to whether the candidate is employed This has the effect of

144 Value Delivery

Figure 84 Pret A Manger

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 144

empowering staff and ensuring only people with the lsquoPret attitudersquo (seeFigure 84) who are able to demonstrate they would uphold Pret AMangerrsquos values and ethos are taken on In fact only about 20 ofcandidates pass this exacting test

Staff motivation is another important part of retaining employees Mostorganizations use employment benefits and training and development toreward and motivate their employees As Singapore Airlines demonstratesthese need to fit with the values and culture of the organization and betailored to improving the overall value-centric ethos and practice of theorganization

Singapore AirlinesSingapore Airlines employs about 8 of Singaporersquos working population andis consistently voted one of the top local employers The training ofemployees is comprehensive ndash the programme for new stewardesses hasbeen referred to as a lsquodebutante boot camprsquo involving four months of socialas well as operational skills training Career development opportunities arestrong and staff are regularly appraised as a means of improving theirperformance In an effort to retain trained staff who have taken maternityleave the company operates a lsquoFlying Momrsquo scheme which enablesstewardesses with long service records to spend more time at home with theirfamilies

Other successful organizations have evolved similarly unique approachesto motivating staff which often depend on cross-functional collaborationbetween marketing operations and human resources management It isimportant that there is alignment between the value proposition offered toconsumers and that offered to employees For example Countrywide PorterNovelli (CPN) is a successful business-to-business PR consultancy thatoperates what it calls the 4Is culture

bull Imagination ndash making our work memorablebull Irreverence ndash challenging the status quobull Improvement ndash a little better every timebull Initiative ndash making the first move

This articulation of principles does not simply take the form of a brightlogo to be used in communications but provides a framework formanaging delivery of the value proposition both internally and externallyIt represents the distinctive advantage CPN believes it offers clients and

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 145

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 145

guides the recruitment training and promotion of staff internallyUnusually the director of personnel and development and the marketingdirector sit down together and discuss joint implementation of the internaland external marketing strategy on a regular basis

Empowering Employees to Live the Brand

A New Consumer Marketing approach to service requires the highestlevels of consumer responsiveness and service providers have a greatopportunity to make this a differentiated part of the value propositionWhat New Consumers are looking for is an individual response to theirparticular requirements and those on the so-called front-line of a businessare in a position to customize the experience for them The way employeesfeel about their job often defines the way they view the brand and the waythey communicate it to consumers For this reason many organizations seethe empowerment of employees as a business priority

The secret of success here is not so much a mechanistic prescription or aseries of instructions to staff but rather a dialogue where organizationshelp staff understand what the brand stands for and seeks to accomplishand what their individual role is in achieving the brand objectives It isimportant that employees receive information about organizationalperformance and that they are rewarded for contributing to it Whilelsquoliving the brandrsquo is a common corporate goal few organizations actuallyachieve it A MORI survey carried out in 2002 reported that 30 of UKemployees are brand neutral or are not interested in their companyrsquos brandwhile a further 22 are brand saboteurs actively working against thebrand culture This means less than half of the countryrsquos employees can beconsidered as brand champions who will spread their companiesrsquo brandvalues Of these 33 would talk positively about the brand if asked andonly 15 would talk positively about the brand spontaneously

Formal communication programmes that aim to market the brandinternally are used by many organizations to endow staff with an enhancedpotential for yielding profit For example Land Rover launched the latestRange Rover with a series of coordinated events for employees dealers andthe press Part of the strategy was the placement of the car in the TombRaider movie Around 20000 employees at Land Rover were invited toprivate screenings of the film and encouraged to bring their families

146 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 146

creating great word-of-mouth marketing British Airways when facedwith orchestrating 50000 articulations of the brand through its 50000staff worldwide launched the lsquoPassion for Servicersquo initiative It isessentially a training session to teach staff about brands and the BA brandin particular Having spent pound1 million developing Club World and pound200 million implementing it the internal marketing programme is a wayof protecting and enhancing that investment Brand clarity as discussedearlier in Chapter 7 is a necessary precondition of making staffempowerment work

Staff empowerment requires trust and courage on the part of theorganization as employees are given autonomy to interpret the brand in away that is both meaningful to them and their job and to consumersTesco for example empowers staff to respond to legitimate customercomplaints by giving them the authority to replace products or issuereimbursements without having to refer to supervisors In doing so thecompany demonstrates a respect for their employeesrsquo ability to assesssituations and manage customers In a similar move Abbey National hasgiven its front-line staff the power to take decisions such as reimbursingcustomers who feel they have been charged unfairly In both these cases bynot passing problem resolution up the chain of command consumers aremade to feel valued and respected The issue is dealt with quickly savingexpensive company time and ensuring customer satisfaction

Speed of response in resolving consumer problems is all-important asNew Consumers are becoming more marketing literate and less easy toplease Those whose issues are not dealt with swiftly and satisfactorily havethe confidence and wherewithal to make their views known across a rangeof media (as described in Chapter 2) Studies have shown that while up to98 of dissatisfied customers never complain when they receive poorservice 90 will not return to the disappointing vendor in future as aresult of the poor service Furthermore consumers who are dissatisfied arelikely to tell at least ten others about their poor service experience whereasa good service experience will be related to only three others This makes itdoubly hard for organizations to gain a reputation for good service and allthe more reason for an organization to work hard to maintain a goodreputation

The processes within an organization that are concerned with creatingdeveloping and maintaining an internal service culture and an orientation

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 147

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 147

that enables the organization to achieve its service goals are usuallymanaged as part of an internal marketing strategy The fundamental aim isto develop awareness of the value proposition sought by both internal andexternal customers and to remove functional barriers to organizationalperformance The organization must ensure that every employee whetherthey are directly or indirectly frequently or infrequently in contact withexternal customers contributes to the delivery of a superior valueproposition Despite the fact that for many organizations internalmarketing programmes are a formal part of the way value is transactedthere is no consensus on how these programmes should best beimplemented This is because the importance of internal marketing hasonly recently been acknowledged and because of the debate that has arisenabout exactly who within an organization should have responsibility for itThis topic is returned to in Chapter 9

THE ROLE OF TECHNOLOGY INTEGRATION IN VALUEDELIVERY

The integration of technology into service delivery is transforming manybusinesses and Petcareco Limited is a useful example of this Petcareco is aone-stop pet resort and care centre based in Washington Tyne and Wearwhich looks after pets (mainly cats and dogs) while their owners are onholiday (see Figure 85) As part of the service all sorts of creature comforts ndashfrom TVs to sofas ndash can be added to a petrsquos temporary lsquoapartmentrsquo Ahydrotherapy pool and a bespoke vet service complement the pet careservices The business is staffed by a team of dedicated animal lovers who aresupported in their work by a sophisticated but easily manageable range oftechnology For example handheld devices are used to carry daily pet careschedules and a back office system records data on every pet enabling thecompany to instantly recognize and recall any previous lsquoguestrsquo history anduse it to make the pet feel welcome and at home The aim is to ensure thatevery animal gets the right service at the right time in the right place

The aim of integrating technology into service delivery is to optimizethe use of available media and channels Again the goal is to ensure thatthe consumer has a perfect experience across all media and channels usedIntegration in todayrsquos complex and demanding marketing environmentrequires moving away from the conventional approach to media and

148 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 148

channel strategy which has been to have different specialist agenciesmanage various elements of the marketing mix while consumer enquiriesare dealt with at an external call centre

When call centres first appeared in the UK they were held up as thefuture of customer service By offering a central point of customer contactthe call centre was seen as the answer to a comprehensive approach tocustomer service It is estimated that there are currently around 6000 callcentres in Britain and the number is expected to rise to 8000 by 2005 TheUK call centre industry now employs almost 500000 people or 17 ofthe working population However laudable and popular an idea the callcentrersquos reputation has tarnished over time due to adverse publicity anddreadful consumer experiences In too many cases these centres have beenexposed as a means of cutting costs rather than improving service levelsSome organizations however go to great lengths to make their call centresas lsquohumanrsquo and customer-friendly as possible Virgin Mobilersquos call centre islocated at its headquarters in Wiltshire The centre is light airy anddivided into sections staffed by different teams that work in light-heartedcompetition with each other Eggrsquos communications centre in Derby hasalso employed new concepts in lighting colour and space Its teams workin mini-communities and comfy chillout zones create a positive workingenvironment A pleasant working environment helps keep staff motivationhigh and this in turn has a positive impact on customer satisfaction

The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery 149

Figure 85 Petcareco Limited (formerly known as Triple lsquoArsquo)

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 149

The unique feature of these two companiesrsquo call centres is that they usetechnology as a means to an end to enhance the delivery of the valueproposition When organizations focus on technology as an end in itselfvalue-centricity is unattainable The challenge is deciding where and howto integrate technology into the implementation of service strategy Thedecision-making process is made easier where the organization has a serviceblueprint or map of its service processes2 This effectively reduces serviceencounters ndash or all points of contact between the consumer and theorganization ndash to a series of interrelated steps and sequences as the examplein Figure 86 shows It offers an opportunity to review service strengths andweaknesses and plan resource allocation more appropriately as well as tocommunicate responsibilities throughout the organization

Multichannel centres are now emerging as the next generation ofcontact centre Call centres are becoming web enabled and consumers canmake contact with the organization according to their channel preferenceIn some cases in the US for example call-centre staff are being replaced bytechnology that plugs into the software that runs the companyrsquos websiteVirtual call-centre operators or V-Reprsquos who can talk to and understandcustomers are taking their places The range of options now available to anorganization affords a high level of flexibility as the case of Nestleacutedemonstrates

NestleacuteNestleacute is testing this new approach to multichannel customer managementThe company is seeking to manage and execute everything ndash from thecreation of one-to-one consumer communications through to generating andresponding to phone fax post and email enquiries ndash from a dedicatedcommunications centre The project has been piloted in France at alsquorelationship centrersquo set up by McCann Relationship Marketing Paris (MRM)a division of McCann Erickson World Group Nestleacutersquos advertising agency

Nestleacute has promoted details about how to contact the company on productssince the 1960s However in 2000 this became a more forceful invitation forFrench consumers to make contact when Nestleacute introduced its Nestleacute enDirect scheme This initiative along with Club Nestleacute a club for consumersforms the basis of Nestleacutersquos consumer relationship activity in France Both activities are used to encourage consumers to communicate with the company and provide their personal details Nestleacute uses this data to segment consumers and to tailor one-to-one promotional and marketingactivity

150 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 150

Fig

ure

86

Cus

tom

er c

onta

ct c

omm

unic

atio

ns a

nd re

latio

nshi

p pr

oces

s S

ourc

e D

r Ray

mon

d P

ettit

New

Jer

sey

Inst

itute

of T

echn

olog

y

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 151

To manage all these activities more effectively Nestleacute has taken theinnovative step of creating a multichannel communications centre under oneroof All forms of enquiry made by French consumers to the company ndash anestimated 200000 a year ndash are handled by MRMrsquos relationship centre Inmoving response handlers alongside advertising creatives customerintelligence experts new media branding and management consultants theconsumer is put at the heart of the business Nestleacute foresees a number ofbenefits from this new approach It is more flexible and allows betterintegration between different communications channels as well as givingcontrol over the quality of all one-to-one consumer communications

Source Meg Carter lsquoTowards a closer relationship with customersrsquoFinancial Times 11 March 2002

THE ROLE OF THE SUPPLY CHAIN IN VALUE DELIVERY

As we have seen New Consumers demand goods and services through anever-changing mix of media and channels Meeting their requirements forfaster better and cheaper service and delivery depends heavily on themake-up and robustness of the supply chain Only those organizationswhose supply chains are capable of responding rapidly to volatile demandwill thrive in this post-quake business environment

Increasingly business theorists are talking about developing demand-led supply chains to deliver the required level of consumer responsivenessThis means moving away from the simplistic approach that characterizedsupply-chain management in the production-driven era Then supplychains were relatively unsophisticated extending forwards throughdistributors and retailers to the consumer and then stretching backwardsthrough component assemblers to the suppliers of the raw materialsSupply chains were linear and supply-chain management was to do withmanaging delivery trucks and storage sheds (or so it seemed) Over the pasttwo decades supply chains have grown in complexity and many nowresemble lsquowebsrsquo or lsquonetworksrsquo of collaborative relationships The evolutionof the supply-chain network has been accelerated by the application of ITThe impact of the Internet in particular has enabled widely distributedoperations to be brought together at a relatively low cost

This network or lsquoextended enterprisersquo approach to managing thesupply chain has developed in response to the downward pressures on pricearising from global overcapacity growing competition and more powerful

152 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 152

customers (issues that were discussed in Chapter 3) Falling market pricescompel organizations to turn their focus inwards and to concentrate onreducing costs Over the past decade rationalization within the supplychain has been a major source of cost savings The idea of lsquoleanmanufacturingrsquo promulgated by James Womack3 at MIT in the early1990s has attracted considerable interest Based on the production systemused in Japanese-owned automobile manufacturing plants particularlythat of Toyota the idea was later extended to form the wider concept of thelsquolean enterprisersquo The focus of this approach is the elimination of waste andthe creation of competitive advantage through lower cost prices Criticsargue that it only works well where demand is relatively stable and hencepredictable and where the requirement for variety is low In todayrsquos morevolatile markets where consumer requirements stipulate more productvariety and where the ability to forecast demand is diminishing a differentapproach is called for

Competing through the Supply Chain

As pointed out by Professor Martin Christopher of Cranfield School ofManagement nowadays it is supply chains rather than companies thatcompete in the marketplace (Christopher and Peck 1997 Christopher1998) One of the clearest examples of an organization that competesthrough its supply chain is Dell

DellMichael Dell eschewed the use of conventional channels to distribute his PCsand focused instead on direct sales Consumers can select their own PCconfiguration online at Dellcom and within just 90 minutes their personallycustomized lsquogrey boxrsquo will roll off the factoryrsquos production line Dellrsquos suppliershave built their factories close by and inventory is down to four days makingDell the number one computer service provider in the world When Dell didattempt to break into established retail distribution channels in the early1990s it all went badly wrong and the company pulled out after suffering itsfirst ever loss The direct sales model offers Dell a structural advantage thatrivals IBM and Hewlett-Packard do not have

Source Amanda Hall lsquoThe boy who lived the American dreamrsquo The SundayTimes 1 December 2002 Michael Dell and Catherine Fredman (1999)Michael Dell (2002)

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 153

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 153

Acceptance of the philosophy that it is supply chains that compete withone another rather than companies has led organizations to acknowledgetheir strengths and weaknesses and to outsource those activities theybelieve can be performed more cost-effectively by others The supply chainhas in effect become a confederation of closely linked specialists whosecooperative behaviour creates a highly differentiated value chain

Often it is not technology that is the barrier to making these complexpartnerships work but lack of trust As highlighted in Chapter 3 thesharing of information and expertise previously considered confidential isessential in building the degree of trust necessary for collaboration Anumber of major retailers have already begun the process of implementingthis collaborative approach to strategy making setting up private web-based exchanges requiring the integration of both partiesrsquo internal systemsto share data and ideas Building these closer relationships betweenbusinesses can be very beneficial Some estimate that the introduction of e-procurement systems founded on joint working arrangements can shortenorder fulfilment cycles by 70 and cut administration costs by 50ndash70 Itis even believed that inventory costs can be halved ndash a significant benefitconsidering that holding stocks of unsold goods is a primary cost escalator

Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression

Consumer responsiveness is dependent on superior levels of insightinnovation and agility As far as the supply chain goes the focus has to beon the elimination of time rather than of waste The aim of timecompression in supply chains is to shorten the total pipeline time betweenthe procurement of materials and payment for the finished goods In mostorganizations it takes longer to procure make and deliver the finishedproduct to the customer than the customer is prepared to wait giving riseto a mismatch in expectations that is known to as the lsquolead-time gaprsquoNormally organizations overcome this problem by carrying lsquobufferrsquo orsurplus stock The amount of inventory is typically based on a forecast ofwhat the market will require However forecasting is a far from accuratescience As Martin Christopher says organizations that manage to closethis lead-time gap lsquoneed neither forecasts nor inventory making themmore responsive to customer demand and able to reduce the cost offinancing the pipelinersquo (Christopher 2001)

154 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 154

Establishing partnerships with other members of the supply chain is one ofthe most critical ways in which organizations can develop a more responsivesupply chain This usually involves a rationalization of the supplier base as itis easier to develop closer relationships with a smaller number of strategicsuppliers rather than trying to manage closer relationships with hundreds orthousands of suppliers These relationships are characterized by synchronizedoperations and the transparency of information The Zip Project at Marks ampSpencer is an example of this new way of working

ZipZip is a joint venture between Marks amp Spencer and Desmond a long-standingsupplier to Marks amp Spencer based in Northern Ireland that was created as partof a wider plan to enable Marks amp Spencer to escape its well-publicized woes ofthe late 1990s The company had to face up to the fact that it was not deliveringfashion fast enough to the shop floor and its prices were not competitive Zip isdesigned to provide Marks amp Spencer with greater competitive advantage inthe area of childrenrsquos clothing through improved supply-chain managementMarks amp Spencer has made cost savings by changing its traditionalrelationships with suppliers eliminating areas of duplication and increasing thespeed with which its goods come to market Traditionally suppliers created thegoods and brought them to the buying teams at Marks amp Spencer who thendecided which goods had the greatest appeal Marks amp Spencer has nowbrought much of this design function in-house

Under the new arrangements Ziprsquos London office is responsible for thedesign work and fabric development while samples are developed inNorthern Ireland Samples are costed and different suppliers includingDesmond itself then bid to produce the finished garment The advantage ofthis approach is that Zip retains the copyright on the designs and theirmanufacture can therefore be shifted from supplier to supplier as required oras capacity becomes available ndash Marks amp Spencer uses 120 differentsuppliers in 28 countries Having greater consistency and control overproduction realizes savings that can be passed on to consumers The biggestadvantage however lies in the reduced amount of time it takes to get adesign on to the shop floor the organization can react quickly to thefickleness of pre-teen fashion Traditionally this process has taken 28 weeksZip aims to reduce this to 12 weeks The potential rewards are great aschildrenrsquos wear accounts for about 10 of Marks amp Spencerrsquos non-food salesworth between pound300 and pound400 million

Source Martin Waller lsquoMampS takes a fresh route to childhoodrsquo The Times7 September 2002

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 155

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 155

Another way of closing the lead-time gap is through rationalizinginternal processes The key here is to remove all non-value-addingprocesses lsquoValue-adding timersquo activities create a benefit for whichconsumers are prepared to pay lsquoNon-value-adding timersquo activities do notcreate customer benefit and are a drain on company resources One of themost effective means of creating a value-adding culture within theorganization is to focus externally on the value proposition that consumersare seeking Guinness achieved this in the mid-1990s by basing anoverhaul of its business processes on insight generated into what consumerswanted from the company

GuinnessIn the mid-1990s Guinness was one of the few large brewers not to own anylicensed premises (pubs and clubs) in the UK The company relied onconsumer demand to persuade its trade customers (those who owned theroutes to market largely other brewery companies) to stock its productsGuinness stout held sales remarkably well in a declining market for darkcoloured beers but in the early 1990s competition was heightened by thelaunch of rival stouts such as Murphyrsquos and the rising popularity of importedbottled beers Faced with the threat of more vigorous competition Guinnessundertook a review of its business and as a consequence set aboutimproving its performance in the marketplace

Guinness invested heavily in a brewery upgrade to ensure the quality of itsproduct but was dissatisfied with the results of its insight generation activitywhich revealed that consumers were often disappointed with the quality of apint of Guinness consumed in different outlets Guinness like other cask

156 Value Delivery

Figure 87 Guinnessrsquo lsquoPerfect Pintrsquo

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 156

beers is a lsquoliversquo product and needs to be stored and handled carefully Whereprocedures are not followed the result is an experience of variable quality forconsumers What consumers were looking for was expressed as lsquothe perfectpint in every pubrsquo

Guinness used this insight to inform internal decision making about whichprocesses needed to be in place to ensure consistent delivery of the perfectpint enabling them to create a cross-functional approach to businessGuinness worked with its partners in the supply chain to educate the pubtrade about the importance of looking after the product and serving itcorrectly This was a three-stage operation known as lsquothe pour the settle thetop uprsquo and it provided a focus for training in-house staff in pubs and clubs(see Figure 87) Consumers were also targeted with an award-winningadvertising campaign that extolled the virtues of waiting for a perfect pint Thiscoordinated range of activities based on a clear strategy propelled Guinnessto achieve its highest ever share of the total draught market

Source Presentation by Julian Spooner at Cranfield School of ManagementJanuary 1996

A third method of improving consumer responsiveness through supply-chain management is by maximizing the potential of each customerinterface The aim is to be able to capture information on probable demandfrom consumers as close to the final point of consumption as possible Areal breakthrough in data collection has been achieved by linking buyersrsquoand suppliersrsquo information systems through initiatives such as EfficientConsumer Response (ECR) Quick Response (QR) and Electronic DataInterchange (EDI) ECR an attempt to bring about more effectivecollaboration across all supply-chain members is most closely associatedwith the grocery industry where it is designed to integrate and rationalizeproduct assortment promotions new product development andreplenishment across the supply chain QR was developed in the USA tohelp clothing businesses compete against lower priced imports By takinga total supply chain view of an industry QR makes it possible tounderstand overall performance and the causes of poor performance and toidentify opportunities for improvement EDI a technology forbroadcasting demand data was the forerunner of web-enabled systems andis still widely used by larger suppliers

The advantage of systems integration among supply-chain partners isthat it enables the different parties to act on the same aggregate data in areal-time environment Each partner can gain a clearer picture of consumer

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 157

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 157

demand than they would otherwise be able to obtain independently andgreater consumer responsiveness can be achieved throughout the supplychain The benefits of such collaboration within knowledge managementand operational systems are especially important in developing keyaccounts4 as these normally command a higher strategic value

The importance of being able to act on real-time demand data becomesmore acute the more volatile the market This is particularly the case withsuppliers of fashionable or weather-dependent goods and services whosecompetitive survival depends on rapid reactions to unpredictable marketchanges For an organization like Britvic which markets and manufacturesits own brands such as Tango as well as canning and distributing Pepsi-Cola in the UK demand for soft drinks can double on hot days Insituations where the product has a limited shelf life or the organization hasan obligation to meet high trade-customer service levels stock-outs cannotbe tolerated Access to instant accurate and complete demand data iscritical to the running of flexible manufacturing operations that aim toensure constant availability Indeed availability becomes a more criticalmeasure of consumer responsiveness than productivity in todayrsquosmarketplace

While some suppliers favour a strategy of rapid stock replenishment as away of managing the amount of inventory they carry others follow astrategy of postponement or delaying the finishing or value-addingactivities until customer orders have been received The clothingmanufacturer and retailer Zara for example purchases a high proportion ofits fabric in an undyed (or grey) state On receipt of incoming orders thefabric is dyed patterned and finished by a fully owned subsidiary which isa supplier to Zara as well as to other manufacturers By working in thisway Zara is able to originate a design and have the finished goods in itsstores within weeks as opposed to the traditional industry model whichmay take up to six months

Advances in supply-chain thinking are driving the concept moretowards the notion of demand-chain management which is totally inkeeping with New Consumer Marketing (Gattorna 1998) By its verynature a supply chain focuses on making the flow of product from source toend user as efficient as possible In contrast a demand chain focuses onmeeting market needs in the most relevant timely and cost-effective wayIn other words a demand system sees the lsquopipelinersquo as driven from the

158 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 158

consumer end placing the emphasis on consumer responsiveness ratherthan vendor efficiency The differences between these two approaches aresummarized in Table 81

Table 81 Agile supply chain management versus a traditional approach

This third cell of the New Consumer Marketing model marks the pointat which the symbiotic relationship with the consumer is developed Thevalue that has been defined and created is finally delivered to themarketplace and exchanged with the consumer While the process of valuedelivery is contingent on the interplay of media and channels servicetechnology integration and the supply chain it is the role of organizationalagility that is of fundamental importance

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Organizational agility is an enterprise-wide concept that demands anability to change gear and immerse the organization in newopportunities on a continual basis

bull Media choice is to do with how the value proposition is communicatedwhile channel choice is about how it is transacted However at

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 159

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 159

[Text not available in this electronic edition]

touchpoints where consumers can be engaged in dialogue theopportunity for transaction arises leading to the interrelationship ofthe two as an integrated media and channel strategy

bull The goal of a multimediamulti-channel strategy is to ensure that theconsumer has a perfect experience across all the media and channelsused Each time the consumer comes into contact with a brand theyshould feel like they are talking to the same person

bull Service is an important differentiator in the marketplace The way inwhich service staff deal with consumers simultaneously creates anddelivers value at the point of consumption In effect the valueexperience is the brand

bull The recruitment motivation and retention of staff are key elements ina successful service strategy

bull Empowering employees takes trust and courage on the part of theorganization as employees are given autonomy to interpret the brandin a way that is both meaningful to them and their job and toconsumers

bull Supply chains play a major role in determining consumerresponsiveness and competitive advantage In the new marketplacesupply chains must become demand-led

bull Consumer responsiveness requires a supply-chain focus on theelimination of time rather than of waste Availability becomes the keymeasure rather than productivity

160 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 160

Seven elements of organizational lsquoDNArsquo make a demand system viable

Managing a demand system is fundamentally different to managing asupply system It requires turning the supply chain on its head and takingthe consumer as the organizationrsquos starting point and not its finaldestination As established early on in this book New Consumers aresophisticated and demanding and they inhabit an interactive rather thana static marketplace To succeed in this challenging and ever-changingmarketing environment organizations must adopt a value-centricorientation By focusing on delivering the value consumers actually needand want organizations can make the radical transition from operating ina production-driven to operating in a consumption-led economy

The New Consumer Marketing model (see Figure 91) draws onlearning from the living sciences and conceptualizes the marketing processas three organic cells of a living demand system Having discussed thenature and function of each of the three cells ndash value definition valuecreation and value delivery ndash in Chapters 6ndash8 it is now appropriate toexamine how the cells work together and what organizational elementscontrol and inform their performance

The way in which these cells collaborate to keep the demand systemalive and effective is dependent on the make-up of the lsquoorganizationalDNArsquo In biology DNA is the material that carries an organismrsquos geneticinformation such as that needed by cells to make enzymes Enzymes areimportant because they control the processes that occur within cells Theydetermine which chemicals are made in a cell and what the cell will do Theinformation about which enzyme to make and when has to be permanentlystored in each cell so that it can be drawn upon as necessary The

Demand System Management 9

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 161

relationship between biological DNA and enzymes provides a goodmetaphor for understanding the elements that inform and trigger whathappens in a market-driven organization

Organizational DNA consists of seven elements that fall into two typesthose that are people related (intuition culture and structure leadershipvision and values employees) and those that are process related (knowledgemanagement planning measurement) Each element carries informationto the three cells value definition value delivery and value creation Thisinformation enables each cell to optimize performance thereby ensuringthe competitive survival of the organization as a whole Operating aneffective demand system requires an understanding of the role and impactof all of these elements in order that they can be expertly managed Themain challenges facing New Consumer Marketing (to meet the needs ofbrand owners and retailers to embrace the New Consumer to develop realconsumer responsiveness and to arrest the crisis in marketing) reinforcethe imperative of addressing these business aspects in a systemic manner

162 Demand System Management

13

13

13 $

Figure 91 The New Consumer Marketing model

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 162

New Consumer Marketing breaks out of the binary thinking that has seenbusinesses swing between a focus on process and a focus on people Insteadit combines the two by identifying the key processes and relationships thatunderpin the organization and using them to help the organizationbecome as adaptable and competitive as possible

The seven elements of organizational DNA are

bull Intuitionbull Culture and structurebull Leadership vision and valuesbull Employeesbull Knowledge managementbull Planningbull Measurement

THE ROLE OF INTUITION IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

The mechanistic approach to management so characteristic of theproduction-driven era was based on rational systems that appealed to thereasoning skills of managers These systems were presented as if there weresome underlying algorithm for doing business Today management isabout engaging both our rational and our creative abilities Increasingimportance is being placed on corporate intuition and imaginationIntuitive ability plays a major role in demand system management bycontributing to the development of insight innovation and organizationalagility

In the definition creation and delivery of the value proposition thecapacity to instantly understand other peoplersquos behaviour thoughtswishes feelings and beliefs is a means of gaining additional perspectiveThrough intuitive understanding managers and staff can perceive thetruth of things without reasoning or analysis They can put themselves inthe consumerrsquos shoes and see the benefit of taking a particular course ofaction without needing any rational validation

Anthropologists believe that this capability is linked to the early socialdevelopment of humans particularly with our ability to interact with andinfluence others The ability of managers to understand mental states ndashboth their own and those of others ndash is known as Theory of Mind Theory of

The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management 163

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 163

Mind has been described as lsquoa start-up kit for learning about the mentalworldrsquo1 It is a kind of lsquomind readingrsquo which psychologists refer to asintuitive mentalizing Encouraging intuitive input in a demand systemstimulates innovative thought and a sense of empathy with consumersThis can lead to improvements in the market relevance of the valueproposition and thus enhancement of the consumerrsquos experience of thebrand

Most successful entrepreneurs have strong intuitive mentalizing skillsand they use these to put their lsquogood ideasrsquo about what consumers want intothe marketplace They are able to imagine what the value propositionshould look like and to marshal the organizationrsquos resources to deliver it Inheavily managed organizations this ability is often repressed Take forexample Woburn Safari Park part of the Woburn estate in BedfordEngland where the importance of intuition is fully recognized

Woburn Safari ParkAt Woburn Safari Park this elusive lsquosecond sightrsquo has been developed underthe leadership of chief executive Chris Webster Ten years ago the park wasin severe decline but a remarkable turnaround in performance has beenachieved through some radical thinking On the basis of gut feel the decisionwas taken to introduce a junior board of 11-year-olds to shadow the parkrsquos

164 Demand System Management

Figure 92 Woburn Safari Park

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 164

management board For the family-oriented attraction engaging the input ofyoung imaginations in strategy making was a wise move children of coursedo not hold back in asking the whywhy not questions Benchmarking visitsare made by the junior board to rival attractions and the childrenrsquos ideas areassimilated into the way Woburn Safari Park defines creates and delivers itsvalue proposition

Intuitive mentalizing is a very necessary ability in the delivery of serviceAs discussed in Chapter 8 front-line staff need to be able to demonstrateempathy with consumers if they are to convey consumer value in aconsistent and personalized way Where intuitive ability is lacking theorganization will have difficulty in predicting the behaviour of consumersreading their intentions and understanding their motives and emotions Atworst the organization will suffer from lack of commitment andmotivation to please The key challenge is to find ways of unleashing thepotential for corporate intuition Intuition is an ability not a function itmust be embedded within the organization and cannot sit isolated in onedepartment The development of corporate intuition lies in making it ashared approach to defining creating and delivering value and this canbest be achieved through the organizational culture and structure

THE ROLE OF CULTURE AND STRUCTURE IN DEMANDSYSTEM MANAGEMENT

Culture

Organizational culture is one of the most intangible elements of a demandsystem Its roots reach deep into the collection of beliefs and assumptionsthat are commonly held in the organization and its influence onorganizational performance is all pervasive Organizational cultureprovides a guide to acceptable internal behaviour summarized as lsquothe waythings are done around herersquo Culture therefore underpins a value-centricbusiness strategy

Trying to understand organizational culture can be as difficult for thoseinside the organization as for those outside it A useful tool for surfacingthe behaviours and artefacts that characterize a particular organization isthe culture web developed by academic researchers Professor GerryJohnson and Kevin Scholes (1992) This is shown in Figure 93 The

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 165

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 165

culture web makes explicit the rituals of organizational life ndash the dailyroutines that are often taken for granted but which all employees mustlearn when they join the organization It captures the stories told aboutpeople ndash the lsquoheroesrsquo and the lsquomavericksrsquo ndash whose fate symbolizes what theorganization is all about The culture web also notes the symbols thatconvey meaning within the organization ndash the use of logos the allocationof offices and car parking spaces etc

Depicting cultural aspects in this way helps in identifying themanagerial groups closely associated with the essence of organizationalculture a power structure that may not accord with the official companyorganigram The formalized ways in which the organization works ndash usingcommittees or working parties for example ndash also reflect the powerstructure and send signals throughout the company and its supply chainabout what is deemed important In many organizations there is anincongruity between the values that are promoted and the behaviours thatare rewarded A familiar example is the sales team that is told to maximizecustomer profitability while being rewarded on the basis of unit sales Theteam is tempted to offer discounts and inducements to customers as the

166 Demand System Management

Mythsand

stories

Routinesand

rituals

Controlsystems

Organizationalstructures

Powerstructures

Symbols

Paradigm

Figure 93 The cultural web of an organization Adapted from Johnson and Scholes(1992)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 166

overriding message is lsquomaximize volume rather than profitsrsquo Each of theseaspects that make up the cultural web can be characterized for anindividual organization As Figure 93 shows at the heart of culture is anunderlying paradigm within which the organization operates made up ofthe core beliefs assumptions and values that matter to it

Closely related to culture is the climate within the organization Thishas been summed up by researchers as lsquothe feeling in the airrsquo that one getsfrom walking around a company (Clark 1999) Organizational climate canbe created by employees observing what happens to them and what goes onaround them and drawing their own conclusions about the organizationrsquospriorities and what it values Employees then set their own prioritiesaccordingly about where they should focus their energies andcompetencies which in turn feed back into the organizational climateOrganizational culture and climate are therefore dynamic and sensitive tomanagerial influence Tesco is an example of an organization that hasmastered the management of these intangible aspects and used them toguide the development of a value-centric strategy

TescoIn 1992 the issue of organizational culture formed one of the foundationblocks of Tescorsquos lsquoFirst Class Servicersquo initiative which has since propelled thecompany to a dominant market position It represented a shift from thecompanyrsquos previous command-and-control approach to management Eachmember of Tescorsquos then 130000 staff was empowered to look aftercustomers in the way they thought best At the same time managers wereencouraged to recognize staff achievements and to set an example bytreating them as individuals so that they would in turn treat customers asindividuals This initiative was highly successful not least because staff weremade aware through internal marketing programmes that the averagepotential lifetime spend of a Tesco customer was significant amounting toaround pound90000

Source lsquoTesco Clubcard Foreverrsquo case study H Peck Cranfield School ofManagement 2002

There are however pitfalls in encouraging everyone in the company tothink in the same way which can easily happen when everyone is focusedon the same goals The danger is that the organization can fall into the trapof approaching every problem no matter how different in the same wayWhat is required is a management body that supports an innovative

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 167

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 167

culture one that encourages staff to think and respond differently but thatis nonetheless focused on the organizationrsquos vision and informed by itsvalues A value-centric orientation within the organization ensures thesedifferent ways of working are still legitimate Dell is one organization thatmanages its organizational culture very effectively

DellDellrsquos innovative culture supports risk taking and learning from failure AsMichael Dell says lsquoto encourage people to innovate more you have to makeit safe for them to failrsquo Dell achieves this by creating an internal culture thatquestions the status quo and encourages smart experimentation At Dellfailure is seen as a learning experience and is typically considered animportant milestone on the road to achieving success The nature of thebusiness means there is little relevant history for it to draw upon forcing theorganization to create its own response to the challenges it faces Dellmanagers also embrace an experimental attitude to decision makingSometimes it is not possible to wait for the relevant data before making adecision Under these circumstances managers are encouraged to make thebest possible decisions based on experience intuition available data and anassessment of risk

Source Amanda Hall lsquoThe boy who lived the American dreamrsquo The SundayTimes 1 December 2002 Michael Dell and Catherine Fredman (1999)Michael Dell (2002)

Tesco and Dell have used organizational culture as the basis ofcompetitive advantage Organizations that do not heed the importance ofmanaging internal culture effectively can fall prey to strategic drift andbecome increasingly incapable of self-renewal and self-determination Ineffect organizational culture determines business fate It is critical to thesuccessful implementation of a demand system that the prevailing culturein the organization supports and drives the development of insightinnovation and agility ndash the competencies that lie at the heart of each of thethree cells of the New Consumer Marketing model

Structure

The culture of an organization is embodied within the structure of theorganization Traditional vertical organizations which are hierarchicallystructured and functionally oriented work to optimize individual

168 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 168

functions at the expense of the entire business and the relationship with theconsumer Hierarchical structures work well when the marketingenvironment is stable and demand is predictable Now that the certaintiesof the production-driven era have been replaced by the uncertainties of theconsumption-led economy flatter horizontal organizational structures areemerging

These flatter horizontal structures enable organizations to be moreresponsive by speeding up decision-making processes and encouragingcross-functional collaboration which helps maximize consumer value andoperational cost-effectiveness Value-centric organizations draw keyemployees together in autonomous multidisciplinary teams to focusresources around value definition creation and delivery Often these teamsare temporary enabling the organization to combine and recombine assetsaccording to the nature of the opportunities that arise These are firms thatregard the organizational whole as greater than the sum of its parts

However this does not mean that organizations cannot grow big Tescofor example is one of a small number of organizations that has succeeded inbuilding the virtues of smallness into a large organization one that nownumbers around 200000 employees The company achieves this in partby having a shared understanding of what the business is aiming for Thisdraws from the companyrsquos clearly stated mission ndash lsquoto continually increasevalue for customers to earn their lifetime loyaltyrsquo ndash and its corporatevalues These values are embedded into the organization through a varietyof HR practices that focus on appraisal and reward systems

The strength of less hierarchically structured organizations lies not justin what they achieve as a single entity but in the power of the network theybuild around them through joint ventures strategic alliances andpartnerships This is the concept of the lsquoextended enterprisersquo and its successdepends on a new type of logic one that demands openness and cooperation(with consumers customers suppliers and competitors) The extended ornetworked enterprise places greater emphasis on the role of leadershipvision and values

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 169

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 169

THE ROLE OF LEADERSHIP VISION AND VALUES INDEMAND SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

Leadership

Leadership in organizational management is more important than everbefore in this post-quake business environment Businesses must aligntheir organizational philosophy and practices with the realities of theconsumption-led economy How an organization is led and managed inthis time of transition is a key differentiator in the marketplace Whilethere is no standard formula for what makes an effective leader NewConsumer Marketing demands a number of essential leadership skills2

First among these skills is the ability to engage others in the businessrsquosmission Leaders like Howard Schultz whose Starbucks business grewprofits by 92 to $1812 million on sales of $3 billion in 2001 have to beable to engage their employees in providing exceptional service tonumerous consumers every day Starbucks for example serves 20 millionpeople a week across 5000 outlets Key to achieving a dedicated workforceis the ability to communicate the corporate vision effectively to allstakeholders with a distinctive and compelling voice Internalcommunications form the most important part of this task and marketersare well placed to manage them as the essence of the internalcommunications process is similar to that of the external communicationsprocess It is also important for strategic reasons that both processes arealigned and marketers possess all the relevant skills for managing this

Secondly effective leadership provides focus inspiration and meaningwhich need to be communicated to everyone within the organization Themeasure of a leaderrsquos effectiveness can often be seen in the way he or shemanages this communication process Powerful communicators are goodat telling stories utilizing the potency of metaphors and language KjellNordstroumlm and Jonas Ridderstraringle the Swedish economics experts who co-authored the best-selling book Funky Business (2000) suggest thatlsquocommunicating a vision not only involves repetition and a carefullydistilled message it demands the ability to tell a story True leaders areCSOs ndash Chief Storytelling Officersrsquo

Senior managers at TGI Fridayrsquos restaurants have been telling the samestories for many years many of them based on the original stories told byfounder Dan Skoggins These work-related stories serve to convey the

170 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 170

vision and ethos of the company The lsquoemployee cloak theoryrsquo for examplesays lsquoYou were hired for your personality When you put on your uniformdonrsquot let it become a cloak and hide yourself behind it You are notexpected to be a robot in fact we believe our success comes from ourinteraction with the guests Work hard have fun make moneyrsquo

The third essential leadership skill required for New ConsumerMarketing to succeed is integrity including a strong set of personal valuesA sense of virtuousness is vital because organizational leaders become thede facto keepers of their companyrsquos vision and values In todayrsquos moretransparent business environment they need to be able to inspirecommitment among employees This will not be forthcoming whereprofessional integrity is lacking as a number of CEOs who havetransgressed the boundaries of honourable behaviour have found Carelessremarks made in public that appear to denigrate the companyrsquos vision andvalues may be seized upon by the media making the task of motivatingemployees much harder

Finally it goes without saying that business leadership demands anability to grasp the importance of the tectonic shift that has taken place inthe marketing environment This in turn implies a steadfast ability toweigh a number of factors and make appropriate decisions to ensure theorganization operates effectively and efficiently in defining creating anddelivering the value consumers are seeking

Vision

All organizations need a shared idea of why they exist and what they aremeant to achieve Vision and values work to support the organizationrsquosmission by providing answers to those key questions lsquowhere are we goingrsquoand lsquohow are we going to get therersquo Answering them becomes more of animperative in todayrsquos volatile marketplace This is because vision andvalues play an important part in realizing a value-centric orientation Theyforce the organization to think strategically about the long term whileproviding a framework for coping with turbulence in the short term Witha strong vision and firm values in place senior managers can delegateresponsibilities with more confidence local managers can get a clearerpicture of how to approach decisions and front-line staff can be guided incustomizing the value proposition for consumers

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values 171

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 171

The purpose of having good leadership is to create and regularly updatethe corporate vision and direct the organization towards its realization Inorder to provide unequivocal direction the business vision needs to beclear distinctive memorable motivating and meaningful to both staffand consumers Microsoftrsquos original vision was very strong (lsquoa computer onevery desk and in every homersquo) as is Disneyrsquos (lsquoto make people happyrsquo) andthat of the International Red Cross (lsquoto serve the most vulnerablersquo) The testof a strong vision is to see if people can recognize the organization from itsvision statement Many organizations either have no vision or have a visionthat is weak that is to say it is unclear too complex or simply irrelevant

It has been estimated that making a business vision work is 5 creationand 95 implementation Activating the vision starts at the top of theorganization and is a process that must involve all employees It is not untilpeople can see the vision in terms of what it means to them that it starts tobecome embedded within the organization This draws on the ability of the leader to communicate to employees the meaning of where theorganization is heading and what their role in this journey will beMarketers need to play their part by managing internal communicationsprogrammes effectively in order to support the organizational leadershipand to clarify and reinforce employee understanding Only then can visionbe translated into relevant and achievable strategies

Values

Values are a powerful and omnipresent part of organizational lifeAcademic researcher Milton Rokeach defines values as enduring beliefsabout preferable ways of behaving and a value system as an enduring wayof organizing those beliefs (1973) In the New Consumer Marketing modelcorporate values support the implementation of the corporate vision Theymake up the integral beliefs that guide organizational behaviourMoreover as their definition suggests values are not fashion items to bechanged on a regular basis values should stand the test of time SingaporeAirlines is one company that understands this well

Singapore AirlinesSingapore Airlines has six core values which support its mission statementlsquoWe are a global company dedicated to providing air transportation servicesof the highest quality and earning good returns for shareholdersrsquo Although

172 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 172

these words are rooted in operational and financial performance marketinghas transformed the airline into Fortune Magazinersquos most admired airline in2002 The key to Singapore Airlinersquos achievement are these core values (seeTable 91) which permeate every area of business strategy By translatingthese values into actionable and measurable practices within theorganization the company is able to build value-centricity and give realsubstance to its brand The airlinersquos employees see themselves as a part ofthe brand and this is reflected in their work performance adding significantvalue to the consumerrsquos experience

Table 91 Singapore Airlinesrsquo core values

1 Pursuit of excellence We strive for the highest professional standards in our workand aim to be the best in everything we do

2 Safety We regard safety as an essential part of all our operations Wemaintain and adopt practices that promote the safety of ourcustomers and staff

3 Customer first Our customers are foremost in our minds all the time We gothe extra mile to exceed their expectations

4 Concern for staff We value our staff and care for their well-being We treatthem with respect and dignity and seek to provide them withappropriate training and development so that they can leadfulfilling careers

5 Integrity We strive for fairness in all our business and workingrelationships

6 Teamwork We work with pride as a worldwide team to achieve successtogether

Where management action is not aligned with corporate values thevalues become meaningless as demonstrated in the fall from grace ofindustry giants Enron and Andersen in 2002 An organizationrsquos values arethe principles that the company abides by and is willing to enforce they arenot simply the words printed on the pages of company brochures It is allvery well drawing up carefully crafted values statements and codes ofpractice but these become pointless if employees are permitted tocontravene them Actions speak louder than words and an organizationrsquosvalues should be seen as non-negotiable minimum standards

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values 173

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 173

Business adviser and best-selling author Hugh Davidson pulls togetherthe role of leadership vision and values in his model of the lsquocommittedenterprisersquo (2002) This is shown in Figure 94 and is based on the formula

Committed customers + Motivated employees = Satisfied resourcefinanceproviders

Davidson believes that an enterprisersquos vision and values bind these threeconstituent parties (customers employees resource providers) byproviding future direction and governing everyday decision making andbehaviour Through vision and values the needs of the three parties arealigned and they are able to move forward together Davidson expressesthis through the use of a visual symbol that dates back to Roman times theThree Legs of Man lsquoWhichever way you throw me I standrsquo is the symbolrsquosaccompanying motto

Vision and values need to be embedded in the organization and this canonly be done by making them measurable and converting them intopersonal objectives for every member of staff Together with leadershipthey make up a complex but vital element in organizational DNAWhether or not an organizationrsquos vision and values are realized depends onappropriate leadership and on the management of employees

174 Demand System Management

Figure 94 The committed enterprise Adapted from Davidson (2002)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 174

[Image not available in this electronic edition]

THE ROLE OF EMPLOYEES IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

While marketers are confronting the shift from a production-driven to aconsumption-led economy human resource (HR) professionals are facing asimilar tectonic change as employees are increasingly perceived as anorganizational asset rather than a production cost This redefinition of therole of employees is a response to the decline in manufacturing and the riseof the Information Age which demands a radically different approach toHR management The role of employees is a matter of concern formarketers because the impact of an organization externally is tied to whatgoes on internally

The move away from manufacturing and the emergence of theknowledge worker brings in its wake a change in the asset base of theorganization As Peter Drucker says lsquothe most valuable assets of a 20th-century company were its production equipment The most valuable assetof a 21st-century institution whether business or non-business will be its knowledge workers and their productivityrsquo (Drucker 2002) Thisperspective forces a shift in the way in which people are evaluated withinthe organization In the manufacturing economy manual workers wereregarded as a cost which needed to be controlled and reduced andemployee management reflected this Employee productivity wasincreased through investment in plant and technology Knowledgeworkers in contrast are seen as a capital asset whose intrinsic value can begrown Their productivity is achieved in a very different way by placingresponsibility with the knowledge workers themselves The emphasis inHR management today therefore tends towards self-management andautonomy This ethos plays a crucial part in empowering staff to deliverbetter service as was mentioned in Chapter 8

The underlying assumption here is that unlike the manual workers ofthe production-driven era knowledge workers own the means ofproduction and enjoy greater levels of mobility in their careers thanprevious generations This is the thesis explored in the book Funky Business(Nordstroumlm and Ridderstraringle 2000) The authors write lsquoKarl Marx wasright The workers do control the means of production 13 kilograms ofbrain holds the key to all our futuresrsquo In their words lsquoItrsquos talent that makescapital dancersquo

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 175

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 175

Harnessing this talent means adopting a different approach tomanaging people Best-practice organizations whose thinking has movedout of the industrial age adopt the philosophy that they are in a more orless symbiotic relationship with employees and they create an internalvalue proposition to inform HR practice The organization employs peopleto define create and deliver value in the marketplace at a profit In returnfor their intellectual application development of potential and loyalty tothe organization employees receive a range of benefits

In the same way that the external value proposition described inChapter 6 is made up of component factors so too is the internal valueproposition It takes the form of a mix of two sorts of benefits andincentives There are extrinsic ones such as pay and promotion andintrinsic ones which lie deep within human nature Research shows thatlsquowhile traditional rewards and punishments can if ill-managed severelydamage motivation they have little beneficial effect under even the best ofcircumstances It is the fuzzier things ndash to do with feelings of purposebelonging engagement ndash that push people to do their bestrsquo (HarvardBusiness Review 2003)

Just as the factors that create added value for the consumer are those thatare mould breaking and have never before been offered in the marketplacethe factors that create added value for employees are similarly innovativeand special These key discriminating factors set the organization apartfrom competitors in the eyes of employees Occasionally some of thesedifferentiating factors may be lsquoadoptedrsquo by staff and become lsquotalkingpointsrsquo creating great word-of-mouth marketing for the organization as anemployer of choice Examples here include the free ice creams and picnicblankets made available in the summer to Microsoftrsquos staff at their Readingfacility the three-month unpaid winter holiday known as a lsquoBenidormbreakrsquo made available to older staff at Asda and Pret A Mangerrsquosmaternity package which includes pound20 towards a pair of maternity jeansand health spa vouchers upon return to work

The internal value proposition provides the focus for the full range ofHR practices These cover recruitment training appraisal promotion andsuccession planning as well as redundancy and dismissal In the lsquowar fortalentrsquo (Michaels et al 2001) recruitment is critical Best-practiceorganizations are looking not only for competency in prospectiveemployees but also alignment with the organizationrsquos vision and values

176 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 176

For many organizations the most effective and efficient way to recruit theright people is to encourage existing staff to introduce new employees

Once recruited into a best-practice organization employees participatein the acculturation and learning processes Whereas these two processesbarely made it on to organizational agendas in the industrial age they arenow seen as key to motivating and retaining staff Personalized andtargeted learning is offered on a continuous basis and organizationssometimes formalize this within their own learning institutions forexample the lsquouniversitiesrsquo run by McDonaldrsquos Disney and Unipart Othercompanies are working more virtually and taking advantage ofdevelopments in IT to create learning academies on their intranets Thereis also an emerging trend to provide non-work-related courses andopportunities to fulfil personal development goals Many organizationsrealize the value of providing benefits related to achieving a sense ofpersonal well-being such as sponsoring employee memberships to sportscentres and the provision of health services Team- and company-basedactivities that benefit the local community or charities also characterizebest-practice HR systems Expenditure on these less-traditional HRdevelopment activities is viewed as an investment in the organizationrsquosknowledge base and is assessed accordingly Ongoing appraisalspromotion and reward systems provide a further means of reinforcingdesired internal behaviours and attitudes

Where all of these elements of HR practice work effectively employeeswill be motivated and happy to stay with the organization This approachto HR management does not simply equate with paying them highsalaries as the winners of the 2002 lsquo100 best companies to work forrsquo show(McCall 2002) Asdarsquos experience is a good example

AsdaTop-rated superstore Asda has annual sales of pound97 billion and employs117000 people Salaries start at pound8833 In the 1980s the company reversedits declining fortunes by adopting a culture based on Wal-Martrsquos customer-friendly style When the Asda chain was bought by the American giant Wal-Mart in 1999 the value-centric orientation in both organizations ensured asmooth transition despite staff fears that the two cultures would clash Theunderlying philosophy is that everyone must be treated as an individual andstaff incentives are targeted to keep employee motivation high For exampleAsda recently introduced an employee health insurance scheme to cover

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 177

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 177

male cancers The scheme follows on from the companyrsquos lsquoWell Womanrsquocover which has had a 50 take-up Asdarsquos share option scheme will see the16000 staff who were given shares in 1995 share an estimated pound25 millionwhen their shares schemes mature Other loyalty incentives include a lawclub that provides Asda employees with legal advice for 10 pence a weekand a free investment advice service from Bradford amp Bingley Thesepractices have helped keep the companyrsquos staff turnover down to anabnormally low figure for the sector

Asda and other organizations that define create and deliver a valueproposition for staff that makes them an employer of choice base theirstrategy on a simple model that links employee satisfaction and retentionwith customer satisfaction and retention Research suggests that a satisfiedand stable workforce is more capable of delivering higher service quality at

178 Demand System Management

Figure 95 The cycle of success Adapted from Schlesinger and Heskett (1991)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 178

lower cost (Schlesinger and Heskett 1991) This leads to higher levels ofcustomer satisfaction which in turn impacts customer retention levels andincreased profitability This virtuous circle is shown in Figure 95

THE ROLE OF KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT IN DEMANDSYSTEM MANAGEMENT

In todayrsquos consumption-led economy brand owners and retailers areconcentrating on becoming more productive by managing their responseto consumer demand better They are increasingly switching their businessfocus from cutting costs to adding value A key means of adding value isthrough knowledge management processes As a consequence knowledgemanagement has emerged as a major business discipline It is driven byadvances in IT and growth in the use of the Internet which allowinformation to be exchanged across the world 24 hours a day seven days aweek all at the touch of a button Failure to adapt knowledge managementpractices to this continually changing environment leads to what ArnoldKransdorff (19992000) has termed lsquocorporate amnesiarsquo a phenomenonthat prevents organizations learning from their own experienceslsquoCharacterized by knowledge loss it stems from short memory selectiverecall and the flexible labour marketrsquo

In order to create differential advantage a business needs to master theflows of information and knowledge that exist within its organization andthroughout its value chain As Lew Platt former CEO of Hewlett-Packardhas often been quoted as saying lsquoIf Hewlett-Packard knew what Hewlett-Packard knows wersquod be three times as profitablersquo The aim of knowledgemanagement is to build a collective and dynamic corporate memory Thefirst step is to establish a process for capturing knowledge about theorganization and the marketing environment

There are two main types of knowledge explicit knowledge and tacitknowledge Explicit knowledge is the more tangible of the two Itrepresents the type of knowledge that can be captured in written or processform and easily reused The lsquowhatrsquo dimension of corporate know-how islargely explicit knowledge Tacit knowledge refers to the implicit andoften ambiguous knowledge that is acquired mainly through personalexperience It is usually context-specific and provides the lsquohowrsquo dimensionof corporate know-how Tacit knowledge is difficult to formalize and hard

The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System Management 179

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 179

to capture As people are generally better at talking about experiences thanwriting them down new techniques to capture tacit knowledge areemerging Based on the art of storytelling these techniques amount toformalized oral debriefings following important organizational events Thedebriefing process allows employees to create accurate records of how whyand when they performed their tasks It requires a climate of trust asemployees need to feel that they are not relinquishing personal advantagebut are adding to the greater gain from which they too will benefit Ittherefore calls for a supportive organizational culture and value system

Knowledge itself has no intrinsic value as its value comes from beingused and unlike other resources knowledge grows with use Extractingand exploiting the value of knowledge is a core competence withindemand-led organizations In managing a demand system the knowledgemanagement process should reflect the value-centric orientation of theorganization Knowledge about consumers and their wants and desirescompetitors and internal competencies must be captured and managed toenable the superior definition creation and delivery of the valueproposition As Professor George Day from Wharton writes lsquoWhatdistinguishes a market-driven firm is the depth and timeliness of marketknowledge that enables it to anticipate market opportunities and respondfaster than its rivals When this knowledge is widely shared it is a commonreference point and assumption set that ensures the strategy is coherentrather than a disconnected set of activitiesrsquo (Day 1999)

New Consumer Marketing is concerned with generating and exploitingfour kinds of knowledge The first is knowledge about consumers for thisenables the organization to define and create a value proposition that isrelevant and appealing to consumers These subjects were covered inChapters 6 and 7 Chapter 6 covered the generation of insight and makingit actionable through segmentation while Chapter 7 explored the processof value creation and the role of new product development brandingpositioning and pricing in achieving this

The second kind of knowledge used in New Consumer Marketing isderived from competitor activity Awareness and understanding of whatcompetitors are doing and planning can help in making strategicmarketing plans work Of particular importance is an understanding of theorganizationrsquos competitive position as seen from the consumerrsquos point ofview

180 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 180

The third kind of knowledge which underpins the functioning of ademand system is process knowledge In the New Consumer Marketingmodel this relates to knowledge about the three cells ndash value definitionvalue creation and value delivery The aim is to make the core process ineach cell more efficient and effective Process knowledge comes fromimproved organization of the activities that support the development ofinsight innovation and agility Tacit process knowledge may well be agreater source of advantage here than explicit process knowledge

Finally there is the need to know about IT and how to use it smartlySystems knowledge guides the application of IT in both externally andinternally facing systems Decisions made regarding the deployment of ITwill have a fundamental impact on the success of a New ConsumerMarketing approach

Making the most of all four kinds of knowledge requires anorganizational culture that recognizes the value of knowledge enables theformulation and implementation of a strategy for knowledge managementthat is tied to a value-centric orientation and creates a climate thatencourages the acquisition and sharing of knowledge Without thissupporting culture the organizational DNA is fatally flawed

THE ROLE OF PLANNING IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

Increasing turbulence in the marketplace more demanding andsophisticated consumers increasing environmental complexity and thespeed of technological advancement all raise questions about the wisdom ofsetting down in a plan the three- to five-year ambitions of an organizationHow can planning be of use when times are changing so fast Areconventional approaches agile enough to capture the dynamic complexityof the marketplace except in the very short term In the pre-quake businessenvironment planning was presented as an orderly and linear sequence ofsteps For many organizations it was a-once-a-year fill-in-the-box activityThe conventional approach started with corporate and strategic planningwhich covered the identification of corporate goals (including missionvision values financial objectives and shareholder requirements) All ofthis was distilled down into a strategic marketing plan that consisted of asituational analysis leading to a summary presented in a SWOT analysis

The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 181

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 181

Marketing objectives and strategy were then defined on the basis of thisanalysis as well as factors previously noted as relevant to the organizationThe fourth and final stage of marketing planning involved creating atactical plan setting out the immediate 12 monthsrsquo activity This approachwas a reflection of the makendashsell model that characterized the production-driven economy

The arrival of the New Consumer and the consumption-led economy hasforced organizations to rethink their marketing planning Business gurussuch as Gary Hamel are asking questions about how useful thisconventional planning exercise is when e-commerce has so dramaticallyforeshortened planning cycles His 1994 book co-authored with C KPrahalad Competing for the Future introduced the concept of corecompetencies and lsquoindustry foresightrsquo or the art of anticipating marketsand customers five or ten years ahead Some six years on Hamelrsquos laterbook Leading the Revolution (2000) places far less emphasis on foresightbecause of the fast-paced nature of market development Instead he advisesadopting lsquonon-linear strategiesrsquo to create entirely new business models Hisfocus has therefore shifted from foresight to continuous innovation Hisargument is that organizations need to make the critical shift fromstewardship to entrepreneurship they should lsquobring Silicon Valley insidersquothe organization and create internal markets for ideas capital and talent ndasha philosophy borrowed from the firms at the epicentre of the dotcomrevolution where success is based on resource attraction not resourceallocation

However in this time of transition and in the wake of the dotcomdisasters many managers feel that ideas are not enough without soundplanning As Professor Malcolm McDonald of Cranfield School ofManagement explains plans inform employees in all parts of theorganization (McDonald 1999) They are needed in order to obtainresources and support gain commitment and set objectives and strategyIn a demand system planning is an important element of organizationalDNA as it serves to turn the value proposition into a coherent marketingprogramme The aim is to create an ongoing process approach to planningThis assists in the delivery of organizational agility As John CoudronCEO of Yell the publisher of Yellow Pages says lsquoWe set ourselves thetarget that on any Monday morning I could walk in and ask to see anupdated marketing plan on a Friday So our marketing plan was being

182 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 182

continually refreshed to take account of changing customer requirementsrsquo(McDonald 2001)

This process approach to marketing planning is explained in more detailby Professor Nigel Piercy also from Cranfield School of ManagementPiercy writes that planning in this way is a lsquosource of leverage for workingon achieving market-led strategic change and actually making marketstrategy and marketing programmes happenrsquo (Piercy 2002) He seeselements such as corporate culture management style information flowsorganizational structures participation and so on treated as eitherinsignificant facilitating mechanisms or lsquocontextrsquo in conventional planningapproaches He believes these issues are not mere context but that they arethe process and that the way the process of planning is managed will havea direct impact on what goes into the plan and will determine the outputsHis advice to organizations is that they should focus on commitment andownership rather than techniques and formal methods as this is what willultimately drive the value-centric strategy and deliver the valueproposition

This holistic approach to managing the marketing planning processshould result in the creation of more than a physical plan It should ensurethat plans are achievable actionable and capable of being implementedthat they are owned within the organization and that they work to gain thecommitment of executives to make them happen A major benefit of takinga process approach to planning is that it should cease to be a once-a-yearritual and should instead operate continuously The planning processshould identify real information needs and become a means of sharingunderstanding of organizational strategy and challenging perceivedwisdom within the organization

For this to happen Piercy suggests an alternative model for managingthe planning process This is shown in Figure 96 The model identifiesthree process dimensions analytical behavioural and organizational Theanalytical dimension covers the techniques procedures systems andplanning models that essentially analyse and integrate data and thinkingThe process of managing planning is made more comprehensive byincluding a behavioural aspect to do with how things get done Thiscomprises people-related elements such as managerial perceptionsparticipation levels strategic assumptions motivation commitment andownership The third dimension focuses on the nature of the organization

The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 183

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 183

incorporating organizational structure and culture and managementsignals about what actually gets priority within the organization

Budgeting is the next step (following the creation of a plan) in makingthe planning process a reality Whether a top-downbottom-up or abottom-uptop-down approach is taken the budget marks the point atwhich the organization signals its commitment to a demand system byallocating the resources financial and non-financial that will make ithappen For Piercy it is equally important that budgeting is managed as aprocess that also takes into account the wider analytical behavioural andorganizational dimensions discussed in relation to creating a plan

Taking a broader approach to planning that assimilates these analyticalbehavioural and organizational dimensions naturally makes the planningprocess more complex and less easy to manage The danger of a poorlymanaged planning process is that it might result in a plan that is toofocused on analysis or one that does not carry enough information in bothcases leading to a plan that is neither achievable nor actionable Equallyvested interests may dominate the planning process causing limitedownership and commitment on the part of other managers and making itharder to implement Other planning problems revolve around a lack ofresources and organizational resistance to change It is therefore importantthat there are agreed measures of marketing performance in place and thatthe measurement results inform future strategy and practice

184 Demand System Management

Figure 96 A multidimensional model of marketing planning Adapted from Piercy(2002)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 184

[Image not available in this electronic edition]

THE ROLE OF MEASUREMENT IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

An important aspect of New Consumer Marketing is the need to address theissue of measuring marketing performance The model makes measurementa necessary part of the way the organization defines creates and delivers thevalue proposition As with the other six elements of organizational DNAmeasurement plays a role in improving the performance of each of the threecells Without an ongoing assessment of performance against specificcriteria the organization has no way of determining whether it isperforming well that is whether the processes at work in the three cells arebeing carried out optimally Performance results become an essential flow ofinformation around the demand system which serve to support the drive forinsight innovation and agility

Marketing measurement enables marketers to become more accountableAn improvement in marketing accountability would address a key issuenon-marketers have with their marketing colleagues Many senior non-marketers perceive marketers as being lsquounaccountable untouchableslippery and expensiversquo as confirmed in research using the cultural web(Baker 2000) The research results are shown in Figure 97 This view gives

The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management 185

Stories and mythsmiddot mud doesnrsquot stickmiddot golden childmiddot quick promotionmiddot no loyaltymiddot expensive

Symbolsmiddot carsmiddot office location(window)middot stats and terminologymiddot lunch

Ritualsmiddot planning and organizingmiddot delegatingmiddot deadlinesmiddot off-site meetings

Control systemsmiddot 9ndash430middot lunchtravelmiddot entertainingmiddot networking ndash for self

Organizationstructuremiddot lack of structuremiddot internal focusmiddot always in metings

Power structuresmiddot research withheldmiddot they must be rightmiddot jargonmiddot credit taken ndash ifnecessary

Paradigmmiddot unaccountablemiddot untouchablemiddot slipperymiddot expensive

Figure 97 Senior non-marketersrsquo perceptions of marketers

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 185

rise in part to the debate about whether and in what ways marketingcontributes to a business (as first outlined in Chapter 1) Improvement inthe ability of organizations to measure marketing performance would gosome way towards arresting the current crisis in marketing

Techniques to evaluate the marketing process are at present in anembryonic state and lack universal agreement This is largely because themeasures have not yet been developed fully and the organizationalcommitment to measurement is often weak or lacking Essentiallyapproaches to marketing measurement strive to find acceptable ways ofmeasuring both lsquohardrsquo and lsquosoftrsquo marketing data Hard marketing dataincludes sales volume and value market size market share and profitmargins whereas soft marketing data is less tangible and more judgmentalin nature

However a number of organizations are working with professionalbodies to understand how performance measurement can best beaccomplished Current debate revolves around metrics that linkleadership employee satisfaction employee retention customer satis-faction customer retention sales and profitability The emphasis on suchmetrics is driven by developments in customer relationship management(CRM) systems that enable organizations to measure and evaluatecustomer relationships as never before For example a growing number ofaccounting techniques are being used to measure customer value Theserange from historic profitability analyses through lifetime value calcula-tions to links with shareholder value and to the computation of futurevalue creation The aim is to find a measurement approach that accom-modates the wider interpretation of marketing

3M(UK) referred to earlier in Chapter 7 is an example of a companythat manages to balance marketing creativity without sacrificing financialcontrol (Bowman and Gleadle 2002) Its marketing performance isassessed by evaluating innovation in the definition creation and delivery ofthe value proposition Thirty per cent of annual company sales must begenerated from products less than four years old and 10 from productsless than one year old This distinction is refined in two further categorieswith new-to-the-world developments being looked upon as lsquothe idealrsquoversus the substitution of new products for old This represents an analysisof performance at a base level that can then be extracted down to smallersegments of customers

186 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 186

As New Consumer Marketing attains lsquomission-criticalrsquo status in theemerging consumption-led economy marketing investment is gainingincreasing attention from finance professionals This trend marks part of awider revolution in thinking about what kind of corporate assets areimportant in todayrsquos business environment Intangible business assetssuch as knowledge about consumers and markets and corporate know-howabout defining creating and delivering the value proposition areassuming new importance The race is now on to find robust methods ofevaluating and quantifying such assets for the benefit of corporatemanagement and the wider investment community

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Demand system management is about managing a lsquolivingrsquo system ofcells that house the key processes which drive insight innovation andagility and enable the organization to be responsive to the complexdemands of the New Consumer

bull There are seven elements of organizational DNA which make a demandsystem viable Each enables the three cells to optimize performancethus ensuring competitive survival

bull Intuition is the spark that enables employees to base decisions on anunderstanding of consumersrsquo behaviour thoughts and feelings

bull Culture surfaces in everyday organizational life as knowledge about thelsquoway things are done around herersquo

bull Leadership is about demonstrating an ability to engage others inachieving the organizationrsquos mission communicating the corporatevision and upholding the corporate values

bull Corporate vision answers the question lsquowhere are we goingrsquo whilecorporate values are embedded standards and behaviours that provideguidance on how to get there Corporate vision has to be created andrefreshed whereas corporate values endure

bull Employees today are valued as a capital asset and are wooed by aninternal value proposition that informs all aspects of HR practice

bull Knowledge management is about building an organizational memorymade up of explicit and tacit knowledge It requires an organizationalclimate of trust

Summary Points 187

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 187

bull Planning is an ongoing process that encompasses analytical behav-ioural and organizational aspects which extend beyond the physicalmarketing plan

bull Measurement enables marketers to become accountable and providesknowledge about the effectiveness and efficacy of the demand system

CONCLUDING REMARKS

Establishing the case for New Consumer Marketing as a business disciplineand presenting a framework for its conceptualization has been the mainaim of this book The fundamental argument for advancing NewConsumer Marketing is that a value-centric orientation needs to replacethe retention orientation that has dominated marketing practice for thepast decade or so The shift in the macro-marketing environment from aproduction-driven to a consumption-led economy means taking theconsumer as the point of departure for the organization and not its finaldestination In this dynamically complex new marketplace marketingpractice needs to be viewed as systemic and holistic By offering such anapproach to managing the definition creation and delivery of value theNew Consumer Marketing model aims to assist managers in developingand implementing successful consumer marketing strategies Thereremains however considerable scope for debate and for further research inthis important area

Feedback from readers is welcomed and should be directed toslbakercranfieldacuk

188 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 188

Chapter 11 Discussion of CRM in this chapter is informed by the work of the Cranfield

CRM Research Forum directed by Dr Moira Clark Visit wwwcranfield-crmorg2 Statistics used in this section are drawn from EIU Viewswire (2002)

wwwskillbasedfeegovuk wwwhesaacuk and Nellis and Figuera (2002)

Chapter 21 For more on the history and sociology of consumption see Corrigan (1997)2 For the background to consumerism see John (1994) For more on todayrsquos

consumer rights agenda visit wwwwhichcouk3 For more on the post-modern condition refer to the following academic

authors Stephen Brown (author of the very readable Postmodern Marketing) JeanBaurillard Bernard Cova and Maurice Holbrook

Chapter 31 The Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young research referred to in the chapter was

carried out for the Insight Programme (directed by Andre Klimczak) Visitwwwcgeycom

2 The Verdict research was reported at the Marketing Societyrsquos Retail ForumApril 2002 and in Hyman (2002) Other references for this chapter rely on dataand analysis carried in Verdict publications Visit wwwverdictcouk See alsoSeth and Randall (2001) which contains useful analysis of trends in internationalgrocery retailing

Chapter 41 For more on a post-modern approach to consumer behaviour see the

following academic authors Stephen Brown Jean Baurillard Bernard Cova andMaurice Holbrook

2 Treacy and Wiersema (1995) Doyle (2000) Capon and Hulbert (2001) andPiercy (2002) highlight value as the new key driver of strategy in marketing

Notes

12 Baker Endnotes FINAL 5603 245 pm Page 189

Chapter 51 Womack et al (1990) describe the concept of leanness See also references in

Chapter 8

Chapter 61 For an overview of meansndashend theory see Baker (2002) The key academic

paper to refer to is Gutman (1982)2 For an overview of grounded theory see Glaser and Strauss (1967)3 Discussion here and elsewhere in this chapter draws on Baker and Mouncey

(2002)

Chapter 71 The Dell case study referred to in this book is based on the following sources

(Hall 2002 Dell and Fredman 1999 Dell 2002)2 Background reference paper Bowman and Gleadle (2002)3 Taken from the Annual Marketing Society Lecture given by Niall

FitzGerald Chairman of Unilever in London on 19 June 20014 Taken from the authorrsquos PhD research For an overview of meansndashend theory

see Baker (2002)

Chapter 81 The agile supply chain is a concept that has been developed at Cranfield

School of Management within the Cranfield Centre for Logistics and SupplyChain Management This definition of agility comes from Christopher and Towill(2000) See also the work of Professor Alan Harrison including Harrison andHoek (2002)

2 Service blueprinting is associated with the work of Lynn Shostack SeeShostack (1987)

3 The philosophy and implementation of leanness as a management conceptwas set out in Womack et al (1990)

4 Key Account Management is a concept that has been developed at CranfieldSchool of Management and is most closely associated with Professor MalcolmMcDonald See McDonald et al (2002)

Chapter 91 This definition of Theory of Mind is taken from lsquoPsychology of autismrsquo a

presentation made by Professor Uta Frith at the National Autistic Societyrsquos 40thAnniversary International Conference London September 2002 See also thereferences to Theory of Mind made by Professor Jean Aitchison in the 1996 BBCReith Lectures published as The Language Web by Cambridge University Press1996

2 See Bennis and Thomas (2002) for an overview on what makes a great leader

190 Notes

12 Baker Endnotes FINAL 5603 245 pm Page 190

Allford R Evans N and Ward C (2002) A step forward in understandingshoppers using segmentation techniques presented at the ESOMARConference Consolidation or Renewal Barcelona September

Baker S (2000) What non-marketers think about you Marketing Businesssupplement on Better Marketing Measurement September

Baker S (2002) Laddering making sense of meaning in Partington D (ed)Essential Skills for Management Research Sage London ch 12

Baker S and Mouncey P (2002) New Consumer Marketing The implicationsfor market research presented at the ESOMAR Conference Consolidation orRenewal Barcelona September

Bennis W and Thomas R (2002) Crucibles of leadership Harvard BusinessReview 80(9) 39ndash45 September

Berners-Lee T and Fischetti M (1999) Weaving the Web the Original Design andUltimate Destiny of the World Wide Web By Its Inventor HarperSanFrancisco SanFrancisco CA

Booz Allen amp Hamilton (1982) New Product Management for the 1980s BoozAllen amp Hamilton New York

Bowman C and Gleadle P (2002) Culture as a dynamic capability the case of3M in the UK US Academy of Management conference paper presented atAOM2002 Denver Colorado

Brown JS and Duguid P (2000) The Social Life of Information Harvard BusinessSchool Press Boston MA

Brown S (1995) Postmodern Marketing Routledge LondonCapon N and Hulbert JM (2001) Marketing Management in the 21st Century

Prentice Hall Upper Saddle River NJChartered Institute of Marketing (1994) Marketing ndash The Challenge of Change A

Major Study into the Future of Marketing in Key British Enterprises CharteredInstitute of Marketing London

References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 191

Child P (2002) Taking Tesco global The McKinsey Quarterly 3

Christopher M (1992) The Customer Service Planner Butterworth-HeinemannOxford

Christopher M (1998) Logistics and Supply Chain Management 2nd edn FTPrentice Hall Harlow

Christopher M (2001) Breaking down the boundaries the supply chainmanagement process in M McDonald M Christopher S Knox and A Payne(eds) Creating a Company for Customers FT Prentice Hall Harlow

Christopher M and Peck H (1997) Marketing Logistics Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Christopher M and Towill D (2000) Donrsquot lean too far - distinguishing between thelean and agile manufacturing paradigms Proceedings MIM Conference Aston(ISSN 1359-8546)

Christopher M Payne A and Ballantyne D (1991) Relationship MarketingBringing Quality Customer Service and Marketing Together Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Christopher M Payne A and Ballantyne D (2002) Relationship MarketingCreating Stakeholder Value Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Clark M (1999) The recruitment and internal marketing domains in H PeckA Payne M Christopher and M Clark (eds) Relationship Marketing Strategyand Implementation Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Cooper R (1993) Winning at New Products Accelerating the Process from Idea toLaunch Addison-Wesley Reading MA

Corrigan P (1997) The Sociology of Consumption Sage London

Cross R and Prusak L (2002) The people who make organisations go ndash or stopHarvard Business Review 80(6) 104ndash112 June

Davidson H (2002) The Committed Enterprise Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Day G (1999) The Market Driven Organisation Free Press New York

Dell M (2002) Inspiring innovation Harvard Business Review 80(8) 41 August

Dell M and Fredman C (1999) Direct from Dell Strategies that Revolutionized anIndustry HarperBusiness New York

Doyle P (2000) Value Based Marketing ndash Marketing Strategies for Corporate Growthand Shareholder Value John Wiley amp Sons Chichester

Drucker P (1985) Innovation and Entrepreneurship Practice and Principles Harperamp Row New York

Drucker P (2002) Management Challenges for the 21st Century Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

192 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 192

Dyck W van (2002) Managing Complexity in Radical Innovation Projects The Needfor Paradigm Shifts Paper presented at Cranfield School of Management

EIU Viewswire (2002) The Decline of Manufacturing 8 March

Evans M (2001) Decoding competitive propositions a semiotic alternative totraditional advertising research presented at the MRS Conference 169ndash181

Fournier S (1996) Understanding consumerndashbrand relationships HarvardBusiness School working paper 98-018

Gates B and Hemingway C (1999) Business the Speed of Thought WarnerBooks New York

Gattorna J (ed) (1998) Strategic Supply Chain Alignment Gower Aldershot

Geus A de (1999) The Living Company Growth Learning and Longevity in BusinessNicholas Brealey London

Glaser BG and Strauss AL (1967) The Discovery of Grounded Theory Strategies forQualitative Research Aldine Chicago IL

Gleick J (1987) Chaos Making a New Science Viking New York

Godin S (1999) Permission Marketing Turning Strangers into Friends and Friendsinto Customers Simon amp Schuster New York

Goldman S Nagel R and Preiss K (1995) Agile Competitors and VirtualOrganizations Strategies for Enriching the Customer Van Nostrand Reinhold NewYork

Gordon W (1999) Goodthinking ndash A Guide to Qualitative Research AdmapHenley on Thames

Gordon W (2001) The dark room of the mind ndash what does neuro-psychologynow tell us about brands presented at AQRQRCA Conference ndash QualitativeResearch in the 21st Century Paris 18ndash20 April

Grant J (1999) The New Marketing Manifesto Texere London

Gutman J (1982) A meansndashend chain model based on consumer categorizationprocesses Journal of Marketing 46(2) 60ndash62

Hall A (2002) The boy who lived the American dream The Sunday Times 1December

Hamel G (2000) Leading the Revolution Harvard Business School Press BostonMA

Hamel G and Prahalad CK (1994) Competing for the Future Harvard BusinessSchool Press Boston MA

Hanby T (1999) Brands ndash dead or alive Journal of the Market Research Society41(1) 7ndash18

References 193

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 193

Handy C (1989) The Age of Unreason Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Handy C (1994) The Empty Raincoat Making Sense of the Future HutchinsonLondon

Handy C (1997) The Hungry Spirit Beyond Capitalism ndash A Quest for Purpose in theModern World Hutchinson London

Harrison A and Hoek RI van (2002) Logistics Management and Strategy FTPrentice Hall Harlow

Harvard Business Review (2003) The Best of HBR on Motivation 81(1) 8 January

Hertz N (2001) Silent Takeover Global Capitalism and the Death of Democracy FreePress New York

Hyman R (2002) The retail roller-coaster message from the high street MarketLeader (17) 46ndash50

John R (ed) (1994) The Consumer Revolution Redressing the Balance Hodder ampStoughton London

Johnson G and Scholes K (1992) Exploring Corporate Strategy Prentice HallLondon

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1997) Value innovation the strategic logic ofhigh growth Harvard Business Review 75(1) 102ndash112 JanuaryFebruary

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1999a) Creating new market space HarvardBusiness Review 77(1) 83ndash93 JanuaryFebruary

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1999b) Strategy value innovation and theknowledge economy Sloan Management Review 40(3) 41ndash54

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (2000) Knowing a winning business idea whenyou see one Harvard Business Review 78(5) 129ndash141 SeptemberOctober

Klein N (2000) No Logo Taking Aim at the Brand Bullies Picador New York

Kransdorff A (19992000) The other lsquovirusrsquo that is bugging industry MarketLeader (7) 27ndash29 Winter

Lannon J and Cooper P (1983) Humanistic advertising a holistic culturalperspective International Journal of Advertising 2(3) 195ndash213

Lauterborn R (1991) From 4Ps to 4Cs Advertising Age 61(41) 26 1 October

McCall A (ed) (2002) The Sunday Times 100 Best Companies to Work For TheSunday Times 24 March

McCracken GD (1988) Culture and Consumption New Approaches to the SymbolicCharacter of Consumer Goods and Activities Indiana University PressBloomington IN

194 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 194

McDonald M (1999) Marketing Plans How To Prepare Them How To Use ThemButterworth-Heinemann Oxford

McDonald M (2001) Getting back to basics the market understanding processin M McDonald M Christopher S Knox and A Payne (eds) Creating aCompany for Customers FT Prentice Hall Harlow ch 2

McDonald M Rogers B and Woodburn D (2002) Key Customers How ToManage them Profitably Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

McGregor D (1960) The Human Side of Enterprise McGraw-Hill New York

Michaels E Handfield-Jones H and Axelrod B (2001) The War for TalentHarvard Business School Press Boston MA

Mitchell A (2001) Right Side Up Building Brands in the Age of the OrganizedConsumer HarperCollinsBusiness London

Moir L (2001) Why managers and organisations must embrace CSR ManagementFocus Cranfield School of Management (17)13 Winter

Negroponte N (1995) Being Digital Knopf New York

Nellis J and Figueira C (2002) Is there a future for UK ManufacturingManagement Focus Cranfield School of Management (19) 19ndash21 Winter

Nordstroumlm K and Ridderstraringle J (2000) Funky Business Talent Makes CapitalDance ftcom Harlow

Pascale RT (1990) Managing on the Edge How the Smartest Companies Use Conflictto Stay Ahead Viking New York

Pascale RT Millemann M and Gioja L (2000) Surfing the Edge of Chaos TheLaws of Nature and the New Laws of Business Crown Business New York

Piercy N (2002) Market-Led Strategic Change A Guide to Transforming the Process ofGoing to Market 3rd edn Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Pine BJ and Gilmore JH (1998) Welcome to the experience economyHarvard Business Review 76(4) 97ndash105 JulyAugust

Pine BJ and Gilmore JH (1999) The Experience Economy Work is Theatre andEvery Business a Stage Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

PricewaterhouseCoopers (1999) Global Growth and Innovation surveyPricewaterhouseCoopers London

Reichheld FF and Teal T (1996) The Loyalty Effect The Hidden Force BehindGrowth Profits and Lasting Value Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Rokeach M (1973) The Nature of Human Values Free Press New York

Sawhney M and Kotler P (2001) Marketing in the age of informationdemocracy in a chapter in D Iacobucci (ed) Kellogg on Marketing John Wileyamp Sons Chichester

References 195

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 195

Schlesinger LA and Heskett JL (1991) Breaking the cycle of failure in servicesSloan Management Review Spring 17ndash28

Schultz DE and Lindberg-Repo K (2002) Building holistic relationshipcommunication programs in an interactive marketplace presented at theESOMAR Conference Consolidation or Renewal Barcelona September2002

Seth A and Randall G (2001) The Grocers The Rise and Rise of the SupermarketChains London Kogan Page

Seybold P Lewis JM and Marshak RT (2001) The Customer Revolution How toThrive When Customers Are in Control Random House New York

Shostack L (1987) Service positioning through structural change Journal ofMarketing (51) 34ndash43 January

Smith D and Fletcher J (2001) Inside Information John Wiley amp SonsChichester

Tapscott D (1996) The Digital Economy Promise and Peril in the Age of NetworkedIntelligence McGraw-Hill New York

Tapscott D (1998) Growing Up Digital The Rise of the Net Generation McGraw-Hill New York

Tapscott D Lowy A and Ticoll D (2000) Digital Capital Harnessing the Powerof Business Webs Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Taylor FW (1967) Principles of Scientific Management WW Norton New York(first published 1911)

Toffler A (1970) Future Shock Random House New York (out of print)Treacy M and Wiersema FD (1995) The Discipline of Market Leaders Choose

Your Customers Narrow Your Focus Dominate Your Market Addison-WesleyReading MA

Womack JP Jones DT and Roos D (1990) The Machine that Changed theWorld Rawson Associates New York

196 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 196

AA 24Abbey National 147Advantage Card 46agility

in supply chain management 159in value delivery 131ndash3

Air France 129Andersen 173anti-globalization movement 32Argos 46Asda 40 134 176 177ndash8Ashley Laura 77Autobytel 140

BampQ 48BAA 133Badai 117Bailey Christopher 125Barbie 115ndash16Barclaycard 46Batey Ian 118Bell Laboratories 33benchmarking 59betamax 113binary thinking 58ndash60Blair Tony 133Blockbuster 46BMW 105Body Shop 120Boots 44 45 46Boots Opticians brand 45

Booz Allen amp Hamilton New ProductManagement 111

Boston Consulting Group (BCG) 12Boston Matrix 12ndash13boundary-spanning role 98BP 46 120Bradford amp Bingley 178brand owners 64

concerns of 65ndash6key issues 37ndash42

brand repositioning 111 112branding in value creation 113ndash20Bravo Marie 124bricolage 87British Airways 147British Gas 24ndash5Britvic 158Brown John Seely 60budgeting 184Burberry 124ndash5Burberry Cup 125Business Process Re-engineering (BPR)

59 67

Cadbury 80Cadbury Schweppes 104 105Caldey Island 25call centres 139 149ndash50Callaway Golf 110Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young 37category killers 48

Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 197

category one segments 94Centrica 24ndash5C5 electric car (Sinclair) 113Chan Kim W 110Chanel No 5 122channels in value delivery 133ndash41chaos theory 58Chaplin Charlie 59Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM)

Challenge of Change The 10Cheers (television programme) 31Christopher Martin 154

Customer Service Planner The 142Clinique 28Club Nestleacute 150Clubcard 46Coca-Cola 38 118 123committed enterprise 174complex adaptive systems 58complexity science 57ndash8consumer churn 46consumer concept 24ndash5consumer confidentiality 91consumer marketing implications for 48

61consumer movement 25consumer responsiveness

developing 66ndash7through time compression 154ndash9

consumer rights defence of 25ndash6consumerism 25Consumersrsquo Association (UK) 25consumersrsquo indifference zone 128Consumersrsquo Union (CU) (USA) 25consumption

management 27 54ndash5in transformation 23ndash6

Cooper Peter 114core capability 52corporate amnesia 179corporate anorexia 67corporate memory 88cost reduction 41ndash2 111ndash12

Coudron John 182Countrywide Porter Novelli (CPN)

145ndash6cultural web of an organization 166culture 165ndash8Customer Bill of Rights for the

Information Age 26customer lifetime value 14customer loyalty 14 45ndash8customer-managed relationships (CMR)

17Customer Relationship Management

(CRM) 15 21 186failure of 1systems 89ndash91test of 15ndash17

customer retention rates 15customer value 14

database segmentation 93ndash4Davidson Hugh 174Day George 180Debenhams 46Dell Michael 107 153Dell 18 19 153 168Dell-com 153demand chain management 67demand system management 161ndash88

culture in 165ndash8employees in 175ndash9intuition in 163ndash5knowledge management in 179ndash81leadership in 170ndash4measurement in 185ndash7planning in 181ndash4structure in 168ndash9values in 172ndash4vision in 171ndash2

Deutsche Telekom 133Dichter Ernest 82Direct Line 139Directional Policy Matrix (DPM) 12discourse analysis 83ndash4

198 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 198

disintermediation 140Disney 139 172 177Dixons Group 45Domoco 117Drucker Peter 102 175Dunkinrsquo Donuts 32

easyJet 107edit choice in store 44ndash5Efficient Consumer Response (ECR) 157Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) 157email 135employee cloak theory 171employment patterns 20empowerment 59endowment policies 93Energy America 24Enron 173Enviego 28Ericsson 39ESOMAR 90ethnographic analysis 83 85ndash6euro 41every day low pricing (ELDP) 43evolution of marketing 12ndash17experience economy 31explicit knowledge 179ndash80extended enterprise approach 152ndash3 169

fast moving consumer goods (fmcg) sector10 12 38 40 41 80

Fetchmax 141First Direct 141Fitzgerald Niall 41 115Fletcher Jonathon 81focus groups 86Ford Henry 59 60Ford Motor Company 78 1194Cs 34 55 644Is culture 1454Ps (Product Place Price and Promotion)

11 23 27 34 55 64Fournier Susan 114

France Telecom 133Fry Art 107

Gartner 33Gates Bill 60General Electric 12General Motors 119genetically modified (GM) foods 119Geus Arie de Living Company The 60Gleick James Chaos Making a New Science

58globalization 11 38ndash9Godin Seth 52Goldfish 24Gordon Wendy 86 87

Goodthinking 87Grant John New Marketing Manifesto 114gross domestic product (GDP) 2 37 64

103Grounded Theory 82Guinness 84 85 156ndash7

Haji-Ioannou Stelios 107Hamel Gary

Competing for the Future (and CKPrahalad) 66ndash7 182

Leading the Revolution 182Handy Charles 59Harley-Davidson 30 123Hertz Di Noreena Silent Takeover The

119Hewlett-Packard 153 179Home Depot 139homoeconomicus 128human resource (HR) professionals 175hygiene factors 76

IBM 153IKEA 110iMAC 123i-mode 117ndash18independent financial advisers (IFAs) 140in-depth interviews 86

Index 199

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 199

infomediaries 140information technology 16 17 53ndash4 91

179 181role of 135New Consumer and 33

infotainment 32innovation

as a dynamic capability 107ndash9radical approach to 109ndash11search for 42through process or people 106ndash7in value creation 102ndash11

INSEAD 110insight in value definition 74ndash9 97ndash9Intel 57 133interactive marketplace response to 53ndash4International Chambers of Commerce 90International Red Cross 172Internet 11 33 53 57 135 179interviews 144intuition in demand system management

163ndash5intuitive mentalizing 165

Johnson Gerry 165Johnson amp Johnson 120Johnson Controls 104 105

Kennedy President John F 25Klein Naomi No Logo 32knowledge management 98 179ndash81knowledge worker 175Kotler Philip 26Krispy Kreme Doughnuts 75 76

Land Rover 146Landsrsquo End 18 19Lannon Judie 114Lastminutecom 133 134Lauterborn Robert 34lead-time gap 154leadership 170ndash4lean enterprise 153

lean production (leanness) 59 67learning organization 60Lee Tim Berners 60Legoland 46Levitt Theodore 31

Marketing Myopia 93Lew Platt 179Lorenz Edward 58loyalty cardsschemes 46 47 88ndash9Lucozade 98Lufthansa 129Luminus 24Lyons Maid 113

makendashsell approach 27 64 182manufacturing future of 39ndash40Mario Testino Exhibition 125Market Research Society 90market segmentation 94market share 14marketing

in crisis 10ndash11evolution of 12ndash17life cycle 16planning 182ndash4

Marketing Forum 11Marks amp Spencer 43 155Mars 111Mars Ice Cream 113Marshall Alfred 128Marshall Plan 24Marx Karl 175Mattel 116Mauborgne Renee 110McCann Erickson World Group 150McCann Relationship Marketing Paris

(MRM)150 152McCracken Grant 24McDonald Professor Malcolm 182McDonaldization 59McDonaldrsquos 43 46 139 177McGregor Douglas 59McKinsey amp Co 12

200 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 200

meansndashend theory 78measurement in demand system

management 185ndash7media in value delivery 133ndash41Menichetti Roberto 125mental models 87 115Metcalfe Robert 57micro-retailing 48 64Microsoft 60 172 176MIT 153Mitchell Alan 32mobile phones 33 135Modern Times (film) 59Moir Lance 120Moore Gordon 57Moss Kate 125MP3 53Mueller John 108Muumlller 112multichannel centres 150multinational operations 45multiple channels 44multiple formats trade cross 44multiple locations trade across 43ndash4Multiple Markets Model 15Murphyrsquos 156

National Farmersrsquo Union (NFU) 104Natsuno Takeshi 117Nectar 46needs-states analysis 86ndash7Negroponte Nicholas 60Nestleacute 41 150neuro-psychology 87New Consumer 27ndash33

complex lives of 30embracing 66experiences of 31information technology and 33marketing literacy and demands of

31ndash2response to 52ndash3time and 28ndash30

New Consumer Marketing 51ndash62 92114

definition 51ndash5meaning 55ndash60model 4 5 63ndash71 161 162

new product development in valuecreation 111ndash13

new-to-the-world introductions 112ndash13next-generation smart phone 135Nike 39 40 78 122Nissan 105Nite-and-Day 44Nokia 136ndash7non-traditional market sensing in value

definition 88ndash92using CRM systems 89ndash91using database systems 88ndash9using frontline staff 91ndash2

Nordstroumlm Kjell (and JonasRidderstraringle) Funky Business 170175

Norwich Union 140

Odeon Cinemas 46One Stop 44OneTel 24Open Plan Account 76Oracle 90Oreal Lrsquo 30organizational agility 5 132 140organizational culture 132organizational DNA 5 69 71 161ndash3

185

Pascale RichardManaging on the Edge 58Surfing the Edge of Chaos 60

Pearson 18 19Peoplesoft 90Pepsi-Cola 158personal digital assistants (PDAs) 135Petcareco Limited 148 149phantom factors 77

Index 201

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 201

Piercy Professor Nigel 183 184PIMS (Profit Impact of Market Strategy)

14planning in knowledge system

management 181ndash4Pop Idol (television programme) 19ndash20positioning in value creation 120ndash5

emotional message 121ndash2process 123ndash5

power brands 38Prahalad CK (and Gary Hamel)

Competing for the Future 66ndash7 182Pret A Manger 125 144ndash5 176price in value creation 125ndash9process knowledge 181Procter amp Gamble 12 18 19 96product life cycle (PLC) 12prosumption 18psychometric tests 144Purdy Lucy 26

quality movement 59qualitative research 82ndash6quantitative research 80ndash1 86Quick Response (QR) 157

Range Rover 146rate tart 53rational consumer 128reductionist approaches 59Reichheld Frederick 14Relationship Marketing (RM) 3 21 27

54 55 63ndash4rise of 14ndash15

retail branding 45retailers

concerns of 65ndash6power growth in 40ndash1response 42ndash8

Ridderstraringle Jonas (and KjellNordstroumlm) Funky Business 170175

Ritz-Carlton Hotel 143 144

Rokeach Milton 172Rolex 125Ryanair 129

Safeway 134Sainsburyrsquos 41 44 46 89 96 134sales growth 41ndash2SAP 90Sara Lee 39Sasser Earl 14savings accounts 93savings bonds 93Sawhney Mohanibar 26Scholes Kevin 165Schultz Howard 170Schwab Charles amp Co 110segmentation analysis 93ndash7semiotics analysis 83 84ndash5September 11th 2001 20service in value delivery 141ndash8Seybold Patricia 177Ps of Relationship Marketing 34Shearwood Michael 91Shell 12 60 80 119 120Siebel Systems 90Simon Herbert 137Sinclair Clive 113Singapore Airlines 118 145 172ndash3Six Sigma 59Skoda 98Skoggins Dan 170Smith David 81Smith WH 31Sony 117Sony Music 133Southwest Airlines (SWA) 141sponsorship 125staff

in demand system management 175ndash9empowerment 146ndash8motivation 145recruitment 143ndash6

stagendashgate process 106

202 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 202

Starbucks 170Stella Artois 125 138stock-keeping units (SKUs) 38StreetKa buyers 78supply chain in value delivery 152ndash9supply-chain management 5 67SWOT analysis 181Synectics Corporation 104

tacit knowledge 179ndash80tacit process knowledge 181Tango 158lsquoTapping the creativity of consumersrsquo 104Tapscott Don 60Taylor Frederick Principles of Scientific

Management The 59technology integration in value delivery

148ndash52teenagers 33Teletubbies 83ndash4Tennant Stella 125Tesco 40 44 45 46 68 134 147 167

168 169Tesco Clubcard 89text messaging 33TGI Friday 170Theory of Mind 163ndash4Theory X and Y 59Thortonrsquos 1403Com Corporation 573M(UK) 107ndash8 186time 54

compression 154ndash9refugees 28ndash30

Toffler Alvin Future Shock 18Toyota 153trade

across multiple formats 44across multiple locations 43ndash4

transaction marketing 3 55

Unilever 12 41 85ndash6 115Unipart 177

value-adding time 156value-centric orientation 3 55ndash6 57 66

68 115value concept 75value creation 4 70 101ndash30

branding in 113ndash20innovation in 102ndash11new product development in 111ndash13positioning in 120ndash5price in 125ndash9

value definition 4 70 73ndash99insight generators in 97ndash9insight in 74ndash9needs-states analysis 86ndash7non-traditional market sensing in

88ndash92qualitative research 82ndash6quantitative research 80ndash1segmentation in 92ndash7traditional market research in 79ndash87

value delivery 4 70 131ndash60agility in 131ndash3media and channels in 133ndash41service in 141ndash8technology integration in 148ndash52supply chain in 152ndash9

value-destroyers 77value-enhancing factors 74 76 77 78value evaluation of 127ndash9value-influencing factors 74ndash8value innovation 110value-maintaining factors 76 77values in knowledge system management

172ndash4Veterans Agency (VA) 132 133Virgin Atlantic 109Virgin Group 109ndash10 114Virgin Mobile 109 149Virgin One 109ndash10virtual call-centre operators (V-Reprsquos)

150vision in knowledge system management

171ndash2

Index 203

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 203

Volkswagen 138Volvo 59

Walls 80 113Wal-Mart 40 45 110 119War Pensions Agency 132Woburn Safari Park 164ndash5Womack James 153Woolwich Building Society 76World Trade Organization 32 119

World Wide Web 60wwwcarsurveyorg 53wwwfriendsreunitedcom 30wwwmoneysupermarketcom 53wwwsyneticsworldcom 104

Zara 91ndash2 158Zip Project 155Zyman Sergio 123

204 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 204

  • New Consumer Marketing
    • Contents
    • Foreword
    • Acknowledgements
    • About the Author
    • Introduction
      • Meeting the Challenges
      • Overview of the Book
        • 1 Earthquake
          • Marketing in Crisis
          • The Evolution of Marketing
            • The Rise of Relationship Marketing
            • The Test of CRM
              • Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment
              • Implications for Consumer Marketing
              • Summary Points
                • 2 The New Consumer
                  • Consumption in Transformation
                    • Expansion of the Consumer Concept
                    • Defence of Consumer Rights
                      • Consumption Management in Question
                      • A New Kind of Consumer
                        • New Consumers Are Exercised By Time
                        • New Consumers Lead Complex Lives
                        • New Consumers Seek Experiences
                        • New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding
                        • New Consumers Are IT Enabled
                          • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                          • Summary Points
                            • 3 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers
                              • Key Issues for Brand Owners
                                • The Force of Globalization
                                • The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing
                                • The Growth in Retailer Power
                                • The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth
                                • The Search for Innovation
                                  • The Retailersrsquo Response
                                    • Trading across Multiple Locations
                                    • Trading across Multiple Formats
                                    • Use of Multiple Channels
                                    • Editing Choice in Store
                                    • Enhancing Retail Branding
                                    • Developing Multinational Operations
                                    • Pursuing Customer Loyalty
                                      • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                                      • Summary Points
                                        • 4 New Consumer Marketing
                                          • New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it
                                            • A Response to the New Consumer
                                            • A Response to the Interactive Marketplace
                                            • A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management
                                              • New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean
                                                • Adopting Value-Centricity
                                                • Applying Science
                                                • Breaking out of Binary Thinking
                                                  • New Consumer Marketing ndash Who Is Involved
                                                  • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                                                  • Summary Points
                                                    • 5 A Model of New Consumer Marketing
                                                      • To Recap
                                                      • Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing
                                                        • Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers
                                                        • Embracing the New Consumer
                                                        • Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness
                                                        • Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis
                                                          • The New Consumer Marketing Model
                                                            • 6 Value Definition
                                                              • The Role of Insight in Value Definition
                                                                • Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value
                                                                • Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors
                                                                  • The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition
                                                                    • Using Quantitative Research
                                                                    • Using Qualitative Research
                                                                    • Need-States Analysis
                                                                      • The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition
                                                                        • Using Database Systems
                                                                        • Using CRM Systems
                                                                        • Using Front-line Staff
                                                                          • The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition
                                                                            • Creating a Segmentation Analysis
                                                                              • The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition
                                                                              • Summary Points
                                                                                • 7 Value Creation
                                                                                  • The Role of Innovation in Value Creation
                                                                                    • Consumers as Innovators
                                                                                    • Innovation through Process or People
                                                                                    • Innovation as a Dynamic Capability
                                                                                    • A Radical Approach to Innovation
                                                                                      • The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation
                                                                                      • The Role of Branding in Value Creation
                                                                                        • Building Successful Brands
                                                                                        • Emerging Brand Issues
                                                                                          • The Role of Positioning in Value Creation
                                                                                            • Drawing out the Emotional Message
                                                                                            • The Positioning Process
                                                                                              • The Role of Price in Value Creation
                                                                                                • The Evaluation of Value
                                                                                                  • Summary Points
                                                                                                    • 8 Value Delivery
                                                                                                      • The Role of Agility in Value Delivery
                                                                                                      • The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery
                                                                                                        • Making the Most of Media Choices
                                                                                                        • Making the Most of Channel Choices
                                                                                                          • The Role of Service in Value Delivery
                                                                                                            • Creating a Service Strategy
                                                                                                            • Recruiting and Motivating Staff
                                                                                                            • Empowering Employees to Live the Brand
                                                                                                              • The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery
                                                                                                              • The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery
                                                                                                                • Competing through the Supply Chain
                                                                                                                • Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression
                                                                                                                  • Summary Points
                                                                                                                    • 9 Demand System Management
                                                                                                                      • The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                      • The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                        • Culture
                                                                                                                        • Structure
                                                                                                                          • The Role of Leadership Vision and Values in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                            • Leadership
                                                                                                                            • Vision
                                                                                                                            • Values
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Employees in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Planning in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • Summary Points
                                                                                                                              • Concluding Remarks
                                                                                                                                • Notes
                                                                                                                                • References
                                                                                                                                • Index
Page 2: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page ii

New Consumer Marketing

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page i

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page ii

New Consumer Marketing

Managing a Living Demand System

Susan Baker

with

Margrit Bass

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page iii

Copyright copy 2003 John Wiley amp Sons Ltd The Atrium Southern Gate ChichesterWest Sussex PO19 8SQ England

Telephone (+44) 1243 779777

Email (for orders and customer service enquiries) cs-bookswileycoukVisit our Home Page on wwwwileyeuropecom or wwwwileycom

All Rights Reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system ortransmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording scanning orotherwise except under the terms of the Copyright Designs and Patents Act 1988 or under the terms ofa licence issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency Ltd 90 Tottenham Court Road London W1T 4LPUK without the permission in writing of the Publisher Requests to the Publisher should be addressedto the Permissions Department John Wiley amp Sons Ltd The Atrium Southern Gate Chichester WestSussex PO19 8SQ England or emailed to permreqwileycouk or faxed to (+44) 1243 770620

This publication is designed to provide accurate and authoritative information in regard to the subjectmatter covered It is sold on the understanding that the Publisher is not engaged in renderingprofessional services If professional advice or other expert assistance is required the services of acompetent professional should be sought

Other Wiley Editorial Offices

John Wiley amp Sons Inc 111 River Street Hoboken NJ 07030 USA

Jossey-Bass 989 Market Street San Francisco CA 94103-1741 USA

Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Boschstr 12 D-69469 Weinheim Germany

John Wiley amp Sons Australia Ltd 33 Park Road Milton Queensland 4064 Australia

John Wiley amp Sons (Asia) Pte Ltd 2 Clementi Loop 02-01 Jin Xing Distripark Singapore 129809

John Wiley amp Sons Canada Ltd 22 Worcester Road Etobicoke Ontario Canada M9W 1L1

Wiley also publishes its books in a variety of electronic formats Some content that appears in print maynot be available in electronic books

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Baker SusanNew consumer marketing managing a living demand systemby Susan Baker

p cmIncludes bibliographical references and index

ISBN 0-470-84482-5 (cloth alk paper)1 Marketing I Title

HF5415B279 20036588mdashdc21 2003007455

British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data

A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library

ISBN 0-470-84482-5

Typeset in 1214 Garamond by Footnote Graphics Ltd Warminster WiltshirePrinted and bound in Great Britain by TJ International Ltd Padstow CornwallThis book is printed on acid-free paper responsibly manufactured from sustainable forestry in which at least two trees are planted for each one used for paper production

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page iv

Contents

Foreword ixAcknowledgements xiAbout the Author xiii

Introduction 1Meeting the Challenges 3Overview of the Book 6

1 Earthquake 9Marketing in Crisis 10The Evolution of Marketing 12

The Rise of Relationship Marketing 14The Test of CRM 15

Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment 18Implications for Consumer Marketing 21Summary Points 22

2 The New Consumer 23Consumption in Transformation 23

Expansion of the Consumer Concept 24Defence of Consumer Rights 25

Consumption Management in Question 27A New Kind of Consumer 27

New Consumers Are Exercised By Time 28New Consumers Lead Complex Lives 30New Consumers Seek Experiences 31New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding 31New Consumers Are IT Enabled 32

Implications for Consumer Marketing 33Summary Points 34

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page v

3 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers 37Key Issues for Brand Owners 37

The Force of Globalization 38The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing 39The Growth in Retailer Power 40The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth 41The Search for Innovation 42

The Retailersrsquo Response 42Trading across Multiple Locations 43Trading across Multiple Formats 44Use of Multiple Channels 44Editing Choice in Store 44Enhancing Retail Branding 45Developing Multinational Operations 45Pursuing Customer Loyalty 45

Implications for Consumer Marketing 48Summary Points 48

4 New Consumer Marketing 51New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it 51

A Response to the New Consumer 52A Response to the Interactive Marketplace 53A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management 54

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 55Adopting Value-Centricity 55Applying Science 57Breaking out of Binary Thinking 58

New Consumer Marketing ndash Who Is Involved 60Implications for Consumer Marketing 61Summary Points 61

5 A Model of New Consumer Marketing 63To Recap 63Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing 65

Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers 65Embracing the New Consumer 66Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness 66Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis 67

The New Consumer Marketing Model 67

vi Contents

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page vi

6 Value Definition 73The Role of Insight in Value Definition 74

Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value 74Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors 78

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 79Using Quantitative Research 80Using Qualitative Research 82Need-States Analysis 86

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 88Using Database Systems 88Using CRM Systems 89Using Front-line Staff 91

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 91Creating a Segmentation Analysis 93

The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition 97Summary Points 99

7 Value Creation 101The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 102

Consumers as Innovators 104Innovation through Process or People 106Innovation as a Dynamic Capability 107A Radical Approach to Innovation 109

The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation 111The Role of Branding in Value Creation 113

Building Successful Brands 116Emerging Brand Issues 119

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 120Drawing out the Emotional Message 121The Positioning Process 123

The Role of Price in Value Creation 125The Evaluation of Value 127

Summary Points 129

8 Value Delivery 131The Role of Agility in Value Delivery 131The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 133

Making the Most of Media Choices 136Making the Most of Channel Choices 139

Contents vii

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page vii

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 141Creating a Service Strategy 142Recruiting and Motivating Staff 143Empowering Employees to Live the Brand 146

The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery 148The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 152

Competing through the Supply Chain 153Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression 154

Summary Points 159

9 Demand System Management 161The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management 163The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 165

Culture 165Structure 168

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values in Demand System Management 170

Leadership 170Vision 171Values 172

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 175The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System

Management 179The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 181The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management 185Summary Points 187Concluding Remarks 188

Notes 189References 191Index 197

viii Contents

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page viii

Foreword

Samuel Curtis Johnson first built his reputation as a maker of parquet floorsand then became better known for creating a new way to care for them Hislegacy was a company with a small portfolio of wax-based products whichevolved into the global concern that SC Johnson is today with its globalhousehold name brands such as PledgeGlade and Mr Muscle

One of the basic principles that has guided the successful developmentof the company since its founding over a hundred years ago has been thebelief that we must earn the enduring goodwill of consumers and users ofour products and services

Consumers make up one of five key groups of people to whom we believewe are responsible and whose trust we have to earn (the others beingemployees the general public neighbours and hosts in the countries andcommunities where we conduct business and the world community) Inparticular we are committed to providing useful products and servicesthroughout the world by

Monitoring the changing wants and needs of consumers and users Maintaining close and effective business relationships with the trade to

ensure that our products and services are readily available to consumersand users

Continuing our research and development commitment to provide a strong technical base for innovative and superior products andservices

With our strong corporate emphasis on understanding consumers andproviding them with what they want I found this book enormously appeal-ing because it offers a very clear summary of todayrsquos context for consumermarketing and identifies the real challenges facing those of us seeking toexpand markets market share and profits

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page ix

Susan depicts for us the tectonic shift that has taken place in theeconomy describing this as a move from production-driven to consumption-led In doing so she raises relevant questions about how marketing needs toundergo a consequent shift Most of the marketing frameworks wersquore alltoo familiar with emerged in the production-driven era and we have to askhow relevant they are in this age of the lsquonew consumerrsquo This is a consumerwho is active confident and knowledgeable one who looks for brandexperiences and whose life is being transformed by developments in IT

The marketplace before us is no longer static and homogenous andSusan links neatly into business trends that are being played out here Sheoffers a framework for organising marketing to deliver the value thatconsumers are looking for In doing so she draws on thinking from theemerging discipline of complexity science

This is a timely and relevant book Its stimulating content makesabsorbing reading for both practitioners and scholars Irsquom delighted to becontinuing an SC Johnson tradition of championing consumer marketingin robustly endorsing this thought-provoking work

Steven P StanbrookPresidentndashAsia PacificSC Johnson

x Foreword

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page x

Acknowledgements

lsquoWhy have you got so many books in herersquo asked my son Mark then aged five and ahalf years on entering my study at home one day lsquoBecause Irsquom writing a bookrsquo I replied lsquoWhy do you need so many books to write a bookrsquo he asked

It was a good question and I went on to explain that it wasnrsquot just the booksI needed as reference material but copies of academic papers notes ofmeetings with leading practitioners conference presentations seminarnotes copies of student projects and dissertations and so on and so forthFor the fact of the matter is that this book has emerged out of my years asboth a practitioner and an academic and a debt of gratitude is due to theeclectic group that has contributed to my thinking Working at CranfieldSchool of Management has been a particular source of inspiration and manyof my colleagues will find themselves quoted for good reason My work inestablishing the New Marketing Research Group at the School (visitwwwnew-marketingorg) has helped in pulling many of my ideastogether Irsquom grateful to Professor Malcolm McDonald for supporting mein this venture and to Dr Louise Humphries and Debbie Roberts forhelping me make the Group happen

In making this book a reality Irsquod like to acknowledge the patience ofClaire Plimmer and her team at Wiley the secretarial assistance fromHayley Tedder at Cranfield the creative effort on the graphics from JoannaEnglish and the help given by Marion Cooper with several of the casestudies Margrit Bass who edited this as I wrote it was always encouragingand the book has benefited enormously from her input

Finally I would like to dedicate this book to the three most importantpeople in my life ndash my husband Chris and our sons James and Mark Thankyou for living this book with me

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xi

My concluding words are again attributed to Mark He came into mystudy again a week or so ago and asked why the can of polish was sitting onthe floor lsquoBecause now the bookrsquos finished Irsquom clearing uprsquo I replied Helooked about and then said disdainfully lsquoWell you havenrsquot finished yethave yoursquo Proving therersquos nothing like children to keep your feet on theground

Susan BakerMay 2003

xii Acknowledgements

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xii

About the Author

Dr Susan BakerAt Cranfield School of Management where she is a full time member offaculty Susan specializes in consumer marketing in particular under-standing consumer markets branding and international marketing Shefounded and directs the New Marketing Research Group which workstogether with a consortium of client organizations to understand theimpact on marketing of the New Consumer (wwwnew-marketingorg)

A frequent keynote speaker at conferences and seminars Susan teacheson the MBA programme and works on a variety of management develop-ment programmes for companies across all sectors ndash consumer business-to-business and professional services

Prior to Cranfield Susan pursued a ten-year career in services marketingin leisure retailing from which she gained senior management experienceon both client and agency sides of the business in the UK and overseas

Outside Cranfield she was a trustee of Consumersrsquo Association for manyyears and has more recently become a trustee of Beating Bowel Cancer

She can be contacted at slbakercranfieldacuk

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xiii

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xiv

As a member of faculty at Cranfield School of Management I have metmany senior marketers over recent years who have become frustrated thatlsquomarketing doesnrsquot seem to be working any morersquo Companies are finding itharder to connect with consumers CRM systems that promised so muchhave delivered so little The conventional tools and techniques ofmarketing no longer appear to be relevant Added to all of this market-ingrsquos contribution to a business is constantly under question In effect thecertainties of the marketing environment have been replaced with theuncertainties of a dynamically complex marketplace

So what has changedThe answer is a lot The ground beneath our feet feels shaky because we

are experiencing the after effects of an lsquoearthquakersquo Almost imperceptiblythe economic plates are shifting sending tremors through the players(brand owners and retailers on the one side and consumers on the other)rearranging a landscape that had appeared static and immovable for so longEquilibrium is being replaced with a state of continual change anduncertainty In a variety of small ways the fault lines are emerging withsudden clarity We are moving from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy where the nature of the exchange is different and thisdifference is exacerbated by the force of the internet and e-commerce Thisshift is creating a number of key challenges for consumer marketing

These challenges can be summarized as the need to

bull embrace the New Consumerbull address the concerns of brand owners and retailersbull help organizations develop real consumer responsivenessbull lift marketing out of its crisis

Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 1

Companies are confronted with a new kind of consumer one that hasvariously been described as lsquoactiversquo lsquoknowledgeablersquo and lsquopostmodernrsquo Inessence this is a New Consumer a creature distinctly different andidentifiable from its predecessors For this New Consumer time is aprecious commodity in lives that are becoming increasingly complex Intheir purchasing behaviour New Consumers now look for brandlsquoexperiencesrsquo over and above bundles of features and benefits They are moremarketing literate than ever before and IT enabled New Consumersinhabit an interactive marketplace characterized by high levels ofheterogeneity which disputes the assumptions of conventional marketingthinking

Faced with this new marketplace brand owners and retailers are lookingto enrich and expand the strategic options open to them The growth ofretailer power is of particular concern to brand owners who have beenfeeling the threat posed by industry consolidation Further stress in therelationship stems from the continuing downward pressure on price Andadding to this is the force of globalization and debate about the viability ofmanufacturing Above all there is an imperative to balance cost reductionand sales growth

Retailers are themselves facing daunting challenges and first and fore-most among these is a long-term pattern of declining spend Over the pastten years the retail sector has come to represent less than half the percentageof GDP it used to command This trend varies across sectors forcingretailers to shift their strategies to remain profitable Other challenges havearisen in respect to the difficulties associated with acquiring a businesslocation and consumer expectations of price

The aim for both brand owners and retailers is to develop greater con-sumer responsiveness This means focusing on the demand side of theirbusinesses doing the same thing better or doing something new Toachieve this organizations need to connect better with consumers theyneed to get close enough to consumers to understand how to deliver thevalue that consumers are seeking in a continually adaptive and innovativeway Organizations need to learn how to work in the consumerrsquos lsquospacersquo

Finally criticism about the lack of clarity surrounding marketingrsquoscontribution to a business has been a feature of reports and articles overrecent years This is in part driven by the difficulties surrounding themeasurement of marketing effectiveness but also by the fact that

2 Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 2

marketing is both equated with business unit strategy and located withinthe marketing mix Without a clear emphasis as to its role marketinglanguishes in a lsquono manrsquos landrsquo and is badly placed to provide strategicleadership

MEETING THE CHALLENGES

Meeting these challenges head on requires a different way ofconceptualizing the marketing process and a different approach toimplementation This book proposes the adoption of a value-centricapproach to marketing and connecting with the new science of complexityto enable business to find a way of surviving in the face of continual change

As the practice of marketing has evolved in response to market con-ditions the underlying philosophy of a business in relation to the customersit serves has shifted Transaction marketing was based on a sales orientationwith the aim of acquiring as many new customers as possible Profit wasgenerated through increased sales volume Relationship Marketing thenswitched the emphasis to developing greater profitability through customersatisfaction underpinned by a retention orientation The realities of theconsumption-led economy demand that the focus of a business shifts againto consumer responsiveness based on superior processes of insight innova-tion and agility to achieve profitability This means replacing the focus oncustomer retention with a value-centric orientation

A value-centric orientation means delivering the value consumers wantto buy into and the organization wants to deliver that is value on theconsumerrsquos terms as demanded and maybe even dictated by them This valuecomponent marks the process of exchange that takes place between theconsumer and the organization it is the lsquothingrsquo that consumers get inreturn for what they give It means moving beyond a relationship emphasisto one that has at its core the definition creation and delivery of value If anorganization can meet the value expectations of the consumer then a long-term and profitable relationship is more likely to follow The key is havingvalue as the starting point otherwise the relationship developmentstrategy (and the CRM tools perhaps used to deliver it) will not work asintended

This however is not sufficient on its own to make marketing moreeffective Organizations need to reconceptualize the marketing process to

Meeting the Challenges 3

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 3

take account of the dynamically complex new marketplace Business needsto learn how to understand complexity and find ways of respondingdynamically to change This is where marketing connects with the newscience of complexity The appeal of this to business theorists is that itprovides a way of thinking about how the underlying processes andrelationships in a company can be organized to survive in the face ofcontinual change

New Consumer Marketing emerges at the confluence of these twostreams of thinking ndash the evolving discipline of marketing and the scienceof complexity New Consumer Marketing is therefore different from theprevailing marketing paradigm It is a business discipline that enables theorganization to master the increasingly dynamic and complex process ofgoing to market in a systemic and holistic way It provides managers witha means of identifying and mobilizing people and processes to help thembecome as adaptive and creative as possible against the background of acomplex marketing environment

The New Consumer Marketing model is presented in Figure 01 and itshows quite clearly how consumer marketing can be conceptualized asconsisting of the three key processes underpinned by a value-centric orienta-tion The model is organic in nature reflected in the use of honeycomb-shaped cells each of which has a nucleus The model encourages the synergyof emphasizing both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo enabling organizations to breakout of the binary thinking that has long constrained management theory Inshort the static marketing function of the production-driven economybecomes a living demand system in the consumption-led economy leavingbehind the mechanistic approaches of the former era

The first cell in the demand system is concerned with the process of valuedefinition that is the process of generating and identifying insight inorder to describe and demonstrate value This covers both traditional andnon-traditional ways of generating insight and the process of turning thatinsight into something actionable through segmentation

The next cell is concerned with the process of value creation Innovationforms the nucleus of this cell and is of strategic significance Other sub-processes include new product development branding positioning andpricing

The third key process in a demand system is value delivery This is to dowith how value is communicated and conveyed by an organization to a

4 Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 4

specific audience Media and channels obviously play a role alongsideservice technology integration and supply-chain management Thewatchword here is organizational agility

The seven elements needed to make a demand system viable aredescribed as the organizational DNA The interrelationships of intuitionculture and structure leadership vision and values employees knowledgemanagement planning and measurement work within the cells tooptimize performance and ensure competitive survival

The New Consumer Marketing model therefore lifts marketing out ofits crisis in terms of presenting a conceptual guide for practitioners forgenerating and managing the exchange process under conditions ofcompetition The model provides a framework that enables an organizationto describe and position its marketing strategy In doing this it identifiesthe consumer segments it seeks to serve determining where and how itwill compete

Meeting the Challenges 5

Figure 01 The New Consumer Marketing model

13

13

13 $

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 5

OVERVIEW OF THE BOOK

The structure of this book is outlined below

Figure 02 Structure of the book

6 Introduction

A

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 6

Chapter 1 provides an overview of the changing competitive landscapeand places marketing within the business context Chapter 2 describes theprofile of New Consumers highlighting the challenges they pose tobusiness Chapter 3 then explores the concerns of brand owners andretailers who in the face of change must meet these challenges in order tosurvive

Chapter 4 introduces New Consumer Marketing as an emergingbusiness discipline New Consumer Marketing is not simply another wayof managing the marketing mix but a viable means of addressing the rangeof issues that enable an organization to compete successfully in a particularmarket Its key objective is to help the organization establish sustainablecompetitive advantage by means of superior performance High levels ofperformance are achieved and maintained through the processes of valuedefinition value creation and value delivery

A framework for conceptualizing New Consumer Marketing as themanagement of a demand system is presented in Chapter 5 Chapters 6 7and 8 then focus on each of the three key processes that form the workinglsquocellsrsquo of the New Consumer Marketing model value definition valuecreation and value delivery The concluding chapter Chapter 9 identifiesthe elements that make up the organizational DNA ndash the genetic code thatdrives the cellsrsquo performance and determines the overall success of thedemand system

References to source material and Notes on further reading are to befound at the back of the book

Overview of the Book 7

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 7

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 8

The current crisis in marketing is underscored by profound change in themarketing environment

A new marketplace is emerging and bringing with it a host of challengesnever before encountered For marketers this event is both exciting andunnerving opportunities for innovation and growth parallel threats toproven methodologies and the status quo The challenges posed by thechanging competitive arena are not restricted to a particular industry orsector but span the gamut of enterprises operating today All businessesare being affected to some degree by the root-and-branch upheaval that isoccurring in the wider marketing environment At the start of the thirdmillennium a paradigm shift in commerce is clear we have moved from aproduction-driven to a consumption-led economy

While the forces of demand and supply continue to regulate theeconomy the nature of the exchange has altered beyond all recognitionThe lsquothem and usrsquo adversarial approach to trade is giving way to consumerinvolvement in all aspects of product and service development anddelivery Supplying organizations use increasingly clever methods to wooconsumer loyalty and maintain competitive edge High-powered anddynamic data technology helps produce finely tuned marketing strategieswhich can be implemented on a one-to-one basis through an ever-expanding choice of traditional and electronic media Customers andconsumers exploit this greater access to information and the ability toachieve dialogue with suppliers exercising their new found empowermentby increasingly leveraging sales propositions in their own favour Theresult is a mutually influenced beneficial interaction

Earthquake 1

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 9

This radical transition in the way commercial transactions areconducted is evident no more so than in the rise of the buyerndashsellerrelationship Managing an ongoing relationship is an entirely differentmatter to managing a single transaction and the challenge for marketerstoday is compounded by the growing complexity of the context in which ittakes place Marketing especially consumer marketing faces a dauntingprospect quickly undergo profound change or prepare for certain death

MARKETING IN CRISIS

hellip there was a moment of pregnant stillness then a sibilant whisper a sort offaint seismic exhalation and then the world lurched

Ben Macintyre The Times 23 March 2002

This is the description a journalist gave after experiencing a majorearthquake If one had been listening in the mid-1990s they would haveheard similar rumblings throughout the marketing profession An articlepublished in the McKinsey Quarterly in 1993 claimed lsquoMany consumergoods CEOs are beginning to think that marketing is no longerdeliveringrsquo suggesting that lsquomarketers are simply not picking up the rightsignals any morersquo A Coopers amp Lybrand survey of the same year foundcomparable consensus among senior executives within fast movingconsumer goods (fmcg) retail and service sector organizations Quotingtheir non-marketing managers respondents expressed concern about therole and value of marketing lsquoMarketing is increasingly living a lie in myorganizationrsquo lsquoIf marketing departments disappeared would anybodynotice Would it really matterrsquo

A growing number of articles on the subject of marketing then appearedin the media stimulating debate among academics and practitioners as towhether or not this lsquobad pressrsquo was warranted In late 1993 the UKrsquosChartered Institute of Marketing (CIM) commissioned a report on thefuture of marketing in key British enterprises (Chartered Institute ofMarketing 1994) Boldly entitled The Challenge of Change the CIMinvestigation into marketingrsquos performance and promise delivered mixedtidings A multitude of research reports and commentaries from precedingdecades as well as the then current clutch revealed that marketing was set tobecome increasingly relevant and strategically important as a managementfunction but that it remained on the whole poorly executed in Britain

10 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 10

The last decade of the twentieth century was symbolically brought to aclose with a decisive report by the Marketing Forum the UKrsquos leadingauthority on the role and status of marketing With the objectives ofidentifying the key drivers and core responsibilities of the marketingdiscipline the report sought to address the growing unease amongmarketers Original research attempted to answer the following questions

In the post-dotcom boom what are the new drivers of marketing focus How does the arrival of the information era affect how we as marketers

operate What is our remit now and what new responsibilities can we expect to

assume in future

From the strength of response the message was clear the conventionaltools of marketing were no longer applicable and there was a pressing needfor fresh thinking The research showed that marketing appeared to belosing its way thrown off course by the myriad of unprecedented pressuresand developments in the now global marketplace It was felt that the futureof marketing if there was to be one rested firmly on the adoption of newapproaches and new attitudes While the underlying principles ofmarketing remained for the most part intact the practical tools andtechniques employed required radical revision

Traditional marketing devices such as the 4Ps (product place price andpromotion) had emerged in the production-driven era of the 1950sndash1970sThe subsequent globalization of market activity and explosion in theavailability and use of new-wave technologies particularly the Internet toname but two key drivers of change turned the existing business premiseon its head Instead of being the focus of persuasion to buy what producerswished to produce consumers became the focus of production itself theycould influence to a great extent the nature of products Business prosperityrelied on retaining valuable customer relationships not revving theengines of production

To grasp the full weight of this seismic shift in the rules of commercialengagement it is useful to look back briefly at the development ofmarketing as an established management discipline Its evolution issuffused with hard lessons and valuable learning Only by understandingmarketingrsquos role at different points in time can we anchor the debate aboutits future in a meaningful context

Marketing in Crisis 11

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 11

THE EVOLUTION OF MARKETING

While the application of marketing has existed since people first tradedwith one another its emergence as a distinct business discipline hashappened relatively recently in the period between the First and SecondWorld Wars In the UK for example modern-day marketing becamesynonymous with brand marketing as practised in the 1950s and 1960s byfmcg companies such as Unilever and Procter amp Gamble Marketing stoodfor a business philosophy based on meeting the needs of customers andcreating sustainable competitive advantage It was supported by a businessfunction bearing the same name

Marketers drew on an operational framework rooted in the 4Ps and themost knowledgeable had at their disposal an expanding toolbox ofconceptual diagnostic and predictive tools It is worth considering some ofthese briefly to appreciate marketingrsquos integral role The product life cycle(PLC) introduced in 1950 promulgated the notion that products passthrough typical phases from lsquolaunchrsquo to lsquomaturityrsquo to lsquodeclinersquo and finallylsquoexitrsquo from the marketplace The PLC was followed by a range of modelsdeveloped by rival management consultancies such as the BostonConsulting Group (BCG) and McKinsey amp Co to aid the marketer in themanagement of both single products and product portfolios The mostenduring of these analytical devices are BCGrsquos Boston Matrix andMcKinseyrsquos Directional Policy Matrix (DPM) designed in conjunctionwith General Electric in the USA and Shell in Europe

The four-box Boston Matrix (see Figure 11a) considered products interms of their relative market share and market growth rate It held thatthe perfect conglomerate needed a mix of three types of product Profitfrom the steady earners (lsquocash cowsrsquo) could be used to invest in productswith huge growth potential (lsquostarsrsquo) and underwrite those underdevelopment (lsquoquestion marksrsquo) The fourth quadrant of the matrix wasallocated to product failures (lsquodogsrsquo) whose poor performance or excessivecash consumption justifies their being discarded altogether The DPM (seeFigure 11b) expanded the number of variables used in the Boston Matrixadding market attractiveness and business strengths in order to analyseproduct performance in greater depth

As marketing tools and techniques aimed at understanding productbehaviour became more refined the need to understand consumer

12 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 12

behaviour became more pronounced Demand in consumer markets in the1950s and 1960s was buoyant due to rising levels of disposable income andthe influence of new forms of communication notably televisionMarketing was harnessed as a means of persuading masses of consumers tobuy what was manufactured and the lsquomakendashsellrsquo philosophy of businessestablished itself as consonant with the production-driven era

The guiding principle for developing mass consumer markets was toacquire ever-greater numbers of consumers and take maximum market share

The Evolution of Marketing 13

Figure 11 (a) The Boston Matrix and (b) the Directional Policy Matrix

lsquoStarsrsquo

A selected few

lsquoCash cowsrsquo lsquoDogsrsquo

lsquoQuestion marksrsquo

Marketgrowthshare

Relative competitive position (market share)

Remainder

divested

Liquidated

(a)

(b)

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 13

This strategy was underpinned by research from PIMS (Profit Impact ofMarket Strategy) which showed that the greater the market share achievedthe bigger the profits that would accrue to the company The pace and scopeof mass marketing were set by the American consumer goods giants forwhom the market appeared to be an ever-climbing sales curve until theworld was jolted out of this misapprehension by a series of oil crises in the1970s The consequent international economic downturn followed by highinflation at home had a serious impact on consumers Consumer spendinghabits displayed prudence and sophistication in much larger measure

The Rise of Relationship Marketing

Supplying organizations responded to the constrained economicenvironment of the 1970s by re-examining what they were offering tocustomers To increase product appeal differentiation and value formoney many augmented their product offerings by incorporating a serviceelement This spawned the development of services marketing as a businessfunction In mature markets where the rate of growth had slowed or evenstopped it became more difficult for organizations to pursue a strategy ofgaining market share With the pool of new prospects diminishedmarketing attention steered towards retaining and growing existingcustomer relationships Consequently lsquocustomer loyaltyrsquo achievedpriority and its prime strategic importance remains to this day

The shift in marketing emphasis from customer acquisition to customerretention became enshrined in the principles of Relationship Marketing(RM) RM unlike transaction marketing recognizes that commercialtransactions are not isolated events but that they take place within a liveand continuous context of engagement ndash a lsquorelationshiprsquo between buyerand seller Underpinning the idea of an enduring and potentiallylsquogrowablersquo relationship with a customer is the concept of customer valuethat is the customer has an intrinsic and dynamic value to the supplyingorganization and vice versa

Measures of marketing success then turned from numbers of customers(market share) to share of customer expenditure (share of lsquowalletrsquo) andpotential customer value (customer lifetime value) The work of Bainconsultants Frederick Reichheld and Earl Sasser was seminal indemonstrating the large impact on profitability of small increases in

14 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 14

customer retention rates Further research by Reichheld and Teal (1996)showing the increasing profitability of customers the longer therelationship lasts added strength to the argument for a relationshipmarketing approach

Issues surrounding RM implementation were less clear and businesstheorists usually advocated relationship building via the identification of anumber of key groups or market domains For example the MultipleMarkets Model developed by Christopher Payne and Ballantyne (19912002) recommends that marketing activity should be focused on six mainmarkets

1 consumer markets (or customer markets in the business-to-businesssector)

2 internal markets ie employees3 supplier and alliance markets eg business partners suppliers

consultants contractors4 influencer markets eg venture capitalists regulators lobbyists and

litigators5 referral markets eg customer advocates intermediaries business

advisors6 recruitment markets eg employment agencies graduates the pool of

potential employees

This multiple-markets approach embraces a more holistic view of themarketplace It forces marketers to think beyond managing one marketmade up of consumers (or customers) and extends the marketing mix toinclude the increasingly important elements of people process and theprovision of customer service

As RM became more widely accepted during the 1990s developmentscontinued apace in IT and computational methodologies resulting in theconvergence of database marketing and customer service delivery This ledto the concept of Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

The Test of CRM1

CRM was the last big idea of the twentieth century to grab the attention ofmarketers It appeared to present the magic formula for marketing successndash the opportunity to galvanize the business behind a marketing-led

The Evolution of Marketing 15

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 15

strategy Moreover as commentators have observed it offered lsquothemystique of new technologies and a new three letter acronymrsquo The theorybehind CRM is that managing customer relationships is an integratedbusiness process involving the consolidation of individual customer datafrom multiple sources to create a mutually valuable proposition CRMrsquosemphasis on using IT to monitor customersrsquo transaction histories andexploit their purchasing behaviour serves to reinforce the impact ofcustomer retention strategies With real-time access to customer-specificinformation organizations can segment customers by value targetmarketing strategies towards the most promising opportunities andpersonalize marketing communications Consequently service levels areguided by customer profitability CRM seemed to provide at last themeans of implementing RM effectively and as an incrementaldevelopment served to extend the marketing life cycle (see Figure 12)

Investment in CRM systems across Europe is such that it is one of thefastest growing markets in the IT industry However those organizationsthat interpreted CRM as simply the purchase of an expensive softwareprogram found little succour in the smart new technology It has beenclaimed that up to 97 of CRM installations fail to deliver the anticipated

16 Earthquake

Figure 12 The marketing life cycle

Production-driven economy Consumption-led economy

Marketingemerges asa business

function

Post-warconsumer

boom

Series ofoil crises

Functionalmarketing

Servicesmarketing

Relationshipmarketing

1920s30s 1950s60s 1970s 1980s 1990s 2000

Demandsystem

marketing

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 16

benefits Problems stem from a lack of clarity about what CRM actually isand how to implement it successfully For some it has meant bettermarketing communications providing a means of escaping from theconstraints of mass communications and of achieving more personalizeddialogue Others have taken a broader view using the terms CRM andmarketing almost interchangeably A third school of thought hashighlighted the IT aspect regarding CRM as the technologicalenhancement of business processes Each interpretation of CRM offers anequal number of implementation models and with so many options andinterpretations it is little wonder that CRM has failed to meetexpectations

Current research shows that there are a number of preconditions thatneed to be satisfied prior to implementing a CRM strategy Organizationsmust have a clearly defined marketing strategy in place IT systems that arealigned to the goals of the marketing strategy and an organizationalculture which ably supports the implementation of CRM A misalignmentin any of these relationships leads to a failure of CRM creating waste anddisappointing performance

It is clear that most CRM systems are not conceived with the activedemanding IT-literate consumer in mind Their main focus is onproviding information about the customer to the company They seldomoffer the consumer direct access to information about the supplier orvendor or their own account As business theorist Patricia Seybold assertslsquoCRM systems should be designed with customers as the design centerCustomers should have the ability to maintain (though not theresponsibility of maintaining) information related to their relationshipsrsquo(Seybold et al 2001) This view is in keeping with the prediction ofresearch firm Gartner that by 2005 consumers will start to take control of their own data Together these assertions suggest that CMR ndash orcustomer-managed relationships ndash rather than CRM should be theguiding notion in devising relationship management systems

Whether or not CRM survives as a formal discipline it has been avaluable step in marketingrsquos development It has established the businesscase for adopting the customerrsquos perspective and involving the customer inthe formulation of product and service strategies The timing of thisrealization is no coincidence it is a creative response to the eruption ofdramatic change within the macro-marketing environment

The Evolution of Marketing 17

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 17

CHANGES IN THE MACRO-MARKETING ENVIRONMENT2

The present trend towards more customer-centric ways of doing business isbeing propelled and directed by a fundamental change in the marketingenvironment Using the earthquake metaphor the two lsquotectonic platesrsquothat shape the marketing landscape are the production-driven economyand the consumption-led economy As our manufacturing base declines wecan see that it is consumption and not production which is emerging asthe central motor of contemporary society

Of course we have to look at production and consumption as two sidesof the same coin Production does not take place without a correspondinglevel of consumption and similarly no consumption can take place unlesssomething is produced For some supplying organizations the boundarybetween these two sets of activities erodes and they fuse into what AlvinToffler so presciently described as lsquoprosumptionrsquo in his best-seller FutureShock As long ago as 1970 Toffler foresaw that consumers would soon befaced with the greatest variety of unstandardized goods and services everseen He believed this increasing diversity of products would beencouraged by two economic factors lsquoFirst consumers have more money tolavish on their specialized wants second and even more important astechnology becomes more sophisticated the cost of introducing variations declinesrsquo[his italics]

Today leading organizations such as Landsrsquo End Dell Procter ampGamble and Pearson the TV company demonstrate the wisdom ofTofflerrsquos vision

bull Clothing retailer Landsrsquo End started offering online tailoring inOctober 2000 in the USA A year later the company claimed that 40of all chino and jeans sales on its website were custom ordersCustomers would enter their measurements onscreen including theirweight height and hipndashthigh proportions An inbuilt computerprogram would analyse the information given and calculate the idealdimensions of the trousers The order specifications would be sentdirect to a manufacturing plant in Mexico where the fabric patternwould be produced by a computerized cutting machine and thenpassed to a sewing machinist Two to four weeks after the order wasplaced the customer would receive the trousers

18 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 18

bull Dell one of Fortune magazinersquos top ten lsquomost admiredrsquo companiesdesigns manufactures and customizes computing products andservices to customersrsquo requirements Using the online lsquoConfigure ampBuyrsquo facility customers can create the computer system that best meetstheir needs by a process of selecting options from drop-down menusAs they do so the total price changes accordingly at the bottom of theirscreen

bull Procter amp Gamble has a website called lsquoCommunity Cornerrsquo that it usesto build relationships with consumers or marketing partners as theyare known internally The website is an online forum in whichconsumers can talk about existing brands suggest ideas and changesand contribute to surveys There is also a chance for people with patentsfor new products to discuss them with Procter amp Gamble

bull The television programme Pop Idol created by Pearson enabledviewers to vote in their favourite pop star from a preselected shortlist

Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment 19

Figure 13 Landsrsquo Endcom online tailoring

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 19

In the final show of the UK series nine million viewers voted bytelephone awarding Will Young celebrity status Young thenachieved the fastest-selling debut single in the UK as more than 11 million fans went out to buy the record by the star they had createdThe programmersquos format has since been adopted by televisionproducers in the USA with similar success

The predominance of a consumption-led economy is reflected in a numberof macro market statistics For example in the UK the proportion of grossdomestic product (GDP) provided by manufacturing has been on adownward trend since the mid-1970s This position is reflected in each ofthe G7 industrialized economies (Germany France Italy Japan Canadathe USA and the UK) In the case of the UK manufacturing accounted foraround one third of the economyrsquos total output in 1960 However by thestart of the new millennium this had fallen to less than one fifth with onlythe USA showing a fall below this figure This has been driven in part bythe allocation of an increasing proportion of disposable income to expend-iture on a wide range of services and luxury goods Sectors such as bankingtourism leisure entertainment and telecommunications have been themain beneficiaries

This economic position is mirrored in employment patterns Significantjob losses are expected in the primary sector of the economy (agriculturemining and utilities) over the next couple of years while manufacturingcan expect to lose around 80000 employees each year between 2000 and2005 when the loss is expected to slow to 50000 employees per annumThe decline in engineering will be seen as the biggest contributor to theselosses On the other hand distribution hotels the transport sector andcommunications can expect an increase of 40000 new jobs annually to2005 However the biggest job increases are expected to come in othermarket sectors where growth in professional services in particular willmean an increase of around 140000 new jobs each year to 2005

Not surprisingly these employment trends find equal expression inqualification statistics The number of students graduating in engineeringand technology are down by 9 from 35700 to 32400 over the period1997 to 2001 In contrast degrees received in law and the arts both showincreases Graduates in business and administration now dominate the jobmarket growing from 61700 in 1997 to 65300 in 2001 Those with

20 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 20

degrees in creative arts and design however show the biggestproportionate jump from 24800 in 1997 to 29500 in 2001

These facts and figures stress the fundamental change in marketdynamics from a production to a consumption focus Consumption andthe servicing of consumption increasingly form the basis of businessplanning The economic sector becomes ever more tightly tied tobusinesses that have an asset base made up of intangible services asopposed to hard and fast production This shift has significantramifications for marketers ndash consumer marketers in particular ndash who needactively to acknowledge that new ways of thinking and operating areneeded if we are to meet unrivalled market and management demands

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

A substantial amount of soul searching has gone on in marketing circlesover the past decade as marketingrsquos role and contribution to businessperformance have been challenged by both change and a lack of it Thediminished sense of influence power and value among marketingpractitioners and shared frustration about what to do next is rooted in thefact that the certainties of the production-driven economy have beenreplaced with the uncertainties of the consumption-led economy andmarketing thinking has not kept pace The tools techniques and theoriestaught in business schools today largely promote a mechanistic approach tomarketing which as the following chapters will show is not relevant tothe organic nature of present-day trade relations

While Relationship Marketing and its offshoot Customer RelationshipManagement have revolutionized marketing practice much more needsto be done to manage the matching of supply and demand synergisticallyMarketers whose role has always been located at the critical interfacebetween buyers and sellers are well placed to lead the thought processConsumer markets especially offer valuable insight and testing groundfor the development of more appropriate concepts and codes of practiceThere the customer base is usually more numerous remote and capriciousand the use of intermediaries is commonplace As the tremors shaking themarketing landscape grow stronger and more frequent the imperative tofind new meaning for marketers becomes an unenviable unavoidable andurgent responsibility

Implications for Consumer Marketing 21

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 21

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Marketers are operating in a context of fundamental transition Thecertainties of the production-driven economy have been replaced bythe uncertainties of the consumption-led economy

bull Consumption and the servicing of consumption now form the centralmotor of contemporary society

bull Many of the conventional tools and techniques of marketingdeveloped mainly in the production-driven era no longer apply andmarketingrsquos contribution to business is increasingly unclear

bull Relationship Marketing moved marketing focus from customeracquisition to customer retention

bull The implementation of Relationship Marketing through CRMsystems has been largely unsuccessful and there is an outstandingrequirement for greater clarity in terms of CRM definition andpractice

bull Consumer markets offer insight and testing ground for the futuredevelopment of marketing

22 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 22

Consumption and consumption management are being redefined by the NewConsumer

Consumption (the act or process of consuming) has always been acharacteristic of human nature But consumption as it relates to consuminggoods and services that do not merely fulfil needs but satisfy wants anddesires is a modern-day development one that accelerated after the SecondWorld War Since then a growing range of businesses have come to seetheir interactions with consumers as the execution of a formalized processof consumption They have engaged the marketing profession to hone thisprocess to optimum effect In parallel with this development consumerrights have evolved to the point where the advocacy of consumer interestsis no longer the sole remit of consumer organizations consumersthemselves are leading the cause

In order to manage the process of consumption effectively in the contextof transition described in Chapter 1 marketers traditionally have adoptedthe classic marketing approach of the 4Ps (product place price andpromotion) They have used these elements of the marketing mix tofacilitate their command-and-control philosophy However the advent ofa new kind of consumer is showing this traditional marketing approach tobe out of date lsquoNew Consumersrsquo are well informed and highly empoweredThey are increasingly influencing the shape and form of products andservices as well as the future of market players

CONSUMPTION IN TRANSFORMATION

lsquoConsumptionrsquo is often considered a contemporary word whose arrival wasmarked by the conspicuous consumption patterns of the 1980s Yet some

The New Consumer 2

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 23

commentators point to an earlier era the 1950s when the Marshall Planhelped to rebuild Europe The economic boom that followed the SecondWorld War lasting some 25 years ensured that many members of thelower social classes could have all sorts of goods and services their parentscould only dream of

Other commentators look still further back Sociologist GrantMcCracken (1988) for example turns to the reign of Queen Elizabeth I ofEngland and the prosperity of the last quarter of the sixteenth century1 Atthat time an explosion of consumerist behaviour was fuelled by membersof a social elite who became caught up in a lsquoriot of consumptionrsquo as theyvied for the attention of the monarch The accumulation of expenses bynoblemen at court meant they had less to spend on their families ndash and anew phenomenon was born The individual rather than the family beganto feature as the basic unit of consumption motivated rather more by asense of buying for the here-and-now than for the longer term

The beginnings of consumer society might also be found in the wave ofeconomic prosperity that hit eighteenth-century England and promptedthe emergence of a middle class For these consumers the possession offashionable goods represented an important index of their social standingMoreover new marketing and advertising techniques accompanied thesedifferent patterns of buying behaviour by new groups of consumers

Expansion of the Consumer Concept

Regardless of where in time we position the first signs of consumptionwhat is important is to acknowledge its pervasive influence The concept ofthe consumer and the building of businesses around it is no longerconfined to those who produce lsquothingsrsquo ie manufacturers Organizationsas diverse as charities utilities suppliers government bodies and evenreligious orders have become attuned to thinking of the individuals theyinteract with as consumers

British GasBritish Gas was privatized in 1986 and demerged from British Gas plc in1997 Today it is part of Centrica the holding company for a range ofbusinesses including the AA Goldfish and OneTel in the UK and EnergyAmerica and Luminus overseas For most consumers of gas fuel it is an

24 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 24

unexciting product Their gas-fired stoves break down and the bills alwaysseem disproportionately large to the burning small flame in their boilers As apart of Centrica British Gas set out to turn around a loss-making operationoptimize the use of its sales force and maintain brand presence Now thebusiness is highly profitable the result of a strategy that has included detailedwork on customer segmentation and the use of marketing campaigns tosmooth out peaks and troughs in consumer demand for maintenance andinstallation

Caldey IslandOn Caldey Island off the Welsh coast a group of Cistercian monks isdeveloping an e-business in an attempt to make the monastery financiallyself-sufficient The brothers produce a range of perfumes bath oils handcreams and menrsquos aftershaves as well as shortbread made to an old recipeThe idea of a web shop grew from the problem of geographical remotenessthe holy island is only accessible by licensed boat services between themonths of April and October making for a short selling season Earlyindications are that the site (wwwcaldey-islandcouk) is succeeding

Defence of Consumer Rights

Alongside the growth in consumer numbers products and expenditurethere has been growth in a consciousness of consumer rights The process ofadvancing the cause of consumersrsquo interests in relation to the producer orsupplying organization is known as consumerism and should be seen asdistinct from consumption or the act of consuming the products and servicesproduced

The lsquoconsumer movementrsquo loosely defined as the ongoing campaign tosecure consumer rights began in the late 1950s and early 1960s when anincreasing interest in consumer and environmental issues seeded the ideathat consumers possess the power to influence manufacturers (andsubsequently many others such as retailers and service providers)2 TheUK Consumersrsquo Association founded in 1957 set out to emulate theAmerican Consumersrsquo Union (CU) Within a few years consumersrsquoassociations had formed in several other European countries notablyHolland and Belgium All were based on the CU model of an organizationcarrying out product tests and making public the results to informconsumers (see Figure 21) The consumer voice was given further impetusby President John F Kennedyrsquos groundbreaking address to Congress in

Consumption in Transformation 25

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 25

March 1962 where he asserted the rights of consumers lsquoto safety to beinformed to choose and to be heardrsquo

Today consumer advocacy no longer resides solely with consumergroups The language of consumer rights has entered the corporate worldlsquoWhen people pay money for a brand or to a company they feel they arebuying rights to how they are treated ndash rights to be respected treatedhonestly and fairly and to have their points of view appreciatedrsquo This wasa comment made by Lucy Purdy planning director at Publicis when hercommunications agency published its findings on consumer attitudes toregistering complaints about poor goods and services

In order to create a business culture that meets these expectations on thepart of the consumer Mohanibar Sawhney and Philip Kotler from KelloggUniversity advocate implementing a Customer Bill of Rights for theInformation Age (Sawhney and Kotler 2001) Their proposed draft billsupports a consumer right to anonymity to be remembered and to share in pay-offs among other things They warn that lsquoViolating thesefundamental rights while tempting and even profitable in the short runwill be disastrous in the long runrsquo

26 The New Consumer

Figure 21 Which online

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 26

CONSUMPTION MANAGEMENT IN QUESTION

The management of consumption has traditionally been undertakenthrough the adoption of the lsquomakendashsellrsquo approach characteristic of the production-driven economy described in Chapter 1 Supplyingorganizations (ie manufacturers) made things and it was the task of themarketer to persuade consumers to buy them Their instruments ofpersuasion were the 4Ps The challenge for these organizations was tosatisfy customer needs by producing the right product at the right pricemaking it available in the right place at the right time and promoting itswinning features through the right means of communication

This mechanistic model of consumption management was laterenhanced by the principles of Relationship Marketing (RM) born out of afocus on services marketing RM stressed that the management ofconsumption was about far more than simply putting products into themarketplace The dawning realization that a manufacturer is not so much aproduct company but a service company with a product offeringintroduced the idea of building relationships with consumers over timebased on meeting their needs in relation to both the functional aspects ofthe product and the more intangible aspects of the service elements

In parallel with this development a growing consciousness of consumerrights and consumer power has created more confident consumers oneswho are finding their voice and have at their disposal the means ofexpressing it At the point of confluence of these two trends ndash RM on theone hand and consumer rights on the other ndash the way in whichconsumption is managed comes under question The lsquomakendashsellrsquo approachenhanced through RM does not meet with the expectations of this newempowered consumer Organizations need to acknowledge this change anddevise new ways of managing consumption based on consumersthemselves

A NEW KIND OF CONSUMER

The present consumer-driven marketplace is characterized by a new kindof consumer one who has been variously described as lsquoactiversquolsquoknowledgeablersquo and lsquopost-modernrsquo3 In essence this is a lsquoNew Consumerrsquoa creature distinctly different and identifiable from its predecessors

Consumption Management in Question 27

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 27

Marketers need to develop a deep understanding of the attitudes andbehaviours of this New Consumer if they are to break away from themechanistic models of the production-driven era and develop a relevantapproach to exploiting the business potential of current consumer cultureNew Consumers possess a number of distinguishing features the mostsignificant of which are highlighted here

New Consumers Are Exercised By Time

The first step in understanding changing cultures of consumption is torecognize the different ways in which New Consumers relate to the conceptof time Time has become a precious commodity and many products andservices reflect this insight capitalizing on the time-poorcash-rich trade-off many consumers make Consumers with little time and high levels ofdisposable income have become lsquooutsourcersrsquo ndash their clothes go to the drycleaners nannies look after their children cleaners and tradespeople keeptheir house in good order and so on Businesses that have spotted thismarket niche include enterprising property developers whose new-buildhomes come fitted with fake lawns and supermarkets which offer pre-packaged pre-cooked ready-made meals Personal full-service agencyEnviego goes further and has created a PA (personal assistant) service thatwill take care of everything from actively remembering birthdays toorganizing walking the dog

Contemporary consumer behaviour also illustrates that consumersappear to either actively embrace the pace of change and the constantstream of new products and services or want to run and hide The formerare living life to the max and desirous of anything but routine These lsquotimetouristsrsquo give themselves away by their pursuit of agelessness disregard forgender boundaries and delight in the finer things in life For brand ownerstime tourists represent new markets and marketing opportunitiesClinique for example cleverly acknowledges male buyers with theadvertisement lsquoDonrsquot say the word ldquocosmeticsrdquo Cliniquersquos ldquoSkin suppliesfor menrdquorsquo (see Figure 22a)

lsquoTime refugeesrsquo on the other hand display characteristics best describedas defensive in the face of the pace of change These consumers seek securityand a sense of belonging They want to find and maintain a home be itspiritual or physical They want to feel part of a community and form

28 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 28

A New Kind of Consumer 29

Figure 22 (a) Clinique woos the men (b) LrsquoOreal rewards you

(a)

(b)

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 29

relationship bonds with other people Buying certain brands thereforebecomes a way of linking with like-minded consumers The worldwidemarketing success of Harley-Davidson and its 600000-strong HarleyOwnersrsquo Group demonstrates this drive to belong to a tribe or group Forsome time refugees purchases become a sort of reward LrsquoOreal forexample targets this group with the strapline lsquoBecause yoursquore worth itrsquo(see Figure 22b) Time refugees are looking to anchor themselves in atransient world The website wwwfriendsreunitedcom which reunitesformer school friends has successfully captured their imagination

New Consumers Lead Complex Lives

The marketplace of the New Consumer is highly fragmented and this is inlarge part due to the highly complex lives consumers lead On one levelthey display multiple personalities seeming to dip in and out of differentstereotypic personality types The prevalence of this consumer behaviourwas exemplified by a piece of advice from Cosmopolitan magazine to itsfemale readership lsquoBe an it-girl on Saturday a kitten on Sunday a careerwoman on Monday a devoted girlfriend on Tuesday helliprsquo It is as ifconsumers can take on chameleon-like properties and adapt their projectedpersonas to suit the situation

This complex behaviour creates problems for marketers whosesegmentation analyses are constructed on the premise that consumers canbe categorized permanently in one of a number of predefined lsquoboxesrsquoHowever in displaying multiple personalities consumers can appear tooccupy a number of different boxes depending on the occasion Forexample in the airline industry a passenger might choose to fly businessclass or first class for business travel economy class for family holidays andwith a special ticket (discount or promotion) for a long weekendDesigning a marketing strategy to capture or keep this customer is analmost impossible task if simple demographics are used as the basisMaking sense of this apparent chaos requires marketers to abandon theirneed for certainty and to develop a tolerance of ambiguity and a skill inadaptability In addition to recognizing consumersrsquo changing attitudes totime marketers must respect their preferences and different needs anddesires

30 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 30

New Consumers Seek Experiences

Marketing theorists have for some time pointed out that consumers donrsquotbuy product features they buy product benefits As marketing guruTheodore Levitt famously commented lsquoCustomers donrsquot buy frac14 inch drillsthey buy frac14 inch holesrsquo In the case of New Consumers their purchasingbehaviour is further distinguished by the desire to buy an lsquoexperiencersquo It isnow possible to purchase such an experience off the shelf in high streetretailers W H Smith for example offers them in a catalogue Their rangeincludes a day driving a Ferrari or a JCB a visit to a health farm and aphotographic makeover Prices range from pound9999 to pound299999 the latterbuys the thrill of diving with sharks in South Africa Children under 17years of age are offered their own choice of lsquofirstrsquo experiences such asdriving a car or being a TV presenter

In response to this desire to lsquoconsumersquo experiences many retailers havemoved from simply offering ranges of products to also offering ranges ofexperiences In the pub market for example consumers can enjoy an Irishpub experience one evening followed by an Australian bar experience thenext and an American bar experience resembling the television sit-comCheers after that Except that these experiences are not lsquorealrsquo in the sense ofbeing non-contrived Instead they are formulaic and themed reality isdeliberately blurred with hyper-reality

US consultants Joseph Pine and James Gilmore (1998 see also Pine andGilmore 1999) describe this lsquoexperience economyrsquo as one where lsquoInstead ofrelying on our own wherewithal to experience the new and wondrous ndash ashas been done for ages ndash we will increasingly pay companies to stageexperiences for us just as we now pay companies for services we oncedelivered ourselves goods we once made ourselves and commodities weonce extracted ourselvesrsquo Clearly consumer offerings and marketingmessages addressed to New Consumers must take this trend on board

New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding

The command-and-control philosophy traditionally adopted by marketersto manage the consumption process is inappropriate today As everymarketer who engages consumers in research will know consumers arebecoming more marketing literate and less easy to please They candeconstruct marketing activities with almost as much insight as most

A New Kind of Consumer 31

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 31

marketers For example the average consumer can quickly sort the daily postinto three piles personal mail business mail and unsolicited or lsquojunkrsquo mailThey are capable of identifying each without even opening the envelope

Consumers are no longer passive absorbers of marketing messages Inthe words of author Alan Mitchell (2001) lsquoThe observed have startedplaying games with the observerrsquo At one extreme these lsquogamesrsquo take theform of protests and demonstrations against globalization such as thedisruption of the World Trade negotiations in Seattle in 1999 and the G8summit in Genoa in 2001 Naomi Kleinrsquos book No Logo Taking Aim at theBrand Bullies (2000) is another example It is a highly acclaimedassessment of multinational brand-name corporations labour abuses andanti-corporate resistance which quickly became the bible of the anti-globalization movement after its publication in the USA

At the other extreme consumers make their views known in less violentways For example those who are unhappy with their purchases and intentupon standing up for their rights can turn to consumer watchdogs andother advocacy groups which operate through traditional as well aselectronic media In fact consumer redress has become a source oflsquoinfotainmentrsquo ndash part information and part entertainment Consumers alsohave the wherewithal to take direct action such as setting up lsquovigilantersquowebsites Marketers should monitor these sites carefully as they canprovide a rich seam of consumer feedback Equally their impact onconsumer and corporate perception should be managed carefully In 1999Dunkinrsquo Donuts the fast food retailer bought out the lsquogripe sitersquo set uptwo years earlier by a customer who had been upset at the absence of anyskimmed milk for his coffee

Such consumer activity reflects a knowledge on the part of consumersabout how marketing works and a new-found confidence in expressingdissatisfaction It is imperative therefore that the New Consumer beequally involved in the consumption management process and that apartnership of open dialogue and mutual respect be developed between thetrading parties

New Consumers Are IT Enabled

Underpinning the way New Consumers live their lives and make and usetheir purchases are of course developments in information technology

32 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 32

(IT) This fundamental feature of the New Consumer raises issues formarketers about how to connect with consumers who live in atechnologically interactive and integrated world The exponential growthin the use of mobile phones (devices first developed by Bell Laboratories inthe 1940s) has presented particular challenges Consumers worldwide haveneeded little persuading of the benefits of the mobile phone which unlikelandline systems links people rather than locations In the UK 28 millionpeople owned mobile handsets in 2001 and this figure is predicted to rise to405 million by 2005 according to research firm Gartner Thefundamental appeal of the mobile phone is that it extends a basic humanquality ndash the ability to communicate Teenagers in particular havebecome the main conduits through which mobile phones have found theirway into wider society and they were also the first group to realize thepotential of text messaging The Japanese teenage generation has even beendubbed oya yubi sedai meaning the thumb tribe on account of thedexterity with which they text message

Throughout this growth in mobile phone ownership consumers haveshown themselves to be one step ahead of marketers who have yet to reallydemonstrate that they understand the market drivers and how this mobilechannel can be most effectively integrated into the communications mixEquipped with mobile phones and other handheld mobile devicesconsumers are no longer static and fixed in time and space relative tobrands They have a choice of channels through which to connect with abrand and will exercise individual preference in using them For exampleconsumers may prefer to purchase some categories of goods online such asCDs videos books and software but use the Internet to browse for otherproducts and services In the US it is estimated that only 1 of new cars arepurchased online while half of the nationrsquos car buyers use the Internetsolely to research and compare automotive product options

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

In todayrsquos consumption-led economy using the 4Ps (or even the 7Ps of aRelationship Marketing approach) as the basis for marketing strategymisses a fundamental point consumption is enacted by consumers andtherefore they ndash and not products ndash should be the starting point ofmarketing strategy origination Robert Lauterborn (1991) described the

Implications for Consumer Marketing 33

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 33

need to focus instead on the 4Cs consumer needs and wants costs to the consumer (time money effort etc) convenience factors andcommunication (how the consumer wishes to be communicated with bythe supplying organization) With the arrival of the New Consumer thecommand-and-control approach to consumption management so typicalof the production-driven era is no longer applicable

Marketers need to accept that the marketplace is no longer stable andpredictable but is instead dynamic and complex and as a consequencetheir need for certainty must become replaced by a tolerance of ambiguityThis is driven for the most part by the heterogeneity of the NewConsumer Consumers today no longer resemble the conventionalperceptions formed in the era of mass marketing and traditionalapproaches to consumer research and segmentation do not adequatelycapture their essence New Consumers have minds of their own and are notreluctant to make their views known New Consumers are empowered tomake their purchases through an ever-expanding choice of media andchannels Moreover they change suppliers easily and often without anysense of disloyalty They even assemble in groups to influence the offer andget the best price or contract terms The New Consumer demands adifferent kind of customer relationship one that warrants an entirelydifferent approach to strategic consumer marketing

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Consumption today is about the satisfaction of consumer wants anddesires rather than the fulfilment of consumer needs

bull The process of consumption is widely recognized as a managementissue rather than simply a market phenomenon

bull The starting point for managing the consumption process should be theconsumer not the product and marketing strategy needs to reflect this

bull New Consumers are exercised by time lead complex lives seekexperiences are marketing literate and highly demanding and are ITenabled This creates a different set of expectations to be met in the newmarketplace

bull The New Consumer represents unprecedented challenges formarketers

34 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 34

bull Rethinking the consumer means rethinking marketing

bull The traditional command-and-control approach to consumptionmanagement must be replaced by more collaborative methods thatinvolve and value the consumer

Summary Points 35

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 35

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 36

The challenge for brand owners and retailers is lsquoinnovate or diersquo

While many consumer brand owners recognize the symptoms ofrevolutionary change within the marketing environment few have beenable to interpret and respond to them meaningfully because of seeminglymore pressing business demands Among these immediate issues is theneed to address concerns about the manufacturerndashretailer relationshipConsolidation within the retail sector is continuing to increase thedownward pressure on price making it difficult for manufacturers tomanoeuvre in terms of market position Added to this the impact ofglobalization has placed the future of manufacturing in question Overrecent years the focus of producers and retailers has been supply chainmanagement However for many organizations simply improvingefficiencies is no longer enough to achieve sustainability Todayrsquos keybusiness imperative is to balance cost reduction and sales growth

Retailers are facing major challenges Retail spending as a proportion ofgross domestic product (GDP) has fallen significantly over the past coupleof decades This disturbing trend and the emergence of the New Consumerare forcing retailers to abandon their lsquoone size fits allrsquo approach and to focusinstead on managing consumer heterogeneity through marketingstrategies resulting in narrower and deeper retail concepts

KEY ISSUES FOR BRAND OWNERS

Research into the key business issues concerning fmcg brand owners byconsultants Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young1 in 2001 underlined the overridingchallenge of dealing with change in the competitive environment Four

Concerns of Brand Owners 3and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 37

main concerns were identified the force of globalization debate about thefuture of manufacturing the growth in retailer power and the need tomanage the balance between cutting costs and growing sales

The Force of Globalization

Organizational profitability and growth are the key drivers of a marketingstrategy that has at its core the standardization of business structuresproducts and processes along global (or at least regional) lines For manyglobal brand manufacturers a policy of standardization means adoptingthe philosophy that investments in product development and promotionsprovide greater returns if they are not limited to a single national marketThe internationalization or globalization of business activity can lead tothe de-duplication of roles and factories across several countries serving tomake the organization leaner For consumers the first visible sign of such astrategy in operation is often the subtle name change of a well-knownproduct In the UK for example Jif became Cif (see Figure 31) Oil ofUlay became Oil of Olay and Marathon became Snickers

Production-driven supply-chain thinking usually dominates aglobalization strategy as producers seek to rationalize their number ofstock-keeping units (SKUs) so as to avoid adding complexity to the supplychain Several fmcg companies worldwide are involved in programmes thatwill severely reduce the number of SKUs they have to support Unileverfor example is currently amputating its long tail of under-performingbrands a process that will leave it with 400 strong-growth lsquopower brandsrsquoas compared to the heavily diluted pool of 1600 it started with

The main problem with a strategy of standardization is that it seldomacknowledges the consumption-led economy Consumers themselves arenot standard they differ from one market to another Fmcg giants riskalienation by offering a lsquoone size fits allrsquo product range Coca-Colarecognized this when it abandoned the mantra lsquothink global act localrsquo infavour of lsquothink local act localrsquo The company wisely decided thatmanufacturing operations should be embedded in the local culture

Global brand owners also have to deal with the fact that in some nationalmarkets brands can remain strong and profitable even though they maynever become international players This can create conflict between localand global management over whether or not the brand in question should

38 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 38

be retained within the global portfolio Success in managing a globalportfolio is therefore marked by finding the right balance betweenstandardization and customization

The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing

In order to deal with the increasingly competitive environment andrespond effectively to shareholder demands fmcg companies have beenforced to take a long hard look at their businesses Many are questioningthe value brought to their company and brands by retaining ownership ofthe actual manufacturing process and are evaluating outsourcing as aserious proposition That this debate is taking place at all signifies a radicalchange in thinking for fmcg manufacturers who have long regarded themanufacturing process as something of a sacred cow

Nike Ericsson and Sara Lee are among those brand owners providingindications of a possible way forward Nike for example famously sees

Key Issues for Brand Owners 39

Figure 31 Jif changed to Cif as a result of globalization

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 39

itself as a provider of lifestyles conveyed through sportswear innovationdesign and styling It has never regarded production as a core competenceThe manufacturing strategy implied by Nikersquos approach is one focused on coordinating access to external resources and ensuring effectivecollaboration between internal functions and contract manufacturersparticularly in the areas of new product development The management ofthese crucial relationships is therefore key

In taking the decision to follow a manufacturing strategy of lsquoinnovateand coordinatersquo rather than lsquoown and operatersquo the brand owner is makingproduct innovation and development a core competence and is focusing onthe areas that drive growth and shareholder value Use of such a strategyamong fmcg manufacturers also demonstrates that they no longer seethemselves as product companies and are repositioning themselves asservice companies with a product offering This move resonates with theeconomic trend away from a pure manufacturing base to an over-whelmingly services oriented economy Those brand owners treading boldlyinto this new realm are effectively launching themselves into a new way ofthinking to ensure their survival

The Growth in Retailer Power

Brand owners are increasingly feeling the threat posed by industryconsolidation as the balance of power is tipped in favour of savvy retailersIt is becoming commonplace for retailers to use their intermediate positionto negotiate prices trade terms shorter delivery times and tailoredpromotions securing a winndashwin situation for themselves and theircustomers They are also managing to persuade manufacturers to enter intovendor-managed inventory agreements where the supplier activelymanages the customerrsquos inventory The fear factor is intensifying in the UKamid speculation about whether AsdaWal-Mart are planning furtheracquisitions that would bring them head-to-head with Tesco Britainrsquosbiggest supermarket chain Wal-Mart is the worldrsquos biggest retailer withannual sales of more than pound140 billion It possesses massive purchasingpower and can buy goods very cheaply from Asia and developing nations

Further stress in the manufacturerndashretailer relationship stems from thepressure to standardize pricing and trade terms (following the introductionof the Euro) the competitive threat of high-quality own-label products

40 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 40

and the shrinking shelf space available for brands When retailerndashsuppliernegotiations come down to pure muscle power the retailers have the edgesimply because the fmcg sector is more fragmented Manufacturers havetried to improve their position by maximizing the power of their lsquomuststockrsquo brands but very few of these represent brands that retailers wouldgenuinely fear losing

In some cases a more collaborative relationship is developing where themanufacturer recognizes that the retailer incurs an opportunity cost (of notachieving maximum potential sales) and works with the retailer to addressthis by supplying not just products but also value-added services thatsupport the products The key to such cooperation is the mutual sharing ofinformation Private web-based exchanges which require the integrationof both internal systems are often used to share data and ideas In this wayNestleacute improved its on-shelf availability in Sainsburyrsquos stores to 97 whileits overstocking fell by 25

The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth

Brand owners especially food manufacturers are under increasing pressurefrom the large retail multiples to reduce their trade prices and increasetheir service levels In response manufacturers are trying to eliminatewastage and excess costs from all corners of their cost base At the sametime they are trying to find additional sales volumes to meet analystsrsquo salesforecasts and shareholdersrsquo expected return on investment So how well arethey managing the balance between cutting costs and growing sales

Unileverrsquos strategy is typical The company plans to eliminate 100 of its380 manufacturing sites as part of its well-publicized lsquoPath to Growthrsquoinitiative It is targeting top-line growth of 5ndash6 by 2004 through itsfocus on cost reduction and brand rationalization However cost reductionprogrammes come at a price euro6 billion of restructuring costs in Unileverrsquoscase Unilever chairman Niall Fitzgerald is confident the targeted savingsof euro15 billion together with purchasing savings of the same magnitudewill finance the companyrsquos ambitious growth plans

The growth strategies of major fmcg companies all share an emphasis oncost reduction and service improvement Achieving competitive advantageis becoming harder as both quality and cost-efficient production are nolonger distinguishing factors in the marketplace For decades now most

Key Issues for Brand Owners 41

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 41

manufacturers have been addressing the issue of resource wastage and fewwould stand out as inefficient The proportion of savings that they cangenerate for reinvestment in growth therefore depends on the effectivenesswith which they implement their respective cost reduction programmesTaking cost out of a business has historically been a more traumatic ndash butalso a more predictable ndash fiscal strategy than trying to grow revenues Andwhile corporate acquisition can offer significant scope for investmentcapital most would agree that innovation and organic growth representmore prudent options

The Search for Innovation

All of these issues combined with low inflation and price transparencythroughout Europe mean there is no end in sight to the price debate formanufacturers Low-cost production and distribution become theminimum requirements for staying in the game Achieving a step changein performance requires a radical solution and it is focused innovation thatoffers the most promising source of organic growth There should beinnovation in the relationship between manufacturer and retailer and inthe creation of the next wave of products and services The solution lies inadaptability that is the ability to concentrate on short product cycles andproduct innovation based on profound insight into the value consumers areseeking For consumer marketers this means having a value-centricorientation in the business and a way of managing that enables innovation

THE RETAILERSrsquo RESPONSE2

While many brand owners see retailers as the cause of their key businessconcerns retailers themselves face daunting challenges First and foremostamong these is a long-term pattern of declining spend In 1980 the retailsector represented 466 of GDP Today that figure has roughly halvedThis is because most consumers have everything they need and retailexpenditure is essentially concentrated on lsquonon-essentialsrsquo in satisfyingtheir wants and desires As a result retailers compete with an ever-expanding range of competitors encompassing such areas of expenditure asholidays eating out and personal luxuries

42 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 42

A closer look at this trend shows variations across different types ofbusiness In food retail this trend is typical of developed economies asthere is a limit to how much people can eat and eating out of home hasbecome increasingly popular This is why the grocery retailers are so keento develop their non-food businesses In clothing retail there has been aloss of share since the late 1990s probably driven more by a lack ofexcitement in the product offers than anything else In contrast the homeimprovement retail business has been a success story sales in do-it-yourself(DIY) and electrical products and furniture and soft furnishings haveshown significant growth

Retailers are also facing challenges in respect to business location In theUK there has been an escalation in out-of-town shopping forcing manytraditional high-street retailers out of business Non-central sites carrylower rents and opportunities for larger stores making for a more attractiveproposition At the same time the cost of siting businesses in towns andcities is rising for two important reasons the introduction of inflexibleupwards only rental arrangements and the rapid expansion of fast-foodoutlets coffee shops and mobile phone retailers

However this current trend is likely to be reversed with the propertyindustryrsquos proposed introduction of a code of practice that will enableretailers to negotiate more favourable rental agreements and the naturaleffects of market saturation Furthermore out-of-town rents are beingdriven upwards by buoyant demand for DIY and electrical goods as well asnew interest from clothing retailers

In store price is still a significant issue for retailers Continuation in theuse of lsquoevery day low pricingrsquo (EDLP) and promotions to leverage consumerinterest and revenueprofit is being questioned as consumer expectationsheighten and additional demands are placed on finite resources So caughtunder mounting pressure from intensifying competition and lsquomarginsqueezersquo what should the retailerrsquos strategy for survival be Several optionsexist and these may be used in isolation or combination

Trading across Multiple Locations

In the UK the rule of thumb for selecting the right sales location used to bethat if you could see McDonaldrsquos out of one eye and Marks amp Spencer out ofthe other somewhere in the middle was probably just right It is no longer

The Retailersrsquo Response 43

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 43

that simple as location and store format have become linked to segmentationstrategy The major multiples for example are increasingly tapping thepotential of smaller convenience and food-to-go stores in neighbourhoodand suburban locations In 2002 Tesco acquired the convenience storechains One Stop and Nite-and-Day with the intention of rebranding themto increase the number of Tesco Express outlets from 100 to more than 500

Trading across Multiple Formats

Major retailers across a range of industries no longer confine themselves tosingle-store formats but have developed a number of approaches tomaximize trading opportunities Larger store formats are becoming morecommon for retailing groceries clothing DIY and electrical goodsAmong smaller format stores retail growth is expected to come from newbuilds (mainly grocery) concession units (electricals and furniture) andstore lsquoimplantsrsquo such as the Health amp Beauty which Boots is trialling as anlsquoimplantrsquo in Sainsburyrsquos supermarkets

Use of Multiple Channels

With the rapid take-up of new technologies retailers are utilizing an ever-expanding mix of channels For example Next is one of a number ofcompanies to offer its goods across a range of channels online mail andtelephone ordering services are available to its customers Overall thenature of the online offer will probably continue to differ across the range ofproduct categories For example it is transactional in nature in clothinggrocery and electricals and more focused on promotion and the provisionof information to consumers in the areas of DIY furniture and health andbeauty Despite the hype surrounding e-commerce experts predict that by2005 little more than 5 of retail sales will be online The majority ofthese purchases will be made by consumers in the 26ndash45-year-old agebracket and the over 50s or lsquosilver surfersrsquo

Editing Choice in Store

The attention of retail managers is increasingly focusing on how consumersfind their way around product ranges within stores as well as how they

44 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 44

navigate store aisles New Consumers are looking for lsquoedited choicersquo thatis visible guidelines to help them save time and effort Smart retailers whounderstand this particular consumer want are targeting specific groupingsof products to appeal to specific segments of New Consumers For examplea range of specialist additive-free products will be grouped together withina supermarket rather than following the traditional practice of locatingadditive-free biscuits with other biscuits and additive-free bread withother breads

Enhancing Retail Branding

Retailers are developing their brands by creating new retail brandidentities targeted at particular market segments A retail brand such asThe Link a new Dixons Group brand works best in heterogeneousmarkets where economies of scale are of limited significance In contrastretail brand extensions are more commonly used where the core retailbrand has built up a strong level of consumer equity such as the strategyBoots is pursuing with its Boots Opticians brand

Developing Multinational Operations

Taking retail concepts overseas is a seductive proposition but few retailershave made a success of it Failed attempts to recreate business success inother countries usually result from a lack of understanding andappreciation of the way that markets operate There may be crucialdifferences in the way property is owned and managed or how employersand employees interact Sometimes it is a simple misreading of localconsumer needs However some retailers do manage to succeed inestablishing multinational operations and certain markets have becomethe focus of highly competitive activity Tesco and Wal-Mart for instanceare both aggressively expanding in central Europe and the Asia Pacificregion

Pursuing Customer Loyalty

Customer loyalty represents the Holy Grail for retailers who now have thepotential to use consumer data to build powerful knowledge-based

The Retailersrsquo Response 45

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 45

consumer relationships However as market analyst Verdict concludesconsumer loyalty is eroding across most sectors Consumer churn isgrowing most strongly in the areas of clothing housewares and footwearfollowed by DIY and food Figure 32 illustrates this decline in loyalty (thechange in the average number of people saying they were loyal to oneretailer) In order to arrest this trend retailers have introduced a variety ofloyalty schemes and programmes In the UK current benchmarks havebeen set by Tesco and Boots whose Clubcard and Advantage Cardrespectively are carried by a majority of consumers

The launch of Nectar a lsquonext-generationrsquo loyalty scheme backed bySainsburyrsquos BP Debenhams and Barclaycard introduced in 2002invigorated the battle for consumer loyalty (see Table 31) Nectarrsquos rewardsoffer focuses on frequently consumed lsquolow ticketrsquo items Loyalty points maybe redeemed by founding partners Sainsburyrsquos and Argos or by alliancepartners McDonaldrsquos Blockbuster Legoland and Odeon Cinemas

Critics of these loyalty schemes argue that what is being created is alsquoloyalty currencyrsquo rather than any genuine sense of affiliation with andsupport for a particular retailer They claim that successful loyalty schemesonly work because retailers are able to take consumer information and turnit into actions which in turn provide the consumer with recognizablebenefits These benefits strengthen the consumerrsquos bond with the company

46 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

6

4

2

0

ndash2

ndash4

ndash6

ndash8

ndash10

Change ()

Personal Music Electricals Food DIY Footwear House- Clothingcare video grocery ware

64 34

ndash41 ndash48 ndash83 ndash93 ndash99

01

Figure 32 The decline in loyalty 1999ndash2002 Adapted from Verdict 2002

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 46

The Retailersrsquo Response 47

Tab

le 3

1T

he b

attle

of t

he lo

yalty

car

ds (a

t Nec

tarrsquos

laun

ch)

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 47

[Text not available in this electronic edition]

because the consumer can see that the company cares about them enough toreward their business However a scheme that simply rewards theconsumer but fails to capture in a meaningful way the vital flow ofinformation from consumer transactions is a sales promotion schemehowever large it might be

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

The mass markets of the production-driven economy have given way to thediverse demanding markets of the consumption-led economy In responsebrand owners and retailers are replacing their lsquoone size fits allrsquo consumermarketing strategies with ones that are more customized and personalizedThe era of maximizing scale is over and the future of retailing looks to beabout creating retail concepts that appeal to smaller clusters of consumersWhile certain lsquocategory killersrsquo (giant out-of-town superstore brands thatfocus on retailing a single category of products such as BampQ in DIY) willsurvive as they currently stand most retailers are taking radical actionThey are creating a lsquonarrower and deeperrsquo type of offer in the hope ofgaining a higher penetration of consumer spend Micro-retailing whereretailers make a limited range of products available in a small store to ahighly targeted audience can only be successful if it is based on meaningfulinsights into the value being sought by the New Consumer Of course thispresupposes that a value-centric orientation exists within the business

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Both brand owners and retailers need to adopt a value-centricorientation and an approach to marketing that enables adaptabilitycreativity and innovation

bull The impact of globalization and questions surrounding manufactur-ing cost-effectiveness and competition are causing brand owners torationalize their portfolios

bull There is no end in sight to the trade price issue as retailers consolidateand continue to exert downward pressure on prices

bull To achieve improvements in brand performance brand owners mustdeliver consumer-focused innovation

48 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 48

bull Faced with a declining share of GDP and lower levels of consumerloyalty retailers are increasingly adopting multi-location multi-format multi-channel and multinational strategies

bull Micro-retailing is creating narrower and deeper retail offerings

Summary Points 49

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 49

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 50

New Consumer Marketing champions a new and viable way of marketing

New Consumer Marketing (NCM) does not just advocate a new focus formarketing it champions a new way of doing marketing It breaks awayfrom the mechanistic models of the production-driven era and providesfresh thinking on managing new patterns of consumer growth It focuseson the demand side of business taking the consumer as its starting pointnot its final destination As a concept NCM combines the strengths of anorganizationrsquos people and processes and enables marketers to break out ofthe binary thinking that has seen businesses swing between a singularemphasis on process or on people

NCM is at an early stage of development Its evolution as a specificmanagement discipline is being influenced by an eclectic body ofindividuals who recognize that new marketing approaches and attitudesare needed Most established marketing thinking has grown out of themechanistic age of marketing where the certainties of mass marketsprovided a sense of security for brand owners and retailers The presentmarketing environment is no longer as static and certain as it used to beand there is a growing need to find more appropriate marketing tools andtechniques to connect better with consumers

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHAT IS IT

New Consumer Marketing is not simply another way of managing themarketing mix It is an emerging business discipline that addresses a rangeof issues relevant to competing successfully in a particular market Its keyobjective is to establish sustainable competitive advantage through

New Consumer Marketing 4

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 51

superior processes of value definition value creation and value delivery Atthe heart of each of these processes is a core capability ndash insight innovationand agility These capabilities enable the organization to develop consumerresponsiveness that is to deliver the value required by its consumersegments cost-effectively

NCM helps marketers make sense of the complexity and apparent chaosthat defines todayrsquos consumer markets In this post-quake economymanagers find themselves searching for frameworks and tools that willenable them to master very different market conditions NCM providesfresh thinking on where and how to focus marketing attention andresources in this consumption-led economy It is a response by leading-edge marketers to the outstanding challenges posed by the NewConsumer whose arrival is marked by heightened competitiontechnological developments that have created an interactive marketplaceand increasingly irrelevant consumption management practice that isstruggling to succeed through Relationship Marketing (RM) andCustomer Relationship Management (CRM)

A Response to the New Consumer

Consumers today are faced with overwhelming choice For the most parttheir needs are taken care of and their discretionary expenditure is focusedon satisfying their wants and desires As discussed in Chapter 2 NewConsumersrsquo expectations of products services and brands extend beyondlsquofeaturesrsquo and lsquobenefitsrsquo to lsquoexperiencesrsquo Even with this insight brandowners and retailers face an uphill struggle in connecting with consumersTheir brand messages compete for the attention of an increasinglysophisticated audience who are bombarded with information from rivalsources As author Seth Godin (1999) has noted a wealth of data becomes apoverty of attention

Furthermore it is harder to reach consumers who live highlyfragmented lives and display multiple personalities and who changesuppliers at the click of button Such sophisticated and demandingconsumers are not confined to a static marketplace but roam freely withinan interactive one New routes to market emerge all the time making iteasier for consumers to go to market They can research products and maketheir purchases offline or online or both as is their preference For the

52 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 52

consumer controlling the relationship in this interactive marketplaceextends to controlling the value proposition more directly and forcefullythan ever before For instance the web can easily support build-to-ordermanufacturing where consumers specify the colour size or configurationof a product they want

A Response to the Interactive Marketplace

Developments in IT bring with them both opportunities and threats Forexample as we move from a state of interaction into an age of integrationconsumers will increasingly have access to information on the move and theability to demand faster better and cheaper service At the same timemobile commerce makes it possible for marketers to communicate moreeffectively with consumers marketing messages can be targeted andconsistent and consumer feedback can be received and assimilated

For the consumer the costs of doing business are likely to fall as IT offersan opportunity to find the best value for money offers For examplewwwcarsurveyorg and wwwmoneysupermarketcom enable consumersto make comparisons at the click of a mouse while other websites bringindividual consumers together empowering them to use their collectivebargaining power The next step on from this is the development ofpersonal agents or sites that coordinate and control the access of suppliersto meet an individualrsquos specific requirements for example a domesticservices agent that manages suppliers of utilities groceries mortgage andbanking services etc

The Internet opens up business transparency and effectively transfers thepower in the relationship to consumers Economists suggest that underthese conditions firms will end up as price takers in a near perfect market(markets in which conditions of free and open competition more or lessexist) The so-called lsquorate tartrsquo ndash the informed confident consumer whoswitches between companies to gain the benefit of the best financial dealson offer ndash is already a reality for suppliers of personal financial services Inthe music industry consumers have taken control of both production andconsumption Music lovers have exploited the advantages of MP3 astandard file format that enables digital music files to be compressed sothey can be downloaded via the Internet in a reasonable time and withoutlosing too much audio quality Consumers can e-copy songs and entire

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it 53

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 53

audio CDs without having to pay for the music (an opportunity for musicalartists to flaunt their talent a threat to the music industry in lost income)

A significant effect of the pace of change in IT has been the emergenceof time as a competitive dimension Organizations find themselveshaving to operate in lsquoMartini modersquo or ndash in the words of the drinkrsquosadvert ndash lsquoany time any place any wherersquo The term lsquo247rsquo has entered theEnglish language superseding the earlier phrase lsquoopen all hoursrsquoCompeting on the basis of time demands a rapid response capabilityOrganizations need to develop business strategies that ensureadaptability The turbulent marketplace means there is no certainty inlong-term demand forecasts

A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management

While the evolution of the consumer and IT were beginning to challengethe marketing status quo marketing focus shifted from managingindividual transactions to building consumer relationships RelationshipMarketing concentrated on retaining customers rather than acquiringthem simply because there were fewer lsquonewrsquo customers left to acquirecompetition was tougher and the correlation between profitability andlong-term customer relationships had been made

As a framework RM provided much useful learning about the benefitsof focusing on retention and developing relationships over time withcustomers and other stakeholders It introduced the idea that all of theserelationships are interdependent and it has encouraged managers tovisualize the marketing space as a web or network of interconnectedrelationships based on mutual interests However RM falls short ofenabling organizations to deal effectively with the New Consumer in theconsumption-led economy that is characterized by a dynamic complexity

In many organizations developments in IT and computationaltechnology were applied to the business of developing a CRM strategy It isnow widely accepted that the vast majority of expenditure on CRMsystems has failed to meet expectations This is because CRM is a poorlydefined concept and there is little agreement on how to implement itRecent research suggests that CRM should not be attempted by anorganization unless there is congruence between its marketing strategy ITstrategy and corporate culture The challenge for CRM systems is

54 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 54

delivering value into consumer markets characterized by high levels ofheterogeneity

NCM implies that the challenges thrown up by changing cultures ofconsumption and an increasingly competitive environment can only bemet through a step change in strategic thinking which in essence meansmoving the consumer up the corporate agenda The boardrsquos focus mustswitch from supply-chain management to managing the demand systemand that starts with the 4Cs (consumer needs and wants cost convenienceand communication) rather than the 4Ps (price product place andpromotion) Marketers who manage the critical interface between the newmarketplace and the organization are best placed to bring about thischange in focus NCM therefore offers an opportunity to overcome a decadeor so of debate about the contribution marketing makes to the success of abusiness by redefining marketingrsquos role and status in a way that also sendsit to new heights and into a new realm

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHAT DOES IT MEAN

NCM means adopting a value-centric orientation in the organization anddrawing on learning from the new science of complexity In this waymarketing can be conceptualized as a business discipline that enables anorganic approach focused around key processes of value definition creationand delivery and one that combines an emphasis on people and process

Adopting Value-Centricity

As the practice of marketing has evolved in response to market conditionsthe underlying philosophy of a business in relation to the customers itserves has shifted (see Table 41) Transaction marketing was based on asales orientation with the aim of acquiring as many new customers as possible Profit was generated through increased sales volumeRelationship Marketing switched the emphasis to developing greaterprofitability through customer satisfaction underpinned by a retentionorientation The realities of the consumption-led economy demand thatthe focus of a business shift again to insight innovation and agility toachieve profitability based on having a value-centric orientation in thebusiness

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 55

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 55

Value-centricity generates revenue growth and improved profitabilitythrough a focus on the demand side of the business It means movingbeyond a relationship emphasis to one that has at its core the definitioncreation and delivery of value If an organization can meet the valueexpectations of the consumer then a long-term and profitable relationshipis more likely to follow The key is having value as the starting pointotherwise the relationship development strategy (and the CRM toolsperhaps used to deliver it) will not work as intended

In NCM value-centricity therefore replaces the focus on customerretention as the underlying orientation of a business Profitability isgenerated through delivering the value consumers want to buy into and theorganization wants to deliver that is value on the consumerrsquos terms asdemanded and maybe even dictated by them This value component marksthe process of exchange that takes place between the consumer and theorganization it is the lsquothingrsquo that the consumer gets in return for what theygive Organizations must learn how to operate in this consumer lsquospacersquo

In order to meet New Consumersrsquo expectations organizations need tofine-tune their understanding of the factors that create this value thosethat maintain it and equally those that destroy it Understanding thenature of the different value factors is also an opportunity to review thelsquophantomsrsquo that exist in every organization that is those features of a brandthat the organization believes add value but which are not rated at all byconsumers These are the lsquotaken for grantedrsquo elements that can beeliminated from the process resulting in cost savings for the organization

56 New Consumer Marketing

Table 41 The evolution of the marketing orientation

Focus Means End

Sales orientation Transactional marketing Profits through acquiring customers

Retention orientation Relationship Marketing Profits through customerand CRM satisfaction

Value orientation Demand system management Profits through insightinnovation agility

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 56

Applying Science

Organizational understanding of the make-up of value consumers areseeking has to be continuously updated This is because the newmarketplace is dynamically complex The Internet is perhaps the moststriking example of this Experts believe that the speed scope and scale ofmarket change will be driven by two laws relating to technology The firstwas described by Intel founder Gordon Moore who declared that every 18months chip density (and therefore computing power) would double whilecosts would remain unchanged The second law is attributed to RobertMetcalfe the founder of 3Com Corporation and inventor of EthernetWhat he describes as the experienced utility of belonging to an electronicnetwork increases exponentially with the number of users In other wordsthe more who join a network the more sense it makes for others to do thesame Those who choose not to join miss out in more ways than oneMeeting the challenges posed by cheaper computing power and anemphasis on networks are expected to characterize future developments inconsumer marketing strategy

To make a value-centric orientation a reality in this new marketplacerequires a shift in mindset about the way an organization is capable offunctioning It means moving from thinking linearly and mechanisticallyto thinking organically as this holds the key to consumer responsivenessLiving entities are more capable of adaptability the key requirement forsurvival in the new marketplace Marketing needs to adjust to these newrealities and become a systemic holistic and above all dynamicallycomplex activity

This view connects with the new science of complexity in whichinteraction is characterized as a near chaotic state Complexity science isabout searching for patterns among an abundance of seemingly randomphenomena in the universe and about establishing how order emergesfrom the apparent chaos To use an example down in the garden pond in spring a mass of froglets experiencing the growth of new legs and thedisappearance of a tail will emerge from the water in a cacophony ofsound and hop haphazardly on to dry land To an observer this mayappear a chaotic scene but the froglets are actually only demonstratingcomplex adaptive system behaviour based on principles of self-organization

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 57

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 57

Complexity science is aptly named and has spawned two major sub-strands of research chaos theory and complex adaptive systems (Gleick1987 Pascale 1990) It was advances in computational technology in the1960s that made the science possible led by the work of Edward Lorenz onchaos theory His contribution is based on research into weather systemsand left the idea that lsquosmall changes can produce large resultsrsquo in thepopular mind Edification in this field came later in James Gleickrsquos 1987best-seller Chaos Making a New Science although these ideas were nottransferred to the business arena The behaviour of complex adaptivesystems however offers more scope for parallels with the world ofcommerce These systems are found everywhere and comprise independentbut dynamically interacting agents that develop their optimumperformance by continually learning changing and adapting to theirenvironments However chaotic the process looks at any point it alwaysevolves to a state of creative order one famously described by NormanPackard as the lsquoedge of chaosrsquo

The appeal of complexity science to business theorists is that it providesa way of thinking about how the underlying processes and relationships ina company can be organized to enable the company to become as adaptiveand creative as possible in the face of continual change This convergence ofscience and business provides a rich seam to be mined And RichardPascale in his 1990 book Managing on the Edge is credited with leading theway here although other authors also advocate this emerging biologicalthesis Champions of this scientific analogy are not however suggestingthat commerce will start behaving as nature does but instead believe that itcan be helpful in finding a different way of looking at business issuesBusiness may be able to learn how to understand complexity and find a wayof responding dynamically to change

Breaking out of Binary Thinking

NCM emerges at the confluence of these two streams of thinking ndash the newscience of complexity and the evolving discipline of marketing NCM istherefore different from the prevailing marketing paradigm It is abusiness discipline that enables the organization to master the increasinglydynamic and complex process of going to market in a systemic and holisticway It provides managers with a means of identifying and mobilizing

58 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 58

people and processes to help them become as adaptive and creative aspossible against the background of a complex marketing environment

A systemic approach to managing the dynamic complexity of the newmarketplace enables organizations to break out of the binary thinking thathas seen businesses swing between a singular emphasis on process or onpeople Marketing thinking has been heavily influenced by themechanistic models that emerged in the era of the production-driveneconomy These reductionist approaches are epitomized by the 1936 silentmovie Modern Times starring Charlie Chaplin Behind the slapstick and thesentiment in this film the little tramp finds himself at odds with societyand fights to hold onto the remnants of his tattered dignity andindividuality It is a pointed spoof of the dehumanization of man in anindustrialized society It derides mechanization as we see Charlie on theassembly line tightening nuts at breakneck speed ndash the perfect cog in awheel of misfortune Eventually a nervous breakdown forces him to leavethe factory but he cannot stop tightening nuts even when there are none totighten

Frederick Taylor and his book The Principles of Scientific Management aremost closely associated with these approaches to management (Taylor1967) His ideas influenced generations of business theorists from HenryFord and his mass production of the Model T-Ford automobile through toadvocates of more recent marketing trends (including the qualitymovement benchmarking BPR McDonaldization and lean production)right up to the current flirtation with Six Sigma (an approach that focuseson minimizing production errors) At the heart of these developments is abelief that there is only one right way to complete a task and that a businessshould be driven by efficiency based on the standardization of processes

In between these emphases on process the management pendulum hasswung back to a stress on people to achieve business success In the 1950sDouglas McGregor identified two contrasting styles of managementcommand-and-control and self-management which he termed Theory Xand Theory Y (McGregor 1960) He advocated a more participativeapproach and influenced many theorists who followed him among themCharles Handy (1989 1994 1997) These humanist approaches tomanagement found their expression in the concept of empowermentVolvo was among the first to implement them replacing individual carworkers with teams of workers who were given decision-making roles in

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 59

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 59

the business This must have been enough of a change to make Henry Fordturn in his grave

NCM encourages the synergy of both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo combined bytaking a systemic and holistic approach to marketing This way of thinkingoffers an opportunity to identify the key underlying processes andrelationships that help an organization function organically enabling it toadapt create and respond appropriately to the changing marketingenvironment

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHO IS INVOLVED

New Consumer Marketing has come about as result of the thinking of aneclectic body of managers consultants and academics These individuals aredrawn from a number of different spheres These spheres include thedevelopment of networks and network thinking where Tim Berners-Leeinventor of the World Wide Web Bill Gates whose company Microsofttouches all our lives Nicholas Negroponte founder-director of MITrsquos MediaLab Don Tapscott management consultant and John Seely Brown chiefscientist at Xerox PARC have made significant contributions (Berners-Leeand Fischetti 1999 Gates and Hemingway 1999 Negroponte 1995Tapscott 1996 1998 Tapscott et al 2000 Brown and Duguid 2000)

Other ideas have come from insights emanating from work that drawsmanagement closer to the world of the living sciences Stanford professorRichard Pascale for example sets out to draw a new management modelbased on complex living systems in Surfing the Edge of Chaos (Pascale et al2000) while Arie de Geus former head of planning at Shell originated theconcept of the learning organization and presents a gardenerrsquos organic viewof managing business in The Living Company (Geus 1999)

Two further strands of thought have come from academia where firstwork on interpreting contemporary consumer behaviour has thrown lighton the New Consumer1 and second there is a growing body of research andwork that highlights value as the new key driver of strategy2

Finally there are managers and consultants who are simply doing it orpreaching it in some form or another Many of these individuals and thecompanies they work for are mentioned or become the focus of short casestudies in the following chapters What starts to distinguish thosepractising NCM is that they share a common vision of a virtual compass

60 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 60

giving direction as to how best to manage the process of marketing to NewConsumers Unlike a traditional compass where the needle always settles ondue North the New Consumer marketing compass uses lsquovaluersquo as a referencepoint This guides thinking in managing the processes of value definitioncreation and delivery ensuring that the organization produces the value thatconsumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

New Consumer Marketing has important implications for consumermarketing It introduces a new approach and a new way of doing it NCMgoes beyond the management of the marketing mix and concerns itselfwith major business issues relating to the organizationrsquos positioning in themarketplace and the consumers it seeks to serve determining how andwhere it competes These issues are of a company-wide and high-levelnature that will impact the business in the long run How well anorganization masters NCM has significant consequences for its futureprofitability Mastery of NCM is dependent on having a framework inplace to enable the organization to describe and position its marketingstrategy This is considered in Chapter 5

SUMMARY POINTS

bull New Consumer Marketing (NCM) is a response to the arrival of theNew Consumer the development of the interactive marketplace andineffective consumption management

bull NCM is a business discipline whose key objective is creatingsustainable competitive advantage through superior processes of valuedefinition value creation and value delivery It demands a change instrategic thinking that moves the consumer up the corporate agenda

bull NCM draws on thinking from the new science of complexityOrganizations need to develop adaptability to survive in the newdynamic marketplace The key is achieving consumer responsivenessthrough insight innovation and organizational agility

bull NCM means rethinking marketing as a living demand system that hasat its core a value-centric orientation

Implications for Consumer Marketing 61

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 61

bull Value is defined as value on the consumerrsquos terms it is the lsquothingrsquo thatconsumers get in return for what they give Brand owners and retailersmust learn how to operate in this customer lsquospacersquo

62 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 62

A New Consumer Marketing model conceptualizes New ConsumerMarketing practice

No management learning is complete without the development of a modelor two Models help in conveying complex ideas but are more than simplevisual aids Business models normally fall into one of two types operationalor conceptual Operational business models offer a way of linking inputsand outputs within the managerial context to improve performance basedon empirical evidence Conceptual business models on the other handprecede this stage of development and assist in making sense of a large bodyof scholarly knowledge and management insight The New ConsumerMarketing model presented in this book is of the conceptual type Itrepresents a collection of assertions that identify important variables andspecifies how they are interrelated and why As such it provides a usefultool for marketers to formulate the way forward

TO RECAP

Chapter 1 established that businesses today are operating in a time ofradical transition the certainties of the production-driven economy havebeen replaced by the uncertainties of the consumption-led economyConsumption and the servicing of consumption now form the centralmotor of contemporary society The tools and techniques of marketingdeveloped mainly in the production-driven era are no longer applicable inthe marketplace of the New Consumer Furthermore marketingrsquoscontribution to business is unclear

Relationship Marketing (RM) was a strategic response by producerswho found themselves operating in mature markets where greater

A Model of New Consumer 5Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 63

profitability was shown to come from developing long-term relationshipswith customers RM theory shifted marketing focus from customeracquisition to customer retention While RM usefully highlighted theimportance of building relationships with customers consumers and otherstakeholders it fell short of enabling organizations to deal effectively withthe New Consumer in a consumption-led economy The implementationof RM strategies through CRM systems has also failed to meetexpectations leaving many marketers and non-marketers unclear aboutwhether they should be focusing on people or process

Chapter 2 showed that consumption management today is about thesatisfaction of consumersrsquo wants and desires rather than solely thefulfilment of their needs A wide range of organizations is recognizing thatconsumers not products drive the process of consumption and thereforethe consumer should be the starting point for developing strategies tomanage consumption In other words consumer marketers should basetheir activities on the 4Cs rather than the 4Ps

The chapter also introduced New Consumersrsquo characteristic attitudes totime their fragmented lifestyles and their motivating desire forexperiences New Consumers challenge current marketing thinking andpractice because they are marketing literate highly demanding and IT enabled In effect the lsquomakendashsellrsquo model of the old production-driven economy has given way to the lsquotellndashmakersquo model of the newconsumption-led economy To succeed now and in the future marketingstrategy must actively address the heterogeneity of these empoweredconsumers

Chapter 3 looked at the key concerns of brand owners and retailers andfound that despite differences in the challenges they face both are seekingsimilar solutions that focus on innovation The impact of globalization iscausing brand owners to rationalize their product portfolios and toquestion the wisdom of keeping manufacturing in-house Should theylsquoown and operatersquo or lsquoinnovate and coordinatersquo Price is a key issue asretailers consolidate and continue to exert downward pressure on pricesRetailers for their part are suffering a decline in share of GDP matched bya decline in consumer loyalty They are increasingly choosing to tradeacross multiple locations formats channels and countries Their partialsolution to satisfying New Consumers ndash micro-retailing ndash is leading to thecreation of narrower and deeper retail offerings

64 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 64

In Chapter 4 New Consumer Marketing was positioned as a response tothe challenges thrown up by changes in consumer culture and the widercompetitive environment It has emerged at the point where the evolutionof consumer marketing meets with the new science of complexity NewConsumer Marketing places the consumer at the centre of the consumermarketing process and works to ensure that the consumerrsquos perception ofvalue is the yardstick of success But this emergent business disciplinediffers from traditional marketing approaches in that it is about managingconsumer demand in an organic manner rather than managing consumersupply in a mechanistic fashion

KEY CHALLENGES FACING NEW CONSUMER MARKETING

The key challenges facing consumer marketers have been thrown up by thetectonic change that has impacted the macro-marketing environment Inthe shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economyconventional approaches to consumer marketing are not succeeding inenabling organizations to master the dynamic complexity of the newmarketplace These key challenges can be summarized as the need to

bull address the concerns of brand owners and retailersbull embrace the New Consumerbull help organizations develop real consumer responsivenessbull lift marketing out of its crisis

Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

Brand owners are facing a period of significant change as a result ofchanging consumer demand This combined with consolidation amongtheir customer base has put them under increased pressure to satisfy thesechanging needs While they would like to be focusing resources oninnovation and new product development instead they have no choice butto ruthlessly attack their cost base in order to meet retailersrsquo price demandsLow-cost production and distribution become the minimum requirementsfor meeting these demands and staying in the game competitiveadvantage is found elsewhere

Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing 65

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 65

Retailers face their own challenges driven by the declining proportionof GDP now attributed to retail spending As the consumer base becomesmore autonomous and diverse the lsquoone size fits allrsquo approach to developingretail concepts is no longer appropriate Both brand owners and retailersare looking to enrich and expand the strategic options open to them Theyneed to adopt a value-centric orientation and an approach to marketingthat enables adaptability and creativity This will empower manufacturersto manoeuvre within the relationship and work towards deliveringdemand-led profit growth while for retailers it will enable them toprofitably master the point of confluence where societal and economicchanges and changes in consumer culture are being played out

Embracing the New Consumer

What is clear is that there is an urgent need for fresh thinking in consumermarketing to find different ways of managing the realities of the newmarketplace The management of consumption now the driving force inthe economy needs to be rethought in light of the New ConsumerSophisticated and demanding at large in an interactive rather than a staticmarketplace the New Consumer creates new challenges for organizationswhich find the conventional tools of strategy making and tactical solutionsdeveloped in the mechanistic age of marketing of little help

Success or failure will ultimately depend on their abilities to understandconsumer behaviour in a time of continuous economic social andtechnological change and at the same time to manage the organizationrsquosresponse However developing understanding is becoming more difficult asthe approach of the production-driven era which characterized consumersby using basic demographics no longer gets us close enough to reallycomprehending buying motivations The predictive power of thesetraditional categories has been eroded and segmentation analyses that breakbuyers into simple caricatures of five or six types for entire markets oftencreate more barriers to effectively connecting with them than they facilitate

Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness

Growth is a business imperative Organizations have learned that theylsquocannot shrink their way to greatnessrsquo Gary Hamel and CK Prahalad in

66 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 66

their book Competing for the Future (1994) came up with the term lsquocorporateanorexiarsquo to describe the state many organizations found themselves inafter the accountants had seized on concepts such as Business Process Re-engineering (BPR) and lean production (known as lsquoleannessrsquo1) andintroduced rationalization and downsizing programmes which left little toinvest in new growth An internally focused cost-cutting strategy deliversshort-term gains but does not address the issue of long-term growthBreaking out of the cost-cutting cycle requires a more far-reaching strategythat anticipates the broader issues that will influence future performance

Growth comes from the demand side of the business which means doingthe same thing better or doing something new To achieve thisorganizations need to connect better with consumers they need tounderstand how to deliver the value that consumers are seeking in acontinually adaptive and creative way For many supply-chain managementhas been the name of the game over recent years However in contrast tosupply-chain thinking New Consumer Marketing takes the consumer as thepoint of departure for the organization not the final destination In effect thelsquopipelinersquo is reversed and organizations become forced to see the deliverycreation and definition of their offering from the consumerrsquos point of viewNew Consumer Marketing goes beyond simply renaming this lsquodemandchain managementrsquo by advocating drawing on learning from the newsciences and conceptualizing marketing as a demand system

Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis

Criticism about the lack of clarity surrounding marketingrsquos contributionto a business has been a feature of reports and articles over recent years Thisis in part driven by the difficulties surrounding the measurement ofmarketing effectiveness but also by the fact that marketing is both equatedwith business unit strategy and located within the marketing mixWithout a clear emphasis as to its role marketing languishes in a lsquono manrsquoslandrsquo and is badly placed to provide strategic leadership

THE NEW CONSUMER MARKETING MODEL

The NCM model recognizes and tackles ndash on a conceptual level ndash theseoutstanding challenges It advocates that organizations embrace the New

The New Consumer Marketing Model 67

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 67

Consumer by adopting a value-centric orientation and refocus theirstructures on the three key processes of value definition creation anddelivery These make up a demand system The central component of avalue-centric strategy is value on the consumersrsquo terms as demanded ndash maybeeven dictated ndash by them This value component marks the process ofexchange that takes place between consumers and the organization it is thelsquothingrsquo that consumers get in return for what they give

A process is defined as an activity or group of activities that takes aninput adds value to it and provides an output to an internal or externalcustomer At the heart of each of these key processes is a core capability ndashinsight innovation and agility These are the capabilities that enable brandowners and retailers to become adaptable and able to offer real consumerresponsiveness

Adopting a process approach entails a different way of working to thatassociated with traditional vertical hierarchical structures of functionaldepartments These static structures act as a barrier to performance Infocusing on processes organizations take on a flatter horizontal structurethat enables them to be more responsive by speeding up decision-makingprocesses and encouraging cross-functional collaboration which helpsmaximize consumer value and operational cost-effectiveness With anemphasis on understanding consumers and their value preferences value-centric organizations draw key employees together in autonomousmultidisciplinary teams to focus resources around the main processesOften these teams are temporary enabling the organization to combineand recombine assets according to the nature of the opportunities thatarise These are firms that regard the organizational whole as greater thanthe sum of its parts However this does not mean that organizations cannotgrow big Tesco for example is one of a number of organizations that hassucceeded in building the virtues of smallness into a large organization

The NCM model adopts the principles of the new science to suggest anorganic approach to consumer marketing Where marketing is viewed as asystemic holistic and dynamically complex activity adaptability becomesan achievable goal In business systemic thinking offers a way ofidentifying the key underlying processes and relationships that help theorganization to adapt create and respond appropriately to the changingmarketing environment In this way organizations are able to break out ofthe binary thinking that has long constrained management theory and the

68 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 68

model encourages the synergy of both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo combined Inshort the static marketing function of the production-driven economybecomes a living demand system in the consumption-led economy

The NCM model lifts marketing out of its crisis in terms of presenting aconceptual guide for practitioners for generating and managing theexchange process under conditions of competition The NCM modelprovides a framework that enables an organization to describe and positionits marketing strategy In doing this it identifies the consumer segments itseeks to serve determining where and how it will compete Working at thelevel of competitive strategy substantiates NCM as a business discipline

Marketers are best placed to provide strategic leadership in themanagement of this critical interface between the organization and the newmarketplace They oversee the exchange process and the necessary alignmentof internal and external factors They are in the best position to understandand interpret emerging trends for the benefit of the organization

The New Consumer Marketing model is presented in Figure 51 and itshows quite clearly how consumer marketing can be conceptualized asconsisting of the three key processes underpinned by a value-centricorientation The model is organic in nature reflected in the use ofhoneycomb-shaped cells each of which has a nucleus

The honeycomb with its familiar six-sided shape provides a usefulmetaphor for explaining how marketing can be visualized as a livingdemand system The honey-bee is well known to us all This is a creaturethat is renowned for its productivity and the fact that it creates its ownvalue proposition in the form of honey Honey manufacture is a task sharedamong various types of bee and each contributes its own instinctiveexpertise The hive members work in harmony to ensure the survival of thecolony Of course this is just a metaphor and there are limits to how far itcan be taken but because it is dynamic iterative and flexible thehoneycomb offers an example of working where people and process arecombined in a continually productive system

The capabilities at the heart of each key process and the seven elementsthat make up the organizational DNA demonstrate the company-widehigh-level approach that is taken by the NCM model By offering a holisticapproach to managing the exchange process in a dynamic marketplace themodel aims to assist managers in developing and implementing successfulconsumer marketing strategies

The New Consumer Marketing Model 69

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 69

The first cell in the demand system is concerned with the process of valuedefinition that is the process of generating and identifying insight in orderto describe and demonstrate value Chapter 6 covers the traditional andnon-traditional ways of generating insight Segmentation then considershow insight is made actionable Finally the importance of re-evaluatingthe role and status of the insight generators within an organization isexplored

The next cell in the demand system is value creation Chapter 7 exploresthe process of creating value that results in a value proposition for a specificaudience Innovation forms the nucleus of this cell and the strategicsignificance of this is covered Other elements in the process include newproduct development branding positioning and pricing Branding isportrayed as the consumerrsquos experience of value and the implications ofthis are discussed through a number of cases

The third key process in a demand system is value delivery Chapter 8discusses how value is communicated and conveyed by an organization to a

70 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

13

13

13 $

Figure 51 The New Consumer Marketing model

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 70

specific audience Media and channels are explored alongside the roles ofservice technology integration and supply-chain management Thewatchword here is organizational agility

Finally Chapter 9 describes the seven elements of the organizationallsquoDNArsquo that makes a demand system viable This chapter describes how thecells of the living system are managed through an exploration of the natureand interrelationships of intuition culture and structure leadershipvision and values employees knowledge management planning andmeasurement These are the elements that instruct and inform the threecells of the living demand system about how to optimize performance andensure competitive survival

The New Consumer Marketing Model 71

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 71

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 72

The process of defining value from the consumerrsquos perspective

Defining value = generating and identifying insight in order to describeand demonstrate value specifically

Watchword = insight

In the production-driven era marketing was informed by a seller-centricorientation In todayrsquos consumption-led economy New Consumers aremore demanding and sophisticated and they inhabit an interactivemarketplace Marketing in this business environment requires a differentorientation New Consumer Marketing is founded on a value-centricphilosophy that focuses on defining creating and delivering the value thatconsumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver Themutuality of the benefits gained by both parties is recognized and asymbiotic relationship is established

Managing this relationship between organization and New Consumerrequires an alternative approach to the command-and-control practices ofthe production-driven era Mechanistic models are no longer appropriateand more organic models are being developed such as the New ConsumerMarketing model presented in this book

Value definition the first cell in the New Consumer Marketing modelis concerned with the process of defining the value consumers are seekingInsight forms the cellrsquos nucleus Insight is described as lsquothe power of seeinginto and understanding things imaginative penetration practicalknowledge and awarenessrsquo It enables the organization to begin the processof connecting with New Consumers in a way that will deliver sustainablecompetitive advantage

Value Definition 6

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 73

In generating knowledge about New Consumers many organizationsclaim that the traditional tools and techniques of market research do notseem to be working as well as they did in former times and marketers are looking to broaden the range they use The aim is to get underneath the skin of consumers in a way that provides insight into theirunarticulated needs and desires To achieve this organizations areincreasingly adopting a bricolage approach in which investigative andinterpretative market research methods drawn from different disciplinesare pieced together In best-practice organizations the insight generated isapplied to the consumer base through the process of segmentation in orderto identify the value that is required by the organizationrsquos most promisingprospects

THE ROLE OF INSIGHT IN VALUE DEFINITION

Although insight is derived from the obvious it is not the same as factInsight is the capacity to penetrate the human condition and see hiddentruths For example it is a fact that snowboarding is a sport but it is aninsight that snowboarders are the only sportsmen and women who feeltreated like outcasts on the slopes Where an insight is turned into acompelling marketing idea it can work to create a powerful bond betweenthe consumer and the brand Brands of clothing for snowboarders thatpromote the idea of belonging to a rebellious tribe have been highlysuccessful for example

Insight provides the means for defining value from the consumerrsquosperspective To interpret consumer insight in a way that is meaningfulorganizations need to understand what are the component factors thatconstitute value These factors will serve one of three purposes for theconsumer they will enhance value maintain value or destroy value Thisvalue concept is illustrated in Figure 61

Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value

Identifying these value-influencing factors and the way in which theyinterrelate is the fundamental aim of all insight-generation activitiesFactors that create or enhance value for the consumer are those that aremould-breaking or have never before been offered in the marketplace

74 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 74

They are the key discriminating factors that set the organization apart fromcompetitors in the eyes of consumers Occasionally these value-enhancersmay be lsquoadoptedrsquo by consumers and become lsquotalking pointsrsquo creating greatword-of-mouth marketing A good example of this is Krispy KremeDoughnuts

Krispy Kreme DoughnutsKrispy Kreme Doughnuts is one of the top five fastest-growing businesses inthe quick-service restaurant sector in North America with plans for expansioninto Europe Krispy Kreme aficionados swear by the companyrsquos hot OriginalGlazed doughnuts which are lsquomanufacturedrsquo before the customerrsquos eyes inthe Doughnut Theater (a visible conveyor belt-based operation) The KrispyKreme Doughnut experience receives popular acclaim (including thatcontributed by cartoon character Homer Simpson who is famous for hislsquoMmm donuts helliprsquo phrase) This strong word-of-mouth marketing has played asignificant role in building consumer awareness of the brand In Canada forinstance the impulse to purchase fresh hot Krispy Kreme doughnuts is sostrong that according to the Canadian marketing director people will driveon average 14 miles to reach a Krispy Kreme store

The Role of Insight in Value Definition 75

V

V

V

C

I

-

T

Figure 61 The value concept

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 75

Companies offering lsquovalue-enhancersrsquo will build market share quicklyrearranging the competitive forces in the marketplace as they do so Forexample the Woolwich Building Society has seen its business improve atthe expense of rivals as a direct consequence of introducing a new kind ofaccount ndash the Openplan Account Openplan creates value for customers byplacing customers in control of their money and enabling them to managetheir complex financial matters easily through using the one account Itallows customers to personalize the names of their various savings lsquopotsrsquoand to tell the Woolwich when to move funds into higher-interestaccounts For consumers Openplan was a welcome change from thetraditional way of banking where customers would be told how theirmoney was being handled and has now been adopted by the Barclays groupof the Woolwich Building Society

Factors that maintain value are the lsquohygienersquo factors or the core featuresand attributes that all competitors must offer to be considered players inthe marketplace These lsquovalue-maintainersrsquo work in combination with thelsquovalue-enhancersrsquo to affirm value with consumers They should be subject

76 Value Definition

Figure 62 Krispy Kreme Doughnuts are a talking point

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 76

to regular sense checking to ensure that they continue to perform thissupportive role It may be the case that one or more of these value-maintaining factors has the potential to be developed into a value-enhancing factor Alternatively some of these factors may have to bedropped from the offering if they show signs of actually reducing itsconsumer value

The third category of factors that make up the consumerrsquos concept ofvalue encompasses those that diminish and destroy value These are thelsquoturn-offsrsquo for consumers Once identified these lsquovalue-destroyersrsquo shouldbe eliminated from the offering but not before the company has anunderstanding of why they have a destructive influence Their significancecan be overlooked where there is not a dynamic approach to generatinginsight Laura Ashleyrsquos experience provides a useful example

Laura AshleyIn the early 1990s Laura Ashley the fashions and furnishings retail chainresearched the behaviour of its own shoppers and noted that if shoppersmade a purchase of curtains particularly made-to-measure curtains from thestore they had a higher propensity to go on to buy matching wallpaper andother home furnishing items as well A pound300 purchase could easily becomethe first of a series of transactions with a combined value of several thousandpounds The purchase of curtains was in effect a trigger to other salesHowever the study revealed that customers were increasingly put off frompurchasing curtains when expert staff were not available This occurred mostoften on Saturdays when the stores used part-time relatively inexperiencedstaff Clearly ordering made-to-measure curtains involves some fairlycomplicated calculations and there is a wide margin for error Customerswould only place an order with someone they believed was competentenough to check their own calculations and order the curtains correctly OnceLaura Ashley realized the impact of its staffing policy the company made thenecessary changes and this resulted in higher levels of customer satisfactionand greater sales of curtains By removing this particular value-destroyer thecompany was able to uphold its customersrsquo value perceptions of the brand

Source H Peck lsquoRelationship Marketing Lessons from Laura Ashleyrsquo casestudy Cranfield School of Management 1995

In some cases organizations have a misperception themselves about thefactors that create value spuriously believing that certain factors add valuewhen in fact they simply maintain or even destroy it These are thelsquophantom factorsrsquo in the value exchange and can often take on sacred status

The Role of Insight in Value Definition 77

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 77

within a business For example the Ford Motor Company believed for along time that it was necessary to include a spare wheel as part of a new caroffering However insight generated by its small car product strategyteam into the requirements of StreetKa buyers showed that a spare wheelwas not important in the purchase decision With this knowledge themisgivings of Ford engineers were overcome and the company went on tosuccessfully launch a model without a spare wheel Drivers are insteadsupplied with a canister of foam which will enable them to fix a puncturesufficiently well to drive to the nearest garage for repair or replacement

Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors

Having identified the components of value that factor in the consumerrsquosperception of value the organization then needs to understand exactlywhat meaning they have for consumers Consumers typically describe thesevalue factors in terms of tangible or intangible features The task formarketers is to delve deeper and question why consumers consider thesefeatures to be important The answers will lie in the benefits the featuresdeliver and the way in which some of these benefits in turn work at alsquohigher levelrsquo in satisfying consumersrsquo personal values Consumer researchinto how Nike trainers are purchased showed that while the inclusion ofthe air sole was a straightforward physical feature of the shoe manyconsumers considered it to be a value-enhancer Consumers felt that thecushioning effect of the sole would provide greater comfort and protectionon the sports ground and this in turn would enable them to play sportbetter The air sole thus satisfied personal values associated with a sense ofwell-being and keeping fit In this way product features benefits andpersonal values become interlinked in the consumerrsquos mind This is showngraphically in Figure 63

Mapping consumer perceptions of products in this way demonstrateswhy the various components of value are important It is a technique thatcan be used to understand how consumers perceive differences betweenproducts revealing to the organization the competitive set in which itoperates Mapping the component factors of value for consumers is basedon a well-established research approach known as meansndashend theory1 Thetheory suggests that consumers make the value exchange as a means ofachieving something else This lsquosomething elsersquo may be about product

78 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 78

benefits or it may be about the satisfaction of personal values Uncoveringthese linkages is key to creating positioning communicating anddelivering the value offer as explained in the next chapters

Insight then enables the organization to define value from theconsumerrsquos perspective It provides a means of identifying underlyingsources of buyer motivation Current thinking as to how this process ofgenerating insight should be undertaken is in a state of flux as traditionalmarket research is being augmented with a range of alternative practices

THE ROLE OF TRADITIONAL MARKET RESEARCH INVALUE DEFINITION

In seeking to get closer to New Consumers marketing managers todayhave an expanding box of tools and techniques at their disposal Thesegenerally fall into one of two categories traditional market research andnon-traditional approaches to market sensing The former comprisesestablished practices which are being updated by new thinking fromvarious disciplines The latter includes a range of approaches from old-fashioned reliance on front-line staff to the contemporary use of IT

As the staple method of insight generation market research aims toanswer fundamental questions about what makes consumers lsquotickrsquo so thatmanagers can refine existing marketing practice Market research emergedas a formalized business process in the latter part of the last centuryalthough the principles it encapsulates go back much further The primeobjective of the modern survey a standard tool of market research is to

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 79

Figure 63 Linking features benefits and personal values

Niketrainers

lsquoGoodhealthrsquo

lsquoEnhancedperformancersquo

lsquoSole with airpocketsrsquo

lsquoSupportfor footrsquo

Features Benefits Personalvalues

Deliver Satisfy

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 79

recapture the lsquodialoguersquo that took place between buyer and seller in the pre-industrial age where the local market or village shop dominated as theplace of buyerndashseller interactions

Formalized market research was first undertaken by manufacturers inthe fast moving consumer goods (fmcg) sector It enabled companies togain a structured and reliable view of the marketplace which they couldthen use to improve their competitiveness They studied markets byborrowing the statistical methods and principles developed by socialscientists to understand and quantify human behaviour They used these incombination with the sampling methods they already had in place toensure quality control on their production lines Some of the earliest bookson the subject of market research were in fact published by leading brandowners such as Cadbury and Shell These books were used as internaltraining manuals in the days before comprehensive reference texts wereavailable The tools and techniques developed then still form the staple ofmost market research plans today What is changing is the mix oftechniques used qualitative approaches are slowly gaining ground at theexpense of quantitative approaches

Using Quantitative Research

Generating insight means focusing largely on answering the lsquowhyrsquoquestion lsquowhy do people dothinkbuy what they dothinkbuyrsquo Data onlsquowho what where when and how manyrsquo on the other hand providesuseful information on context To generate this data organizations usuallyfall back on the use of quantitative surveys These routinely involve largenumbers of respondents who may be chosen on a quota basis to create astatistically representative selection of the larger population Respondentsare all asked the same questions in highly structured interviews to establishevidence of market preferences and trends Quantitative surveys can beconducted on an ad hoc or ongoing basis ndash the latter are often referred to aspanel surveys Ad hoc surveys can provide insight into a potential solutionto a specific business issue and may be repeated on lsquofreshrsquo groups ofrespondents at regular intervals For example Wallrsquos Ice Cream publishesan annual survey on the topic of childrenrsquos pocket money Panel surveys onthe other hand use the same set of respondents to provide regular (weeklyor monthly) feedback on grocery purchases for example Data is collected

80 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 80

in four main ways by post by telephone in face-to-face interviews andincreasingly via web-based surveys

While many marketing managers profess a preference for quantitativesurveys simply because they contain lsquohard numbersrsquo based on the science ofstatistics and sampling theory the pivotal issue is the robustness of thedata evidence David Smith and Jonathon Fletcher (2001) suggest there areseven questions to be answered before reassurance can be given

bull Was the design free of flawsbull Was the sample representativebull Did the questionnaire lsquoworkrsquobull Was the process free of interviewer biasbull Were there any data preparation errorsbull Were there any presentation andor reporting errorsbull Was the interpretation free of flaws

This traditional quantitative approach to research essentially deals withaverages it tells marketers what an average consumer wants But findingaverage consumers is difficult As is often quoted some consumers like icedtea others like hot tea but very few express a liking for lukewarm tea Thispractice of looking for lsquoaveragesrsquo is typical of an aggregate way of thinkingand as has been made clear so far in this book markets today aredisaggregated and characterized by high levels of heterogeneity The NewConsumer cannot be described as lsquoaveragersquo To generate meaningfulinsight into consumer needs and preferences researchers are turning to agreater use of qualitative approaches

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 81

Small numbers

Exploratorydiagnostic

Quota samples

More flexible

More costly per respondent

Large numbers

Confirmatorydefinitive

Representative samples

Less flexible

Less costly per respondent

Figure 64 Qualitative versus quantitative research

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 81

Using Qualitative Research

In seeking to answer the lsquowhyrsquo question researchers increasingly draw onan eclectic pot-pourri of qualitative techniques The roots of qualitativeresearch can be traced to the 1960s the height of the production-drivenera when marketers began to demand deeper insights into the purchasingbehaviour of consumers and motivational research an approach developedby Ernest Dichter gave birth to contemporary qualitative methods ofenquiry In effect the consumer was lsquoput on the couchrsquo and the researcherrsquosinterpretations of attitudes and behaviour were drawn from the fields ofpsychology and psychoanalysis Projective questioning (lsquoif this brand werean animal what kind of animal would it bersquo) and other techniques adaptedfrom these disciplines became the favoured tools for mainstreamqualitative researchers Over the next two decades researchers from otherdisciplines such as sociology and social anthropology added theircontributions introducing notions of humankind as social animals and asproducts of their culture

Today traditional qualitative research commonly features the use offocus groups and in-depth interviews These methods involve askingcomparatively small samples of respondents questions about what they doand think and listening to and interpreting the response The output ofqualitative research is exploratory or diagnostic in nature respondents arenot meant to be representative of the larger population but are intended toreflect the profile of known or desired consumers (Non-consumers are alsooften consulted for their independent input) The aim is to generateunderstanding of the things that bind groups of consumers together

Sadly the impressionistic and non-confirmatory nature of qualitativeresearch has received bad press over recent years to an extent where focusgroups have become demonized in some quarters of the national mediaSmall-sample statistical theory has never been robust enough to convincemany managers that the evidence produced by 36 or 48 people is asaccurate as the aggregated output of 2000 survey respondents There isoften confusion over the way in which the evidence should be used to shapethe strategy of an organization However the notion that it is acceptable towork with limited numbers of respondents is an accepted method in thesocial sciences Grounded Theory2 as this concept is known states thatresearchers should stop collecting fresh information when they get to a

82 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 82

point where it ceases to add anything to the conceptual understanding ofthe issue under investigation (usually after conducting a limited number ofinterviews)

These traditional approaches to quantitative and qualitative research arebased on an assumption that consumers can ndash and are willing to ndash articulatetheir thoughts beliefs feelings and behaviours Organizations wanting tomake breakthrough developments are rather more concerned withunderstanding latent unarticulated consumer wants and desires To meetthis demand on the part of organizations researchers have added to thetoolbox more lsquoin sitursquo investigative methods such as discourse semioticand ethnographic analyses These provide a deeper understanding of themeaning of value factors to consumers bringing organizations closer to thelsquoAharsquo moment when insight becomes obvious

Discourse Analysis

Discourse analysis is a market research technique that looks for patterns inpeoplersquos language such as the metaphors or figures of speech they use tocommunicate about the world around them It can also mean undertakinga review of individual words to gain a deep understanding of whatconsumers mean when they say something Discourse analysis demands adetailed examination of every utterance including those that aretraditionally discarded in the process of analysis This would include howrespondents use what linguists refer to as lsquodiscourse markersrsquo (non-semantic syntactically empty words such as lsquolikersquo lsquoumrsquo lsquoerrsquo lsquokind of rsquo lsquosortof rsquo lsquoyou knowrsquo in the English language) as they are often carriers of culturalmeaning Insight into how consumers use language can help marketersconnect more effectively with consumers as they can use consumersrsquo ownlanguage in creating and delivering value One of the most outstandingexamples of a business that was built on an insightful understanding ofconsumersrsquo language is the most successful pre-school televisionprogramme ever produced ndash Teletubbies

TeletubbiesTeletubbies was developed by Anne Wood and Andrew Davenport forRagdoll Productions (UK) Ltd Anne Woodrsquos worth today is estimated at pound150 million largely due to the success of the fictional made-for-televisioncharacters The success of the original idea can be traced to a combination ofWoodrsquos ideas and business acumen and Davenportrsquos expertise in speech

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 83

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 83

sciences and his understanding of the world of young children The brightlycoloured characters soon established themselves as firm favourites amongpre-school children and their parents with their empathetic use of the pre-schoolerrsquos language and their childlike wonder at the world around them

Semiotics Analysis

Another set of techniques for generating insight draws on the discipline ofsemiotics This is the science of decoding cultural signs which is used byresearchers to get into consumersrsquo subconscious and to predict whereconsumer trends are heading It is based on a belief that we are all shaped byour culture (and not the other way round) and that goods are charged withcultural meaning Consumers use this meaning as a form of expression tosay something about themselves to develop and sustain their lifestylesand to create and sustain social change The role of the researcher is todecode the symbols as a way of understanding culture and what consumersare saying about themselves This kind of insight provides managers with ameans of understanding the role of brands within a culture both theorganizationrsquos own brands and competitive offerings The well-establisheddrinks brand Guinness has successfully employed semiotics analysis

84 Value Definition

Figure 65 The Teletubbies online

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 84

GuinnessGuinness UDV tasked Malcolm Evans and the Added Value agency withdeveloping a user-friendly marketing tool that could be used around the worldto gain insight into the competitive environment (Evans 2001) Usingsemiotics analysis Evans and his team created a tool kit that guidesmarketers in various local markets through the same process This enablesthem to map an understanding of the meaning of beer to consumers in eachof their markets and then to analyse and interpret the advertisements in orderto understand the advertising proposition Having decoded the marketGuinness executives can then work on refining the positioning of their brandsin that market

Ethnographic Analysis

A third approach to generating insight into consumersrsquo latent wants anddesires that is arousing a lot of interest is brand ethnography This is basedon a technique developed in the social sciences in the late nineteenth andearly twentieth centuries where researchers went overseas to researchtraditional lsquotribesrsquo and cultures The underlying philosophy ofethnographic analysis is that the closer the researcher can get to consumersrsquohabitats the greater the chance he or she has of understanding consumersrsquorelationships with other people or with the things that surround them It isbased on a central belief that the researcherrsquos study of consumer behaviouris most accurate and revealing when consumers are immersed in theirnatural environment

This approach to generating insight means taking an analytical view ofconsumers over a long period of time Longitudinal studies as they areknown are not common in marketing because of the high costs involvedand because research results are generally required sooner than anethnographic study can deliver them However some companies such asUnilever consider the investment worthwhile

UnileverUnilever used this ethnographic analysis to understand the opportunitiesarising from the growth of sales of white goods in developing countries Theresults of its year-long study identified broad areas of opportunity forexample the types of clothes bought and worn how clothes are treated andcared for and consumer expectations of clothes care and product benefitsAll of this was set within a cultural context The study also identified astructured framework of issues that the company had not previously been

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 85

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 85

aware of to do with attitudes and behaviours relating to the process of caringfor clothes This new knowledge presented an opportunity to focussubsequent research more closely on these issues with the aim ofuncovering some latent wants and desires that were not being satisfied Thislater research opened up new commercial opportunities for Unilever

Source Lynn McKay New Futures Consumer Scientist lsquoCreatingcommercial value from ethnographic insightsrsquo presented at the Generatingand Leveraging Consumer Insight Conference IQPC London March 2002

As with more standard approaches to qualitative research these threeanalytical methods ndash discourse semiotic and ethnographic analysis ndash arenot designed to be representative of the wider population of consumersbut are intended instead to generate insight that could never be uncoveredthrough focus groups in-depth interviews and quantitative surveysCritics suggest the techniques are very dependent on the interpretationalskills of the individual researcher can often appear to be using asledgehammer to crack a nut and tend to produce more data than isusefully required However these research techniques can revealframeworks for further consumer analysis leading to meaningfulunderstanding of the value consumers are seeking within a wider culturalcontext

Need-States Analysis

As the consumption-led economy becomes more of a reality fororganizations debate about how best to generate insight intoconsumerndashbrand relationships moves on apace In 1994 qualitativeresearch expert Wendy Gordon revived the concept of need-states toexplain the fact that there are more differences between the same consumermaking a brand choice on two different occasions than between twodifferent consumers choosing the same brand on the same occasion Peoplechoose brands to fit a particular context For example consumers maychoose to buy a cheaper bottle of supermarket own-label wine from thesupermarket to drink with a partner at home yet they will choose a moreexpensive shipperrsquos labelled wine to take as a gift when dining at a friendrsquoshouse Their choice of product is influenced by a variety of factorsincluding the meaning of each occasion the environment in which the

86 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 86

wine will be consumed and the other people involved This leads to theidea that a brand can be positioned against a need-state and througheffective brand communications activity can become the brand mostassociated with that need-state

Need-states analysis has at its core an understanding of how consumersmake sense of the world Consumers create a model of the world in theirminds which psychologists refer to as a lsquomental modelrsquo It is theconsumerrsquos representation of how something is or how something happensA brand can be thought of as a type of mental model and this subject isdiscussed further in the next chapter However the notion of mentalmodels is relevant here as the task of the researcher is one of uncoveringconsumersrsquo mental models of the world Thinking about consumerndashbrandrelationships in this way draws on learning from cognitive science thebranch of psychology that deals with how the mind works from theindividualrsquos perspective

Today Wendy Gordon firmly believes that the future of cognitivescience lies in the newly merged disciplines of neuroscience and cognitivepsychology known as neuro-psychology (Gordon 2001) This branch oflearning brings together an understanding of the science of the brain itsphysiology and functions as well as psychological theories For her thisemerging discipline offers the opportunity to truly get inside theconsumerrsquos mind She believes it holds the promise of a scientific basis forunderstanding how human beings create store recall and relate to brandsin everyday life

What is evident from this discussion of the role of traditional(quantitative and qualitative) market research in generating insight is thatorganizations cannot rely on only one of the techniques to deliver absoluteinsight The reality is that both quantitative and qualitative research offermeaningful insight and they work in complementary ways As Gordon saysin her book on qualitative research Goodthinking (1999) lsquoThe case forusing bricolage (a pieced together set of investigative and interpretativemethods drawn from different disciplines) has never been strongerrsquoApproaches to bricolage also draw on non-traditional market sensingtechniques and these are considered next

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 87

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 87

THE ROLE OF NON-TRADITIONAL MARKET SENSING INVALUE DEFINITION

While market research provides a stream of invaluable knowledge aboutconsumers it is increasingly augmented with information derived fromthe use of database systems and technology that enables front-line staff toprovide instant feedback on consumer behaviour This data works in asupplementary fashion providing the organization with the opportunityto develop a more complete understanding of consumer motivation Thisunderstanding is vital for constructing successful value propositions

Using Database Systems

In the 1970s traditional market research methods were the only real sourceof consumer insight By the 1990s marketers were becoming spoilt forchoice as data flowed in ever greater quantities from scanners loyaltyschemes satisfaction surveys service requests account information and soon The challenge facing organizations today is how to fuse data inmeaningful ways so that a holistic or 360-degree picture of consumers iscreated This means understanding how and in what ways an individualconsumer interacts with an organization over time It entails building acorporate memory of the consumer so that the call centre agent is awarethat the customer on the telephone wrote to the companyrsquos head office twomonths earlier and that a subsequent home visit from a member of thecustomer services team went well Achieving a corporate memory meansadopting the philosophy that every encounter with consumers is a mutuallearning experience If they do this organizations can better managerelationships and in turn customer profitability

Customer databases built up through loyalty card schemes enableorganizations to turn consumer information into knowledge and totransform that knowledge into actionable propositions that provideconsumer benefits These benefits strengthen the consumerrsquos bond with the company From the companyrsquos point of view a loyalty scheme thatsimply rewards the consumer but ignores the vital flow of informationprovided by each transaction is a sales promotion scheme however large it might be Loyalty card information when mined effectively can reveal to the company the distinct and different groups of consumers it

88 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 88

serves In Tescorsquos case loyalty card data is central to the way in which thebusiness is run

Tesco ClubcardTesco Clubcard was introduced in February 1995 and today has over 10 million active members Although its start-up costs were high (judged byanalysts to be in the region of pound10 million in addition to the 1 discount onsales estimated at pound60 million) take-up of the loyalty card was significantWithin one month of its launch over 5 million people had joined the schemeand Tesco recorded a 7 increase in like-for-like sales This propelled Tescoto overtake Sainsburyrsquos as Britainrsquos leading retailer of packaged goods

Over the years Tesco has learned how to manage Clubcard data formaximum strategic effect The company admits to having been overwhelmedinitially at the deluge of data generated by the scheme Clubcard hadeffectively opened up a dialogue with members and hundreds of letters andup to 30000 phone calls a week had to be dealt with Specialist datamanagement consultants were brought in to manage the communicationprocess until Tescorsquos own in-house team had built up the necessaryexpertise In fact data-mining skills are so strongly valued at Tesco that thedata analysis firm engaged to analyse Clubcard data is now a subsidiary ofTesco

David Reid Tescorsquos deputy chairman has claimed that lsquoItrsquos very easy tomalign loyalty cards People are always rubbishing them because of theexpense But if you took our loyalty cards away from us it would be like flyingblind They tell us how to attract customers how secondary customersbehave how specific customers react to specific promotions how you caninfluence competitorsrsquo openings how you can spot new trends how you canconvert customersrsquo (Child 2002)

Source lsquoTesco Clubcard Foreverrsquo case study H Peck Cranfield School ofManagement 2002

Using CRM Systems

The introduction of Tesco Clubcard demonstrates that effective customerrelationship management (CRM) systems are not just about automating orspeeding up operations They are also about using data and information to intelligently manage customer relationships Tesco and otherorganizations have learned how to benefit from collecting and mining dataas well as using other techniques such as analytic profiling segmentationand predictive analyses to identify individuals and uncover consumer

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 89

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 89

preferences and propensities (so that optimal profitability can be attained)However despite the extent of the analysis provided by a CRM system it isonly market research that can provide a qualitative perspective MajorCRM system vendors such as Siebel Systems Oracle SAP and Peoplesoftare working on introducing analytical tools to enable their clientcompanies to understand their customers better in this way

The problem in practice is that mechanisms for generating bothquantitative and qualitative customer understanding have not been a partof the historical development of CRM systems This is because thedevelopment of databases to hold behavioural customer data has usuallybeen managed in organizations as a parallel process to that of marketresearch This way of operating evolved during the production-driven eraIn the new marketplace of the consumption-led economy insightgeneration is looked upon as a total process one that encompasses bothtraditional and non-traditional market sensing processes What isimportant is using consumer insight to inform strategic decisions thatimpact value creation and delivery

It should also be noted that fusing data from multiple sources raisesethical as well as technological issues These issues arise because data thathas been gathered anonymously for use in attitudinal and lifestyle surveyscan now be fused together with loyalty card data that has been collectedtogether with full personal details In the process of fusion it becomespossible to identify those individuals who gave their data anonymouslyThis makes them vulnerable to marketing approaches by companies andraises an ethical dilemma for the market researcher who would have givenan assurance to an individual respondent that the data would be handledconfidentially implying any personal details would not be used by theorganization Overall the market research industry has been careful intreading on what they perceive to be a potential landmine of personalprivacy This is acting as a brake on industry efforts to leverage multipleforms of data to generate total consumer insight

To deal with ethical issues professional codes of conduct relating to thepractice of market research were first established in the early 1960s inEurope by ESOMAR (a European association of market researchprofessionals) in association with the International Chambers ofCommerce and in the UK by the Market Research Society The keyprinciple in both sets of standards and in other codes of research practice

90 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 90

worldwide is consumer confidentiality The identities of surveyparticipants are not disclosed in analysis or reporting processes Theprotection of consumer confidentiality encourages respondents to providehonest responses about their attitudes and opinions It also serves to protectthem from unsolicited marketing approaches

In Europe today the professional bodies are working together with EUlegislators to find a way of regulating data protection The US and otherkey nations however have yet to enact any laws on data privacy therebycreating a potential minefield for global players

Using Front-line Staff

Finally insight can also be generated using a combination of front-linestaff and cutting-edge information technology Zara the Spanish fashioncompany that is rapidly expanding globally provides a useful example ofthe way in which insight generated on the shop floor can be used to createand deliver value for consumers in a seamless process Zararsquos strategy isbuilt on having a value-centric orientation in the business where insightprovides a continual flow of opportunity (Zara is also referred to later inChapter 8 and the management of employees including front-line staff iscovered in Chapter 9)

ZaraIn a sector where the average high-street retailer predicts trends often a yearor more in advance Zara can turn a trend around in a matter of days This ispartly because it has its own factories and also because of the emphasis itplaces on communication between the shop floor and the factory floor AsZara UKrsquos managing director Michael Shearwood points out lsquoWe donrsquot try topersuade customers to buy something we make We sell products that thecustomer wants to buyrsquo Store managers are offered fashion collections twicea week and they can select items according to what they feel will suit theirparticular customers They can also communicate specific customer fashiondesires to Zararsquos Spanish headquarters up to four times a day using handheldkeypads A few days later the requested clothes are delivered to the storeconcerned

The deployment of IT at the front line where it can directly impact customersatisfaction was ably demonstrated in one case involving a white blouse Theshirt was delivered to UK stores bearing decorative epaulettes The shirts didnot sell Feedback from customers indicated that women preferred the shirt

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 91

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 91

plain without the epaulettes This information was passed on to the shirtfactory which promptly manufactured an amended version and sent it out tothe UK stores whereupon it became a best seller

In order to know what trends are about to emerge Zara employs a team ofabout 200 designers dubbed the lsquocreation teamrsquo They travel around theworld and their task is to gather vital fashion intelligence from clubs discosuniversity campuses and catwalks The affordable clothes sold by the Zaramanufacturing and retail chain have become popular among leading fashioneditors who revere their quality fashionability and value-for-money prices

Source Based on lsquoThe mark of Zararsquo Linda Watson Style Magazine 2001

THE ROLE OF SEGMENTATION IN VALUE DEFINITION

In best practice organizations consumer insight is turned into marketingaction through the process of consumer segmentation By segmentingconsumers into groups sharing the same or similar needs on the basis ofvalue as defined in their own terms an organization can acquire up-to-the-minute understanding of its consumer base This can then be used todevelop more cost-effective consumer strategies Because consumerperceptions of value change it is important that both value definition andconsumer segmentation are undertaken on a regular and frequent basisOrganizations that can quickly react to change and anticipate shifts in thevalue demands of consumers have a head start on their competitors Suchflexibility and focus on demand lie at the heart of New ConsumerMarketing

Much of the current discussion about segmentation is informed by themechanistic approach of the production-driven era This is characterizedby the use of scientific and rational language and focuses on the way inwhich the organization should segment its market ie lsquochop it uprsquo intomanageable chunks The reality of the consumption-led economy is thatconsumers themselves unwittingly form loose groups whose members areseeking the same or similar sets of value factors In other words consumerssegment their market and form subgroups with their own sets ofrequirements The language associated with segmentation today is more todo with creativity and insight as organizations wrestle with the challengeof finding a means of exposing these segments of consumers and definingthe value that each is seeking

92 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 92

The process of value definition enables the organization to be confidentabout the market in which it operates Segmentation provides the answerto the simple but strategic question lsquoWhat business are we inrsquo Theimportance of answering this question correctly was highlighted back in1960 by Theodore Levitt in his seminal work Marketing Myopia in whichhe draws attention to the importance of viewing a business in a way that isappropriate to the markets in which it operates His classic exampleinvolved the railroads which defined themselves as being in the railwaybusiness rather than in the transportation business lsquoThe railroads did notstop growing because the need for passenger and freight transportationdeclined That grew The railroads are in trouble today not because theneed was filled by others (cars trucks aeroplanes even telephones) butbecause it was not filled by the railroads themselvesrsquo The railroadcompanies had a product-driven view of the marketplace and failed to seethat the value their customers were looking for was more to do with thebenefits derived from transportation and communication than what therailroads simply had to offer

Today too many businesses still define and segment their markets interms of the products they sell Personal financial services companies forexample typically take this product-driven approach defining markets aslsquoendowment policiesrsquo lsquosavings bondsrsquo or lsquosavings accountsrsquo They fail tounderstand the kinds of value their customers are seeking such as thedesire to save for retirement support a child through higher education orsimply have peace of mind

Correct market definition is crucial to the development of a value-centric orientation as it links directly with the mission vision and values ofthe company It enables the organization to accurately articulate what itaims to achieve and to measure its market share and market growthagainst relevant competitors as it does so These issues are consideredfurther in Chapter 9

Creating a Segmentation Analysis

Customer databases built up through loyalty card schemes such as thoseoperated by the major supermarkets can provide a rich source ofinformation on buying behaviour However it should always beremembered that a segmentation analysis built solely on this sort of data

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 93

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 93

can only reflect the motivations of existing customers It becomes a databasesegmentation and not any form of market segmentation Meaningfulsegmentation analysis takes into consideration different types of data

In terms of the ideal number of clusters or segments to aim for in asegmentation analysis the recommendation used to be no more than half adozen but developments in data analysis and data fusion mean thatcompanies can now work with a greater number Figure 66 illustrates howthis larger number can arise

A major supermarket may start with a small number of lsquosuper segmentsrsquoand then subdivide these further until it has reached a large butmanageable number of micro-segments Developments in IT make themanagement of large numbers of segments possible For example threesuper segments may be uncovered in the segmentation analysis shopperswho are quality oriented family oriented and value oriented These supersegments could then be further subdivided into a larger number of sub-segments known as lsquocategory one segmentsrsquo The quality-orientedsegment for example might be made up of four sub-segments time-poorcash-rich shoppers health conscious shoppers shoppers with apreference for organic foods and lsquofoodiesrsquo or shoppers who favour fine

94 Value Definition

Time poorcash rich

Keen onorganics

Qualityoriented

Healthconscious Foodies

VF

Incr

easi

ng g

ranu

larit

y

Figure 66 Segmenting consumer markets a hypothetical supermarket example

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 94

foods In this way the segmentation process would be continued buildingon insight generated through both traditional and non-traditional researchapproaches until an optimum number of segments is reached Theoptimum number of segments is reached when each segment is of anadequate size to provide the company with the desired return oninvestment members of the segment share a high degree of similarity intheir requirements yet are distinct from the rest of the market thesegments are reachable and they can be serviced by the organization interms of value creation and value delivery

Today in the UK the major supermarkets would typically work at ahigh level of segment granularity with up to as many as 3000 segmentscascaded down from their overarching super segments One-to-onemarketing may be talked about as a viable aim but the commercial realityis rather different as for most organizations the costs of delivering thisoutweigh the returns The challenge is to find new analytic approaches tosubdividing the market to an acceptable level of granularity These morecontemporary approaches to segmentation keep managerial focus onunderstanding the value sought by the individual segments and do so in away that prevents consumer profiling from becoming a barrier to consumerunderstanding Where an organization talks in terms of only four or fiveconsumer profiles these can actually hinder an organizationrsquos ability to dealwith the high levels of heterogeneity characteristic of the new marketplace

Having identified its different consumer segments the organization canthen move on to evaluate which segments offer the best businessopportunities Segments may be assessed in terms of market size andmarket trends market share current and future profitability consumersatisfaction andor consumer loyalty Companies usually manage aportfolio of segments made up of high earners steady earners and futurepotential earners Any low earners need to be managed carefully ndash often asmall increase in the number of times consumers forming this segmentmake a purchase can result in large improvements to the bottom line

Finally continuing with this supermarket segmentation example theanalysis could then be used to understand the shopper profile of existingstores and to define value for example through ascertaining whatpercentage of consumers in each of the category one segments frequentsparticular store types (eg large format versus convenience) or by location(out-of-town versus high-street stores) The resultant insight could be used

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 95

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 95

to specify new store developments and hence tailor the value offering moreclosely to the wants and needs of consumers Given that CRM systems canprovide constant streams of up-to-date consumer data segmentationanalyses can become a dynamic part of a demand system A recent projectjointly undertaken by Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp Gamble demonstrates thispoint

Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp GambleIn an innovative example of collaborative effort Sainsburyrsquos and Procter ampGamble worked together to exploit the wealth of data contained withinSainsburyrsquos Reward Card database in order to deliver a holistic segmentationanalysis of the health and beauty care (HampBC) shopper Their study linkedactual purchasing behaviour to attitudinal data using a big base sample Inthe UK the HampBC market was worth almost pound11 billion in 2002 and is forecastto grow 21 to 2006 with Sainsburyrsquos occupying third place behind Bootsand Tesco for sales A major challenge facing Sainsburyrsquos is the differencebetween the HampBC shopper and the grocery shopper Shoppers atSainsburyrsquos are typically aged 45 years plus while the HampBC shopper isgenerally younger Also the overall store shopper is more upmarket than theSainsburyrsquos HampBC shopper

Using loyalty card data Sainsburyrsquos identified eight segments of shoppersbased on their purchasing affinity to different product categories within theHampBC aisle To complement this understanding two additional pieces ofresearch were jointly carried out to provide data on the wider HampBC shoppingcontext Both Sainsburyrsquos shoppers and non-shoppers of the HampBC categorywere surveyed quantitatively in order to gain insights that would enableSainsburyrsquos to build greater penetration among non-shoppers and strengthenshopper loyalty among existing shoppers

Analysis of this data produced a rich source of insight that enabled bothparties to learn what each of the segments was looking for in terms of HampBCproducts their loyalty to Sainsburyrsquos who they perceived as the competitionand the type of marketing activity they preferred The segmentation analysisresulted in actionable results for both Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp Gamblewhich were then exploited jointly and separately The HampBC strategy that wassubsequently developed encompassed both existing and new shoppersrsquoneeds and helped grow Sainsburyrsquos HampBC category ahead of the market

Source Roger Allford Natalie Evans and Caroline Ward lsquoA step forward inunderstanding shoppers using segmentation techniquesrsquo paper presented at the ESOMAR Conference lsquoConsolidation or renewalrsquo BarcelonaSeptember 2002

96 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 96

As this case example shows an organizationrsquos approach to segmentationis about more than the analytical techniques it employs It makes astatement about the organizationrsquos market orientation the way it sees themarketplace and how well it understands the consumers it chooses to serveSegmentation enables the organization to create competitive advantage foritself by defining value in a way that makes clear how it can profitablycreate greater value for consumers New Consumers raise many challengesfor organizations and as this chapter demonstrates they are impacting theway in which insight into their needs and desires is generated This inturn raises questions about the role and status of the insight generatorswithin a business

THE ROLE OF INSIGHT GENERATORS3 IN VALUEDEFINITION

An acceptance of the vital importance of insight to successful NewConsumer Marketing makes it necessary to review the role and status ofthose people within the organization who are generating the insight Theseare traditionally staff who are members of the market research teamHowever given the wider understanding of how insight can best begenerated this classification should also include those responsible for theanalysis of CRM data All too often market research is perceived to be alow-grade commodity business with an output that does not go beyondcompleting surveys As commentators said over ten years ago there is aneed to prove that market research is about more than clipboards andopinion polls

If insight generators are to assume a real decision-making role then theyneed to be equipped with a skill set that enables them to draw on the mosteffective combination of data generation services externally as well as anability to communicate the learning internally These insight managersmust become proactive consultants within their organizations rather thanacting as simple reactive service providers They need to ensure that theinsight generated becomes the dynamic cornerstone of all marketingactivities In best-practice organizations this appears to be happeningHowever there are perhaps too many junior managers joining the marketresearch profession who are not being trained to take on this enhanced roleThis can only lead to the marginalization of the profession over time

The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition 97

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 97

Insight generators therefore occupy what is known as a lsquoboundary-spanningrsquo role in the New Consumer Marketing model These are staff wholsquoconnect an informal network with other parts of the company or withsimilar networks in other organizationsrsquo (Cross and Prusak 2002) Theyoperate at the periphery of the organization and their roles are strategicallyimportant as facilitators of linkage between the cells of a demand system Itis through their behaviour that the organization adapts (or fails to adapt) tochanges in the marketplace In short they function as lsquosensory organsrsquo Asthis role is seldom recognized within organizations there is no one titlethat identifies these influential staff

These boundary-spanning managers are charged with generating adynamic flow of insight so that insight generation becomes an ongoingprocess and is not simply seen as an annual or six monthly exercise Theyare responsible for ensuring that this insight informs the other two cells ofthe New Consumer Marketing model through the organizationrsquos approachto knowledge management (as explored in Chapter 9) Gaining amomentum in insight generation enables the organization to create aliving demand system as it gains a continuous source of insight on which tofocus its value creation and delivery processes The benefits of this processapproach to insight generation are that brands can retain their currencywith consumers as the organization adapts to shifts in consumerperceptions of value This ability of an organization to shift in line withchanging consumer perceptions of value is well demonstrated in the casesof Lucozade and Skoda

Lucozade and SkodaLucozadersquos success in the drinks industry is underpinned by its expertise inreading value trends and responding to them appropriately The Lucozadebrand has shifted from being a soft drink aimed at people who are unwellsummed up in the strapline lsquoLucozade aids recoveryrsquo to a sports drink thatlsquoreplaces lost energyrsquo to todayrsquos competition-conscious brand that serves asan lsquoenergy boostrsquo

Car manufacturer Skoda has worked in a similar fashion to remain relevantto consumers VW its parent company acquired the brand in 1991 and hasinvested in it alongside its other marques Volkswagen Audi and Seat Thevalue associated with Skoda vehicles has changed dramatically from onethat was the butt of jokes to one that gains consumer trust Skodarsquos popularitytoday builds on a simple but clever message lsquoWersquove changed can yoursquo

98 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 98

This first cell of the New Consumer Marketing model is concerned withthe process of defining the value consumers are seeking Value definitiondrives the demand system by generating relevant insight that provides afocus for the processes of value creation and value delivery To achieve valuedefinition organizations are increasingly adopting a bricolage approachthat pieces together investigative and interpretative methods drawn fromdifferent disciplines

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Insight provides the means of defining value from the consumerrsquosperspective

bull Consumer perceptions of value shift over time Adopting an ongoingdynamic approach to insight generation ensures that the organizationrsquosperspective of the marketplace does not remain fixed in time

bull Value is made up of component factors that work to enhance maintainand destroy value Certain value-enhancers may be adopted byconsumers as talking points delivering valuable word-of-mouthmarketing

bull Insight generation is a total process encompassing traditional marketresearch and non-traditional market sensing

bull Insight is made actionable through the process of segmentation whichhelps the organization answer the question lsquowhat business are we inrsquo

bull Segmentation enables an organization to achieve competitiveadvantage by clarifying how it can create greater value for consumers

bull Insight generators have an influential boundary-spanning role withinthe organization and should be valued as lsquosensory organsrsquo

Summary Points 99

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 99

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 100

The process of creating value resulting in a value proposition for a specificaudience

Creating value = bringing into being or form or investing with new form

Watchword = innovation

Value creation in the consumption-led economy must be informed by anunderstanding of the value that consumers are looking for and assessed interms of consumersrsquo value criteria Satisfying consumer demand today isabout winning the custom of discerning consumers and not simplyproducing good products This second cell of the New ConsumerMarketing model is a fundamental component of a demand system as itmoves the organization from defining value to actually creating andcommunicating that value effectively

Key to the process of creating value in the marketplace is identifying andutilizing the organizationrsquos value-producing resources (eg employeestechnological know-how and capital) to meet consumer needs andexpectations profitably At the heart of this process is the concept ofinnovation Derived from the Latin word innovare meaning to renew oralter innovation in consumer marketing is about creating new solutionsthat offer real value to consumers In many organizations innovation hasbecome separated from marketing giving rise in part to the crisis inmarketing New Consumer Marketing with its emphasis on market-ledinnovation recombines the two and provides a means of addressing both thedemands of New Consumers and the concerns of brand owners and retailers

The desired output of the value creation process is a value propositionthat consumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver The

Value Creation 7

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 101

value proposition sets out the value exchange between buyer and supplierand reinforces the mutuality of the relationship As stated in Chapter 6 theconstruction of a successful value proposition depends on first being able todefine value by generating relevant insight into consumer demand and therelative attractiveness of different consumer segments The organizationcan then work to create this value and ultimately to deliver it

In building a value proposition out of the value-producing resources ofthe organization there are a number of elements to consider These includenew product development branding positioning and price Each plays animportant role in the value creation process Of paramount importancehowever is the role of innovation for innovation is what underpins thesuccess of all the elements of value creation

THE ROLE OF INNOVATION IN VALUE CREATION

The business has two and only these two basic functions marketing andinnovation Marketing and innovation produce results all the rest are costs

(Peter Drucker 1985)

In the opening chapter of this book marketing was presented as adiscipline in crisis whose contribution to business is in question Thisstems from the fact that many managers see marketing as a cost rather thanan investment and this itself is driven by the lack of a common approach tomeasuring marketing effectiveness (a subject considered further in Chapter9) The issue for many managers today is that marketing no longer appearsto be delivering innovation somehow the two have become separatedNew Consumer Marketing which places innovation at the core of valuecreation offers a way of putting strategic intent back into marketing andso providing a means of lifting marketing out of its crisis

The value-centric organization is marked by a corporate environmentthat seeks performance improvement through superior value definitioncreation and delivery Innovation in business provides a way of creatingnew value-producing resources or endowing existing ones with anenhanced potential for yielding profit It is the result of a complex set ofprocesses involving organizational learning culture leadership andmanagement style Innovation is important on a macro-economic levelbecause it is associated with high rates of economic growth and high levels

102 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 102

of employment Within individual firms innovation enhancesorganizational performance The commercial significance of innovation issupported by the findings of PricewaterhouseCoopers (1999) whichsurveyed 80 companies in seven countries in 1999 It found that newproducts and services introduced in the preceding five years accounted for a10 increase in turnover and generated a 25 increase in the annual rateof revenue growth It also found that new products and services wereassociated with a 9 increase in annual total shareholder returns

While the firm that innovates first in a market obtains the early moveradvantage this is only sustainable while competitors cannot imitate orneutralize its lead To stay ahead the firm must ensure that innovation is adynamic capability fully embedded within the culture of the organizationThe roots of culture lie hidden in the deep-seated collection of beliefs andassumptions that are commonly held in an organization They are reflectedin everyday life as lsquothe way things get done around herersquo Innovation shouldnot be treated simply as a series of individual projects but as a continuoussearch for opportunities to improve the value proposition to such an extentthat new market space is opened up A value-centric orientation providesthe foundation for achieving this

Because of the clear business benefits of having an innovative approachto value creation innovation is something of a holy grail for businessesThis is especially true for brand owners and retailers who find themselveshaving to rethink their strategies in line with the macro-market shift froma production-driven to a consumption-led economy As discussed inChapter 3 brand owners are looking for improvements in brandperformance that will give them an opportunity to assert their positionwith retailers and to move away from a position where they can do littleother than ruthlessly attack their cost base in order to meet retailersrsquo pricedemands Brand owners want to outperform their rivals in terms ofcapturing market share developing consumer and brand loyalty andearning a rate of profit higher than the industry norm Retailers for theirpart are seeking step changes that will reverse current trends which haveseen retail decline as a percentage of GDP over recent years They need tofind new and innovative ways to manage retail offerings in highlyfragmented markets

For both brand owners and retailers a focus on innovation in valuecreation offers the most promising source of organic growth This means

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 103

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 103

working to create the next wave of brand and retail experiences based onhaving a consumer-relevant value-centric orientation in the business and amanagement culture that makes innovation possible

Consumers as Innovators

In the production-driven economy the role of the consumer in theinnovation process was highly limited ndash so much so in fact that in somecases of marketing consumers appeared to be forgotten altogether In theconsumption-led economy the active knowledgeable and demandingNew Consumer is the focal point of product and service innovationOrganizations that embrace New Consumer Marketing acknowledge thisand believe that the consumer can be a source of insight and innovationleading to greater business competence Such firms are characterized byhigh levels of consumer involvement they recognize consumers asinnovators

The concept of using consumers in direct interface with businessmanagers was termed lsquoTapping the creativity of consumersrsquoTM by theSynectics Corporation (wwwsynecticsworldcom) an internationalconsultancy specializing in innovation and change Synectics consultantsengage consumers in the problem-solving process in the search forbreakthrough initiatives For example one client the National FarmersrsquoUnion (NFU) was brought together with consumers at the point ofpurchase where it was observed that there was no easy way for consumersto identify the source of the food they were buying This was an issue ofserious concern in the UK following a number of high-profile food scaresThe insight generated from speaking to grocery shoppers directly was thatthey wanted a convenient way to ensure food safety This may seem anobvious requirement but it led to the idea of a new farm-assurancebranding scheme The Farm Assured brand authenticating how the foodhas been produced hit the shelves within a record nine months due to theinvolvement of all stakeholders (farmers consumers NFU staffwholesalers and retailers)

By eliciting consumersrsquo hidden desires and enabling them to participatefully in product development organizations can use consumers as agents ofchange in the same way that a grit of sand can develop into a pearl withinan oysterrsquos shell Cadbury Schweppes and Johnson Controls companies

104 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 104

working in diverse sectors have both made maximum use of consumers toshape and sell products successfully

Cadbury SchweppesCadbury Schweppes confectionery uses a five-stage process known aslsquoALICErsquo to drive innovation in its Consumer Planning and ResearchDepartment The acronym stands for alignment (A) of the objectives of theresearch with the consumer problem leverage (L) of existing knowledgewithin the business immersion (I) in the world of the potential consumerconnection (C) through insight and execution (E) to drive growth The launchof the Boost Guarana chocolate bar in September 2002 followed this strategicdevelopment pathway Its genesis was based on the insight that the highlydemanding lifestyle of todayrsquos consumers takes a heavy toll on their mentalenergy This learning was generated by a cross-functional team andsupported by desk research and consumer surveys that used a raft ofethnographic and direct questioning techniques The stimulant properties ofBoost Guarana match those of energy drinks that claim to deliver improvedattention alertness and concentration

Source Patsy Richardson Head of Consumer Planning and ResearchCadbury Schweppes lsquoHow to maximise the benefits of using consumerinsight to drive innovationrsquo paper presented at the lsquoUsing Consumer Insightfor Profitable Innovationrsquo Conference IQPC London October 2002

Johnson ControlsJohnson Controls is part of an automotive systems group that makes seatsand car interiors It operates in the business-to-business (B2B) sector as asupplier to well-known car manufacturers such as BMW and Nissan Thecompany believes that lsquoconsumer focused innovation and productdevelopment will become an increasingly important competitive differentiatorrsquoRecognizing that cars need to deliver more than lsquojust transportationrsquo and thatcar interiors need to surprise and delight end users Johnson Controls drawson the views of both automotive experts and car drivers to understand themotivating values of car drivers (eg family safety pragmatism harmony)Consumers are consulted on product design and associated issues such aswhat luxury means for car drivers and how drivers actually use the technologyavailable in cars This insight-turned-innovation is then used as a corecompetence by Johnson Controls in its relationships with its immediatecustomers the car manufacturers

Source Jemina Martinez Head of Advanced Consumer Research JohnsonControls lsquoGetting out of the car and into peoplersquos livesrsquo paper presented atthe lsquoUsing Consumer Insight for Profitable Innovationrsquo Conference IQPCLondon October 2002

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 105

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 105

Innovation through Process or People

Many companies take an overtly process-oriented approach to managinginnovation while others regard innovation as a capability vested in peopleManagerial thinking is currently caught between these two contrastingapproaches How should an organization seeking to improve itsperformance by becoming more innovative achieve this New ConsumerMarketing offers a way of seeing these two approaches as part of the samesolution to meeting the needs of New Consumers and providingbreakthrough opportunities in business development for brand owners andretailers

On the one hand there is a clearly identified and well-used process thatwas formalized by Robert Cooper an academic researcher known as thestagendashgate process (Cooper 1993) This is shown in Figure 71 Thestagendashgate process provides a way of screening and monitoring theprogression of projects to ensure that progress is linked to the successfulachievement of business goals It subdivides new product developmentactivities into a series of stages so that managers can lsquoownrsquo specific groups ofactivities and be responsible for achieving the objectives within thoseactivities In order to proceed from one stage to the next the project mustsatisfy the objectives that were set for that stage Failure at any stage in the process will result in the abandonment of the project The definition ofthe developmental stages and the evaluation criteria will be specific to theorganization concerned The stagendashgate process aims to reduce risk and isusually associated with an incremental approach to innovation

Figure 71 The stagendashgate process Adapted from Cooper (1993)

106 Value Creation

Initial Second Decision on Post- Precommercialization Post-screen screen business case development business implementation

review analysis review

Ideation Preliminary Detailed Development Testing and Full production andinvestigation investigation validation market launch

(build businesscase)

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 106

On the other hand there are many examples of organizations whereinnovation is directly attributable to the leadership and management styleof an individual (usually the CEO) whose commitment to innovation isreflected in the culture of the organization A common feature of theseorganizations is a focus on seeing things from the consumerrsquos perspectiveAs a result they tend to be more effective in the marketplace For exampleStelios Haji-Ioannou founder of the low-cost carrier easyJet used to takeup to four flights a week on easyJet to experience what it was like as apassenger using his airline The feedback and insight he gained from thisunusual routine was used to improve consumer value

Michael Dell1 founder and namesake of the worldrsquos leading computerservices provider says lsquoOne of the challenges of a company that issucceeding is that you run the risk of complacencyrsquo He encourages histeam to explore incremental improvements and to experiment with ideasthat add value primarily in terms of efficiency EasyJet and Delldemonstrate that fostering an innovative culture starts from the top it isdriven by the way that senior managers manage and relish risk setchallenging but measurable goals support employees who take a risk intrying something different champion new ideas and encourage diversityof thought and approach

Innovation as a Dynamic Capability

In order to synthesize this binary behaviour (seeking efficiency throughprocess or effectiveness through people) New Consumer Marketingencourages a systemic approach Drawing on learning from the livingsciences it helps in identifying the key underlying processes andrelationships within the organization that enable it to become as adaptiveand creative as possible in a changing market environment This approachis exemplified by 3M(UK)2 a company that continuously and consistentlydemonstrates success in innovation

3M(UK)The story of the 3M Post-itTM probably 3Mrsquos most well-known product hasbecome a classic example of innovation 3M manager Art Fry sought a way ofkeeping the bookmark in his hymn book from slipping out onto the floor Heconnected this desire to his knowledge of an adhesive that had beendiscovered by the company a number of years before but discarded as it was

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 107

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 107

considered to be ineffective at sticking With the support of the company Fryredeveloped the adhesive successfully and this led to the Post-itTM a hugelysuccessful stationery innovation

3M(UK) employees are given the freedom to take risks and try out newideas and this has led to a steady stream of new products John Muellerformer Chairman and CEO of 3M(UK) is quoted as saying lsquoWe want toinstitutionalize a bit of rebellion in our labs It has been said that thecompetition never knows what we are going to come up with next The factis neither do wersquo This is indicative of a mindset that actively encouragesradical innovation The difference between this mindset and one that leadsto incremental innovation is so current research suggests (Dyck 2002) todo with the way in which the organization experiences the complexity ofthe problem it is facing Where an organization perceives the problem tobe lsquouncertainrsquo it is essentially saying that it knows the variables at play butdoes not know how to configure them to find the solution Theorganization that perceives the problem to be one of lsquoambiguityrsquo is goingfarther and saying that it does not know what variables are at play and doesnot know the formula for solving the problem

This latter attitude is reflected in Muellerrsquos words and is associated withcompanies that seek to absorb complexity rather than simply to reduce itOrganizations that work to reduce complexity are constrained to anincremental approach Those whose starting point is that they do not knowhow to solve the problem can work to create options to develop potentialsolutions and in doing so learn as an organization Taking a broader viewof the complexity of the marketplace and the issues facing consumers is lesscomfortable for organizations as it throws up more challenges and greaterrisk but it can lead to more radical innovation where the rewards arepotentially superior

Therefore managers seeking to improve organizational performance bybecoming more innovative need to start by deciding whether they areuncertain or ambiguous about the complexity of the problem they arefacing Their answers will be based on their understanding of themarketplace and will determine whether they then work to reduce orabsorb the complexity This more reflective approach is not a capabilitythat was called for in the production-driven era where a command-and-control attitude dominated Then organizations produced goods andservices and persuaded consumers to buy them In todayrsquos consumption-

108 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 108

led economy where consumer markets are highly fragmented andchanging fast the successful players are those who are able to produce valuein a consistent and cost-effective way The market leaders however go onestep further ndash they constantly seek to differentiate themselves fromcompetitors by offering superior value in the form of new products andservices They are capable of absorbing complexity and mastering theorganizational response to market change

A Radical Approach to Innovation

Organizations can best distance themselves from the competition bychanging the rules of the marketplace This starts with generating insightinto consumersrsquo problems and expectations and then defining them in sucha way that creating the value consumers seek becomes obvious As discussedin the previous chapter this is the desired output of an effectively operatingfirst cell in a demand system To achieve value definition the organizationmay well find itself redefining the consumer needs the industry is focusingon and thus contributing to industry understanding of the value-addingfactors that matter to consumers These might then form the basis of newperformance criteria for companies in that sector Those companies that failto embrace the new criteria may risk losing out

Virgin GroupVirgin Group is an organization that has demonstrated time and again how tobring radically new products and services into the marketplace without beingthe first to market in a particular sector The companyrsquos understanding of thevalue-adding factors that matter to consumers has enabled it to successfullyoperate in markets where it has taken on established giants in a lsquoDavid versusGoliathrsquo battle for consumer loyalty For this reason Virgin has gained areputation as a challenger brand For example Virgin Mobile offeredconsumers a single simple tariff when other operators were confrontingconsumers with an array of complicated tariffs Virginrsquos uncomplicatedapproach won it 17 million customers by mid-2002 and catapulted thecompany into the position of the fifth largest mobile operator in the UK withinthree years of entering the market Virgin Mobilersquos competitors have sincecopied the simple tariff system effectively raising the key performancecriteria for the industry

Other Virgin businesses such as Virgin Atlantic and Virgin One haveimpacted their markets in a similar way When Virgin Atlantic launched its

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 109

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 109

lsquoUpper Classrsquo seating the idea of offering the large seats and legroom oftraditional First Class for the price of a business class ticket was new andwon Virgin Atlantic a lucrative market share of key international routes VirginOne again demonstrated the benefits of keeping it simple when it introducedthe Virgin One bank account (now known as One) which enabled consumersto manage all their finances including mortgages savings and income froma single account The new type of bank account made its mark in an industrythat had formerly offered consumers a range of banking products and wherecorporate emphasis was on persuading consumers to buy these productsrather than developing products to suit consumer needs Virginrsquos consistentlysimple and consumer-focused approach to innovation in value creation isindicative of a true value-orientation within the organization and also of amanagement culture that makes innovation possible

Organizations such as Virgin Group take the consumer as their startingpoint and not the final destination for their products and services They areless interested in simply building advantage over their competitors andrather keener on providing consumers with a step change in value thateffectively creates a new market The competition is left standing as oldsources of advantage are destroyed and new ones are created

W Chan Kim and Renee Mauborgne two professors from the Frenchbusiness school INSEAD have published extensively in this area and theyuse the term lsquovalue pioneersrsquo to describe the Virgin Group and similartypes of organization (1997 1999ab 2000) These are businesses engagedin what Kim and Mauborgne define as lsquovalue innovationrsquo a process thatmakes the competition irrelevant and creates new markets by focusing onwhat value needs to be produced They cite examples such as CallawayGolf the US golf club manufacturer which in 1991 launched its lsquoBigBertharsquo golf club The product rapidly rose to dominance taking marketshare from rivals and expanding the total golf club market because itsradically new design (the club has an unusually large head) offered playersa way of overcoming the difficulties associated with hitting a small golf ballwith a little golf club head For Kim and Mauborgne Callaway likeCharles Schwab amp Co in investment brokerage IKEA in home productsretail and Wal-Mart in discount retailing illustrates their thesis that thereis a clear link between high rates of business growth and a radical approachto innovation

This stance contrasts with the traditional view that consumers canprovide only limited help in innovative product and service development

110 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 110

as they are constrained by their experience and unable to articulateanything other than incremental ideas

THE ROLE OF NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT IN VALUECREATION

There is a lot of debate around the question how new does innovationreally have to be lsquoNewnessrsquo can be understood in a number of differentways The word lsquonewrsquo is often used in marketing communications forexample in advertisements and mailings or on product packagingHowever in many instances consumers could be forgiven for asking whatmight actually be new about certain products or services Newness is oftendefined by an incremental change to an existing product or service It maybe a barely discernible alteration to the pack size or ingredients base Sucha slight improvement in the value offering might make it lsquonew to thecompany but not new to the marketrsquo

Alternatively the newness element might be more extensive to thepoint where consumers change their purchase behaviour For examplewhen Mars launched its new Celebrations brand the Roses and QualityStreet brands already dominated the marketplace for boxed wrappedchocolates for everyday occasions But Mars had undertaken in-depthresearch into potential consumers and used the resulting insight toposition the new brand as lsquoall your favourite countline products inminiaturersquo The launch of Celebrations succeeded in attracting a youngerconsumer compared to rival brands and Mars captured a significant shareof the UKrsquos pound600 million boxed chocolate market within a short period oftime

In essence product newness is a spectrum carrying increasing amountsof business risk for the organization In their report New Product Managementfor the 1980s Booz Allen amp Hamilton (1982) provide a way of looking atinnovation in terms of product newness They identify six categories of newproduct development as defined by the productrsquos level of newness to thefirm and its perceived level of newness to consumers Their grid displayingthe various categories is shown in Figure 72

It is evident from Figure 72 that the new product developments withlowest risk are those created through cost reduction and brandrepositioning Cost reduction involves the organization in paring down the

The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation 111

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 111

content of the value proposition by a specific amount to save on costWhere the reduction is minimal it may not affect consumer perceptions ofvalue However excessive cost reduction or too many small reductions overtime does become noticeable Brand repositioning represents relativelyhigher risk as it usually involves presenting brand revisions of some form tothe consumer The organization may or may not succeed at realigning thebrand with consumer expectations but it is already familiar withmanaging the brand

New product developments that carry intermediate risk include lineextensions and product improvements The usual strategy here is toenhance consumer value by increasing product choice and productperformance respectively For example Muumlller the fourth largest grocerybrand in the UK has consistently increased the range of yoghurt varietiesto more than 20 in order to drive sales volume and market share A numberof other food brands have chosen to focus instead on product performanceand have altered their recipes to include added vitamins and fibre thusmoving their brands into the functional foods or lsquonutraceuticalsrsquo sector ofthe market

The highest risk new product developments are ones that are both newto the company and new to consumers These are known as lsquonew-to-the-

112 Value Creation

Figure 72 Categories of new product development Adapted from Booz Allen ampHamilton (1982)

P

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 112

worldrsquo introductions The annals of marketing are littered with examplesof unsuccessful new-to-the-world products such as Betamax videotape andClive Sinclairrsquos C5 electric car These new products failed to deliver anysubstantial consumer benefit and were therefore not adopted by consumersThese attempts at innovation were not anchored in any form of meaningfulconsumer insight

Many organizations mistakenly believe that adding more technology toa product or service will result in value-adding innovation However whatconsumers want from technology is new or enhanced value that will extendtheir abilities and provide them with greater ease of use and convenienceSuccessful new-to-the-world innovation succeeds because it represents agenuine breakthrough in delivering a value proposition based on a deepunderstanding of the nature of the value consumers seek This new-to-the-world form of innovation is also known as radical or discontinuousinnovation as referred to earlier The introduction of Mars Ice Cream is anexample of this type of approach

Mars Ice CreamIn the late 1980s ice cream was a price-sensitive seasonal commodity Themarket was large (pound587 million) but stagnant and dominated by Walls andLyons Maid which held 45 and 14 market share respectively Most icecream was vegetable-fat based and generally came in the form of ice-lolliescones and family brick packs Until Mars entered the market in 1988 icecream was viewed largely as a childrenrsquos snack and demographics showed itcould be a shrinking market However Mars identified a gap in the existingmarket for a premium-price branded ice cream It was the first to launch sucha product and gained a lead over other ice cream manufacturers The newproduct was sold in the same outlets that stocked the existing range of Marsconfectionery enabling the company to use the same sales force and existingresources This allowed significant economies and lessened the financialburden of entering a new market

THE ROLE OF BRANDING IN VALUE CREATION

Brands play an important role in the value-creation process and thechanging marketing landscape created by the shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy has already brought forth newthinking about them and their meaning for consumers Initially brandsemerged as a simple means of identifying the manufacturer of a product

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 113

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 113

For example in 1266 in medieval England bakers were required by law toput their mark on every loaf of bread sold so that if there were anydiscrepancies in weight the baker at fault could be traced The practice ofbranding a product with an lsquoidentityrsquo has continued and developed Todaythe brand concept is highly complex having evolved beyond the coreproduct to include various kinds of added value Brands are often depictedas a lsquofried eggrsquo with a functional centre surrounded by layers of lesstangible elements such as reputation pack design advertising guaranteesand so on This view of brands typified the approach of marketers in the1950s and 1960s when brands were seen as lsquolifeless manipulable artefactsrsquo(Hanby 1999) and consumers were seen as passive purchasers

Brand thinking moved ahead slowly until the early 1980s whenresearcher Judie Lannon and psychologist Peter Cooper (1983) expressedthe idea that lsquowhat turns a product into a brand is that the physical productis combined with something else ndash symbols images feelings ndash to producean idea which is more than the sum of the parts The two ndash product andsymbolism ndash live and grow with and on one another in a partnership ofmutual exchangersquo This concept began a process of seeing the brand notjust as the producerrsquos idea of the product but also as the consumerrsquos idea ofthe product giving rise to the notion of brands being co-created byproducers together with consumers

By the mid-1990s the nature of the intangible value inherent in thebrand had evolved to the extent that Harvard professor Susan Fournier(1996) described consumersrsquo relationships with mass brands as able tolsquosoothe the ldquoempty selvesrdquo left behind by societyrsquos abandonment of traditionand community and provide stable anchors in an otherwise changingworldrsquo At the close of the twentieth century John Grant author of theinfluential New Marketing Manifesto (1999) observed that lsquoBrands seem tohave taken on a life of their own They have become quite freestandingideas that take hold and spread So that Virgin can span many markets andViagra can become a potent icon even in markets where it is not yetavailable hellip A brand is a popular idea or set of ideas that people live byrsquo

These quotations by leading marketing commentators demonstrate thechanging way in which brands are believed to operate Today themetaphors used to describe the brand-building process are no longermechanistic but organic in nature in keeping with the discipline of NewConsumer Marketing Brands are now thought of as living entities that

114 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 114

take on a life of their own inside consumersrsquo minds creating somethingknown as a lsquomental modelrsquo Mental models as described in the previouschapter provide insight into how consumers create store recall and relateto brands in everyday life In effect a brand becomes a representation of anindividualrsquos collection of experiences at each of the lsquotouchpointsrsquo at whichthe brand wittingly or unwittingly engages the consumer Theseexperiences provide a mix of rational emotional social and culturalbenefits to the individual consumer If the supplying organization isdefining and creating value effectively then this bundle of complementarybenefits will be delivered through the value-adding factors associated withthe brand A brand is therefore the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition

Brands exist because people want them to exist As Niall FitzgeraldChairman of Unilever commented lsquoEven if the word ldquomarketingrdquo hadnever been invented and advertising was banned across the globe therewould still be brands because it is people who need themrsquo3 For consumersbrands provide a way of making a complicated world simpler Consumersbecome so familiar with them that brands provide a shorthand approach todecision making The dependable predisposition of consumers to purchasespecific brands provides brand owners with assets that offer the promise offuture cash flow It is consumers then and not companies who invest abrand with its value

If this is the case how is it that brands go into decline and die Theanswer is that companies kill them though not always deliberately orknowingly The decline and death of a brand can occur in a number ofdifferent ways for example through organizational arrogance greed orcomplacency Underlying this ebbing away of brand value is the absence ofa value-centric orientation in the organization A value-centric orientationenables the company to know understand and anticipate the valueconsumers are seeking so that it can then focus its value-producingresources on satisfying those needs thereby ensuring that brands surviveThe Barbie doll is one such example

BarbieBarbie began as an innovation and has remained relevant to young girlsthroughout the dollrsquos 40-year history The Barbie doll was created in 1959 andover 1 billion Barbies have been sold to date The brand is worth some $2 billion making it the most valuable toy brand in the world Mattel the

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 115

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 115

American toy giant that manufactures the doll claims the average Americangirl aged between 3 and 11 owns ten Barbies

When Barbie burst onto the scene in the 1960s the doll market consistedmainly of baby dolls designed for girls to cradle rock and feed In contrastBarbie had adult features and represented an independent young womanSince Barbiersquos launch as a teenage fashion model Mattel has worked to keepthe dollrsquos image fresh and to deliver the play value its ever-youngerconsumers demand Every year the company devises about 150 differentBarbie dolls and designs some 120 new doll outfits Barbiersquos image isconstantly updated mirroring the changing role of women in society She nowcomes in a multiplicity of guises from astronaut to army officer to dentist andmany more To reflect the growing diversity of populations African AmericanHispanic and Asian variations were introduced as early as the 1960s

Barbie has survived the challenges of lsquoage compressionrsquo or kids gettinglsquoolderrsquo at a younger age Girls now grow out of traditional play patternsincluding playing with dolls earlier than they did in the past Whereas ageneration ago 12-year-olds might have played with Barbie todayrsquos primeaudience is aged three to five Mattel is meeting this challenge head on byintroducing extensions to the Barbie brand For example Barbie in theNutcracker is a computer-animated video that has generated $150 millionfrom sales The company is dedicated to promoting Barbie as a lifestyle notjust a toy In addition to selling the dolls Mattel licenses Barbie in 30 differentproduct categories from furniture to make-up A girl can sleep in Barbiepyjamas under a Barbie duvet-cover in a bedroom covered in Barbiewallpaper There are even Barbie conventions fan clubs websitesmagazines and collectorsrsquo events To many commentators Barbietranscends the product category and is an icon representing lsquothe face of theAmerican dreamrsquo

Source lsquoLife in Plasticrsquo The Economist 21 December 2002

Building Successful Brands

As the meaning of brands has shifted over time so too has organizationalunderstanding of how to build brands In the production-driven era it wasbelieved that brand building was best achieved solely through marketingcommunications activities (namely advertising) Brand development wasseen as the transmission of messages to consumers the aim being to controltheir purchase behaviour Today brands are built on a much widerplatform that may for example involve alliance partners or staff

116 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 116

hellip through alliances ndash i-mode

i-mode is the most successful mobile data service in the world to date Sinceits launch in Japan in February 1999 i-mode has attracted 353 millionsubscribers (58 of market share) who each pay on average yen1540 permonth for services encompassing 3290 official and 59869 unofficial contentsites This success has been achieved through a value-centric approach to thedevelopment implementation and operation of i-mode services By keepingits offer simple maintaining effective content development and being first tomarket i-mode has gained significant competitive advantage and becomethe object of envy among mobile operators worldwide

Domoco the company behind the i-mode brand whose name is derivedfrom lsquodo communications over the mobilersquo has worked to define and satisfyconsumersrsquo needs through a relevant and appealing brand by forgingalliances with leading content providers The brand is based on theunderstanding that compelling entertainment content drives demand andthe technological aspects consequently take a back seat As TakeshiNatsuno director of i-modersquos strategy department explains lsquoWe neveremphasize words such as internet web browsing and mobile computing toconsumers i-mode users can get various information only with simpleoperations without recognizing they are using the internetrsquo

Putting this philosophy into practice Domoco carefully selects andcontrols lsquoofficialrsquo partner sites on the basis of freshness reliability depth ofcontent and clear user benefit and provides them with key services such as user verification joint marketing and technical assistance Thetechnological capabilities of i-mode allow content providers to chargeusers small incremental fees for the services provided These fees are billedby Domoco and then passed on to the content provider but Domocoretains a 9 commission This business model creates a positive feedbackloop whereby good content and compelling services attract fee-payingusers who in turn attract more content providers For example gamesmanufacturer Badai provides a new animated character every day as i-modescreen wallpaper (the background screen image for i-mode) With over 2 million i-mode users signing up for the service at yen100 per month this strategic alliance nets the company more than pound13 million per annum proving the strength of a partnership approach Similar agree-ments have been made with Sony allowing it to provide Playstation style

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 117

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 117

games over i-mode and Coca-Cola whereby i-mode users can use theirhandsets to pay for and acquire items from individual Coca-Cola vendingmachines

through staff ndash Singapore Airlines

Some companies are distinguished in their marketplace by the level of servicethey offer The way in which their employees deal with consumers becomesthe defining characteristic of the brand In essence the staff are the brandWith a proven profitability record over 30 years Singapore Airlines is one ofthe most successful airlines in the world and is consistently used by travellersand competitors as a benchmark for outstanding performance Key to thissuccess has been the delivery of the brand through the airlinersquos staff

The Singapore Airlines brand is intrinsically linked with the SingaporeGirl launched in 1972 whose serene face has become the heart of thecarrierrsquos advertising campaign No other airline has such a strong brandimage one that has even been immortalized in wax at Madame TussaudrsquosMuseum in London Ian Batey the creator of the Singapore Girl took a riskwhen he proposed that adverts should focus on service at a time when otherairlines were selling their tickets on the theme of safety Batey attributesthe success of the brand to its lsquocombination of silk and steel hellip the ever-changing cutting-edge body side of the brand hellip and the softer soul sideTogether you have a certain Asian humility graciousness and warmth aswell as being extremely fit fast modern and contemporaryrsquo The airlineoperates with a ratio of one flight attendant for every 22 passengers thehighest in the world and well above the industry average

Singapore Airlines has more than 14000 staff located in citiesthroughout the world People from different cultures must work togetherto produce a seamless and positive customer experience To unite thediverse and geographically separated workforce the airline has developed anumber of activities to encourage inter-office communication including avariety of department newsletters and a monthly company-wide internalmagazine A lsquoStaff Ideas in Actionrsquo scheme ensures that new suggestionsare constantly put forward The results of these and many other efforts addup to a staff culture that is vigorously committed to the airline toconsumers and to continuous improvement Staff pride and sense ofownership are evident in the way employees work to uphold the airlinersquosreputation which is built on a well-defined set of corporate values

118 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 118

Emerging Brand Issues

An emerging issue for brand owners and retailers in todayrsquos consumption-led economy is the growing debate about the impact of globalization andthe role of business versus government While this may not appear to belinked to the value-creation process in any obvious way it represents abreaking trend that needs to be monitored for its impact on the kind ofvalue that consumers seek and may be seeking in future Brands areincreasingly the targets of anti-corporation campaigns as is evidenced inthe protests against the World Trade Organization (WTO) in Seattle andGenoa and the boycotting of genetically modified (GM) foods In somecases consumer behaviour towards certain brands has been shown to be amore effective political weapon than the ballot box Shell for examplefound itself at the centre of controversy in 1995 when it sought to disposeof the Brent Spar oil platform at sea Consumers expressed their concern forthe environment by not buying Shell petrol especially in Germany whereShell sales declined by 50 on one day

Although these brand issues may seem far removed from their day-to-day remit marketers need to develop some sort of perspective on them Inseveral cases the monetary value of the value-creation activities of somecorporations exceeds that of a number of nation states An acknowledgedauthority in this area is socio-economist Dr Noreena Hertz She explains inher book The Silent Takeover (2001) how corporations are changing peoplersquoslives society and the democratic process She points out that of the worldrsquos100 largest economies 51 are now corporations and only 49 are nationstates Combined sales at General Motors and Ford are greater than theGDP of the whole of sub-Saharan Africa and Wal-Mart now has a turnoverhigher than the revenues of most states of Eastern Europe

At the heart of the debate about growing globalization and the role ofbusiness versus government lies the issue of trust is consumer marketingacting as a trustworthy agent in the economic system Brands are involvedin the economy and the production of national wealth because as discussedearlier they act as a label of guarantee and trust for consumers and thisvalue-enhancing aspect still plays a major role in motivating purchasestoday A small but demanding minority of New Consumers wants to makeinformed purchasing decisions and they have a growing interest in thecompany behind the brand Their concerns focus on wider societal issues

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 119

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 119

such as environmental vulnerability poverty and economic and politicalinstability and they have a desire to link their purchasing habits with thefuture of sustainable development This represents a significant change inthe kind of value that consumers want and challenges traditional value-creation activities

This wider agenda brings to the fore company reputation Brand ownershave always known that strong brands invite earn honour and reward thetrust of consumers but the signs are that to be a strong brand in the newmarketplace a brand has to demonstrate some form of corporate socialresponsibility The response of business has however been limited Whilemost companies are still trying to understand exactly how this trendimpacts the value creation process Body Shop is an example of a companythat has embraced brand ethics from its inception For many consumersBody Shop is not simply a retailer but a cause worth supporting BodyShoprsquos promotion of lsquobeauty without cruelty to animalsrsquo and lsquotrade not aidrsquopositions the brand as environmentally and socially responsible Othercompanies have developed social responsibility programmes as a means ofachieving profitability for their business and the environment in a way thatreflects the values of society Reputation management cannot howeversimply be regarded as a tactical activity Companies have to find ways ofembedding social responsibility into their organizations As researcherLance Moir (2001) comments lsquoThe best firms in this area ndash such as BPShell Johnson amp Johnson ndash are looking at their business processes in orderto ensure that the pure economic motive is not the sole determinant ofbusiness decisionsrsquo

THE ROLE OF POSITIONING IN VALUE CREATION

The positioning of a brand in the marketplace is a manifestation of where itsits vis-agrave-vis the competition and in the same way that consumers invest abrand with its value they also determine the positioning of a brand Just asthey carry in their minds a mental model of an individual brand they alsocarry a mental map of related brands Knowledge of this can reveal to theorganization the competitive set within which it operates The challengefacing the insight generators in a business is to find the right combinationof tools and techniques to uncover these maps (These issues were discussedin Chapter 6) However having generated this knowledge the

120 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 120

organization can then work to create the value proposition and ultimatelyto deliver it Positioning plays an important role in the value creationprocess because it helps build and sustain the value proposition Moreoverit does so in a way that factors in emotion the great intangible aspect ofbrand building

An example of a positioning map is shown in Figure 73 It shows thekey criteria that consumers use to discriminate between branded conceptsin the eating out market in this case the type of food on offer and theatmosphere of the outlet Consumers will then go on to opt for a lsquoFrenchrsquobrasserie versus a lsquodepartment storersquo cafeteria depending on the type ofeating-out occasion they are planning For example they may becontemplating a meal out with a small group of friends to celebrate aspecial occasion or they may be thinking of somewhere to go on their ownto pick up a snack as they are in a hurry New Consumers are ultradiscriminating and value creation should focus on their perceptions ofvalue which here includes type of outlet speed of service ambience etc

Drawing out the Emotional Message

New Consumers are motivated by the desire for experiences over featuresand benefits and the brand positioning process provides an important way of linking an emotional message to the physical characteristics of the brand Brands touch peoplersquos lives and consumers choose brands forthe emotional values they express as much as anything else The moredeeply embedded the emotions are the more strongly the consumer isconnected to the brand The example of Nike trainers given in Chapter 6showed how particular product features delivered certain benefits whichtogether provided an experience that satisfied a higher-level valuerequirement

Similar research4 carried out on purchasers of womenrsquos fine fragrancesshows in more detail how perceived value delivers an experience forconsumers The study illustrates how certain features of a brand ofperfume in this instance Chanel No 5 are linked with specific perceivedbenefits that satisfy personal values It can be seen from Figure 74 how thebrandrsquos country of origin (France) works as a positive feature providingreassurance to consumers Consumers regard Chanel No 5 as a low-riskhigh-quality purchase because of the trustworthy reputation French

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 121

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 121

perfumes have in the marketplace This feeling of reassurance promotes asense of well-being and feeling good about oneself For Chanel thelearning to be drawn from this is that it is important to retain thelsquoFrenchnessrsquo of the brand as it is integral to the brandrsquos positioning andcommunications strategies

These insights linking the physical attributes of the brand to theemotional benefits they deliver and in some cases to the higher-levelpersonal values that are satisfied through ownership can enable brandowners to be more innovative in their positioning strategies Certain brandowners explicitly use these sorts of insights to drive their value-creationprocesses For example motorbike manufacturer Harley-Davidson buildson the idea of ownership conferring a particular way of life From the bikesto the merchandise to the tattoos consumers see Harley-Davidson as a partof their identity enabling the brand to strongly differentiate itself in themarketplace In the personal computer (PC) sector the iMAC is positionedas a sensual product infused with mystery thereby engendering a warmthfor the brand among consumers For consumers of these brands theemotional switching costs are significant For the organizations behind thebrands their brand positioning is the result of an ongoing strategic process

122 Value Creation

Figure 73 A positioning map of the UK eating-out market

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 122

that informs the creation and delivery of the value proposition It is not theresult of an ad hoc tactical communications campaign

The Positioning Process

To guide the efforts of an organization in the positioning process it is usualto create a simple statement of what the brand is about and how thecommunications strategy should support its market positioning For mostorganizations the ease with which this statement is created is directlycorrelated with the way the positioning process is managed As SergioZyman former advertising VP at Coca-Cola once said lsquoIf you want toestablish a clear image in the minds of consumers you first need a clearimage in your own mindrsquo However this is seldom achieved for a numberof different reasons For instance some organizations seek to includeeverything in the positioning statement attempting to be all things to allpeople Others do not know where to start the process of articulation Yetothers insist on allowing everyone in the organization to have an opinionand try to reflect them all in a concise statement This process needs to bedriven by someone who has clear responsibility for the task resulting in anunambiguous brand positioning In addition the adoption of a simple

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 123

P

F

B

Figure 74 Mapping brand linkages

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 123

approach (where less is more) and the ability to take a long-term view aidthe successful completion of the task Burberry exemplifies the ability of anorganization to achieve a turnaround in fortunes based on a firmly managedrepositioning process

BurberryIn recent years Burberry has repositioned itself successfully by redefining thevalue consumers are seeking and creating an improved value proposition forthem In the mid-1990s Burberryrsquos unique British heritage and famoustrademark ndash the red black camel and white check pattern ndash was no longerenough to save the dysfunctional retailer Burberry had become over-relianton tired products and by 1997 trading profit collapsed In October 1997 RoseMarie Bravo took over as CEO and began a process of repositioning thebrand propelling it into luxury status Her aim was to turn the staid Britishbrand that was being eclipsed by competitors into an iconic and aspirationalbrand with cross-generational appeal By February 1999 Burberry was a firmfavourite on the catwalks of Milan Burberry designs ranging from the classictrench coat to funky pink kilts fuelled an explosion of accessories also in thetrademark check Since 1998 Burberry sales have doubled and the brand isnow seen as a financial success

The repositioning of Burberry was achieved by having a clear vision inplace Bravo recognized that although Burberry had become stale the public

124 Value Creation

Figure 75 Repositioning Burberry

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 124

still associated strongly with its heritage and quality Under her guidance thecompany began to reposition itself as the authentic British lifestyle brandThis moved it into competition with high-margin luxury design houses such asGucci Prada and Ralph Lauren with the opportunity for superior returns (seeFigure 75)

Burberryrsquos remarkable recovery was achieved through repositioning thebrand changing and expanding the product mix and changing the structureof distribution and sales channels Concentrating on the repositioning of thebrand Burberry retained its four core values (quality classic heritage iconic)and adopted four more (innovation style aspiration modernity) in order tocreate a modern spin to widen its appeal and raise global recognition A keysuccess factor was a coherent communications strategy across all mediaorchestrated to deliver a consistent image worldwide Leading models suchas Stella Tenant and Kate Moss were used to inspire more fashion-orientedadvertising Product design was improved with the input of RobertoMenichetti and then in 2001 Christopher Bailey as chief designer Sponsor-ship of high-profile events such as the Mario Testino Exhibition at the NationalPortrait Gallery and the Burberry Cup a polo match in association with thePrince of Wales reinforced the brandrsquos high class British pedigree

Other activities reinforced the brandrsquos revitalized position For example theproduct mix was expanded to include high-margin accessories childrens-wear and a perfume The range of menrsquos and womenrsquos apparel wasconsolidated distribution was reviewed and retail channels wererationalized As a part of this process a large number of product licenceswere terminated as they were judged to be inconsistent with the repositionedbrand image

THE ROLE OF PRICE IN VALUE CREATION

Price plays a key role in the value-creation process It can for exampleindicate value and quality In the case of a Rolex watch or a Pret A Mangersandwich the premium price reflects the lsquopremiumnessrsquo of the brandSimilarly price can be used to support brand positioning Stella Artois isadvertised as a lsquoreassuringly expensiversquo lager and easyJet occupies a well-defined value-for-money niche in the air travel market In other wordsprice works in combination with other elements of the marketing mix as a signal of value for consumers

Consumer goods companies are coming under increasing pressure toreview their pricing strategies as both consumers and trade customers

The Role of Price in Value Creation 125

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 125

sharpen their focus on value aided in many cases by the power of theInternet in their search for best value The introduction of the Euro andchanging European legislation have added to pricing complexity Whensetting pricing strategies it is important for managers to understand therole that price plays in the value proposition Price is used by consumers as acriterion for evaluating the value of the offer and by supplying organizationsas a competitive tool The effect of the shift from a production-driven to aconsumption-led economy has forced many organizations to replace theircost-plus approach to pricing with demand-led pricing policies

For brand owners price is a significant lever in ensuring that value isdefined created and delivered at a profit Revenue is after all the outcomeof volume multiplied by price (and volume itself is impacted by price)Increases in profitability can be gained by increasing prices reducing costsor increasing the volume sold However it is changes in price levels thathave the biggest impact on profitability due to the gearing ratio whichmeans that a greater amount of the benefit will flow through to the bottomline compared to the other two strategies Volume increases are counteredby variable costs and reducing costs usually applies to values significantlysmaller than turnover

Brand owners must take account of a number of factors when drawing upa pricing plan As depicted in Figure 76 these include internal coststargets and constraints pricing strategy (to be premium or not)competitor pricing strategy and consumer insight The outputs of thispricing decision-making process will impact the business case andinfluence how performance monitoring and scenario planning areundertaken Current pricing is often driven by past events rather than logicand consistency leading to a situation where pricing is inconsistent acrossmarkets For example prices may be set by individual countries or bycorporate divisions acting in isolation from the rest of the organization Asingle company may use several different approaches to pricing in order torespond to short-term or local market needs or it may be that differentprices have been agreed as part of key account management negotiations

The Evaluation of Value

It is not uncommon for prices to be set without reference to the consumerrsquosevaluation of the value proposition leading to a situation where consumers

126 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 126

believe price is out of line that is too expensive or even too cheap Thisincomplete approach to pricing can also undermine brand-positioningstrategies and may potentially damage the brand Furthermore it can leadto a situation where parallel trading develops leading to lost profitopportunities The way to prevent these issues arising is to base pricingstrategy on a rigorous analysis of all the elements inherent in complex pricedecision making Pricing strategy must take account of both theconsumerrsquos and the organizationrsquos evaluation of value as shown in Figure77 Clearly each player makes a trade-off in the value exchange Brandowners bear the costs of defining creating and delivering value and need ahealthy profit margin to remain in business while consumers incur costsassociated with evaluating the value proposition and gaining ownership ofthe brand

Consumers tend to evaluate the value proposition not in terms of theticket price but in terms of relative value that is whether the offer seemsexpensive cheap or fair to them This notion is not new Price as a reflectionof the value placed on a product or service by the consumer was an idea firstarticulated by the Victorian economist Alfred Marshall His beliefs aboutthe effects of consumer preferences on transactions dominated economic

The Role of Price in Value Creation 127

Figure 76 The complex pricing decision-making process Adapted from MarketingImprovements 2002

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 127

thinking until the middle of the twentieth century The concept of therational consumer or lsquohomo economicusrsquo held sway until the 1950s whenthe idea that product attributes other than price might be influencing thepurchase decision was promulgated It was suggested that price mighthave more than one meaning for consumers At about the same time theidea of psychological price emerged The underlying assumption here isthat price has a double meaning for consumers Besides the maximum pricethat they would be willing to pay it is believed that there is also aminimum price for the product to be credible In other words consumershave an upper and a lower price limit in mind

This concept has been refined through further research and pricingtheorists now talk about consumersrsquo lsquoindifference zonersquo The boundaries ofthis psychological zone are marked by a belief that at the upper limit ifsomething is too expensive then consumers will not buy it because theyfeel the price is unjustified while at the lower limit if something is toocheap they will not buy it because they feel the value is suspectUncovering this indifference zone can form the basis of a successfuldemand-led pricing strategy in line with the tenets of the New Consumer

128 Value Creation

Figure 77 The evaluation of value

C

C

CBP

CMP

PP

E

P

P

T

C

E

T

andandS

LSCO

P

MT

z

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 128

Marketing model Ryanair is one example of an organization that takes thisvalue-centric approach to pricing seriously

RyanairRyanair is now the most valuable and profitable airline in Europe It haspowered its way to success by identifying a large under-served customerbase the leisure traveller Ryanair segmented the travel market and onrecognizing that the key values of the leisure traveller are price andpunctuality implemented a strategy to deliver low prices and on-time flightsIn doing so the company evolved a successful low-yieldhigh-volumebusiness model

Ryanair created its value proposition to appeal to the price-consciousconsumer by choosing to compete on routes served by large full-pricecarriers such as Air France and Lufthansa These airlines are highlysubsidized and therefore have little incentive to reduce their operating costskeeping prices to consumers high By removing non-value-added items suchas meals assigned seating and the use of major airports Ryanair was able tooffer prices up to 80ndash90 lower than the flag carriers on numerous routes Asa result it was able to gain market share and brand recognition within eachroute market Ryanairrsquos low cost base also forms a significant barrier tocompetition from larger airlines with high fixed costs

Taking advantage of the deregulation of the European market and thegrowing demand for affordable and reliable air travel Ryanair has created abrand experience that delivers more for less Pricing is managed in real timeFlights booked months ahead of departure are made available at the lowestprices while those booked nearer to the travel date are more expensive Tokeep processing costs down consumers are also encouraged using financialinducements to book via the airlinersquos website rather than over the phone

This second cell of the New Consumer Marketing model is an essentialbuilding block in a demand system It enables the organization to movefrom defining value to creating and communicating that value effectivelyand eventually to delivering it While the process of value creation isdependent on the interplay of new product development brandingpositioning and pricing it is ultimately the role of innovation thatunderpins its success

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Innovation provides a way of creating new value-producing resources orendowing existing ones with an enhanced potential for yielding profit

The Role of Price in Value Creation 129

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 129

bull It is the consumer and not the competition that lies at the heart ofinnovation Providing consumers with a step change in value thateffectively creates a new market can leave the competition standing asold sources of advantage are destroyed and new ones created

bull Organizations that work to reduce marketplace complexity areconstrained to an incremental approach to innovation Those thatchoose to absorb it can then work to create options and learn as anorganization resulting in more radical forms of innovation

bull Brands have become the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition

bull Brands are no longer built just through advertising to consumers theyutilize other stakeholders including alliances and staff

bull The positioning of a brand in the marketplace is a manifestation ofwhere it sits vis-agrave-vis the competition and in the same way thatconsumers invest a brand with its value they also determine thepositioning of a brand

bull Price represents the evaluation of the value proposition and the effectof the shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy isforcing organizations to switch their strategy from a cost-plusapproach to demand-led pricing policies

130 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 130

The process of delivering value to a specified audience through the mediaand channels of their choice

Delivering value = communicating and distributing the value created

Watchword = agility

In the consumption-led economy value delivery is undergoing rapidchange for two important reasons the emergence of the New Consumerand the proliferation of media and channels This changing marketingenvironment poses new challenges for organizations particularly in respectto how they manage media and channel choices customer service and thesupply chain To be effective organizations must ensure that theirstrategies for each of these key areas are aligned with the overall strategy oftheir demand system As with the first two cells this means having a value-centric orientation in the business

Value delivery is concerned with how consumers get to own the productor service It involves the way in which the offer is presented thetransaction is handled and after-sales service and support are providedThe third cell of the New Consumer model focuses on communicating anddistributing value in order to achieve maximum consumer responsivenessand satisfaction The key to success here is organizational agility

THE ROLE OF AGILITY IN VALUE DELIVERY

For a company to be agile it is to be capable of operating profitably in acustomer environment of continually and unpredictable changing customeropportunities

(S Goldman et al 1995)

Value Delivery 8

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 131

In the new marketplace of proliferating media and channel choicescharacterized by an increasing number of new products and services and adecline in organizational ability to forecast sales organizations need to beable to respond rapidly and flexibly to consumer requirements Thisdemands a capability to change gear and immerse the organization in newopportunities on a continual basis The phrase that resonates withmanagers is lsquothe need to develop organizational agilityrsquo

The notion of organizational agility has its origins in flexiblemanufacturing systems where it was believed that automation alone wouldconfer this capability Over time a wider business application has emergedlargely through developments in supply-chain management Currentthinking defines organizational agility as lsquoa business-wide capability thatembraces organizational structures information systems logistics processesand in particular mindsetsrsquo1 The agile organization creates competitiveadvantage for itself by being able to adapt its people and processes to thecontinually changing needs of the marketplace increasingly with the supportof technical innovation The challenge for consumer-serving companies is tofuse people and process approaches in order to achieve cost-effective valuedelivery Competitive advantage today lies in recruiting and motivating theright people while at the same time constantly improving business processesWhen either element people or process fails to embrace change theorganization is less nimble and thus less able to compete successfully

Organizational culture plays a significant role in achieving andmaintaining such agility The fusion of people and processes can only takeplace in an environment conducive to effective change managementCreating an appropriate organizational culture involves a number of factorsincluding for example the management of employees the sharing ofknowledge and the choice of performance indicators These factors areconsidered in more depth in the next chapter but are raised here as they canbe seen to have an impact on organizational agility in the cases offered in thischapter

New Consumer Marketing promotes organizational agility byencouraging a value-centric orientation in the organization A businessthat is focused on defining creating and delivering value profitably is abusiness that can lsquoturn on a sixpencersquo and exploit opportunities

The Veterans Agency (VA) formerly known as the War PensionsAgency provides a useful example

132 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 132

The Veterans AgencyThe Veterans Agency (VA) is responsible for assessing and paying pensionsto disabled servicemen and women and their spouses in the UK It wasestablished in Elizabethan times (when soldiers were paid pound10 a year) butwas launched as an executive agency in the mid-1990s In November 2000when the UK Prime Minister Tony Blair announced that surviving formerprisoners of war in the Far East were to receive a pound10000 special paymentfrom the Government the VA was faced with the task of tracking downthousands of individuals dispersed across the world As an agileorganization one that had its people and processes focused on consumerresponsiveness its project plan enabled 14000 claims to be processed inless than three months

For many organizations adopting a market-responsive approach tovalue delivery is a daily challenge Building on organizational strengthssegmenting customers in a meaningful way and utilizing IT to meetspecific objectives are a few of the many ways in which organizations canimprove their flexibility and customer responsiveness Lastminutecom is agood example here

LastminutecomIn 2001 the web-based travel company handled some 800000 onlinetransactions which included travel hotel and restaurant bookings and giftpurchases Around 20 of the pound124 million transaction value was generatedoutside its key markets in the UK and France Lastminute constantlyredesigns its website (see Figure 81) brings in new suppliers and improvesthe customer experience Its investment in IT is high due to a concentrationon web design connectivity voice-recognition software and a sophisticatedCRM system that segments 5 million customers on a database according to their purchasing habits The CRM system enables Lastminute to emailspecial offers to selected customers based on the companyrsquos knowledge oftheir previous purchases Since its launch four years ago the company hasgrown quickly through the acquisition of rivals and the involvement of majorplayers (eg BAA Sony Music Deutsche Telekom France Telecom andIntel) who have bought equity stakes in the company

THE ROLE OF MEDIA AND CHANNELS IN VALUE DELIVERY

New Consumers live in a global marketplace where they are increasinglyoffered lower prices greater convenience and more choice This is in large

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 133

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 133

part due to the proliferation of media and channels which organizations useto market their brands products and services Media strategies have to dowith how the value proposition is communicated while channel strategieshave to do with how it is transacted The role of media and channels is ofvital importance in delivering the value proposition as it relates to how andwhere the exchange of value takes place With todayrsquos empoweredconsumers able to go to market more easily than ever before organizationscan no longer afford to manage media and channels as if they were stand-alone entities

In the production-driven era media and channels were distinguishablefrom one another For instance television was considered a medium andretail was considered a channel Now in the consumption-led economymedia and channels have become closely related and even interchangeableFor example the retailer is rapidly becoming the media ownerrsquos biggestcompetitor This is evident in the fact that the lsquobig fourrsquo food retailers ndashTesco Asda Safeway and Sainsburyrsquos ndash currently account for 70 of

134 Value Delivery

Figure 81 Lastminutecom

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 134

household food expenditure and the media issue facing brand owners iswhether to advertise on television or run a gondola end promotion as ameans of reaching a large number of relevant consumers with anappropriate message or offer For many brand owners the answer is to focuspromotional resources in-store thereby communicating directly withconsumers at the point of purchase as opposed to communicating withthem through another medium that is not so closely tied to the point ofpurchase

The convergence of media and channel choice is the result of the comingtogether of two trends progress in brand thinking and the inexorablemarch of developments in IT As outlined in Chapter 7 a brand used to bethought of as a lifeless manipulable entity that was built throughadvertising Today it is seen as a dynamic asset that lives in the consumerrsquosmind an experience of the value proposition that is created throughmultiple touchpoints where the organization wittingly or unwittinglyengages the consumer

As media choices have expanded and become more sophisticatedopportunities for dialogue with the consumer have grown in a stepwisefashion Supplying organizations and consumers are no longer restricted tocommunicating with each other by telephone facsimile or post or throughface-to-face encounters with in-store staff or sales representatives Newtechnologies have given rise to personal and interactive media such asemail the Internet personal digital assistants (PDAs) mobile phones and the next-generation smart phone In the process of enrichingcommunication these developments have expanded the role of IT IT isnow not only concerned with the exchange of information but also withinteraction and with the promise of integration in the near future Wheredialogue can take place so the option to transact also arises and the use ofmedia and channels become interwoven

New Consumer Marketing demands an approach to media and channelsthat builds on the benefits of media and channel integration First amongthese benefits is the ability to develop organizational agility and thusenhance consumer responsiveness The new range of media and channelchoices available offers organizations the opportunity to lower costsprovide better service and personalize the value proposition The collectionand analysis of previously unimaginable kinds of data through increasinglysophisticated technologies makes this possible

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 135

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 135

Making the Most of Media Choices

The proliferation of media choices is causing tectonic shifts in marketingthinking about how they can be used to build brands Media decisions inthe production-driven era were about how to advertise to consumerswhich was a largely one-way exercise motivated by the desire to controlconsumer response In a subsequent phase more interactive media choicessuch as direct response media (eg direct mail offers and direct responsetelephone lines) were used to encourage more continuous communicationbetween consumers and the organization In the consumption-led economythe aim is connectivity or the development of a shared understanding thatcomes from ongoing dialogues experiences and shared values that developbetween a marketer and consumers (Schultz and Lindberg-Repo 2002)The challenge for marketers today is selecting the most effective andefficient combination of media from the wealth of interactive and non-interactive media options The goal is to ensure that consumers have aperfect experience across whatever media they use to interact with theorganization

Connectivity enables brand owners to build deeper and more enduringrelationships with New Consumers These relationships are developedthrough the empowered engagement of both participants in a two-wayinteraction process one that is exemplified by Nokia

NokiaThe Nokia Game is a multimedia adventure-cum-espionage role-playinggame which Nokia has been running for the last four years in 18 countriesattracting over half a million players in 2001 Clues are given out to players ina range of ways including text messaging voicemail email the Internet (seeFigure 82) TV radio and the press The game is based on the lsquofuture ofcommunicationrsquo and it educates players on future technologies and applica-tions Players have to find out about everything from different ringtones andmenu systems through to GSM and GPRS in order to progress from onestage of the game to the next

More than just a form of play the Nokia Game is a marketing platform thatcreates Nokia brand advocates by being particularly relevant and credible toa specifically defined audience The game gets consumers highly involved inthe brand by engaging and rewarding them for their attention and therebycreating a virtual Nokia community In effect players give Nokia permission tomarket the companyrsquos products to them In this way the various levels ofdialogue ndash texting voicemail press for example ndash enable a mutual

136 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 136

understanding and reciprocal generation of the value proposition Playersgain knowledge and excitement from the game while Nokia benefits frombuilding knowledge of its consumers The game grows as the network ofplayers grows and the bonds between Nokia and the players develop

lsquoGaining permissionrsquo is a facet of media strategy that has emerged withthe coming of the consumption-led economy New Consumersrsquo highlyfragmented lifestyles and time pressures mean that they have less time tomeet all the demands on them They are not the passive subjects ofmarketers but discerning and demanding customers Part of the valueexchange in the consumption-led economy relates to the value theseconsumers get out of investing their attention As Herbert Simon NobelPrize winning economist has noted lsquoInformation consumes attention hellip awealth of information creates a poverty of attention hellip the only factor thatbecomes scarce in a world of abundance is human attentionrsquo Permissionmarketing (Godin 1999) has therefore developed out of the problemsassociated with gaining the attention of consumers Where a marketerreceives the consumerrsquos permission the conscious effort required by theconsumer to pay attention more often than not results in dialogue betweenthe two parties

The challenge for brand owners in making the most of media choices hasan external and an internal component Externally they are aiming to

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 137

Figure 82 The Nokia Game

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 137

replicate the experience of a one-to-one relationship where the consumerfeels they are being spoken to by the same person in every encounter Theinternal challenge is to generate data across the various media to create asingle unified view of the consumer This single view ensures thatregardless of the medium or channel through which the consumer interactswith the organization the consumer is recognized and the history of theirrelationship is remembered Achieving this single view demands clearobjectives in the management of data issues that are explored later inChapter 9

From a consumer perspective a perfect experience that replicates thefeeling of being spoken to by the same person in every brand encounter ismost likely to be delivered through a media-neutral strategy Theintegrated brand communications strategies adopted by Volkswagen andStella Artois provide good examples Volkswagenrsquos multimediamulti-agency approach has helped the brand double its new car sales and valueshare within six years The strategy which includes the use of PR directmarketing online marketing cinema and radio led directly to 151000extra sales and pound199 billion extra revenue for VW UK

Stella ArtoisStella Artoisrsquo communications strategy cleverly exploits knowledge ofconsumer lifestyles and the popular medium of film Research into thebrandrsquos largely young male (aged 18ndash34) consumer base had revealed that ahigh majority visited the cinema or rented videos on a regular basis At a timewhen most other lager beers were using sport to communicate their brandvalues Stella adopted the theme of film Its communications strategyincluded advertisements that possessed a cinematic feel film sponsorshipon Channel 4 film events around the UK and on-pack promotions forBlockbuster videos The task of making this theme work across a number ofagencies fell to the marketing manager who appointed a lead agency foreach cycle of the strategy The specialist agencies ndash in advertising salespromotions media buying consumer and trade public relations for examplendash then activated the element of the strategy within their particular mediumCrucial to this way of working is that everyone buys into the same definition ofthe brand echoing the need for brand clarity discussed in Chapter 7

As well as integrating media choices across channels some brand ownersare pioneering integration across a number of brand owners to deliver aperfect experience for consumers The aim of these brand owners is to cross-

138 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 138

promote their own operations and develop long-term marketingpartnerships Disney is one company that has pursued such an integrativeapproach

DisneyDisney has a number of cross-media deals with global partners such asHome Depot and McDonaldrsquos In 2001 the DIY chain Home Depot signed athree-year tie-up across Disneyrsquos ABC network ESPN sports channel andLifetime channel The deal was reported to be worth pound65 million to Disney Aspart of the agreement Disney is launching a range of branded childrenrsquospaints in Home Depot and has also agreed to purchase Home Depot productsfor its own operations Disneyrsquos ten-year deal with McDonaldrsquos successfullycross-promotes Disney films through childrenrsquos Happy Meal promotions inMcDonaldrsquos restaurants

Making the Most of Channel Choices

In the same way that the proliferation of media choices is causing a shift inthinking about how best to communicate the value proposition theexpansion of marketing channels is challenging thinking about how bestto transact value The brand owner must devise a channel strategy that isappealing to its target consumers and profitable to its business This mayinvolve the use of a single channel or a combination of channels The brandowner must choose from an ever-widening range of direct channels (egInternet telephone facsimile) and indirect channels (eg retailersdistributors and service providers)

As with media strategies the goal of channel strategies is to ensure thatthe consumer has a perfect experience across all the channels used One ofthe biggest issues for organizations here is to minimize channel conflictInteractive channels offer organizations the opportunity to transactdirectly with consumers faster and at a lower cost than most non-interactive channels do Consequently many organizations have decided tocut out the middlemen and have ceased using traditional intermediariesFor example call centre technology allows insurance companies such asDirect Line to offer and transact the value proposition by dealing withconsumers directly over the telephone This obviates the need for expensivenetworks of insurance brokers and keeps the premiums low creatingmutual benefit for both seller and buyer

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 139

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 139

While a strategy of lsquodisintermediationrsquo may appear seductive at firstsight channel strategy development should be based upon the optimumcombination of channels necessary to provide the most effective and efficientmeans of delivering the value proposition Different channels offer differentadvantages (see Figure 83) Norwich Union for example sells financialproducts directly to consumers through independent financial advisers(IFAs) The Guardian newspaper produces and sells newspapers throughintermediaries and also offers an online news service free of chargeThorntonrsquos the confectioner transacts its value proposition through anetwork of shops by phone fax and post and via the Internet

It is crucial for organizations to understand why their consumers preferto use one channel rather than another why for example some favourremote interaction while others prefer transacting face-to-face Identifyingand satisfying the channel preferences of New Consumers is particularlychallenging as these may change according to the type of purchase or thetime at which the transaction takes place For instance consumers may becontent to book a weekend trip to Europe using the online facility of adiscount airline but may prefer completing the transaction for a lengthiersummer trip abroad in a face-to-face encounter Above all New Consumersare looking for organizational agility ndash a supplier who can adapt to theirdiffering needs on different purchasing occasions Channel strategydecisions therefore need to be reviewed regularly and adjusted asappropriate

Another popular channel strategy in the consumption-led economy isreintermediation or the introduction of new types of intermediaryExamples of this include the use of web-enabled information agents alsoknown as lsquoinfomediariesrsquo who carry out information searches on behalf ofprospective purchasers Some infomediaries not only research products andservices on behalf of consumers but also manage sales transactions and post-sales service agreements Autobytel for example providesinformation about car prices and purchase availability and will evenfacilitate the sale and organize delivery This one-stop-shop approach isattractive to many New Consumers who have little time to shop aroundfor best value Some even engage lsquopersonal shoppersrsquo such as TenUK to actas their own purchasing agents across a number of sectors

Organizations such as Conciera which offers clients a technology platformon which to transform their businesses in line with this buyer-centric

140 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 140

philosophy believe that this is where the future of channel strategydevelopment lies ndash that by acting as the consumerrsquos partner and providingaccess to a new set of information tools across new media and telephonechannels agent-based businesses will create and deliver new forms ofsuperior customer service and consumer value

THE ROLE OF SERVICE IN VALUE DELIVERY

The arrival of the consumption-led economy has elevated the role of servicein the creation and delivery of the value proposition Increasinglyorganizations are recognizing service as a source of competitivedifferentiation Service excellence is seen as a key profitability driverSouthwest Airlines (SWA) and First Direct are examples of organizationsthat have used service to enhance the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition SWA has transformed cabin service into a form ofentertainment that is regularly promoted by word-of-mouthrecommendation Similarly First Direct now offers a remote bankingservice that consumers have warmed to and are keen to advocate In boththese cases the consumerrsquos experience of the brand is delivered through theactions and attitudes of staff In effect the service delivered by staff is thebrand

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 141

Figure 83 This Royal Mail advertisement shows the extent of channel choice

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 141

Despite wide acknowledgement of the value of providing high levels ofservice many customer-care activities fail to meet buyer and supplierexpectations New Consumers are more demanding and sophisticated intheir expectations of service and organizations need to be able to respondaccordingly This requires an ethos of consumer responsiveness within thebusiness and New Consumer Marketing proposes a living demand systemto enable this to flourish The NCM model acknowledges the importanceof employeesrsquo contribution to value creation and delivery this was exploredin Chapter 7 and is emphasized further in Chapter 9

Creating a Service Strategy

To optimize the role of service in the delivery process it is useful to breakservice down into its three component stages pre-transaction transactionand post-transaction The pre-transaction elements of service relate tocorporate policies or programmes involving written statements of servicepolicy and the planning of strategies for dealing with different types ofconsumers at various points in their relationship with the organization Thetransaction elements comprise the customer service variables that aredirectly involved in the delivery of the value proposition such as productavailability order cycle times service ambience and so on Post-transactionelements have to do with the support consumers receive once they takeownership of the product or service These may include warranties partsand repair services complaint procedures loyalty clubs and so on

To ensure a consistent approach across these three stages of the serviceencounter exemplary organizations create a service strategy As suggestedby Professor Martin Christopher in his book The Customer Service Planner(1992) service strategy involves the identification of a service mission inwhich the organization articulates its service pledge and the setting ofservice objectives These objectives should link back to the insightgenerated by the organization into the nature of the value consumers areseeking and the consequent analysis of opportunities available They willthus serve to highlight the importance of service quality variables such asreliability responsiveness assurance and empathy Service strategy canthen be refined for different consumer segments as different clusters ofconsumers will be looking for different service packages Once a servicepackage has been developed for each segment service programmes can be

142 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 142

implemented The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company is extremely focused oncreating exactly the right service levels for its customers

The Ritz-Carlton HotelThe Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company has created a value-centric service strategythat is implemented across the world by its 22000 employees The companywas awarded the Malcolm Baldridge National Quality Award in 1992 and1999 and is one of only two companies to have received the award twiceThis is a considerable achievement given that the company operates in anindustry where high staff turnover rates are the norm The companyrsquos strategyis characterized by an emphasis on generating employee satisfaction basedon a belief that this results in customer satisfaction which in turn deliversgreater profitability The strategy is pursued in a number of ways Forexample each day every member of staff has a meeting with their supervisormanager the vice-president or the chief executive at the start of their shiftAlthough the meeting lasts only 15 minutes it covers all the essential itemsfrom which VIPs are staying in the hotel to staff suggestions about serviceimprovements What sets this pre-shift briefing apart from the way other hotelchains organize is that every employee of the company across the worlddiscusses the same subject on the same day Each day the briefings focus onone of 20 basic service principles standards that were laid down when thecompany was formed The following are a few examples

No 10 ndash Each employee is empowered For example when a guest has aproblem or needs something special you should break away from yourregular duties to address and resolve the issueNo 11 ndash Uncompromising levels of cleanliness are the responsibility ofevery employeeNo 12 ndash To provide the finest personal service for our guests eachemployee is responsible for identifying and recording individual guestpreferences

Source Tony Mosely lsquoAre you being served The route to good customercarersquo Consumer Policy Review NovDec 2002

Recruiting and Motivating Staff

Acknowledgement of the importance of people in delivering service has ledto a greater interest in the recruitment motivation and retention of staffResearch shows that when employees identify with the norms and values ofan organization that reflect a commitment to customer service they are less

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 143

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 143

inclined to leave their jobs This reduction in employee turnover serves tostrengthen the organization It promotes a culture where service valuesbecome embedded in the way things are done and are more easily transmittedto successive generations of employees Recruitment is therefore of crucialimportance to organizations In order to attract and retain the highest qualityrecruits ndash those who share the organizationrsquos values and will make a majorcontribution to its future success ndash organizations have to market themselvesto potential recruits as employers of choice With changing demographicsthreatening the supply of young people in the West the so-called lsquowar fortalentrsquo (Michaels et al 2001) is an everyday reality for many companies

At the Ritz-Carlton recruitment is carried out using a number oftechniques Psychometric tests are used to identify candidates with theright work attitude and by matching their test scores against those of thebest performing staff the company is able to allocate jobs according toindividual suitability New employees undergo a minimum of fiveinterviews but provisional job offers are normally issued within 48 hours ofthe first interview so that good people are not lost to the competition

The Ritz-Carltonrsquos approach provides a rich contrast with the way Pret AManger recruits its staff Following application and interview Pret AMangerrsquos prospective candidates are paid to work for one day in one of thecompanyrsquos stores Staff already working in that store then make the finaldecision as to whether the candidate is employed This has the effect of

144 Value Delivery

Figure 84 Pret A Manger

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 144

empowering staff and ensuring only people with the lsquoPret attitudersquo (seeFigure 84) who are able to demonstrate they would uphold Pret AMangerrsquos values and ethos are taken on In fact only about 20 ofcandidates pass this exacting test

Staff motivation is another important part of retaining employees Mostorganizations use employment benefits and training and development toreward and motivate their employees As Singapore Airlines demonstratesthese need to fit with the values and culture of the organization and betailored to improving the overall value-centric ethos and practice of theorganization

Singapore AirlinesSingapore Airlines employs about 8 of Singaporersquos working population andis consistently voted one of the top local employers The training ofemployees is comprehensive ndash the programme for new stewardesses hasbeen referred to as a lsquodebutante boot camprsquo involving four months of socialas well as operational skills training Career development opportunities arestrong and staff are regularly appraised as a means of improving theirperformance In an effort to retain trained staff who have taken maternityleave the company operates a lsquoFlying Momrsquo scheme which enablesstewardesses with long service records to spend more time at home with theirfamilies

Other successful organizations have evolved similarly unique approachesto motivating staff which often depend on cross-functional collaborationbetween marketing operations and human resources management It isimportant that there is alignment between the value proposition offered toconsumers and that offered to employees For example Countrywide PorterNovelli (CPN) is a successful business-to-business PR consultancy thatoperates what it calls the 4Is culture

bull Imagination ndash making our work memorablebull Irreverence ndash challenging the status quobull Improvement ndash a little better every timebull Initiative ndash making the first move

This articulation of principles does not simply take the form of a brightlogo to be used in communications but provides a framework formanaging delivery of the value proposition both internally and externallyIt represents the distinctive advantage CPN believes it offers clients and

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 145

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 145

guides the recruitment training and promotion of staff internallyUnusually the director of personnel and development and the marketingdirector sit down together and discuss joint implementation of the internaland external marketing strategy on a regular basis

Empowering Employees to Live the Brand

A New Consumer Marketing approach to service requires the highestlevels of consumer responsiveness and service providers have a greatopportunity to make this a differentiated part of the value propositionWhat New Consumers are looking for is an individual response to theirparticular requirements and those on the so-called front-line of a businessare in a position to customize the experience for them The way employeesfeel about their job often defines the way they view the brand and the waythey communicate it to consumers For this reason many organizations seethe empowerment of employees as a business priority

The secret of success here is not so much a mechanistic prescription or aseries of instructions to staff but rather a dialogue where organizationshelp staff understand what the brand stands for and seeks to accomplishand what their individual role is in achieving the brand objectives It isimportant that employees receive information about organizationalperformance and that they are rewarded for contributing to it Whilelsquoliving the brandrsquo is a common corporate goal few organizations actuallyachieve it A MORI survey carried out in 2002 reported that 30 of UKemployees are brand neutral or are not interested in their companyrsquos brandwhile a further 22 are brand saboteurs actively working against thebrand culture This means less than half of the countryrsquos employees can beconsidered as brand champions who will spread their companiesrsquo brandvalues Of these 33 would talk positively about the brand if asked andonly 15 would talk positively about the brand spontaneously

Formal communication programmes that aim to market the brandinternally are used by many organizations to endow staff with an enhancedpotential for yielding profit For example Land Rover launched the latestRange Rover with a series of coordinated events for employees dealers andthe press Part of the strategy was the placement of the car in the TombRaider movie Around 20000 employees at Land Rover were invited toprivate screenings of the film and encouraged to bring their families

146 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 146

creating great word-of-mouth marketing British Airways when facedwith orchestrating 50000 articulations of the brand through its 50000staff worldwide launched the lsquoPassion for Servicersquo initiative It isessentially a training session to teach staff about brands and the BA brandin particular Having spent pound1 million developing Club World and pound200 million implementing it the internal marketing programme is a wayof protecting and enhancing that investment Brand clarity as discussedearlier in Chapter 7 is a necessary precondition of making staffempowerment work

Staff empowerment requires trust and courage on the part of theorganization as employees are given autonomy to interpret the brand in away that is both meaningful to them and their job and to consumersTesco for example empowers staff to respond to legitimate customercomplaints by giving them the authority to replace products or issuereimbursements without having to refer to supervisors In doing so thecompany demonstrates a respect for their employeesrsquo ability to assesssituations and manage customers In a similar move Abbey National hasgiven its front-line staff the power to take decisions such as reimbursingcustomers who feel they have been charged unfairly In both these cases bynot passing problem resolution up the chain of command consumers aremade to feel valued and respected The issue is dealt with quickly savingexpensive company time and ensuring customer satisfaction

Speed of response in resolving consumer problems is all-important asNew Consumers are becoming more marketing literate and less easy toplease Those whose issues are not dealt with swiftly and satisfactorily havethe confidence and wherewithal to make their views known across a rangeof media (as described in Chapter 2) Studies have shown that while up to98 of dissatisfied customers never complain when they receive poorservice 90 will not return to the disappointing vendor in future as aresult of the poor service Furthermore consumers who are dissatisfied arelikely to tell at least ten others about their poor service experience whereasa good service experience will be related to only three others This makes itdoubly hard for organizations to gain a reputation for good service and allthe more reason for an organization to work hard to maintain a goodreputation

The processes within an organization that are concerned with creatingdeveloping and maintaining an internal service culture and an orientation

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 147

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 147

that enables the organization to achieve its service goals are usuallymanaged as part of an internal marketing strategy The fundamental aim isto develop awareness of the value proposition sought by both internal andexternal customers and to remove functional barriers to organizationalperformance The organization must ensure that every employee whetherthey are directly or indirectly frequently or infrequently in contact withexternal customers contributes to the delivery of a superior valueproposition Despite the fact that for many organizations internalmarketing programmes are a formal part of the way value is transactedthere is no consensus on how these programmes should best beimplemented This is because the importance of internal marketing hasonly recently been acknowledged and because of the debate that has arisenabout exactly who within an organization should have responsibility for itThis topic is returned to in Chapter 9

THE ROLE OF TECHNOLOGY INTEGRATION IN VALUEDELIVERY

The integration of technology into service delivery is transforming manybusinesses and Petcareco Limited is a useful example of this Petcareco is aone-stop pet resort and care centre based in Washington Tyne and Wearwhich looks after pets (mainly cats and dogs) while their owners are onholiday (see Figure 85) As part of the service all sorts of creature comforts ndashfrom TVs to sofas ndash can be added to a petrsquos temporary lsquoapartmentrsquo Ahydrotherapy pool and a bespoke vet service complement the pet careservices The business is staffed by a team of dedicated animal lovers who aresupported in their work by a sophisticated but easily manageable range oftechnology For example handheld devices are used to carry daily pet careschedules and a back office system records data on every pet enabling thecompany to instantly recognize and recall any previous lsquoguestrsquo history anduse it to make the pet feel welcome and at home The aim is to ensure thatevery animal gets the right service at the right time in the right place

The aim of integrating technology into service delivery is to optimizethe use of available media and channels Again the goal is to ensure thatthe consumer has a perfect experience across all media and channels usedIntegration in todayrsquos complex and demanding marketing environmentrequires moving away from the conventional approach to media and

148 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 148

channel strategy which has been to have different specialist agenciesmanage various elements of the marketing mix while consumer enquiriesare dealt with at an external call centre

When call centres first appeared in the UK they were held up as thefuture of customer service By offering a central point of customer contactthe call centre was seen as the answer to a comprehensive approach tocustomer service It is estimated that there are currently around 6000 callcentres in Britain and the number is expected to rise to 8000 by 2005 TheUK call centre industry now employs almost 500000 people or 17 ofthe working population However laudable and popular an idea the callcentrersquos reputation has tarnished over time due to adverse publicity anddreadful consumer experiences In too many cases these centres have beenexposed as a means of cutting costs rather than improving service levelsSome organizations however go to great lengths to make their call centresas lsquohumanrsquo and customer-friendly as possible Virgin Mobilersquos call centre islocated at its headquarters in Wiltshire The centre is light airy anddivided into sections staffed by different teams that work in light-heartedcompetition with each other Eggrsquos communications centre in Derby hasalso employed new concepts in lighting colour and space Its teams workin mini-communities and comfy chillout zones create a positive workingenvironment A pleasant working environment helps keep staff motivationhigh and this in turn has a positive impact on customer satisfaction

The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery 149

Figure 85 Petcareco Limited (formerly known as Triple lsquoArsquo)

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 149

The unique feature of these two companiesrsquo call centres is that they usetechnology as a means to an end to enhance the delivery of the valueproposition When organizations focus on technology as an end in itselfvalue-centricity is unattainable The challenge is deciding where and howto integrate technology into the implementation of service strategy Thedecision-making process is made easier where the organization has a serviceblueprint or map of its service processes2 This effectively reduces serviceencounters ndash or all points of contact between the consumer and theorganization ndash to a series of interrelated steps and sequences as the examplein Figure 86 shows It offers an opportunity to review service strengths andweaknesses and plan resource allocation more appropriately as well as tocommunicate responsibilities throughout the organization

Multichannel centres are now emerging as the next generation ofcontact centre Call centres are becoming web enabled and consumers canmake contact with the organization according to their channel preferenceIn some cases in the US for example call-centre staff are being replaced bytechnology that plugs into the software that runs the companyrsquos websiteVirtual call-centre operators or V-Reprsquos who can talk to and understandcustomers are taking their places The range of options now available to anorganization affords a high level of flexibility as the case of Nestleacutedemonstrates

NestleacuteNestleacute is testing this new approach to multichannel customer managementThe company is seeking to manage and execute everything ndash from thecreation of one-to-one consumer communications through to generating andresponding to phone fax post and email enquiries ndash from a dedicatedcommunications centre The project has been piloted in France at alsquorelationship centrersquo set up by McCann Relationship Marketing Paris (MRM)a division of McCann Erickson World Group Nestleacutersquos advertising agency

Nestleacute has promoted details about how to contact the company on productssince the 1960s However in 2000 this became a more forceful invitation forFrench consumers to make contact when Nestleacute introduced its Nestleacute enDirect scheme This initiative along with Club Nestleacute a club for consumersforms the basis of Nestleacutersquos consumer relationship activity in France Both activities are used to encourage consumers to communicate with the company and provide their personal details Nestleacute uses this data to segment consumers and to tailor one-to-one promotional and marketingactivity

150 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 150

Fig

ure

86

Cus

tom

er c

onta

ct c

omm

unic

atio

ns a

nd re

latio

nshi

p pr

oces

s S

ourc

e D

r Ray

mon

d P

ettit

New

Jer

sey

Inst

itute

of T

echn

olog

y

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 151

To manage all these activities more effectively Nestleacute has taken theinnovative step of creating a multichannel communications centre under oneroof All forms of enquiry made by French consumers to the company ndash anestimated 200000 a year ndash are handled by MRMrsquos relationship centre Inmoving response handlers alongside advertising creatives customerintelligence experts new media branding and management consultants theconsumer is put at the heart of the business Nestleacute foresees a number ofbenefits from this new approach It is more flexible and allows betterintegration between different communications channels as well as givingcontrol over the quality of all one-to-one consumer communications

Source Meg Carter lsquoTowards a closer relationship with customersrsquoFinancial Times 11 March 2002

THE ROLE OF THE SUPPLY CHAIN IN VALUE DELIVERY

As we have seen New Consumers demand goods and services through anever-changing mix of media and channels Meeting their requirements forfaster better and cheaper service and delivery depends heavily on themake-up and robustness of the supply chain Only those organizationswhose supply chains are capable of responding rapidly to volatile demandwill thrive in this post-quake business environment

Increasingly business theorists are talking about developing demand-led supply chains to deliver the required level of consumer responsivenessThis means moving away from the simplistic approach that characterizedsupply-chain management in the production-driven era Then supplychains were relatively unsophisticated extending forwards throughdistributors and retailers to the consumer and then stretching backwardsthrough component assemblers to the suppliers of the raw materialsSupply chains were linear and supply-chain management was to do withmanaging delivery trucks and storage sheds (or so it seemed) Over the pasttwo decades supply chains have grown in complexity and many nowresemble lsquowebsrsquo or lsquonetworksrsquo of collaborative relationships The evolutionof the supply-chain network has been accelerated by the application of ITThe impact of the Internet in particular has enabled widely distributedoperations to be brought together at a relatively low cost

This network or lsquoextended enterprisersquo approach to managing thesupply chain has developed in response to the downward pressures on pricearising from global overcapacity growing competition and more powerful

152 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 152

customers (issues that were discussed in Chapter 3) Falling market pricescompel organizations to turn their focus inwards and to concentrate onreducing costs Over the past decade rationalization within the supplychain has been a major source of cost savings The idea of lsquoleanmanufacturingrsquo promulgated by James Womack3 at MIT in the early1990s has attracted considerable interest Based on the production systemused in Japanese-owned automobile manufacturing plants particularlythat of Toyota the idea was later extended to form the wider concept of thelsquolean enterprisersquo The focus of this approach is the elimination of waste andthe creation of competitive advantage through lower cost prices Criticsargue that it only works well where demand is relatively stable and hencepredictable and where the requirement for variety is low In todayrsquos morevolatile markets where consumer requirements stipulate more productvariety and where the ability to forecast demand is diminishing a differentapproach is called for

Competing through the Supply Chain

As pointed out by Professor Martin Christopher of Cranfield School ofManagement nowadays it is supply chains rather than companies thatcompete in the marketplace (Christopher and Peck 1997 Christopher1998) One of the clearest examples of an organization that competesthrough its supply chain is Dell

DellMichael Dell eschewed the use of conventional channels to distribute his PCsand focused instead on direct sales Consumers can select their own PCconfiguration online at Dellcom and within just 90 minutes their personallycustomized lsquogrey boxrsquo will roll off the factoryrsquos production line Dellrsquos suppliershave built their factories close by and inventory is down to four days makingDell the number one computer service provider in the world When Dell didattempt to break into established retail distribution channels in the early1990s it all went badly wrong and the company pulled out after suffering itsfirst ever loss The direct sales model offers Dell a structural advantage thatrivals IBM and Hewlett-Packard do not have

Source Amanda Hall lsquoThe boy who lived the American dreamrsquo The SundayTimes 1 December 2002 Michael Dell and Catherine Fredman (1999)Michael Dell (2002)

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 153

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 153

Acceptance of the philosophy that it is supply chains that compete withone another rather than companies has led organizations to acknowledgetheir strengths and weaknesses and to outsource those activities theybelieve can be performed more cost-effectively by others The supply chainhas in effect become a confederation of closely linked specialists whosecooperative behaviour creates a highly differentiated value chain

Often it is not technology that is the barrier to making these complexpartnerships work but lack of trust As highlighted in Chapter 3 thesharing of information and expertise previously considered confidential isessential in building the degree of trust necessary for collaboration Anumber of major retailers have already begun the process of implementingthis collaborative approach to strategy making setting up private web-based exchanges requiring the integration of both partiesrsquo internal systemsto share data and ideas Building these closer relationships betweenbusinesses can be very beneficial Some estimate that the introduction of e-procurement systems founded on joint working arrangements can shortenorder fulfilment cycles by 70 and cut administration costs by 50ndash70 Itis even believed that inventory costs can be halved ndash a significant benefitconsidering that holding stocks of unsold goods is a primary cost escalator

Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression

Consumer responsiveness is dependent on superior levels of insightinnovation and agility As far as the supply chain goes the focus has to beon the elimination of time rather than of waste The aim of timecompression in supply chains is to shorten the total pipeline time betweenthe procurement of materials and payment for the finished goods In mostorganizations it takes longer to procure make and deliver the finishedproduct to the customer than the customer is prepared to wait giving riseto a mismatch in expectations that is known to as the lsquolead-time gaprsquoNormally organizations overcome this problem by carrying lsquobufferrsquo orsurplus stock The amount of inventory is typically based on a forecast ofwhat the market will require However forecasting is a far from accuratescience As Martin Christopher says organizations that manage to closethis lead-time gap lsquoneed neither forecasts nor inventory making themmore responsive to customer demand and able to reduce the cost offinancing the pipelinersquo (Christopher 2001)

154 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 154

Establishing partnerships with other members of the supply chain is one ofthe most critical ways in which organizations can develop a more responsivesupply chain This usually involves a rationalization of the supplier base as itis easier to develop closer relationships with a smaller number of strategicsuppliers rather than trying to manage closer relationships with hundreds orthousands of suppliers These relationships are characterized by synchronizedoperations and the transparency of information The Zip Project at Marks ampSpencer is an example of this new way of working

ZipZip is a joint venture between Marks amp Spencer and Desmond a long-standingsupplier to Marks amp Spencer based in Northern Ireland that was created as partof a wider plan to enable Marks amp Spencer to escape its well-publicized woes ofthe late 1990s The company had to face up to the fact that it was not deliveringfashion fast enough to the shop floor and its prices were not competitive Zip isdesigned to provide Marks amp Spencer with greater competitive advantage inthe area of childrenrsquos clothing through improved supply-chain managementMarks amp Spencer has made cost savings by changing its traditionalrelationships with suppliers eliminating areas of duplication and increasing thespeed with which its goods come to market Traditionally suppliers created thegoods and brought them to the buying teams at Marks amp Spencer who thendecided which goods had the greatest appeal Marks amp Spencer has nowbrought much of this design function in-house

Under the new arrangements Ziprsquos London office is responsible for thedesign work and fabric development while samples are developed inNorthern Ireland Samples are costed and different suppliers includingDesmond itself then bid to produce the finished garment The advantage ofthis approach is that Zip retains the copyright on the designs and theirmanufacture can therefore be shifted from supplier to supplier as required oras capacity becomes available ndash Marks amp Spencer uses 120 differentsuppliers in 28 countries Having greater consistency and control overproduction realizes savings that can be passed on to consumers The biggestadvantage however lies in the reduced amount of time it takes to get adesign on to the shop floor the organization can react quickly to thefickleness of pre-teen fashion Traditionally this process has taken 28 weeksZip aims to reduce this to 12 weeks The potential rewards are great aschildrenrsquos wear accounts for about 10 of Marks amp Spencerrsquos non-food salesworth between pound300 and pound400 million

Source Martin Waller lsquoMampS takes a fresh route to childhoodrsquo The Times7 September 2002

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 155

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 155

Another way of closing the lead-time gap is through rationalizinginternal processes The key here is to remove all non-value-addingprocesses lsquoValue-adding timersquo activities create a benefit for whichconsumers are prepared to pay lsquoNon-value-adding timersquo activities do notcreate customer benefit and are a drain on company resources One of themost effective means of creating a value-adding culture within theorganization is to focus externally on the value proposition that consumersare seeking Guinness achieved this in the mid-1990s by basing anoverhaul of its business processes on insight generated into what consumerswanted from the company

GuinnessIn the mid-1990s Guinness was one of the few large brewers not to own anylicensed premises (pubs and clubs) in the UK The company relied onconsumer demand to persuade its trade customers (those who owned theroutes to market largely other brewery companies) to stock its productsGuinness stout held sales remarkably well in a declining market for darkcoloured beers but in the early 1990s competition was heightened by thelaunch of rival stouts such as Murphyrsquos and the rising popularity of importedbottled beers Faced with the threat of more vigorous competition Guinnessundertook a review of its business and as a consequence set aboutimproving its performance in the marketplace

Guinness invested heavily in a brewery upgrade to ensure the quality of itsproduct but was dissatisfied with the results of its insight generation activitywhich revealed that consumers were often disappointed with the quality of apint of Guinness consumed in different outlets Guinness like other cask

156 Value Delivery

Figure 87 Guinnessrsquo lsquoPerfect Pintrsquo

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 156

beers is a lsquoliversquo product and needs to be stored and handled carefully Whereprocedures are not followed the result is an experience of variable quality forconsumers What consumers were looking for was expressed as lsquothe perfectpint in every pubrsquo

Guinness used this insight to inform internal decision making about whichprocesses needed to be in place to ensure consistent delivery of the perfectpint enabling them to create a cross-functional approach to businessGuinness worked with its partners in the supply chain to educate the pubtrade about the importance of looking after the product and serving itcorrectly This was a three-stage operation known as lsquothe pour the settle thetop uprsquo and it provided a focus for training in-house staff in pubs and clubs(see Figure 87) Consumers were also targeted with an award-winningadvertising campaign that extolled the virtues of waiting for a perfect pint Thiscoordinated range of activities based on a clear strategy propelled Guinnessto achieve its highest ever share of the total draught market

Source Presentation by Julian Spooner at Cranfield School of ManagementJanuary 1996

A third method of improving consumer responsiveness through supply-chain management is by maximizing the potential of each customerinterface The aim is to be able to capture information on probable demandfrom consumers as close to the final point of consumption as possible Areal breakthrough in data collection has been achieved by linking buyersrsquoand suppliersrsquo information systems through initiatives such as EfficientConsumer Response (ECR) Quick Response (QR) and Electronic DataInterchange (EDI) ECR an attempt to bring about more effectivecollaboration across all supply-chain members is most closely associatedwith the grocery industry where it is designed to integrate and rationalizeproduct assortment promotions new product development andreplenishment across the supply chain QR was developed in the USA tohelp clothing businesses compete against lower priced imports By takinga total supply chain view of an industry QR makes it possible tounderstand overall performance and the causes of poor performance and toidentify opportunities for improvement EDI a technology forbroadcasting demand data was the forerunner of web-enabled systems andis still widely used by larger suppliers

The advantage of systems integration among supply-chain partners isthat it enables the different parties to act on the same aggregate data in areal-time environment Each partner can gain a clearer picture of consumer

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 157

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 157

demand than they would otherwise be able to obtain independently andgreater consumer responsiveness can be achieved throughout the supplychain The benefits of such collaboration within knowledge managementand operational systems are especially important in developing keyaccounts4 as these normally command a higher strategic value

The importance of being able to act on real-time demand data becomesmore acute the more volatile the market This is particularly the case withsuppliers of fashionable or weather-dependent goods and services whosecompetitive survival depends on rapid reactions to unpredictable marketchanges For an organization like Britvic which markets and manufacturesits own brands such as Tango as well as canning and distributing Pepsi-Cola in the UK demand for soft drinks can double on hot days Insituations where the product has a limited shelf life or the organization hasan obligation to meet high trade-customer service levels stock-outs cannotbe tolerated Access to instant accurate and complete demand data iscritical to the running of flexible manufacturing operations that aim toensure constant availability Indeed availability becomes a more criticalmeasure of consumer responsiveness than productivity in todayrsquosmarketplace

While some suppliers favour a strategy of rapid stock replenishment as away of managing the amount of inventory they carry others follow astrategy of postponement or delaying the finishing or value-addingactivities until customer orders have been received The clothingmanufacturer and retailer Zara for example purchases a high proportion ofits fabric in an undyed (or grey) state On receipt of incoming orders thefabric is dyed patterned and finished by a fully owned subsidiary which isa supplier to Zara as well as to other manufacturers By working in thisway Zara is able to originate a design and have the finished goods in itsstores within weeks as opposed to the traditional industry model whichmay take up to six months

Advances in supply-chain thinking are driving the concept moretowards the notion of demand-chain management which is totally inkeeping with New Consumer Marketing (Gattorna 1998) By its verynature a supply chain focuses on making the flow of product from source toend user as efficient as possible In contrast a demand chain focuses onmeeting market needs in the most relevant timely and cost-effective wayIn other words a demand system sees the lsquopipelinersquo as driven from the

158 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 158

consumer end placing the emphasis on consumer responsiveness ratherthan vendor efficiency The differences between these two approaches aresummarized in Table 81

Table 81 Agile supply chain management versus a traditional approach

This third cell of the New Consumer Marketing model marks the pointat which the symbiotic relationship with the consumer is developed Thevalue that has been defined and created is finally delivered to themarketplace and exchanged with the consumer While the process of valuedelivery is contingent on the interplay of media and channels servicetechnology integration and the supply chain it is the role of organizationalagility that is of fundamental importance

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Organizational agility is an enterprise-wide concept that demands anability to change gear and immerse the organization in newopportunities on a continual basis

bull Media choice is to do with how the value proposition is communicatedwhile channel choice is about how it is transacted However at

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 159

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 159

[Text not available in this electronic edition]

touchpoints where consumers can be engaged in dialogue theopportunity for transaction arises leading to the interrelationship ofthe two as an integrated media and channel strategy

bull The goal of a multimediamulti-channel strategy is to ensure that theconsumer has a perfect experience across all the media and channelsused Each time the consumer comes into contact with a brand theyshould feel like they are talking to the same person

bull Service is an important differentiator in the marketplace The way inwhich service staff deal with consumers simultaneously creates anddelivers value at the point of consumption In effect the valueexperience is the brand

bull The recruitment motivation and retention of staff are key elements ina successful service strategy

bull Empowering employees takes trust and courage on the part of theorganization as employees are given autonomy to interpret the brandin a way that is both meaningful to them and their job and toconsumers

bull Supply chains play a major role in determining consumerresponsiveness and competitive advantage In the new marketplacesupply chains must become demand-led

bull Consumer responsiveness requires a supply-chain focus on theelimination of time rather than of waste Availability becomes the keymeasure rather than productivity

160 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 160

Seven elements of organizational lsquoDNArsquo make a demand system viable

Managing a demand system is fundamentally different to managing asupply system It requires turning the supply chain on its head and takingthe consumer as the organizationrsquos starting point and not its finaldestination As established early on in this book New Consumers aresophisticated and demanding and they inhabit an interactive rather thana static marketplace To succeed in this challenging and ever-changingmarketing environment organizations must adopt a value-centricorientation By focusing on delivering the value consumers actually needand want organizations can make the radical transition from operating ina production-driven to operating in a consumption-led economy

The New Consumer Marketing model (see Figure 91) draws onlearning from the living sciences and conceptualizes the marketing processas three organic cells of a living demand system Having discussed thenature and function of each of the three cells ndash value definition valuecreation and value delivery ndash in Chapters 6ndash8 it is now appropriate toexamine how the cells work together and what organizational elementscontrol and inform their performance

The way in which these cells collaborate to keep the demand systemalive and effective is dependent on the make-up of the lsquoorganizationalDNArsquo In biology DNA is the material that carries an organismrsquos geneticinformation such as that needed by cells to make enzymes Enzymes areimportant because they control the processes that occur within cells Theydetermine which chemicals are made in a cell and what the cell will do Theinformation about which enzyme to make and when has to be permanentlystored in each cell so that it can be drawn upon as necessary The

Demand System Management 9

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 161

relationship between biological DNA and enzymes provides a goodmetaphor for understanding the elements that inform and trigger whathappens in a market-driven organization

Organizational DNA consists of seven elements that fall into two typesthose that are people related (intuition culture and structure leadershipvision and values employees) and those that are process related (knowledgemanagement planning measurement) Each element carries informationto the three cells value definition value delivery and value creation Thisinformation enables each cell to optimize performance thereby ensuringthe competitive survival of the organization as a whole Operating aneffective demand system requires an understanding of the role and impactof all of these elements in order that they can be expertly managed Themain challenges facing New Consumer Marketing (to meet the needs ofbrand owners and retailers to embrace the New Consumer to develop realconsumer responsiveness and to arrest the crisis in marketing) reinforcethe imperative of addressing these business aspects in a systemic manner

162 Demand System Management

13

13

13 $

Figure 91 The New Consumer Marketing model

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 162

New Consumer Marketing breaks out of the binary thinking that has seenbusinesses swing between a focus on process and a focus on people Insteadit combines the two by identifying the key processes and relationships thatunderpin the organization and using them to help the organizationbecome as adaptable and competitive as possible

The seven elements of organizational DNA are

bull Intuitionbull Culture and structurebull Leadership vision and valuesbull Employeesbull Knowledge managementbull Planningbull Measurement

THE ROLE OF INTUITION IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

The mechanistic approach to management so characteristic of theproduction-driven era was based on rational systems that appealed to thereasoning skills of managers These systems were presented as if there weresome underlying algorithm for doing business Today management isabout engaging both our rational and our creative abilities Increasingimportance is being placed on corporate intuition and imaginationIntuitive ability plays a major role in demand system management bycontributing to the development of insight innovation and organizationalagility

In the definition creation and delivery of the value proposition thecapacity to instantly understand other peoplersquos behaviour thoughtswishes feelings and beliefs is a means of gaining additional perspectiveThrough intuitive understanding managers and staff can perceive thetruth of things without reasoning or analysis They can put themselves inthe consumerrsquos shoes and see the benefit of taking a particular course ofaction without needing any rational validation

Anthropologists believe that this capability is linked to the early socialdevelopment of humans particularly with our ability to interact with andinfluence others The ability of managers to understand mental states ndashboth their own and those of others ndash is known as Theory of Mind Theory of

The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management 163

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 163

Mind has been described as lsquoa start-up kit for learning about the mentalworldrsquo1 It is a kind of lsquomind readingrsquo which psychologists refer to asintuitive mentalizing Encouraging intuitive input in a demand systemstimulates innovative thought and a sense of empathy with consumersThis can lead to improvements in the market relevance of the valueproposition and thus enhancement of the consumerrsquos experience of thebrand

Most successful entrepreneurs have strong intuitive mentalizing skillsand they use these to put their lsquogood ideasrsquo about what consumers want intothe marketplace They are able to imagine what the value propositionshould look like and to marshal the organizationrsquos resources to deliver it Inheavily managed organizations this ability is often repressed Take forexample Woburn Safari Park part of the Woburn estate in BedfordEngland where the importance of intuition is fully recognized

Woburn Safari ParkAt Woburn Safari Park this elusive lsquosecond sightrsquo has been developed underthe leadership of chief executive Chris Webster Ten years ago the park wasin severe decline but a remarkable turnaround in performance has beenachieved through some radical thinking On the basis of gut feel the decisionwas taken to introduce a junior board of 11-year-olds to shadow the parkrsquos

164 Demand System Management

Figure 92 Woburn Safari Park

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 164

management board For the family-oriented attraction engaging the input ofyoung imaginations in strategy making was a wise move children of coursedo not hold back in asking the whywhy not questions Benchmarking visitsare made by the junior board to rival attractions and the childrenrsquos ideas areassimilated into the way Woburn Safari Park defines creates and delivers itsvalue proposition

Intuitive mentalizing is a very necessary ability in the delivery of serviceAs discussed in Chapter 8 front-line staff need to be able to demonstrateempathy with consumers if they are to convey consumer value in aconsistent and personalized way Where intuitive ability is lacking theorganization will have difficulty in predicting the behaviour of consumersreading their intentions and understanding their motives and emotions Atworst the organization will suffer from lack of commitment andmotivation to please The key challenge is to find ways of unleashing thepotential for corporate intuition Intuition is an ability not a function itmust be embedded within the organization and cannot sit isolated in onedepartment The development of corporate intuition lies in making it ashared approach to defining creating and delivering value and this canbest be achieved through the organizational culture and structure

THE ROLE OF CULTURE AND STRUCTURE IN DEMANDSYSTEM MANAGEMENT

Culture

Organizational culture is one of the most intangible elements of a demandsystem Its roots reach deep into the collection of beliefs and assumptionsthat are commonly held in the organization and its influence onorganizational performance is all pervasive Organizational cultureprovides a guide to acceptable internal behaviour summarized as lsquothe waythings are done around herersquo Culture therefore underpins a value-centricbusiness strategy

Trying to understand organizational culture can be as difficult for thoseinside the organization as for those outside it A useful tool for surfacingthe behaviours and artefacts that characterize a particular organization isthe culture web developed by academic researchers Professor GerryJohnson and Kevin Scholes (1992) This is shown in Figure 93 The

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 165

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 165

culture web makes explicit the rituals of organizational life ndash the dailyroutines that are often taken for granted but which all employees mustlearn when they join the organization It captures the stories told aboutpeople ndash the lsquoheroesrsquo and the lsquomavericksrsquo ndash whose fate symbolizes what theorganization is all about The culture web also notes the symbols thatconvey meaning within the organization ndash the use of logos the allocationof offices and car parking spaces etc

Depicting cultural aspects in this way helps in identifying themanagerial groups closely associated with the essence of organizationalculture a power structure that may not accord with the official companyorganigram The formalized ways in which the organization works ndash usingcommittees or working parties for example ndash also reflect the powerstructure and send signals throughout the company and its supply chainabout what is deemed important In many organizations there is anincongruity between the values that are promoted and the behaviours thatare rewarded A familiar example is the sales team that is told to maximizecustomer profitability while being rewarded on the basis of unit sales Theteam is tempted to offer discounts and inducements to customers as the

166 Demand System Management

Mythsand

stories

Routinesand

rituals

Controlsystems

Organizationalstructures

Powerstructures

Symbols

Paradigm

Figure 93 The cultural web of an organization Adapted from Johnson and Scholes(1992)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 166

overriding message is lsquomaximize volume rather than profitsrsquo Each of theseaspects that make up the cultural web can be characterized for anindividual organization As Figure 93 shows at the heart of culture is anunderlying paradigm within which the organization operates made up ofthe core beliefs assumptions and values that matter to it

Closely related to culture is the climate within the organization Thishas been summed up by researchers as lsquothe feeling in the airrsquo that one getsfrom walking around a company (Clark 1999) Organizational climate canbe created by employees observing what happens to them and what goes onaround them and drawing their own conclusions about the organizationrsquospriorities and what it values Employees then set their own prioritiesaccordingly about where they should focus their energies andcompetencies which in turn feed back into the organizational climateOrganizational culture and climate are therefore dynamic and sensitive tomanagerial influence Tesco is an example of an organization that hasmastered the management of these intangible aspects and used them toguide the development of a value-centric strategy

TescoIn 1992 the issue of organizational culture formed one of the foundationblocks of Tescorsquos lsquoFirst Class Servicersquo initiative which has since propelled thecompany to a dominant market position It represented a shift from thecompanyrsquos previous command-and-control approach to management Eachmember of Tescorsquos then 130000 staff was empowered to look aftercustomers in the way they thought best At the same time managers wereencouraged to recognize staff achievements and to set an example bytreating them as individuals so that they would in turn treat customers asindividuals This initiative was highly successful not least because staff weremade aware through internal marketing programmes that the averagepotential lifetime spend of a Tesco customer was significant amounting toaround pound90000

Source lsquoTesco Clubcard Foreverrsquo case study H Peck Cranfield School ofManagement 2002

There are however pitfalls in encouraging everyone in the company tothink in the same way which can easily happen when everyone is focusedon the same goals The danger is that the organization can fall into the trapof approaching every problem no matter how different in the same wayWhat is required is a management body that supports an innovative

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 167

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 167

culture one that encourages staff to think and respond differently but thatis nonetheless focused on the organizationrsquos vision and informed by itsvalues A value-centric orientation within the organization ensures thesedifferent ways of working are still legitimate Dell is one organization thatmanages its organizational culture very effectively

DellDellrsquos innovative culture supports risk taking and learning from failure AsMichael Dell says lsquoto encourage people to innovate more you have to makeit safe for them to failrsquo Dell achieves this by creating an internal culture thatquestions the status quo and encourages smart experimentation At Dellfailure is seen as a learning experience and is typically considered animportant milestone on the road to achieving success The nature of thebusiness means there is little relevant history for it to draw upon forcing theorganization to create its own response to the challenges it faces Dellmanagers also embrace an experimental attitude to decision makingSometimes it is not possible to wait for the relevant data before making adecision Under these circumstances managers are encouraged to make thebest possible decisions based on experience intuition available data and anassessment of risk

Source Amanda Hall lsquoThe boy who lived the American dreamrsquo The SundayTimes 1 December 2002 Michael Dell and Catherine Fredman (1999)Michael Dell (2002)

Tesco and Dell have used organizational culture as the basis ofcompetitive advantage Organizations that do not heed the importance ofmanaging internal culture effectively can fall prey to strategic drift andbecome increasingly incapable of self-renewal and self-determination Ineffect organizational culture determines business fate It is critical to thesuccessful implementation of a demand system that the prevailing culturein the organization supports and drives the development of insightinnovation and agility ndash the competencies that lie at the heart of each of thethree cells of the New Consumer Marketing model

Structure

The culture of an organization is embodied within the structure of theorganization Traditional vertical organizations which are hierarchicallystructured and functionally oriented work to optimize individual

168 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 168

functions at the expense of the entire business and the relationship with theconsumer Hierarchical structures work well when the marketingenvironment is stable and demand is predictable Now that the certaintiesof the production-driven era have been replaced by the uncertainties of theconsumption-led economy flatter horizontal organizational structures areemerging

These flatter horizontal structures enable organizations to be moreresponsive by speeding up decision-making processes and encouragingcross-functional collaboration which helps maximize consumer value andoperational cost-effectiveness Value-centric organizations draw keyemployees together in autonomous multidisciplinary teams to focusresources around value definition creation and delivery Often these teamsare temporary enabling the organization to combine and recombine assetsaccording to the nature of the opportunities that arise These are firms thatregard the organizational whole as greater than the sum of its parts

However this does not mean that organizations cannot grow big Tescofor example is one of a small number of organizations that has succeeded inbuilding the virtues of smallness into a large organization one that nownumbers around 200000 employees The company achieves this in partby having a shared understanding of what the business is aiming for Thisdraws from the companyrsquos clearly stated mission ndash lsquoto continually increasevalue for customers to earn their lifetime loyaltyrsquo ndash and its corporatevalues These values are embedded into the organization through a varietyof HR practices that focus on appraisal and reward systems

The strength of less hierarchically structured organizations lies not justin what they achieve as a single entity but in the power of the network theybuild around them through joint ventures strategic alliances andpartnerships This is the concept of the lsquoextended enterprisersquo and its successdepends on a new type of logic one that demands openness and cooperation(with consumers customers suppliers and competitors) The extended ornetworked enterprise places greater emphasis on the role of leadershipvision and values

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 169

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 169

THE ROLE OF LEADERSHIP VISION AND VALUES INDEMAND SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

Leadership

Leadership in organizational management is more important than everbefore in this post-quake business environment Businesses must aligntheir organizational philosophy and practices with the realities of theconsumption-led economy How an organization is led and managed inthis time of transition is a key differentiator in the marketplace Whilethere is no standard formula for what makes an effective leader NewConsumer Marketing demands a number of essential leadership skills2

First among these skills is the ability to engage others in the businessrsquosmission Leaders like Howard Schultz whose Starbucks business grewprofits by 92 to $1812 million on sales of $3 billion in 2001 have to beable to engage their employees in providing exceptional service tonumerous consumers every day Starbucks for example serves 20 millionpeople a week across 5000 outlets Key to achieving a dedicated workforceis the ability to communicate the corporate vision effectively to allstakeholders with a distinctive and compelling voice Internalcommunications form the most important part of this task and marketersare well placed to manage them as the essence of the internalcommunications process is similar to that of the external communicationsprocess It is also important for strategic reasons that both processes arealigned and marketers possess all the relevant skills for managing this

Secondly effective leadership provides focus inspiration and meaningwhich need to be communicated to everyone within the organization Themeasure of a leaderrsquos effectiveness can often be seen in the way he or shemanages this communication process Powerful communicators are goodat telling stories utilizing the potency of metaphors and language KjellNordstroumlm and Jonas Ridderstraringle the Swedish economics experts who co-authored the best-selling book Funky Business (2000) suggest thatlsquocommunicating a vision not only involves repetition and a carefullydistilled message it demands the ability to tell a story True leaders areCSOs ndash Chief Storytelling Officersrsquo

Senior managers at TGI Fridayrsquos restaurants have been telling the samestories for many years many of them based on the original stories told byfounder Dan Skoggins These work-related stories serve to convey the

170 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 170

vision and ethos of the company The lsquoemployee cloak theoryrsquo for examplesays lsquoYou were hired for your personality When you put on your uniformdonrsquot let it become a cloak and hide yourself behind it You are notexpected to be a robot in fact we believe our success comes from ourinteraction with the guests Work hard have fun make moneyrsquo

The third essential leadership skill required for New ConsumerMarketing to succeed is integrity including a strong set of personal valuesA sense of virtuousness is vital because organizational leaders become thede facto keepers of their companyrsquos vision and values In todayrsquos moretransparent business environment they need to be able to inspirecommitment among employees This will not be forthcoming whereprofessional integrity is lacking as a number of CEOs who havetransgressed the boundaries of honourable behaviour have found Carelessremarks made in public that appear to denigrate the companyrsquos vision andvalues may be seized upon by the media making the task of motivatingemployees much harder

Finally it goes without saying that business leadership demands anability to grasp the importance of the tectonic shift that has taken place inthe marketing environment This in turn implies a steadfast ability toweigh a number of factors and make appropriate decisions to ensure theorganization operates effectively and efficiently in defining creating anddelivering the value consumers are seeking

Vision

All organizations need a shared idea of why they exist and what they aremeant to achieve Vision and values work to support the organizationrsquosmission by providing answers to those key questions lsquowhere are we goingrsquoand lsquohow are we going to get therersquo Answering them becomes more of animperative in todayrsquos volatile marketplace This is because vision andvalues play an important part in realizing a value-centric orientation Theyforce the organization to think strategically about the long term whileproviding a framework for coping with turbulence in the short term Witha strong vision and firm values in place senior managers can delegateresponsibilities with more confidence local managers can get a clearerpicture of how to approach decisions and front-line staff can be guided incustomizing the value proposition for consumers

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values 171

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 171

The purpose of having good leadership is to create and regularly updatethe corporate vision and direct the organization towards its realization Inorder to provide unequivocal direction the business vision needs to beclear distinctive memorable motivating and meaningful to both staffand consumers Microsoftrsquos original vision was very strong (lsquoa computer onevery desk and in every homersquo) as is Disneyrsquos (lsquoto make people happyrsquo) andthat of the International Red Cross (lsquoto serve the most vulnerablersquo) The testof a strong vision is to see if people can recognize the organization from itsvision statement Many organizations either have no vision or have a visionthat is weak that is to say it is unclear too complex or simply irrelevant

It has been estimated that making a business vision work is 5 creationand 95 implementation Activating the vision starts at the top of theorganization and is a process that must involve all employees It is not untilpeople can see the vision in terms of what it means to them that it starts tobecome embedded within the organization This draws on the ability of the leader to communicate to employees the meaning of where theorganization is heading and what their role in this journey will beMarketers need to play their part by managing internal communicationsprogrammes effectively in order to support the organizational leadershipand to clarify and reinforce employee understanding Only then can visionbe translated into relevant and achievable strategies

Values

Values are a powerful and omnipresent part of organizational lifeAcademic researcher Milton Rokeach defines values as enduring beliefsabout preferable ways of behaving and a value system as an enduring wayof organizing those beliefs (1973) In the New Consumer Marketing modelcorporate values support the implementation of the corporate vision Theymake up the integral beliefs that guide organizational behaviourMoreover as their definition suggests values are not fashion items to bechanged on a regular basis values should stand the test of time SingaporeAirlines is one company that understands this well

Singapore AirlinesSingapore Airlines has six core values which support its mission statementlsquoWe are a global company dedicated to providing air transportation servicesof the highest quality and earning good returns for shareholdersrsquo Although

172 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 172

these words are rooted in operational and financial performance marketinghas transformed the airline into Fortune Magazinersquos most admired airline in2002 The key to Singapore Airlinersquos achievement are these core values (seeTable 91) which permeate every area of business strategy By translatingthese values into actionable and measurable practices within theorganization the company is able to build value-centricity and give realsubstance to its brand The airlinersquos employees see themselves as a part ofthe brand and this is reflected in their work performance adding significantvalue to the consumerrsquos experience

Table 91 Singapore Airlinesrsquo core values

1 Pursuit of excellence We strive for the highest professional standards in our workand aim to be the best in everything we do

2 Safety We regard safety as an essential part of all our operations Wemaintain and adopt practices that promote the safety of ourcustomers and staff

3 Customer first Our customers are foremost in our minds all the time We gothe extra mile to exceed their expectations

4 Concern for staff We value our staff and care for their well-being We treatthem with respect and dignity and seek to provide them withappropriate training and development so that they can leadfulfilling careers

5 Integrity We strive for fairness in all our business and workingrelationships

6 Teamwork We work with pride as a worldwide team to achieve successtogether

Where management action is not aligned with corporate values thevalues become meaningless as demonstrated in the fall from grace ofindustry giants Enron and Andersen in 2002 An organizationrsquos values arethe principles that the company abides by and is willing to enforce they arenot simply the words printed on the pages of company brochures It is allvery well drawing up carefully crafted values statements and codes ofpractice but these become pointless if employees are permitted tocontravene them Actions speak louder than words and an organizationrsquosvalues should be seen as non-negotiable minimum standards

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values 173

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 173

Business adviser and best-selling author Hugh Davidson pulls togetherthe role of leadership vision and values in his model of the lsquocommittedenterprisersquo (2002) This is shown in Figure 94 and is based on the formula

Committed customers + Motivated employees = Satisfied resourcefinanceproviders

Davidson believes that an enterprisersquos vision and values bind these threeconstituent parties (customers employees resource providers) byproviding future direction and governing everyday decision making andbehaviour Through vision and values the needs of the three parties arealigned and they are able to move forward together Davidson expressesthis through the use of a visual symbol that dates back to Roman times theThree Legs of Man lsquoWhichever way you throw me I standrsquo is the symbolrsquosaccompanying motto

Vision and values need to be embedded in the organization and this canonly be done by making them measurable and converting them intopersonal objectives for every member of staff Together with leadershipthey make up a complex but vital element in organizational DNAWhether or not an organizationrsquos vision and values are realized depends onappropriate leadership and on the management of employees

174 Demand System Management

Figure 94 The committed enterprise Adapted from Davidson (2002)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 174

[Image not available in this electronic edition]

THE ROLE OF EMPLOYEES IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

While marketers are confronting the shift from a production-driven to aconsumption-led economy human resource (HR) professionals are facing asimilar tectonic change as employees are increasingly perceived as anorganizational asset rather than a production cost This redefinition of therole of employees is a response to the decline in manufacturing and the riseof the Information Age which demands a radically different approach toHR management The role of employees is a matter of concern formarketers because the impact of an organization externally is tied to whatgoes on internally

The move away from manufacturing and the emergence of theknowledge worker brings in its wake a change in the asset base of theorganization As Peter Drucker says lsquothe most valuable assets of a 20th-century company were its production equipment The most valuable assetof a 21st-century institution whether business or non-business will be its knowledge workers and their productivityrsquo (Drucker 2002) Thisperspective forces a shift in the way in which people are evaluated withinthe organization In the manufacturing economy manual workers wereregarded as a cost which needed to be controlled and reduced andemployee management reflected this Employee productivity wasincreased through investment in plant and technology Knowledgeworkers in contrast are seen as a capital asset whose intrinsic value can begrown Their productivity is achieved in a very different way by placingresponsibility with the knowledge workers themselves The emphasis inHR management today therefore tends towards self-management andautonomy This ethos plays a crucial part in empowering staff to deliverbetter service as was mentioned in Chapter 8

The underlying assumption here is that unlike the manual workers ofthe production-driven era knowledge workers own the means ofproduction and enjoy greater levels of mobility in their careers thanprevious generations This is the thesis explored in the book Funky Business(Nordstroumlm and Ridderstraringle 2000) The authors write lsquoKarl Marx wasright The workers do control the means of production 13 kilograms ofbrain holds the key to all our futuresrsquo In their words lsquoItrsquos talent that makescapital dancersquo

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 175

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 175

Harnessing this talent means adopting a different approach tomanaging people Best-practice organizations whose thinking has movedout of the industrial age adopt the philosophy that they are in a more orless symbiotic relationship with employees and they create an internalvalue proposition to inform HR practice The organization employs peopleto define create and deliver value in the marketplace at a profit In returnfor their intellectual application development of potential and loyalty tothe organization employees receive a range of benefits

In the same way that the external value proposition described inChapter 6 is made up of component factors so too is the internal valueproposition It takes the form of a mix of two sorts of benefits andincentives There are extrinsic ones such as pay and promotion andintrinsic ones which lie deep within human nature Research shows thatlsquowhile traditional rewards and punishments can if ill-managed severelydamage motivation they have little beneficial effect under even the best ofcircumstances It is the fuzzier things ndash to do with feelings of purposebelonging engagement ndash that push people to do their bestrsquo (HarvardBusiness Review 2003)

Just as the factors that create added value for the consumer are those thatare mould breaking and have never before been offered in the marketplacethe factors that create added value for employees are similarly innovativeand special These key discriminating factors set the organization apartfrom competitors in the eyes of employees Occasionally some of thesedifferentiating factors may be lsquoadoptedrsquo by staff and become lsquotalkingpointsrsquo creating great word-of-mouth marketing for the organization as anemployer of choice Examples here include the free ice creams and picnicblankets made available in the summer to Microsoftrsquos staff at their Readingfacility the three-month unpaid winter holiday known as a lsquoBenidormbreakrsquo made available to older staff at Asda and Pret A Mangerrsquosmaternity package which includes pound20 towards a pair of maternity jeansand health spa vouchers upon return to work

The internal value proposition provides the focus for the full range ofHR practices These cover recruitment training appraisal promotion andsuccession planning as well as redundancy and dismissal In the lsquowar fortalentrsquo (Michaels et al 2001) recruitment is critical Best-practiceorganizations are looking not only for competency in prospectiveemployees but also alignment with the organizationrsquos vision and values

176 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 176

For many organizations the most effective and efficient way to recruit theright people is to encourage existing staff to introduce new employees

Once recruited into a best-practice organization employees participatein the acculturation and learning processes Whereas these two processesbarely made it on to organizational agendas in the industrial age they arenow seen as key to motivating and retaining staff Personalized andtargeted learning is offered on a continuous basis and organizationssometimes formalize this within their own learning institutions forexample the lsquouniversitiesrsquo run by McDonaldrsquos Disney and Unipart Othercompanies are working more virtually and taking advantage ofdevelopments in IT to create learning academies on their intranets Thereis also an emerging trend to provide non-work-related courses andopportunities to fulfil personal development goals Many organizationsrealize the value of providing benefits related to achieving a sense ofpersonal well-being such as sponsoring employee memberships to sportscentres and the provision of health services Team- and company-basedactivities that benefit the local community or charities also characterizebest-practice HR systems Expenditure on these less-traditional HRdevelopment activities is viewed as an investment in the organizationrsquosknowledge base and is assessed accordingly Ongoing appraisalspromotion and reward systems provide a further means of reinforcingdesired internal behaviours and attitudes

Where all of these elements of HR practice work effectively employeeswill be motivated and happy to stay with the organization This approachto HR management does not simply equate with paying them highsalaries as the winners of the 2002 lsquo100 best companies to work forrsquo show(McCall 2002) Asdarsquos experience is a good example

AsdaTop-rated superstore Asda has annual sales of pound97 billion and employs117000 people Salaries start at pound8833 In the 1980s the company reversedits declining fortunes by adopting a culture based on Wal-Martrsquos customer-friendly style When the Asda chain was bought by the American giant Wal-Mart in 1999 the value-centric orientation in both organizations ensured asmooth transition despite staff fears that the two cultures would clash Theunderlying philosophy is that everyone must be treated as an individual andstaff incentives are targeted to keep employee motivation high For exampleAsda recently introduced an employee health insurance scheme to cover

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 177

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 177

male cancers The scheme follows on from the companyrsquos lsquoWell Womanrsquocover which has had a 50 take-up Asdarsquos share option scheme will see the16000 staff who were given shares in 1995 share an estimated pound25 millionwhen their shares schemes mature Other loyalty incentives include a lawclub that provides Asda employees with legal advice for 10 pence a weekand a free investment advice service from Bradford amp Bingley Thesepractices have helped keep the companyrsquos staff turnover down to anabnormally low figure for the sector

Asda and other organizations that define create and deliver a valueproposition for staff that makes them an employer of choice base theirstrategy on a simple model that links employee satisfaction and retentionwith customer satisfaction and retention Research suggests that a satisfiedand stable workforce is more capable of delivering higher service quality at

178 Demand System Management

Figure 95 The cycle of success Adapted from Schlesinger and Heskett (1991)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 178

lower cost (Schlesinger and Heskett 1991) This leads to higher levels ofcustomer satisfaction which in turn impacts customer retention levels andincreased profitability This virtuous circle is shown in Figure 95

THE ROLE OF KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT IN DEMANDSYSTEM MANAGEMENT

In todayrsquos consumption-led economy brand owners and retailers areconcentrating on becoming more productive by managing their responseto consumer demand better They are increasingly switching their businessfocus from cutting costs to adding value A key means of adding value isthrough knowledge management processes As a consequence knowledgemanagement has emerged as a major business discipline It is driven byadvances in IT and growth in the use of the Internet which allowinformation to be exchanged across the world 24 hours a day seven days aweek all at the touch of a button Failure to adapt knowledge managementpractices to this continually changing environment leads to what ArnoldKransdorff (19992000) has termed lsquocorporate amnesiarsquo a phenomenonthat prevents organizations learning from their own experienceslsquoCharacterized by knowledge loss it stems from short memory selectiverecall and the flexible labour marketrsquo

In order to create differential advantage a business needs to master theflows of information and knowledge that exist within its organization andthroughout its value chain As Lew Platt former CEO of Hewlett-Packardhas often been quoted as saying lsquoIf Hewlett-Packard knew what Hewlett-Packard knows wersquod be three times as profitablersquo The aim of knowledgemanagement is to build a collective and dynamic corporate memory Thefirst step is to establish a process for capturing knowledge about theorganization and the marketing environment

There are two main types of knowledge explicit knowledge and tacitknowledge Explicit knowledge is the more tangible of the two Itrepresents the type of knowledge that can be captured in written or processform and easily reused The lsquowhatrsquo dimension of corporate know-how islargely explicit knowledge Tacit knowledge refers to the implicit andoften ambiguous knowledge that is acquired mainly through personalexperience It is usually context-specific and provides the lsquohowrsquo dimensionof corporate know-how Tacit knowledge is difficult to formalize and hard

The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System Management 179

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 179

to capture As people are generally better at talking about experiences thanwriting them down new techniques to capture tacit knowledge areemerging Based on the art of storytelling these techniques amount toformalized oral debriefings following important organizational events Thedebriefing process allows employees to create accurate records of how whyand when they performed their tasks It requires a climate of trust asemployees need to feel that they are not relinquishing personal advantagebut are adding to the greater gain from which they too will benefit Ittherefore calls for a supportive organizational culture and value system

Knowledge itself has no intrinsic value as its value comes from beingused and unlike other resources knowledge grows with use Extractingand exploiting the value of knowledge is a core competence withindemand-led organizations In managing a demand system the knowledgemanagement process should reflect the value-centric orientation of theorganization Knowledge about consumers and their wants and desirescompetitors and internal competencies must be captured and managed toenable the superior definition creation and delivery of the valueproposition As Professor George Day from Wharton writes lsquoWhatdistinguishes a market-driven firm is the depth and timeliness of marketknowledge that enables it to anticipate market opportunities and respondfaster than its rivals When this knowledge is widely shared it is a commonreference point and assumption set that ensures the strategy is coherentrather than a disconnected set of activitiesrsquo (Day 1999)

New Consumer Marketing is concerned with generating and exploitingfour kinds of knowledge The first is knowledge about consumers for thisenables the organization to define and create a value proposition that isrelevant and appealing to consumers These subjects were covered inChapters 6 and 7 Chapter 6 covered the generation of insight and makingit actionable through segmentation while Chapter 7 explored the processof value creation and the role of new product development brandingpositioning and pricing in achieving this

The second kind of knowledge used in New Consumer Marketing isderived from competitor activity Awareness and understanding of whatcompetitors are doing and planning can help in making strategicmarketing plans work Of particular importance is an understanding of theorganizationrsquos competitive position as seen from the consumerrsquos point ofview

180 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 180

The third kind of knowledge which underpins the functioning of ademand system is process knowledge In the New Consumer Marketingmodel this relates to knowledge about the three cells ndash value definitionvalue creation and value delivery The aim is to make the core process ineach cell more efficient and effective Process knowledge comes fromimproved organization of the activities that support the development ofinsight innovation and agility Tacit process knowledge may well be agreater source of advantage here than explicit process knowledge

Finally there is the need to know about IT and how to use it smartlySystems knowledge guides the application of IT in both externally andinternally facing systems Decisions made regarding the deployment of ITwill have a fundamental impact on the success of a New ConsumerMarketing approach

Making the most of all four kinds of knowledge requires anorganizational culture that recognizes the value of knowledge enables theformulation and implementation of a strategy for knowledge managementthat is tied to a value-centric orientation and creates a climate thatencourages the acquisition and sharing of knowledge Without thissupporting culture the organizational DNA is fatally flawed

THE ROLE OF PLANNING IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

Increasing turbulence in the marketplace more demanding andsophisticated consumers increasing environmental complexity and thespeed of technological advancement all raise questions about the wisdom ofsetting down in a plan the three- to five-year ambitions of an organizationHow can planning be of use when times are changing so fast Areconventional approaches agile enough to capture the dynamic complexityof the marketplace except in the very short term In the pre-quake businessenvironment planning was presented as an orderly and linear sequence ofsteps For many organizations it was a-once-a-year fill-in-the-box activityThe conventional approach started with corporate and strategic planningwhich covered the identification of corporate goals (including missionvision values financial objectives and shareholder requirements) All ofthis was distilled down into a strategic marketing plan that consisted of asituational analysis leading to a summary presented in a SWOT analysis

The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 181

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 181

Marketing objectives and strategy were then defined on the basis of thisanalysis as well as factors previously noted as relevant to the organizationThe fourth and final stage of marketing planning involved creating atactical plan setting out the immediate 12 monthsrsquo activity This approachwas a reflection of the makendashsell model that characterized the production-driven economy

The arrival of the New Consumer and the consumption-led economy hasforced organizations to rethink their marketing planning Business gurussuch as Gary Hamel are asking questions about how useful thisconventional planning exercise is when e-commerce has so dramaticallyforeshortened planning cycles His 1994 book co-authored with C KPrahalad Competing for the Future introduced the concept of corecompetencies and lsquoindustry foresightrsquo or the art of anticipating marketsand customers five or ten years ahead Some six years on Hamelrsquos laterbook Leading the Revolution (2000) places far less emphasis on foresightbecause of the fast-paced nature of market development Instead he advisesadopting lsquonon-linear strategiesrsquo to create entirely new business models Hisfocus has therefore shifted from foresight to continuous innovation Hisargument is that organizations need to make the critical shift fromstewardship to entrepreneurship they should lsquobring Silicon Valley insidersquothe organization and create internal markets for ideas capital and talent ndasha philosophy borrowed from the firms at the epicentre of the dotcomrevolution where success is based on resource attraction not resourceallocation

However in this time of transition and in the wake of the dotcomdisasters many managers feel that ideas are not enough without soundplanning As Professor Malcolm McDonald of Cranfield School ofManagement explains plans inform employees in all parts of theorganization (McDonald 1999) They are needed in order to obtainresources and support gain commitment and set objectives and strategyIn a demand system planning is an important element of organizationalDNA as it serves to turn the value proposition into a coherent marketingprogramme The aim is to create an ongoing process approach to planningThis assists in the delivery of organizational agility As John CoudronCEO of Yell the publisher of Yellow Pages says lsquoWe set ourselves thetarget that on any Monday morning I could walk in and ask to see anupdated marketing plan on a Friday So our marketing plan was being

182 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 182

continually refreshed to take account of changing customer requirementsrsquo(McDonald 2001)

This process approach to marketing planning is explained in more detailby Professor Nigel Piercy also from Cranfield School of ManagementPiercy writes that planning in this way is a lsquosource of leverage for workingon achieving market-led strategic change and actually making marketstrategy and marketing programmes happenrsquo (Piercy 2002) He seeselements such as corporate culture management style information flowsorganizational structures participation and so on treated as eitherinsignificant facilitating mechanisms or lsquocontextrsquo in conventional planningapproaches He believes these issues are not mere context but that they arethe process and that the way the process of planning is managed will havea direct impact on what goes into the plan and will determine the outputsHis advice to organizations is that they should focus on commitment andownership rather than techniques and formal methods as this is what willultimately drive the value-centric strategy and deliver the valueproposition

This holistic approach to managing the marketing planning processshould result in the creation of more than a physical plan It should ensurethat plans are achievable actionable and capable of being implementedthat they are owned within the organization and that they work to gain thecommitment of executives to make them happen A major benefit of takinga process approach to planning is that it should cease to be a once-a-yearritual and should instead operate continuously The planning processshould identify real information needs and become a means of sharingunderstanding of organizational strategy and challenging perceivedwisdom within the organization

For this to happen Piercy suggests an alternative model for managingthe planning process This is shown in Figure 96 The model identifiesthree process dimensions analytical behavioural and organizational Theanalytical dimension covers the techniques procedures systems andplanning models that essentially analyse and integrate data and thinkingThe process of managing planning is made more comprehensive byincluding a behavioural aspect to do with how things get done Thiscomprises people-related elements such as managerial perceptionsparticipation levels strategic assumptions motivation commitment andownership The third dimension focuses on the nature of the organization

The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 183

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 183

incorporating organizational structure and culture and managementsignals about what actually gets priority within the organization

Budgeting is the next step (following the creation of a plan) in makingthe planning process a reality Whether a top-downbottom-up or abottom-uptop-down approach is taken the budget marks the point atwhich the organization signals its commitment to a demand system byallocating the resources financial and non-financial that will make ithappen For Piercy it is equally important that budgeting is managed as aprocess that also takes into account the wider analytical behavioural andorganizational dimensions discussed in relation to creating a plan

Taking a broader approach to planning that assimilates these analyticalbehavioural and organizational dimensions naturally makes the planningprocess more complex and less easy to manage The danger of a poorlymanaged planning process is that it might result in a plan that is toofocused on analysis or one that does not carry enough information in bothcases leading to a plan that is neither achievable nor actionable Equallyvested interests may dominate the planning process causing limitedownership and commitment on the part of other managers and making itharder to implement Other planning problems revolve around a lack ofresources and organizational resistance to change It is therefore importantthat there are agreed measures of marketing performance in place and thatthe measurement results inform future strategy and practice

184 Demand System Management

Figure 96 A multidimensional model of marketing planning Adapted from Piercy(2002)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 184

[Image not available in this electronic edition]

THE ROLE OF MEASUREMENT IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

An important aspect of New Consumer Marketing is the need to address theissue of measuring marketing performance The model makes measurementa necessary part of the way the organization defines creates and delivers thevalue proposition As with the other six elements of organizational DNAmeasurement plays a role in improving the performance of each of the threecells Without an ongoing assessment of performance against specificcriteria the organization has no way of determining whether it isperforming well that is whether the processes at work in the three cells arebeing carried out optimally Performance results become an essential flow ofinformation around the demand system which serve to support the drive forinsight innovation and agility

Marketing measurement enables marketers to become more accountableAn improvement in marketing accountability would address a key issuenon-marketers have with their marketing colleagues Many senior non-marketers perceive marketers as being lsquounaccountable untouchableslippery and expensiversquo as confirmed in research using the cultural web(Baker 2000) The research results are shown in Figure 97 This view gives

The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management 185

Stories and mythsmiddot mud doesnrsquot stickmiddot golden childmiddot quick promotionmiddot no loyaltymiddot expensive

Symbolsmiddot carsmiddot office location(window)middot stats and terminologymiddot lunch

Ritualsmiddot planning and organizingmiddot delegatingmiddot deadlinesmiddot off-site meetings

Control systemsmiddot 9ndash430middot lunchtravelmiddot entertainingmiddot networking ndash for self

Organizationstructuremiddot lack of structuremiddot internal focusmiddot always in metings

Power structuresmiddot research withheldmiddot they must be rightmiddot jargonmiddot credit taken ndash ifnecessary

Paradigmmiddot unaccountablemiddot untouchablemiddot slipperymiddot expensive

Figure 97 Senior non-marketersrsquo perceptions of marketers

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 185

rise in part to the debate about whether and in what ways marketingcontributes to a business (as first outlined in Chapter 1) Improvement inthe ability of organizations to measure marketing performance would gosome way towards arresting the current crisis in marketing

Techniques to evaluate the marketing process are at present in anembryonic state and lack universal agreement This is largely because themeasures have not yet been developed fully and the organizationalcommitment to measurement is often weak or lacking Essentiallyapproaches to marketing measurement strive to find acceptable ways ofmeasuring both lsquohardrsquo and lsquosoftrsquo marketing data Hard marketing dataincludes sales volume and value market size market share and profitmargins whereas soft marketing data is less tangible and more judgmentalin nature

However a number of organizations are working with professionalbodies to understand how performance measurement can best beaccomplished Current debate revolves around metrics that linkleadership employee satisfaction employee retention customer satis-faction customer retention sales and profitability The emphasis on suchmetrics is driven by developments in customer relationship management(CRM) systems that enable organizations to measure and evaluatecustomer relationships as never before For example a growing number ofaccounting techniques are being used to measure customer value Theserange from historic profitability analyses through lifetime value calcula-tions to links with shareholder value and to the computation of futurevalue creation The aim is to find a measurement approach that accom-modates the wider interpretation of marketing

3M(UK) referred to earlier in Chapter 7 is an example of a companythat manages to balance marketing creativity without sacrificing financialcontrol (Bowman and Gleadle 2002) Its marketing performance isassessed by evaluating innovation in the definition creation and delivery ofthe value proposition Thirty per cent of annual company sales must begenerated from products less than four years old and 10 from productsless than one year old This distinction is refined in two further categorieswith new-to-the-world developments being looked upon as lsquothe idealrsquoversus the substitution of new products for old This represents an analysisof performance at a base level that can then be extracted down to smallersegments of customers

186 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 186

As New Consumer Marketing attains lsquomission-criticalrsquo status in theemerging consumption-led economy marketing investment is gainingincreasing attention from finance professionals This trend marks part of awider revolution in thinking about what kind of corporate assets areimportant in todayrsquos business environment Intangible business assetssuch as knowledge about consumers and markets and corporate know-howabout defining creating and delivering the value proposition areassuming new importance The race is now on to find robust methods ofevaluating and quantifying such assets for the benefit of corporatemanagement and the wider investment community

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Demand system management is about managing a lsquolivingrsquo system ofcells that house the key processes which drive insight innovation andagility and enable the organization to be responsive to the complexdemands of the New Consumer

bull There are seven elements of organizational DNA which make a demandsystem viable Each enables the three cells to optimize performancethus ensuring competitive survival

bull Intuition is the spark that enables employees to base decisions on anunderstanding of consumersrsquo behaviour thoughts and feelings

bull Culture surfaces in everyday organizational life as knowledge about thelsquoway things are done around herersquo

bull Leadership is about demonstrating an ability to engage others inachieving the organizationrsquos mission communicating the corporatevision and upholding the corporate values

bull Corporate vision answers the question lsquowhere are we goingrsquo whilecorporate values are embedded standards and behaviours that provideguidance on how to get there Corporate vision has to be created andrefreshed whereas corporate values endure

bull Employees today are valued as a capital asset and are wooed by aninternal value proposition that informs all aspects of HR practice

bull Knowledge management is about building an organizational memorymade up of explicit and tacit knowledge It requires an organizationalclimate of trust

Summary Points 187

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 187

bull Planning is an ongoing process that encompasses analytical behav-ioural and organizational aspects which extend beyond the physicalmarketing plan

bull Measurement enables marketers to become accountable and providesknowledge about the effectiveness and efficacy of the demand system

CONCLUDING REMARKS

Establishing the case for New Consumer Marketing as a business disciplineand presenting a framework for its conceptualization has been the mainaim of this book The fundamental argument for advancing NewConsumer Marketing is that a value-centric orientation needs to replacethe retention orientation that has dominated marketing practice for thepast decade or so The shift in the macro-marketing environment from aproduction-driven to a consumption-led economy means taking theconsumer as the point of departure for the organization and not its finaldestination In this dynamically complex new marketplace marketingpractice needs to be viewed as systemic and holistic By offering such anapproach to managing the definition creation and delivery of value theNew Consumer Marketing model aims to assist managers in developingand implementing successful consumer marketing strategies Thereremains however considerable scope for debate and for further research inthis important area

Feedback from readers is welcomed and should be directed toslbakercranfieldacuk

188 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 188

Chapter 11 Discussion of CRM in this chapter is informed by the work of the Cranfield

CRM Research Forum directed by Dr Moira Clark Visit wwwcranfield-crmorg2 Statistics used in this section are drawn from EIU Viewswire (2002)

wwwskillbasedfeegovuk wwwhesaacuk and Nellis and Figuera (2002)

Chapter 21 For more on the history and sociology of consumption see Corrigan (1997)2 For the background to consumerism see John (1994) For more on todayrsquos

consumer rights agenda visit wwwwhichcouk3 For more on the post-modern condition refer to the following academic

authors Stephen Brown (author of the very readable Postmodern Marketing) JeanBaurillard Bernard Cova and Maurice Holbrook

Chapter 31 The Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young research referred to in the chapter was

carried out for the Insight Programme (directed by Andre Klimczak) Visitwwwcgeycom

2 The Verdict research was reported at the Marketing Societyrsquos Retail ForumApril 2002 and in Hyman (2002) Other references for this chapter rely on dataand analysis carried in Verdict publications Visit wwwverdictcouk See alsoSeth and Randall (2001) which contains useful analysis of trends in internationalgrocery retailing

Chapter 41 For more on a post-modern approach to consumer behaviour see the

following academic authors Stephen Brown Jean Baurillard Bernard Cova andMaurice Holbrook

2 Treacy and Wiersema (1995) Doyle (2000) Capon and Hulbert (2001) andPiercy (2002) highlight value as the new key driver of strategy in marketing

Notes

12 Baker Endnotes FINAL 5603 245 pm Page 189

Chapter 51 Womack et al (1990) describe the concept of leanness See also references in

Chapter 8

Chapter 61 For an overview of meansndashend theory see Baker (2002) The key academic

paper to refer to is Gutman (1982)2 For an overview of grounded theory see Glaser and Strauss (1967)3 Discussion here and elsewhere in this chapter draws on Baker and Mouncey

(2002)

Chapter 71 The Dell case study referred to in this book is based on the following sources

(Hall 2002 Dell and Fredman 1999 Dell 2002)2 Background reference paper Bowman and Gleadle (2002)3 Taken from the Annual Marketing Society Lecture given by Niall

FitzGerald Chairman of Unilever in London on 19 June 20014 Taken from the authorrsquos PhD research For an overview of meansndashend theory

see Baker (2002)

Chapter 81 The agile supply chain is a concept that has been developed at Cranfield

School of Management within the Cranfield Centre for Logistics and SupplyChain Management This definition of agility comes from Christopher and Towill(2000) See also the work of Professor Alan Harrison including Harrison andHoek (2002)

2 Service blueprinting is associated with the work of Lynn Shostack SeeShostack (1987)

3 The philosophy and implementation of leanness as a management conceptwas set out in Womack et al (1990)

4 Key Account Management is a concept that has been developed at CranfieldSchool of Management and is most closely associated with Professor MalcolmMcDonald See McDonald et al (2002)

Chapter 91 This definition of Theory of Mind is taken from lsquoPsychology of autismrsquo a

presentation made by Professor Uta Frith at the National Autistic Societyrsquos 40thAnniversary International Conference London September 2002 See also thereferences to Theory of Mind made by Professor Jean Aitchison in the 1996 BBCReith Lectures published as The Language Web by Cambridge University Press1996

2 See Bennis and Thomas (2002) for an overview on what makes a great leader

190 Notes

12 Baker Endnotes FINAL 5603 245 pm Page 190

Allford R Evans N and Ward C (2002) A step forward in understandingshoppers using segmentation techniques presented at the ESOMARConference Consolidation or Renewal Barcelona September

Baker S (2000) What non-marketers think about you Marketing Businesssupplement on Better Marketing Measurement September

Baker S (2002) Laddering making sense of meaning in Partington D (ed)Essential Skills for Management Research Sage London ch 12

Baker S and Mouncey P (2002) New Consumer Marketing The implicationsfor market research presented at the ESOMAR Conference Consolidation orRenewal Barcelona September

Bennis W and Thomas R (2002) Crucibles of leadership Harvard BusinessReview 80(9) 39ndash45 September

Berners-Lee T and Fischetti M (1999) Weaving the Web the Original Design andUltimate Destiny of the World Wide Web By Its Inventor HarperSanFrancisco SanFrancisco CA

Booz Allen amp Hamilton (1982) New Product Management for the 1980s BoozAllen amp Hamilton New York

Bowman C and Gleadle P (2002) Culture as a dynamic capability the case of3M in the UK US Academy of Management conference paper presented atAOM2002 Denver Colorado

Brown JS and Duguid P (2000) The Social Life of Information Harvard BusinessSchool Press Boston MA

Brown S (1995) Postmodern Marketing Routledge LondonCapon N and Hulbert JM (2001) Marketing Management in the 21st Century

Prentice Hall Upper Saddle River NJChartered Institute of Marketing (1994) Marketing ndash The Challenge of Change A

Major Study into the Future of Marketing in Key British Enterprises CharteredInstitute of Marketing London

References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 191

Child P (2002) Taking Tesco global The McKinsey Quarterly 3

Christopher M (1992) The Customer Service Planner Butterworth-HeinemannOxford

Christopher M (1998) Logistics and Supply Chain Management 2nd edn FTPrentice Hall Harlow

Christopher M (2001) Breaking down the boundaries the supply chainmanagement process in M McDonald M Christopher S Knox and A Payne(eds) Creating a Company for Customers FT Prentice Hall Harlow

Christopher M and Peck H (1997) Marketing Logistics Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Christopher M and Towill D (2000) Donrsquot lean too far - distinguishing between thelean and agile manufacturing paradigms Proceedings MIM Conference Aston(ISSN 1359-8546)

Christopher M Payne A and Ballantyne D (1991) Relationship MarketingBringing Quality Customer Service and Marketing Together Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Christopher M Payne A and Ballantyne D (2002) Relationship MarketingCreating Stakeholder Value Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Clark M (1999) The recruitment and internal marketing domains in H PeckA Payne M Christopher and M Clark (eds) Relationship Marketing Strategyand Implementation Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Cooper R (1993) Winning at New Products Accelerating the Process from Idea toLaunch Addison-Wesley Reading MA

Corrigan P (1997) The Sociology of Consumption Sage London

Cross R and Prusak L (2002) The people who make organisations go ndash or stopHarvard Business Review 80(6) 104ndash112 June

Davidson H (2002) The Committed Enterprise Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Day G (1999) The Market Driven Organisation Free Press New York

Dell M (2002) Inspiring innovation Harvard Business Review 80(8) 41 August

Dell M and Fredman C (1999) Direct from Dell Strategies that Revolutionized anIndustry HarperBusiness New York

Doyle P (2000) Value Based Marketing ndash Marketing Strategies for Corporate Growthand Shareholder Value John Wiley amp Sons Chichester

Drucker P (1985) Innovation and Entrepreneurship Practice and Principles Harperamp Row New York

Drucker P (2002) Management Challenges for the 21st Century Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

192 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 192

Dyck W van (2002) Managing Complexity in Radical Innovation Projects The Needfor Paradigm Shifts Paper presented at Cranfield School of Management

EIU Viewswire (2002) The Decline of Manufacturing 8 March

Evans M (2001) Decoding competitive propositions a semiotic alternative totraditional advertising research presented at the MRS Conference 169ndash181

Fournier S (1996) Understanding consumerndashbrand relationships HarvardBusiness School working paper 98-018

Gates B and Hemingway C (1999) Business the Speed of Thought WarnerBooks New York

Gattorna J (ed) (1998) Strategic Supply Chain Alignment Gower Aldershot

Geus A de (1999) The Living Company Growth Learning and Longevity in BusinessNicholas Brealey London

Glaser BG and Strauss AL (1967) The Discovery of Grounded Theory Strategies forQualitative Research Aldine Chicago IL

Gleick J (1987) Chaos Making a New Science Viking New York

Godin S (1999) Permission Marketing Turning Strangers into Friends and Friendsinto Customers Simon amp Schuster New York

Goldman S Nagel R and Preiss K (1995) Agile Competitors and VirtualOrganizations Strategies for Enriching the Customer Van Nostrand Reinhold NewYork

Gordon W (1999) Goodthinking ndash A Guide to Qualitative Research AdmapHenley on Thames

Gordon W (2001) The dark room of the mind ndash what does neuro-psychologynow tell us about brands presented at AQRQRCA Conference ndash QualitativeResearch in the 21st Century Paris 18ndash20 April

Grant J (1999) The New Marketing Manifesto Texere London

Gutman J (1982) A meansndashend chain model based on consumer categorizationprocesses Journal of Marketing 46(2) 60ndash62

Hall A (2002) The boy who lived the American dream The Sunday Times 1December

Hamel G (2000) Leading the Revolution Harvard Business School Press BostonMA

Hamel G and Prahalad CK (1994) Competing for the Future Harvard BusinessSchool Press Boston MA

Hanby T (1999) Brands ndash dead or alive Journal of the Market Research Society41(1) 7ndash18

References 193

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 193

Handy C (1989) The Age of Unreason Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Handy C (1994) The Empty Raincoat Making Sense of the Future HutchinsonLondon

Handy C (1997) The Hungry Spirit Beyond Capitalism ndash A Quest for Purpose in theModern World Hutchinson London

Harrison A and Hoek RI van (2002) Logistics Management and Strategy FTPrentice Hall Harlow

Harvard Business Review (2003) The Best of HBR on Motivation 81(1) 8 January

Hertz N (2001) Silent Takeover Global Capitalism and the Death of Democracy FreePress New York

Hyman R (2002) The retail roller-coaster message from the high street MarketLeader (17) 46ndash50

John R (ed) (1994) The Consumer Revolution Redressing the Balance Hodder ampStoughton London

Johnson G and Scholes K (1992) Exploring Corporate Strategy Prentice HallLondon

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1997) Value innovation the strategic logic ofhigh growth Harvard Business Review 75(1) 102ndash112 JanuaryFebruary

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1999a) Creating new market space HarvardBusiness Review 77(1) 83ndash93 JanuaryFebruary

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1999b) Strategy value innovation and theknowledge economy Sloan Management Review 40(3) 41ndash54

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (2000) Knowing a winning business idea whenyou see one Harvard Business Review 78(5) 129ndash141 SeptemberOctober

Klein N (2000) No Logo Taking Aim at the Brand Bullies Picador New York

Kransdorff A (19992000) The other lsquovirusrsquo that is bugging industry MarketLeader (7) 27ndash29 Winter

Lannon J and Cooper P (1983) Humanistic advertising a holistic culturalperspective International Journal of Advertising 2(3) 195ndash213

Lauterborn R (1991) From 4Ps to 4Cs Advertising Age 61(41) 26 1 October

McCall A (ed) (2002) The Sunday Times 100 Best Companies to Work For TheSunday Times 24 March

McCracken GD (1988) Culture and Consumption New Approaches to the SymbolicCharacter of Consumer Goods and Activities Indiana University PressBloomington IN

194 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 194

McDonald M (1999) Marketing Plans How To Prepare Them How To Use ThemButterworth-Heinemann Oxford

McDonald M (2001) Getting back to basics the market understanding processin M McDonald M Christopher S Knox and A Payne (eds) Creating aCompany for Customers FT Prentice Hall Harlow ch 2

McDonald M Rogers B and Woodburn D (2002) Key Customers How ToManage them Profitably Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

McGregor D (1960) The Human Side of Enterprise McGraw-Hill New York

Michaels E Handfield-Jones H and Axelrod B (2001) The War for TalentHarvard Business School Press Boston MA

Mitchell A (2001) Right Side Up Building Brands in the Age of the OrganizedConsumer HarperCollinsBusiness London

Moir L (2001) Why managers and organisations must embrace CSR ManagementFocus Cranfield School of Management (17)13 Winter

Negroponte N (1995) Being Digital Knopf New York

Nellis J and Figueira C (2002) Is there a future for UK ManufacturingManagement Focus Cranfield School of Management (19) 19ndash21 Winter

Nordstroumlm K and Ridderstraringle J (2000) Funky Business Talent Makes CapitalDance ftcom Harlow

Pascale RT (1990) Managing on the Edge How the Smartest Companies Use Conflictto Stay Ahead Viking New York

Pascale RT Millemann M and Gioja L (2000) Surfing the Edge of Chaos TheLaws of Nature and the New Laws of Business Crown Business New York

Piercy N (2002) Market-Led Strategic Change A Guide to Transforming the Process ofGoing to Market 3rd edn Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Pine BJ and Gilmore JH (1998) Welcome to the experience economyHarvard Business Review 76(4) 97ndash105 JulyAugust

Pine BJ and Gilmore JH (1999) The Experience Economy Work is Theatre andEvery Business a Stage Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

PricewaterhouseCoopers (1999) Global Growth and Innovation surveyPricewaterhouseCoopers London

Reichheld FF and Teal T (1996) The Loyalty Effect The Hidden Force BehindGrowth Profits and Lasting Value Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Rokeach M (1973) The Nature of Human Values Free Press New York

Sawhney M and Kotler P (2001) Marketing in the age of informationdemocracy in a chapter in D Iacobucci (ed) Kellogg on Marketing John Wileyamp Sons Chichester

References 195

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 195

Schlesinger LA and Heskett JL (1991) Breaking the cycle of failure in servicesSloan Management Review Spring 17ndash28

Schultz DE and Lindberg-Repo K (2002) Building holistic relationshipcommunication programs in an interactive marketplace presented at theESOMAR Conference Consolidation or Renewal Barcelona September2002

Seth A and Randall G (2001) The Grocers The Rise and Rise of the SupermarketChains London Kogan Page

Seybold P Lewis JM and Marshak RT (2001) The Customer Revolution How toThrive When Customers Are in Control Random House New York

Shostack L (1987) Service positioning through structural change Journal ofMarketing (51) 34ndash43 January

Smith D and Fletcher J (2001) Inside Information John Wiley amp SonsChichester

Tapscott D (1996) The Digital Economy Promise and Peril in the Age of NetworkedIntelligence McGraw-Hill New York

Tapscott D (1998) Growing Up Digital The Rise of the Net Generation McGraw-Hill New York

Tapscott D Lowy A and Ticoll D (2000) Digital Capital Harnessing the Powerof Business Webs Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Taylor FW (1967) Principles of Scientific Management WW Norton New York(first published 1911)

Toffler A (1970) Future Shock Random House New York (out of print)Treacy M and Wiersema FD (1995) The Discipline of Market Leaders Choose

Your Customers Narrow Your Focus Dominate Your Market Addison-WesleyReading MA

Womack JP Jones DT and Roos D (1990) The Machine that Changed theWorld Rawson Associates New York

196 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 196

AA 24Abbey National 147Advantage Card 46agility

in supply chain management 159in value delivery 131ndash3

Air France 129Andersen 173anti-globalization movement 32Argos 46Asda 40 134 176 177ndash8Ashley Laura 77Autobytel 140

BampQ 48BAA 133Badai 117Bailey Christopher 125Barbie 115ndash16Barclaycard 46Batey Ian 118Bell Laboratories 33benchmarking 59betamax 113binary thinking 58ndash60Blair Tony 133Blockbuster 46BMW 105Body Shop 120Boots 44 45 46Boots Opticians brand 45

Booz Allen amp Hamilton New ProductManagement 111

Boston Consulting Group (BCG) 12Boston Matrix 12ndash13boundary-spanning role 98BP 46 120Bradford amp Bingley 178brand owners 64

concerns of 65ndash6key issues 37ndash42

brand repositioning 111 112branding in value creation 113ndash20Bravo Marie 124bricolage 87British Airways 147British Gas 24ndash5Britvic 158Brown John Seely 60budgeting 184Burberry 124ndash5Burberry Cup 125Business Process Re-engineering (BPR)

59 67

Cadbury 80Cadbury Schweppes 104 105Caldey Island 25call centres 139 149ndash50Callaway Golf 110Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young 37category killers 48

Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 197

category one segments 94Centrica 24ndash5C5 electric car (Sinclair) 113Chan Kim W 110Chanel No 5 122channels in value delivery 133ndash41chaos theory 58Chaplin Charlie 59Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM)

Challenge of Change The 10Cheers (television programme) 31Christopher Martin 154

Customer Service Planner The 142Clinique 28Club Nestleacute 150Clubcard 46Coca-Cola 38 118 123committed enterprise 174complex adaptive systems 58complexity science 57ndash8consumer churn 46consumer concept 24ndash5consumer confidentiality 91consumer marketing implications for 48

61consumer movement 25consumer responsiveness

developing 66ndash7through time compression 154ndash9

consumer rights defence of 25ndash6consumerism 25Consumersrsquo Association (UK) 25consumersrsquo indifference zone 128Consumersrsquo Union (CU) (USA) 25consumption

management 27 54ndash5in transformation 23ndash6

Cooper Peter 114core capability 52corporate amnesia 179corporate anorexia 67corporate memory 88cost reduction 41ndash2 111ndash12

Coudron John 182Countrywide Porter Novelli (CPN)

145ndash6cultural web of an organization 166culture 165ndash8Customer Bill of Rights for the

Information Age 26customer lifetime value 14customer loyalty 14 45ndash8customer-managed relationships (CMR)

17Customer Relationship Management

(CRM) 15 21 186failure of 1systems 89ndash91test of 15ndash17

customer retention rates 15customer value 14

database segmentation 93ndash4Davidson Hugh 174Day George 180Debenhams 46Dell Michael 107 153Dell 18 19 153 168Dell-com 153demand chain management 67demand system management 161ndash88

culture in 165ndash8employees in 175ndash9intuition in 163ndash5knowledge management in 179ndash81leadership in 170ndash4measurement in 185ndash7planning in 181ndash4structure in 168ndash9values in 172ndash4vision in 171ndash2

Deutsche Telekom 133Dichter Ernest 82Direct Line 139Directional Policy Matrix (DPM) 12discourse analysis 83ndash4

198 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 198

disintermediation 140Disney 139 172 177Dixons Group 45Domoco 117Drucker Peter 102 175Dunkinrsquo Donuts 32

easyJet 107edit choice in store 44ndash5Efficient Consumer Response (ECR) 157Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) 157email 135employee cloak theory 171employment patterns 20empowerment 59endowment policies 93Energy America 24Enron 173Enviego 28Ericsson 39ESOMAR 90ethnographic analysis 83 85ndash6euro 41every day low pricing (ELDP) 43evolution of marketing 12ndash17experience economy 31explicit knowledge 179ndash80extended enterprise approach 152ndash3 169

fast moving consumer goods (fmcg) sector10 12 38 40 41 80

Fetchmax 141First Direct 141Fitzgerald Niall 41 115Fletcher Jonathon 81focus groups 86Ford Henry 59 60Ford Motor Company 78 1194Cs 34 55 644Is culture 1454Ps (Product Place Price and Promotion)

11 23 27 34 55 64Fournier Susan 114

France Telecom 133Fry Art 107

Gartner 33Gates Bill 60General Electric 12General Motors 119genetically modified (GM) foods 119Geus Arie de Living Company The 60Gleick James Chaos Making a New Science

58globalization 11 38ndash9Godin Seth 52Goldfish 24Gordon Wendy 86 87

Goodthinking 87Grant John New Marketing Manifesto 114gross domestic product (GDP) 2 37 64

103Grounded Theory 82Guinness 84 85 156ndash7

Haji-Ioannou Stelios 107Hamel Gary

Competing for the Future (and CKPrahalad) 66ndash7 182

Leading the Revolution 182Handy Charles 59Harley-Davidson 30 123Hertz Di Noreena Silent Takeover The

119Hewlett-Packard 153 179Home Depot 139homoeconomicus 128human resource (HR) professionals 175hygiene factors 76

IBM 153IKEA 110iMAC 123i-mode 117ndash18independent financial advisers (IFAs) 140in-depth interviews 86

Index 199

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 199

infomediaries 140information technology 16 17 53ndash4 91

179 181role of 135New Consumer and 33

infotainment 32innovation

as a dynamic capability 107ndash9radical approach to 109ndash11search for 42through process or people 106ndash7in value creation 102ndash11

INSEAD 110insight in value definition 74ndash9 97ndash9Intel 57 133interactive marketplace response to 53ndash4International Chambers of Commerce 90International Red Cross 172Internet 11 33 53 57 135 179interviews 144intuition in demand system management

163ndash5intuitive mentalizing 165

Johnson Gerry 165Johnson amp Johnson 120Johnson Controls 104 105

Kennedy President John F 25Klein Naomi No Logo 32knowledge management 98 179ndash81knowledge worker 175Kotler Philip 26Krispy Kreme Doughnuts 75 76

Land Rover 146Landsrsquo End 18 19Lannon Judie 114Lastminutecom 133 134Lauterborn Robert 34lead-time gap 154leadership 170ndash4lean enterprise 153

lean production (leanness) 59 67learning organization 60Lee Tim Berners 60Legoland 46Levitt Theodore 31

Marketing Myopia 93Lew Platt 179Lorenz Edward 58loyalty cardsschemes 46 47 88ndash9Lucozade 98Lufthansa 129Luminus 24Lyons Maid 113

makendashsell approach 27 64 182manufacturing future of 39ndash40Mario Testino Exhibition 125Market Research Society 90market segmentation 94market share 14marketing

in crisis 10ndash11evolution of 12ndash17life cycle 16planning 182ndash4

Marketing Forum 11Marks amp Spencer 43 155Mars 111Mars Ice Cream 113Marshall Alfred 128Marshall Plan 24Marx Karl 175Mattel 116Mauborgne Renee 110McCann Erickson World Group 150McCann Relationship Marketing Paris

(MRM)150 152McCracken Grant 24McDonald Professor Malcolm 182McDonaldization 59McDonaldrsquos 43 46 139 177McGregor Douglas 59McKinsey amp Co 12

200 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 200

meansndashend theory 78measurement in demand system

management 185ndash7media in value delivery 133ndash41Menichetti Roberto 125mental models 87 115Metcalfe Robert 57micro-retailing 48 64Microsoft 60 172 176MIT 153Mitchell Alan 32mobile phones 33 135Modern Times (film) 59Moir Lance 120Moore Gordon 57Moss Kate 125MP3 53Mueller John 108Muumlller 112multichannel centres 150multinational operations 45multiple channels 44multiple formats trade cross 44multiple locations trade across 43ndash4Multiple Markets Model 15Murphyrsquos 156

National Farmersrsquo Union (NFU) 104Natsuno Takeshi 117Nectar 46needs-states analysis 86ndash7Negroponte Nicholas 60Nestleacute 41 150neuro-psychology 87New Consumer 27ndash33

complex lives of 30embracing 66experiences of 31information technology and 33marketing literacy and demands of

31ndash2response to 52ndash3time and 28ndash30

New Consumer Marketing 51ndash62 92114

definition 51ndash5meaning 55ndash60model 4 5 63ndash71 161 162

new product development in valuecreation 111ndash13

new-to-the-world introductions 112ndash13next-generation smart phone 135Nike 39 40 78 122Nissan 105Nite-and-Day 44Nokia 136ndash7non-traditional market sensing in value

definition 88ndash92using CRM systems 89ndash91using database systems 88ndash9using frontline staff 91ndash2

Nordstroumlm Kjell (and JonasRidderstraringle) Funky Business 170175

Norwich Union 140

Odeon Cinemas 46One Stop 44OneTel 24Open Plan Account 76Oracle 90Oreal Lrsquo 30organizational agility 5 132 140organizational culture 132organizational DNA 5 69 71 161ndash3

185

Pascale RichardManaging on the Edge 58Surfing the Edge of Chaos 60

Pearson 18 19Peoplesoft 90Pepsi-Cola 158personal digital assistants (PDAs) 135Petcareco Limited 148 149phantom factors 77

Index 201

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 201

Piercy Professor Nigel 183 184PIMS (Profit Impact of Market Strategy)

14planning in knowledge system

management 181ndash4Pop Idol (television programme) 19ndash20positioning in value creation 120ndash5

emotional message 121ndash2process 123ndash5

power brands 38Prahalad CK (and Gary Hamel)

Competing for the Future 66ndash7 182Pret A Manger 125 144ndash5 176price in value creation 125ndash9process knowledge 181Procter amp Gamble 12 18 19 96product life cycle (PLC) 12prosumption 18psychometric tests 144Purdy Lucy 26

quality movement 59qualitative research 82ndash6quantitative research 80ndash1 86Quick Response (QR) 157

Range Rover 146rate tart 53rational consumer 128reductionist approaches 59Reichheld Frederick 14Relationship Marketing (RM) 3 21 27

54 55 63ndash4rise of 14ndash15

retail branding 45retailers

concerns of 65ndash6power growth in 40ndash1response 42ndash8

Ridderstraringle Jonas (and KjellNordstroumlm) Funky Business 170175

Ritz-Carlton Hotel 143 144

Rokeach Milton 172Rolex 125Ryanair 129

Safeway 134Sainsburyrsquos 41 44 46 89 96 134sales growth 41ndash2SAP 90Sara Lee 39Sasser Earl 14savings accounts 93savings bonds 93Sawhney Mohanibar 26Scholes Kevin 165Schultz Howard 170Schwab Charles amp Co 110segmentation analysis 93ndash7semiotics analysis 83 84ndash5September 11th 2001 20service in value delivery 141ndash8Seybold Patricia 177Ps of Relationship Marketing 34Shearwood Michael 91Shell 12 60 80 119 120Siebel Systems 90Simon Herbert 137Sinclair Clive 113Singapore Airlines 118 145 172ndash3Six Sigma 59Skoda 98Skoggins Dan 170Smith David 81Smith WH 31Sony 117Sony Music 133Southwest Airlines (SWA) 141sponsorship 125staff

in demand system management 175ndash9empowerment 146ndash8motivation 145recruitment 143ndash6

stagendashgate process 106

202 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 202

Starbucks 170Stella Artois 125 138stock-keeping units (SKUs) 38StreetKa buyers 78supply chain in value delivery 152ndash9supply-chain management 5 67SWOT analysis 181Synectics Corporation 104

tacit knowledge 179ndash80tacit process knowledge 181Tango 158lsquoTapping the creativity of consumersrsquo 104Tapscott Don 60Taylor Frederick Principles of Scientific

Management The 59technology integration in value delivery

148ndash52teenagers 33Teletubbies 83ndash4Tennant Stella 125Tesco 40 44 45 46 68 134 147 167

168 169Tesco Clubcard 89text messaging 33TGI Friday 170Theory of Mind 163ndash4Theory X and Y 59Thortonrsquos 1403Com Corporation 573M(UK) 107ndash8 186time 54

compression 154ndash9refugees 28ndash30

Toffler Alvin Future Shock 18Toyota 153trade

across multiple formats 44across multiple locations 43ndash4

transaction marketing 3 55

Unilever 12 41 85ndash6 115Unipart 177

value-adding time 156value-centric orientation 3 55ndash6 57 66

68 115value concept 75value creation 4 70 101ndash30

branding in 113ndash20innovation in 102ndash11new product development in 111ndash13positioning in 120ndash5price in 125ndash9

value definition 4 70 73ndash99insight generators in 97ndash9insight in 74ndash9needs-states analysis 86ndash7non-traditional market sensing in

88ndash92qualitative research 82ndash6quantitative research 80ndash1segmentation in 92ndash7traditional market research in 79ndash87

value delivery 4 70 131ndash60agility in 131ndash3media and channels in 133ndash41service in 141ndash8technology integration in 148ndash52supply chain in 152ndash9

value-destroyers 77value-enhancing factors 74 76 77 78value evaluation of 127ndash9value-influencing factors 74ndash8value innovation 110value-maintaining factors 76 77values in knowledge system management

172ndash4Veterans Agency (VA) 132 133Virgin Atlantic 109Virgin Group 109ndash10 114Virgin Mobile 109 149Virgin One 109ndash10virtual call-centre operators (V-Reprsquos)

150vision in knowledge system management

171ndash2

Index 203

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 203

Volkswagen 138Volvo 59

Walls 80 113Wal-Mart 40 45 110 119War Pensions Agency 132Woburn Safari Park 164ndash5Womack James 153Woolwich Building Society 76World Trade Organization 32 119

World Wide Web 60wwwcarsurveyorg 53wwwfriendsreunitedcom 30wwwmoneysupermarketcom 53wwwsyneticsworldcom 104

Zara 91ndash2 158Zip Project 155Zyman Sergio 123

204 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 204

  • New Consumer Marketing
    • Contents
    • Foreword
    • Acknowledgements
    • About the Author
    • Introduction
      • Meeting the Challenges
      • Overview of the Book
        • 1 Earthquake
          • Marketing in Crisis
          • The Evolution of Marketing
            • The Rise of Relationship Marketing
            • The Test of CRM
              • Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment
              • Implications for Consumer Marketing
              • Summary Points
                • 2 The New Consumer
                  • Consumption in Transformation
                    • Expansion of the Consumer Concept
                    • Defence of Consumer Rights
                      • Consumption Management in Question
                      • A New Kind of Consumer
                        • New Consumers Are Exercised By Time
                        • New Consumers Lead Complex Lives
                        • New Consumers Seek Experiences
                        • New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding
                        • New Consumers Are IT Enabled
                          • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                          • Summary Points
                            • 3 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers
                              • Key Issues for Brand Owners
                                • The Force of Globalization
                                • The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing
                                • The Growth in Retailer Power
                                • The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth
                                • The Search for Innovation
                                  • The Retailersrsquo Response
                                    • Trading across Multiple Locations
                                    • Trading across Multiple Formats
                                    • Use of Multiple Channels
                                    • Editing Choice in Store
                                    • Enhancing Retail Branding
                                    • Developing Multinational Operations
                                    • Pursuing Customer Loyalty
                                      • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                                      • Summary Points
                                        • 4 New Consumer Marketing
                                          • New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it
                                            • A Response to the New Consumer
                                            • A Response to the Interactive Marketplace
                                            • A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management
                                              • New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean
                                                • Adopting Value-Centricity
                                                • Applying Science
                                                • Breaking out of Binary Thinking
                                                  • New Consumer Marketing ndash Who Is Involved
                                                  • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                                                  • Summary Points
                                                    • 5 A Model of New Consumer Marketing
                                                      • To Recap
                                                      • Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing
                                                        • Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers
                                                        • Embracing the New Consumer
                                                        • Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness
                                                        • Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis
                                                          • The New Consumer Marketing Model
                                                            • 6 Value Definition
                                                              • The Role of Insight in Value Definition
                                                                • Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value
                                                                • Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors
                                                                  • The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition
                                                                    • Using Quantitative Research
                                                                    • Using Qualitative Research
                                                                    • Need-States Analysis
                                                                      • The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition
                                                                        • Using Database Systems
                                                                        • Using CRM Systems
                                                                        • Using Front-line Staff
                                                                          • The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition
                                                                            • Creating a Segmentation Analysis
                                                                              • The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition
                                                                              • Summary Points
                                                                                • 7 Value Creation
                                                                                  • The Role of Innovation in Value Creation
                                                                                    • Consumers as Innovators
                                                                                    • Innovation through Process or People
                                                                                    • Innovation as a Dynamic Capability
                                                                                    • A Radical Approach to Innovation
                                                                                      • The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation
                                                                                      • The Role of Branding in Value Creation
                                                                                        • Building Successful Brands
                                                                                        • Emerging Brand Issues
                                                                                          • The Role of Positioning in Value Creation
                                                                                            • Drawing out the Emotional Message
                                                                                            • The Positioning Process
                                                                                              • The Role of Price in Value Creation
                                                                                                • The Evaluation of Value
                                                                                                  • Summary Points
                                                                                                    • 8 Value Delivery
                                                                                                      • The Role of Agility in Value Delivery
                                                                                                      • The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery
                                                                                                        • Making the Most of Media Choices
                                                                                                        • Making the Most of Channel Choices
                                                                                                          • The Role of Service in Value Delivery
                                                                                                            • Creating a Service Strategy
                                                                                                            • Recruiting and Motivating Staff
                                                                                                            • Empowering Employees to Live the Brand
                                                                                                              • The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery
                                                                                                              • The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery
                                                                                                                • Competing through the Supply Chain
                                                                                                                • Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression
                                                                                                                  • Summary Points
                                                                                                                    • 9 Demand System Management
                                                                                                                      • The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                      • The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                        • Culture
                                                                                                                        • Structure
                                                                                                                          • The Role of Leadership Vision and Values in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                            • Leadership
                                                                                                                            • Vision
                                                                                                                            • Values
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Employees in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Planning in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • Summary Points
                                                                                                                              • Concluding Remarks
                                                                                                                                • Notes
                                                                                                                                • References
                                                                                                                                • Index
Page 3: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System

New Consumer Marketing

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page i

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page ii

New Consumer Marketing

Managing a Living Demand System

Susan Baker

with

Margrit Bass

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page iii

Copyright copy 2003 John Wiley amp Sons Ltd The Atrium Southern Gate ChichesterWest Sussex PO19 8SQ England

Telephone (+44) 1243 779777

Email (for orders and customer service enquiries) cs-bookswileycoukVisit our Home Page on wwwwileyeuropecom or wwwwileycom

All Rights Reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system ortransmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording scanning orotherwise except under the terms of the Copyright Designs and Patents Act 1988 or under the terms ofa licence issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency Ltd 90 Tottenham Court Road London W1T 4LPUK without the permission in writing of the Publisher Requests to the Publisher should be addressedto the Permissions Department John Wiley amp Sons Ltd The Atrium Southern Gate Chichester WestSussex PO19 8SQ England or emailed to permreqwileycouk or faxed to (+44) 1243 770620

This publication is designed to provide accurate and authoritative information in regard to the subjectmatter covered It is sold on the understanding that the Publisher is not engaged in renderingprofessional services If professional advice or other expert assistance is required the services of acompetent professional should be sought

Other Wiley Editorial Offices

John Wiley amp Sons Inc 111 River Street Hoboken NJ 07030 USA

Jossey-Bass 989 Market Street San Francisco CA 94103-1741 USA

Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Boschstr 12 D-69469 Weinheim Germany

John Wiley amp Sons Australia Ltd 33 Park Road Milton Queensland 4064 Australia

John Wiley amp Sons (Asia) Pte Ltd 2 Clementi Loop 02-01 Jin Xing Distripark Singapore 129809

John Wiley amp Sons Canada Ltd 22 Worcester Road Etobicoke Ontario Canada M9W 1L1

Wiley also publishes its books in a variety of electronic formats Some content that appears in print maynot be available in electronic books

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Baker SusanNew consumer marketing managing a living demand systemby Susan Baker

p cmIncludes bibliographical references and index

ISBN 0-470-84482-5 (cloth alk paper)1 Marketing I Title

HF5415B279 20036588mdashdc21 2003007455

British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data

A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library

ISBN 0-470-84482-5

Typeset in 1214 Garamond by Footnote Graphics Ltd Warminster WiltshirePrinted and bound in Great Britain by TJ International Ltd Padstow CornwallThis book is printed on acid-free paper responsibly manufactured from sustainable forestry in which at least two trees are planted for each one used for paper production

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page iv

Contents

Foreword ixAcknowledgements xiAbout the Author xiii

Introduction 1Meeting the Challenges 3Overview of the Book 6

1 Earthquake 9Marketing in Crisis 10The Evolution of Marketing 12

The Rise of Relationship Marketing 14The Test of CRM 15

Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment 18Implications for Consumer Marketing 21Summary Points 22

2 The New Consumer 23Consumption in Transformation 23

Expansion of the Consumer Concept 24Defence of Consumer Rights 25

Consumption Management in Question 27A New Kind of Consumer 27

New Consumers Are Exercised By Time 28New Consumers Lead Complex Lives 30New Consumers Seek Experiences 31New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding 31New Consumers Are IT Enabled 32

Implications for Consumer Marketing 33Summary Points 34

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page v

3 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers 37Key Issues for Brand Owners 37

The Force of Globalization 38The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing 39The Growth in Retailer Power 40The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth 41The Search for Innovation 42

The Retailersrsquo Response 42Trading across Multiple Locations 43Trading across Multiple Formats 44Use of Multiple Channels 44Editing Choice in Store 44Enhancing Retail Branding 45Developing Multinational Operations 45Pursuing Customer Loyalty 45

Implications for Consumer Marketing 48Summary Points 48

4 New Consumer Marketing 51New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it 51

A Response to the New Consumer 52A Response to the Interactive Marketplace 53A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management 54

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 55Adopting Value-Centricity 55Applying Science 57Breaking out of Binary Thinking 58

New Consumer Marketing ndash Who Is Involved 60Implications for Consumer Marketing 61Summary Points 61

5 A Model of New Consumer Marketing 63To Recap 63Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing 65

Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers 65Embracing the New Consumer 66Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness 66Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis 67

The New Consumer Marketing Model 67

vi Contents

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page vi

6 Value Definition 73The Role of Insight in Value Definition 74

Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value 74Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors 78

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 79Using Quantitative Research 80Using Qualitative Research 82Need-States Analysis 86

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 88Using Database Systems 88Using CRM Systems 89Using Front-line Staff 91

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 91Creating a Segmentation Analysis 93

The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition 97Summary Points 99

7 Value Creation 101The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 102

Consumers as Innovators 104Innovation through Process or People 106Innovation as a Dynamic Capability 107A Radical Approach to Innovation 109

The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation 111The Role of Branding in Value Creation 113

Building Successful Brands 116Emerging Brand Issues 119

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 120Drawing out the Emotional Message 121The Positioning Process 123

The Role of Price in Value Creation 125The Evaluation of Value 127

Summary Points 129

8 Value Delivery 131The Role of Agility in Value Delivery 131The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 133

Making the Most of Media Choices 136Making the Most of Channel Choices 139

Contents vii

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page vii

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 141Creating a Service Strategy 142Recruiting and Motivating Staff 143Empowering Employees to Live the Brand 146

The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery 148The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 152

Competing through the Supply Chain 153Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression 154

Summary Points 159

9 Demand System Management 161The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management 163The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 165

Culture 165Structure 168

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values in Demand System Management 170

Leadership 170Vision 171Values 172

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 175The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System

Management 179The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 181The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management 185Summary Points 187Concluding Remarks 188

Notes 189References 191Index 197

viii Contents

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page viii

Foreword

Samuel Curtis Johnson first built his reputation as a maker of parquet floorsand then became better known for creating a new way to care for them Hislegacy was a company with a small portfolio of wax-based products whichevolved into the global concern that SC Johnson is today with its globalhousehold name brands such as PledgeGlade and Mr Muscle

One of the basic principles that has guided the successful developmentof the company since its founding over a hundred years ago has been thebelief that we must earn the enduring goodwill of consumers and users ofour products and services

Consumers make up one of five key groups of people to whom we believewe are responsible and whose trust we have to earn (the others beingemployees the general public neighbours and hosts in the countries andcommunities where we conduct business and the world community) Inparticular we are committed to providing useful products and servicesthroughout the world by

Monitoring the changing wants and needs of consumers and users Maintaining close and effective business relationships with the trade to

ensure that our products and services are readily available to consumersand users

Continuing our research and development commitment to provide a strong technical base for innovative and superior products andservices

With our strong corporate emphasis on understanding consumers andproviding them with what they want I found this book enormously appeal-ing because it offers a very clear summary of todayrsquos context for consumermarketing and identifies the real challenges facing those of us seeking toexpand markets market share and profits

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page ix

Susan depicts for us the tectonic shift that has taken place in theeconomy describing this as a move from production-driven to consumption-led In doing so she raises relevant questions about how marketing needs toundergo a consequent shift Most of the marketing frameworks wersquore alltoo familiar with emerged in the production-driven era and we have to askhow relevant they are in this age of the lsquonew consumerrsquo This is a consumerwho is active confident and knowledgeable one who looks for brandexperiences and whose life is being transformed by developments in IT

The marketplace before us is no longer static and homogenous andSusan links neatly into business trends that are being played out here Sheoffers a framework for organising marketing to deliver the value thatconsumers are looking for In doing so she draws on thinking from theemerging discipline of complexity science

This is a timely and relevant book Its stimulating content makesabsorbing reading for both practitioners and scholars Irsquom delighted to becontinuing an SC Johnson tradition of championing consumer marketingin robustly endorsing this thought-provoking work

Steven P StanbrookPresidentndashAsia PacificSC Johnson

x Foreword

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page x

Acknowledgements

lsquoWhy have you got so many books in herersquo asked my son Mark then aged five and ahalf years on entering my study at home one day lsquoBecause Irsquom writing a bookrsquo I replied lsquoWhy do you need so many books to write a bookrsquo he asked

It was a good question and I went on to explain that it wasnrsquot just the booksI needed as reference material but copies of academic papers notes ofmeetings with leading practitioners conference presentations seminarnotes copies of student projects and dissertations and so on and so forthFor the fact of the matter is that this book has emerged out of my years asboth a practitioner and an academic and a debt of gratitude is due to theeclectic group that has contributed to my thinking Working at CranfieldSchool of Management has been a particular source of inspiration and manyof my colleagues will find themselves quoted for good reason My work inestablishing the New Marketing Research Group at the School (visitwwwnew-marketingorg) has helped in pulling many of my ideastogether Irsquom grateful to Professor Malcolm McDonald for supporting mein this venture and to Dr Louise Humphries and Debbie Roberts forhelping me make the Group happen

In making this book a reality Irsquod like to acknowledge the patience ofClaire Plimmer and her team at Wiley the secretarial assistance fromHayley Tedder at Cranfield the creative effort on the graphics from JoannaEnglish and the help given by Marion Cooper with several of the casestudies Margrit Bass who edited this as I wrote it was always encouragingand the book has benefited enormously from her input

Finally I would like to dedicate this book to the three most importantpeople in my life ndash my husband Chris and our sons James and Mark Thankyou for living this book with me

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xi

My concluding words are again attributed to Mark He came into mystudy again a week or so ago and asked why the can of polish was sitting onthe floor lsquoBecause now the bookrsquos finished Irsquom clearing uprsquo I replied Helooked about and then said disdainfully lsquoWell you havenrsquot finished yethave yoursquo Proving therersquos nothing like children to keep your feet on theground

Susan BakerMay 2003

xii Acknowledgements

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xii

About the Author

Dr Susan BakerAt Cranfield School of Management where she is a full time member offaculty Susan specializes in consumer marketing in particular under-standing consumer markets branding and international marketing Shefounded and directs the New Marketing Research Group which workstogether with a consortium of client organizations to understand theimpact on marketing of the New Consumer (wwwnew-marketingorg)

A frequent keynote speaker at conferences and seminars Susan teacheson the MBA programme and works on a variety of management develop-ment programmes for companies across all sectors ndash consumer business-to-business and professional services

Prior to Cranfield Susan pursued a ten-year career in services marketingin leisure retailing from which she gained senior management experienceon both client and agency sides of the business in the UK and overseas

Outside Cranfield she was a trustee of Consumersrsquo Association for manyyears and has more recently become a trustee of Beating Bowel Cancer

She can be contacted at slbakercranfieldacuk

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xiii

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xiv

As a member of faculty at Cranfield School of Management I have metmany senior marketers over recent years who have become frustrated thatlsquomarketing doesnrsquot seem to be working any morersquo Companies are finding itharder to connect with consumers CRM systems that promised so muchhave delivered so little The conventional tools and techniques ofmarketing no longer appear to be relevant Added to all of this market-ingrsquos contribution to a business is constantly under question In effect thecertainties of the marketing environment have been replaced with theuncertainties of a dynamically complex marketplace

So what has changedThe answer is a lot The ground beneath our feet feels shaky because we

are experiencing the after effects of an lsquoearthquakersquo Almost imperceptiblythe economic plates are shifting sending tremors through the players(brand owners and retailers on the one side and consumers on the other)rearranging a landscape that had appeared static and immovable for so longEquilibrium is being replaced with a state of continual change anduncertainty In a variety of small ways the fault lines are emerging withsudden clarity We are moving from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy where the nature of the exchange is different and thisdifference is exacerbated by the force of the internet and e-commerce Thisshift is creating a number of key challenges for consumer marketing

These challenges can be summarized as the need to

bull embrace the New Consumerbull address the concerns of brand owners and retailersbull help organizations develop real consumer responsivenessbull lift marketing out of its crisis

Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 1

Companies are confronted with a new kind of consumer one that hasvariously been described as lsquoactiversquo lsquoknowledgeablersquo and lsquopostmodernrsquo Inessence this is a New Consumer a creature distinctly different andidentifiable from its predecessors For this New Consumer time is aprecious commodity in lives that are becoming increasingly complex Intheir purchasing behaviour New Consumers now look for brandlsquoexperiencesrsquo over and above bundles of features and benefits They are moremarketing literate than ever before and IT enabled New Consumersinhabit an interactive marketplace characterized by high levels ofheterogeneity which disputes the assumptions of conventional marketingthinking

Faced with this new marketplace brand owners and retailers are lookingto enrich and expand the strategic options open to them The growth ofretailer power is of particular concern to brand owners who have beenfeeling the threat posed by industry consolidation Further stress in therelationship stems from the continuing downward pressure on price Andadding to this is the force of globalization and debate about the viability ofmanufacturing Above all there is an imperative to balance cost reductionand sales growth

Retailers are themselves facing daunting challenges and first and fore-most among these is a long-term pattern of declining spend Over the pastten years the retail sector has come to represent less than half the percentageof GDP it used to command This trend varies across sectors forcingretailers to shift their strategies to remain profitable Other challenges havearisen in respect to the difficulties associated with acquiring a businesslocation and consumer expectations of price

The aim for both brand owners and retailers is to develop greater con-sumer responsiveness This means focusing on the demand side of theirbusinesses doing the same thing better or doing something new Toachieve this organizations need to connect better with consumers theyneed to get close enough to consumers to understand how to deliver thevalue that consumers are seeking in a continually adaptive and innovativeway Organizations need to learn how to work in the consumerrsquos lsquospacersquo

Finally criticism about the lack of clarity surrounding marketingrsquoscontribution to a business has been a feature of reports and articles overrecent years This is in part driven by the difficulties surrounding themeasurement of marketing effectiveness but also by the fact that

2 Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 2

marketing is both equated with business unit strategy and located withinthe marketing mix Without a clear emphasis as to its role marketinglanguishes in a lsquono manrsquos landrsquo and is badly placed to provide strategicleadership

MEETING THE CHALLENGES

Meeting these challenges head on requires a different way ofconceptualizing the marketing process and a different approach toimplementation This book proposes the adoption of a value-centricapproach to marketing and connecting with the new science of complexityto enable business to find a way of surviving in the face of continual change

As the practice of marketing has evolved in response to market con-ditions the underlying philosophy of a business in relation to the customersit serves has shifted Transaction marketing was based on a sales orientationwith the aim of acquiring as many new customers as possible Profit wasgenerated through increased sales volume Relationship Marketing thenswitched the emphasis to developing greater profitability through customersatisfaction underpinned by a retention orientation The realities of theconsumption-led economy demand that the focus of a business shifts againto consumer responsiveness based on superior processes of insight innova-tion and agility to achieve profitability This means replacing the focus oncustomer retention with a value-centric orientation

A value-centric orientation means delivering the value consumers wantto buy into and the organization wants to deliver that is value on theconsumerrsquos terms as demanded and maybe even dictated by them This valuecomponent marks the process of exchange that takes place between theconsumer and the organization it is the lsquothingrsquo that consumers get inreturn for what they give It means moving beyond a relationship emphasisto one that has at its core the definition creation and delivery of value If anorganization can meet the value expectations of the consumer then a long-term and profitable relationship is more likely to follow The key is havingvalue as the starting point otherwise the relationship developmentstrategy (and the CRM tools perhaps used to deliver it) will not work asintended

This however is not sufficient on its own to make marketing moreeffective Organizations need to reconceptualize the marketing process to

Meeting the Challenges 3

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 3

take account of the dynamically complex new marketplace Business needsto learn how to understand complexity and find ways of respondingdynamically to change This is where marketing connects with the newscience of complexity The appeal of this to business theorists is that itprovides a way of thinking about how the underlying processes andrelationships in a company can be organized to survive in the face ofcontinual change

New Consumer Marketing emerges at the confluence of these twostreams of thinking ndash the evolving discipline of marketing and the scienceof complexity New Consumer Marketing is therefore different from theprevailing marketing paradigm It is a business discipline that enables theorganization to master the increasingly dynamic and complex process ofgoing to market in a systemic and holistic way It provides managers witha means of identifying and mobilizing people and processes to help thembecome as adaptive and creative as possible against the background of acomplex marketing environment

The New Consumer Marketing model is presented in Figure 01 and itshows quite clearly how consumer marketing can be conceptualized asconsisting of the three key processes underpinned by a value-centric orienta-tion The model is organic in nature reflected in the use of honeycomb-shaped cells each of which has a nucleus The model encourages the synergyof emphasizing both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo enabling organizations to breakout of the binary thinking that has long constrained management theory Inshort the static marketing function of the production-driven economybecomes a living demand system in the consumption-led economy leavingbehind the mechanistic approaches of the former era

The first cell in the demand system is concerned with the process of valuedefinition that is the process of generating and identifying insight inorder to describe and demonstrate value This covers both traditional andnon-traditional ways of generating insight and the process of turning thatinsight into something actionable through segmentation

The next cell is concerned with the process of value creation Innovationforms the nucleus of this cell and is of strategic significance Other sub-processes include new product development branding positioning andpricing

The third key process in a demand system is value delivery This is to dowith how value is communicated and conveyed by an organization to a

4 Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 4

specific audience Media and channels obviously play a role alongsideservice technology integration and supply-chain management Thewatchword here is organizational agility

The seven elements needed to make a demand system viable aredescribed as the organizational DNA The interrelationships of intuitionculture and structure leadership vision and values employees knowledgemanagement planning and measurement work within the cells tooptimize performance and ensure competitive survival

The New Consumer Marketing model therefore lifts marketing out ofits crisis in terms of presenting a conceptual guide for practitioners forgenerating and managing the exchange process under conditions ofcompetition The model provides a framework that enables an organizationto describe and position its marketing strategy In doing this it identifiesthe consumer segments it seeks to serve determining where and how itwill compete

Meeting the Challenges 5

Figure 01 The New Consumer Marketing model

13

13

13 $

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 5

OVERVIEW OF THE BOOK

The structure of this book is outlined below

Figure 02 Structure of the book

6 Introduction

A

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 6

Chapter 1 provides an overview of the changing competitive landscapeand places marketing within the business context Chapter 2 describes theprofile of New Consumers highlighting the challenges they pose tobusiness Chapter 3 then explores the concerns of brand owners andretailers who in the face of change must meet these challenges in order tosurvive

Chapter 4 introduces New Consumer Marketing as an emergingbusiness discipline New Consumer Marketing is not simply another wayof managing the marketing mix but a viable means of addressing the rangeof issues that enable an organization to compete successfully in a particularmarket Its key objective is to help the organization establish sustainablecompetitive advantage by means of superior performance High levels ofperformance are achieved and maintained through the processes of valuedefinition value creation and value delivery

A framework for conceptualizing New Consumer Marketing as themanagement of a demand system is presented in Chapter 5 Chapters 6 7and 8 then focus on each of the three key processes that form the workinglsquocellsrsquo of the New Consumer Marketing model value definition valuecreation and value delivery The concluding chapter Chapter 9 identifiesthe elements that make up the organizational DNA ndash the genetic code thatdrives the cellsrsquo performance and determines the overall success of thedemand system

References to source material and Notes on further reading are to befound at the back of the book

Overview of the Book 7

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 7

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 8

The current crisis in marketing is underscored by profound change in themarketing environment

A new marketplace is emerging and bringing with it a host of challengesnever before encountered For marketers this event is both exciting andunnerving opportunities for innovation and growth parallel threats toproven methodologies and the status quo The challenges posed by thechanging competitive arena are not restricted to a particular industry orsector but span the gamut of enterprises operating today All businessesare being affected to some degree by the root-and-branch upheaval that isoccurring in the wider marketing environment At the start of the thirdmillennium a paradigm shift in commerce is clear we have moved from aproduction-driven to a consumption-led economy

While the forces of demand and supply continue to regulate theeconomy the nature of the exchange has altered beyond all recognitionThe lsquothem and usrsquo adversarial approach to trade is giving way to consumerinvolvement in all aspects of product and service development anddelivery Supplying organizations use increasingly clever methods to wooconsumer loyalty and maintain competitive edge High-powered anddynamic data technology helps produce finely tuned marketing strategieswhich can be implemented on a one-to-one basis through an ever-expanding choice of traditional and electronic media Customers andconsumers exploit this greater access to information and the ability toachieve dialogue with suppliers exercising their new found empowermentby increasingly leveraging sales propositions in their own favour Theresult is a mutually influenced beneficial interaction

Earthquake 1

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 9

This radical transition in the way commercial transactions areconducted is evident no more so than in the rise of the buyerndashsellerrelationship Managing an ongoing relationship is an entirely differentmatter to managing a single transaction and the challenge for marketerstoday is compounded by the growing complexity of the context in which ittakes place Marketing especially consumer marketing faces a dauntingprospect quickly undergo profound change or prepare for certain death

MARKETING IN CRISIS

hellip there was a moment of pregnant stillness then a sibilant whisper a sort offaint seismic exhalation and then the world lurched

Ben Macintyre The Times 23 March 2002

This is the description a journalist gave after experiencing a majorearthquake If one had been listening in the mid-1990s they would haveheard similar rumblings throughout the marketing profession An articlepublished in the McKinsey Quarterly in 1993 claimed lsquoMany consumergoods CEOs are beginning to think that marketing is no longerdeliveringrsquo suggesting that lsquomarketers are simply not picking up the rightsignals any morersquo A Coopers amp Lybrand survey of the same year foundcomparable consensus among senior executives within fast movingconsumer goods (fmcg) retail and service sector organizations Quotingtheir non-marketing managers respondents expressed concern about therole and value of marketing lsquoMarketing is increasingly living a lie in myorganizationrsquo lsquoIf marketing departments disappeared would anybodynotice Would it really matterrsquo

A growing number of articles on the subject of marketing then appearedin the media stimulating debate among academics and practitioners as towhether or not this lsquobad pressrsquo was warranted In late 1993 the UKrsquosChartered Institute of Marketing (CIM) commissioned a report on thefuture of marketing in key British enterprises (Chartered Institute ofMarketing 1994) Boldly entitled The Challenge of Change the CIMinvestigation into marketingrsquos performance and promise delivered mixedtidings A multitude of research reports and commentaries from precedingdecades as well as the then current clutch revealed that marketing was set tobecome increasingly relevant and strategically important as a managementfunction but that it remained on the whole poorly executed in Britain

10 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 10

The last decade of the twentieth century was symbolically brought to aclose with a decisive report by the Marketing Forum the UKrsquos leadingauthority on the role and status of marketing With the objectives ofidentifying the key drivers and core responsibilities of the marketingdiscipline the report sought to address the growing unease amongmarketers Original research attempted to answer the following questions

In the post-dotcom boom what are the new drivers of marketing focus How does the arrival of the information era affect how we as marketers

operate What is our remit now and what new responsibilities can we expect to

assume in future

From the strength of response the message was clear the conventionaltools of marketing were no longer applicable and there was a pressing needfor fresh thinking The research showed that marketing appeared to belosing its way thrown off course by the myriad of unprecedented pressuresand developments in the now global marketplace It was felt that the futureof marketing if there was to be one rested firmly on the adoption of newapproaches and new attitudes While the underlying principles ofmarketing remained for the most part intact the practical tools andtechniques employed required radical revision

Traditional marketing devices such as the 4Ps (product place price andpromotion) had emerged in the production-driven era of the 1950sndash1970sThe subsequent globalization of market activity and explosion in theavailability and use of new-wave technologies particularly the Internet toname but two key drivers of change turned the existing business premiseon its head Instead of being the focus of persuasion to buy what producerswished to produce consumers became the focus of production itself theycould influence to a great extent the nature of products Business prosperityrelied on retaining valuable customer relationships not revving theengines of production

To grasp the full weight of this seismic shift in the rules of commercialengagement it is useful to look back briefly at the development ofmarketing as an established management discipline Its evolution issuffused with hard lessons and valuable learning Only by understandingmarketingrsquos role at different points in time can we anchor the debate aboutits future in a meaningful context

Marketing in Crisis 11

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 11

THE EVOLUTION OF MARKETING

While the application of marketing has existed since people first tradedwith one another its emergence as a distinct business discipline hashappened relatively recently in the period between the First and SecondWorld Wars In the UK for example modern-day marketing becamesynonymous with brand marketing as practised in the 1950s and 1960s byfmcg companies such as Unilever and Procter amp Gamble Marketing stoodfor a business philosophy based on meeting the needs of customers andcreating sustainable competitive advantage It was supported by a businessfunction bearing the same name

Marketers drew on an operational framework rooted in the 4Ps and themost knowledgeable had at their disposal an expanding toolbox ofconceptual diagnostic and predictive tools It is worth considering some ofthese briefly to appreciate marketingrsquos integral role The product life cycle(PLC) introduced in 1950 promulgated the notion that products passthrough typical phases from lsquolaunchrsquo to lsquomaturityrsquo to lsquodeclinersquo and finallylsquoexitrsquo from the marketplace The PLC was followed by a range of modelsdeveloped by rival management consultancies such as the BostonConsulting Group (BCG) and McKinsey amp Co to aid the marketer in themanagement of both single products and product portfolios The mostenduring of these analytical devices are BCGrsquos Boston Matrix andMcKinseyrsquos Directional Policy Matrix (DPM) designed in conjunctionwith General Electric in the USA and Shell in Europe

The four-box Boston Matrix (see Figure 11a) considered products interms of their relative market share and market growth rate It held thatthe perfect conglomerate needed a mix of three types of product Profitfrom the steady earners (lsquocash cowsrsquo) could be used to invest in productswith huge growth potential (lsquostarsrsquo) and underwrite those underdevelopment (lsquoquestion marksrsquo) The fourth quadrant of the matrix wasallocated to product failures (lsquodogsrsquo) whose poor performance or excessivecash consumption justifies their being discarded altogether The DPM (seeFigure 11b) expanded the number of variables used in the Boston Matrixadding market attractiveness and business strengths in order to analyseproduct performance in greater depth

As marketing tools and techniques aimed at understanding productbehaviour became more refined the need to understand consumer

12 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 12

behaviour became more pronounced Demand in consumer markets in the1950s and 1960s was buoyant due to rising levels of disposable income andthe influence of new forms of communication notably televisionMarketing was harnessed as a means of persuading masses of consumers tobuy what was manufactured and the lsquomakendashsellrsquo philosophy of businessestablished itself as consonant with the production-driven era

The guiding principle for developing mass consumer markets was toacquire ever-greater numbers of consumers and take maximum market share

The Evolution of Marketing 13

Figure 11 (a) The Boston Matrix and (b) the Directional Policy Matrix

lsquoStarsrsquo

A selected few

lsquoCash cowsrsquo lsquoDogsrsquo

lsquoQuestion marksrsquo

Marketgrowthshare

Relative competitive position (market share)

Remainder

divested

Liquidated

(a)

(b)

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 13

This strategy was underpinned by research from PIMS (Profit Impact ofMarket Strategy) which showed that the greater the market share achievedthe bigger the profits that would accrue to the company The pace and scopeof mass marketing were set by the American consumer goods giants forwhom the market appeared to be an ever-climbing sales curve until theworld was jolted out of this misapprehension by a series of oil crises in the1970s The consequent international economic downturn followed by highinflation at home had a serious impact on consumers Consumer spendinghabits displayed prudence and sophistication in much larger measure

The Rise of Relationship Marketing

Supplying organizations responded to the constrained economicenvironment of the 1970s by re-examining what they were offering tocustomers To increase product appeal differentiation and value formoney many augmented their product offerings by incorporating a serviceelement This spawned the development of services marketing as a businessfunction In mature markets where the rate of growth had slowed or evenstopped it became more difficult for organizations to pursue a strategy ofgaining market share With the pool of new prospects diminishedmarketing attention steered towards retaining and growing existingcustomer relationships Consequently lsquocustomer loyaltyrsquo achievedpriority and its prime strategic importance remains to this day

The shift in marketing emphasis from customer acquisition to customerretention became enshrined in the principles of Relationship Marketing(RM) RM unlike transaction marketing recognizes that commercialtransactions are not isolated events but that they take place within a liveand continuous context of engagement ndash a lsquorelationshiprsquo between buyerand seller Underpinning the idea of an enduring and potentiallylsquogrowablersquo relationship with a customer is the concept of customer valuethat is the customer has an intrinsic and dynamic value to the supplyingorganization and vice versa

Measures of marketing success then turned from numbers of customers(market share) to share of customer expenditure (share of lsquowalletrsquo) andpotential customer value (customer lifetime value) The work of Bainconsultants Frederick Reichheld and Earl Sasser was seminal indemonstrating the large impact on profitability of small increases in

14 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 14

customer retention rates Further research by Reichheld and Teal (1996)showing the increasing profitability of customers the longer therelationship lasts added strength to the argument for a relationshipmarketing approach

Issues surrounding RM implementation were less clear and businesstheorists usually advocated relationship building via the identification of anumber of key groups or market domains For example the MultipleMarkets Model developed by Christopher Payne and Ballantyne (19912002) recommends that marketing activity should be focused on six mainmarkets

1 consumer markets (or customer markets in the business-to-businesssector)

2 internal markets ie employees3 supplier and alliance markets eg business partners suppliers

consultants contractors4 influencer markets eg venture capitalists regulators lobbyists and

litigators5 referral markets eg customer advocates intermediaries business

advisors6 recruitment markets eg employment agencies graduates the pool of

potential employees

This multiple-markets approach embraces a more holistic view of themarketplace It forces marketers to think beyond managing one marketmade up of consumers (or customers) and extends the marketing mix toinclude the increasingly important elements of people process and theprovision of customer service

As RM became more widely accepted during the 1990s developmentscontinued apace in IT and computational methodologies resulting in theconvergence of database marketing and customer service delivery This ledto the concept of Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

The Test of CRM1

CRM was the last big idea of the twentieth century to grab the attention ofmarketers It appeared to present the magic formula for marketing successndash the opportunity to galvanize the business behind a marketing-led

The Evolution of Marketing 15

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 15

strategy Moreover as commentators have observed it offered lsquothemystique of new technologies and a new three letter acronymrsquo The theorybehind CRM is that managing customer relationships is an integratedbusiness process involving the consolidation of individual customer datafrom multiple sources to create a mutually valuable proposition CRMrsquosemphasis on using IT to monitor customersrsquo transaction histories andexploit their purchasing behaviour serves to reinforce the impact ofcustomer retention strategies With real-time access to customer-specificinformation organizations can segment customers by value targetmarketing strategies towards the most promising opportunities andpersonalize marketing communications Consequently service levels areguided by customer profitability CRM seemed to provide at last themeans of implementing RM effectively and as an incrementaldevelopment served to extend the marketing life cycle (see Figure 12)

Investment in CRM systems across Europe is such that it is one of thefastest growing markets in the IT industry However those organizationsthat interpreted CRM as simply the purchase of an expensive softwareprogram found little succour in the smart new technology It has beenclaimed that up to 97 of CRM installations fail to deliver the anticipated

16 Earthquake

Figure 12 The marketing life cycle

Production-driven economy Consumption-led economy

Marketingemerges asa business

function

Post-warconsumer

boom

Series ofoil crises

Functionalmarketing

Servicesmarketing

Relationshipmarketing

1920s30s 1950s60s 1970s 1980s 1990s 2000

Demandsystem

marketing

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 16

benefits Problems stem from a lack of clarity about what CRM actually isand how to implement it successfully For some it has meant bettermarketing communications providing a means of escaping from theconstraints of mass communications and of achieving more personalizeddialogue Others have taken a broader view using the terms CRM andmarketing almost interchangeably A third school of thought hashighlighted the IT aspect regarding CRM as the technologicalenhancement of business processes Each interpretation of CRM offers anequal number of implementation models and with so many options andinterpretations it is little wonder that CRM has failed to meetexpectations

Current research shows that there are a number of preconditions thatneed to be satisfied prior to implementing a CRM strategy Organizationsmust have a clearly defined marketing strategy in place IT systems that arealigned to the goals of the marketing strategy and an organizationalculture which ably supports the implementation of CRM A misalignmentin any of these relationships leads to a failure of CRM creating waste anddisappointing performance

It is clear that most CRM systems are not conceived with the activedemanding IT-literate consumer in mind Their main focus is onproviding information about the customer to the company They seldomoffer the consumer direct access to information about the supplier orvendor or their own account As business theorist Patricia Seybold assertslsquoCRM systems should be designed with customers as the design centerCustomers should have the ability to maintain (though not theresponsibility of maintaining) information related to their relationshipsrsquo(Seybold et al 2001) This view is in keeping with the prediction ofresearch firm Gartner that by 2005 consumers will start to take control of their own data Together these assertions suggest that CMR ndash orcustomer-managed relationships ndash rather than CRM should be theguiding notion in devising relationship management systems

Whether or not CRM survives as a formal discipline it has been avaluable step in marketingrsquos development It has established the businesscase for adopting the customerrsquos perspective and involving the customer inthe formulation of product and service strategies The timing of thisrealization is no coincidence it is a creative response to the eruption ofdramatic change within the macro-marketing environment

The Evolution of Marketing 17

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 17

CHANGES IN THE MACRO-MARKETING ENVIRONMENT2

The present trend towards more customer-centric ways of doing business isbeing propelled and directed by a fundamental change in the marketingenvironment Using the earthquake metaphor the two lsquotectonic platesrsquothat shape the marketing landscape are the production-driven economyand the consumption-led economy As our manufacturing base declines wecan see that it is consumption and not production which is emerging asthe central motor of contemporary society

Of course we have to look at production and consumption as two sidesof the same coin Production does not take place without a correspondinglevel of consumption and similarly no consumption can take place unlesssomething is produced For some supplying organizations the boundarybetween these two sets of activities erodes and they fuse into what AlvinToffler so presciently described as lsquoprosumptionrsquo in his best-seller FutureShock As long ago as 1970 Toffler foresaw that consumers would soon befaced with the greatest variety of unstandardized goods and services everseen He believed this increasing diversity of products would beencouraged by two economic factors lsquoFirst consumers have more money tolavish on their specialized wants second and even more important astechnology becomes more sophisticated the cost of introducing variations declinesrsquo[his italics]

Today leading organizations such as Landsrsquo End Dell Procter ampGamble and Pearson the TV company demonstrate the wisdom ofTofflerrsquos vision

bull Clothing retailer Landsrsquo End started offering online tailoring inOctober 2000 in the USA A year later the company claimed that 40of all chino and jeans sales on its website were custom ordersCustomers would enter their measurements onscreen including theirweight height and hipndashthigh proportions An inbuilt computerprogram would analyse the information given and calculate the idealdimensions of the trousers The order specifications would be sentdirect to a manufacturing plant in Mexico where the fabric patternwould be produced by a computerized cutting machine and thenpassed to a sewing machinist Two to four weeks after the order wasplaced the customer would receive the trousers

18 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 18

bull Dell one of Fortune magazinersquos top ten lsquomost admiredrsquo companiesdesigns manufactures and customizes computing products andservices to customersrsquo requirements Using the online lsquoConfigure ampBuyrsquo facility customers can create the computer system that best meetstheir needs by a process of selecting options from drop-down menusAs they do so the total price changes accordingly at the bottom of theirscreen

bull Procter amp Gamble has a website called lsquoCommunity Cornerrsquo that it usesto build relationships with consumers or marketing partners as theyare known internally The website is an online forum in whichconsumers can talk about existing brands suggest ideas and changesand contribute to surveys There is also a chance for people with patentsfor new products to discuss them with Procter amp Gamble

bull The television programme Pop Idol created by Pearson enabledviewers to vote in their favourite pop star from a preselected shortlist

Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment 19

Figure 13 Landsrsquo Endcom online tailoring

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 19

In the final show of the UK series nine million viewers voted bytelephone awarding Will Young celebrity status Young thenachieved the fastest-selling debut single in the UK as more than 11 million fans went out to buy the record by the star they had createdThe programmersquos format has since been adopted by televisionproducers in the USA with similar success

The predominance of a consumption-led economy is reflected in a numberof macro market statistics For example in the UK the proportion of grossdomestic product (GDP) provided by manufacturing has been on adownward trend since the mid-1970s This position is reflected in each ofthe G7 industrialized economies (Germany France Italy Japan Canadathe USA and the UK) In the case of the UK manufacturing accounted foraround one third of the economyrsquos total output in 1960 However by thestart of the new millennium this had fallen to less than one fifth with onlythe USA showing a fall below this figure This has been driven in part bythe allocation of an increasing proportion of disposable income to expend-iture on a wide range of services and luxury goods Sectors such as bankingtourism leisure entertainment and telecommunications have been themain beneficiaries

This economic position is mirrored in employment patterns Significantjob losses are expected in the primary sector of the economy (agriculturemining and utilities) over the next couple of years while manufacturingcan expect to lose around 80000 employees each year between 2000 and2005 when the loss is expected to slow to 50000 employees per annumThe decline in engineering will be seen as the biggest contributor to theselosses On the other hand distribution hotels the transport sector andcommunications can expect an increase of 40000 new jobs annually to2005 However the biggest job increases are expected to come in othermarket sectors where growth in professional services in particular willmean an increase of around 140000 new jobs each year to 2005

Not surprisingly these employment trends find equal expression inqualification statistics The number of students graduating in engineeringand technology are down by 9 from 35700 to 32400 over the period1997 to 2001 In contrast degrees received in law and the arts both showincreases Graduates in business and administration now dominate the jobmarket growing from 61700 in 1997 to 65300 in 2001 Those with

20 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 20

degrees in creative arts and design however show the biggestproportionate jump from 24800 in 1997 to 29500 in 2001

These facts and figures stress the fundamental change in marketdynamics from a production to a consumption focus Consumption andthe servicing of consumption increasingly form the basis of businessplanning The economic sector becomes ever more tightly tied tobusinesses that have an asset base made up of intangible services asopposed to hard and fast production This shift has significantramifications for marketers ndash consumer marketers in particular ndash who needactively to acknowledge that new ways of thinking and operating areneeded if we are to meet unrivalled market and management demands

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

A substantial amount of soul searching has gone on in marketing circlesover the past decade as marketingrsquos role and contribution to businessperformance have been challenged by both change and a lack of it Thediminished sense of influence power and value among marketingpractitioners and shared frustration about what to do next is rooted in thefact that the certainties of the production-driven economy have beenreplaced with the uncertainties of the consumption-led economy andmarketing thinking has not kept pace The tools techniques and theoriestaught in business schools today largely promote a mechanistic approach tomarketing which as the following chapters will show is not relevant tothe organic nature of present-day trade relations

While Relationship Marketing and its offshoot Customer RelationshipManagement have revolutionized marketing practice much more needsto be done to manage the matching of supply and demand synergisticallyMarketers whose role has always been located at the critical interfacebetween buyers and sellers are well placed to lead the thought processConsumer markets especially offer valuable insight and testing groundfor the development of more appropriate concepts and codes of practiceThere the customer base is usually more numerous remote and capriciousand the use of intermediaries is commonplace As the tremors shaking themarketing landscape grow stronger and more frequent the imperative tofind new meaning for marketers becomes an unenviable unavoidable andurgent responsibility

Implications for Consumer Marketing 21

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 21

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Marketers are operating in a context of fundamental transition Thecertainties of the production-driven economy have been replaced bythe uncertainties of the consumption-led economy

bull Consumption and the servicing of consumption now form the centralmotor of contemporary society

bull Many of the conventional tools and techniques of marketingdeveloped mainly in the production-driven era no longer apply andmarketingrsquos contribution to business is increasingly unclear

bull Relationship Marketing moved marketing focus from customeracquisition to customer retention

bull The implementation of Relationship Marketing through CRMsystems has been largely unsuccessful and there is an outstandingrequirement for greater clarity in terms of CRM definition andpractice

bull Consumer markets offer insight and testing ground for the futuredevelopment of marketing

22 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 22

Consumption and consumption management are being redefined by the NewConsumer

Consumption (the act or process of consuming) has always been acharacteristic of human nature But consumption as it relates to consuminggoods and services that do not merely fulfil needs but satisfy wants anddesires is a modern-day development one that accelerated after the SecondWorld War Since then a growing range of businesses have come to seetheir interactions with consumers as the execution of a formalized processof consumption They have engaged the marketing profession to hone thisprocess to optimum effect In parallel with this development consumerrights have evolved to the point where the advocacy of consumer interestsis no longer the sole remit of consumer organizations consumersthemselves are leading the cause

In order to manage the process of consumption effectively in the contextof transition described in Chapter 1 marketers traditionally have adoptedthe classic marketing approach of the 4Ps (product place price andpromotion) They have used these elements of the marketing mix tofacilitate their command-and-control philosophy However the advent ofa new kind of consumer is showing this traditional marketing approach tobe out of date lsquoNew Consumersrsquo are well informed and highly empoweredThey are increasingly influencing the shape and form of products andservices as well as the future of market players

CONSUMPTION IN TRANSFORMATION

lsquoConsumptionrsquo is often considered a contemporary word whose arrival wasmarked by the conspicuous consumption patterns of the 1980s Yet some

The New Consumer 2

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 23

commentators point to an earlier era the 1950s when the Marshall Planhelped to rebuild Europe The economic boom that followed the SecondWorld War lasting some 25 years ensured that many members of thelower social classes could have all sorts of goods and services their parentscould only dream of

Other commentators look still further back Sociologist GrantMcCracken (1988) for example turns to the reign of Queen Elizabeth I ofEngland and the prosperity of the last quarter of the sixteenth century1 Atthat time an explosion of consumerist behaviour was fuelled by membersof a social elite who became caught up in a lsquoriot of consumptionrsquo as theyvied for the attention of the monarch The accumulation of expenses bynoblemen at court meant they had less to spend on their families ndash and anew phenomenon was born The individual rather than the family beganto feature as the basic unit of consumption motivated rather more by asense of buying for the here-and-now than for the longer term

The beginnings of consumer society might also be found in the wave ofeconomic prosperity that hit eighteenth-century England and promptedthe emergence of a middle class For these consumers the possession offashionable goods represented an important index of their social standingMoreover new marketing and advertising techniques accompanied thesedifferent patterns of buying behaviour by new groups of consumers

Expansion of the Consumer Concept

Regardless of where in time we position the first signs of consumptionwhat is important is to acknowledge its pervasive influence The concept ofthe consumer and the building of businesses around it is no longerconfined to those who produce lsquothingsrsquo ie manufacturers Organizationsas diverse as charities utilities suppliers government bodies and evenreligious orders have become attuned to thinking of the individuals theyinteract with as consumers

British GasBritish Gas was privatized in 1986 and demerged from British Gas plc in1997 Today it is part of Centrica the holding company for a range ofbusinesses including the AA Goldfish and OneTel in the UK and EnergyAmerica and Luminus overseas For most consumers of gas fuel it is an

24 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 24

unexciting product Their gas-fired stoves break down and the bills alwaysseem disproportionately large to the burning small flame in their boilers As apart of Centrica British Gas set out to turn around a loss-making operationoptimize the use of its sales force and maintain brand presence Now thebusiness is highly profitable the result of a strategy that has included detailedwork on customer segmentation and the use of marketing campaigns tosmooth out peaks and troughs in consumer demand for maintenance andinstallation

Caldey IslandOn Caldey Island off the Welsh coast a group of Cistercian monks isdeveloping an e-business in an attempt to make the monastery financiallyself-sufficient The brothers produce a range of perfumes bath oils handcreams and menrsquos aftershaves as well as shortbread made to an old recipeThe idea of a web shop grew from the problem of geographical remotenessthe holy island is only accessible by licensed boat services between themonths of April and October making for a short selling season Earlyindications are that the site (wwwcaldey-islandcouk) is succeeding

Defence of Consumer Rights

Alongside the growth in consumer numbers products and expenditurethere has been growth in a consciousness of consumer rights The process ofadvancing the cause of consumersrsquo interests in relation to the producer orsupplying organization is known as consumerism and should be seen asdistinct from consumption or the act of consuming the products and servicesproduced

The lsquoconsumer movementrsquo loosely defined as the ongoing campaign tosecure consumer rights began in the late 1950s and early 1960s when anincreasing interest in consumer and environmental issues seeded the ideathat consumers possess the power to influence manufacturers (andsubsequently many others such as retailers and service providers)2 TheUK Consumersrsquo Association founded in 1957 set out to emulate theAmerican Consumersrsquo Union (CU) Within a few years consumersrsquoassociations had formed in several other European countries notablyHolland and Belgium All were based on the CU model of an organizationcarrying out product tests and making public the results to informconsumers (see Figure 21) The consumer voice was given further impetusby President John F Kennedyrsquos groundbreaking address to Congress in

Consumption in Transformation 25

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 25

March 1962 where he asserted the rights of consumers lsquoto safety to beinformed to choose and to be heardrsquo

Today consumer advocacy no longer resides solely with consumergroups The language of consumer rights has entered the corporate worldlsquoWhen people pay money for a brand or to a company they feel they arebuying rights to how they are treated ndash rights to be respected treatedhonestly and fairly and to have their points of view appreciatedrsquo This wasa comment made by Lucy Purdy planning director at Publicis when hercommunications agency published its findings on consumer attitudes toregistering complaints about poor goods and services

In order to create a business culture that meets these expectations on thepart of the consumer Mohanibar Sawhney and Philip Kotler from KelloggUniversity advocate implementing a Customer Bill of Rights for theInformation Age (Sawhney and Kotler 2001) Their proposed draft billsupports a consumer right to anonymity to be remembered and to share in pay-offs among other things They warn that lsquoViolating thesefundamental rights while tempting and even profitable in the short runwill be disastrous in the long runrsquo

26 The New Consumer

Figure 21 Which online

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 26

CONSUMPTION MANAGEMENT IN QUESTION

The management of consumption has traditionally been undertakenthrough the adoption of the lsquomakendashsellrsquo approach characteristic of the production-driven economy described in Chapter 1 Supplyingorganizations (ie manufacturers) made things and it was the task of themarketer to persuade consumers to buy them Their instruments ofpersuasion were the 4Ps The challenge for these organizations was tosatisfy customer needs by producing the right product at the right pricemaking it available in the right place at the right time and promoting itswinning features through the right means of communication

This mechanistic model of consumption management was laterenhanced by the principles of Relationship Marketing (RM) born out of afocus on services marketing RM stressed that the management ofconsumption was about far more than simply putting products into themarketplace The dawning realization that a manufacturer is not so much aproduct company but a service company with a product offeringintroduced the idea of building relationships with consumers over timebased on meeting their needs in relation to both the functional aspects ofthe product and the more intangible aspects of the service elements

In parallel with this development a growing consciousness of consumerrights and consumer power has created more confident consumers oneswho are finding their voice and have at their disposal the means ofexpressing it At the point of confluence of these two trends ndash RM on theone hand and consumer rights on the other ndash the way in whichconsumption is managed comes under question The lsquomakendashsellrsquo approachenhanced through RM does not meet with the expectations of this newempowered consumer Organizations need to acknowledge this change anddevise new ways of managing consumption based on consumersthemselves

A NEW KIND OF CONSUMER

The present consumer-driven marketplace is characterized by a new kindof consumer one who has been variously described as lsquoactiversquolsquoknowledgeablersquo and lsquopost-modernrsquo3 In essence this is a lsquoNew Consumerrsquoa creature distinctly different and identifiable from its predecessors

Consumption Management in Question 27

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 27

Marketers need to develop a deep understanding of the attitudes andbehaviours of this New Consumer if they are to break away from themechanistic models of the production-driven era and develop a relevantapproach to exploiting the business potential of current consumer cultureNew Consumers possess a number of distinguishing features the mostsignificant of which are highlighted here

New Consumers Are Exercised By Time

The first step in understanding changing cultures of consumption is torecognize the different ways in which New Consumers relate to the conceptof time Time has become a precious commodity and many products andservices reflect this insight capitalizing on the time-poorcash-rich trade-off many consumers make Consumers with little time and high levels ofdisposable income have become lsquooutsourcersrsquo ndash their clothes go to the drycleaners nannies look after their children cleaners and tradespeople keeptheir house in good order and so on Businesses that have spotted thismarket niche include enterprising property developers whose new-buildhomes come fitted with fake lawns and supermarkets which offer pre-packaged pre-cooked ready-made meals Personal full-service agencyEnviego goes further and has created a PA (personal assistant) service thatwill take care of everything from actively remembering birthdays toorganizing walking the dog

Contemporary consumer behaviour also illustrates that consumersappear to either actively embrace the pace of change and the constantstream of new products and services or want to run and hide The formerare living life to the max and desirous of anything but routine These lsquotimetouristsrsquo give themselves away by their pursuit of agelessness disregard forgender boundaries and delight in the finer things in life For brand ownerstime tourists represent new markets and marketing opportunitiesClinique for example cleverly acknowledges male buyers with theadvertisement lsquoDonrsquot say the word ldquocosmeticsrdquo Cliniquersquos ldquoSkin suppliesfor menrdquorsquo (see Figure 22a)

lsquoTime refugeesrsquo on the other hand display characteristics best describedas defensive in the face of the pace of change These consumers seek securityand a sense of belonging They want to find and maintain a home be itspiritual or physical They want to feel part of a community and form

28 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 28

A New Kind of Consumer 29

Figure 22 (a) Clinique woos the men (b) LrsquoOreal rewards you

(a)

(b)

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 29

relationship bonds with other people Buying certain brands thereforebecomes a way of linking with like-minded consumers The worldwidemarketing success of Harley-Davidson and its 600000-strong HarleyOwnersrsquo Group demonstrates this drive to belong to a tribe or group Forsome time refugees purchases become a sort of reward LrsquoOreal forexample targets this group with the strapline lsquoBecause yoursquore worth itrsquo(see Figure 22b) Time refugees are looking to anchor themselves in atransient world The website wwwfriendsreunitedcom which reunitesformer school friends has successfully captured their imagination

New Consumers Lead Complex Lives

The marketplace of the New Consumer is highly fragmented and this is inlarge part due to the highly complex lives consumers lead On one levelthey display multiple personalities seeming to dip in and out of differentstereotypic personality types The prevalence of this consumer behaviourwas exemplified by a piece of advice from Cosmopolitan magazine to itsfemale readership lsquoBe an it-girl on Saturday a kitten on Sunday a careerwoman on Monday a devoted girlfriend on Tuesday helliprsquo It is as ifconsumers can take on chameleon-like properties and adapt their projectedpersonas to suit the situation

This complex behaviour creates problems for marketers whosesegmentation analyses are constructed on the premise that consumers canbe categorized permanently in one of a number of predefined lsquoboxesrsquoHowever in displaying multiple personalities consumers can appear tooccupy a number of different boxes depending on the occasion Forexample in the airline industry a passenger might choose to fly businessclass or first class for business travel economy class for family holidays andwith a special ticket (discount or promotion) for a long weekendDesigning a marketing strategy to capture or keep this customer is analmost impossible task if simple demographics are used as the basisMaking sense of this apparent chaos requires marketers to abandon theirneed for certainty and to develop a tolerance of ambiguity and a skill inadaptability In addition to recognizing consumersrsquo changing attitudes totime marketers must respect their preferences and different needs anddesires

30 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 30

New Consumers Seek Experiences

Marketing theorists have for some time pointed out that consumers donrsquotbuy product features they buy product benefits As marketing guruTheodore Levitt famously commented lsquoCustomers donrsquot buy frac14 inch drillsthey buy frac14 inch holesrsquo In the case of New Consumers their purchasingbehaviour is further distinguished by the desire to buy an lsquoexperiencersquo It isnow possible to purchase such an experience off the shelf in high streetretailers W H Smith for example offers them in a catalogue Their rangeincludes a day driving a Ferrari or a JCB a visit to a health farm and aphotographic makeover Prices range from pound9999 to pound299999 the latterbuys the thrill of diving with sharks in South Africa Children under 17years of age are offered their own choice of lsquofirstrsquo experiences such asdriving a car or being a TV presenter

In response to this desire to lsquoconsumersquo experiences many retailers havemoved from simply offering ranges of products to also offering ranges ofexperiences In the pub market for example consumers can enjoy an Irishpub experience one evening followed by an Australian bar experience thenext and an American bar experience resembling the television sit-comCheers after that Except that these experiences are not lsquorealrsquo in the sense ofbeing non-contrived Instead they are formulaic and themed reality isdeliberately blurred with hyper-reality

US consultants Joseph Pine and James Gilmore (1998 see also Pine andGilmore 1999) describe this lsquoexperience economyrsquo as one where lsquoInstead ofrelying on our own wherewithal to experience the new and wondrous ndash ashas been done for ages ndash we will increasingly pay companies to stageexperiences for us just as we now pay companies for services we oncedelivered ourselves goods we once made ourselves and commodities weonce extracted ourselvesrsquo Clearly consumer offerings and marketingmessages addressed to New Consumers must take this trend on board

New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding

The command-and-control philosophy traditionally adopted by marketersto manage the consumption process is inappropriate today As everymarketer who engages consumers in research will know consumers arebecoming more marketing literate and less easy to please They candeconstruct marketing activities with almost as much insight as most

A New Kind of Consumer 31

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 31

marketers For example the average consumer can quickly sort the daily postinto three piles personal mail business mail and unsolicited or lsquojunkrsquo mailThey are capable of identifying each without even opening the envelope

Consumers are no longer passive absorbers of marketing messages Inthe words of author Alan Mitchell (2001) lsquoThe observed have startedplaying games with the observerrsquo At one extreme these lsquogamesrsquo take theform of protests and demonstrations against globalization such as thedisruption of the World Trade negotiations in Seattle in 1999 and the G8summit in Genoa in 2001 Naomi Kleinrsquos book No Logo Taking Aim at theBrand Bullies (2000) is another example It is a highly acclaimedassessment of multinational brand-name corporations labour abuses andanti-corporate resistance which quickly became the bible of the anti-globalization movement after its publication in the USA

At the other extreme consumers make their views known in less violentways For example those who are unhappy with their purchases and intentupon standing up for their rights can turn to consumer watchdogs andother advocacy groups which operate through traditional as well aselectronic media In fact consumer redress has become a source oflsquoinfotainmentrsquo ndash part information and part entertainment Consumers alsohave the wherewithal to take direct action such as setting up lsquovigilantersquowebsites Marketers should monitor these sites carefully as they canprovide a rich seam of consumer feedback Equally their impact onconsumer and corporate perception should be managed carefully In 1999Dunkinrsquo Donuts the fast food retailer bought out the lsquogripe sitersquo set uptwo years earlier by a customer who had been upset at the absence of anyskimmed milk for his coffee

Such consumer activity reflects a knowledge on the part of consumersabout how marketing works and a new-found confidence in expressingdissatisfaction It is imperative therefore that the New Consumer beequally involved in the consumption management process and that apartnership of open dialogue and mutual respect be developed between thetrading parties

New Consumers Are IT Enabled

Underpinning the way New Consumers live their lives and make and usetheir purchases are of course developments in information technology

32 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 32

(IT) This fundamental feature of the New Consumer raises issues formarketers about how to connect with consumers who live in atechnologically interactive and integrated world The exponential growthin the use of mobile phones (devices first developed by Bell Laboratories inthe 1940s) has presented particular challenges Consumers worldwide haveneeded little persuading of the benefits of the mobile phone which unlikelandline systems links people rather than locations In the UK 28 millionpeople owned mobile handsets in 2001 and this figure is predicted to rise to405 million by 2005 according to research firm Gartner Thefundamental appeal of the mobile phone is that it extends a basic humanquality ndash the ability to communicate Teenagers in particular havebecome the main conduits through which mobile phones have found theirway into wider society and they were also the first group to realize thepotential of text messaging The Japanese teenage generation has even beendubbed oya yubi sedai meaning the thumb tribe on account of thedexterity with which they text message

Throughout this growth in mobile phone ownership consumers haveshown themselves to be one step ahead of marketers who have yet to reallydemonstrate that they understand the market drivers and how this mobilechannel can be most effectively integrated into the communications mixEquipped with mobile phones and other handheld mobile devicesconsumers are no longer static and fixed in time and space relative tobrands They have a choice of channels through which to connect with abrand and will exercise individual preference in using them For exampleconsumers may prefer to purchase some categories of goods online such asCDs videos books and software but use the Internet to browse for otherproducts and services In the US it is estimated that only 1 of new cars arepurchased online while half of the nationrsquos car buyers use the Internetsolely to research and compare automotive product options

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

In todayrsquos consumption-led economy using the 4Ps (or even the 7Ps of aRelationship Marketing approach) as the basis for marketing strategymisses a fundamental point consumption is enacted by consumers andtherefore they ndash and not products ndash should be the starting point ofmarketing strategy origination Robert Lauterborn (1991) described the

Implications for Consumer Marketing 33

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 33

need to focus instead on the 4Cs consumer needs and wants costs to the consumer (time money effort etc) convenience factors andcommunication (how the consumer wishes to be communicated with bythe supplying organization) With the arrival of the New Consumer thecommand-and-control approach to consumption management so typicalof the production-driven era is no longer applicable

Marketers need to accept that the marketplace is no longer stable andpredictable but is instead dynamic and complex and as a consequencetheir need for certainty must become replaced by a tolerance of ambiguityThis is driven for the most part by the heterogeneity of the NewConsumer Consumers today no longer resemble the conventionalperceptions formed in the era of mass marketing and traditionalapproaches to consumer research and segmentation do not adequatelycapture their essence New Consumers have minds of their own and are notreluctant to make their views known New Consumers are empowered tomake their purchases through an ever-expanding choice of media andchannels Moreover they change suppliers easily and often without anysense of disloyalty They even assemble in groups to influence the offer andget the best price or contract terms The New Consumer demands adifferent kind of customer relationship one that warrants an entirelydifferent approach to strategic consumer marketing

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Consumption today is about the satisfaction of consumer wants anddesires rather than the fulfilment of consumer needs

bull The process of consumption is widely recognized as a managementissue rather than simply a market phenomenon

bull The starting point for managing the consumption process should be theconsumer not the product and marketing strategy needs to reflect this

bull New Consumers are exercised by time lead complex lives seekexperiences are marketing literate and highly demanding and are ITenabled This creates a different set of expectations to be met in the newmarketplace

bull The New Consumer represents unprecedented challenges formarketers

34 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 34

bull Rethinking the consumer means rethinking marketing

bull The traditional command-and-control approach to consumptionmanagement must be replaced by more collaborative methods thatinvolve and value the consumer

Summary Points 35

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 35

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 36

The challenge for brand owners and retailers is lsquoinnovate or diersquo

While many consumer brand owners recognize the symptoms ofrevolutionary change within the marketing environment few have beenable to interpret and respond to them meaningfully because of seeminglymore pressing business demands Among these immediate issues is theneed to address concerns about the manufacturerndashretailer relationshipConsolidation within the retail sector is continuing to increase thedownward pressure on price making it difficult for manufacturers tomanoeuvre in terms of market position Added to this the impact ofglobalization has placed the future of manufacturing in question Overrecent years the focus of producers and retailers has been supply chainmanagement However for many organizations simply improvingefficiencies is no longer enough to achieve sustainability Todayrsquos keybusiness imperative is to balance cost reduction and sales growth

Retailers are facing major challenges Retail spending as a proportion ofgross domestic product (GDP) has fallen significantly over the past coupleof decades This disturbing trend and the emergence of the New Consumerare forcing retailers to abandon their lsquoone size fits allrsquo approach and to focusinstead on managing consumer heterogeneity through marketingstrategies resulting in narrower and deeper retail concepts

KEY ISSUES FOR BRAND OWNERS

Research into the key business issues concerning fmcg brand owners byconsultants Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young1 in 2001 underlined the overridingchallenge of dealing with change in the competitive environment Four

Concerns of Brand Owners 3and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 37

main concerns were identified the force of globalization debate about thefuture of manufacturing the growth in retailer power and the need tomanage the balance between cutting costs and growing sales

The Force of Globalization

Organizational profitability and growth are the key drivers of a marketingstrategy that has at its core the standardization of business structuresproducts and processes along global (or at least regional) lines For manyglobal brand manufacturers a policy of standardization means adoptingthe philosophy that investments in product development and promotionsprovide greater returns if they are not limited to a single national marketThe internationalization or globalization of business activity can lead tothe de-duplication of roles and factories across several countries serving tomake the organization leaner For consumers the first visible sign of such astrategy in operation is often the subtle name change of a well-knownproduct In the UK for example Jif became Cif (see Figure 31) Oil ofUlay became Oil of Olay and Marathon became Snickers

Production-driven supply-chain thinking usually dominates aglobalization strategy as producers seek to rationalize their number ofstock-keeping units (SKUs) so as to avoid adding complexity to the supplychain Several fmcg companies worldwide are involved in programmes thatwill severely reduce the number of SKUs they have to support Unileverfor example is currently amputating its long tail of under-performingbrands a process that will leave it with 400 strong-growth lsquopower brandsrsquoas compared to the heavily diluted pool of 1600 it started with

The main problem with a strategy of standardization is that it seldomacknowledges the consumption-led economy Consumers themselves arenot standard they differ from one market to another Fmcg giants riskalienation by offering a lsquoone size fits allrsquo product range Coca-Colarecognized this when it abandoned the mantra lsquothink global act localrsquo infavour of lsquothink local act localrsquo The company wisely decided thatmanufacturing operations should be embedded in the local culture

Global brand owners also have to deal with the fact that in some nationalmarkets brands can remain strong and profitable even though they maynever become international players This can create conflict between localand global management over whether or not the brand in question should

38 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 38

be retained within the global portfolio Success in managing a globalportfolio is therefore marked by finding the right balance betweenstandardization and customization

The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing

In order to deal with the increasingly competitive environment andrespond effectively to shareholder demands fmcg companies have beenforced to take a long hard look at their businesses Many are questioningthe value brought to their company and brands by retaining ownership ofthe actual manufacturing process and are evaluating outsourcing as aserious proposition That this debate is taking place at all signifies a radicalchange in thinking for fmcg manufacturers who have long regarded themanufacturing process as something of a sacred cow

Nike Ericsson and Sara Lee are among those brand owners providingindications of a possible way forward Nike for example famously sees

Key Issues for Brand Owners 39

Figure 31 Jif changed to Cif as a result of globalization

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 39

itself as a provider of lifestyles conveyed through sportswear innovationdesign and styling It has never regarded production as a core competenceThe manufacturing strategy implied by Nikersquos approach is one focused on coordinating access to external resources and ensuring effectivecollaboration between internal functions and contract manufacturersparticularly in the areas of new product development The management ofthese crucial relationships is therefore key

In taking the decision to follow a manufacturing strategy of lsquoinnovateand coordinatersquo rather than lsquoown and operatersquo the brand owner is makingproduct innovation and development a core competence and is focusing onthe areas that drive growth and shareholder value Use of such a strategyamong fmcg manufacturers also demonstrates that they no longer seethemselves as product companies and are repositioning themselves asservice companies with a product offering This move resonates with theeconomic trend away from a pure manufacturing base to an over-whelmingly services oriented economy Those brand owners treading boldlyinto this new realm are effectively launching themselves into a new way ofthinking to ensure their survival

The Growth in Retailer Power

Brand owners are increasingly feeling the threat posed by industryconsolidation as the balance of power is tipped in favour of savvy retailersIt is becoming commonplace for retailers to use their intermediate positionto negotiate prices trade terms shorter delivery times and tailoredpromotions securing a winndashwin situation for themselves and theircustomers They are also managing to persuade manufacturers to enter intovendor-managed inventory agreements where the supplier activelymanages the customerrsquos inventory The fear factor is intensifying in the UKamid speculation about whether AsdaWal-Mart are planning furtheracquisitions that would bring them head-to-head with Tesco Britainrsquosbiggest supermarket chain Wal-Mart is the worldrsquos biggest retailer withannual sales of more than pound140 billion It possesses massive purchasingpower and can buy goods very cheaply from Asia and developing nations

Further stress in the manufacturerndashretailer relationship stems from thepressure to standardize pricing and trade terms (following the introductionof the Euro) the competitive threat of high-quality own-label products

40 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 40

and the shrinking shelf space available for brands When retailerndashsuppliernegotiations come down to pure muscle power the retailers have the edgesimply because the fmcg sector is more fragmented Manufacturers havetried to improve their position by maximizing the power of their lsquomuststockrsquo brands but very few of these represent brands that retailers wouldgenuinely fear losing

In some cases a more collaborative relationship is developing where themanufacturer recognizes that the retailer incurs an opportunity cost (of notachieving maximum potential sales) and works with the retailer to addressthis by supplying not just products but also value-added services thatsupport the products The key to such cooperation is the mutual sharing ofinformation Private web-based exchanges which require the integrationof both internal systems are often used to share data and ideas In this wayNestleacute improved its on-shelf availability in Sainsburyrsquos stores to 97 whileits overstocking fell by 25

The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth

Brand owners especially food manufacturers are under increasing pressurefrom the large retail multiples to reduce their trade prices and increasetheir service levels In response manufacturers are trying to eliminatewastage and excess costs from all corners of their cost base At the sametime they are trying to find additional sales volumes to meet analystsrsquo salesforecasts and shareholdersrsquo expected return on investment So how well arethey managing the balance between cutting costs and growing sales

Unileverrsquos strategy is typical The company plans to eliminate 100 of its380 manufacturing sites as part of its well-publicized lsquoPath to Growthrsquoinitiative It is targeting top-line growth of 5ndash6 by 2004 through itsfocus on cost reduction and brand rationalization However cost reductionprogrammes come at a price euro6 billion of restructuring costs in Unileverrsquoscase Unilever chairman Niall Fitzgerald is confident the targeted savingsof euro15 billion together with purchasing savings of the same magnitudewill finance the companyrsquos ambitious growth plans

The growth strategies of major fmcg companies all share an emphasis oncost reduction and service improvement Achieving competitive advantageis becoming harder as both quality and cost-efficient production are nolonger distinguishing factors in the marketplace For decades now most

Key Issues for Brand Owners 41

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 41

manufacturers have been addressing the issue of resource wastage and fewwould stand out as inefficient The proportion of savings that they cangenerate for reinvestment in growth therefore depends on the effectivenesswith which they implement their respective cost reduction programmesTaking cost out of a business has historically been a more traumatic ndash butalso a more predictable ndash fiscal strategy than trying to grow revenues Andwhile corporate acquisition can offer significant scope for investmentcapital most would agree that innovation and organic growth representmore prudent options

The Search for Innovation

All of these issues combined with low inflation and price transparencythroughout Europe mean there is no end in sight to the price debate formanufacturers Low-cost production and distribution become theminimum requirements for staying in the game Achieving a step changein performance requires a radical solution and it is focused innovation thatoffers the most promising source of organic growth There should beinnovation in the relationship between manufacturer and retailer and inthe creation of the next wave of products and services The solution lies inadaptability that is the ability to concentrate on short product cycles andproduct innovation based on profound insight into the value consumers areseeking For consumer marketers this means having a value-centricorientation in the business and a way of managing that enables innovation

THE RETAILERSrsquo RESPONSE2

While many brand owners see retailers as the cause of their key businessconcerns retailers themselves face daunting challenges First and foremostamong these is a long-term pattern of declining spend In 1980 the retailsector represented 466 of GDP Today that figure has roughly halvedThis is because most consumers have everything they need and retailexpenditure is essentially concentrated on lsquonon-essentialsrsquo in satisfyingtheir wants and desires As a result retailers compete with an ever-expanding range of competitors encompassing such areas of expenditure asholidays eating out and personal luxuries

42 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 42

A closer look at this trend shows variations across different types ofbusiness In food retail this trend is typical of developed economies asthere is a limit to how much people can eat and eating out of home hasbecome increasingly popular This is why the grocery retailers are so keento develop their non-food businesses In clothing retail there has been aloss of share since the late 1990s probably driven more by a lack ofexcitement in the product offers than anything else In contrast the homeimprovement retail business has been a success story sales in do-it-yourself(DIY) and electrical products and furniture and soft furnishings haveshown significant growth

Retailers are also facing challenges in respect to business location In theUK there has been an escalation in out-of-town shopping forcing manytraditional high-street retailers out of business Non-central sites carrylower rents and opportunities for larger stores making for a more attractiveproposition At the same time the cost of siting businesses in towns andcities is rising for two important reasons the introduction of inflexibleupwards only rental arrangements and the rapid expansion of fast-foodoutlets coffee shops and mobile phone retailers

However this current trend is likely to be reversed with the propertyindustryrsquos proposed introduction of a code of practice that will enableretailers to negotiate more favourable rental agreements and the naturaleffects of market saturation Furthermore out-of-town rents are beingdriven upwards by buoyant demand for DIY and electrical goods as well asnew interest from clothing retailers

In store price is still a significant issue for retailers Continuation in theuse of lsquoevery day low pricingrsquo (EDLP) and promotions to leverage consumerinterest and revenueprofit is being questioned as consumer expectationsheighten and additional demands are placed on finite resources So caughtunder mounting pressure from intensifying competition and lsquomarginsqueezersquo what should the retailerrsquos strategy for survival be Several optionsexist and these may be used in isolation or combination

Trading across Multiple Locations

In the UK the rule of thumb for selecting the right sales location used to bethat if you could see McDonaldrsquos out of one eye and Marks amp Spencer out ofthe other somewhere in the middle was probably just right It is no longer

The Retailersrsquo Response 43

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 43

that simple as location and store format have become linked to segmentationstrategy The major multiples for example are increasingly tapping thepotential of smaller convenience and food-to-go stores in neighbourhoodand suburban locations In 2002 Tesco acquired the convenience storechains One Stop and Nite-and-Day with the intention of rebranding themto increase the number of Tesco Express outlets from 100 to more than 500

Trading across Multiple Formats

Major retailers across a range of industries no longer confine themselves tosingle-store formats but have developed a number of approaches tomaximize trading opportunities Larger store formats are becoming morecommon for retailing groceries clothing DIY and electrical goodsAmong smaller format stores retail growth is expected to come from newbuilds (mainly grocery) concession units (electricals and furniture) andstore lsquoimplantsrsquo such as the Health amp Beauty which Boots is trialling as anlsquoimplantrsquo in Sainsburyrsquos supermarkets

Use of Multiple Channels

With the rapid take-up of new technologies retailers are utilizing an ever-expanding mix of channels For example Next is one of a number ofcompanies to offer its goods across a range of channels online mail andtelephone ordering services are available to its customers Overall thenature of the online offer will probably continue to differ across the range ofproduct categories For example it is transactional in nature in clothinggrocery and electricals and more focused on promotion and the provisionof information to consumers in the areas of DIY furniture and health andbeauty Despite the hype surrounding e-commerce experts predict that by2005 little more than 5 of retail sales will be online The majority ofthese purchases will be made by consumers in the 26ndash45-year-old agebracket and the over 50s or lsquosilver surfersrsquo

Editing Choice in Store

The attention of retail managers is increasingly focusing on how consumersfind their way around product ranges within stores as well as how they

44 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 44

navigate store aisles New Consumers are looking for lsquoedited choicersquo thatis visible guidelines to help them save time and effort Smart retailers whounderstand this particular consumer want are targeting specific groupingsof products to appeal to specific segments of New Consumers For examplea range of specialist additive-free products will be grouped together withina supermarket rather than following the traditional practice of locatingadditive-free biscuits with other biscuits and additive-free bread withother breads

Enhancing Retail Branding

Retailers are developing their brands by creating new retail brandidentities targeted at particular market segments A retail brand such asThe Link a new Dixons Group brand works best in heterogeneousmarkets where economies of scale are of limited significance In contrastretail brand extensions are more commonly used where the core retailbrand has built up a strong level of consumer equity such as the strategyBoots is pursuing with its Boots Opticians brand

Developing Multinational Operations

Taking retail concepts overseas is a seductive proposition but few retailershave made a success of it Failed attempts to recreate business success inother countries usually result from a lack of understanding andappreciation of the way that markets operate There may be crucialdifferences in the way property is owned and managed or how employersand employees interact Sometimes it is a simple misreading of localconsumer needs However some retailers do manage to succeed inestablishing multinational operations and certain markets have becomethe focus of highly competitive activity Tesco and Wal-Mart for instanceare both aggressively expanding in central Europe and the Asia Pacificregion

Pursuing Customer Loyalty

Customer loyalty represents the Holy Grail for retailers who now have thepotential to use consumer data to build powerful knowledge-based

The Retailersrsquo Response 45

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 45

consumer relationships However as market analyst Verdict concludesconsumer loyalty is eroding across most sectors Consumer churn isgrowing most strongly in the areas of clothing housewares and footwearfollowed by DIY and food Figure 32 illustrates this decline in loyalty (thechange in the average number of people saying they were loyal to oneretailer) In order to arrest this trend retailers have introduced a variety ofloyalty schemes and programmes In the UK current benchmarks havebeen set by Tesco and Boots whose Clubcard and Advantage Cardrespectively are carried by a majority of consumers

The launch of Nectar a lsquonext-generationrsquo loyalty scheme backed bySainsburyrsquos BP Debenhams and Barclaycard introduced in 2002invigorated the battle for consumer loyalty (see Table 31) Nectarrsquos rewardsoffer focuses on frequently consumed lsquolow ticketrsquo items Loyalty points maybe redeemed by founding partners Sainsburyrsquos and Argos or by alliancepartners McDonaldrsquos Blockbuster Legoland and Odeon Cinemas

Critics of these loyalty schemes argue that what is being created is alsquoloyalty currencyrsquo rather than any genuine sense of affiliation with andsupport for a particular retailer They claim that successful loyalty schemesonly work because retailers are able to take consumer information and turnit into actions which in turn provide the consumer with recognizablebenefits These benefits strengthen the consumerrsquos bond with the company

46 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

6

4

2

0

ndash2

ndash4

ndash6

ndash8

ndash10

Change ()

Personal Music Electricals Food DIY Footwear House- Clothingcare video grocery ware

64 34

ndash41 ndash48 ndash83 ndash93 ndash99

01

Figure 32 The decline in loyalty 1999ndash2002 Adapted from Verdict 2002

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 46

The Retailersrsquo Response 47

Tab

le 3

1T

he b

attle

of t

he lo

yalty

car

ds (a

t Nec

tarrsquos

laun

ch)

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 47

[Text not available in this electronic edition]

because the consumer can see that the company cares about them enough toreward their business However a scheme that simply rewards theconsumer but fails to capture in a meaningful way the vital flow ofinformation from consumer transactions is a sales promotion schemehowever large it might be

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

The mass markets of the production-driven economy have given way to thediverse demanding markets of the consumption-led economy In responsebrand owners and retailers are replacing their lsquoone size fits allrsquo consumermarketing strategies with ones that are more customized and personalizedThe era of maximizing scale is over and the future of retailing looks to beabout creating retail concepts that appeal to smaller clusters of consumersWhile certain lsquocategory killersrsquo (giant out-of-town superstore brands thatfocus on retailing a single category of products such as BampQ in DIY) willsurvive as they currently stand most retailers are taking radical actionThey are creating a lsquonarrower and deeperrsquo type of offer in the hope ofgaining a higher penetration of consumer spend Micro-retailing whereretailers make a limited range of products available in a small store to ahighly targeted audience can only be successful if it is based on meaningfulinsights into the value being sought by the New Consumer Of course thispresupposes that a value-centric orientation exists within the business

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Both brand owners and retailers need to adopt a value-centricorientation and an approach to marketing that enables adaptabilitycreativity and innovation

bull The impact of globalization and questions surrounding manufactur-ing cost-effectiveness and competition are causing brand owners torationalize their portfolios

bull There is no end in sight to the trade price issue as retailers consolidateand continue to exert downward pressure on prices

bull To achieve improvements in brand performance brand owners mustdeliver consumer-focused innovation

48 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 48

bull Faced with a declining share of GDP and lower levels of consumerloyalty retailers are increasingly adopting multi-location multi-format multi-channel and multinational strategies

bull Micro-retailing is creating narrower and deeper retail offerings

Summary Points 49

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 49

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 50

New Consumer Marketing champions a new and viable way of marketing

New Consumer Marketing (NCM) does not just advocate a new focus formarketing it champions a new way of doing marketing It breaks awayfrom the mechanistic models of the production-driven era and providesfresh thinking on managing new patterns of consumer growth It focuseson the demand side of business taking the consumer as its starting pointnot its final destination As a concept NCM combines the strengths of anorganizationrsquos people and processes and enables marketers to break out ofthe binary thinking that has seen businesses swing between a singularemphasis on process or on people

NCM is at an early stage of development Its evolution as a specificmanagement discipline is being influenced by an eclectic body ofindividuals who recognize that new marketing approaches and attitudesare needed Most established marketing thinking has grown out of themechanistic age of marketing where the certainties of mass marketsprovided a sense of security for brand owners and retailers The presentmarketing environment is no longer as static and certain as it used to beand there is a growing need to find more appropriate marketing tools andtechniques to connect better with consumers

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHAT IS IT

New Consumer Marketing is not simply another way of managing themarketing mix It is an emerging business discipline that addresses a rangeof issues relevant to competing successfully in a particular market Its keyobjective is to establish sustainable competitive advantage through

New Consumer Marketing 4

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 51

superior processes of value definition value creation and value delivery Atthe heart of each of these processes is a core capability ndash insight innovationand agility These capabilities enable the organization to develop consumerresponsiveness that is to deliver the value required by its consumersegments cost-effectively

NCM helps marketers make sense of the complexity and apparent chaosthat defines todayrsquos consumer markets In this post-quake economymanagers find themselves searching for frameworks and tools that willenable them to master very different market conditions NCM providesfresh thinking on where and how to focus marketing attention andresources in this consumption-led economy It is a response by leading-edge marketers to the outstanding challenges posed by the NewConsumer whose arrival is marked by heightened competitiontechnological developments that have created an interactive marketplaceand increasingly irrelevant consumption management practice that isstruggling to succeed through Relationship Marketing (RM) andCustomer Relationship Management (CRM)

A Response to the New Consumer

Consumers today are faced with overwhelming choice For the most parttheir needs are taken care of and their discretionary expenditure is focusedon satisfying their wants and desires As discussed in Chapter 2 NewConsumersrsquo expectations of products services and brands extend beyondlsquofeaturesrsquo and lsquobenefitsrsquo to lsquoexperiencesrsquo Even with this insight brandowners and retailers face an uphill struggle in connecting with consumersTheir brand messages compete for the attention of an increasinglysophisticated audience who are bombarded with information from rivalsources As author Seth Godin (1999) has noted a wealth of data becomes apoverty of attention

Furthermore it is harder to reach consumers who live highlyfragmented lives and display multiple personalities and who changesuppliers at the click of button Such sophisticated and demandingconsumers are not confined to a static marketplace but roam freely withinan interactive one New routes to market emerge all the time making iteasier for consumers to go to market They can research products and maketheir purchases offline or online or both as is their preference For the

52 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 52

consumer controlling the relationship in this interactive marketplaceextends to controlling the value proposition more directly and forcefullythan ever before For instance the web can easily support build-to-ordermanufacturing where consumers specify the colour size or configurationof a product they want

A Response to the Interactive Marketplace

Developments in IT bring with them both opportunities and threats Forexample as we move from a state of interaction into an age of integrationconsumers will increasingly have access to information on the move and theability to demand faster better and cheaper service At the same timemobile commerce makes it possible for marketers to communicate moreeffectively with consumers marketing messages can be targeted andconsistent and consumer feedback can be received and assimilated

For the consumer the costs of doing business are likely to fall as IT offersan opportunity to find the best value for money offers For examplewwwcarsurveyorg and wwwmoneysupermarketcom enable consumersto make comparisons at the click of a mouse while other websites bringindividual consumers together empowering them to use their collectivebargaining power The next step on from this is the development ofpersonal agents or sites that coordinate and control the access of suppliersto meet an individualrsquos specific requirements for example a domesticservices agent that manages suppliers of utilities groceries mortgage andbanking services etc

The Internet opens up business transparency and effectively transfers thepower in the relationship to consumers Economists suggest that underthese conditions firms will end up as price takers in a near perfect market(markets in which conditions of free and open competition more or lessexist) The so-called lsquorate tartrsquo ndash the informed confident consumer whoswitches between companies to gain the benefit of the best financial dealson offer ndash is already a reality for suppliers of personal financial services Inthe music industry consumers have taken control of both production andconsumption Music lovers have exploited the advantages of MP3 astandard file format that enables digital music files to be compressed sothey can be downloaded via the Internet in a reasonable time and withoutlosing too much audio quality Consumers can e-copy songs and entire

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it 53

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 53

audio CDs without having to pay for the music (an opportunity for musicalartists to flaunt their talent a threat to the music industry in lost income)

A significant effect of the pace of change in IT has been the emergenceof time as a competitive dimension Organizations find themselveshaving to operate in lsquoMartini modersquo or ndash in the words of the drinkrsquosadvert ndash lsquoany time any place any wherersquo The term lsquo247rsquo has entered theEnglish language superseding the earlier phrase lsquoopen all hoursrsquoCompeting on the basis of time demands a rapid response capabilityOrganizations need to develop business strategies that ensureadaptability The turbulent marketplace means there is no certainty inlong-term demand forecasts

A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management

While the evolution of the consumer and IT were beginning to challengethe marketing status quo marketing focus shifted from managingindividual transactions to building consumer relationships RelationshipMarketing concentrated on retaining customers rather than acquiringthem simply because there were fewer lsquonewrsquo customers left to acquirecompetition was tougher and the correlation between profitability andlong-term customer relationships had been made

As a framework RM provided much useful learning about the benefitsof focusing on retention and developing relationships over time withcustomers and other stakeholders It introduced the idea that all of theserelationships are interdependent and it has encouraged managers tovisualize the marketing space as a web or network of interconnectedrelationships based on mutual interests However RM falls short ofenabling organizations to deal effectively with the New Consumer in theconsumption-led economy that is characterized by a dynamic complexity

In many organizations developments in IT and computationaltechnology were applied to the business of developing a CRM strategy It isnow widely accepted that the vast majority of expenditure on CRMsystems has failed to meet expectations This is because CRM is a poorlydefined concept and there is little agreement on how to implement itRecent research suggests that CRM should not be attempted by anorganization unless there is congruence between its marketing strategy ITstrategy and corporate culture The challenge for CRM systems is

54 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 54

delivering value into consumer markets characterized by high levels ofheterogeneity

NCM implies that the challenges thrown up by changing cultures ofconsumption and an increasingly competitive environment can only bemet through a step change in strategic thinking which in essence meansmoving the consumer up the corporate agenda The boardrsquos focus mustswitch from supply-chain management to managing the demand systemand that starts with the 4Cs (consumer needs and wants cost convenienceand communication) rather than the 4Ps (price product place andpromotion) Marketers who manage the critical interface between the newmarketplace and the organization are best placed to bring about thischange in focus NCM therefore offers an opportunity to overcome a decadeor so of debate about the contribution marketing makes to the success of abusiness by redefining marketingrsquos role and status in a way that also sendsit to new heights and into a new realm

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHAT DOES IT MEAN

NCM means adopting a value-centric orientation in the organization anddrawing on learning from the new science of complexity In this waymarketing can be conceptualized as a business discipline that enables anorganic approach focused around key processes of value definition creationand delivery and one that combines an emphasis on people and process

Adopting Value-Centricity

As the practice of marketing has evolved in response to market conditionsthe underlying philosophy of a business in relation to the customers itserves has shifted (see Table 41) Transaction marketing was based on asales orientation with the aim of acquiring as many new customers as possible Profit was generated through increased sales volumeRelationship Marketing switched the emphasis to developing greaterprofitability through customer satisfaction underpinned by a retentionorientation The realities of the consumption-led economy demand thatthe focus of a business shift again to insight innovation and agility toachieve profitability based on having a value-centric orientation in thebusiness

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 55

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 55

Value-centricity generates revenue growth and improved profitabilitythrough a focus on the demand side of the business It means movingbeyond a relationship emphasis to one that has at its core the definitioncreation and delivery of value If an organization can meet the valueexpectations of the consumer then a long-term and profitable relationshipis more likely to follow The key is having value as the starting pointotherwise the relationship development strategy (and the CRM toolsperhaps used to deliver it) will not work as intended

In NCM value-centricity therefore replaces the focus on customerretention as the underlying orientation of a business Profitability isgenerated through delivering the value consumers want to buy into and theorganization wants to deliver that is value on the consumerrsquos terms asdemanded and maybe even dictated by them This value component marksthe process of exchange that takes place between the consumer and theorganization it is the lsquothingrsquo that the consumer gets in return for what theygive Organizations must learn how to operate in this consumer lsquospacersquo

In order to meet New Consumersrsquo expectations organizations need tofine-tune their understanding of the factors that create this value thosethat maintain it and equally those that destroy it Understanding thenature of the different value factors is also an opportunity to review thelsquophantomsrsquo that exist in every organization that is those features of a brandthat the organization believes add value but which are not rated at all byconsumers These are the lsquotaken for grantedrsquo elements that can beeliminated from the process resulting in cost savings for the organization

56 New Consumer Marketing

Table 41 The evolution of the marketing orientation

Focus Means End

Sales orientation Transactional marketing Profits through acquiring customers

Retention orientation Relationship Marketing Profits through customerand CRM satisfaction

Value orientation Demand system management Profits through insightinnovation agility

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 56

Applying Science

Organizational understanding of the make-up of value consumers areseeking has to be continuously updated This is because the newmarketplace is dynamically complex The Internet is perhaps the moststriking example of this Experts believe that the speed scope and scale ofmarket change will be driven by two laws relating to technology The firstwas described by Intel founder Gordon Moore who declared that every 18months chip density (and therefore computing power) would double whilecosts would remain unchanged The second law is attributed to RobertMetcalfe the founder of 3Com Corporation and inventor of EthernetWhat he describes as the experienced utility of belonging to an electronicnetwork increases exponentially with the number of users In other wordsthe more who join a network the more sense it makes for others to do thesame Those who choose not to join miss out in more ways than oneMeeting the challenges posed by cheaper computing power and anemphasis on networks are expected to characterize future developments inconsumer marketing strategy

To make a value-centric orientation a reality in this new marketplacerequires a shift in mindset about the way an organization is capable offunctioning It means moving from thinking linearly and mechanisticallyto thinking organically as this holds the key to consumer responsivenessLiving entities are more capable of adaptability the key requirement forsurvival in the new marketplace Marketing needs to adjust to these newrealities and become a systemic holistic and above all dynamicallycomplex activity

This view connects with the new science of complexity in whichinteraction is characterized as a near chaotic state Complexity science isabout searching for patterns among an abundance of seemingly randomphenomena in the universe and about establishing how order emergesfrom the apparent chaos To use an example down in the garden pond in spring a mass of froglets experiencing the growth of new legs and thedisappearance of a tail will emerge from the water in a cacophony ofsound and hop haphazardly on to dry land To an observer this mayappear a chaotic scene but the froglets are actually only demonstratingcomplex adaptive system behaviour based on principles of self-organization

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 57

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 57

Complexity science is aptly named and has spawned two major sub-strands of research chaos theory and complex adaptive systems (Gleick1987 Pascale 1990) It was advances in computational technology in the1960s that made the science possible led by the work of Edward Lorenz onchaos theory His contribution is based on research into weather systemsand left the idea that lsquosmall changes can produce large resultsrsquo in thepopular mind Edification in this field came later in James Gleickrsquos 1987best-seller Chaos Making a New Science although these ideas were nottransferred to the business arena The behaviour of complex adaptivesystems however offers more scope for parallels with the world ofcommerce These systems are found everywhere and comprise independentbut dynamically interacting agents that develop their optimumperformance by continually learning changing and adapting to theirenvironments However chaotic the process looks at any point it alwaysevolves to a state of creative order one famously described by NormanPackard as the lsquoedge of chaosrsquo

The appeal of complexity science to business theorists is that it providesa way of thinking about how the underlying processes and relationships ina company can be organized to enable the company to become as adaptiveand creative as possible in the face of continual change This convergence ofscience and business provides a rich seam to be mined And RichardPascale in his 1990 book Managing on the Edge is credited with leading theway here although other authors also advocate this emerging biologicalthesis Champions of this scientific analogy are not however suggestingthat commerce will start behaving as nature does but instead believe that itcan be helpful in finding a different way of looking at business issuesBusiness may be able to learn how to understand complexity and find a wayof responding dynamically to change

Breaking out of Binary Thinking

NCM emerges at the confluence of these two streams of thinking ndash the newscience of complexity and the evolving discipline of marketing NCM istherefore different from the prevailing marketing paradigm It is abusiness discipline that enables the organization to master the increasinglydynamic and complex process of going to market in a systemic and holisticway It provides managers with a means of identifying and mobilizing

58 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 58

people and processes to help them become as adaptive and creative aspossible against the background of a complex marketing environment

A systemic approach to managing the dynamic complexity of the newmarketplace enables organizations to break out of the binary thinking thathas seen businesses swing between a singular emphasis on process or onpeople Marketing thinking has been heavily influenced by themechanistic models that emerged in the era of the production-driveneconomy These reductionist approaches are epitomized by the 1936 silentmovie Modern Times starring Charlie Chaplin Behind the slapstick and thesentiment in this film the little tramp finds himself at odds with societyand fights to hold onto the remnants of his tattered dignity andindividuality It is a pointed spoof of the dehumanization of man in anindustrialized society It derides mechanization as we see Charlie on theassembly line tightening nuts at breakneck speed ndash the perfect cog in awheel of misfortune Eventually a nervous breakdown forces him to leavethe factory but he cannot stop tightening nuts even when there are none totighten

Frederick Taylor and his book The Principles of Scientific Management aremost closely associated with these approaches to management (Taylor1967) His ideas influenced generations of business theorists from HenryFord and his mass production of the Model T-Ford automobile through toadvocates of more recent marketing trends (including the qualitymovement benchmarking BPR McDonaldization and lean production)right up to the current flirtation with Six Sigma (an approach that focuseson minimizing production errors) At the heart of these developments is abelief that there is only one right way to complete a task and that a businessshould be driven by efficiency based on the standardization of processes

In between these emphases on process the management pendulum hasswung back to a stress on people to achieve business success In the 1950sDouglas McGregor identified two contrasting styles of managementcommand-and-control and self-management which he termed Theory Xand Theory Y (McGregor 1960) He advocated a more participativeapproach and influenced many theorists who followed him among themCharles Handy (1989 1994 1997) These humanist approaches tomanagement found their expression in the concept of empowermentVolvo was among the first to implement them replacing individual carworkers with teams of workers who were given decision-making roles in

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 59

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 59

the business This must have been enough of a change to make Henry Fordturn in his grave

NCM encourages the synergy of both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo combined bytaking a systemic and holistic approach to marketing This way of thinkingoffers an opportunity to identify the key underlying processes andrelationships that help an organization function organically enabling it toadapt create and respond appropriately to the changing marketingenvironment

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHO IS INVOLVED

New Consumer Marketing has come about as result of the thinking of aneclectic body of managers consultants and academics These individuals aredrawn from a number of different spheres These spheres include thedevelopment of networks and network thinking where Tim Berners-Leeinventor of the World Wide Web Bill Gates whose company Microsofttouches all our lives Nicholas Negroponte founder-director of MITrsquos MediaLab Don Tapscott management consultant and John Seely Brown chiefscientist at Xerox PARC have made significant contributions (Berners-Leeand Fischetti 1999 Gates and Hemingway 1999 Negroponte 1995Tapscott 1996 1998 Tapscott et al 2000 Brown and Duguid 2000)

Other ideas have come from insights emanating from work that drawsmanagement closer to the world of the living sciences Stanford professorRichard Pascale for example sets out to draw a new management modelbased on complex living systems in Surfing the Edge of Chaos (Pascale et al2000) while Arie de Geus former head of planning at Shell originated theconcept of the learning organization and presents a gardenerrsquos organic viewof managing business in The Living Company (Geus 1999)

Two further strands of thought have come from academia where firstwork on interpreting contemporary consumer behaviour has thrown lighton the New Consumer1 and second there is a growing body of research andwork that highlights value as the new key driver of strategy2

Finally there are managers and consultants who are simply doing it orpreaching it in some form or another Many of these individuals and thecompanies they work for are mentioned or become the focus of short casestudies in the following chapters What starts to distinguish thosepractising NCM is that they share a common vision of a virtual compass

60 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 60

giving direction as to how best to manage the process of marketing to NewConsumers Unlike a traditional compass where the needle always settles ondue North the New Consumer marketing compass uses lsquovaluersquo as a referencepoint This guides thinking in managing the processes of value definitioncreation and delivery ensuring that the organization produces the value thatconsumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

New Consumer Marketing has important implications for consumermarketing It introduces a new approach and a new way of doing it NCMgoes beyond the management of the marketing mix and concerns itselfwith major business issues relating to the organizationrsquos positioning in themarketplace and the consumers it seeks to serve determining how andwhere it competes These issues are of a company-wide and high-levelnature that will impact the business in the long run How well anorganization masters NCM has significant consequences for its futureprofitability Mastery of NCM is dependent on having a framework inplace to enable the organization to describe and position its marketingstrategy This is considered in Chapter 5

SUMMARY POINTS

bull New Consumer Marketing (NCM) is a response to the arrival of theNew Consumer the development of the interactive marketplace andineffective consumption management

bull NCM is a business discipline whose key objective is creatingsustainable competitive advantage through superior processes of valuedefinition value creation and value delivery It demands a change instrategic thinking that moves the consumer up the corporate agenda

bull NCM draws on thinking from the new science of complexityOrganizations need to develop adaptability to survive in the newdynamic marketplace The key is achieving consumer responsivenessthrough insight innovation and organizational agility

bull NCM means rethinking marketing as a living demand system that hasat its core a value-centric orientation

Implications for Consumer Marketing 61

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 61

bull Value is defined as value on the consumerrsquos terms it is the lsquothingrsquo thatconsumers get in return for what they give Brand owners and retailersmust learn how to operate in this customer lsquospacersquo

62 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 62

A New Consumer Marketing model conceptualizes New ConsumerMarketing practice

No management learning is complete without the development of a modelor two Models help in conveying complex ideas but are more than simplevisual aids Business models normally fall into one of two types operationalor conceptual Operational business models offer a way of linking inputsand outputs within the managerial context to improve performance basedon empirical evidence Conceptual business models on the other handprecede this stage of development and assist in making sense of a large bodyof scholarly knowledge and management insight The New ConsumerMarketing model presented in this book is of the conceptual type Itrepresents a collection of assertions that identify important variables andspecifies how they are interrelated and why As such it provides a usefultool for marketers to formulate the way forward

TO RECAP

Chapter 1 established that businesses today are operating in a time ofradical transition the certainties of the production-driven economy havebeen replaced by the uncertainties of the consumption-led economyConsumption and the servicing of consumption now form the centralmotor of contemporary society The tools and techniques of marketingdeveloped mainly in the production-driven era are no longer applicable inthe marketplace of the New Consumer Furthermore marketingrsquoscontribution to business is unclear

Relationship Marketing (RM) was a strategic response by producerswho found themselves operating in mature markets where greater

A Model of New Consumer 5Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 63

profitability was shown to come from developing long-term relationshipswith customers RM theory shifted marketing focus from customeracquisition to customer retention While RM usefully highlighted theimportance of building relationships with customers consumers and otherstakeholders it fell short of enabling organizations to deal effectively withthe New Consumer in a consumption-led economy The implementationof RM strategies through CRM systems has also failed to meetexpectations leaving many marketers and non-marketers unclear aboutwhether they should be focusing on people or process

Chapter 2 showed that consumption management today is about thesatisfaction of consumersrsquo wants and desires rather than solely thefulfilment of their needs A wide range of organizations is recognizing thatconsumers not products drive the process of consumption and thereforethe consumer should be the starting point for developing strategies tomanage consumption In other words consumer marketers should basetheir activities on the 4Cs rather than the 4Ps

The chapter also introduced New Consumersrsquo characteristic attitudes totime their fragmented lifestyles and their motivating desire forexperiences New Consumers challenge current marketing thinking andpractice because they are marketing literate highly demanding and IT enabled In effect the lsquomakendashsellrsquo model of the old production-driven economy has given way to the lsquotellndashmakersquo model of the newconsumption-led economy To succeed now and in the future marketingstrategy must actively address the heterogeneity of these empoweredconsumers

Chapter 3 looked at the key concerns of brand owners and retailers andfound that despite differences in the challenges they face both are seekingsimilar solutions that focus on innovation The impact of globalization iscausing brand owners to rationalize their product portfolios and toquestion the wisdom of keeping manufacturing in-house Should theylsquoown and operatersquo or lsquoinnovate and coordinatersquo Price is a key issue asretailers consolidate and continue to exert downward pressure on pricesRetailers for their part are suffering a decline in share of GDP matched bya decline in consumer loyalty They are increasingly choosing to tradeacross multiple locations formats channels and countries Their partialsolution to satisfying New Consumers ndash micro-retailing ndash is leading to thecreation of narrower and deeper retail offerings

64 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 64

In Chapter 4 New Consumer Marketing was positioned as a response tothe challenges thrown up by changes in consumer culture and the widercompetitive environment It has emerged at the point where the evolutionof consumer marketing meets with the new science of complexity NewConsumer Marketing places the consumer at the centre of the consumermarketing process and works to ensure that the consumerrsquos perception ofvalue is the yardstick of success But this emergent business disciplinediffers from traditional marketing approaches in that it is about managingconsumer demand in an organic manner rather than managing consumersupply in a mechanistic fashion

KEY CHALLENGES FACING NEW CONSUMER MARKETING

The key challenges facing consumer marketers have been thrown up by thetectonic change that has impacted the macro-marketing environment Inthe shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economyconventional approaches to consumer marketing are not succeeding inenabling organizations to master the dynamic complexity of the newmarketplace These key challenges can be summarized as the need to

bull address the concerns of brand owners and retailersbull embrace the New Consumerbull help organizations develop real consumer responsivenessbull lift marketing out of its crisis

Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

Brand owners are facing a period of significant change as a result ofchanging consumer demand This combined with consolidation amongtheir customer base has put them under increased pressure to satisfy thesechanging needs While they would like to be focusing resources oninnovation and new product development instead they have no choice butto ruthlessly attack their cost base in order to meet retailersrsquo price demandsLow-cost production and distribution become the minimum requirementsfor meeting these demands and staying in the game competitiveadvantage is found elsewhere

Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing 65

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 65

Retailers face their own challenges driven by the declining proportionof GDP now attributed to retail spending As the consumer base becomesmore autonomous and diverse the lsquoone size fits allrsquo approach to developingretail concepts is no longer appropriate Both brand owners and retailersare looking to enrich and expand the strategic options open to them Theyneed to adopt a value-centric orientation and an approach to marketingthat enables adaptability and creativity This will empower manufacturersto manoeuvre within the relationship and work towards deliveringdemand-led profit growth while for retailers it will enable them toprofitably master the point of confluence where societal and economicchanges and changes in consumer culture are being played out

Embracing the New Consumer

What is clear is that there is an urgent need for fresh thinking in consumermarketing to find different ways of managing the realities of the newmarketplace The management of consumption now the driving force inthe economy needs to be rethought in light of the New ConsumerSophisticated and demanding at large in an interactive rather than a staticmarketplace the New Consumer creates new challenges for organizationswhich find the conventional tools of strategy making and tactical solutionsdeveloped in the mechanistic age of marketing of little help

Success or failure will ultimately depend on their abilities to understandconsumer behaviour in a time of continuous economic social andtechnological change and at the same time to manage the organizationrsquosresponse However developing understanding is becoming more difficult asthe approach of the production-driven era which characterized consumersby using basic demographics no longer gets us close enough to reallycomprehending buying motivations The predictive power of thesetraditional categories has been eroded and segmentation analyses that breakbuyers into simple caricatures of five or six types for entire markets oftencreate more barriers to effectively connecting with them than they facilitate

Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness

Growth is a business imperative Organizations have learned that theylsquocannot shrink their way to greatnessrsquo Gary Hamel and CK Prahalad in

66 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 66

their book Competing for the Future (1994) came up with the term lsquocorporateanorexiarsquo to describe the state many organizations found themselves inafter the accountants had seized on concepts such as Business Process Re-engineering (BPR) and lean production (known as lsquoleannessrsquo1) andintroduced rationalization and downsizing programmes which left little toinvest in new growth An internally focused cost-cutting strategy deliversshort-term gains but does not address the issue of long-term growthBreaking out of the cost-cutting cycle requires a more far-reaching strategythat anticipates the broader issues that will influence future performance

Growth comes from the demand side of the business which means doingthe same thing better or doing something new To achieve thisorganizations need to connect better with consumers they need tounderstand how to deliver the value that consumers are seeking in acontinually adaptive and creative way For many supply-chain managementhas been the name of the game over recent years However in contrast tosupply-chain thinking New Consumer Marketing takes the consumer as thepoint of departure for the organization not the final destination In effect thelsquopipelinersquo is reversed and organizations become forced to see the deliverycreation and definition of their offering from the consumerrsquos point of viewNew Consumer Marketing goes beyond simply renaming this lsquodemandchain managementrsquo by advocating drawing on learning from the newsciences and conceptualizing marketing as a demand system

Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis

Criticism about the lack of clarity surrounding marketingrsquos contributionto a business has been a feature of reports and articles over recent years Thisis in part driven by the difficulties surrounding the measurement ofmarketing effectiveness but also by the fact that marketing is both equatedwith business unit strategy and located within the marketing mixWithout a clear emphasis as to its role marketing languishes in a lsquono manrsquoslandrsquo and is badly placed to provide strategic leadership

THE NEW CONSUMER MARKETING MODEL

The NCM model recognizes and tackles ndash on a conceptual level ndash theseoutstanding challenges It advocates that organizations embrace the New

The New Consumer Marketing Model 67

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 67

Consumer by adopting a value-centric orientation and refocus theirstructures on the three key processes of value definition creation anddelivery These make up a demand system The central component of avalue-centric strategy is value on the consumersrsquo terms as demanded ndash maybeeven dictated ndash by them This value component marks the process ofexchange that takes place between consumers and the organization it is thelsquothingrsquo that consumers get in return for what they give

A process is defined as an activity or group of activities that takes aninput adds value to it and provides an output to an internal or externalcustomer At the heart of each of these key processes is a core capability ndashinsight innovation and agility These are the capabilities that enable brandowners and retailers to become adaptable and able to offer real consumerresponsiveness

Adopting a process approach entails a different way of working to thatassociated with traditional vertical hierarchical structures of functionaldepartments These static structures act as a barrier to performance Infocusing on processes organizations take on a flatter horizontal structurethat enables them to be more responsive by speeding up decision-makingprocesses and encouraging cross-functional collaboration which helpsmaximize consumer value and operational cost-effectiveness With anemphasis on understanding consumers and their value preferences value-centric organizations draw key employees together in autonomousmultidisciplinary teams to focus resources around the main processesOften these teams are temporary enabling the organization to combineand recombine assets according to the nature of the opportunities thatarise These are firms that regard the organizational whole as greater thanthe sum of its parts However this does not mean that organizations cannotgrow big Tesco for example is one of a number of organizations that hassucceeded in building the virtues of smallness into a large organization

The NCM model adopts the principles of the new science to suggest anorganic approach to consumer marketing Where marketing is viewed as asystemic holistic and dynamically complex activity adaptability becomesan achievable goal In business systemic thinking offers a way ofidentifying the key underlying processes and relationships that help theorganization to adapt create and respond appropriately to the changingmarketing environment In this way organizations are able to break out ofthe binary thinking that has long constrained management theory and the

68 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 68

model encourages the synergy of both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo combined Inshort the static marketing function of the production-driven economybecomes a living demand system in the consumption-led economy

The NCM model lifts marketing out of its crisis in terms of presenting aconceptual guide for practitioners for generating and managing theexchange process under conditions of competition The NCM modelprovides a framework that enables an organization to describe and positionits marketing strategy In doing this it identifies the consumer segments itseeks to serve determining where and how it will compete Working at thelevel of competitive strategy substantiates NCM as a business discipline

Marketers are best placed to provide strategic leadership in themanagement of this critical interface between the organization and the newmarketplace They oversee the exchange process and the necessary alignmentof internal and external factors They are in the best position to understandand interpret emerging trends for the benefit of the organization

The New Consumer Marketing model is presented in Figure 51 and itshows quite clearly how consumer marketing can be conceptualized asconsisting of the three key processes underpinned by a value-centricorientation The model is organic in nature reflected in the use ofhoneycomb-shaped cells each of which has a nucleus

The honeycomb with its familiar six-sided shape provides a usefulmetaphor for explaining how marketing can be visualized as a livingdemand system The honey-bee is well known to us all This is a creaturethat is renowned for its productivity and the fact that it creates its ownvalue proposition in the form of honey Honey manufacture is a task sharedamong various types of bee and each contributes its own instinctiveexpertise The hive members work in harmony to ensure the survival of thecolony Of course this is just a metaphor and there are limits to how far itcan be taken but because it is dynamic iterative and flexible thehoneycomb offers an example of working where people and process arecombined in a continually productive system

The capabilities at the heart of each key process and the seven elementsthat make up the organizational DNA demonstrate the company-widehigh-level approach that is taken by the NCM model By offering a holisticapproach to managing the exchange process in a dynamic marketplace themodel aims to assist managers in developing and implementing successfulconsumer marketing strategies

The New Consumer Marketing Model 69

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 69

The first cell in the demand system is concerned with the process of valuedefinition that is the process of generating and identifying insight in orderto describe and demonstrate value Chapter 6 covers the traditional andnon-traditional ways of generating insight Segmentation then considershow insight is made actionable Finally the importance of re-evaluatingthe role and status of the insight generators within an organization isexplored

The next cell in the demand system is value creation Chapter 7 exploresthe process of creating value that results in a value proposition for a specificaudience Innovation forms the nucleus of this cell and the strategicsignificance of this is covered Other elements in the process include newproduct development branding positioning and pricing Branding isportrayed as the consumerrsquos experience of value and the implications ofthis are discussed through a number of cases

The third key process in a demand system is value delivery Chapter 8discusses how value is communicated and conveyed by an organization to a

70 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

13

13

13 $

Figure 51 The New Consumer Marketing model

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 70

specific audience Media and channels are explored alongside the roles ofservice technology integration and supply-chain management Thewatchword here is organizational agility

Finally Chapter 9 describes the seven elements of the organizationallsquoDNArsquo that makes a demand system viable This chapter describes how thecells of the living system are managed through an exploration of the natureand interrelationships of intuition culture and structure leadershipvision and values employees knowledge management planning andmeasurement These are the elements that instruct and inform the threecells of the living demand system about how to optimize performance andensure competitive survival

The New Consumer Marketing Model 71

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 71

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 72

The process of defining value from the consumerrsquos perspective

Defining value = generating and identifying insight in order to describeand demonstrate value specifically

Watchword = insight

In the production-driven era marketing was informed by a seller-centricorientation In todayrsquos consumption-led economy New Consumers aremore demanding and sophisticated and they inhabit an interactivemarketplace Marketing in this business environment requires a differentorientation New Consumer Marketing is founded on a value-centricphilosophy that focuses on defining creating and delivering the value thatconsumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver Themutuality of the benefits gained by both parties is recognized and asymbiotic relationship is established

Managing this relationship between organization and New Consumerrequires an alternative approach to the command-and-control practices ofthe production-driven era Mechanistic models are no longer appropriateand more organic models are being developed such as the New ConsumerMarketing model presented in this book

Value definition the first cell in the New Consumer Marketing modelis concerned with the process of defining the value consumers are seekingInsight forms the cellrsquos nucleus Insight is described as lsquothe power of seeinginto and understanding things imaginative penetration practicalknowledge and awarenessrsquo It enables the organization to begin the processof connecting with New Consumers in a way that will deliver sustainablecompetitive advantage

Value Definition 6

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 73

In generating knowledge about New Consumers many organizationsclaim that the traditional tools and techniques of market research do notseem to be working as well as they did in former times and marketers are looking to broaden the range they use The aim is to get underneath the skin of consumers in a way that provides insight into theirunarticulated needs and desires To achieve this organizations areincreasingly adopting a bricolage approach in which investigative andinterpretative market research methods drawn from different disciplinesare pieced together In best-practice organizations the insight generated isapplied to the consumer base through the process of segmentation in orderto identify the value that is required by the organizationrsquos most promisingprospects

THE ROLE OF INSIGHT IN VALUE DEFINITION

Although insight is derived from the obvious it is not the same as factInsight is the capacity to penetrate the human condition and see hiddentruths For example it is a fact that snowboarding is a sport but it is aninsight that snowboarders are the only sportsmen and women who feeltreated like outcasts on the slopes Where an insight is turned into acompelling marketing idea it can work to create a powerful bond betweenthe consumer and the brand Brands of clothing for snowboarders thatpromote the idea of belonging to a rebellious tribe have been highlysuccessful for example

Insight provides the means for defining value from the consumerrsquosperspective To interpret consumer insight in a way that is meaningfulorganizations need to understand what are the component factors thatconstitute value These factors will serve one of three purposes for theconsumer they will enhance value maintain value or destroy value Thisvalue concept is illustrated in Figure 61

Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value

Identifying these value-influencing factors and the way in which theyinterrelate is the fundamental aim of all insight-generation activitiesFactors that create or enhance value for the consumer are those that aremould-breaking or have never before been offered in the marketplace

74 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 74

They are the key discriminating factors that set the organization apart fromcompetitors in the eyes of consumers Occasionally these value-enhancersmay be lsquoadoptedrsquo by consumers and become lsquotalking pointsrsquo creating greatword-of-mouth marketing A good example of this is Krispy KremeDoughnuts

Krispy Kreme DoughnutsKrispy Kreme Doughnuts is one of the top five fastest-growing businesses inthe quick-service restaurant sector in North America with plans for expansioninto Europe Krispy Kreme aficionados swear by the companyrsquos hot OriginalGlazed doughnuts which are lsquomanufacturedrsquo before the customerrsquos eyes inthe Doughnut Theater (a visible conveyor belt-based operation) The KrispyKreme Doughnut experience receives popular acclaim (including thatcontributed by cartoon character Homer Simpson who is famous for hislsquoMmm donuts helliprsquo phrase) This strong word-of-mouth marketing has played asignificant role in building consumer awareness of the brand In Canada forinstance the impulse to purchase fresh hot Krispy Kreme doughnuts is sostrong that according to the Canadian marketing director people will driveon average 14 miles to reach a Krispy Kreme store

The Role of Insight in Value Definition 75

V

V

V

C

I

-

T

Figure 61 The value concept

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 75

Companies offering lsquovalue-enhancersrsquo will build market share quicklyrearranging the competitive forces in the marketplace as they do so Forexample the Woolwich Building Society has seen its business improve atthe expense of rivals as a direct consequence of introducing a new kind ofaccount ndash the Openplan Account Openplan creates value for customers byplacing customers in control of their money and enabling them to managetheir complex financial matters easily through using the one account Itallows customers to personalize the names of their various savings lsquopotsrsquoand to tell the Woolwich when to move funds into higher-interestaccounts For consumers Openplan was a welcome change from thetraditional way of banking where customers would be told how theirmoney was being handled and has now been adopted by the Barclays groupof the Woolwich Building Society

Factors that maintain value are the lsquohygienersquo factors or the core featuresand attributes that all competitors must offer to be considered players inthe marketplace These lsquovalue-maintainersrsquo work in combination with thelsquovalue-enhancersrsquo to affirm value with consumers They should be subject

76 Value Definition

Figure 62 Krispy Kreme Doughnuts are a talking point

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 76

to regular sense checking to ensure that they continue to perform thissupportive role It may be the case that one or more of these value-maintaining factors has the potential to be developed into a value-enhancing factor Alternatively some of these factors may have to bedropped from the offering if they show signs of actually reducing itsconsumer value

The third category of factors that make up the consumerrsquos concept ofvalue encompasses those that diminish and destroy value These are thelsquoturn-offsrsquo for consumers Once identified these lsquovalue-destroyersrsquo shouldbe eliminated from the offering but not before the company has anunderstanding of why they have a destructive influence Their significancecan be overlooked where there is not a dynamic approach to generatinginsight Laura Ashleyrsquos experience provides a useful example

Laura AshleyIn the early 1990s Laura Ashley the fashions and furnishings retail chainresearched the behaviour of its own shoppers and noted that if shoppersmade a purchase of curtains particularly made-to-measure curtains from thestore they had a higher propensity to go on to buy matching wallpaper andother home furnishing items as well A pound300 purchase could easily becomethe first of a series of transactions with a combined value of several thousandpounds The purchase of curtains was in effect a trigger to other salesHowever the study revealed that customers were increasingly put off frompurchasing curtains when expert staff were not available This occurred mostoften on Saturdays when the stores used part-time relatively inexperiencedstaff Clearly ordering made-to-measure curtains involves some fairlycomplicated calculations and there is a wide margin for error Customerswould only place an order with someone they believed was competentenough to check their own calculations and order the curtains correctly OnceLaura Ashley realized the impact of its staffing policy the company made thenecessary changes and this resulted in higher levels of customer satisfactionand greater sales of curtains By removing this particular value-destroyer thecompany was able to uphold its customersrsquo value perceptions of the brand

Source H Peck lsquoRelationship Marketing Lessons from Laura Ashleyrsquo casestudy Cranfield School of Management 1995

In some cases organizations have a misperception themselves about thefactors that create value spuriously believing that certain factors add valuewhen in fact they simply maintain or even destroy it These are thelsquophantom factorsrsquo in the value exchange and can often take on sacred status

The Role of Insight in Value Definition 77

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 77

within a business For example the Ford Motor Company believed for along time that it was necessary to include a spare wheel as part of a new caroffering However insight generated by its small car product strategyteam into the requirements of StreetKa buyers showed that a spare wheelwas not important in the purchase decision With this knowledge themisgivings of Ford engineers were overcome and the company went on tosuccessfully launch a model without a spare wheel Drivers are insteadsupplied with a canister of foam which will enable them to fix a puncturesufficiently well to drive to the nearest garage for repair or replacement

Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors

Having identified the components of value that factor in the consumerrsquosperception of value the organization then needs to understand exactlywhat meaning they have for consumers Consumers typically describe thesevalue factors in terms of tangible or intangible features The task formarketers is to delve deeper and question why consumers consider thesefeatures to be important The answers will lie in the benefits the featuresdeliver and the way in which some of these benefits in turn work at alsquohigher levelrsquo in satisfying consumersrsquo personal values Consumer researchinto how Nike trainers are purchased showed that while the inclusion ofthe air sole was a straightforward physical feature of the shoe manyconsumers considered it to be a value-enhancer Consumers felt that thecushioning effect of the sole would provide greater comfort and protectionon the sports ground and this in turn would enable them to play sportbetter The air sole thus satisfied personal values associated with a sense ofwell-being and keeping fit In this way product features benefits andpersonal values become interlinked in the consumerrsquos mind This is showngraphically in Figure 63

Mapping consumer perceptions of products in this way demonstrateswhy the various components of value are important It is a technique thatcan be used to understand how consumers perceive differences betweenproducts revealing to the organization the competitive set in which itoperates Mapping the component factors of value for consumers is basedon a well-established research approach known as meansndashend theory1 Thetheory suggests that consumers make the value exchange as a means ofachieving something else This lsquosomething elsersquo may be about product

78 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 78

benefits or it may be about the satisfaction of personal values Uncoveringthese linkages is key to creating positioning communicating anddelivering the value offer as explained in the next chapters

Insight then enables the organization to define value from theconsumerrsquos perspective It provides a means of identifying underlyingsources of buyer motivation Current thinking as to how this process ofgenerating insight should be undertaken is in a state of flux as traditionalmarket research is being augmented with a range of alternative practices

THE ROLE OF TRADITIONAL MARKET RESEARCH INVALUE DEFINITION

In seeking to get closer to New Consumers marketing managers todayhave an expanding box of tools and techniques at their disposal Thesegenerally fall into one of two categories traditional market research andnon-traditional approaches to market sensing The former comprisesestablished practices which are being updated by new thinking fromvarious disciplines The latter includes a range of approaches from old-fashioned reliance on front-line staff to the contemporary use of IT

As the staple method of insight generation market research aims toanswer fundamental questions about what makes consumers lsquotickrsquo so thatmanagers can refine existing marketing practice Market research emergedas a formalized business process in the latter part of the last centuryalthough the principles it encapsulates go back much further The primeobjective of the modern survey a standard tool of market research is to

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 79

Figure 63 Linking features benefits and personal values

Niketrainers

lsquoGoodhealthrsquo

lsquoEnhancedperformancersquo

lsquoSole with airpocketsrsquo

lsquoSupportfor footrsquo

Features Benefits Personalvalues

Deliver Satisfy

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 79

recapture the lsquodialoguersquo that took place between buyer and seller in the pre-industrial age where the local market or village shop dominated as theplace of buyerndashseller interactions

Formalized market research was first undertaken by manufacturers inthe fast moving consumer goods (fmcg) sector It enabled companies togain a structured and reliable view of the marketplace which they couldthen use to improve their competitiveness They studied markets byborrowing the statistical methods and principles developed by socialscientists to understand and quantify human behaviour They used these incombination with the sampling methods they already had in place toensure quality control on their production lines Some of the earliest bookson the subject of market research were in fact published by leading brandowners such as Cadbury and Shell These books were used as internaltraining manuals in the days before comprehensive reference texts wereavailable The tools and techniques developed then still form the staple ofmost market research plans today What is changing is the mix oftechniques used qualitative approaches are slowly gaining ground at theexpense of quantitative approaches

Using Quantitative Research

Generating insight means focusing largely on answering the lsquowhyrsquoquestion lsquowhy do people dothinkbuy what they dothinkbuyrsquo Data onlsquowho what where when and how manyrsquo on the other hand providesuseful information on context To generate this data organizations usuallyfall back on the use of quantitative surveys These routinely involve largenumbers of respondents who may be chosen on a quota basis to create astatistically representative selection of the larger population Respondentsare all asked the same questions in highly structured interviews to establishevidence of market preferences and trends Quantitative surveys can beconducted on an ad hoc or ongoing basis ndash the latter are often referred to aspanel surveys Ad hoc surveys can provide insight into a potential solutionto a specific business issue and may be repeated on lsquofreshrsquo groups ofrespondents at regular intervals For example Wallrsquos Ice Cream publishesan annual survey on the topic of childrenrsquos pocket money Panel surveys onthe other hand use the same set of respondents to provide regular (weeklyor monthly) feedback on grocery purchases for example Data is collected

80 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 80

in four main ways by post by telephone in face-to-face interviews andincreasingly via web-based surveys

While many marketing managers profess a preference for quantitativesurveys simply because they contain lsquohard numbersrsquo based on the science ofstatistics and sampling theory the pivotal issue is the robustness of thedata evidence David Smith and Jonathon Fletcher (2001) suggest there areseven questions to be answered before reassurance can be given

bull Was the design free of flawsbull Was the sample representativebull Did the questionnaire lsquoworkrsquobull Was the process free of interviewer biasbull Were there any data preparation errorsbull Were there any presentation andor reporting errorsbull Was the interpretation free of flaws

This traditional quantitative approach to research essentially deals withaverages it tells marketers what an average consumer wants But findingaverage consumers is difficult As is often quoted some consumers like icedtea others like hot tea but very few express a liking for lukewarm tea Thispractice of looking for lsquoaveragesrsquo is typical of an aggregate way of thinkingand as has been made clear so far in this book markets today aredisaggregated and characterized by high levels of heterogeneity The NewConsumer cannot be described as lsquoaveragersquo To generate meaningfulinsight into consumer needs and preferences researchers are turning to agreater use of qualitative approaches

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 81

Small numbers

Exploratorydiagnostic

Quota samples

More flexible

More costly per respondent

Large numbers

Confirmatorydefinitive

Representative samples

Less flexible

Less costly per respondent

Figure 64 Qualitative versus quantitative research

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 81

Using Qualitative Research

In seeking to answer the lsquowhyrsquo question researchers increasingly draw onan eclectic pot-pourri of qualitative techniques The roots of qualitativeresearch can be traced to the 1960s the height of the production-drivenera when marketers began to demand deeper insights into the purchasingbehaviour of consumers and motivational research an approach developedby Ernest Dichter gave birth to contemporary qualitative methods ofenquiry In effect the consumer was lsquoput on the couchrsquo and the researcherrsquosinterpretations of attitudes and behaviour were drawn from the fields ofpsychology and psychoanalysis Projective questioning (lsquoif this brand werean animal what kind of animal would it bersquo) and other techniques adaptedfrom these disciplines became the favoured tools for mainstreamqualitative researchers Over the next two decades researchers from otherdisciplines such as sociology and social anthropology added theircontributions introducing notions of humankind as social animals and asproducts of their culture

Today traditional qualitative research commonly features the use offocus groups and in-depth interviews These methods involve askingcomparatively small samples of respondents questions about what they doand think and listening to and interpreting the response The output ofqualitative research is exploratory or diagnostic in nature respondents arenot meant to be representative of the larger population but are intended toreflect the profile of known or desired consumers (Non-consumers are alsooften consulted for their independent input) The aim is to generateunderstanding of the things that bind groups of consumers together

Sadly the impressionistic and non-confirmatory nature of qualitativeresearch has received bad press over recent years to an extent where focusgroups have become demonized in some quarters of the national mediaSmall-sample statistical theory has never been robust enough to convincemany managers that the evidence produced by 36 or 48 people is asaccurate as the aggregated output of 2000 survey respondents There isoften confusion over the way in which the evidence should be used to shapethe strategy of an organization However the notion that it is acceptable towork with limited numbers of respondents is an accepted method in thesocial sciences Grounded Theory2 as this concept is known states thatresearchers should stop collecting fresh information when they get to a

82 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 82

point where it ceases to add anything to the conceptual understanding ofthe issue under investigation (usually after conducting a limited number ofinterviews)

These traditional approaches to quantitative and qualitative research arebased on an assumption that consumers can ndash and are willing to ndash articulatetheir thoughts beliefs feelings and behaviours Organizations wanting tomake breakthrough developments are rather more concerned withunderstanding latent unarticulated consumer wants and desires To meetthis demand on the part of organizations researchers have added to thetoolbox more lsquoin sitursquo investigative methods such as discourse semioticand ethnographic analyses These provide a deeper understanding of themeaning of value factors to consumers bringing organizations closer to thelsquoAharsquo moment when insight becomes obvious

Discourse Analysis

Discourse analysis is a market research technique that looks for patterns inpeoplersquos language such as the metaphors or figures of speech they use tocommunicate about the world around them It can also mean undertakinga review of individual words to gain a deep understanding of whatconsumers mean when they say something Discourse analysis demands adetailed examination of every utterance including those that aretraditionally discarded in the process of analysis This would include howrespondents use what linguists refer to as lsquodiscourse markersrsquo (non-semantic syntactically empty words such as lsquolikersquo lsquoumrsquo lsquoerrsquo lsquokind of rsquo lsquosortof rsquo lsquoyou knowrsquo in the English language) as they are often carriers of culturalmeaning Insight into how consumers use language can help marketersconnect more effectively with consumers as they can use consumersrsquo ownlanguage in creating and delivering value One of the most outstandingexamples of a business that was built on an insightful understanding ofconsumersrsquo language is the most successful pre-school televisionprogramme ever produced ndash Teletubbies

TeletubbiesTeletubbies was developed by Anne Wood and Andrew Davenport forRagdoll Productions (UK) Ltd Anne Woodrsquos worth today is estimated at pound150 million largely due to the success of the fictional made-for-televisioncharacters The success of the original idea can be traced to a combination ofWoodrsquos ideas and business acumen and Davenportrsquos expertise in speech

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 83

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 83

sciences and his understanding of the world of young children The brightlycoloured characters soon established themselves as firm favourites amongpre-school children and their parents with their empathetic use of the pre-schoolerrsquos language and their childlike wonder at the world around them

Semiotics Analysis

Another set of techniques for generating insight draws on the discipline ofsemiotics This is the science of decoding cultural signs which is used byresearchers to get into consumersrsquo subconscious and to predict whereconsumer trends are heading It is based on a belief that we are all shaped byour culture (and not the other way round) and that goods are charged withcultural meaning Consumers use this meaning as a form of expression tosay something about themselves to develop and sustain their lifestylesand to create and sustain social change The role of the researcher is todecode the symbols as a way of understanding culture and what consumersare saying about themselves This kind of insight provides managers with ameans of understanding the role of brands within a culture both theorganizationrsquos own brands and competitive offerings The well-establisheddrinks brand Guinness has successfully employed semiotics analysis

84 Value Definition

Figure 65 The Teletubbies online

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 84

GuinnessGuinness UDV tasked Malcolm Evans and the Added Value agency withdeveloping a user-friendly marketing tool that could be used around the worldto gain insight into the competitive environment (Evans 2001) Usingsemiotics analysis Evans and his team created a tool kit that guidesmarketers in various local markets through the same process This enablesthem to map an understanding of the meaning of beer to consumers in eachof their markets and then to analyse and interpret the advertisements in orderto understand the advertising proposition Having decoded the marketGuinness executives can then work on refining the positioning of their brandsin that market

Ethnographic Analysis

A third approach to generating insight into consumersrsquo latent wants anddesires that is arousing a lot of interest is brand ethnography This is basedon a technique developed in the social sciences in the late nineteenth andearly twentieth centuries where researchers went overseas to researchtraditional lsquotribesrsquo and cultures The underlying philosophy ofethnographic analysis is that the closer the researcher can get to consumersrsquohabitats the greater the chance he or she has of understanding consumersrsquorelationships with other people or with the things that surround them It isbased on a central belief that the researcherrsquos study of consumer behaviouris most accurate and revealing when consumers are immersed in theirnatural environment

This approach to generating insight means taking an analytical view ofconsumers over a long period of time Longitudinal studies as they areknown are not common in marketing because of the high costs involvedand because research results are generally required sooner than anethnographic study can deliver them However some companies such asUnilever consider the investment worthwhile

UnileverUnilever used this ethnographic analysis to understand the opportunitiesarising from the growth of sales of white goods in developing countries Theresults of its year-long study identified broad areas of opportunity forexample the types of clothes bought and worn how clothes are treated andcared for and consumer expectations of clothes care and product benefitsAll of this was set within a cultural context The study also identified astructured framework of issues that the company had not previously been

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 85

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 85

aware of to do with attitudes and behaviours relating to the process of caringfor clothes This new knowledge presented an opportunity to focussubsequent research more closely on these issues with the aim ofuncovering some latent wants and desires that were not being satisfied Thislater research opened up new commercial opportunities for Unilever

Source Lynn McKay New Futures Consumer Scientist lsquoCreatingcommercial value from ethnographic insightsrsquo presented at the Generatingand Leveraging Consumer Insight Conference IQPC London March 2002

As with more standard approaches to qualitative research these threeanalytical methods ndash discourse semiotic and ethnographic analysis ndash arenot designed to be representative of the wider population of consumersbut are intended instead to generate insight that could never be uncoveredthrough focus groups in-depth interviews and quantitative surveysCritics suggest the techniques are very dependent on the interpretationalskills of the individual researcher can often appear to be using asledgehammer to crack a nut and tend to produce more data than isusefully required However these research techniques can revealframeworks for further consumer analysis leading to meaningfulunderstanding of the value consumers are seeking within a wider culturalcontext

Need-States Analysis

As the consumption-led economy becomes more of a reality fororganizations debate about how best to generate insight intoconsumerndashbrand relationships moves on apace In 1994 qualitativeresearch expert Wendy Gordon revived the concept of need-states toexplain the fact that there are more differences between the same consumermaking a brand choice on two different occasions than between twodifferent consumers choosing the same brand on the same occasion Peoplechoose brands to fit a particular context For example consumers maychoose to buy a cheaper bottle of supermarket own-label wine from thesupermarket to drink with a partner at home yet they will choose a moreexpensive shipperrsquos labelled wine to take as a gift when dining at a friendrsquoshouse Their choice of product is influenced by a variety of factorsincluding the meaning of each occasion the environment in which the

86 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 86

wine will be consumed and the other people involved This leads to theidea that a brand can be positioned against a need-state and througheffective brand communications activity can become the brand mostassociated with that need-state

Need-states analysis has at its core an understanding of how consumersmake sense of the world Consumers create a model of the world in theirminds which psychologists refer to as a lsquomental modelrsquo It is theconsumerrsquos representation of how something is or how something happensA brand can be thought of as a type of mental model and this subject isdiscussed further in the next chapter However the notion of mentalmodels is relevant here as the task of the researcher is one of uncoveringconsumersrsquo mental models of the world Thinking about consumerndashbrandrelationships in this way draws on learning from cognitive science thebranch of psychology that deals with how the mind works from theindividualrsquos perspective

Today Wendy Gordon firmly believes that the future of cognitivescience lies in the newly merged disciplines of neuroscience and cognitivepsychology known as neuro-psychology (Gordon 2001) This branch oflearning brings together an understanding of the science of the brain itsphysiology and functions as well as psychological theories For her thisemerging discipline offers the opportunity to truly get inside theconsumerrsquos mind She believes it holds the promise of a scientific basis forunderstanding how human beings create store recall and relate to brandsin everyday life

What is evident from this discussion of the role of traditional(quantitative and qualitative) market research in generating insight is thatorganizations cannot rely on only one of the techniques to deliver absoluteinsight The reality is that both quantitative and qualitative research offermeaningful insight and they work in complementary ways As Gordon saysin her book on qualitative research Goodthinking (1999) lsquoThe case forusing bricolage (a pieced together set of investigative and interpretativemethods drawn from different disciplines) has never been strongerrsquoApproaches to bricolage also draw on non-traditional market sensingtechniques and these are considered next

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 87

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 87

THE ROLE OF NON-TRADITIONAL MARKET SENSING INVALUE DEFINITION

While market research provides a stream of invaluable knowledge aboutconsumers it is increasingly augmented with information derived fromthe use of database systems and technology that enables front-line staff toprovide instant feedback on consumer behaviour This data works in asupplementary fashion providing the organization with the opportunityto develop a more complete understanding of consumer motivation Thisunderstanding is vital for constructing successful value propositions

Using Database Systems

In the 1970s traditional market research methods were the only real sourceof consumer insight By the 1990s marketers were becoming spoilt forchoice as data flowed in ever greater quantities from scanners loyaltyschemes satisfaction surveys service requests account information and soon The challenge facing organizations today is how to fuse data inmeaningful ways so that a holistic or 360-degree picture of consumers iscreated This means understanding how and in what ways an individualconsumer interacts with an organization over time It entails building acorporate memory of the consumer so that the call centre agent is awarethat the customer on the telephone wrote to the companyrsquos head office twomonths earlier and that a subsequent home visit from a member of thecustomer services team went well Achieving a corporate memory meansadopting the philosophy that every encounter with consumers is a mutuallearning experience If they do this organizations can better managerelationships and in turn customer profitability

Customer databases built up through loyalty card schemes enableorganizations to turn consumer information into knowledge and totransform that knowledge into actionable propositions that provideconsumer benefits These benefits strengthen the consumerrsquos bond with the company From the companyrsquos point of view a loyalty scheme thatsimply rewards the consumer but ignores the vital flow of informationprovided by each transaction is a sales promotion scheme however large it might be Loyalty card information when mined effectively can reveal to the company the distinct and different groups of consumers it

88 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 88

serves In Tescorsquos case loyalty card data is central to the way in which thebusiness is run

Tesco ClubcardTesco Clubcard was introduced in February 1995 and today has over 10 million active members Although its start-up costs were high (judged byanalysts to be in the region of pound10 million in addition to the 1 discount onsales estimated at pound60 million) take-up of the loyalty card was significantWithin one month of its launch over 5 million people had joined the schemeand Tesco recorded a 7 increase in like-for-like sales This propelled Tescoto overtake Sainsburyrsquos as Britainrsquos leading retailer of packaged goods

Over the years Tesco has learned how to manage Clubcard data formaximum strategic effect The company admits to having been overwhelmedinitially at the deluge of data generated by the scheme Clubcard hadeffectively opened up a dialogue with members and hundreds of letters andup to 30000 phone calls a week had to be dealt with Specialist datamanagement consultants were brought in to manage the communicationprocess until Tescorsquos own in-house team had built up the necessaryexpertise In fact data-mining skills are so strongly valued at Tesco that thedata analysis firm engaged to analyse Clubcard data is now a subsidiary ofTesco

David Reid Tescorsquos deputy chairman has claimed that lsquoItrsquos very easy tomalign loyalty cards People are always rubbishing them because of theexpense But if you took our loyalty cards away from us it would be like flyingblind They tell us how to attract customers how secondary customersbehave how specific customers react to specific promotions how you caninfluence competitorsrsquo openings how you can spot new trends how you canconvert customersrsquo (Child 2002)

Source lsquoTesco Clubcard Foreverrsquo case study H Peck Cranfield School ofManagement 2002

Using CRM Systems

The introduction of Tesco Clubcard demonstrates that effective customerrelationship management (CRM) systems are not just about automating orspeeding up operations They are also about using data and information to intelligently manage customer relationships Tesco and otherorganizations have learned how to benefit from collecting and mining dataas well as using other techniques such as analytic profiling segmentationand predictive analyses to identify individuals and uncover consumer

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 89

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 89

preferences and propensities (so that optimal profitability can be attained)However despite the extent of the analysis provided by a CRM system it isonly market research that can provide a qualitative perspective MajorCRM system vendors such as Siebel Systems Oracle SAP and Peoplesoftare working on introducing analytical tools to enable their clientcompanies to understand their customers better in this way

The problem in practice is that mechanisms for generating bothquantitative and qualitative customer understanding have not been a partof the historical development of CRM systems This is because thedevelopment of databases to hold behavioural customer data has usuallybeen managed in organizations as a parallel process to that of marketresearch This way of operating evolved during the production-driven eraIn the new marketplace of the consumption-led economy insightgeneration is looked upon as a total process one that encompasses bothtraditional and non-traditional market sensing processes What isimportant is using consumer insight to inform strategic decisions thatimpact value creation and delivery

It should also be noted that fusing data from multiple sources raisesethical as well as technological issues These issues arise because data thathas been gathered anonymously for use in attitudinal and lifestyle surveyscan now be fused together with loyalty card data that has been collectedtogether with full personal details In the process of fusion it becomespossible to identify those individuals who gave their data anonymouslyThis makes them vulnerable to marketing approaches by companies andraises an ethical dilemma for the market researcher who would have givenan assurance to an individual respondent that the data would be handledconfidentially implying any personal details would not be used by theorganization Overall the market research industry has been careful intreading on what they perceive to be a potential landmine of personalprivacy This is acting as a brake on industry efforts to leverage multipleforms of data to generate total consumer insight

To deal with ethical issues professional codes of conduct relating to thepractice of market research were first established in the early 1960s inEurope by ESOMAR (a European association of market researchprofessionals) in association with the International Chambers ofCommerce and in the UK by the Market Research Society The keyprinciple in both sets of standards and in other codes of research practice

90 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 90

worldwide is consumer confidentiality The identities of surveyparticipants are not disclosed in analysis or reporting processes Theprotection of consumer confidentiality encourages respondents to providehonest responses about their attitudes and opinions It also serves to protectthem from unsolicited marketing approaches

In Europe today the professional bodies are working together with EUlegislators to find a way of regulating data protection The US and otherkey nations however have yet to enact any laws on data privacy therebycreating a potential minefield for global players

Using Front-line Staff

Finally insight can also be generated using a combination of front-linestaff and cutting-edge information technology Zara the Spanish fashioncompany that is rapidly expanding globally provides a useful example ofthe way in which insight generated on the shop floor can be used to createand deliver value for consumers in a seamless process Zararsquos strategy isbuilt on having a value-centric orientation in the business where insightprovides a continual flow of opportunity (Zara is also referred to later inChapter 8 and the management of employees including front-line staff iscovered in Chapter 9)

ZaraIn a sector where the average high-street retailer predicts trends often a yearor more in advance Zara can turn a trend around in a matter of days This ispartly because it has its own factories and also because of the emphasis itplaces on communication between the shop floor and the factory floor AsZara UKrsquos managing director Michael Shearwood points out lsquoWe donrsquot try topersuade customers to buy something we make We sell products that thecustomer wants to buyrsquo Store managers are offered fashion collections twicea week and they can select items according to what they feel will suit theirparticular customers They can also communicate specific customer fashiondesires to Zararsquos Spanish headquarters up to four times a day using handheldkeypads A few days later the requested clothes are delivered to the storeconcerned

The deployment of IT at the front line where it can directly impact customersatisfaction was ably demonstrated in one case involving a white blouse Theshirt was delivered to UK stores bearing decorative epaulettes The shirts didnot sell Feedback from customers indicated that women preferred the shirt

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 91

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 91

plain without the epaulettes This information was passed on to the shirtfactory which promptly manufactured an amended version and sent it out tothe UK stores whereupon it became a best seller

In order to know what trends are about to emerge Zara employs a team ofabout 200 designers dubbed the lsquocreation teamrsquo They travel around theworld and their task is to gather vital fashion intelligence from clubs discosuniversity campuses and catwalks The affordable clothes sold by the Zaramanufacturing and retail chain have become popular among leading fashioneditors who revere their quality fashionability and value-for-money prices

Source Based on lsquoThe mark of Zararsquo Linda Watson Style Magazine 2001

THE ROLE OF SEGMENTATION IN VALUE DEFINITION

In best practice organizations consumer insight is turned into marketingaction through the process of consumer segmentation By segmentingconsumers into groups sharing the same or similar needs on the basis ofvalue as defined in their own terms an organization can acquire up-to-the-minute understanding of its consumer base This can then be used todevelop more cost-effective consumer strategies Because consumerperceptions of value change it is important that both value definition andconsumer segmentation are undertaken on a regular and frequent basisOrganizations that can quickly react to change and anticipate shifts in thevalue demands of consumers have a head start on their competitors Suchflexibility and focus on demand lie at the heart of New ConsumerMarketing

Much of the current discussion about segmentation is informed by themechanistic approach of the production-driven era This is characterizedby the use of scientific and rational language and focuses on the way inwhich the organization should segment its market ie lsquochop it uprsquo intomanageable chunks The reality of the consumption-led economy is thatconsumers themselves unwittingly form loose groups whose members areseeking the same or similar sets of value factors In other words consumerssegment their market and form subgroups with their own sets ofrequirements The language associated with segmentation today is more todo with creativity and insight as organizations wrestle with the challengeof finding a means of exposing these segments of consumers and definingthe value that each is seeking

92 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 92

The process of value definition enables the organization to be confidentabout the market in which it operates Segmentation provides the answerto the simple but strategic question lsquoWhat business are we inrsquo Theimportance of answering this question correctly was highlighted back in1960 by Theodore Levitt in his seminal work Marketing Myopia in whichhe draws attention to the importance of viewing a business in a way that isappropriate to the markets in which it operates His classic exampleinvolved the railroads which defined themselves as being in the railwaybusiness rather than in the transportation business lsquoThe railroads did notstop growing because the need for passenger and freight transportationdeclined That grew The railroads are in trouble today not because theneed was filled by others (cars trucks aeroplanes even telephones) butbecause it was not filled by the railroads themselvesrsquo The railroadcompanies had a product-driven view of the marketplace and failed to seethat the value their customers were looking for was more to do with thebenefits derived from transportation and communication than what therailroads simply had to offer

Today too many businesses still define and segment their markets interms of the products they sell Personal financial services companies forexample typically take this product-driven approach defining markets aslsquoendowment policiesrsquo lsquosavings bondsrsquo or lsquosavings accountsrsquo They fail tounderstand the kinds of value their customers are seeking such as thedesire to save for retirement support a child through higher education orsimply have peace of mind

Correct market definition is crucial to the development of a value-centric orientation as it links directly with the mission vision and values ofthe company It enables the organization to accurately articulate what itaims to achieve and to measure its market share and market growthagainst relevant competitors as it does so These issues are consideredfurther in Chapter 9

Creating a Segmentation Analysis

Customer databases built up through loyalty card schemes such as thoseoperated by the major supermarkets can provide a rich source ofinformation on buying behaviour However it should always beremembered that a segmentation analysis built solely on this sort of data

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 93

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 93

can only reflect the motivations of existing customers It becomes a databasesegmentation and not any form of market segmentation Meaningfulsegmentation analysis takes into consideration different types of data

In terms of the ideal number of clusters or segments to aim for in asegmentation analysis the recommendation used to be no more than half adozen but developments in data analysis and data fusion mean thatcompanies can now work with a greater number Figure 66 illustrates howthis larger number can arise

A major supermarket may start with a small number of lsquosuper segmentsrsquoand then subdivide these further until it has reached a large butmanageable number of micro-segments Developments in IT make themanagement of large numbers of segments possible For example threesuper segments may be uncovered in the segmentation analysis shopperswho are quality oriented family oriented and value oriented These supersegments could then be further subdivided into a larger number of sub-segments known as lsquocategory one segmentsrsquo The quality-orientedsegment for example might be made up of four sub-segments time-poorcash-rich shoppers health conscious shoppers shoppers with apreference for organic foods and lsquofoodiesrsquo or shoppers who favour fine

94 Value Definition

Time poorcash rich

Keen onorganics

Qualityoriented

Healthconscious Foodies

VF

Incr

easi

ng g

ranu

larit

y

Figure 66 Segmenting consumer markets a hypothetical supermarket example

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 94

foods In this way the segmentation process would be continued buildingon insight generated through both traditional and non-traditional researchapproaches until an optimum number of segments is reached Theoptimum number of segments is reached when each segment is of anadequate size to provide the company with the desired return oninvestment members of the segment share a high degree of similarity intheir requirements yet are distinct from the rest of the market thesegments are reachable and they can be serviced by the organization interms of value creation and value delivery

Today in the UK the major supermarkets would typically work at ahigh level of segment granularity with up to as many as 3000 segmentscascaded down from their overarching super segments One-to-onemarketing may be talked about as a viable aim but the commercial realityis rather different as for most organizations the costs of delivering thisoutweigh the returns The challenge is to find new analytic approaches tosubdividing the market to an acceptable level of granularity These morecontemporary approaches to segmentation keep managerial focus onunderstanding the value sought by the individual segments and do so in away that prevents consumer profiling from becoming a barrier to consumerunderstanding Where an organization talks in terms of only four or fiveconsumer profiles these can actually hinder an organizationrsquos ability to dealwith the high levels of heterogeneity characteristic of the new marketplace

Having identified its different consumer segments the organization canthen move on to evaluate which segments offer the best businessopportunities Segments may be assessed in terms of market size andmarket trends market share current and future profitability consumersatisfaction andor consumer loyalty Companies usually manage aportfolio of segments made up of high earners steady earners and futurepotential earners Any low earners need to be managed carefully ndash often asmall increase in the number of times consumers forming this segmentmake a purchase can result in large improvements to the bottom line

Finally continuing with this supermarket segmentation example theanalysis could then be used to understand the shopper profile of existingstores and to define value for example through ascertaining whatpercentage of consumers in each of the category one segments frequentsparticular store types (eg large format versus convenience) or by location(out-of-town versus high-street stores) The resultant insight could be used

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 95

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 95

to specify new store developments and hence tailor the value offering moreclosely to the wants and needs of consumers Given that CRM systems canprovide constant streams of up-to-date consumer data segmentationanalyses can become a dynamic part of a demand system A recent projectjointly undertaken by Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp Gamble demonstrates thispoint

Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp GambleIn an innovative example of collaborative effort Sainsburyrsquos and Procter ampGamble worked together to exploit the wealth of data contained withinSainsburyrsquos Reward Card database in order to deliver a holistic segmentationanalysis of the health and beauty care (HampBC) shopper Their study linkedactual purchasing behaviour to attitudinal data using a big base sample Inthe UK the HampBC market was worth almost pound11 billion in 2002 and is forecastto grow 21 to 2006 with Sainsburyrsquos occupying third place behind Bootsand Tesco for sales A major challenge facing Sainsburyrsquos is the differencebetween the HampBC shopper and the grocery shopper Shoppers atSainsburyrsquos are typically aged 45 years plus while the HampBC shopper isgenerally younger Also the overall store shopper is more upmarket than theSainsburyrsquos HampBC shopper

Using loyalty card data Sainsburyrsquos identified eight segments of shoppersbased on their purchasing affinity to different product categories within theHampBC aisle To complement this understanding two additional pieces ofresearch were jointly carried out to provide data on the wider HampBC shoppingcontext Both Sainsburyrsquos shoppers and non-shoppers of the HampBC categorywere surveyed quantitatively in order to gain insights that would enableSainsburyrsquos to build greater penetration among non-shoppers and strengthenshopper loyalty among existing shoppers

Analysis of this data produced a rich source of insight that enabled bothparties to learn what each of the segments was looking for in terms of HampBCproducts their loyalty to Sainsburyrsquos who they perceived as the competitionand the type of marketing activity they preferred The segmentation analysisresulted in actionable results for both Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp Gamblewhich were then exploited jointly and separately The HampBC strategy that wassubsequently developed encompassed both existing and new shoppersrsquoneeds and helped grow Sainsburyrsquos HampBC category ahead of the market

Source Roger Allford Natalie Evans and Caroline Ward lsquoA step forward inunderstanding shoppers using segmentation techniquesrsquo paper presented at the ESOMAR Conference lsquoConsolidation or renewalrsquo BarcelonaSeptember 2002

96 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 96

As this case example shows an organizationrsquos approach to segmentationis about more than the analytical techniques it employs It makes astatement about the organizationrsquos market orientation the way it sees themarketplace and how well it understands the consumers it chooses to serveSegmentation enables the organization to create competitive advantage foritself by defining value in a way that makes clear how it can profitablycreate greater value for consumers New Consumers raise many challengesfor organizations and as this chapter demonstrates they are impacting theway in which insight into their needs and desires is generated This inturn raises questions about the role and status of the insight generatorswithin a business

THE ROLE OF INSIGHT GENERATORS3 IN VALUEDEFINITION

An acceptance of the vital importance of insight to successful NewConsumer Marketing makes it necessary to review the role and status ofthose people within the organization who are generating the insight Theseare traditionally staff who are members of the market research teamHowever given the wider understanding of how insight can best begenerated this classification should also include those responsible for theanalysis of CRM data All too often market research is perceived to be alow-grade commodity business with an output that does not go beyondcompleting surveys As commentators said over ten years ago there is aneed to prove that market research is about more than clipboards andopinion polls

If insight generators are to assume a real decision-making role then theyneed to be equipped with a skill set that enables them to draw on the mosteffective combination of data generation services externally as well as anability to communicate the learning internally These insight managersmust become proactive consultants within their organizations rather thanacting as simple reactive service providers They need to ensure that theinsight generated becomes the dynamic cornerstone of all marketingactivities In best-practice organizations this appears to be happeningHowever there are perhaps too many junior managers joining the marketresearch profession who are not being trained to take on this enhanced roleThis can only lead to the marginalization of the profession over time

The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition 97

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 97

Insight generators therefore occupy what is known as a lsquoboundary-spanningrsquo role in the New Consumer Marketing model These are staff wholsquoconnect an informal network with other parts of the company or withsimilar networks in other organizationsrsquo (Cross and Prusak 2002) Theyoperate at the periphery of the organization and their roles are strategicallyimportant as facilitators of linkage between the cells of a demand system Itis through their behaviour that the organization adapts (or fails to adapt) tochanges in the marketplace In short they function as lsquosensory organsrsquo Asthis role is seldom recognized within organizations there is no one titlethat identifies these influential staff

These boundary-spanning managers are charged with generating adynamic flow of insight so that insight generation becomes an ongoingprocess and is not simply seen as an annual or six monthly exercise Theyare responsible for ensuring that this insight informs the other two cells ofthe New Consumer Marketing model through the organizationrsquos approachto knowledge management (as explored in Chapter 9) Gaining amomentum in insight generation enables the organization to create aliving demand system as it gains a continuous source of insight on which tofocus its value creation and delivery processes The benefits of this processapproach to insight generation are that brands can retain their currencywith consumers as the organization adapts to shifts in consumerperceptions of value This ability of an organization to shift in line withchanging consumer perceptions of value is well demonstrated in the casesof Lucozade and Skoda

Lucozade and SkodaLucozadersquos success in the drinks industry is underpinned by its expertise inreading value trends and responding to them appropriately The Lucozadebrand has shifted from being a soft drink aimed at people who are unwellsummed up in the strapline lsquoLucozade aids recoveryrsquo to a sports drink thatlsquoreplaces lost energyrsquo to todayrsquos competition-conscious brand that serves asan lsquoenergy boostrsquo

Car manufacturer Skoda has worked in a similar fashion to remain relevantto consumers VW its parent company acquired the brand in 1991 and hasinvested in it alongside its other marques Volkswagen Audi and Seat Thevalue associated with Skoda vehicles has changed dramatically from onethat was the butt of jokes to one that gains consumer trust Skodarsquos popularitytoday builds on a simple but clever message lsquoWersquove changed can yoursquo

98 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 98

This first cell of the New Consumer Marketing model is concerned withthe process of defining the value consumers are seeking Value definitiondrives the demand system by generating relevant insight that provides afocus for the processes of value creation and value delivery To achieve valuedefinition organizations are increasingly adopting a bricolage approachthat pieces together investigative and interpretative methods drawn fromdifferent disciplines

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Insight provides the means of defining value from the consumerrsquosperspective

bull Consumer perceptions of value shift over time Adopting an ongoingdynamic approach to insight generation ensures that the organizationrsquosperspective of the marketplace does not remain fixed in time

bull Value is made up of component factors that work to enhance maintainand destroy value Certain value-enhancers may be adopted byconsumers as talking points delivering valuable word-of-mouthmarketing

bull Insight generation is a total process encompassing traditional marketresearch and non-traditional market sensing

bull Insight is made actionable through the process of segmentation whichhelps the organization answer the question lsquowhat business are we inrsquo

bull Segmentation enables an organization to achieve competitiveadvantage by clarifying how it can create greater value for consumers

bull Insight generators have an influential boundary-spanning role withinthe organization and should be valued as lsquosensory organsrsquo

Summary Points 99

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 99

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 100

The process of creating value resulting in a value proposition for a specificaudience

Creating value = bringing into being or form or investing with new form

Watchword = innovation

Value creation in the consumption-led economy must be informed by anunderstanding of the value that consumers are looking for and assessed interms of consumersrsquo value criteria Satisfying consumer demand today isabout winning the custom of discerning consumers and not simplyproducing good products This second cell of the New ConsumerMarketing model is a fundamental component of a demand system as itmoves the organization from defining value to actually creating andcommunicating that value effectively

Key to the process of creating value in the marketplace is identifying andutilizing the organizationrsquos value-producing resources (eg employeestechnological know-how and capital) to meet consumer needs andexpectations profitably At the heart of this process is the concept ofinnovation Derived from the Latin word innovare meaning to renew oralter innovation in consumer marketing is about creating new solutionsthat offer real value to consumers In many organizations innovation hasbecome separated from marketing giving rise in part to the crisis inmarketing New Consumer Marketing with its emphasis on market-ledinnovation recombines the two and provides a means of addressing both thedemands of New Consumers and the concerns of brand owners and retailers

The desired output of the value creation process is a value propositionthat consumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver The

Value Creation 7

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 101

value proposition sets out the value exchange between buyer and supplierand reinforces the mutuality of the relationship As stated in Chapter 6 theconstruction of a successful value proposition depends on first being able todefine value by generating relevant insight into consumer demand and therelative attractiveness of different consumer segments The organizationcan then work to create this value and ultimately to deliver it

In building a value proposition out of the value-producing resources ofthe organization there are a number of elements to consider These includenew product development branding positioning and price Each plays animportant role in the value creation process Of paramount importancehowever is the role of innovation for innovation is what underpins thesuccess of all the elements of value creation

THE ROLE OF INNOVATION IN VALUE CREATION

The business has two and only these two basic functions marketing andinnovation Marketing and innovation produce results all the rest are costs

(Peter Drucker 1985)

In the opening chapter of this book marketing was presented as adiscipline in crisis whose contribution to business is in question Thisstems from the fact that many managers see marketing as a cost rather thanan investment and this itself is driven by the lack of a common approach tomeasuring marketing effectiveness (a subject considered further in Chapter9) The issue for many managers today is that marketing no longer appearsto be delivering innovation somehow the two have become separatedNew Consumer Marketing which places innovation at the core of valuecreation offers a way of putting strategic intent back into marketing andso providing a means of lifting marketing out of its crisis

The value-centric organization is marked by a corporate environmentthat seeks performance improvement through superior value definitioncreation and delivery Innovation in business provides a way of creatingnew value-producing resources or endowing existing ones with anenhanced potential for yielding profit It is the result of a complex set ofprocesses involving organizational learning culture leadership andmanagement style Innovation is important on a macro-economic levelbecause it is associated with high rates of economic growth and high levels

102 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 102

of employment Within individual firms innovation enhancesorganizational performance The commercial significance of innovation issupported by the findings of PricewaterhouseCoopers (1999) whichsurveyed 80 companies in seven countries in 1999 It found that newproducts and services introduced in the preceding five years accounted for a10 increase in turnover and generated a 25 increase in the annual rateof revenue growth It also found that new products and services wereassociated with a 9 increase in annual total shareholder returns

While the firm that innovates first in a market obtains the early moveradvantage this is only sustainable while competitors cannot imitate orneutralize its lead To stay ahead the firm must ensure that innovation is adynamic capability fully embedded within the culture of the organizationThe roots of culture lie hidden in the deep-seated collection of beliefs andassumptions that are commonly held in an organization They are reflectedin everyday life as lsquothe way things get done around herersquo Innovation shouldnot be treated simply as a series of individual projects but as a continuoussearch for opportunities to improve the value proposition to such an extentthat new market space is opened up A value-centric orientation providesthe foundation for achieving this

Because of the clear business benefits of having an innovative approachto value creation innovation is something of a holy grail for businessesThis is especially true for brand owners and retailers who find themselveshaving to rethink their strategies in line with the macro-market shift froma production-driven to a consumption-led economy As discussed inChapter 3 brand owners are looking for improvements in brandperformance that will give them an opportunity to assert their positionwith retailers and to move away from a position where they can do littleother than ruthlessly attack their cost base in order to meet retailersrsquo pricedemands Brand owners want to outperform their rivals in terms ofcapturing market share developing consumer and brand loyalty andearning a rate of profit higher than the industry norm Retailers for theirpart are seeking step changes that will reverse current trends which haveseen retail decline as a percentage of GDP over recent years They need tofind new and innovative ways to manage retail offerings in highlyfragmented markets

For both brand owners and retailers a focus on innovation in valuecreation offers the most promising source of organic growth This means

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 103

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 103

working to create the next wave of brand and retail experiences based onhaving a consumer-relevant value-centric orientation in the business and amanagement culture that makes innovation possible

Consumers as Innovators

In the production-driven economy the role of the consumer in theinnovation process was highly limited ndash so much so in fact that in somecases of marketing consumers appeared to be forgotten altogether In theconsumption-led economy the active knowledgeable and demandingNew Consumer is the focal point of product and service innovationOrganizations that embrace New Consumer Marketing acknowledge thisand believe that the consumer can be a source of insight and innovationleading to greater business competence Such firms are characterized byhigh levels of consumer involvement they recognize consumers asinnovators

The concept of using consumers in direct interface with businessmanagers was termed lsquoTapping the creativity of consumersrsquoTM by theSynectics Corporation (wwwsynecticsworldcom) an internationalconsultancy specializing in innovation and change Synectics consultantsengage consumers in the problem-solving process in the search forbreakthrough initiatives For example one client the National FarmersrsquoUnion (NFU) was brought together with consumers at the point ofpurchase where it was observed that there was no easy way for consumersto identify the source of the food they were buying This was an issue ofserious concern in the UK following a number of high-profile food scaresThe insight generated from speaking to grocery shoppers directly was thatthey wanted a convenient way to ensure food safety This may seem anobvious requirement but it led to the idea of a new farm-assurancebranding scheme The Farm Assured brand authenticating how the foodhas been produced hit the shelves within a record nine months due to theinvolvement of all stakeholders (farmers consumers NFU staffwholesalers and retailers)

By eliciting consumersrsquo hidden desires and enabling them to participatefully in product development organizations can use consumers as agents ofchange in the same way that a grit of sand can develop into a pearl withinan oysterrsquos shell Cadbury Schweppes and Johnson Controls companies

104 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 104

working in diverse sectors have both made maximum use of consumers toshape and sell products successfully

Cadbury SchweppesCadbury Schweppes confectionery uses a five-stage process known aslsquoALICErsquo to drive innovation in its Consumer Planning and ResearchDepartment The acronym stands for alignment (A) of the objectives of theresearch with the consumer problem leverage (L) of existing knowledgewithin the business immersion (I) in the world of the potential consumerconnection (C) through insight and execution (E) to drive growth The launchof the Boost Guarana chocolate bar in September 2002 followed this strategicdevelopment pathway Its genesis was based on the insight that the highlydemanding lifestyle of todayrsquos consumers takes a heavy toll on their mentalenergy This learning was generated by a cross-functional team andsupported by desk research and consumer surveys that used a raft ofethnographic and direct questioning techniques The stimulant properties ofBoost Guarana match those of energy drinks that claim to deliver improvedattention alertness and concentration

Source Patsy Richardson Head of Consumer Planning and ResearchCadbury Schweppes lsquoHow to maximise the benefits of using consumerinsight to drive innovationrsquo paper presented at the lsquoUsing Consumer Insightfor Profitable Innovationrsquo Conference IQPC London October 2002

Johnson ControlsJohnson Controls is part of an automotive systems group that makes seatsand car interiors It operates in the business-to-business (B2B) sector as asupplier to well-known car manufacturers such as BMW and Nissan Thecompany believes that lsquoconsumer focused innovation and productdevelopment will become an increasingly important competitive differentiatorrsquoRecognizing that cars need to deliver more than lsquojust transportationrsquo and thatcar interiors need to surprise and delight end users Johnson Controls drawson the views of both automotive experts and car drivers to understand themotivating values of car drivers (eg family safety pragmatism harmony)Consumers are consulted on product design and associated issues such aswhat luxury means for car drivers and how drivers actually use the technologyavailable in cars This insight-turned-innovation is then used as a corecompetence by Johnson Controls in its relationships with its immediatecustomers the car manufacturers

Source Jemina Martinez Head of Advanced Consumer Research JohnsonControls lsquoGetting out of the car and into peoplersquos livesrsquo paper presented atthe lsquoUsing Consumer Insight for Profitable Innovationrsquo Conference IQPCLondon October 2002

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 105

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 105

Innovation through Process or People

Many companies take an overtly process-oriented approach to managinginnovation while others regard innovation as a capability vested in peopleManagerial thinking is currently caught between these two contrastingapproaches How should an organization seeking to improve itsperformance by becoming more innovative achieve this New ConsumerMarketing offers a way of seeing these two approaches as part of the samesolution to meeting the needs of New Consumers and providingbreakthrough opportunities in business development for brand owners andretailers

On the one hand there is a clearly identified and well-used process thatwas formalized by Robert Cooper an academic researcher known as thestagendashgate process (Cooper 1993) This is shown in Figure 71 Thestagendashgate process provides a way of screening and monitoring theprogression of projects to ensure that progress is linked to the successfulachievement of business goals It subdivides new product developmentactivities into a series of stages so that managers can lsquoownrsquo specific groups ofactivities and be responsible for achieving the objectives within thoseactivities In order to proceed from one stage to the next the project mustsatisfy the objectives that were set for that stage Failure at any stage in the process will result in the abandonment of the project The definition ofthe developmental stages and the evaluation criteria will be specific to theorganization concerned The stagendashgate process aims to reduce risk and isusually associated with an incremental approach to innovation

Figure 71 The stagendashgate process Adapted from Cooper (1993)

106 Value Creation

Initial Second Decision on Post- Precommercialization Post-screen screen business case development business implementation

review analysis review

Ideation Preliminary Detailed Development Testing and Full production andinvestigation investigation validation market launch

(build businesscase)

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 106

On the other hand there are many examples of organizations whereinnovation is directly attributable to the leadership and management styleof an individual (usually the CEO) whose commitment to innovation isreflected in the culture of the organization A common feature of theseorganizations is a focus on seeing things from the consumerrsquos perspectiveAs a result they tend to be more effective in the marketplace For exampleStelios Haji-Ioannou founder of the low-cost carrier easyJet used to takeup to four flights a week on easyJet to experience what it was like as apassenger using his airline The feedback and insight he gained from thisunusual routine was used to improve consumer value

Michael Dell1 founder and namesake of the worldrsquos leading computerservices provider says lsquoOne of the challenges of a company that issucceeding is that you run the risk of complacencyrsquo He encourages histeam to explore incremental improvements and to experiment with ideasthat add value primarily in terms of efficiency EasyJet and Delldemonstrate that fostering an innovative culture starts from the top it isdriven by the way that senior managers manage and relish risk setchallenging but measurable goals support employees who take a risk intrying something different champion new ideas and encourage diversityof thought and approach

Innovation as a Dynamic Capability

In order to synthesize this binary behaviour (seeking efficiency throughprocess or effectiveness through people) New Consumer Marketingencourages a systemic approach Drawing on learning from the livingsciences it helps in identifying the key underlying processes andrelationships within the organization that enable it to become as adaptiveand creative as possible in a changing market environment This approachis exemplified by 3M(UK)2 a company that continuously and consistentlydemonstrates success in innovation

3M(UK)The story of the 3M Post-itTM probably 3Mrsquos most well-known product hasbecome a classic example of innovation 3M manager Art Fry sought a way ofkeeping the bookmark in his hymn book from slipping out onto the floor Heconnected this desire to his knowledge of an adhesive that had beendiscovered by the company a number of years before but discarded as it was

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 107

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 107

considered to be ineffective at sticking With the support of the company Fryredeveloped the adhesive successfully and this led to the Post-itTM a hugelysuccessful stationery innovation

3M(UK) employees are given the freedom to take risks and try out newideas and this has led to a steady stream of new products John Muellerformer Chairman and CEO of 3M(UK) is quoted as saying lsquoWe want toinstitutionalize a bit of rebellion in our labs It has been said that thecompetition never knows what we are going to come up with next The factis neither do wersquo This is indicative of a mindset that actively encouragesradical innovation The difference between this mindset and one that leadsto incremental innovation is so current research suggests (Dyck 2002) todo with the way in which the organization experiences the complexity ofthe problem it is facing Where an organization perceives the problem tobe lsquouncertainrsquo it is essentially saying that it knows the variables at play butdoes not know how to configure them to find the solution Theorganization that perceives the problem to be one of lsquoambiguityrsquo is goingfarther and saying that it does not know what variables are at play and doesnot know the formula for solving the problem

This latter attitude is reflected in Muellerrsquos words and is associated withcompanies that seek to absorb complexity rather than simply to reduce itOrganizations that work to reduce complexity are constrained to anincremental approach Those whose starting point is that they do not knowhow to solve the problem can work to create options to develop potentialsolutions and in doing so learn as an organization Taking a broader viewof the complexity of the marketplace and the issues facing consumers is lesscomfortable for organizations as it throws up more challenges and greaterrisk but it can lead to more radical innovation where the rewards arepotentially superior

Therefore managers seeking to improve organizational performance bybecoming more innovative need to start by deciding whether they areuncertain or ambiguous about the complexity of the problem they arefacing Their answers will be based on their understanding of themarketplace and will determine whether they then work to reduce orabsorb the complexity This more reflective approach is not a capabilitythat was called for in the production-driven era where a command-and-control attitude dominated Then organizations produced goods andservices and persuaded consumers to buy them In todayrsquos consumption-

108 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 108

led economy where consumer markets are highly fragmented andchanging fast the successful players are those who are able to produce valuein a consistent and cost-effective way The market leaders however go onestep further ndash they constantly seek to differentiate themselves fromcompetitors by offering superior value in the form of new products andservices They are capable of absorbing complexity and mastering theorganizational response to market change

A Radical Approach to Innovation

Organizations can best distance themselves from the competition bychanging the rules of the marketplace This starts with generating insightinto consumersrsquo problems and expectations and then defining them in sucha way that creating the value consumers seek becomes obvious As discussedin the previous chapter this is the desired output of an effectively operatingfirst cell in a demand system To achieve value definition the organizationmay well find itself redefining the consumer needs the industry is focusingon and thus contributing to industry understanding of the value-addingfactors that matter to consumers These might then form the basis of newperformance criteria for companies in that sector Those companies that failto embrace the new criteria may risk losing out

Virgin GroupVirgin Group is an organization that has demonstrated time and again how tobring radically new products and services into the marketplace without beingthe first to market in a particular sector The companyrsquos understanding of thevalue-adding factors that matter to consumers has enabled it to successfullyoperate in markets where it has taken on established giants in a lsquoDavid versusGoliathrsquo battle for consumer loyalty For this reason Virgin has gained areputation as a challenger brand For example Virgin Mobile offeredconsumers a single simple tariff when other operators were confrontingconsumers with an array of complicated tariffs Virginrsquos uncomplicatedapproach won it 17 million customers by mid-2002 and catapulted thecompany into the position of the fifth largest mobile operator in the UK withinthree years of entering the market Virgin Mobilersquos competitors have sincecopied the simple tariff system effectively raising the key performancecriteria for the industry

Other Virgin businesses such as Virgin Atlantic and Virgin One haveimpacted their markets in a similar way When Virgin Atlantic launched its

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 109

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 109

lsquoUpper Classrsquo seating the idea of offering the large seats and legroom oftraditional First Class for the price of a business class ticket was new andwon Virgin Atlantic a lucrative market share of key international routes VirginOne again demonstrated the benefits of keeping it simple when it introducedthe Virgin One bank account (now known as One) which enabled consumersto manage all their finances including mortgages savings and income froma single account The new type of bank account made its mark in an industrythat had formerly offered consumers a range of banking products and wherecorporate emphasis was on persuading consumers to buy these productsrather than developing products to suit consumer needs Virginrsquos consistentlysimple and consumer-focused approach to innovation in value creation isindicative of a true value-orientation within the organization and also of amanagement culture that makes innovation possible

Organizations such as Virgin Group take the consumer as their startingpoint and not the final destination for their products and services They areless interested in simply building advantage over their competitors andrather keener on providing consumers with a step change in value thateffectively creates a new market The competition is left standing as oldsources of advantage are destroyed and new ones are created

W Chan Kim and Renee Mauborgne two professors from the Frenchbusiness school INSEAD have published extensively in this area and theyuse the term lsquovalue pioneersrsquo to describe the Virgin Group and similartypes of organization (1997 1999ab 2000) These are businesses engagedin what Kim and Mauborgne define as lsquovalue innovationrsquo a process thatmakes the competition irrelevant and creates new markets by focusing onwhat value needs to be produced They cite examples such as CallawayGolf the US golf club manufacturer which in 1991 launched its lsquoBigBertharsquo golf club The product rapidly rose to dominance taking marketshare from rivals and expanding the total golf club market because itsradically new design (the club has an unusually large head) offered playersa way of overcoming the difficulties associated with hitting a small golf ballwith a little golf club head For Kim and Mauborgne Callaway likeCharles Schwab amp Co in investment brokerage IKEA in home productsretail and Wal-Mart in discount retailing illustrates their thesis that thereis a clear link between high rates of business growth and a radical approachto innovation

This stance contrasts with the traditional view that consumers canprovide only limited help in innovative product and service development

110 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 110

as they are constrained by their experience and unable to articulateanything other than incremental ideas

THE ROLE OF NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT IN VALUECREATION

There is a lot of debate around the question how new does innovationreally have to be lsquoNewnessrsquo can be understood in a number of differentways The word lsquonewrsquo is often used in marketing communications forexample in advertisements and mailings or on product packagingHowever in many instances consumers could be forgiven for asking whatmight actually be new about certain products or services Newness is oftendefined by an incremental change to an existing product or service It maybe a barely discernible alteration to the pack size or ingredients base Sucha slight improvement in the value offering might make it lsquonew to thecompany but not new to the marketrsquo

Alternatively the newness element might be more extensive to thepoint where consumers change their purchase behaviour For examplewhen Mars launched its new Celebrations brand the Roses and QualityStreet brands already dominated the marketplace for boxed wrappedchocolates for everyday occasions But Mars had undertaken in-depthresearch into potential consumers and used the resulting insight toposition the new brand as lsquoall your favourite countline products inminiaturersquo The launch of Celebrations succeeded in attracting a youngerconsumer compared to rival brands and Mars captured a significant shareof the UKrsquos pound600 million boxed chocolate market within a short period oftime

In essence product newness is a spectrum carrying increasing amountsof business risk for the organization In their report New Product Managementfor the 1980s Booz Allen amp Hamilton (1982) provide a way of looking atinnovation in terms of product newness They identify six categories of newproduct development as defined by the productrsquos level of newness to thefirm and its perceived level of newness to consumers Their grid displayingthe various categories is shown in Figure 72

It is evident from Figure 72 that the new product developments withlowest risk are those created through cost reduction and brandrepositioning Cost reduction involves the organization in paring down the

The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation 111

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 111

content of the value proposition by a specific amount to save on costWhere the reduction is minimal it may not affect consumer perceptions ofvalue However excessive cost reduction or too many small reductions overtime does become noticeable Brand repositioning represents relativelyhigher risk as it usually involves presenting brand revisions of some form tothe consumer The organization may or may not succeed at realigning thebrand with consumer expectations but it is already familiar withmanaging the brand

New product developments that carry intermediate risk include lineextensions and product improvements The usual strategy here is toenhance consumer value by increasing product choice and productperformance respectively For example Muumlller the fourth largest grocerybrand in the UK has consistently increased the range of yoghurt varietiesto more than 20 in order to drive sales volume and market share A numberof other food brands have chosen to focus instead on product performanceand have altered their recipes to include added vitamins and fibre thusmoving their brands into the functional foods or lsquonutraceuticalsrsquo sector ofthe market

The highest risk new product developments are ones that are both newto the company and new to consumers These are known as lsquonew-to-the-

112 Value Creation

Figure 72 Categories of new product development Adapted from Booz Allen ampHamilton (1982)

P

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 112

worldrsquo introductions The annals of marketing are littered with examplesof unsuccessful new-to-the-world products such as Betamax videotape andClive Sinclairrsquos C5 electric car These new products failed to deliver anysubstantial consumer benefit and were therefore not adopted by consumersThese attempts at innovation were not anchored in any form of meaningfulconsumer insight

Many organizations mistakenly believe that adding more technology toa product or service will result in value-adding innovation However whatconsumers want from technology is new or enhanced value that will extendtheir abilities and provide them with greater ease of use and convenienceSuccessful new-to-the-world innovation succeeds because it represents agenuine breakthrough in delivering a value proposition based on a deepunderstanding of the nature of the value consumers seek This new-to-the-world form of innovation is also known as radical or discontinuousinnovation as referred to earlier The introduction of Mars Ice Cream is anexample of this type of approach

Mars Ice CreamIn the late 1980s ice cream was a price-sensitive seasonal commodity Themarket was large (pound587 million) but stagnant and dominated by Walls andLyons Maid which held 45 and 14 market share respectively Most icecream was vegetable-fat based and generally came in the form of ice-lolliescones and family brick packs Until Mars entered the market in 1988 icecream was viewed largely as a childrenrsquos snack and demographics showed itcould be a shrinking market However Mars identified a gap in the existingmarket for a premium-price branded ice cream It was the first to launch sucha product and gained a lead over other ice cream manufacturers The newproduct was sold in the same outlets that stocked the existing range of Marsconfectionery enabling the company to use the same sales force and existingresources This allowed significant economies and lessened the financialburden of entering a new market

THE ROLE OF BRANDING IN VALUE CREATION

Brands play an important role in the value-creation process and thechanging marketing landscape created by the shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy has already brought forth newthinking about them and their meaning for consumers Initially brandsemerged as a simple means of identifying the manufacturer of a product

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 113

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 113

For example in 1266 in medieval England bakers were required by law toput their mark on every loaf of bread sold so that if there were anydiscrepancies in weight the baker at fault could be traced The practice ofbranding a product with an lsquoidentityrsquo has continued and developed Todaythe brand concept is highly complex having evolved beyond the coreproduct to include various kinds of added value Brands are often depictedas a lsquofried eggrsquo with a functional centre surrounded by layers of lesstangible elements such as reputation pack design advertising guaranteesand so on This view of brands typified the approach of marketers in the1950s and 1960s when brands were seen as lsquolifeless manipulable artefactsrsquo(Hanby 1999) and consumers were seen as passive purchasers

Brand thinking moved ahead slowly until the early 1980s whenresearcher Judie Lannon and psychologist Peter Cooper (1983) expressedthe idea that lsquowhat turns a product into a brand is that the physical productis combined with something else ndash symbols images feelings ndash to producean idea which is more than the sum of the parts The two ndash product andsymbolism ndash live and grow with and on one another in a partnership ofmutual exchangersquo This concept began a process of seeing the brand notjust as the producerrsquos idea of the product but also as the consumerrsquos idea ofthe product giving rise to the notion of brands being co-created byproducers together with consumers

By the mid-1990s the nature of the intangible value inherent in thebrand had evolved to the extent that Harvard professor Susan Fournier(1996) described consumersrsquo relationships with mass brands as able tolsquosoothe the ldquoempty selvesrdquo left behind by societyrsquos abandonment of traditionand community and provide stable anchors in an otherwise changingworldrsquo At the close of the twentieth century John Grant author of theinfluential New Marketing Manifesto (1999) observed that lsquoBrands seem tohave taken on a life of their own They have become quite freestandingideas that take hold and spread So that Virgin can span many markets andViagra can become a potent icon even in markets where it is not yetavailable hellip A brand is a popular idea or set of ideas that people live byrsquo

These quotations by leading marketing commentators demonstrate thechanging way in which brands are believed to operate Today themetaphors used to describe the brand-building process are no longermechanistic but organic in nature in keeping with the discipline of NewConsumer Marketing Brands are now thought of as living entities that

114 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 114

take on a life of their own inside consumersrsquo minds creating somethingknown as a lsquomental modelrsquo Mental models as described in the previouschapter provide insight into how consumers create store recall and relateto brands in everyday life In effect a brand becomes a representation of anindividualrsquos collection of experiences at each of the lsquotouchpointsrsquo at whichthe brand wittingly or unwittingly engages the consumer Theseexperiences provide a mix of rational emotional social and culturalbenefits to the individual consumer If the supplying organization isdefining and creating value effectively then this bundle of complementarybenefits will be delivered through the value-adding factors associated withthe brand A brand is therefore the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition

Brands exist because people want them to exist As Niall FitzgeraldChairman of Unilever commented lsquoEven if the word ldquomarketingrdquo hadnever been invented and advertising was banned across the globe therewould still be brands because it is people who need themrsquo3 For consumersbrands provide a way of making a complicated world simpler Consumersbecome so familiar with them that brands provide a shorthand approach todecision making The dependable predisposition of consumers to purchasespecific brands provides brand owners with assets that offer the promise offuture cash flow It is consumers then and not companies who invest abrand with its value

If this is the case how is it that brands go into decline and die Theanswer is that companies kill them though not always deliberately orknowingly The decline and death of a brand can occur in a number ofdifferent ways for example through organizational arrogance greed orcomplacency Underlying this ebbing away of brand value is the absence ofa value-centric orientation in the organization A value-centric orientationenables the company to know understand and anticipate the valueconsumers are seeking so that it can then focus its value-producingresources on satisfying those needs thereby ensuring that brands surviveThe Barbie doll is one such example

BarbieBarbie began as an innovation and has remained relevant to young girlsthroughout the dollrsquos 40-year history The Barbie doll was created in 1959 andover 1 billion Barbies have been sold to date The brand is worth some $2 billion making it the most valuable toy brand in the world Mattel the

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 115

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 115

American toy giant that manufactures the doll claims the average Americangirl aged between 3 and 11 owns ten Barbies

When Barbie burst onto the scene in the 1960s the doll market consistedmainly of baby dolls designed for girls to cradle rock and feed In contrastBarbie had adult features and represented an independent young womanSince Barbiersquos launch as a teenage fashion model Mattel has worked to keepthe dollrsquos image fresh and to deliver the play value its ever-youngerconsumers demand Every year the company devises about 150 differentBarbie dolls and designs some 120 new doll outfits Barbiersquos image isconstantly updated mirroring the changing role of women in society She nowcomes in a multiplicity of guises from astronaut to army officer to dentist andmany more To reflect the growing diversity of populations African AmericanHispanic and Asian variations were introduced as early as the 1960s

Barbie has survived the challenges of lsquoage compressionrsquo or kids gettinglsquoolderrsquo at a younger age Girls now grow out of traditional play patternsincluding playing with dolls earlier than they did in the past Whereas ageneration ago 12-year-olds might have played with Barbie todayrsquos primeaudience is aged three to five Mattel is meeting this challenge head on byintroducing extensions to the Barbie brand For example Barbie in theNutcracker is a computer-animated video that has generated $150 millionfrom sales The company is dedicated to promoting Barbie as a lifestyle notjust a toy In addition to selling the dolls Mattel licenses Barbie in 30 differentproduct categories from furniture to make-up A girl can sleep in Barbiepyjamas under a Barbie duvet-cover in a bedroom covered in Barbiewallpaper There are even Barbie conventions fan clubs websitesmagazines and collectorsrsquo events To many commentators Barbietranscends the product category and is an icon representing lsquothe face of theAmerican dreamrsquo

Source lsquoLife in Plasticrsquo The Economist 21 December 2002

Building Successful Brands

As the meaning of brands has shifted over time so too has organizationalunderstanding of how to build brands In the production-driven era it wasbelieved that brand building was best achieved solely through marketingcommunications activities (namely advertising) Brand development wasseen as the transmission of messages to consumers the aim being to controltheir purchase behaviour Today brands are built on a much widerplatform that may for example involve alliance partners or staff

116 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 116

hellip through alliances ndash i-mode

i-mode is the most successful mobile data service in the world to date Sinceits launch in Japan in February 1999 i-mode has attracted 353 millionsubscribers (58 of market share) who each pay on average yen1540 permonth for services encompassing 3290 official and 59869 unofficial contentsites This success has been achieved through a value-centric approach to thedevelopment implementation and operation of i-mode services By keepingits offer simple maintaining effective content development and being first tomarket i-mode has gained significant competitive advantage and becomethe object of envy among mobile operators worldwide

Domoco the company behind the i-mode brand whose name is derivedfrom lsquodo communications over the mobilersquo has worked to define and satisfyconsumersrsquo needs through a relevant and appealing brand by forgingalliances with leading content providers The brand is based on theunderstanding that compelling entertainment content drives demand andthe technological aspects consequently take a back seat As TakeshiNatsuno director of i-modersquos strategy department explains lsquoWe neveremphasize words such as internet web browsing and mobile computing toconsumers i-mode users can get various information only with simpleoperations without recognizing they are using the internetrsquo

Putting this philosophy into practice Domoco carefully selects andcontrols lsquoofficialrsquo partner sites on the basis of freshness reliability depth ofcontent and clear user benefit and provides them with key services such as user verification joint marketing and technical assistance Thetechnological capabilities of i-mode allow content providers to chargeusers small incremental fees for the services provided These fees are billedby Domoco and then passed on to the content provider but Domocoretains a 9 commission This business model creates a positive feedbackloop whereby good content and compelling services attract fee-payingusers who in turn attract more content providers For example gamesmanufacturer Badai provides a new animated character every day as i-modescreen wallpaper (the background screen image for i-mode) With over 2 million i-mode users signing up for the service at yen100 per month this strategic alliance nets the company more than pound13 million per annum proving the strength of a partnership approach Similar agree-ments have been made with Sony allowing it to provide Playstation style

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 117

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 117

games over i-mode and Coca-Cola whereby i-mode users can use theirhandsets to pay for and acquire items from individual Coca-Cola vendingmachines

through staff ndash Singapore Airlines

Some companies are distinguished in their marketplace by the level of servicethey offer The way in which their employees deal with consumers becomesthe defining characteristic of the brand In essence the staff are the brandWith a proven profitability record over 30 years Singapore Airlines is one ofthe most successful airlines in the world and is consistently used by travellersand competitors as a benchmark for outstanding performance Key to thissuccess has been the delivery of the brand through the airlinersquos staff

The Singapore Airlines brand is intrinsically linked with the SingaporeGirl launched in 1972 whose serene face has become the heart of thecarrierrsquos advertising campaign No other airline has such a strong brandimage one that has even been immortalized in wax at Madame TussaudrsquosMuseum in London Ian Batey the creator of the Singapore Girl took a riskwhen he proposed that adverts should focus on service at a time when otherairlines were selling their tickets on the theme of safety Batey attributesthe success of the brand to its lsquocombination of silk and steel hellip the ever-changing cutting-edge body side of the brand hellip and the softer soul sideTogether you have a certain Asian humility graciousness and warmth aswell as being extremely fit fast modern and contemporaryrsquo The airlineoperates with a ratio of one flight attendant for every 22 passengers thehighest in the world and well above the industry average

Singapore Airlines has more than 14000 staff located in citiesthroughout the world People from different cultures must work togetherto produce a seamless and positive customer experience To unite thediverse and geographically separated workforce the airline has developed anumber of activities to encourage inter-office communication including avariety of department newsletters and a monthly company-wide internalmagazine A lsquoStaff Ideas in Actionrsquo scheme ensures that new suggestionsare constantly put forward The results of these and many other efforts addup to a staff culture that is vigorously committed to the airline toconsumers and to continuous improvement Staff pride and sense ofownership are evident in the way employees work to uphold the airlinersquosreputation which is built on a well-defined set of corporate values

118 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 118

Emerging Brand Issues

An emerging issue for brand owners and retailers in todayrsquos consumption-led economy is the growing debate about the impact of globalization andthe role of business versus government While this may not appear to belinked to the value-creation process in any obvious way it represents abreaking trend that needs to be monitored for its impact on the kind ofvalue that consumers seek and may be seeking in future Brands areincreasingly the targets of anti-corporation campaigns as is evidenced inthe protests against the World Trade Organization (WTO) in Seattle andGenoa and the boycotting of genetically modified (GM) foods In somecases consumer behaviour towards certain brands has been shown to be amore effective political weapon than the ballot box Shell for examplefound itself at the centre of controversy in 1995 when it sought to disposeof the Brent Spar oil platform at sea Consumers expressed their concern forthe environment by not buying Shell petrol especially in Germany whereShell sales declined by 50 on one day

Although these brand issues may seem far removed from their day-to-day remit marketers need to develop some sort of perspective on them Inseveral cases the monetary value of the value-creation activities of somecorporations exceeds that of a number of nation states An acknowledgedauthority in this area is socio-economist Dr Noreena Hertz She explains inher book The Silent Takeover (2001) how corporations are changing peoplersquoslives society and the democratic process She points out that of the worldrsquos100 largest economies 51 are now corporations and only 49 are nationstates Combined sales at General Motors and Ford are greater than theGDP of the whole of sub-Saharan Africa and Wal-Mart now has a turnoverhigher than the revenues of most states of Eastern Europe

At the heart of the debate about growing globalization and the role ofbusiness versus government lies the issue of trust is consumer marketingacting as a trustworthy agent in the economic system Brands are involvedin the economy and the production of national wealth because as discussedearlier they act as a label of guarantee and trust for consumers and thisvalue-enhancing aspect still plays a major role in motivating purchasestoday A small but demanding minority of New Consumers wants to makeinformed purchasing decisions and they have a growing interest in thecompany behind the brand Their concerns focus on wider societal issues

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 119

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 119

such as environmental vulnerability poverty and economic and politicalinstability and they have a desire to link their purchasing habits with thefuture of sustainable development This represents a significant change inthe kind of value that consumers want and challenges traditional value-creation activities

This wider agenda brings to the fore company reputation Brand ownershave always known that strong brands invite earn honour and reward thetrust of consumers but the signs are that to be a strong brand in the newmarketplace a brand has to demonstrate some form of corporate socialresponsibility The response of business has however been limited Whilemost companies are still trying to understand exactly how this trendimpacts the value creation process Body Shop is an example of a companythat has embraced brand ethics from its inception For many consumersBody Shop is not simply a retailer but a cause worth supporting BodyShoprsquos promotion of lsquobeauty without cruelty to animalsrsquo and lsquotrade not aidrsquopositions the brand as environmentally and socially responsible Othercompanies have developed social responsibility programmes as a means ofachieving profitability for their business and the environment in a way thatreflects the values of society Reputation management cannot howeversimply be regarded as a tactical activity Companies have to find ways ofembedding social responsibility into their organizations As researcherLance Moir (2001) comments lsquoThe best firms in this area ndash such as BPShell Johnson amp Johnson ndash are looking at their business processes in orderto ensure that the pure economic motive is not the sole determinant ofbusiness decisionsrsquo

THE ROLE OF POSITIONING IN VALUE CREATION

The positioning of a brand in the marketplace is a manifestation of where itsits vis-agrave-vis the competition and in the same way that consumers invest abrand with its value they also determine the positioning of a brand Just asthey carry in their minds a mental model of an individual brand they alsocarry a mental map of related brands Knowledge of this can reveal to theorganization the competitive set within which it operates The challengefacing the insight generators in a business is to find the right combinationof tools and techniques to uncover these maps (These issues were discussedin Chapter 6) However having generated this knowledge the

120 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 120

organization can then work to create the value proposition and ultimatelyto deliver it Positioning plays an important role in the value creationprocess because it helps build and sustain the value proposition Moreoverit does so in a way that factors in emotion the great intangible aspect ofbrand building

An example of a positioning map is shown in Figure 73 It shows thekey criteria that consumers use to discriminate between branded conceptsin the eating out market in this case the type of food on offer and theatmosphere of the outlet Consumers will then go on to opt for a lsquoFrenchrsquobrasserie versus a lsquodepartment storersquo cafeteria depending on the type ofeating-out occasion they are planning For example they may becontemplating a meal out with a small group of friends to celebrate aspecial occasion or they may be thinking of somewhere to go on their ownto pick up a snack as they are in a hurry New Consumers are ultradiscriminating and value creation should focus on their perceptions ofvalue which here includes type of outlet speed of service ambience etc

Drawing out the Emotional Message

New Consumers are motivated by the desire for experiences over featuresand benefits and the brand positioning process provides an important way of linking an emotional message to the physical characteristics of the brand Brands touch peoplersquos lives and consumers choose brands forthe emotional values they express as much as anything else The moredeeply embedded the emotions are the more strongly the consumer isconnected to the brand The example of Nike trainers given in Chapter 6showed how particular product features delivered certain benefits whichtogether provided an experience that satisfied a higher-level valuerequirement

Similar research4 carried out on purchasers of womenrsquos fine fragrancesshows in more detail how perceived value delivers an experience forconsumers The study illustrates how certain features of a brand ofperfume in this instance Chanel No 5 are linked with specific perceivedbenefits that satisfy personal values It can be seen from Figure 74 how thebrandrsquos country of origin (France) works as a positive feature providingreassurance to consumers Consumers regard Chanel No 5 as a low-riskhigh-quality purchase because of the trustworthy reputation French

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 121

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 121

perfumes have in the marketplace This feeling of reassurance promotes asense of well-being and feeling good about oneself For Chanel thelearning to be drawn from this is that it is important to retain thelsquoFrenchnessrsquo of the brand as it is integral to the brandrsquos positioning andcommunications strategies

These insights linking the physical attributes of the brand to theemotional benefits they deliver and in some cases to the higher-levelpersonal values that are satisfied through ownership can enable brandowners to be more innovative in their positioning strategies Certain brandowners explicitly use these sorts of insights to drive their value-creationprocesses For example motorbike manufacturer Harley-Davidson buildson the idea of ownership conferring a particular way of life From the bikesto the merchandise to the tattoos consumers see Harley-Davidson as a partof their identity enabling the brand to strongly differentiate itself in themarketplace In the personal computer (PC) sector the iMAC is positionedas a sensual product infused with mystery thereby engendering a warmthfor the brand among consumers For consumers of these brands theemotional switching costs are significant For the organizations behind thebrands their brand positioning is the result of an ongoing strategic process

122 Value Creation

Figure 73 A positioning map of the UK eating-out market

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 122

that informs the creation and delivery of the value proposition It is not theresult of an ad hoc tactical communications campaign

The Positioning Process

To guide the efforts of an organization in the positioning process it is usualto create a simple statement of what the brand is about and how thecommunications strategy should support its market positioning For mostorganizations the ease with which this statement is created is directlycorrelated with the way the positioning process is managed As SergioZyman former advertising VP at Coca-Cola once said lsquoIf you want toestablish a clear image in the minds of consumers you first need a clearimage in your own mindrsquo However this is seldom achieved for a numberof different reasons For instance some organizations seek to includeeverything in the positioning statement attempting to be all things to allpeople Others do not know where to start the process of articulation Yetothers insist on allowing everyone in the organization to have an opinionand try to reflect them all in a concise statement This process needs to bedriven by someone who has clear responsibility for the task resulting in anunambiguous brand positioning In addition the adoption of a simple

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 123

P

F

B

Figure 74 Mapping brand linkages

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 123

approach (where less is more) and the ability to take a long-term view aidthe successful completion of the task Burberry exemplifies the ability of anorganization to achieve a turnaround in fortunes based on a firmly managedrepositioning process

BurberryIn recent years Burberry has repositioned itself successfully by redefining thevalue consumers are seeking and creating an improved value proposition forthem In the mid-1990s Burberryrsquos unique British heritage and famoustrademark ndash the red black camel and white check pattern ndash was no longerenough to save the dysfunctional retailer Burberry had become over-relianton tired products and by 1997 trading profit collapsed In October 1997 RoseMarie Bravo took over as CEO and began a process of repositioning thebrand propelling it into luxury status Her aim was to turn the staid Britishbrand that was being eclipsed by competitors into an iconic and aspirationalbrand with cross-generational appeal By February 1999 Burberry was a firmfavourite on the catwalks of Milan Burberry designs ranging from the classictrench coat to funky pink kilts fuelled an explosion of accessories also in thetrademark check Since 1998 Burberry sales have doubled and the brand isnow seen as a financial success

The repositioning of Burberry was achieved by having a clear vision inplace Bravo recognized that although Burberry had become stale the public

124 Value Creation

Figure 75 Repositioning Burberry

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 124

still associated strongly with its heritage and quality Under her guidance thecompany began to reposition itself as the authentic British lifestyle brandThis moved it into competition with high-margin luxury design houses such asGucci Prada and Ralph Lauren with the opportunity for superior returns (seeFigure 75)

Burberryrsquos remarkable recovery was achieved through repositioning thebrand changing and expanding the product mix and changing the structureof distribution and sales channels Concentrating on the repositioning of thebrand Burberry retained its four core values (quality classic heritage iconic)and adopted four more (innovation style aspiration modernity) in order tocreate a modern spin to widen its appeal and raise global recognition A keysuccess factor was a coherent communications strategy across all mediaorchestrated to deliver a consistent image worldwide Leading models suchas Stella Tenant and Kate Moss were used to inspire more fashion-orientedadvertising Product design was improved with the input of RobertoMenichetti and then in 2001 Christopher Bailey as chief designer Sponsor-ship of high-profile events such as the Mario Testino Exhibition at the NationalPortrait Gallery and the Burberry Cup a polo match in association with thePrince of Wales reinforced the brandrsquos high class British pedigree

Other activities reinforced the brandrsquos revitalized position For example theproduct mix was expanded to include high-margin accessories childrens-wear and a perfume The range of menrsquos and womenrsquos apparel wasconsolidated distribution was reviewed and retail channels wererationalized As a part of this process a large number of product licenceswere terminated as they were judged to be inconsistent with the repositionedbrand image

THE ROLE OF PRICE IN VALUE CREATION

Price plays a key role in the value-creation process It can for exampleindicate value and quality In the case of a Rolex watch or a Pret A Mangersandwich the premium price reflects the lsquopremiumnessrsquo of the brandSimilarly price can be used to support brand positioning Stella Artois isadvertised as a lsquoreassuringly expensiversquo lager and easyJet occupies a well-defined value-for-money niche in the air travel market In other wordsprice works in combination with other elements of the marketing mix as a signal of value for consumers

Consumer goods companies are coming under increasing pressure toreview their pricing strategies as both consumers and trade customers

The Role of Price in Value Creation 125

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 125

sharpen their focus on value aided in many cases by the power of theInternet in their search for best value The introduction of the Euro andchanging European legislation have added to pricing complexity Whensetting pricing strategies it is important for managers to understand therole that price plays in the value proposition Price is used by consumers as acriterion for evaluating the value of the offer and by supplying organizationsas a competitive tool The effect of the shift from a production-driven to aconsumption-led economy has forced many organizations to replace theircost-plus approach to pricing with demand-led pricing policies

For brand owners price is a significant lever in ensuring that value isdefined created and delivered at a profit Revenue is after all the outcomeof volume multiplied by price (and volume itself is impacted by price)Increases in profitability can be gained by increasing prices reducing costsor increasing the volume sold However it is changes in price levels thathave the biggest impact on profitability due to the gearing ratio whichmeans that a greater amount of the benefit will flow through to the bottomline compared to the other two strategies Volume increases are counteredby variable costs and reducing costs usually applies to values significantlysmaller than turnover

Brand owners must take account of a number of factors when drawing upa pricing plan As depicted in Figure 76 these include internal coststargets and constraints pricing strategy (to be premium or not)competitor pricing strategy and consumer insight The outputs of thispricing decision-making process will impact the business case andinfluence how performance monitoring and scenario planning areundertaken Current pricing is often driven by past events rather than logicand consistency leading to a situation where pricing is inconsistent acrossmarkets For example prices may be set by individual countries or bycorporate divisions acting in isolation from the rest of the organization Asingle company may use several different approaches to pricing in order torespond to short-term or local market needs or it may be that differentprices have been agreed as part of key account management negotiations

The Evaluation of Value

It is not uncommon for prices to be set without reference to the consumerrsquosevaluation of the value proposition leading to a situation where consumers

126 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 126

believe price is out of line that is too expensive or even too cheap Thisincomplete approach to pricing can also undermine brand-positioningstrategies and may potentially damage the brand Furthermore it can leadto a situation where parallel trading develops leading to lost profitopportunities The way to prevent these issues arising is to base pricingstrategy on a rigorous analysis of all the elements inherent in complex pricedecision making Pricing strategy must take account of both theconsumerrsquos and the organizationrsquos evaluation of value as shown in Figure77 Clearly each player makes a trade-off in the value exchange Brandowners bear the costs of defining creating and delivering value and need ahealthy profit margin to remain in business while consumers incur costsassociated with evaluating the value proposition and gaining ownership ofthe brand

Consumers tend to evaluate the value proposition not in terms of theticket price but in terms of relative value that is whether the offer seemsexpensive cheap or fair to them This notion is not new Price as a reflectionof the value placed on a product or service by the consumer was an idea firstarticulated by the Victorian economist Alfred Marshall His beliefs aboutthe effects of consumer preferences on transactions dominated economic

The Role of Price in Value Creation 127

Figure 76 The complex pricing decision-making process Adapted from MarketingImprovements 2002

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 127

thinking until the middle of the twentieth century The concept of therational consumer or lsquohomo economicusrsquo held sway until the 1950s whenthe idea that product attributes other than price might be influencing thepurchase decision was promulgated It was suggested that price mighthave more than one meaning for consumers At about the same time theidea of psychological price emerged The underlying assumption here isthat price has a double meaning for consumers Besides the maximum pricethat they would be willing to pay it is believed that there is also aminimum price for the product to be credible In other words consumershave an upper and a lower price limit in mind

This concept has been refined through further research and pricingtheorists now talk about consumersrsquo lsquoindifference zonersquo The boundaries ofthis psychological zone are marked by a belief that at the upper limit ifsomething is too expensive then consumers will not buy it because theyfeel the price is unjustified while at the lower limit if something is toocheap they will not buy it because they feel the value is suspectUncovering this indifference zone can form the basis of a successfuldemand-led pricing strategy in line with the tenets of the New Consumer

128 Value Creation

Figure 77 The evaluation of value

C

C

CBP

CMP

PP

E

P

P

T

C

E

T

andandS

LSCO

P

MT

z

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 128

Marketing model Ryanair is one example of an organization that takes thisvalue-centric approach to pricing seriously

RyanairRyanair is now the most valuable and profitable airline in Europe It haspowered its way to success by identifying a large under-served customerbase the leisure traveller Ryanair segmented the travel market and onrecognizing that the key values of the leisure traveller are price andpunctuality implemented a strategy to deliver low prices and on-time flightsIn doing so the company evolved a successful low-yieldhigh-volumebusiness model

Ryanair created its value proposition to appeal to the price-consciousconsumer by choosing to compete on routes served by large full-pricecarriers such as Air France and Lufthansa These airlines are highlysubsidized and therefore have little incentive to reduce their operating costskeeping prices to consumers high By removing non-value-added items suchas meals assigned seating and the use of major airports Ryanair was able tooffer prices up to 80ndash90 lower than the flag carriers on numerous routes Asa result it was able to gain market share and brand recognition within eachroute market Ryanairrsquos low cost base also forms a significant barrier tocompetition from larger airlines with high fixed costs

Taking advantage of the deregulation of the European market and thegrowing demand for affordable and reliable air travel Ryanair has created abrand experience that delivers more for less Pricing is managed in real timeFlights booked months ahead of departure are made available at the lowestprices while those booked nearer to the travel date are more expensive Tokeep processing costs down consumers are also encouraged using financialinducements to book via the airlinersquos website rather than over the phone

This second cell of the New Consumer Marketing model is an essentialbuilding block in a demand system It enables the organization to movefrom defining value to creating and communicating that value effectivelyand eventually to delivering it While the process of value creation isdependent on the interplay of new product development brandingpositioning and pricing it is ultimately the role of innovation thatunderpins its success

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Innovation provides a way of creating new value-producing resources orendowing existing ones with an enhanced potential for yielding profit

The Role of Price in Value Creation 129

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 129

bull It is the consumer and not the competition that lies at the heart ofinnovation Providing consumers with a step change in value thateffectively creates a new market can leave the competition standing asold sources of advantage are destroyed and new ones created

bull Organizations that work to reduce marketplace complexity areconstrained to an incremental approach to innovation Those thatchoose to absorb it can then work to create options and learn as anorganization resulting in more radical forms of innovation

bull Brands have become the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition

bull Brands are no longer built just through advertising to consumers theyutilize other stakeholders including alliances and staff

bull The positioning of a brand in the marketplace is a manifestation ofwhere it sits vis-agrave-vis the competition and in the same way thatconsumers invest a brand with its value they also determine thepositioning of a brand

bull Price represents the evaluation of the value proposition and the effectof the shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy isforcing organizations to switch their strategy from a cost-plusapproach to demand-led pricing policies

130 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 130

The process of delivering value to a specified audience through the mediaand channels of their choice

Delivering value = communicating and distributing the value created

Watchword = agility

In the consumption-led economy value delivery is undergoing rapidchange for two important reasons the emergence of the New Consumerand the proliferation of media and channels This changing marketingenvironment poses new challenges for organizations particularly in respectto how they manage media and channel choices customer service and thesupply chain To be effective organizations must ensure that theirstrategies for each of these key areas are aligned with the overall strategy oftheir demand system As with the first two cells this means having a value-centric orientation in the business

Value delivery is concerned with how consumers get to own the productor service It involves the way in which the offer is presented thetransaction is handled and after-sales service and support are providedThe third cell of the New Consumer model focuses on communicating anddistributing value in order to achieve maximum consumer responsivenessand satisfaction The key to success here is organizational agility

THE ROLE OF AGILITY IN VALUE DELIVERY

For a company to be agile it is to be capable of operating profitably in acustomer environment of continually and unpredictable changing customeropportunities

(S Goldman et al 1995)

Value Delivery 8

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 131

In the new marketplace of proliferating media and channel choicescharacterized by an increasing number of new products and services and adecline in organizational ability to forecast sales organizations need to beable to respond rapidly and flexibly to consumer requirements Thisdemands a capability to change gear and immerse the organization in newopportunities on a continual basis The phrase that resonates withmanagers is lsquothe need to develop organizational agilityrsquo

The notion of organizational agility has its origins in flexiblemanufacturing systems where it was believed that automation alone wouldconfer this capability Over time a wider business application has emergedlargely through developments in supply-chain management Currentthinking defines organizational agility as lsquoa business-wide capability thatembraces organizational structures information systems logistics processesand in particular mindsetsrsquo1 The agile organization creates competitiveadvantage for itself by being able to adapt its people and processes to thecontinually changing needs of the marketplace increasingly with the supportof technical innovation The challenge for consumer-serving companies is tofuse people and process approaches in order to achieve cost-effective valuedelivery Competitive advantage today lies in recruiting and motivating theright people while at the same time constantly improving business processesWhen either element people or process fails to embrace change theorganization is less nimble and thus less able to compete successfully

Organizational culture plays a significant role in achieving andmaintaining such agility The fusion of people and processes can only takeplace in an environment conducive to effective change managementCreating an appropriate organizational culture involves a number of factorsincluding for example the management of employees the sharing ofknowledge and the choice of performance indicators These factors areconsidered in more depth in the next chapter but are raised here as they canbe seen to have an impact on organizational agility in the cases offered in thischapter

New Consumer Marketing promotes organizational agility byencouraging a value-centric orientation in the organization A businessthat is focused on defining creating and delivering value profitably is abusiness that can lsquoturn on a sixpencersquo and exploit opportunities

The Veterans Agency (VA) formerly known as the War PensionsAgency provides a useful example

132 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 132

The Veterans AgencyThe Veterans Agency (VA) is responsible for assessing and paying pensionsto disabled servicemen and women and their spouses in the UK It wasestablished in Elizabethan times (when soldiers were paid pound10 a year) butwas launched as an executive agency in the mid-1990s In November 2000when the UK Prime Minister Tony Blair announced that surviving formerprisoners of war in the Far East were to receive a pound10000 special paymentfrom the Government the VA was faced with the task of tracking downthousands of individuals dispersed across the world As an agileorganization one that had its people and processes focused on consumerresponsiveness its project plan enabled 14000 claims to be processed inless than three months

For many organizations adopting a market-responsive approach tovalue delivery is a daily challenge Building on organizational strengthssegmenting customers in a meaningful way and utilizing IT to meetspecific objectives are a few of the many ways in which organizations canimprove their flexibility and customer responsiveness Lastminutecom is agood example here

LastminutecomIn 2001 the web-based travel company handled some 800000 onlinetransactions which included travel hotel and restaurant bookings and giftpurchases Around 20 of the pound124 million transaction value was generatedoutside its key markets in the UK and France Lastminute constantlyredesigns its website (see Figure 81) brings in new suppliers and improvesthe customer experience Its investment in IT is high due to a concentrationon web design connectivity voice-recognition software and a sophisticatedCRM system that segments 5 million customers on a database according to their purchasing habits The CRM system enables Lastminute to emailspecial offers to selected customers based on the companyrsquos knowledge oftheir previous purchases Since its launch four years ago the company hasgrown quickly through the acquisition of rivals and the involvement of majorplayers (eg BAA Sony Music Deutsche Telekom France Telecom andIntel) who have bought equity stakes in the company

THE ROLE OF MEDIA AND CHANNELS IN VALUE DELIVERY

New Consumers live in a global marketplace where they are increasinglyoffered lower prices greater convenience and more choice This is in large

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 133

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 133

part due to the proliferation of media and channels which organizations useto market their brands products and services Media strategies have to dowith how the value proposition is communicated while channel strategieshave to do with how it is transacted The role of media and channels is ofvital importance in delivering the value proposition as it relates to how andwhere the exchange of value takes place With todayrsquos empoweredconsumers able to go to market more easily than ever before organizationscan no longer afford to manage media and channels as if they were stand-alone entities

In the production-driven era media and channels were distinguishablefrom one another For instance television was considered a medium andretail was considered a channel Now in the consumption-led economymedia and channels have become closely related and even interchangeableFor example the retailer is rapidly becoming the media ownerrsquos biggestcompetitor This is evident in the fact that the lsquobig fourrsquo food retailers ndashTesco Asda Safeway and Sainsburyrsquos ndash currently account for 70 of

134 Value Delivery

Figure 81 Lastminutecom

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 134

household food expenditure and the media issue facing brand owners iswhether to advertise on television or run a gondola end promotion as ameans of reaching a large number of relevant consumers with anappropriate message or offer For many brand owners the answer is to focuspromotional resources in-store thereby communicating directly withconsumers at the point of purchase as opposed to communicating withthem through another medium that is not so closely tied to the point ofpurchase

The convergence of media and channel choice is the result of the comingtogether of two trends progress in brand thinking and the inexorablemarch of developments in IT As outlined in Chapter 7 a brand used to bethought of as a lifeless manipulable entity that was built throughadvertising Today it is seen as a dynamic asset that lives in the consumerrsquosmind an experience of the value proposition that is created throughmultiple touchpoints where the organization wittingly or unwittinglyengages the consumer

As media choices have expanded and become more sophisticatedopportunities for dialogue with the consumer have grown in a stepwisefashion Supplying organizations and consumers are no longer restricted tocommunicating with each other by telephone facsimile or post or throughface-to-face encounters with in-store staff or sales representatives Newtechnologies have given rise to personal and interactive media such asemail the Internet personal digital assistants (PDAs) mobile phones and the next-generation smart phone In the process of enrichingcommunication these developments have expanded the role of IT IT isnow not only concerned with the exchange of information but also withinteraction and with the promise of integration in the near future Wheredialogue can take place so the option to transact also arises and the use ofmedia and channels become interwoven

New Consumer Marketing demands an approach to media and channelsthat builds on the benefits of media and channel integration First amongthese benefits is the ability to develop organizational agility and thusenhance consumer responsiveness The new range of media and channelchoices available offers organizations the opportunity to lower costsprovide better service and personalize the value proposition The collectionand analysis of previously unimaginable kinds of data through increasinglysophisticated technologies makes this possible

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 135

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 135

Making the Most of Media Choices

The proliferation of media choices is causing tectonic shifts in marketingthinking about how they can be used to build brands Media decisions inthe production-driven era were about how to advertise to consumerswhich was a largely one-way exercise motivated by the desire to controlconsumer response In a subsequent phase more interactive media choicessuch as direct response media (eg direct mail offers and direct responsetelephone lines) were used to encourage more continuous communicationbetween consumers and the organization In the consumption-led economythe aim is connectivity or the development of a shared understanding thatcomes from ongoing dialogues experiences and shared values that developbetween a marketer and consumers (Schultz and Lindberg-Repo 2002)The challenge for marketers today is selecting the most effective andefficient combination of media from the wealth of interactive and non-interactive media options The goal is to ensure that consumers have aperfect experience across whatever media they use to interact with theorganization

Connectivity enables brand owners to build deeper and more enduringrelationships with New Consumers These relationships are developedthrough the empowered engagement of both participants in a two-wayinteraction process one that is exemplified by Nokia

NokiaThe Nokia Game is a multimedia adventure-cum-espionage role-playinggame which Nokia has been running for the last four years in 18 countriesattracting over half a million players in 2001 Clues are given out to players ina range of ways including text messaging voicemail email the Internet (seeFigure 82) TV radio and the press The game is based on the lsquofuture ofcommunicationrsquo and it educates players on future technologies and applica-tions Players have to find out about everything from different ringtones andmenu systems through to GSM and GPRS in order to progress from onestage of the game to the next

More than just a form of play the Nokia Game is a marketing platform thatcreates Nokia brand advocates by being particularly relevant and credible toa specifically defined audience The game gets consumers highly involved inthe brand by engaging and rewarding them for their attention and therebycreating a virtual Nokia community In effect players give Nokia permission tomarket the companyrsquos products to them In this way the various levels ofdialogue ndash texting voicemail press for example ndash enable a mutual

136 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 136

understanding and reciprocal generation of the value proposition Playersgain knowledge and excitement from the game while Nokia benefits frombuilding knowledge of its consumers The game grows as the network ofplayers grows and the bonds between Nokia and the players develop

lsquoGaining permissionrsquo is a facet of media strategy that has emerged withthe coming of the consumption-led economy New Consumersrsquo highlyfragmented lifestyles and time pressures mean that they have less time tomeet all the demands on them They are not the passive subjects ofmarketers but discerning and demanding customers Part of the valueexchange in the consumption-led economy relates to the value theseconsumers get out of investing their attention As Herbert Simon NobelPrize winning economist has noted lsquoInformation consumes attention hellip awealth of information creates a poverty of attention hellip the only factor thatbecomes scarce in a world of abundance is human attentionrsquo Permissionmarketing (Godin 1999) has therefore developed out of the problemsassociated with gaining the attention of consumers Where a marketerreceives the consumerrsquos permission the conscious effort required by theconsumer to pay attention more often than not results in dialogue betweenthe two parties

The challenge for brand owners in making the most of media choices hasan external and an internal component Externally they are aiming to

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 137

Figure 82 The Nokia Game

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 137

replicate the experience of a one-to-one relationship where the consumerfeels they are being spoken to by the same person in every encounter Theinternal challenge is to generate data across the various media to create asingle unified view of the consumer This single view ensures thatregardless of the medium or channel through which the consumer interactswith the organization the consumer is recognized and the history of theirrelationship is remembered Achieving this single view demands clearobjectives in the management of data issues that are explored later inChapter 9

From a consumer perspective a perfect experience that replicates thefeeling of being spoken to by the same person in every brand encounter ismost likely to be delivered through a media-neutral strategy Theintegrated brand communications strategies adopted by Volkswagen andStella Artois provide good examples Volkswagenrsquos multimediamulti-agency approach has helped the brand double its new car sales and valueshare within six years The strategy which includes the use of PR directmarketing online marketing cinema and radio led directly to 151000extra sales and pound199 billion extra revenue for VW UK

Stella ArtoisStella Artoisrsquo communications strategy cleverly exploits knowledge ofconsumer lifestyles and the popular medium of film Research into thebrandrsquos largely young male (aged 18ndash34) consumer base had revealed that ahigh majority visited the cinema or rented videos on a regular basis At a timewhen most other lager beers were using sport to communicate their brandvalues Stella adopted the theme of film Its communications strategyincluded advertisements that possessed a cinematic feel film sponsorshipon Channel 4 film events around the UK and on-pack promotions forBlockbuster videos The task of making this theme work across a number ofagencies fell to the marketing manager who appointed a lead agency foreach cycle of the strategy The specialist agencies ndash in advertising salespromotions media buying consumer and trade public relations for examplendash then activated the element of the strategy within their particular mediumCrucial to this way of working is that everyone buys into the same definition ofthe brand echoing the need for brand clarity discussed in Chapter 7

As well as integrating media choices across channels some brand ownersare pioneering integration across a number of brand owners to deliver aperfect experience for consumers The aim of these brand owners is to cross-

138 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 138

promote their own operations and develop long-term marketingpartnerships Disney is one company that has pursued such an integrativeapproach

DisneyDisney has a number of cross-media deals with global partners such asHome Depot and McDonaldrsquos In 2001 the DIY chain Home Depot signed athree-year tie-up across Disneyrsquos ABC network ESPN sports channel andLifetime channel The deal was reported to be worth pound65 million to Disney Aspart of the agreement Disney is launching a range of branded childrenrsquospaints in Home Depot and has also agreed to purchase Home Depot productsfor its own operations Disneyrsquos ten-year deal with McDonaldrsquos successfullycross-promotes Disney films through childrenrsquos Happy Meal promotions inMcDonaldrsquos restaurants

Making the Most of Channel Choices

In the same way that the proliferation of media choices is causing a shift inthinking about how best to communicate the value proposition theexpansion of marketing channels is challenging thinking about how bestto transact value The brand owner must devise a channel strategy that isappealing to its target consumers and profitable to its business This mayinvolve the use of a single channel or a combination of channels The brandowner must choose from an ever-widening range of direct channels (egInternet telephone facsimile) and indirect channels (eg retailersdistributors and service providers)

As with media strategies the goal of channel strategies is to ensure thatthe consumer has a perfect experience across all the channels used One ofthe biggest issues for organizations here is to minimize channel conflictInteractive channels offer organizations the opportunity to transactdirectly with consumers faster and at a lower cost than most non-interactive channels do Consequently many organizations have decided tocut out the middlemen and have ceased using traditional intermediariesFor example call centre technology allows insurance companies such asDirect Line to offer and transact the value proposition by dealing withconsumers directly over the telephone This obviates the need for expensivenetworks of insurance brokers and keeps the premiums low creatingmutual benefit for both seller and buyer

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 139

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 139

While a strategy of lsquodisintermediationrsquo may appear seductive at firstsight channel strategy development should be based upon the optimumcombination of channels necessary to provide the most effective and efficientmeans of delivering the value proposition Different channels offer differentadvantages (see Figure 83) Norwich Union for example sells financialproducts directly to consumers through independent financial advisers(IFAs) The Guardian newspaper produces and sells newspapers throughintermediaries and also offers an online news service free of chargeThorntonrsquos the confectioner transacts its value proposition through anetwork of shops by phone fax and post and via the Internet

It is crucial for organizations to understand why their consumers preferto use one channel rather than another why for example some favourremote interaction while others prefer transacting face-to-face Identifyingand satisfying the channel preferences of New Consumers is particularlychallenging as these may change according to the type of purchase or thetime at which the transaction takes place For instance consumers may becontent to book a weekend trip to Europe using the online facility of adiscount airline but may prefer completing the transaction for a lengthiersummer trip abroad in a face-to-face encounter Above all New Consumersare looking for organizational agility ndash a supplier who can adapt to theirdiffering needs on different purchasing occasions Channel strategydecisions therefore need to be reviewed regularly and adjusted asappropriate

Another popular channel strategy in the consumption-led economy isreintermediation or the introduction of new types of intermediaryExamples of this include the use of web-enabled information agents alsoknown as lsquoinfomediariesrsquo who carry out information searches on behalf ofprospective purchasers Some infomediaries not only research products andservices on behalf of consumers but also manage sales transactions and post-sales service agreements Autobytel for example providesinformation about car prices and purchase availability and will evenfacilitate the sale and organize delivery This one-stop-shop approach isattractive to many New Consumers who have little time to shop aroundfor best value Some even engage lsquopersonal shoppersrsquo such as TenUK to actas their own purchasing agents across a number of sectors

Organizations such as Conciera which offers clients a technology platformon which to transform their businesses in line with this buyer-centric

140 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 140

philosophy believe that this is where the future of channel strategydevelopment lies ndash that by acting as the consumerrsquos partner and providingaccess to a new set of information tools across new media and telephonechannels agent-based businesses will create and deliver new forms ofsuperior customer service and consumer value

THE ROLE OF SERVICE IN VALUE DELIVERY

The arrival of the consumption-led economy has elevated the role of servicein the creation and delivery of the value proposition Increasinglyorganizations are recognizing service as a source of competitivedifferentiation Service excellence is seen as a key profitability driverSouthwest Airlines (SWA) and First Direct are examples of organizationsthat have used service to enhance the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition SWA has transformed cabin service into a form ofentertainment that is regularly promoted by word-of-mouthrecommendation Similarly First Direct now offers a remote bankingservice that consumers have warmed to and are keen to advocate In boththese cases the consumerrsquos experience of the brand is delivered through theactions and attitudes of staff In effect the service delivered by staff is thebrand

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 141

Figure 83 This Royal Mail advertisement shows the extent of channel choice

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 141

Despite wide acknowledgement of the value of providing high levels ofservice many customer-care activities fail to meet buyer and supplierexpectations New Consumers are more demanding and sophisticated intheir expectations of service and organizations need to be able to respondaccordingly This requires an ethos of consumer responsiveness within thebusiness and New Consumer Marketing proposes a living demand systemto enable this to flourish The NCM model acknowledges the importanceof employeesrsquo contribution to value creation and delivery this was exploredin Chapter 7 and is emphasized further in Chapter 9

Creating a Service Strategy

To optimize the role of service in the delivery process it is useful to breakservice down into its three component stages pre-transaction transactionand post-transaction The pre-transaction elements of service relate tocorporate policies or programmes involving written statements of servicepolicy and the planning of strategies for dealing with different types ofconsumers at various points in their relationship with the organization Thetransaction elements comprise the customer service variables that aredirectly involved in the delivery of the value proposition such as productavailability order cycle times service ambience and so on Post-transactionelements have to do with the support consumers receive once they takeownership of the product or service These may include warranties partsand repair services complaint procedures loyalty clubs and so on

To ensure a consistent approach across these three stages of the serviceencounter exemplary organizations create a service strategy As suggestedby Professor Martin Christopher in his book The Customer Service Planner(1992) service strategy involves the identification of a service mission inwhich the organization articulates its service pledge and the setting ofservice objectives These objectives should link back to the insightgenerated by the organization into the nature of the value consumers areseeking and the consequent analysis of opportunities available They willthus serve to highlight the importance of service quality variables such asreliability responsiveness assurance and empathy Service strategy canthen be refined for different consumer segments as different clusters ofconsumers will be looking for different service packages Once a servicepackage has been developed for each segment service programmes can be

142 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 142

implemented The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company is extremely focused oncreating exactly the right service levels for its customers

The Ritz-Carlton HotelThe Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company has created a value-centric service strategythat is implemented across the world by its 22000 employees The companywas awarded the Malcolm Baldridge National Quality Award in 1992 and1999 and is one of only two companies to have received the award twiceThis is a considerable achievement given that the company operates in anindustry where high staff turnover rates are the norm The companyrsquos strategyis characterized by an emphasis on generating employee satisfaction basedon a belief that this results in customer satisfaction which in turn deliversgreater profitability The strategy is pursued in a number of ways Forexample each day every member of staff has a meeting with their supervisormanager the vice-president or the chief executive at the start of their shiftAlthough the meeting lasts only 15 minutes it covers all the essential itemsfrom which VIPs are staying in the hotel to staff suggestions about serviceimprovements What sets this pre-shift briefing apart from the way other hotelchains organize is that every employee of the company across the worlddiscusses the same subject on the same day Each day the briefings focus onone of 20 basic service principles standards that were laid down when thecompany was formed The following are a few examples

No 10 ndash Each employee is empowered For example when a guest has aproblem or needs something special you should break away from yourregular duties to address and resolve the issueNo 11 ndash Uncompromising levels of cleanliness are the responsibility ofevery employeeNo 12 ndash To provide the finest personal service for our guests eachemployee is responsible for identifying and recording individual guestpreferences

Source Tony Mosely lsquoAre you being served The route to good customercarersquo Consumer Policy Review NovDec 2002

Recruiting and Motivating Staff

Acknowledgement of the importance of people in delivering service has ledto a greater interest in the recruitment motivation and retention of staffResearch shows that when employees identify with the norms and values ofan organization that reflect a commitment to customer service they are less

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 143

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 143

inclined to leave their jobs This reduction in employee turnover serves tostrengthen the organization It promotes a culture where service valuesbecome embedded in the way things are done and are more easily transmittedto successive generations of employees Recruitment is therefore of crucialimportance to organizations In order to attract and retain the highest qualityrecruits ndash those who share the organizationrsquos values and will make a majorcontribution to its future success ndash organizations have to market themselvesto potential recruits as employers of choice With changing demographicsthreatening the supply of young people in the West the so-called lsquowar fortalentrsquo (Michaels et al 2001) is an everyday reality for many companies

At the Ritz-Carlton recruitment is carried out using a number oftechniques Psychometric tests are used to identify candidates with theright work attitude and by matching their test scores against those of thebest performing staff the company is able to allocate jobs according toindividual suitability New employees undergo a minimum of fiveinterviews but provisional job offers are normally issued within 48 hours ofthe first interview so that good people are not lost to the competition

The Ritz-Carltonrsquos approach provides a rich contrast with the way Pret AManger recruits its staff Following application and interview Pret AMangerrsquos prospective candidates are paid to work for one day in one of thecompanyrsquos stores Staff already working in that store then make the finaldecision as to whether the candidate is employed This has the effect of

144 Value Delivery

Figure 84 Pret A Manger

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 144

empowering staff and ensuring only people with the lsquoPret attitudersquo (seeFigure 84) who are able to demonstrate they would uphold Pret AMangerrsquos values and ethos are taken on In fact only about 20 ofcandidates pass this exacting test

Staff motivation is another important part of retaining employees Mostorganizations use employment benefits and training and development toreward and motivate their employees As Singapore Airlines demonstratesthese need to fit with the values and culture of the organization and betailored to improving the overall value-centric ethos and practice of theorganization

Singapore AirlinesSingapore Airlines employs about 8 of Singaporersquos working population andis consistently voted one of the top local employers The training ofemployees is comprehensive ndash the programme for new stewardesses hasbeen referred to as a lsquodebutante boot camprsquo involving four months of socialas well as operational skills training Career development opportunities arestrong and staff are regularly appraised as a means of improving theirperformance In an effort to retain trained staff who have taken maternityleave the company operates a lsquoFlying Momrsquo scheme which enablesstewardesses with long service records to spend more time at home with theirfamilies

Other successful organizations have evolved similarly unique approachesto motivating staff which often depend on cross-functional collaborationbetween marketing operations and human resources management It isimportant that there is alignment between the value proposition offered toconsumers and that offered to employees For example Countrywide PorterNovelli (CPN) is a successful business-to-business PR consultancy thatoperates what it calls the 4Is culture

bull Imagination ndash making our work memorablebull Irreverence ndash challenging the status quobull Improvement ndash a little better every timebull Initiative ndash making the first move

This articulation of principles does not simply take the form of a brightlogo to be used in communications but provides a framework formanaging delivery of the value proposition both internally and externallyIt represents the distinctive advantage CPN believes it offers clients and

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 145

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 145

guides the recruitment training and promotion of staff internallyUnusually the director of personnel and development and the marketingdirector sit down together and discuss joint implementation of the internaland external marketing strategy on a regular basis

Empowering Employees to Live the Brand

A New Consumer Marketing approach to service requires the highestlevels of consumer responsiveness and service providers have a greatopportunity to make this a differentiated part of the value propositionWhat New Consumers are looking for is an individual response to theirparticular requirements and those on the so-called front-line of a businessare in a position to customize the experience for them The way employeesfeel about their job often defines the way they view the brand and the waythey communicate it to consumers For this reason many organizations seethe empowerment of employees as a business priority

The secret of success here is not so much a mechanistic prescription or aseries of instructions to staff but rather a dialogue where organizationshelp staff understand what the brand stands for and seeks to accomplishand what their individual role is in achieving the brand objectives It isimportant that employees receive information about organizationalperformance and that they are rewarded for contributing to it Whilelsquoliving the brandrsquo is a common corporate goal few organizations actuallyachieve it A MORI survey carried out in 2002 reported that 30 of UKemployees are brand neutral or are not interested in their companyrsquos brandwhile a further 22 are brand saboteurs actively working against thebrand culture This means less than half of the countryrsquos employees can beconsidered as brand champions who will spread their companiesrsquo brandvalues Of these 33 would talk positively about the brand if asked andonly 15 would talk positively about the brand spontaneously

Formal communication programmes that aim to market the brandinternally are used by many organizations to endow staff with an enhancedpotential for yielding profit For example Land Rover launched the latestRange Rover with a series of coordinated events for employees dealers andthe press Part of the strategy was the placement of the car in the TombRaider movie Around 20000 employees at Land Rover were invited toprivate screenings of the film and encouraged to bring their families

146 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 146

creating great word-of-mouth marketing British Airways when facedwith orchestrating 50000 articulations of the brand through its 50000staff worldwide launched the lsquoPassion for Servicersquo initiative It isessentially a training session to teach staff about brands and the BA brandin particular Having spent pound1 million developing Club World and pound200 million implementing it the internal marketing programme is a wayof protecting and enhancing that investment Brand clarity as discussedearlier in Chapter 7 is a necessary precondition of making staffempowerment work

Staff empowerment requires trust and courage on the part of theorganization as employees are given autonomy to interpret the brand in away that is both meaningful to them and their job and to consumersTesco for example empowers staff to respond to legitimate customercomplaints by giving them the authority to replace products or issuereimbursements without having to refer to supervisors In doing so thecompany demonstrates a respect for their employeesrsquo ability to assesssituations and manage customers In a similar move Abbey National hasgiven its front-line staff the power to take decisions such as reimbursingcustomers who feel they have been charged unfairly In both these cases bynot passing problem resolution up the chain of command consumers aremade to feel valued and respected The issue is dealt with quickly savingexpensive company time and ensuring customer satisfaction

Speed of response in resolving consumer problems is all-important asNew Consumers are becoming more marketing literate and less easy toplease Those whose issues are not dealt with swiftly and satisfactorily havethe confidence and wherewithal to make their views known across a rangeof media (as described in Chapter 2) Studies have shown that while up to98 of dissatisfied customers never complain when they receive poorservice 90 will not return to the disappointing vendor in future as aresult of the poor service Furthermore consumers who are dissatisfied arelikely to tell at least ten others about their poor service experience whereasa good service experience will be related to only three others This makes itdoubly hard for organizations to gain a reputation for good service and allthe more reason for an organization to work hard to maintain a goodreputation

The processes within an organization that are concerned with creatingdeveloping and maintaining an internal service culture and an orientation

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 147

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 147

that enables the organization to achieve its service goals are usuallymanaged as part of an internal marketing strategy The fundamental aim isto develop awareness of the value proposition sought by both internal andexternal customers and to remove functional barriers to organizationalperformance The organization must ensure that every employee whetherthey are directly or indirectly frequently or infrequently in contact withexternal customers contributes to the delivery of a superior valueproposition Despite the fact that for many organizations internalmarketing programmes are a formal part of the way value is transactedthere is no consensus on how these programmes should best beimplemented This is because the importance of internal marketing hasonly recently been acknowledged and because of the debate that has arisenabout exactly who within an organization should have responsibility for itThis topic is returned to in Chapter 9

THE ROLE OF TECHNOLOGY INTEGRATION IN VALUEDELIVERY

The integration of technology into service delivery is transforming manybusinesses and Petcareco Limited is a useful example of this Petcareco is aone-stop pet resort and care centre based in Washington Tyne and Wearwhich looks after pets (mainly cats and dogs) while their owners are onholiday (see Figure 85) As part of the service all sorts of creature comforts ndashfrom TVs to sofas ndash can be added to a petrsquos temporary lsquoapartmentrsquo Ahydrotherapy pool and a bespoke vet service complement the pet careservices The business is staffed by a team of dedicated animal lovers who aresupported in their work by a sophisticated but easily manageable range oftechnology For example handheld devices are used to carry daily pet careschedules and a back office system records data on every pet enabling thecompany to instantly recognize and recall any previous lsquoguestrsquo history anduse it to make the pet feel welcome and at home The aim is to ensure thatevery animal gets the right service at the right time in the right place

The aim of integrating technology into service delivery is to optimizethe use of available media and channels Again the goal is to ensure thatthe consumer has a perfect experience across all media and channels usedIntegration in todayrsquos complex and demanding marketing environmentrequires moving away from the conventional approach to media and

148 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 148

channel strategy which has been to have different specialist agenciesmanage various elements of the marketing mix while consumer enquiriesare dealt with at an external call centre

When call centres first appeared in the UK they were held up as thefuture of customer service By offering a central point of customer contactthe call centre was seen as the answer to a comprehensive approach tocustomer service It is estimated that there are currently around 6000 callcentres in Britain and the number is expected to rise to 8000 by 2005 TheUK call centre industry now employs almost 500000 people or 17 ofthe working population However laudable and popular an idea the callcentrersquos reputation has tarnished over time due to adverse publicity anddreadful consumer experiences In too many cases these centres have beenexposed as a means of cutting costs rather than improving service levelsSome organizations however go to great lengths to make their call centresas lsquohumanrsquo and customer-friendly as possible Virgin Mobilersquos call centre islocated at its headquarters in Wiltshire The centre is light airy anddivided into sections staffed by different teams that work in light-heartedcompetition with each other Eggrsquos communications centre in Derby hasalso employed new concepts in lighting colour and space Its teams workin mini-communities and comfy chillout zones create a positive workingenvironment A pleasant working environment helps keep staff motivationhigh and this in turn has a positive impact on customer satisfaction

The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery 149

Figure 85 Petcareco Limited (formerly known as Triple lsquoArsquo)

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 149

The unique feature of these two companiesrsquo call centres is that they usetechnology as a means to an end to enhance the delivery of the valueproposition When organizations focus on technology as an end in itselfvalue-centricity is unattainable The challenge is deciding where and howto integrate technology into the implementation of service strategy Thedecision-making process is made easier where the organization has a serviceblueprint or map of its service processes2 This effectively reduces serviceencounters ndash or all points of contact between the consumer and theorganization ndash to a series of interrelated steps and sequences as the examplein Figure 86 shows It offers an opportunity to review service strengths andweaknesses and plan resource allocation more appropriately as well as tocommunicate responsibilities throughout the organization

Multichannel centres are now emerging as the next generation ofcontact centre Call centres are becoming web enabled and consumers canmake contact with the organization according to their channel preferenceIn some cases in the US for example call-centre staff are being replaced bytechnology that plugs into the software that runs the companyrsquos websiteVirtual call-centre operators or V-Reprsquos who can talk to and understandcustomers are taking their places The range of options now available to anorganization affords a high level of flexibility as the case of Nestleacutedemonstrates

NestleacuteNestleacute is testing this new approach to multichannel customer managementThe company is seeking to manage and execute everything ndash from thecreation of one-to-one consumer communications through to generating andresponding to phone fax post and email enquiries ndash from a dedicatedcommunications centre The project has been piloted in France at alsquorelationship centrersquo set up by McCann Relationship Marketing Paris (MRM)a division of McCann Erickson World Group Nestleacutersquos advertising agency

Nestleacute has promoted details about how to contact the company on productssince the 1960s However in 2000 this became a more forceful invitation forFrench consumers to make contact when Nestleacute introduced its Nestleacute enDirect scheme This initiative along with Club Nestleacute a club for consumersforms the basis of Nestleacutersquos consumer relationship activity in France Both activities are used to encourage consumers to communicate with the company and provide their personal details Nestleacute uses this data to segment consumers and to tailor one-to-one promotional and marketingactivity

150 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 150

Fig

ure

86

Cus

tom

er c

onta

ct c

omm

unic

atio

ns a

nd re

latio

nshi

p pr

oces

s S

ourc

e D

r Ray

mon

d P

ettit

New

Jer

sey

Inst

itute

of T

echn

olog

y

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 151

To manage all these activities more effectively Nestleacute has taken theinnovative step of creating a multichannel communications centre under oneroof All forms of enquiry made by French consumers to the company ndash anestimated 200000 a year ndash are handled by MRMrsquos relationship centre Inmoving response handlers alongside advertising creatives customerintelligence experts new media branding and management consultants theconsumer is put at the heart of the business Nestleacute foresees a number ofbenefits from this new approach It is more flexible and allows betterintegration between different communications channels as well as givingcontrol over the quality of all one-to-one consumer communications

Source Meg Carter lsquoTowards a closer relationship with customersrsquoFinancial Times 11 March 2002

THE ROLE OF THE SUPPLY CHAIN IN VALUE DELIVERY

As we have seen New Consumers demand goods and services through anever-changing mix of media and channels Meeting their requirements forfaster better and cheaper service and delivery depends heavily on themake-up and robustness of the supply chain Only those organizationswhose supply chains are capable of responding rapidly to volatile demandwill thrive in this post-quake business environment

Increasingly business theorists are talking about developing demand-led supply chains to deliver the required level of consumer responsivenessThis means moving away from the simplistic approach that characterizedsupply-chain management in the production-driven era Then supplychains were relatively unsophisticated extending forwards throughdistributors and retailers to the consumer and then stretching backwardsthrough component assemblers to the suppliers of the raw materialsSupply chains were linear and supply-chain management was to do withmanaging delivery trucks and storage sheds (or so it seemed) Over the pasttwo decades supply chains have grown in complexity and many nowresemble lsquowebsrsquo or lsquonetworksrsquo of collaborative relationships The evolutionof the supply-chain network has been accelerated by the application of ITThe impact of the Internet in particular has enabled widely distributedoperations to be brought together at a relatively low cost

This network or lsquoextended enterprisersquo approach to managing thesupply chain has developed in response to the downward pressures on pricearising from global overcapacity growing competition and more powerful

152 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 152

customers (issues that were discussed in Chapter 3) Falling market pricescompel organizations to turn their focus inwards and to concentrate onreducing costs Over the past decade rationalization within the supplychain has been a major source of cost savings The idea of lsquoleanmanufacturingrsquo promulgated by James Womack3 at MIT in the early1990s has attracted considerable interest Based on the production systemused in Japanese-owned automobile manufacturing plants particularlythat of Toyota the idea was later extended to form the wider concept of thelsquolean enterprisersquo The focus of this approach is the elimination of waste andthe creation of competitive advantage through lower cost prices Criticsargue that it only works well where demand is relatively stable and hencepredictable and where the requirement for variety is low In todayrsquos morevolatile markets where consumer requirements stipulate more productvariety and where the ability to forecast demand is diminishing a differentapproach is called for

Competing through the Supply Chain

As pointed out by Professor Martin Christopher of Cranfield School ofManagement nowadays it is supply chains rather than companies thatcompete in the marketplace (Christopher and Peck 1997 Christopher1998) One of the clearest examples of an organization that competesthrough its supply chain is Dell

DellMichael Dell eschewed the use of conventional channels to distribute his PCsand focused instead on direct sales Consumers can select their own PCconfiguration online at Dellcom and within just 90 minutes their personallycustomized lsquogrey boxrsquo will roll off the factoryrsquos production line Dellrsquos suppliershave built their factories close by and inventory is down to four days makingDell the number one computer service provider in the world When Dell didattempt to break into established retail distribution channels in the early1990s it all went badly wrong and the company pulled out after suffering itsfirst ever loss The direct sales model offers Dell a structural advantage thatrivals IBM and Hewlett-Packard do not have

Source Amanda Hall lsquoThe boy who lived the American dreamrsquo The SundayTimes 1 December 2002 Michael Dell and Catherine Fredman (1999)Michael Dell (2002)

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 153

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 153

Acceptance of the philosophy that it is supply chains that compete withone another rather than companies has led organizations to acknowledgetheir strengths and weaknesses and to outsource those activities theybelieve can be performed more cost-effectively by others The supply chainhas in effect become a confederation of closely linked specialists whosecooperative behaviour creates a highly differentiated value chain

Often it is not technology that is the barrier to making these complexpartnerships work but lack of trust As highlighted in Chapter 3 thesharing of information and expertise previously considered confidential isessential in building the degree of trust necessary for collaboration Anumber of major retailers have already begun the process of implementingthis collaborative approach to strategy making setting up private web-based exchanges requiring the integration of both partiesrsquo internal systemsto share data and ideas Building these closer relationships betweenbusinesses can be very beneficial Some estimate that the introduction of e-procurement systems founded on joint working arrangements can shortenorder fulfilment cycles by 70 and cut administration costs by 50ndash70 Itis even believed that inventory costs can be halved ndash a significant benefitconsidering that holding stocks of unsold goods is a primary cost escalator

Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression

Consumer responsiveness is dependent on superior levels of insightinnovation and agility As far as the supply chain goes the focus has to beon the elimination of time rather than of waste The aim of timecompression in supply chains is to shorten the total pipeline time betweenthe procurement of materials and payment for the finished goods In mostorganizations it takes longer to procure make and deliver the finishedproduct to the customer than the customer is prepared to wait giving riseto a mismatch in expectations that is known to as the lsquolead-time gaprsquoNormally organizations overcome this problem by carrying lsquobufferrsquo orsurplus stock The amount of inventory is typically based on a forecast ofwhat the market will require However forecasting is a far from accuratescience As Martin Christopher says organizations that manage to closethis lead-time gap lsquoneed neither forecasts nor inventory making themmore responsive to customer demand and able to reduce the cost offinancing the pipelinersquo (Christopher 2001)

154 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 154

Establishing partnerships with other members of the supply chain is one ofthe most critical ways in which organizations can develop a more responsivesupply chain This usually involves a rationalization of the supplier base as itis easier to develop closer relationships with a smaller number of strategicsuppliers rather than trying to manage closer relationships with hundreds orthousands of suppliers These relationships are characterized by synchronizedoperations and the transparency of information The Zip Project at Marks ampSpencer is an example of this new way of working

ZipZip is a joint venture between Marks amp Spencer and Desmond a long-standingsupplier to Marks amp Spencer based in Northern Ireland that was created as partof a wider plan to enable Marks amp Spencer to escape its well-publicized woes ofthe late 1990s The company had to face up to the fact that it was not deliveringfashion fast enough to the shop floor and its prices were not competitive Zip isdesigned to provide Marks amp Spencer with greater competitive advantage inthe area of childrenrsquos clothing through improved supply-chain managementMarks amp Spencer has made cost savings by changing its traditionalrelationships with suppliers eliminating areas of duplication and increasing thespeed with which its goods come to market Traditionally suppliers created thegoods and brought them to the buying teams at Marks amp Spencer who thendecided which goods had the greatest appeal Marks amp Spencer has nowbrought much of this design function in-house

Under the new arrangements Ziprsquos London office is responsible for thedesign work and fabric development while samples are developed inNorthern Ireland Samples are costed and different suppliers includingDesmond itself then bid to produce the finished garment The advantage ofthis approach is that Zip retains the copyright on the designs and theirmanufacture can therefore be shifted from supplier to supplier as required oras capacity becomes available ndash Marks amp Spencer uses 120 differentsuppliers in 28 countries Having greater consistency and control overproduction realizes savings that can be passed on to consumers The biggestadvantage however lies in the reduced amount of time it takes to get adesign on to the shop floor the organization can react quickly to thefickleness of pre-teen fashion Traditionally this process has taken 28 weeksZip aims to reduce this to 12 weeks The potential rewards are great aschildrenrsquos wear accounts for about 10 of Marks amp Spencerrsquos non-food salesworth between pound300 and pound400 million

Source Martin Waller lsquoMampS takes a fresh route to childhoodrsquo The Times7 September 2002

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 155

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 155

Another way of closing the lead-time gap is through rationalizinginternal processes The key here is to remove all non-value-addingprocesses lsquoValue-adding timersquo activities create a benefit for whichconsumers are prepared to pay lsquoNon-value-adding timersquo activities do notcreate customer benefit and are a drain on company resources One of themost effective means of creating a value-adding culture within theorganization is to focus externally on the value proposition that consumersare seeking Guinness achieved this in the mid-1990s by basing anoverhaul of its business processes on insight generated into what consumerswanted from the company

GuinnessIn the mid-1990s Guinness was one of the few large brewers not to own anylicensed premises (pubs and clubs) in the UK The company relied onconsumer demand to persuade its trade customers (those who owned theroutes to market largely other brewery companies) to stock its productsGuinness stout held sales remarkably well in a declining market for darkcoloured beers but in the early 1990s competition was heightened by thelaunch of rival stouts such as Murphyrsquos and the rising popularity of importedbottled beers Faced with the threat of more vigorous competition Guinnessundertook a review of its business and as a consequence set aboutimproving its performance in the marketplace

Guinness invested heavily in a brewery upgrade to ensure the quality of itsproduct but was dissatisfied with the results of its insight generation activitywhich revealed that consumers were often disappointed with the quality of apint of Guinness consumed in different outlets Guinness like other cask

156 Value Delivery

Figure 87 Guinnessrsquo lsquoPerfect Pintrsquo

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 156

beers is a lsquoliversquo product and needs to be stored and handled carefully Whereprocedures are not followed the result is an experience of variable quality forconsumers What consumers were looking for was expressed as lsquothe perfectpint in every pubrsquo

Guinness used this insight to inform internal decision making about whichprocesses needed to be in place to ensure consistent delivery of the perfectpint enabling them to create a cross-functional approach to businessGuinness worked with its partners in the supply chain to educate the pubtrade about the importance of looking after the product and serving itcorrectly This was a three-stage operation known as lsquothe pour the settle thetop uprsquo and it provided a focus for training in-house staff in pubs and clubs(see Figure 87) Consumers were also targeted with an award-winningadvertising campaign that extolled the virtues of waiting for a perfect pint Thiscoordinated range of activities based on a clear strategy propelled Guinnessto achieve its highest ever share of the total draught market

Source Presentation by Julian Spooner at Cranfield School of ManagementJanuary 1996

A third method of improving consumer responsiveness through supply-chain management is by maximizing the potential of each customerinterface The aim is to be able to capture information on probable demandfrom consumers as close to the final point of consumption as possible Areal breakthrough in data collection has been achieved by linking buyersrsquoand suppliersrsquo information systems through initiatives such as EfficientConsumer Response (ECR) Quick Response (QR) and Electronic DataInterchange (EDI) ECR an attempt to bring about more effectivecollaboration across all supply-chain members is most closely associatedwith the grocery industry where it is designed to integrate and rationalizeproduct assortment promotions new product development andreplenishment across the supply chain QR was developed in the USA tohelp clothing businesses compete against lower priced imports By takinga total supply chain view of an industry QR makes it possible tounderstand overall performance and the causes of poor performance and toidentify opportunities for improvement EDI a technology forbroadcasting demand data was the forerunner of web-enabled systems andis still widely used by larger suppliers

The advantage of systems integration among supply-chain partners isthat it enables the different parties to act on the same aggregate data in areal-time environment Each partner can gain a clearer picture of consumer

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 157

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 157

demand than they would otherwise be able to obtain independently andgreater consumer responsiveness can be achieved throughout the supplychain The benefits of such collaboration within knowledge managementand operational systems are especially important in developing keyaccounts4 as these normally command a higher strategic value

The importance of being able to act on real-time demand data becomesmore acute the more volatile the market This is particularly the case withsuppliers of fashionable or weather-dependent goods and services whosecompetitive survival depends on rapid reactions to unpredictable marketchanges For an organization like Britvic which markets and manufacturesits own brands such as Tango as well as canning and distributing Pepsi-Cola in the UK demand for soft drinks can double on hot days Insituations where the product has a limited shelf life or the organization hasan obligation to meet high trade-customer service levels stock-outs cannotbe tolerated Access to instant accurate and complete demand data iscritical to the running of flexible manufacturing operations that aim toensure constant availability Indeed availability becomes a more criticalmeasure of consumer responsiveness than productivity in todayrsquosmarketplace

While some suppliers favour a strategy of rapid stock replenishment as away of managing the amount of inventory they carry others follow astrategy of postponement or delaying the finishing or value-addingactivities until customer orders have been received The clothingmanufacturer and retailer Zara for example purchases a high proportion ofits fabric in an undyed (or grey) state On receipt of incoming orders thefabric is dyed patterned and finished by a fully owned subsidiary which isa supplier to Zara as well as to other manufacturers By working in thisway Zara is able to originate a design and have the finished goods in itsstores within weeks as opposed to the traditional industry model whichmay take up to six months

Advances in supply-chain thinking are driving the concept moretowards the notion of demand-chain management which is totally inkeeping with New Consumer Marketing (Gattorna 1998) By its verynature a supply chain focuses on making the flow of product from source toend user as efficient as possible In contrast a demand chain focuses onmeeting market needs in the most relevant timely and cost-effective wayIn other words a demand system sees the lsquopipelinersquo as driven from the

158 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 158

consumer end placing the emphasis on consumer responsiveness ratherthan vendor efficiency The differences between these two approaches aresummarized in Table 81

Table 81 Agile supply chain management versus a traditional approach

This third cell of the New Consumer Marketing model marks the pointat which the symbiotic relationship with the consumer is developed Thevalue that has been defined and created is finally delivered to themarketplace and exchanged with the consumer While the process of valuedelivery is contingent on the interplay of media and channels servicetechnology integration and the supply chain it is the role of organizationalagility that is of fundamental importance

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Organizational agility is an enterprise-wide concept that demands anability to change gear and immerse the organization in newopportunities on a continual basis

bull Media choice is to do with how the value proposition is communicatedwhile channel choice is about how it is transacted However at

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 159

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 159

[Text not available in this electronic edition]

touchpoints where consumers can be engaged in dialogue theopportunity for transaction arises leading to the interrelationship ofthe two as an integrated media and channel strategy

bull The goal of a multimediamulti-channel strategy is to ensure that theconsumer has a perfect experience across all the media and channelsused Each time the consumer comes into contact with a brand theyshould feel like they are talking to the same person

bull Service is an important differentiator in the marketplace The way inwhich service staff deal with consumers simultaneously creates anddelivers value at the point of consumption In effect the valueexperience is the brand

bull The recruitment motivation and retention of staff are key elements ina successful service strategy

bull Empowering employees takes trust and courage on the part of theorganization as employees are given autonomy to interpret the brandin a way that is both meaningful to them and their job and toconsumers

bull Supply chains play a major role in determining consumerresponsiveness and competitive advantage In the new marketplacesupply chains must become demand-led

bull Consumer responsiveness requires a supply-chain focus on theelimination of time rather than of waste Availability becomes the keymeasure rather than productivity

160 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 160

Seven elements of organizational lsquoDNArsquo make a demand system viable

Managing a demand system is fundamentally different to managing asupply system It requires turning the supply chain on its head and takingthe consumer as the organizationrsquos starting point and not its finaldestination As established early on in this book New Consumers aresophisticated and demanding and they inhabit an interactive rather thana static marketplace To succeed in this challenging and ever-changingmarketing environment organizations must adopt a value-centricorientation By focusing on delivering the value consumers actually needand want organizations can make the radical transition from operating ina production-driven to operating in a consumption-led economy

The New Consumer Marketing model (see Figure 91) draws onlearning from the living sciences and conceptualizes the marketing processas three organic cells of a living demand system Having discussed thenature and function of each of the three cells ndash value definition valuecreation and value delivery ndash in Chapters 6ndash8 it is now appropriate toexamine how the cells work together and what organizational elementscontrol and inform their performance

The way in which these cells collaborate to keep the demand systemalive and effective is dependent on the make-up of the lsquoorganizationalDNArsquo In biology DNA is the material that carries an organismrsquos geneticinformation such as that needed by cells to make enzymes Enzymes areimportant because they control the processes that occur within cells Theydetermine which chemicals are made in a cell and what the cell will do Theinformation about which enzyme to make and when has to be permanentlystored in each cell so that it can be drawn upon as necessary The

Demand System Management 9

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 161

relationship between biological DNA and enzymes provides a goodmetaphor for understanding the elements that inform and trigger whathappens in a market-driven organization

Organizational DNA consists of seven elements that fall into two typesthose that are people related (intuition culture and structure leadershipvision and values employees) and those that are process related (knowledgemanagement planning measurement) Each element carries informationto the three cells value definition value delivery and value creation Thisinformation enables each cell to optimize performance thereby ensuringthe competitive survival of the organization as a whole Operating aneffective demand system requires an understanding of the role and impactof all of these elements in order that they can be expertly managed Themain challenges facing New Consumer Marketing (to meet the needs ofbrand owners and retailers to embrace the New Consumer to develop realconsumer responsiveness and to arrest the crisis in marketing) reinforcethe imperative of addressing these business aspects in a systemic manner

162 Demand System Management

13

13

13 $

Figure 91 The New Consumer Marketing model

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 162

New Consumer Marketing breaks out of the binary thinking that has seenbusinesses swing between a focus on process and a focus on people Insteadit combines the two by identifying the key processes and relationships thatunderpin the organization and using them to help the organizationbecome as adaptable and competitive as possible

The seven elements of organizational DNA are

bull Intuitionbull Culture and structurebull Leadership vision and valuesbull Employeesbull Knowledge managementbull Planningbull Measurement

THE ROLE OF INTUITION IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

The mechanistic approach to management so characteristic of theproduction-driven era was based on rational systems that appealed to thereasoning skills of managers These systems were presented as if there weresome underlying algorithm for doing business Today management isabout engaging both our rational and our creative abilities Increasingimportance is being placed on corporate intuition and imaginationIntuitive ability plays a major role in demand system management bycontributing to the development of insight innovation and organizationalagility

In the definition creation and delivery of the value proposition thecapacity to instantly understand other peoplersquos behaviour thoughtswishes feelings and beliefs is a means of gaining additional perspectiveThrough intuitive understanding managers and staff can perceive thetruth of things without reasoning or analysis They can put themselves inthe consumerrsquos shoes and see the benefit of taking a particular course ofaction without needing any rational validation

Anthropologists believe that this capability is linked to the early socialdevelopment of humans particularly with our ability to interact with andinfluence others The ability of managers to understand mental states ndashboth their own and those of others ndash is known as Theory of Mind Theory of

The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management 163

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 163

Mind has been described as lsquoa start-up kit for learning about the mentalworldrsquo1 It is a kind of lsquomind readingrsquo which psychologists refer to asintuitive mentalizing Encouraging intuitive input in a demand systemstimulates innovative thought and a sense of empathy with consumersThis can lead to improvements in the market relevance of the valueproposition and thus enhancement of the consumerrsquos experience of thebrand

Most successful entrepreneurs have strong intuitive mentalizing skillsand they use these to put their lsquogood ideasrsquo about what consumers want intothe marketplace They are able to imagine what the value propositionshould look like and to marshal the organizationrsquos resources to deliver it Inheavily managed organizations this ability is often repressed Take forexample Woburn Safari Park part of the Woburn estate in BedfordEngland where the importance of intuition is fully recognized

Woburn Safari ParkAt Woburn Safari Park this elusive lsquosecond sightrsquo has been developed underthe leadership of chief executive Chris Webster Ten years ago the park wasin severe decline but a remarkable turnaround in performance has beenachieved through some radical thinking On the basis of gut feel the decisionwas taken to introduce a junior board of 11-year-olds to shadow the parkrsquos

164 Demand System Management

Figure 92 Woburn Safari Park

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 164

management board For the family-oriented attraction engaging the input ofyoung imaginations in strategy making was a wise move children of coursedo not hold back in asking the whywhy not questions Benchmarking visitsare made by the junior board to rival attractions and the childrenrsquos ideas areassimilated into the way Woburn Safari Park defines creates and delivers itsvalue proposition

Intuitive mentalizing is a very necessary ability in the delivery of serviceAs discussed in Chapter 8 front-line staff need to be able to demonstrateempathy with consumers if they are to convey consumer value in aconsistent and personalized way Where intuitive ability is lacking theorganization will have difficulty in predicting the behaviour of consumersreading their intentions and understanding their motives and emotions Atworst the organization will suffer from lack of commitment andmotivation to please The key challenge is to find ways of unleashing thepotential for corporate intuition Intuition is an ability not a function itmust be embedded within the organization and cannot sit isolated in onedepartment The development of corporate intuition lies in making it ashared approach to defining creating and delivering value and this canbest be achieved through the organizational culture and structure

THE ROLE OF CULTURE AND STRUCTURE IN DEMANDSYSTEM MANAGEMENT

Culture

Organizational culture is one of the most intangible elements of a demandsystem Its roots reach deep into the collection of beliefs and assumptionsthat are commonly held in the organization and its influence onorganizational performance is all pervasive Organizational cultureprovides a guide to acceptable internal behaviour summarized as lsquothe waythings are done around herersquo Culture therefore underpins a value-centricbusiness strategy

Trying to understand organizational culture can be as difficult for thoseinside the organization as for those outside it A useful tool for surfacingthe behaviours and artefacts that characterize a particular organization isthe culture web developed by academic researchers Professor GerryJohnson and Kevin Scholes (1992) This is shown in Figure 93 The

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 165

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 165

culture web makes explicit the rituals of organizational life ndash the dailyroutines that are often taken for granted but which all employees mustlearn when they join the organization It captures the stories told aboutpeople ndash the lsquoheroesrsquo and the lsquomavericksrsquo ndash whose fate symbolizes what theorganization is all about The culture web also notes the symbols thatconvey meaning within the organization ndash the use of logos the allocationof offices and car parking spaces etc

Depicting cultural aspects in this way helps in identifying themanagerial groups closely associated with the essence of organizationalculture a power structure that may not accord with the official companyorganigram The formalized ways in which the organization works ndash usingcommittees or working parties for example ndash also reflect the powerstructure and send signals throughout the company and its supply chainabout what is deemed important In many organizations there is anincongruity between the values that are promoted and the behaviours thatare rewarded A familiar example is the sales team that is told to maximizecustomer profitability while being rewarded on the basis of unit sales Theteam is tempted to offer discounts and inducements to customers as the

166 Demand System Management

Mythsand

stories

Routinesand

rituals

Controlsystems

Organizationalstructures

Powerstructures

Symbols

Paradigm

Figure 93 The cultural web of an organization Adapted from Johnson and Scholes(1992)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 166

overriding message is lsquomaximize volume rather than profitsrsquo Each of theseaspects that make up the cultural web can be characterized for anindividual organization As Figure 93 shows at the heart of culture is anunderlying paradigm within which the organization operates made up ofthe core beliefs assumptions and values that matter to it

Closely related to culture is the climate within the organization Thishas been summed up by researchers as lsquothe feeling in the airrsquo that one getsfrom walking around a company (Clark 1999) Organizational climate canbe created by employees observing what happens to them and what goes onaround them and drawing their own conclusions about the organizationrsquospriorities and what it values Employees then set their own prioritiesaccordingly about where they should focus their energies andcompetencies which in turn feed back into the organizational climateOrganizational culture and climate are therefore dynamic and sensitive tomanagerial influence Tesco is an example of an organization that hasmastered the management of these intangible aspects and used them toguide the development of a value-centric strategy

TescoIn 1992 the issue of organizational culture formed one of the foundationblocks of Tescorsquos lsquoFirst Class Servicersquo initiative which has since propelled thecompany to a dominant market position It represented a shift from thecompanyrsquos previous command-and-control approach to management Eachmember of Tescorsquos then 130000 staff was empowered to look aftercustomers in the way they thought best At the same time managers wereencouraged to recognize staff achievements and to set an example bytreating them as individuals so that they would in turn treat customers asindividuals This initiative was highly successful not least because staff weremade aware through internal marketing programmes that the averagepotential lifetime spend of a Tesco customer was significant amounting toaround pound90000

Source lsquoTesco Clubcard Foreverrsquo case study H Peck Cranfield School ofManagement 2002

There are however pitfalls in encouraging everyone in the company tothink in the same way which can easily happen when everyone is focusedon the same goals The danger is that the organization can fall into the trapof approaching every problem no matter how different in the same wayWhat is required is a management body that supports an innovative

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 167

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 167

culture one that encourages staff to think and respond differently but thatis nonetheless focused on the organizationrsquos vision and informed by itsvalues A value-centric orientation within the organization ensures thesedifferent ways of working are still legitimate Dell is one organization thatmanages its organizational culture very effectively

DellDellrsquos innovative culture supports risk taking and learning from failure AsMichael Dell says lsquoto encourage people to innovate more you have to makeit safe for them to failrsquo Dell achieves this by creating an internal culture thatquestions the status quo and encourages smart experimentation At Dellfailure is seen as a learning experience and is typically considered animportant milestone on the road to achieving success The nature of thebusiness means there is little relevant history for it to draw upon forcing theorganization to create its own response to the challenges it faces Dellmanagers also embrace an experimental attitude to decision makingSometimes it is not possible to wait for the relevant data before making adecision Under these circumstances managers are encouraged to make thebest possible decisions based on experience intuition available data and anassessment of risk

Source Amanda Hall lsquoThe boy who lived the American dreamrsquo The SundayTimes 1 December 2002 Michael Dell and Catherine Fredman (1999)Michael Dell (2002)

Tesco and Dell have used organizational culture as the basis ofcompetitive advantage Organizations that do not heed the importance ofmanaging internal culture effectively can fall prey to strategic drift andbecome increasingly incapable of self-renewal and self-determination Ineffect organizational culture determines business fate It is critical to thesuccessful implementation of a demand system that the prevailing culturein the organization supports and drives the development of insightinnovation and agility ndash the competencies that lie at the heart of each of thethree cells of the New Consumer Marketing model

Structure

The culture of an organization is embodied within the structure of theorganization Traditional vertical organizations which are hierarchicallystructured and functionally oriented work to optimize individual

168 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 168

functions at the expense of the entire business and the relationship with theconsumer Hierarchical structures work well when the marketingenvironment is stable and demand is predictable Now that the certaintiesof the production-driven era have been replaced by the uncertainties of theconsumption-led economy flatter horizontal organizational structures areemerging

These flatter horizontal structures enable organizations to be moreresponsive by speeding up decision-making processes and encouragingcross-functional collaboration which helps maximize consumer value andoperational cost-effectiveness Value-centric organizations draw keyemployees together in autonomous multidisciplinary teams to focusresources around value definition creation and delivery Often these teamsare temporary enabling the organization to combine and recombine assetsaccording to the nature of the opportunities that arise These are firms thatregard the organizational whole as greater than the sum of its parts

However this does not mean that organizations cannot grow big Tescofor example is one of a small number of organizations that has succeeded inbuilding the virtues of smallness into a large organization one that nownumbers around 200000 employees The company achieves this in partby having a shared understanding of what the business is aiming for Thisdraws from the companyrsquos clearly stated mission ndash lsquoto continually increasevalue for customers to earn their lifetime loyaltyrsquo ndash and its corporatevalues These values are embedded into the organization through a varietyof HR practices that focus on appraisal and reward systems

The strength of less hierarchically structured organizations lies not justin what they achieve as a single entity but in the power of the network theybuild around them through joint ventures strategic alliances andpartnerships This is the concept of the lsquoextended enterprisersquo and its successdepends on a new type of logic one that demands openness and cooperation(with consumers customers suppliers and competitors) The extended ornetworked enterprise places greater emphasis on the role of leadershipvision and values

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 169

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 169

THE ROLE OF LEADERSHIP VISION AND VALUES INDEMAND SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

Leadership

Leadership in organizational management is more important than everbefore in this post-quake business environment Businesses must aligntheir organizational philosophy and practices with the realities of theconsumption-led economy How an organization is led and managed inthis time of transition is a key differentiator in the marketplace Whilethere is no standard formula for what makes an effective leader NewConsumer Marketing demands a number of essential leadership skills2

First among these skills is the ability to engage others in the businessrsquosmission Leaders like Howard Schultz whose Starbucks business grewprofits by 92 to $1812 million on sales of $3 billion in 2001 have to beable to engage their employees in providing exceptional service tonumerous consumers every day Starbucks for example serves 20 millionpeople a week across 5000 outlets Key to achieving a dedicated workforceis the ability to communicate the corporate vision effectively to allstakeholders with a distinctive and compelling voice Internalcommunications form the most important part of this task and marketersare well placed to manage them as the essence of the internalcommunications process is similar to that of the external communicationsprocess It is also important for strategic reasons that both processes arealigned and marketers possess all the relevant skills for managing this

Secondly effective leadership provides focus inspiration and meaningwhich need to be communicated to everyone within the organization Themeasure of a leaderrsquos effectiveness can often be seen in the way he or shemanages this communication process Powerful communicators are goodat telling stories utilizing the potency of metaphors and language KjellNordstroumlm and Jonas Ridderstraringle the Swedish economics experts who co-authored the best-selling book Funky Business (2000) suggest thatlsquocommunicating a vision not only involves repetition and a carefullydistilled message it demands the ability to tell a story True leaders areCSOs ndash Chief Storytelling Officersrsquo

Senior managers at TGI Fridayrsquos restaurants have been telling the samestories for many years many of them based on the original stories told byfounder Dan Skoggins These work-related stories serve to convey the

170 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 170

vision and ethos of the company The lsquoemployee cloak theoryrsquo for examplesays lsquoYou were hired for your personality When you put on your uniformdonrsquot let it become a cloak and hide yourself behind it You are notexpected to be a robot in fact we believe our success comes from ourinteraction with the guests Work hard have fun make moneyrsquo

The third essential leadership skill required for New ConsumerMarketing to succeed is integrity including a strong set of personal valuesA sense of virtuousness is vital because organizational leaders become thede facto keepers of their companyrsquos vision and values In todayrsquos moretransparent business environment they need to be able to inspirecommitment among employees This will not be forthcoming whereprofessional integrity is lacking as a number of CEOs who havetransgressed the boundaries of honourable behaviour have found Carelessremarks made in public that appear to denigrate the companyrsquos vision andvalues may be seized upon by the media making the task of motivatingemployees much harder

Finally it goes without saying that business leadership demands anability to grasp the importance of the tectonic shift that has taken place inthe marketing environment This in turn implies a steadfast ability toweigh a number of factors and make appropriate decisions to ensure theorganization operates effectively and efficiently in defining creating anddelivering the value consumers are seeking

Vision

All organizations need a shared idea of why they exist and what they aremeant to achieve Vision and values work to support the organizationrsquosmission by providing answers to those key questions lsquowhere are we goingrsquoand lsquohow are we going to get therersquo Answering them becomes more of animperative in todayrsquos volatile marketplace This is because vision andvalues play an important part in realizing a value-centric orientation Theyforce the organization to think strategically about the long term whileproviding a framework for coping with turbulence in the short term Witha strong vision and firm values in place senior managers can delegateresponsibilities with more confidence local managers can get a clearerpicture of how to approach decisions and front-line staff can be guided incustomizing the value proposition for consumers

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values 171

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 171

The purpose of having good leadership is to create and regularly updatethe corporate vision and direct the organization towards its realization Inorder to provide unequivocal direction the business vision needs to beclear distinctive memorable motivating and meaningful to both staffand consumers Microsoftrsquos original vision was very strong (lsquoa computer onevery desk and in every homersquo) as is Disneyrsquos (lsquoto make people happyrsquo) andthat of the International Red Cross (lsquoto serve the most vulnerablersquo) The testof a strong vision is to see if people can recognize the organization from itsvision statement Many organizations either have no vision or have a visionthat is weak that is to say it is unclear too complex or simply irrelevant

It has been estimated that making a business vision work is 5 creationand 95 implementation Activating the vision starts at the top of theorganization and is a process that must involve all employees It is not untilpeople can see the vision in terms of what it means to them that it starts tobecome embedded within the organization This draws on the ability of the leader to communicate to employees the meaning of where theorganization is heading and what their role in this journey will beMarketers need to play their part by managing internal communicationsprogrammes effectively in order to support the organizational leadershipand to clarify and reinforce employee understanding Only then can visionbe translated into relevant and achievable strategies

Values

Values are a powerful and omnipresent part of organizational lifeAcademic researcher Milton Rokeach defines values as enduring beliefsabout preferable ways of behaving and a value system as an enduring wayof organizing those beliefs (1973) In the New Consumer Marketing modelcorporate values support the implementation of the corporate vision Theymake up the integral beliefs that guide organizational behaviourMoreover as their definition suggests values are not fashion items to bechanged on a regular basis values should stand the test of time SingaporeAirlines is one company that understands this well

Singapore AirlinesSingapore Airlines has six core values which support its mission statementlsquoWe are a global company dedicated to providing air transportation servicesof the highest quality and earning good returns for shareholdersrsquo Although

172 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 172

these words are rooted in operational and financial performance marketinghas transformed the airline into Fortune Magazinersquos most admired airline in2002 The key to Singapore Airlinersquos achievement are these core values (seeTable 91) which permeate every area of business strategy By translatingthese values into actionable and measurable practices within theorganization the company is able to build value-centricity and give realsubstance to its brand The airlinersquos employees see themselves as a part ofthe brand and this is reflected in their work performance adding significantvalue to the consumerrsquos experience

Table 91 Singapore Airlinesrsquo core values

1 Pursuit of excellence We strive for the highest professional standards in our workand aim to be the best in everything we do

2 Safety We regard safety as an essential part of all our operations Wemaintain and adopt practices that promote the safety of ourcustomers and staff

3 Customer first Our customers are foremost in our minds all the time We gothe extra mile to exceed their expectations

4 Concern for staff We value our staff and care for their well-being We treatthem with respect and dignity and seek to provide them withappropriate training and development so that they can leadfulfilling careers

5 Integrity We strive for fairness in all our business and workingrelationships

6 Teamwork We work with pride as a worldwide team to achieve successtogether

Where management action is not aligned with corporate values thevalues become meaningless as demonstrated in the fall from grace ofindustry giants Enron and Andersen in 2002 An organizationrsquos values arethe principles that the company abides by and is willing to enforce they arenot simply the words printed on the pages of company brochures It is allvery well drawing up carefully crafted values statements and codes ofpractice but these become pointless if employees are permitted tocontravene them Actions speak louder than words and an organizationrsquosvalues should be seen as non-negotiable minimum standards

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values 173

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 173

Business adviser and best-selling author Hugh Davidson pulls togetherthe role of leadership vision and values in his model of the lsquocommittedenterprisersquo (2002) This is shown in Figure 94 and is based on the formula

Committed customers + Motivated employees = Satisfied resourcefinanceproviders

Davidson believes that an enterprisersquos vision and values bind these threeconstituent parties (customers employees resource providers) byproviding future direction and governing everyday decision making andbehaviour Through vision and values the needs of the three parties arealigned and they are able to move forward together Davidson expressesthis through the use of a visual symbol that dates back to Roman times theThree Legs of Man lsquoWhichever way you throw me I standrsquo is the symbolrsquosaccompanying motto

Vision and values need to be embedded in the organization and this canonly be done by making them measurable and converting them intopersonal objectives for every member of staff Together with leadershipthey make up a complex but vital element in organizational DNAWhether or not an organizationrsquos vision and values are realized depends onappropriate leadership and on the management of employees

174 Demand System Management

Figure 94 The committed enterprise Adapted from Davidson (2002)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 174

[Image not available in this electronic edition]

THE ROLE OF EMPLOYEES IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

While marketers are confronting the shift from a production-driven to aconsumption-led economy human resource (HR) professionals are facing asimilar tectonic change as employees are increasingly perceived as anorganizational asset rather than a production cost This redefinition of therole of employees is a response to the decline in manufacturing and the riseof the Information Age which demands a radically different approach toHR management The role of employees is a matter of concern formarketers because the impact of an organization externally is tied to whatgoes on internally

The move away from manufacturing and the emergence of theknowledge worker brings in its wake a change in the asset base of theorganization As Peter Drucker says lsquothe most valuable assets of a 20th-century company were its production equipment The most valuable assetof a 21st-century institution whether business or non-business will be its knowledge workers and their productivityrsquo (Drucker 2002) Thisperspective forces a shift in the way in which people are evaluated withinthe organization In the manufacturing economy manual workers wereregarded as a cost which needed to be controlled and reduced andemployee management reflected this Employee productivity wasincreased through investment in plant and technology Knowledgeworkers in contrast are seen as a capital asset whose intrinsic value can begrown Their productivity is achieved in a very different way by placingresponsibility with the knowledge workers themselves The emphasis inHR management today therefore tends towards self-management andautonomy This ethos plays a crucial part in empowering staff to deliverbetter service as was mentioned in Chapter 8

The underlying assumption here is that unlike the manual workers ofthe production-driven era knowledge workers own the means ofproduction and enjoy greater levels of mobility in their careers thanprevious generations This is the thesis explored in the book Funky Business(Nordstroumlm and Ridderstraringle 2000) The authors write lsquoKarl Marx wasright The workers do control the means of production 13 kilograms ofbrain holds the key to all our futuresrsquo In their words lsquoItrsquos talent that makescapital dancersquo

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 175

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 175

Harnessing this talent means adopting a different approach tomanaging people Best-practice organizations whose thinking has movedout of the industrial age adopt the philosophy that they are in a more orless symbiotic relationship with employees and they create an internalvalue proposition to inform HR practice The organization employs peopleto define create and deliver value in the marketplace at a profit In returnfor their intellectual application development of potential and loyalty tothe organization employees receive a range of benefits

In the same way that the external value proposition described inChapter 6 is made up of component factors so too is the internal valueproposition It takes the form of a mix of two sorts of benefits andincentives There are extrinsic ones such as pay and promotion andintrinsic ones which lie deep within human nature Research shows thatlsquowhile traditional rewards and punishments can if ill-managed severelydamage motivation they have little beneficial effect under even the best ofcircumstances It is the fuzzier things ndash to do with feelings of purposebelonging engagement ndash that push people to do their bestrsquo (HarvardBusiness Review 2003)

Just as the factors that create added value for the consumer are those thatare mould breaking and have never before been offered in the marketplacethe factors that create added value for employees are similarly innovativeand special These key discriminating factors set the organization apartfrom competitors in the eyes of employees Occasionally some of thesedifferentiating factors may be lsquoadoptedrsquo by staff and become lsquotalkingpointsrsquo creating great word-of-mouth marketing for the organization as anemployer of choice Examples here include the free ice creams and picnicblankets made available in the summer to Microsoftrsquos staff at their Readingfacility the three-month unpaid winter holiday known as a lsquoBenidormbreakrsquo made available to older staff at Asda and Pret A Mangerrsquosmaternity package which includes pound20 towards a pair of maternity jeansand health spa vouchers upon return to work

The internal value proposition provides the focus for the full range ofHR practices These cover recruitment training appraisal promotion andsuccession planning as well as redundancy and dismissal In the lsquowar fortalentrsquo (Michaels et al 2001) recruitment is critical Best-practiceorganizations are looking not only for competency in prospectiveemployees but also alignment with the organizationrsquos vision and values

176 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 176

For many organizations the most effective and efficient way to recruit theright people is to encourage existing staff to introduce new employees

Once recruited into a best-practice organization employees participatein the acculturation and learning processes Whereas these two processesbarely made it on to organizational agendas in the industrial age they arenow seen as key to motivating and retaining staff Personalized andtargeted learning is offered on a continuous basis and organizationssometimes formalize this within their own learning institutions forexample the lsquouniversitiesrsquo run by McDonaldrsquos Disney and Unipart Othercompanies are working more virtually and taking advantage ofdevelopments in IT to create learning academies on their intranets Thereis also an emerging trend to provide non-work-related courses andopportunities to fulfil personal development goals Many organizationsrealize the value of providing benefits related to achieving a sense ofpersonal well-being such as sponsoring employee memberships to sportscentres and the provision of health services Team- and company-basedactivities that benefit the local community or charities also characterizebest-practice HR systems Expenditure on these less-traditional HRdevelopment activities is viewed as an investment in the organizationrsquosknowledge base and is assessed accordingly Ongoing appraisalspromotion and reward systems provide a further means of reinforcingdesired internal behaviours and attitudes

Where all of these elements of HR practice work effectively employeeswill be motivated and happy to stay with the organization This approachto HR management does not simply equate with paying them highsalaries as the winners of the 2002 lsquo100 best companies to work forrsquo show(McCall 2002) Asdarsquos experience is a good example

AsdaTop-rated superstore Asda has annual sales of pound97 billion and employs117000 people Salaries start at pound8833 In the 1980s the company reversedits declining fortunes by adopting a culture based on Wal-Martrsquos customer-friendly style When the Asda chain was bought by the American giant Wal-Mart in 1999 the value-centric orientation in both organizations ensured asmooth transition despite staff fears that the two cultures would clash Theunderlying philosophy is that everyone must be treated as an individual andstaff incentives are targeted to keep employee motivation high For exampleAsda recently introduced an employee health insurance scheme to cover

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 177

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 177

male cancers The scheme follows on from the companyrsquos lsquoWell Womanrsquocover which has had a 50 take-up Asdarsquos share option scheme will see the16000 staff who were given shares in 1995 share an estimated pound25 millionwhen their shares schemes mature Other loyalty incentives include a lawclub that provides Asda employees with legal advice for 10 pence a weekand a free investment advice service from Bradford amp Bingley Thesepractices have helped keep the companyrsquos staff turnover down to anabnormally low figure for the sector

Asda and other organizations that define create and deliver a valueproposition for staff that makes them an employer of choice base theirstrategy on a simple model that links employee satisfaction and retentionwith customer satisfaction and retention Research suggests that a satisfiedand stable workforce is more capable of delivering higher service quality at

178 Demand System Management

Figure 95 The cycle of success Adapted from Schlesinger and Heskett (1991)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 178

lower cost (Schlesinger and Heskett 1991) This leads to higher levels ofcustomer satisfaction which in turn impacts customer retention levels andincreased profitability This virtuous circle is shown in Figure 95

THE ROLE OF KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT IN DEMANDSYSTEM MANAGEMENT

In todayrsquos consumption-led economy brand owners and retailers areconcentrating on becoming more productive by managing their responseto consumer demand better They are increasingly switching their businessfocus from cutting costs to adding value A key means of adding value isthrough knowledge management processes As a consequence knowledgemanagement has emerged as a major business discipline It is driven byadvances in IT and growth in the use of the Internet which allowinformation to be exchanged across the world 24 hours a day seven days aweek all at the touch of a button Failure to adapt knowledge managementpractices to this continually changing environment leads to what ArnoldKransdorff (19992000) has termed lsquocorporate amnesiarsquo a phenomenonthat prevents organizations learning from their own experienceslsquoCharacterized by knowledge loss it stems from short memory selectiverecall and the flexible labour marketrsquo

In order to create differential advantage a business needs to master theflows of information and knowledge that exist within its organization andthroughout its value chain As Lew Platt former CEO of Hewlett-Packardhas often been quoted as saying lsquoIf Hewlett-Packard knew what Hewlett-Packard knows wersquod be three times as profitablersquo The aim of knowledgemanagement is to build a collective and dynamic corporate memory Thefirst step is to establish a process for capturing knowledge about theorganization and the marketing environment

There are two main types of knowledge explicit knowledge and tacitknowledge Explicit knowledge is the more tangible of the two Itrepresents the type of knowledge that can be captured in written or processform and easily reused The lsquowhatrsquo dimension of corporate know-how islargely explicit knowledge Tacit knowledge refers to the implicit andoften ambiguous knowledge that is acquired mainly through personalexperience It is usually context-specific and provides the lsquohowrsquo dimensionof corporate know-how Tacit knowledge is difficult to formalize and hard

The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System Management 179

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 179

to capture As people are generally better at talking about experiences thanwriting them down new techniques to capture tacit knowledge areemerging Based on the art of storytelling these techniques amount toformalized oral debriefings following important organizational events Thedebriefing process allows employees to create accurate records of how whyand when they performed their tasks It requires a climate of trust asemployees need to feel that they are not relinquishing personal advantagebut are adding to the greater gain from which they too will benefit Ittherefore calls for a supportive organizational culture and value system

Knowledge itself has no intrinsic value as its value comes from beingused and unlike other resources knowledge grows with use Extractingand exploiting the value of knowledge is a core competence withindemand-led organizations In managing a demand system the knowledgemanagement process should reflect the value-centric orientation of theorganization Knowledge about consumers and their wants and desirescompetitors and internal competencies must be captured and managed toenable the superior definition creation and delivery of the valueproposition As Professor George Day from Wharton writes lsquoWhatdistinguishes a market-driven firm is the depth and timeliness of marketknowledge that enables it to anticipate market opportunities and respondfaster than its rivals When this knowledge is widely shared it is a commonreference point and assumption set that ensures the strategy is coherentrather than a disconnected set of activitiesrsquo (Day 1999)

New Consumer Marketing is concerned with generating and exploitingfour kinds of knowledge The first is knowledge about consumers for thisenables the organization to define and create a value proposition that isrelevant and appealing to consumers These subjects were covered inChapters 6 and 7 Chapter 6 covered the generation of insight and makingit actionable through segmentation while Chapter 7 explored the processof value creation and the role of new product development brandingpositioning and pricing in achieving this

The second kind of knowledge used in New Consumer Marketing isderived from competitor activity Awareness and understanding of whatcompetitors are doing and planning can help in making strategicmarketing plans work Of particular importance is an understanding of theorganizationrsquos competitive position as seen from the consumerrsquos point ofview

180 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 180

The third kind of knowledge which underpins the functioning of ademand system is process knowledge In the New Consumer Marketingmodel this relates to knowledge about the three cells ndash value definitionvalue creation and value delivery The aim is to make the core process ineach cell more efficient and effective Process knowledge comes fromimproved organization of the activities that support the development ofinsight innovation and agility Tacit process knowledge may well be agreater source of advantage here than explicit process knowledge

Finally there is the need to know about IT and how to use it smartlySystems knowledge guides the application of IT in both externally andinternally facing systems Decisions made regarding the deployment of ITwill have a fundamental impact on the success of a New ConsumerMarketing approach

Making the most of all four kinds of knowledge requires anorganizational culture that recognizes the value of knowledge enables theformulation and implementation of a strategy for knowledge managementthat is tied to a value-centric orientation and creates a climate thatencourages the acquisition and sharing of knowledge Without thissupporting culture the organizational DNA is fatally flawed

THE ROLE OF PLANNING IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

Increasing turbulence in the marketplace more demanding andsophisticated consumers increasing environmental complexity and thespeed of technological advancement all raise questions about the wisdom ofsetting down in a plan the three- to five-year ambitions of an organizationHow can planning be of use when times are changing so fast Areconventional approaches agile enough to capture the dynamic complexityof the marketplace except in the very short term In the pre-quake businessenvironment planning was presented as an orderly and linear sequence ofsteps For many organizations it was a-once-a-year fill-in-the-box activityThe conventional approach started with corporate and strategic planningwhich covered the identification of corporate goals (including missionvision values financial objectives and shareholder requirements) All ofthis was distilled down into a strategic marketing plan that consisted of asituational analysis leading to a summary presented in a SWOT analysis

The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 181

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 181

Marketing objectives and strategy were then defined on the basis of thisanalysis as well as factors previously noted as relevant to the organizationThe fourth and final stage of marketing planning involved creating atactical plan setting out the immediate 12 monthsrsquo activity This approachwas a reflection of the makendashsell model that characterized the production-driven economy

The arrival of the New Consumer and the consumption-led economy hasforced organizations to rethink their marketing planning Business gurussuch as Gary Hamel are asking questions about how useful thisconventional planning exercise is when e-commerce has so dramaticallyforeshortened planning cycles His 1994 book co-authored with C KPrahalad Competing for the Future introduced the concept of corecompetencies and lsquoindustry foresightrsquo or the art of anticipating marketsand customers five or ten years ahead Some six years on Hamelrsquos laterbook Leading the Revolution (2000) places far less emphasis on foresightbecause of the fast-paced nature of market development Instead he advisesadopting lsquonon-linear strategiesrsquo to create entirely new business models Hisfocus has therefore shifted from foresight to continuous innovation Hisargument is that organizations need to make the critical shift fromstewardship to entrepreneurship they should lsquobring Silicon Valley insidersquothe organization and create internal markets for ideas capital and talent ndasha philosophy borrowed from the firms at the epicentre of the dotcomrevolution where success is based on resource attraction not resourceallocation

However in this time of transition and in the wake of the dotcomdisasters many managers feel that ideas are not enough without soundplanning As Professor Malcolm McDonald of Cranfield School ofManagement explains plans inform employees in all parts of theorganization (McDonald 1999) They are needed in order to obtainresources and support gain commitment and set objectives and strategyIn a demand system planning is an important element of organizationalDNA as it serves to turn the value proposition into a coherent marketingprogramme The aim is to create an ongoing process approach to planningThis assists in the delivery of organizational agility As John CoudronCEO of Yell the publisher of Yellow Pages says lsquoWe set ourselves thetarget that on any Monday morning I could walk in and ask to see anupdated marketing plan on a Friday So our marketing plan was being

182 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 182

continually refreshed to take account of changing customer requirementsrsquo(McDonald 2001)

This process approach to marketing planning is explained in more detailby Professor Nigel Piercy also from Cranfield School of ManagementPiercy writes that planning in this way is a lsquosource of leverage for workingon achieving market-led strategic change and actually making marketstrategy and marketing programmes happenrsquo (Piercy 2002) He seeselements such as corporate culture management style information flowsorganizational structures participation and so on treated as eitherinsignificant facilitating mechanisms or lsquocontextrsquo in conventional planningapproaches He believes these issues are not mere context but that they arethe process and that the way the process of planning is managed will havea direct impact on what goes into the plan and will determine the outputsHis advice to organizations is that they should focus on commitment andownership rather than techniques and formal methods as this is what willultimately drive the value-centric strategy and deliver the valueproposition

This holistic approach to managing the marketing planning processshould result in the creation of more than a physical plan It should ensurethat plans are achievable actionable and capable of being implementedthat they are owned within the organization and that they work to gain thecommitment of executives to make them happen A major benefit of takinga process approach to planning is that it should cease to be a once-a-yearritual and should instead operate continuously The planning processshould identify real information needs and become a means of sharingunderstanding of organizational strategy and challenging perceivedwisdom within the organization

For this to happen Piercy suggests an alternative model for managingthe planning process This is shown in Figure 96 The model identifiesthree process dimensions analytical behavioural and organizational Theanalytical dimension covers the techniques procedures systems andplanning models that essentially analyse and integrate data and thinkingThe process of managing planning is made more comprehensive byincluding a behavioural aspect to do with how things get done Thiscomprises people-related elements such as managerial perceptionsparticipation levels strategic assumptions motivation commitment andownership The third dimension focuses on the nature of the organization

The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 183

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 183

incorporating organizational structure and culture and managementsignals about what actually gets priority within the organization

Budgeting is the next step (following the creation of a plan) in makingthe planning process a reality Whether a top-downbottom-up or abottom-uptop-down approach is taken the budget marks the point atwhich the organization signals its commitment to a demand system byallocating the resources financial and non-financial that will make ithappen For Piercy it is equally important that budgeting is managed as aprocess that also takes into account the wider analytical behavioural andorganizational dimensions discussed in relation to creating a plan

Taking a broader approach to planning that assimilates these analyticalbehavioural and organizational dimensions naturally makes the planningprocess more complex and less easy to manage The danger of a poorlymanaged planning process is that it might result in a plan that is toofocused on analysis or one that does not carry enough information in bothcases leading to a plan that is neither achievable nor actionable Equallyvested interests may dominate the planning process causing limitedownership and commitment on the part of other managers and making itharder to implement Other planning problems revolve around a lack ofresources and organizational resistance to change It is therefore importantthat there are agreed measures of marketing performance in place and thatthe measurement results inform future strategy and practice

184 Demand System Management

Figure 96 A multidimensional model of marketing planning Adapted from Piercy(2002)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 184

[Image not available in this electronic edition]

THE ROLE OF MEASUREMENT IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

An important aspect of New Consumer Marketing is the need to address theissue of measuring marketing performance The model makes measurementa necessary part of the way the organization defines creates and delivers thevalue proposition As with the other six elements of organizational DNAmeasurement plays a role in improving the performance of each of the threecells Without an ongoing assessment of performance against specificcriteria the organization has no way of determining whether it isperforming well that is whether the processes at work in the three cells arebeing carried out optimally Performance results become an essential flow ofinformation around the demand system which serve to support the drive forinsight innovation and agility

Marketing measurement enables marketers to become more accountableAn improvement in marketing accountability would address a key issuenon-marketers have with their marketing colleagues Many senior non-marketers perceive marketers as being lsquounaccountable untouchableslippery and expensiversquo as confirmed in research using the cultural web(Baker 2000) The research results are shown in Figure 97 This view gives

The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management 185

Stories and mythsmiddot mud doesnrsquot stickmiddot golden childmiddot quick promotionmiddot no loyaltymiddot expensive

Symbolsmiddot carsmiddot office location(window)middot stats and terminologymiddot lunch

Ritualsmiddot planning and organizingmiddot delegatingmiddot deadlinesmiddot off-site meetings

Control systemsmiddot 9ndash430middot lunchtravelmiddot entertainingmiddot networking ndash for self

Organizationstructuremiddot lack of structuremiddot internal focusmiddot always in metings

Power structuresmiddot research withheldmiddot they must be rightmiddot jargonmiddot credit taken ndash ifnecessary

Paradigmmiddot unaccountablemiddot untouchablemiddot slipperymiddot expensive

Figure 97 Senior non-marketersrsquo perceptions of marketers

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 185

rise in part to the debate about whether and in what ways marketingcontributes to a business (as first outlined in Chapter 1) Improvement inthe ability of organizations to measure marketing performance would gosome way towards arresting the current crisis in marketing

Techniques to evaluate the marketing process are at present in anembryonic state and lack universal agreement This is largely because themeasures have not yet been developed fully and the organizationalcommitment to measurement is often weak or lacking Essentiallyapproaches to marketing measurement strive to find acceptable ways ofmeasuring both lsquohardrsquo and lsquosoftrsquo marketing data Hard marketing dataincludes sales volume and value market size market share and profitmargins whereas soft marketing data is less tangible and more judgmentalin nature

However a number of organizations are working with professionalbodies to understand how performance measurement can best beaccomplished Current debate revolves around metrics that linkleadership employee satisfaction employee retention customer satis-faction customer retention sales and profitability The emphasis on suchmetrics is driven by developments in customer relationship management(CRM) systems that enable organizations to measure and evaluatecustomer relationships as never before For example a growing number ofaccounting techniques are being used to measure customer value Theserange from historic profitability analyses through lifetime value calcula-tions to links with shareholder value and to the computation of futurevalue creation The aim is to find a measurement approach that accom-modates the wider interpretation of marketing

3M(UK) referred to earlier in Chapter 7 is an example of a companythat manages to balance marketing creativity without sacrificing financialcontrol (Bowman and Gleadle 2002) Its marketing performance isassessed by evaluating innovation in the definition creation and delivery ofthe value proposition Thirty per cent of annual company sales must begenerated from products less than four years old and 10 from productsless than one year old This distinction is refined in two further categorieswith new-to-the-world developments being looked upon as lsquothe idealrsquoversus the substitution of new products for old This represents an analysisof performance at a base level that can then be extracted down to smallersegments of customers

186 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 186

As New Consumer Marketing attains lsquomission-criticalrsquo status in theemerging consumption-led economy marketing investment is gainingincreasing attention from finance professionals This trend marks part of awider revolution in thinking about what kind of corporate assets areimportant in todayrsquos business environment Intangible business assetssuch as knowledge about consumers and markets and corporate know-howabout defining creating and delivering the value proposition areassuming new importance The race is now on to find robust methods ofevaluating and quantifying such assets for the benefit of corporatemanagement and the wider investment community

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Demand system management is about managing a lsquolivingrsquo system ofcells that house the key processes which drive insight innovation andagility and enable the organization to be responsive to the complexdemands of the New Consumer

bull There are seven elements of organizational DNA which make a demandsystem viable Each enables the three cells to optimize performancethus ensuring competitive survival

bull Intuition is the spark that enables employees to base decisions on anunderstanding of consumersrsquo behaviour thoughts and feelings

bull Culture surfaces in everyday organizational life as knowledge about thelsquoway things are done around herersquo

bull Leadership is about demonstrating an ability to engage others inachieving the organizationrsquos mission communicating the corporatevision and upholding the corporate values

bull Corporate vision answers the question lsquowhere are we goingrsquo whilecorporate values are embedded standards and behaviours that provideguidance on how to get there Corporate vision has to be created andrefreshed whereas corporate values endure

bull Employees today are valued as a capital asset and are wooed by aninternal value proposition that informs all aspects of HR practice

bull Knowledge management is about building an organizational memorymade up of explicit and tacit knowledge It requires an organizationalclimate of trust

Summary Points 187

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 187

bull Planning is an ongoing process that encompasses analytical behav-ioural and organizational aspects which extend beyond the physicalmarketing plan

bull Measurement enables marketers to become accountable and providesknowledge about the effectiveness and efficacy of the demand system

CONCLUDING REMARKS

Establishing the case for New Consumer Marketing as a business disciplineand presenting a framework for its conceptualization has been the mainaim of this book The fundamental argument for advancing NewConsumer Marketing is that a value-centric orientation needs to replacethe retention orientation that has dominated marketing practice for thepast decade or so The shift in the macro-marketing environment from aproduction-driven to a consumption-led economy means taking theconsumer as the point of departure for the organization and not its finaldestination In this dynamically complex new marketplace marketingpractice needs to be viewed as systemic and holistic By offering such anapproach to managing the definition creation and delivery of value theNew Consumer Marketing model aims to assist managers in developingand implementing successful consumer marketing strategies Thereremains however considerable scope for debate and for further research inthis important area

Feedback from readers is welcomed and should be directed toslbakercranfieldacuk

188 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 188

Chapter 11 Discussion of CRM in this chapter is informed by the work of the Cranfield

CRM Research Forum directed by Dr Moira Clark Visit wwwcranfield-crmorg2 Statistics used in this section are drawn from EIU Viewswire (2002)

wwwskillbasedfeegovuk wwwhesaacuk and Nellis and Figuera (2002)

Chapter 21 For more on the history and sociology of consumption see Corrigan (1997)2 For the background to consumerism see John (1994) For more on todayrsquos

consumer rights agenda visit wwwwhichcouk3 For more on the post-modern condition refer to the following academic

authors Stephen Brown (author of the very readable Postmodern Marketing) JeanBaurillard Bernard Cova and Maurice Holbrook

Chapter 31 The Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young research referred to in the chapter was

carried out for the Insight Programme (directed by Andre Klimczak) Visitwwwcgeycom

2 The Verdict research was reported at the Marketing Societyrsquos Retail ForumApril 2002 and in Hyman (2002) Other references for this chapter rely on dataand analysis carried in Verdict publications Visit wwwverdictcouk See alsoSeth and Randall (2001) which contains useful analysis of trends in internationalgrocery retailing

Chapter 41 For more on a post-modern approach to consumer behaviour see the

following academic authors Stephen Brown Jean Baurillard Bernard Cova andMaurice Holbrook

2 Treacy and Wiersema (1995) Doyle (2000) Capon and Hulbert (2001) andPiercy (2002) highlight value as the new key driver of strategy in marketing

Notes

12 Baker Endnotes FINAL 5603 245 pm Page 189

Chapter 51 Womack et al (1990) describe the concept of leanness See also references in

Chapter 8

Chapter 61 For an overview of meansndashend theory see Baker (2002) The key academic

paper to refer to is Gutman (1982)2 For an overview of grounded theory see Glaser and Strauss (1967)3 Discussion here and elsewhere in this chapter draws on Baker and Mouncey

(2002)

Chapter 71 The Dell case study referred to in this book is based on the following sources

(Hall 2002 Dell and Fredman 1999 Dell 2002)2 Background reference paper Bowman and Gleadle (2002)3 Taken from the Annual Marketing Society Lecture given by Niall

FitzGerald Chairman of Unilever in London on 19 June 20014 Taken from the authorrsquos PhD research For an overview of meansndashend theory

see Baker (2002)

Chapter 81 The agile supply chain is a concept that has been developed at Cranfield

School of Management within the Cranfield Centre for Logistics and SupplyChain Management This definition of agility comes from Christopher and Towill(2000) See also the work of Professor Alan Harrison including Harrison andHoek (2002)

2 Service blueprinting is associated with the work of Lynn Shostack SeeShostack (1987)

3 The philosophy and implementation of leanness as a management conceptwas set out in Womack et al (1990)

4 Key Account Management is a concept that has been developed at CranfieldSchool of Management and is most closely associated with Professor MalcolmMcDonald See McDonald et al (2002)

Chapter 91 This definition of Theory of Mind is taken from lsquoPsychology of autismrsquo a

presentation made by Professor Uta Frith at the National Autistic Societyrsquos 40thAnniversary International Conference London September 2002 See also thereferences to Theory of Mind made by Professor Jean Aitchison in the 1996 BBCReith Lectures published as The Language Web by Cambridge University Press1996

2 See Bennis and Thomas (2002) for an overview on what makes a great leader

190 Notes

12 Baker Endnotes FINAL 5603 245 pm Page 190

Allford R Evans N and Ward C (2002) A step forward in understandingshoppers using segmentation techniques presented at the ESOMARConference Consolidation or Renewal Barcelona September

Baker S (2000) What non-marketers think about you Marketing Businesssupplement on Better Marketing Measurement September

Baker S (2002) Laddering making sense of meaning in Partington D (ed)Essential Skills for Management Research Sage London ch 12

Baker S and Mouncey P (2002) New Consumer Marketing The implicationsfor market research presented at the ESOMAR Conference Consolidation orRenewal Barcelona September

Bennis W and Thomas R (2002) Crucibles of leadership Harvard BusinessReview 80(9) 39ndash45 September

Berners-Lee T and Fischetti M (1999) Weaving the Web the Original Design andUltimate Destiny of the World Wide Web By Its Inventor HarperSanFrancisco SanFrancisco CA

Booz Allen amp Hamilton (1982) New Product Management for the 1980s BoozAllen amp Hamilton New York

Bowman C and Gleadle P (2002) Culture as a dynamic capability the case of3M in the UK US Academy of Management conference paper presented atAOM2002 Denver Colorado

Brown JS and Duguid P (2000) The Social Life of Information Harvard BusinessSchool Press Boston MA

Brown S (1995) Postmodern Marketing Routledge LondonCapon N and Hulbert JM (2001) Marketing Management in the 21st Century

Prentice Hall Upper Saddle River NJChartered Institute of Marketing (1994) Marketing ndash The Challenge of Change A

Major Study into the Future of Marketing in Key British Enterprises CharteredInstitute of Marketing London

References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 191

Child P (2002) Taking Tesco global The McKinsey Quarterly 3

Christopher M (1992) The Customer Service Planner Butterworth-HeinemannOxford

Christopher M (1998) Logistics and Supply Chain Management 2nd edn FTPrentice Hall Harlow

Christopher M (2001) Breaking down the boundaries the supply chainmanagement process in M McDonald M Christopher S Knox and A Payne(eds) Creating a Company for Customers FT Prentice Hall Harlow

Christopher M and Peck H (1997) Marketing Logistics Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Christopher M and Towill D (2000) Donrsquot lean too far - distinguishing between thelean and agile manufacturing paradigms Proceedings MIM Conference Aston(ISSN 1359-8546)

Christopher M Payne A and Ballantyne D (1991) Relationship MarketingBringing Quality Customer Service and Marketing Together Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Christopher M Payne A and Ballantyne D (2002) Relationship MarketingCreating Stakeholder Value Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Clark M (1999) The recruitment and internal marketing domains in H PeckA Payne M Christopher and M Clark (eds) Relationship Marketing Strategyand Implementation Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Cooper R (1993) Winning at New Products Accelerating the Process from Idea toLaunch Addison-Wesley Reading MA

Corrigan P (1997) The Sociology of Consumption Sage London

Cross R and Prusak L (2002) The people who make organisations go ndash or stopHarvard Business Review 80(6) 104ndash112 June

Davidson H (2002) The Committed Enterprise Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Day G (1999) The Market Driven Organisation Free Press New York

Dell M (2002) Inspiring innovation Harvard Business Review 80(8) 41 August

Dell M and Fredman C (1999) Direct from Dell Strategies that Revolutionized anIndustry HarperBusiness New York

Doyle P (2000) Value Based Marketing ndash Marketing Strategies for Corporate Growthand Shareholder Value John Wiley amp Sons Chichester

Drucker P (1985) Innovation and Entrepreneurship Practice and Principles Harperamp Row New York

Drucker P (2002) Management Challenges for the 21st Century Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

192 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 192

Dyck W van (2002) Managing Complexity in Radical Innovation Projects The Needfor Paradigm Shifts Paper presented at Cranfield School of Management

EIU Viewswire (2002) The Decline of Manufacturing 8 March

Evans M (2001) Decoding competitive propositions a semiotic alternative totraditional advertising research presented at the MRS Conference 169ndash181

Fournier S (1996) Understanding consumerndashbrand relationships HarvardBusiness School working paper 98-018

Gates B and Hemingway C (1999) Business the Speed of Thought WarnerBooks New York

Gattorna J (ed) (1998) Strategic Supply Chain Alignment Gower Aldershot

Geus A de (1999) The Living Company Growth Learning and Longevity in BusinessNicholas Brealey London

Glaser BG and Strauss AL (1967) The Discovery of Grounded Theory Strategies forQualitative Research Aldine Chicago IL

Gleick J (1987) Chaos Making a New Science Viking New York

Godin S (1999) Permission Marketing Turning Strangers into Friends and Friendsinto Customers Simon amp Schuster New York

Goldman S Nagel R and Preiss K (1995) Agile Competitors and VirtualOrganizations Strategies for Enriching the Customer Van Nostrand Reinhold NewYork

Gordon W (1999) Goodthinking ndash A Guide to Qualitative Research AdmapHenley on Thames

Gordon W (2001) The dark room of the mind ndash what does neuro-psychologynow tell us about brands presented at AQRQRCA Conference ndash QualitativeResearch in the 21st Century Paris 18ndash20 April

Grant J (1999) The New Marketing Manifesto Texere London

Gutman J (1982) A meansndashend chain model based on consumer categorizationprocesses Journal of Marketing 46(2) 60ndash62

Hall A (2002) The boy who lived the American dream The Sunday Times 1December

Hamel G (2000) Leading the Revolution Harvard Business School Press BostonMA

Hamel G and Prahalad CK (1994) Competing for the Future Harvard BusinessSchool Press Boston MA

Hanby T (1999) Brands ndash dead or alive Journal of the Market Research Society41(1) 7ndash18

References 193

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 193

Handy C (1989) The Age of Unreason Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Handy C (1994) The Empty Raincoat Making Sense of the Future HutchinsonLondon

Handy C (1997) The Hungry Spirit Beyond Capitalism ndash A Quest for Purpose in theModern World Hutchinson London

Harrison A and Hoek RI van (2002) Logistics Management and Strategy FTPrentice Hall Harlow

Harvard Business Review (2003) The Best of HBR on Motivation 81(1) 8 January

Hertz N (2001) Silent Takeover Global Capitalism and the Death of Democracy FreePress New York

Hyman R (2002) The retail roller-coaster message from the high street MarketLeader (17) 46ndash50

John R (ed) (1994) The Consumer Revolution Redressing the Balance Hodder ampStoughton London

Johnson G and Scholes K (1992) Exploring Corporate Strategy Prentice HallLondon

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1997) Value innovation the strategic logic ofhigh growth Harvard Business Review 75(1) 102ndash112 JanuaryFebruary

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1999a) Creating new market space HarvardBusiness Review 77(1) 83ndash93 JanuaryFebruary

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1999b) Strategy value innovation and theknowledge economy Sloan Management Review 40(3) 41ndash54

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (2000) Knowing a winning business idea whenyou see one Harvard Business Review 78(5) 129ndash141 SeptemberOctober

Klein N (2000) No Logo Taking Aim at the Brand Bullies Picador New York

Kransdorff A (19992000) The other lsquovirusrsquo that is bugging industry MarketLeader (7) 27ndash29 Winter

Lannon J and Cooper P (1983) Humanistic advertising a holistic culturalperspective International Journal of Advertising 2(3) 195ndash213

Lauterborn R (1991) From 4Ps to 4Cs Advertising Age 61(41) 26 1 October

McCall A (ed) (2002) The Sunday Times 100 Best Companies to Work For TheSunday Times 24 March

McCracken GD (1988) Culture and Consumption New Approaches to the SymbolicCharacter of Consumer Goods and Activities Indiana University PressBloomington IN

194 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 194

McDonald M (1999) Marketing Plans How To Prepare Them How To Use ThemButterworth-Heinemann Oxford

McDonald M (2001) Getting back to basics the market understanding processin M McDonald M Christopher S Knox and A Payne (eds) Creating aCompany for Customers FT Prentice Hall Harlow ch 2

McDonald M Rogers B and Woodburn D (2002) Key Customers How ToManage them Profitably Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

McGregor D (1960) The Human Side of Enterprise McGraw-Hill New York

Michaels E Handfield-Jones H and Axelrod B (2001) The War for TalentHarvard Business School Press Boston MA

Mitchell A (2001) Right Side Up Building Brands in the Age of the OrganizedConsumer HarperCollinsBusiness London

Moir L (2001) Why managers and organisations must embrace CSR ManagementFocus Cranfield School of Management (17)13 Winter

Negroponte N (1995) Being Digital Knopf New York

Nellis J and Figueira C (2002) Is there a future for UK ManufacturingManagement Focus Cranfield School of Management (19) 19ndash21 Winter

Nordstroumlm K and Ridderstraringle J (2000) Funky Business Talent Makes CapitalDance ftcom Harlow

Pascale RT (1990) Managing on the Edge How the Smartest Companies Use Conflictto Stay Ahead Viking New York

Pascale RT Millemann M and Gioja L (2000) Surfing the Edge of Chaos TheLaws of Nature and the New Laws of Business Crown Business New York

Piercy N (2002) Market-Led Strategic Change A Guide to Transforming the Process ofGoing to Market 3rd edn Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Pine BJ and Gilmore JH (1998) Welcome to the experience economyHarvard Business Review 76(4) 97ndash105 JulyAugust

Pine BJ and Gilmore JH (1999) The Experience Economy Work is Theatre andEvery Business a Stage Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

PricewaterhouseCoopers (1999) Global Growth and Innovation surveyPricewaterhouseCoopers London

Reichheld FF and Teal T (1996) The Loyalty Effect The Hidden Force BehindGrowth Profits and Lasting Value Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Rokeach M (1973) The Nature of Human Values Free Press New York

Sawhney M and Kotler P (2001) Marketing in the age of informationdemocracy in a chapter in D Iacobucci (ed) Kellogg on Marketing John Wileyamp Sons Chichester

References 195

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 195

Schlesinger LA and Heskett JL (1991) Breaking the cycle of failure in servicesSloan Management Review Spring 17ndash28

Schultz DE and Lindberg-Repo K (2002) Building holistic relationshipcommunication programs in an interactive marketplace presented at theESOMAR Conference Consolidation or Renewal Barcelona September2002

Seth A and Randall G (2001) The Grocers The Rise and Rise of the SupermarketChains London Kogan Page

Seybold P Lewis JM and Marshak RT (2001) The Customer Revolution How toThrive When Customers Are in Control Random House New York

Shostack L (1987) Service positioning through structural change Journal ofMarketing (51) 34ndash43 January

Smith D and Fletcher J (2001) Inside Information John Wiley amp SonsChichester

Tapscott D (1996) The Digital Economy Promise and Peril in the Age of NetworkedIntelligence McGraw-Hill New York

Tapscott D (1998) Growing Up Digital The Rise of the Net Generation McGraw-Hill New York

Tapscott D Lowy A and Ticoll D (2000) Digital Capital Harnessing the Powerof Business Webs Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Taylor FW (1967) Principles of Scientific Management WW Norton New York(first published 1911)

Toffler A (1970) Future Shock Random House New York (out of print)Treacy M and Wiersema FD (1995) The Discipline of Market Leaders Choose

Your Customers Narrow Your Focus Dominate Your Market Addison-WesleyReading MA

Womack JP Jones DT and Roos D (1990) The Machine that Changed theWorld Rawson Associates New York

196 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 196

AA 24Abbey National 147Advantage Card 46agility

in supply chain management 159in value delivery 131ndash3

Air France 129Andersen 173anti-globalization movement 32Argos 46Asda 40 134 176 177ndash8Ashley Laura 77Autobytel 140

BampQ 48BAA 133Badai 117Bailey Christopher 125Barbie 115ndash16Barclaycard 46Batey Ian 118Bell Laboratories 33benchmarking 59betamax 113binary thinking 58ndash60Blair Tony 133Blockbuster 46BMW 105Body Shop 120Boots 44 45 46Boots Opticians brand 45

Booz Allen amp Hamilton New ProductManagement 111

Boston Consulting Group (BCG) 12Boston Matrix 12ndash13boundary-spanning role 98BP 46 120Bradford amp Bingley 178brand owners 64

concerns of 65ndash6key issues 37ndash42

brand repositioning 111 112branding in value creation 113ndash20Bravo Marie 124bricolage 87British Airways 147British Gas 24ndash5Britvic 158Brown John Seely 60budgeting 184Burberry 124ndash5Burberry Cup 125Business Process Re-engineering (BPR)

59 67

Cadbury 80Cadbury Schweppes 104 105Caldey Island 25call centres 139 149ndash50Callaway Golf 110Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young 37category killers 48

Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 197

category one segments 94Centrica 24ndash5C5 electric car (Sinclair) 113Chan Kim W 110Chanel No 5 122channels in value delivery 133ndash41chaos theory 58Chaplin Charlie 59Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM)

Challenge of Change The 10Cheers (television programme) 31Christopher Martin 154

Customer Service Planner The 142Clinique 28Club Nestleacute 150Clubcard 46Coca-Cola 38 118 123committed enterprise 174complex adaptive systems 58complexity science 57ndash8consumer churn 46consumer concept 24ndash5consumer confidentiality 91consumer marketing implications for 48

61consumer movement 25consumer responsiveness

developing 66ndash7through time compression 154ndash9

consumer rights defence of 25ndash6consumerism 25Consumersrsquo Association (UK) 25consumersrsquo indifference zone 128Consumersrsquo Union (CU) (USA) 25consumption

management 27 54ndash5in transformation 23ndash6

Cooper Peter 114core capability 52corporate amnesia 179corporate anorexia 67corporate memory 88cost reduction 41ndash2 111ndash12

Coudron John 182Countrywide Porter Novelli (CPN)

145ndash6cultural web of an organization 166culture 165ndash8Customer Bill of Rights for the

Information Age 26customer lifetime value 14customer loyalty 14 45ndash8customer-managed relationships (CMR)

17Customer Relationship Management

(CRM) 15 21 186failure of 1systems 89ndash91test of 15ndash17

customer retention rates 15customer value 14

database segmentation 93ndash4Davidson Hugh 174Day George 180Debenhams 46Dell Michael 107 153Dell 18 19 153 168Dell-com 153demand chain management 67demand system management 161ndash88

culture in 165ndash8employees in 175ndash9intuition in 163ndash5knowledge management in 179ndash81leadership in 170ndash4measurement in 185ndash7planning in 181ndash4structure in 168ndash9values in 172ndash4vision in 171ndash2

Deutsche Telekom 133Dichter Ernest 82Direct Line 139Directional Policy Matrix (DPM) 12discourse analysis 83ndash4

198 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 198

disintermediation 140Disney 139 172 177Dixons Group 45Domoco 117Drucker Peter 102 175Dunkinrsquo Donuts 32

easyJet 107edit choice in store 44ndash5Efficient Consumer Response (ECR) 157Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) 157email 135employee cloak theory 171employment patterns 20empowerment 59endowment policies 93Energy America 24Enron 173Enviego 28Ericsson 39ESOMAR 90ethnographic analysis 83 85ndash6euro 41every day low pricing (ELDP) 43evolution of marketing 12ndash17experience economy 31explicit knowledge 179ndash80extended enterprise approach 152ndash3 169

fast moving consumer goods (fmcg) sector10 12 38 40 41 80

Fetchmax 141First Direct 141Fitzgerald Niall 41 115Fletcher Jonathon 81focus groups 86Ford Henry 59 60Ford Motor Company 78 1194Cs 34 55 644Is culture 1454Ps (Product Place Price and Promotion)

11 23 27 34 55 64Fournier Susan 114

France Telecom 133Fry Art 107

Gartner 33Gates Bill 60General Electric 12General Motors 119genetically modified (GM) foods 119Geus Arie de Living Company The 60Gleick James Chaos Making a New Science

58globalization 11 38ndash9Godin Seth 52Goldfish 24Gordon Wendy 86 87

Goodthinking 87Grant John New Marketing Manifesto 114gross domestic product (GDP) 2 37 64

103Grounded Theory 82Guinness 84 85 156ndash7

Haji-Ioannou Stelios 107Hamel Gary

Competing for the Future (and CKPrahalad) 66ndash7 182

Leading the Revolution 182Handy Charles 59Harley-Davidson 30 123Hertz Di Noreena Silent Takeover The

119Hewlett-Packard 153 179Home Depot 139homoeconomicus 128human resource (HR) professionals 175hygiene factors 76

IBM 153IKEA 110iMAC 123i-mode 117ndash18independent financial advisers (IFAs) 140in-depth interviews 86

Index 199

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 199

infomediaries 140information technology 16 17 53ndash4 91

179 181role of 135New Consumer and 33

infotainment 32innovation

as a dynamic capability 107ndash9radical approach to 109ndash11search for 42through process or people 106ndash7in value creation 102ndash11

INSEAD 110insight in value definition 74ndash9 97ndash9Intel 57 133interactive marketplace response to 53ndash4International Chambers of Commerce 90International Red Cross 172Internet 11 33 53 57 135 179interviews 144intuition in demand system management

163ndash5intuitive mentalizing 165

Johnson Gerry 165Johnson amp Johnson 120Johnson Controls 104 105

Kennedy President John F 25Klein Naomi No Logo 32knowledge management 98 179ndash81knowledge worker 175Kotler Philip 26Krispy Kreme Doughnuts 75 76

Land Rover 146Landsrsquo End 18 19Lannon Judie 114Lastminutecom 133 134Lauterborn Robert 34lead-time gap 154leadership 170ndash4lean enterprise 153

lean production (leanness) 59 67learning organization 60Lee Tim Berners 60Legoland 46Levitt Theodore 31

Marketing Myopia 93Lew Platt 179Lorenz Edward 58loyalty cardsschemes 46 47 88ndash9Lucozade 98Lufthansa 129Luminus 24Lyons Maid 113

makendashsell approach 27 64 182manufacturing future of 39ndash40Mario Testino Exhibition 125Market Research Society 90market segmentation 94market share 14marketing

in crisis 10ndash11evolution of 12ndash17life cycle 16planning 182ndash4

Marketing Forum 11Marks amp Spencer 43 155Mars 111Mars Ice Cream 113Marshall Alfred 128Marshall Plan 24Marx Karl 175Mattel 116Mauborgne Renee 110McCann Erickson World Group 150McCann Relationship Marketing Paris

(MRM)150 152McCracken Grant 24McDonald Professor Malcolm 182McDonaldization 59McDonaldrsquos 43 46 139 177McGregor Douglas 59McKinsey amp Co 12

200 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 200

meansndashend theory 78measurement in demand system

management 185ndash7media in value delivery 133ndash41Menichetti Roberto 125mental models 87 115Metcalfe Robert 57micro-retailing 48 64Microsoft 60 172 176MIT 153Mitchell Alan 32mobile phones 33 135Modern Times (film) 59Moir Lance 120Moore Gordon 57Moss Kate 125MP3 53Mueller John 108Muumlller 112multichannel centres 150multinational operations 45multiple channels 44multiple formats trade cross 44multiple locations trade across 43ndash4Multiple Markets Model 15Murphyrsquos 156

National Farmersrsquo Union (NFU) 104Natsuno Takeshi 117Nectar 46needs-states analysis 86ndash7Negroponte Nicholas 60Nestleacute 41 150neuro-psychology 87New Consumer 27ndash33

complex lives of 30embracing 66experiences of 31information technology and 33marketing literacy and demands of

31ndash2response to 52ndash3time and 28ndash30

New Consumer Marketing 51ndash62 92114

definition 51ndash5meaning 55ndash60model 4 5 63ndash71 161 162

new product development in valuecreation 111ndash13

new-to-the-world introductions 112ndash13next-generation smart phone 135Nike 39 40 78 122Nissan 105Nite-and-Day 44Nokia 136ndash7non-traditional market sensing in value

definition 88ndash92using CRM systems 89ndash91using database systems 88ndash9using frontline staff 91ndash2

Nordstroumlm Kjell (and JonasRidderstraringle) Funky Business 170175

Norwich Union 140

Odeon Cinemas 46One Stop 44OneTel 24Open Plan Account 76Oracle 90Oreal Lrsquo 30organizational agility 5 132 140organizational culture 132organizational DNA 5 69 71 161ndash3

185

Pascale RichardManaging on the Edge 58Surfing the Edge of Chaos 60

Pearson 18 19Peoplesoft 90Pepsi-Cola 158personal digital assistants (PDAs) 135Petcareco Limited 148 149phantom factors 77

Index 201

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 201

Piercy Professor Nigel 183 184PIMS (Profit Impact of Market Strategy)

14planning in knowledge system

management 181ndash4Pop Idol (television programme) 19ndash20positioning in value creation 120ndash5

emotional message 121ndash2process 123ndash5

power brands 38Prahalad CK (and Gary Hamel)

Competing for the Future 66ndash7 182Pret A Manger 125 144ndash5 176price in value creation 125ndash9process knowledge 181Procter amp Gamble 12 18 19 96product life cycle (PLC) 12prosumption 18psychometric tests 144Purdy Lucy 26

quality movement 59qualitative research 82ndash6quantitative research 80ndash1 86Quick Response (QR) 157

Range Rover 146rate tart 53rational consumer 128reductionist approaches 59Reichheld Frederick 14Relationship Marketing (RM) 3 21 27

54 55 63ndash4rise of 14ndash15

retail branding 45retailers

concerns of 65ndash6power growth in 40ndash1response 42ndash8

Ridderstraringle Jonas (and KjellNordstroumlm) Funky Business 170175

Ritz-Carlton Hotel 143 144

Rokeach Milton 172Rolex 125Ryanair 129

Safeway 134Sainsburyrsquos 41 44 46 89 96 134sales growth 41ndash2SAP 90Sara Lee 39Sasser Earl 14savings accounts 93savings bonds 93Sawhney Mohanibar 26Scholes Kevin 165Schultz Howard 170Schwab Charles amp Co 110segmentation analysis 93ndash7semiotics analysis 83 84ndash5September 11th 2001 20service in value delivery 141ndash8Seybold Patricia 177Ps of Relationship Marketing 34Shearwood Michael 91Shell 12 60 80 119 120Siebel Systems 90Simon Herbert 137Sinclair Clive 113Singapore Airlines 118 145 172ndash3Six Sigma 59Skoda 98Skoggins Dan 170Smith David 81Smith WH 31Sony 117Sony Music 133Southwest Airlines (SWA) 141sponsorship 125staff

in demand system management 175ndash9empowerment 146ndash8motivation 145recruitment 143ndash6

stagendashgate process 106

202 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 202

Starbucks 170Stella Artois 125 138stock-keeping units (SKUs) 38StreetKa buyers 78supply chain in value delivery 152ndash9supply-chain management 5 67SWOT analysis 181Synectics Corporation 104

tacit knowledge 179ndash80tacit process knowledge 181Tango 158lsquoTapping the creativity of consumersrsquo 104Tapscott Don 60Taylor Frederick Principles of Scientific

Management The 59technology integration in value delivery

148ndash52teenagers 33Teletubbies 83ndash4Tennant Stella 125Tesco 40 44 45 46 68 134 147 167

168 169Tesco Clubcard 89text messaging 33TGI Friday 170Theory of Mind 163ndash4Theory X and Y 59Thortonrsquos 1403Com Corporation 573M(UK) 107ndash8 186time 54

compression 154ndash9refugees 28ndash30

Toffler Alvin Future Shock 18Toyota 153trade

across multiple formats 44across multiple locations 43ndash4

transaction marketing 3 55

Unilever 12 41 85ndash6 115Unipart 177

value-adding time 156value-centric orientation 3 55ndash6 57 66

68 115value concept 75value creation 4 70 101ndash30

branding in 113ndash20innovation in 102ndash11new product development in 111ndash13positioning in 120ndash5price in 125ndash9

value definition 4 70 73ndash99insight generators in 97ndash9insight in 74ndash9needs-states analysis 86ndash7non-traditional market sensing in

88ndash92qualitative research 82ndash6quantitative research 80ndash1segmentation in 92ndash7traditional market research in 79ndash87

value delivery 4 70 131ndash60agility in 131ndash3media and channels in 133ndash41service in 141ndash8technology integration in 148ndash52supply chain in 152ndash9

value-destroyers 77value-enhancing factors 74 76 77 78value evaluation of 127ndash9value-influencing factors 74ndash8value innovation 110value-maintaining factors 76 77values in knowledge system management

172ndash4Veterans Agency (VA) 132 133Virgin Atlantic 109Virgin Group 109ndash10 114Virgin Mobile 109 149Virgin One 109ndash10virtual call-centre operators (V-Reprsquos)

150vision in knowledge system management

171ndash2

Index 203

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 203

Volkswagen 138Volvo 59

Walls 80 113Wal-Mart 40 45 110 119War Pensions Agency 132Woburn Safari Park 164ndash5Womack James 153Woolwich Building Society 76World Trade Organization 32 119

World Wide Web 60wwwcarsurveyorg 53wwwfriendsreunitedcom 30wwwmoneysupermarketcom 53wwwsyneticsworldcom 104

Zara 91ndash2 158Zip Project 155Zyman Sergio 123

204 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 204

  • New Consumer Marketing
    • Contents
    • Foreword
    • Acknowledgements
    • About the Author
    • Introduction
      • Meeting the Challenges
      • Overview of the Book
        • 1 Earthquake
          • Marketing in Crisis
          • The Evolution of Marketing
            • The Rise of Relationship Marketing
            • The Test of CRM
              • Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment
              • Implications for Consumer Marketing
              • Summary Points
                • 2 The New Consumer
                  • Consumption in Transformation
                    • Expansion of the Consumer Concept
                    • Defence of Consumer Rights
                      • Consumption Management in Question
                      • A New Kind of Consumer
                        • New Consumers Are Exercised By Time
                        • New Consumers Lead Complex Lives
                        • New Consumers Seek Experiences
                        • New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding
                        • New Consumers Are IT Enabled
                          • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                          • Summary Points
                            • 3 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers
                              • Key Issues for Brand Owners
                                • The Force of Globalization
                                • The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing
                                • The Growth in Retailer Power
                                • The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth
                                • The Search for Innovation
                                  • The Retailersrsquo Response
                                    • Trading across Multiple Locations
                                    • Trading across Multiple Formats
                                    • Use of Multiple Channels
                                    • Editing Choice in Store
                                    • Enhancing Retail Branding
                                    • Developing Multinational Operations
                                    • Pursuing Customer Loyalty
                                      • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                                      • Summary Points
                                        • 4 New Consumer Marketing
                                          • New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it
                                            • A Response to the New Consumer
                                            • A Response to the Interactive Marketplace
                                            • A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management
                                              • New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean
                                                • Adopting Value-Centricity
                                                • Applying Science
                                                • Breaking out of Binary Thinking
                                                  • New Consumer Marketing ndash Who Is Involved
                                                  • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                                                  • Summary Points
                                                    • 5 A Model of New Consumer Marketing
                                                      • To Recap
                                                      • Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing
                                                        • Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers
                                                        • Embracing the New Consumer
                                                        • Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness
                                                        • Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis
                                                          • The New Consumer Marketing Model
                                                            • 6 Value Definition
                                                              • The Role of Insight in Value Definition
                                                                • Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value
                                                                • Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors
                                                                  • The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition
                                                                    • Using Quantitative Research
                                                                    • Using Qualitative Research
                                                                    • Need-States Analysis
                                                                      • The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition
                                                                        • Using Database Systems
                                                                        • Using CRM Systems
                                                                        • Using Front-line Staff
                                                                          • The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition
                                                                            • Creating a Segmentation Analysis
                                                                              • The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition
                                                                              • Summary Points
                                                                                • 7 Value Creation
                                                                                  • The Role of Innovation in Value Creation
                                                                                    • Consumers as Innovators
                                                                                    • Innovation through Process or People
                                                                                    • Innovation as a Dynamic Capability
                                                                                    • A Radical Approach to Innovation
                                                                                      • The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation
                                                                                      • The Role of Branding in Value Creation
                                                                                        • Building Successful Brands
                                                                                        • Emerging Brand Issues
                                                                                          • The Role of Positioning in Value Creation
                                                                                            • Drawing out the Emotional Message
                                                                                            • The Positioning Process
                                                                                              • The Role of Price in Value Creation
                                                                                                • The Evaluation of Value
                                                                                                  • Summary Points
                                                                                                    • 8 Value Delivery
                                                                                                      • The Role of Agility in Value Delivery
                                                                                                      • The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery
                                                                                                        • Making the Most of Media Choices
                                                                                                        • Making the Most of Channel Choices
                                                                                                          • The Role of Service in Value Delivery
                                                                                                            • Creating a Service Strategy
                                                                                                            • Recruiting and Motivating Staff
                                                                                                            • Empowering Employees to Live the Brand
                                                                                                              • The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery
                                                                                                              • The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery
                                                                                                                • Competing through the Supply Chain
                                                                                                                • Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression
                                                                                                                  • Summary Points
                                                                                                                    • 9 Demand System Management
                                                                                                                      • The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                      • The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                        • Culture
                                                                                                                        • Structure
                                                                                                                          • The Role of Leadership Vision and Values in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                            • Leadership
                                                                                                                            • Vision
                                                                                                                            • Values
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Employees in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Planning in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • Summary Points
                                                                                                                              • Concluding Remarks
                                                                                                                                • Notes
                                                                                                                                • References
                                                                                                                                • Index
Page 4: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page ii

New Consumer Marketing

Managing a Living Demand System

Susan Baker

with

Margrit Bass

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page iii

Copyright copy 2003 John Wiley amp Sons Ltd The Atrium Southern Gate ChichesterWest Sussex PO19 8SQ England

Telephone (+44) 1243 779777

Email (for orders and customer service enquiries) cs-bookswileycoukVisit our Home Page on wwwwileyeuropecom or wwwwileycom

All Rights Reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system ortransmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording scanning orotherwise except under the terms of the Copyright Designs and Patents Act 1988 or under the terms ofa licence issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency Ltd 90 Tottenham Court Road London W1T 4LPUK without the permission in writing of the Publisher Requests to the Publisher should be addressedto the Permissions Department John Wiley amp Sons Ltd The Atrium Southern Gate Chichester WestSussex PO19 8SQ England or emailed to permreqwileycouk or faxed to (+44) 1243 770620

This publication is designed to provide accurate and authoritative information in regard to the subjectmatter covered It is sold on the understanding that the Publisher is not engaged in renderingprofessional services If professional advice or other expert assistance is required the services of acompetent professional should be sought

Other Wiley Editorial Offices

John Wiley amp Sons Inc 111 River Street Hoboken NJ 07030 USA

Jossey-Bass 989 Market Street San Francisco CA 94103-1741 USA

Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Boschstr 12 D-69469 Weinheim Germany

John Wiley amp Sons Australia Ltd 33 Park Road Milton Queensland 4064 Australia

John Wiley amp Sons (Asia) Pte Ltd 2 Clementi Loop 02-01 Jin Xing Distripark Singapore 129809

John Wiley amp Sons Canada Ltd 22 Worcester Road Etobicoke Ontario Canada M9W 1L1

Wiley also publishes its books in a variety of electronic formats Some content that appears in print maynot be available in electronic books

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Baker SusanNew consumer marketing managing a living demand systemby Susan Baker

p cmIncludes bibliographical references and index

ISBN 0-470-84482-5 (cloth alk paper)1 Marketing I Title

HF5415B279 20036588mdashdc21 2003007455

British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data

A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library

ISBN 0-470-84482-5

Typeset in 1214 Garamond by Footnote Graphics Ltd Warminster WiltshirePrinted and bound in Great Britain by TJ International Ltd Padstow CornwallThis book is printed on acid-free paper responsibly manufactured from sustainable forestry in which at least two trees are planted for each one used for paper production

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page iv

Contents

Foreword ixAcknowledgements xiAbout the Author xiii

Introduction 1Meeting the Challenges 3Overview of the Book 6

1 Earthquake 9Marketing in Crisis 10The Evolution of Marketing 12

The Rise of Relationship Marketing 14The Test of CRM 15

Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment 18Implications for Consumer Marketing 21Summary Points 22

2 The New Consumer 23Consumption in Transformation 23

Expansion of the Consumer Concept 24Defence of Consumer Rights 25

Consumption Management in Question 27A New Kind of Consumer 27

New Consumers Are Exercised By Time 28New Consumers Lead Complex Lives 30New Consumers Seek Experiences 31New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding 31New Consumers Are IT Enabled 32

Implications for Consumer Marketing 33Summary Points 34

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page v

3 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers 37Key Issues for Brand Owners 37

The Force of Globalization 38The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing 39The Growth in Retailer Power 40The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth 41The Search for Innovation 42

The Retailersrsquo Response 42Trading across Multiple Locations 43Trading across Multiple Formats 44Use of Multiple Channels 44Editing Choice in Store 44Enhancing Retail Branding 45Developing Multinational Operations 45Pursuing Customer Loyalty 45

Implications for Consumer Marketing 48Summary Points 48

4 New Consumer Marketing 51New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it 51

A Response to the New Consumer 52A Response to the Interactive Marketplace 53A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management 54

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 55Adopting Value-Centricity 55Applying Science 57Breaking out of Binary Thinking 58

New Consumer Marketing ndash Who Is Involved 60Implications for Consumer Marketing 61Summary Points 61

5 A Model of New Consumer Marketing 63To Recap 63Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing 65

Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers 65Embracing the New Consumer 66Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness 66Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis 67

The New Consumer Marketing Model 67

vi Contents

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page vi

6 Value Definition 73The Role of Insight in Value Definition 74

Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value 74Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors 78

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 79Using Quantitative Research 80Using Qualitative Research 82Need-States Analysis 86

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 88Using Database Systems 88Using CRM Systems 89Using Front-line Staff 91

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 91Creating a Segmentation Analysis 93

The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition 97Summary Points 99

7 Value Creation 101The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 102

Consumers as Innovators 104Innovation through Process or People 106Innovation as a Dynamic Capability 107A Radical Approach to Innovation 109

The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation 111The Role of Branding in Value Creation 113

Building Successful Brands 116Emerging Brand Issues 119

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 120Drawing out the Emotional Message 121The Positioning Process 123

The Role of Price in Value Creation 125The Evaluation of Value 127

Summary Points 129

8 Value Delivery 131The Role of Agility in Value Delivery 131The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 133

Making the Most of Media Choices 136Making the Most of Channel Choices 139

Contents vii

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page vii

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 141Creating a Service Strategy 142Recruiting and Motivating Staff 143Empowering Employees to Live the Brand 146

The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery 148The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 152

Competing through the Supply Chain 153Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression 154

Summary Points 159

9 Demand System Management 161The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management 163The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 165

Culture 165Structure 168

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values in Demand System Management 170

Leadership 170Vision 171Values 172

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 175The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System

Management 179The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 181The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management 185Summary Points 187Concluding Remarks 188

Notes 189References 191Index 197

viii Contents

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page viii

Foreword

Samuel Curtis Johnson first built his reputation as a maker of parquet floorsand then became better known for creating a new way to care for them Hislegacy was a company with a small portfolio of wax-based products whichevolved into the global concern that SC Johnson is today with its globalhousehold name brands such as PledgeGlade and Mr Muscle

One of the basic principles that has guided the successful developmentof the company since its founding over a hundred years ago has been thebelief that we must earn the enduring goodwill of consumers and users ofour products and services

Consumers make up one of five key groups of people to whom we believewe are responsible and whose trust we have to earn (the others beingemployees the general public neighbours and hosts in the countries andcommunities where we conduct business and the world community) Inparticular we are committed to providing useful products and servicesthroughout the world by

Monitoring the changing wants and needs of consumers and users Maintaining close and effective business relationships with the trade to

ensure that our products and services are readily available to consumersand users

Continuing our research and development commitment to provide a strong technical base for innovative and superior products andservices

With our strong corporate emphasis on understanding consumers andproviding them with what they want I found this book enormously appeal-ing because it offers a very clear summary of todayrsquos context for consumermarketing and identifies the real challenges facing those of us seeking toexpand markets market share and profits

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page ix

Susan depicts for us the tectonic shift that has taken place in theeconomy describing this as a move from production-driven to consumption-led In doing so she raises relevant questions about how marketing needs toundergo a consequent shift Most of the marketing frameworks wersquore alltoo familiar with emerged in the production-driven era and we have to askhow relevant they are in this age of the lsquonew consumerrsquo This is a consumerwho is active confident and knowledgeable one who looks for brandexperiences and whose life is being transformed by developments in IT

The marketplace before us is no longer static and homogenous andSusan links neatly into business trends that are being played out here Sheoffers a framework for organising marketing to deliver the value thatconsumers are looking for In doing so she draws on thinking from theemerging discipline of complexity science

This is a timely and relevant book Its stimulating content makesabsorbing reading for both practitioners and scholars Irsquom delighted to becontinuing an SC Johnson tradition of championing consumer marketingin robustly endorsing this thought-provoking work

Steven P StanbrookPresidentndashAsia PacificSC Johnson

x Foreword

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page x

Acknowledgements

lsquoWhy have you got so many books in herersquo asked my son Mark then aged five and ahalf years on entering my study at home one day lsquoBecause Irsquom writing a bookrsquo I replied lsquoWhy do you need so many books to write a bookrsquo he asked

It was a good question and I went on to explain that it wasnrsquot just the booksI needed as reference material but copies of academic papers notes ofmeetings with leading practitioners conference presentations seminarnotes copies of student projects and dissertations and so on and so forthFor the fact of the matter is that this book has emerged out of my years asboth a practitioner and an academic and a debt of gratitude is due to theeclectic group that has contributed to my thinking Working at CranfieldSchool of Management has been a particular source of inspiration and manyof my colleagues will find themselves quoted for good reason My work inestablishing the New Marketing Research Group at the School (visitwwwnew-marketingorg) has helped in pulling many of my ideastogether Irsquom grateful to Professor Malcolm McDonald for supporting mein this venture and to Dr Louise Humphries and Debbie Roberts forhelping me make the Group happen

In making this book a reality Irsquod like to acknowledge the patience ofClaire Plimmer and her team at Wiley the secretarial assistance fromHayley Tedder at Cranfield the creative effort on the graphics from JoannaEnglish and the help given by Marion Cooper with several of the casestudies Margrit Bass who edited this as I wrote it was always encouragingand the book has benefited enormously from her input

Finally I would like to dedicate this book to the three most importantpeople in my life ndash my husband Chris and our sons James and Mark Thankyou for living this book with me

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xi

My concluding words are again attributed to Mark He came into mystudy again a week or so ago and asked why the can of polish was sitting onthe floor lsquoBecause now the bookrsquos finished Irsquom clearing uprsquo I replied Helooked about and then said disdainfully lsquoWell you havenrsquot finished yethave yoursquo Proving therersquos nothing like children to keep your feet on theground

Susan BakerMay 2003

xii Acknowledgements

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xii

About the Author

Dr Susan BakerAt Cranfield School of Management where she is a full time member offaculty Susan specializes in consumer marketing in particular under-standing consumer markets branding and international marketing Shefounded and directs the New Marketing Research Group which workstogether with a consortium of client organizations to understand theimpact on marketing of the New Consumer (wwwnew-marketingorg)

A frequent keynote speaker at conferences and seminars Susan teacheson the MBA programme and works on a variety of management develop-ment programmes for companies across all sectors ndash consumer business-to-business and professional services

Prior to Cranfield Susan pursued a ten-year career in services marketingin leisure retailing from which she gained senior management experienceon both client and agency sides of the business in the UK and overseas

Outside Cranfield she was a trustee of Consumersrsquo Association for manyyears and has more recently become a trustee of Beating Bowel Cancer

She can be contacted at slbakercranfieldacuk

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xiii

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xiv

As a member of faculty at Cranfield School of Management I have metmany senior marketers over recent years who have become frustrated thatlsquomarketing doesnrsquot seem to be working any morersquo Companies are finding itharder to connect with consumers CRM systems that promised so muchhave delivered so little The conventional tools and techniques ofmarketing no longer appear to be relevant Added to all of this market-ingrsquos contribution to a business is constantly under question In effect thecertainties of the marketing environment have been replaced with theuncertainties of a dynamically complex marketplace

So what has changedThe answer is a lot The ground beneath our feet feels shaky because we

are experiencing the after effects of an lsquoearthquakersquo Almost imperceptiblythe economic plates are shifting sending tremors through the players(brand owners and retailers on the one side and consumers on the other)rearranging a landscape that had appeared static and immovable for so longEquilibrium is being replaced with a state of continual change anduncertainty In a variety of small ways the fault lines are emerging withsudden clarity We are moving from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy where the nature of the exchange is different and thisdifference is exacerbated by the force of the internet and e-commerce Thisshift is creating a number of key challenges for consumer marketing

These challenges can be summarized as the need to

bull embrace the New Consumerbull address the concerns of brand owners and retailersbull help organizations develop real consumer responsivenessbull lift marketing out of its crisis

Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 1

Companies are confronted with a new kind of consumer one that hasvariously been described as lsquoactiversquo lsquoknowledgeablersquo and lsquopostmodernrsquo Inessence this is a New Consumer a creature distinctly different andidentifiable from its predecessors For this New Consumer time is aprecious commodity in lives that are becoming increasingly complex Intheir purchasing behaviour New Consumers now look for brandlsquoexperiencesrsquo over and above bundles of features and benefits They are moremarketing literate than ever before and IT enabled New Consumersinhabit an interactive marketplace characterized by high levels ofheterogeneity which disputes the assumptions of conventional marketingthinking

Faced with this new marketplace brand owners and retailers are lookingto enrich and expand the strategic options open to them The growth ofretailer power is of particular concern to brand owners who have beenfeeling the threat posed by industry consolidation Further stress in therelationship stems from the continuing downward pressure on price Andadding to this is the force of globalization and debate about the viability ofmanufacturing Above all there is an imperative to balance cost reductionand sales growth

Retailers are themselves facing daunting challenges and first and fore-most among these is a long-term pattern of declining spend Over the pastten years the retail sector has come to represent less than half the percentageof GDP it used to command This trend varies across sectors forcingretailers to shift their strategies to remain profitable Other challenges havearisen in respect to the difficulties associated with acquiring a businesslocation and consumer expectations of price

The aim for both brand owners and retailers is to develop greater con-sumer responsiveness This means focusing on the demand side of theirbusinesses doing the same thing better or doing something new Toachieve this organizations need to connect better with consumers theyneed to get close enough to consumers to understand how to deliver thevalue that consumers are seeking in a continually adaptive and innovativeway Organizations need to learn how to work in the consumerrsquos lsquospacersquo

Finally criticism about the lack of clarity surrounding marketingrsquoscontribution to a business has been a feature of reports and articles overrecent years This is in part driven by the difficulties surrounding themeasurement of marketing effectiveness but also by the fact that

2 Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 2

marketing is both equated with business unit strategy and located withinthe marketing mix Without a clear emphasis as to its role marketinglanguishes in a lsquono manrsquos landrsquo and is badly placed to provide strategicleadership

MEETING THE CHALLENGES

Meeting these challenges head on requires a different way ofconceptualizing the marketing process and a different approach toimplementation This book proposes the adoption of a value-centricapproach to marketing and connecting with the new science of complexityto enable business to find a way of surviving in the face of continual change

As the practice of marketing has evolved in response to market con-ditions the underlying philosophy of a business in relation to the customersit serves has shifted Transaction marketing was based on a sales orientationwith the aim of acquiring as many new customers as possible Profit wasgenerated through increased sales volume Relationship Marketing thenswitched the emphasis to developing greater profitability through customersatisfaction underpinned by a retention orientation The realities of theconsumption-led economy demand that the focus of a business shifts againto consumer responsiveness based on superior processes of insight innova-tion and agility to achieve profitability This means replacing the focus oncustomer retention with a value-centric orientation

A value-centric orientation means delivering the value consumers wantto buy into and the organization wants to deliver that is value on theconsumerrsquos terms as demanded and maybe even dictated by them This valuecomponent marks the process of exchange that takes place between theconsumer and the organization it is the lsquothingrsquo that consumers get inreturn for what they give It means moving beyond a relationship emphasisto one that has at its core the definition creation and delivery of value If anorganization can meet the value expectations of the consumer then a long-term and profitable relationship is more likely to follow The key is havingvalue as the starting point otherwise the relationship developmentstrategy (and the CRM tools perhaps used to deliver it) will not work asintended

This however is not sufficient on its own to make marketing moreeffective Organizations need to reconceptualize the marketing process to

Meeting the Challenges 3

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 3

take account of the dynamically complex new marketplace Business needsto learn how to understand complexity and find ways of respondingdynamically to change This is where marketing connects with the newscience of complexity The appeal of this to business theorists is that itprovides a way of thinking about how the underlying processes andrelationships in a company can be organized to survive in the face ofcontinual change

New Consumer Marketing emerges at the confluence of these twostreams of thinking ndash the evolving discipline of marketing and the scienceof complexity New Consumer Marketing is therefore different from theprevailing marketing paradigm It is a business discipline that enables theorganization to master the increasingly dynamic and complex process ofgoing to market in a systemic and holistic way It provides managers witha means of identifying and mobilizing people and processes to help thembecome as adaptive and creative as possible against the background of acomplex marketing environment

The New Consumer Marketing model is presented in Figure 01 and itshows quite clearly how consumer marketing can be conceptualized asconsisting of the three key processes underpinned by a value-centric orienta-tion The model is organic in nature reflected in the use of honeycomb-shaped cells each of which has a nucleus The model encourages the synergyof emphasizing both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo enabling organizations to breakout of the binary thinking that has long constrained management theory Inshort the static marketing function of the production-driven economybecomes a living demand system in the consumption-led economy leavingbehind the mechanistic approaches of the former era

The first cell in the demand system is concerned with the process of valuedefinition that is the process of generating and identifying insight inorder to describe and demonstrate value This covers both traditional andnon-traditional ways of generating insight and the process of turning thatinsight into something actionable through segmentation

The next cell is concerned with the process of value creation Innovationforms the nucleus of this cell and is of strategic significance Other sub-processes include new product development branding positioning andpricing

The third key process in a demand system is value delivery This is to dowith how value is communicated and conveyed by an organization to a

4 Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 4

specific audience Media and channels obviously play a role alongsideservice technology integration and supply-chain management Thewatchword here is organizational agility

The seven elements needed to make a demand system viable aredescribed as the organizational DNA The interrelationships of intuitionculture and structure leadership vision and values employees knowledgemanagement planning and measurement work within the cells tooptimize performance and ensure competitive survival

The New Consumer Marketing model therefore lifts marketing out ofits crisis in terms of presenting a conceptual guide for practitioners forgenerating and managing the exchange process under conditions ofcompetition The model provides a framework that enables an organizationto describe and position its marketing strategy In doing this it identifiesthe consumer segments it seeks to serve determining where and how itwill compete

Meeting the Challenges 5

Figure 01 The New Consumer Marketing model

13

13

13 $

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 5

OVERVIEW OF THE BOOK

The structure of this book is outlined below

Figure 02 Structure of the book

6 Introduction

A

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 6

Chapter 1 provides an overview of the changing competitive landscapeand places marketing within the business context Chapter 2 describes theprofile of New Consumers highlighting the challenges they pose tobusiness Chapter 3 then explores the concerns of brand owners andretailers who in the face of change must meet these challenges in order tosurvive

Chapter 4 introduces New Consumer Marketing as an emergingbusiness discipline New Consumer Marketing is not simply another wayof managing the marketing mix but a viable means of addressing the rangeof issues that enable an organization to compete successfully in a particularmarket Its key objective is to help the organization establish sustainablecompetitive advantage by means of superior performance High levels ofperformance are achieved and maintained through the processes of valuedefinition value creation and value delivery

A framework for conceptualizing New Consumer Marketing as themanagement of a demand system is presented in Chapter 5 Chapters 6 7and 8 then focus on each of the three key processes that form the workinglsquocellsrsquo of the New Consumer Marketing model value definition valuecreation and value delivery The concluding chapter Chapter 9 identifiesthe elements that make up the organizational DNA ndash the genetic code thatdrives the cellsrsquo performance and determines the overall success of thedemand system

References to source material and Notes on further reading are to befound at the back of the book

Overview of the Book 7

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 7

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 8

The current crisis in marketing is underscored by profound change in themarketing environment

A new marketplace is emerging and bringing with it a host of challengesnever before encountered For marketers this event is both exciting andunnerving opportunities for innovation and growth parallel threats toproven methodologies and the status quo The challenges posed by thechanging competitive arena are not restricted to a particular industry orsector but span the gamut of enterprises operating today All businessesare being affected to some degree by the root-and-branch upheaval that isoccurring in the wider marketing environment At the start of the thirdmillennium a paradigm shift in commerce is clear we have moved from aproduction-driven to a consumption-led economy

While the forces of demand and supply continue to regulate theeconomy the nature of the exchange has altered beyond all recognitionThe lsquothem and usrsquo adversarial approach to trade is giving way to consumerinvolvement in all aspects of product and service development anddelivery Supplying organizations use increasingly clever methods to wooconsumer loyalty and maintain competitive edge High-powered anddynamic data technology helps produce finely tuned marketing strategieswhich can be implemented on a one-to-one basis through an ever-expanding choice of traditional and electronic media Customers andconsumers exploit this greater access to information and the ability toachieve dialogue with suppliers exercising their new found empowermentby increasingly leveraging sales propositions in their own favour Theresult is a mutually influenced beneficial interaction

Earthquake 1

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 9

This radical transition in the way commercial transactions areconducted is evident no more so than in the rise of the buyerndashsellerrelationship Managing an ongoing relationship is an entirely differentmatter to managing a single transaction and the challenge for marketerstoday is compounded by the growing complexity of the context in which ittakes place Marketing especially consumer marketing faces a dauntingprospect quickly undergo profound change or prepare for certain death

MARKETING IN CRISIS

hellip there was a moment of pregnant stillness then a sibilant whisper a sort offaint seismic exhalation and then the world lurched

Ben Macintyre The Times 23 March 2002

This is the description a journalist gave after experiencing a majorearthquake If one had been listening in the mid-1990s they would haveheard similar rumblings throughout the marketing profession An articlepublished in the McKinsey Quarterly in 1993 claimed lsquoMany consumergoods CEOs are beginning to think that marketing is no longerdeliveringrsquo suggesting that lsquomarketers are simply not picking up the rightsignals any morersquo A Coopers amp Lybrand survey of the same year foundcomparable consensus among senior executives within fast movingconsumer goods (fmcg) retail and service sector organizations Quotingtheir non-marketing managers respondents expressed concern about therole and value of marketing lsquoMarketing is increasingly living a lie in myorganizationrsquo lsquoIf marketing departments disappeared would anybodynotice Would it really matterrsquo

A growing number of articles on the subject of marketing then appearedin the media stimulating debate among academics and practitioners as towhether or not this lsquobad pressrsquo was warranted In late 1993 the UKrsquosChartered Institute of Marketing (CIM) commissioned a report on thefuture of marketing in key British enterprises (Chartered Institute ofMarketing 1994) Boldly entitled The Challenge of Change the CIMinvestigation into marketingrsquos performance and promise delivered mixedtidings A multitude of research reports and commentaries from precedingdecades as well as the then current clutch revealed that marketing was set tobecome increasingly relevant and strategically important as a managementfunction but that it remained on the whole poorly executed in Britain

10 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 10

The last decade of the twentieth century was symbolically brought to aclose with a decisive report by the Marketing Forum the UKrsquos leadingauthority on the role and status of marketing With the objectives ofidentifying the key drivers and core responsibilities of the marketingdiscipline the report sought to address the growing unease amongmarketers Original research attempted to answer the following questions

In the post-dotcom boom what are the new drivers of marketing focus How does the arrival of the information era affect how we as marketers

operate What is our remit now and what new responsibilities can we expect to

assume in future

From the strength of response the message was clear the conventionaltools of marketing were no longer applicable and there was a pressing needfor fresh thinking The research showed that marketing appeared to belosing its way thrown off course by the myriad of unprecedented pressuresand developments in the now global marketplace It was felt that the futureof marketing if there was to be one rested firmly on the adoption of newapproaches and new attitudes While the underlying principles ofmarketing remained for the most part intact the practical tools andtechniques employed required radical revision

Traditional marketing devices such as the 4Ps (product place price andpromotion) had emerged in the production-driven era of the 1950sndash1970sThe subsequent globalization of market activity and explosion in theavailability and use of new-wave technologies particularly the Internet toname but two key drivers of change turned the existing business premiseon its head Instead of being the focus of persuasion to buy what producerswished to produce consumers became the focus of production itself theycould influence to a great extent the nature of products Business prosperityrelied on retaining valuable customer relationships not revving theengines of production

To grasp the full weight of this seismic shift in the rules of commercialengagement it is useful to look back briefly at the development ofmarketing as an established management discipline Its evolution issuffused with hard lessons and valuable learning Only by understandingmarketingrsquos role at different points in time can we anchor the debate aboutits future in a meaningful context

Marketing in Crisis 11

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 11

THE EVOLUTION OF MARKETING

While the application of marketing has existed since people first tradedwith one another its emergence as a distinct business discipline hashappened relatively recently in the period between the First and SecondWorld Wars In the UK for example modern-day marketing becamesynonymous with brand marketing as practised in the 1950s and 1960s byfmcg companies such as Unilever and Procter amp Gamble Marketing stoodfor a business philosophy based on meeting the needs of customers andcreating sustainable competitive advantage It was supported by a businessfunction bearing the same name

Marketers drew on an operational framework rooted in the 4Ps and themost knowledgeable had at their disposal an expanding toolbox ofconceptual diagnostic and predictive tools It is worth considering some ofthese briefly to appreciate marketingrsquos integral role The product life cycle(PLC) introduced in 1950 promulgated the notion that products passthrough typical phases from lsquolaunchrsquo to lsquomaturityrsquo to lsquodeclinersquo and finallylsquoexitrsquo from the marketplace The PLC was followed by a range of modelsdeveloped by rival management consultancies such as the BostonConsulting Group (BCG) and McKinsey amp Co to aid the marketer in themanagement of both single products and product portfolios The mostenduring of these analytical devices are BCGrsquos Boston Matrix andMcKinseyrsquos Directional Policy Matrix (DPM) designed in conjunctionwith General Electric in the USA and Shell in Europe

The four-box Boston Matrix (see Figure 11a) considered products interms of their relative market share and market growth rate It held thatthe perfect conglomerate needed a mix of three types of product Profitfrom the steady earners (lsquocash cowsrsquo) could be used to invest in productswith huge growth potential (lsquostarsrsquo) and underwrite those underdevelopment (lsquoquestion marksrsquo) The fourth quadrant of the matrix wasallocated to product failures (lsquodogsrsquo) whose poor performance or excessivecash consumption justifies their being discarded altogether The DPM (seeFigure 11b) expanded the number of variables used in the Boston Matrixadding market attractiveness and business strengths in order to analyseproduct performance in greater depth

As marketing tools and techniques aimed at understanding productbehaviour became more refined the need to understand consumer

12 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 12

behaviour became more pronounced Demand in consumer markets in the1950s and 1960s was buoyant due to rising levels of disposable income andthe influence of new forms of communication notably televisionMarketing was harnessed as a means of persuading masses of consumers tobuy what was manufactured and the lsquomakendashsellrsquo philosophy of businessestablished itself as consonant with the production-driven era

The guiding principle for developing mass consumer markets was toacquire ever-greater numbers of consumers and take maximum market share

The Evolution of Marketing 13

Figure 11 (a) The Boston Matrix and (b) the Directional Policy Matrix

lsquoStarsrsquo

A selected few

lsquoCash cowsrsquo lsquoDogsrsquo

lsquoQuestion marksrsquo

Marketgrowthshare

Relative competitive position (market share)

Remainder

divested

Liquidated

(a)

(b)

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 13

This strategy was underpinned by research from PIMS (Profit Impact ofMarket Strategy) which showed that the greater the market share achievedthe bigger the profits that would accrue to the company The pace and scopeof mass marketing were set by the American consumer goods giants forwhom the market appeared to be an ever-climbing sales curve until theworld was jolted out of this misapprehension by a series of oil crises in the1970s The consequent international economic downturn followed by highinflation at home had a serious impact on consumers Consumer spendinghabits displayed prudence and sophistication in much larger measure

The Rise of Relationship Marketing

Supplying organizations responded to the constrained economicenvironment of the 1970s by re-examining what they were offering tocustomers To increase product appeal differentiation and value formoney many augmented their product offerings by incorporating a serviceelement This spawned the development of services marketing as a businessfunction In mature markets where the rate of growth had slowed or evenstopped it became more difficult for organizations to pursue a strategy ofgaining market share With the pool of new prospects diminishedmarketing attention steered towards retaining and growing existingcustomer relationships Consequently lsquocustomer loyaltyrsquo achievedpriority and its prime strategic importance remains to this day

The shift in marketing emphasis from customer acquisition to customerretention became enshrined in the principles of Relationship Marketing(RM) RM unlike transaction marketing recognizes that commercialtransactions are not isolated events but that they take place within a liveand continuous context of engagement ndash a lsquorelationshiprsquo between buyerand seller Underpinning the idea of an enduring and potentiallylsquogrowablersquo relationship with a customer is the concept of customer valuethat is the customer has an intrinsic and dynamic value to the supplyingorganization and vice versa

Measures of marketing success then turned from numbers of customers(market share) to share of customer expenditure (share of lsquowalletrsquo) andpotential customer value (customer lifetime value) The work of Bainconsultants Frederick Reichheld and Earl Sasser was seminal indemonstrating the large impact on profitability of small increases in

14 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 14

customer retention rates Further research by Reichheld and Teal (1996)showing the increasing profitability of customers the longer therelationship lasts added strength to the argument for a relationshipmarketing approach

Issues surrounding RM implementation were less clear and businesstheorists usually advocated relationship building via the identification of anumber of key groups or market domains For example the MultipleMarkets Model developed by Christopher Payne and Ballantyne (19912002) recommends that marketing activity should be focused on six mainmarkets

1 consumer markets (or customer markets in the business-to-businesssector)

2 internal markets ie employees3 supplier and alliance markets eg business partners suppliers

consultants contractors4 influencer markets eg venture capitalists regulators lobbyists and

litigators5 referral markets eg customer advocates intermediaries business

advisors6 recruitment markets eg employment agencies graduates the pool of

potential employees

This multiple-markets approach embraces a more holistic view of themarketplace It forces marketers to think beyond managing one marketmade up of consumers (or customers) and extends the marketing mix toinclude the increasingly important elements of people process and theprovision of customer service

As RM became more widely accepted during the 1990s developmentscontinued apace in IT and computational methodologies resulting in theconvergence of database marketing and customer service delivery This ledto the concept of Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

The Test of CRM1

CRM was the last big idea of the twentieth century to grab the attention ofmarketers It appeared to present the magic formula for marketing successndash the opportunity to galvanize the business behind a marketing-led

The Evolution of Marketing 15

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 15

strategy Moreover as commentators have observed it offered lsquothemystique of new technologies and a new three letter acronymrsquo The theorybehind CRM is that managing customer relationships is an integratedbusiness process involving the consolidation of individual customer datafrom multiple sources to create a mutually valuable proposition CRMrsquosemphasis on using IT to monitor customersrsquo transaction histories andexploit their purchasing behaviour serves to reinforce the impact ofcustomer retention strategies With real-time access to customer-specificinformation organizations can segment customers by value targetmarketing strategies towards the most promising opportunities andpersonalize marketing communications Consequently service levels areguided by customer profitability CRM seemed to provide at last themeans of implementing RM effectively and as an incrementaldevelopment served to extend the marketing life cycle (see Figure 12)

Investment in CRM systems across Europe is such that it is one of thefastest growing markets in the IT industry However those organizationsthat interpreted CRM as simply the purchase of an expensive softwareprogram found little succour in the smart new technology It has beenclaimed that up to 97 of CRM installations fail to deliver the anticipated

16 Earthquake

Figure 12 The marketing life cycle

Production-driven economy Consumption-led economy

Marketingemerges asa business

function

Post-warconsumer

boom

Series ofoil crises

Functionalmarketing

Servicesmarketing

Relationshipmarketing

1920s30s 1950s60s 1970s 1980s 1990s 2000

Demandsystem

marketing

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 16

benefits Problems stem from a lack of clarity about what CRM actually isand how to implement it successfully For some it has meant bettermarketing communications providing a means of escaping from theconstraints of mass communications and of achieving more personalizeddialogue Others have taken a broader view using the terms CRM andmarketing almost interchangeably A third school of thought hashighlighted the IT aspect regarding CRM as the technologicalenhancement of business processes Each interpretation of CRM offers anequal number of implementation models and with so many options andinterpretations it is little wonder that CRM has failed to meetexpectations

Current research shows that there are a number of preconditions thatneed to be satisfied prior to implementing a CRM strategy Organizationsmust have a clearly defined marketing strategy in place IT systems that arealigned to the goals of the marketing strategy and an organizationalculture which ably supports the implementation of CRM A misalignmentin any of these relationships leads to a failure of CRM creating waste anddisappointing performance

It is clear that most CRM systems are not conceived with the activedemanding IT-literate consumer in mind Their main focus is onproviding information about the customer to the company They seldomoffer the consumer direct access to information about the supplier orvendor or their own account As business theorist Patricia Seybold assertslsquoCRM systems should be designed with customers as the design centerCustomers should have the ability to maintain (though not theresponsibility of maintaining) information related to their relationshipsrsquo(Seybold et al 2001) This view is in keeping with the prediction ofresearch firm Gartner that by 2005 consumers will start to take control of their own data Together these assertions suggest that CMR ndash orcustomer-managed relationships ndash rather than CRM should be theguiding notion in devising relationship management systems

Whether or not CRM survives as a formal discipline it has been avaluable step in marketingrsquos development It has established the businesscase for adopting the customerrsquos perspective and involving the customer inthe formulation of product and service strategies The timing of thisrealization is no coincidence it is a creative response to the eruption ofdramatic change within the macro-marketing environment

The Evolution of Marketing 17

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 17

CHANGES IN THE MACRO-MARKETING ENVIRONMENT2

The present trend towards more customer-centric ways of doing business isbeing propelled and directed by a fundamental change in the marketingenvironment Using the earthquake metaphor the two lsquotectonic platesrsquothat shape the marketing landscape are the production-driven economyand the consumption-led economy As our manufacturing base declines wecan see that it is consumption and not production which is emerging asthe central motor of contemporary society

Of course we have to look at production and consumption as two sidesof the same coin Production does not take place without a correspondinglevel of consumption and similarly no consumption can take place unlesssomething is produced For some supplying organizations the boundarybetween these two sets of activities erodes and they fuse into what AlvinToffler so presciently described as lsquoprosumptionrsquo in his best-seller FutureShock As long ago as 1970 Toffler foresaw that consumers would soon befaced with the greatest variety of unstandardized goods and services everseen He believed this increasing diversity of products would beencouraged by two economic factors lsquoFirst consumers have more money tolavish on their specialized wants second and even more important astechnology becomes more sophisticated the cost of introducing variations declinesrsquo[his italics]

Today leading organizations such as Landsrsquo End Dell Procter ampGamble and Pearson the TV company demonstrate the wisdom ofTofflerrsquos vision

bull Clothing retailer Landsrsquo End started offering online tailoring inOctober 2000 in the USA A year later the company claimed that 40of all chino and jeans sales on its website were custom ordersCustomers would enter their measurements onscreen including theirweight height and hipndashthigh proportions An inbuilt computerprogram would analyse the information given and calculate the idealdimensions of the trousers The order specifications would be sentdirect to a manufacturing plant in Mexico where the fabric patternwould be produced by a computerized cutting machine and thenpassed to a sewing machinist Two to four weeks after the order wasplaced the customer would receive the trousers

18 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 18

bull Dell one of Fortune magazinersquos top ten lsquomost admiredrsquo companiesdesigns manufactures and customizes computing products andservices to customersrsquo requirements Using the online lsquoConfigure ampBuyrsquo facility customers can create the computer system that best meetstheir needs by a process of selecting options from drop-down menusAs they do so the total price changes accordingly at the bottom of theirscreen

bull Procter amp Gamble has a website called lsquoCommunity Cornerrsquo that it usesto build relationships with consumers or marketing partners as theyare known internally The website is an online forum in whichconsumers can talk about existing brands suggest ideas and changesand contribute to surveys There is also a chance for people with patentsfor new products to discuss them with Procter amp Gamble

bull The television programme Pop Idol created by Pearson enabledviewers to vote in their favourite pop star from a preselected shortlist

Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment 19

Figure 13 Landsrsquo Endcom online tailoring

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 19

In the final show of the UK series nine million viewers voted bytelephone awarding Will Young celebrity status Young thenachieved the fastest-selling debut single in the UK as more than 11 million fans went out to buy the record by the star they had createdThe programmersquos format has since been adopted by televisionproducers in the USA with similar success

The predominance of a consumption-led economy is reflected in a numberof macro market statistics For example in the UK the proportion of grossdomestic product (GDP) provided by manufacturing has been on adownward trend since the mid-1970s This position is reflected in each ofthe G7 industrialized economies (Germany France Italy Japan Canadathe USA and the UK) In the case of the UK manufacturing accounted foraround one third of the economyrsquos total output in 1960 However by thestart of the new millennium this had fallen to less than one fifth with onlythe USA showing a fall below this figure This has been driven in part bythe allocation of an increasing proportion of disposable income to expend-iture on a wide range of services and luxury goods Sectors such as bankingtourism leisure entertainment and telecommunications have been themain beneficiaries

This economic position is mirrored in employment patterns Significantjob losses are expected in the primary sector of the economy (agriculturemining and utilities) over the next couple of years while manufacturingcan expect to lose around 80000 employees each year between 2000 and2005 when the loss is expected to slow to 50000 employees per annumThe decline in engineering will be seen as the biggest contributor to theselosses On the other hand distribution hotels the transport sector andcommunications can expect an increase of 40000 new jobs annually to2005 However the biggest job increases are expected to come in othermarket sectors where growth in professional services in particular willmean an increase of around 140000 new jobs each year to 2005

Not surprisingly these employment trends find equal expression inqualification statistics The number of students graduating in engineeringand technology are down by 9 from 35700 to 32400 over the period1997 to 2001 In contrast degrees received in law and the arts both showincreases Graduates in business and administration now dominate the jobmarket growing from 61700 in 1997 to 65300 in 2001 Those with

20 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 20

degrees in creative arts and design however show the biggestproportionate jump from 24800 in 1997 to 29500 in 2001

These facts and figures stress the fundamental change in marketdynamics from a production to a consumption focus Consumption andthe servicing of consumption increasingly form the basis of businessplanning The economic sector becomes ever more tightly tied tobusinesses that have an asset base made up of intangible services asopposed to hard and fast production This shift has significantramifications for marketers ndash consumer marketers in particular ndash who needactively to acknowledge that new ways of thinking and operating areneeded if we are to meet unrivalled market and management demands

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

A substantial amount of soul searching has gone on in marketing circlesover the past decade as marketingrsquos role and contribution to businessperformance have been challenged by both change and a lack of it Thediminished sense of influence power and value among marketingpractitioners and shared frustration about what to do next is rooted in thefact that the certainties of the production-driven economy have beenreplaced with the uncertainties of the consumption-led economy andmarketing thinking has not kept pace The tools techniques and theoriestaught in business schools today largely promote a mechanistic approach tomarketing which as the following chapters will show is not relevant tothe organic nature of present-day trade relations

While Relationship Marketing and its offshoot Customer RelationshipManagement have revolutionized marketing practice much more needsto be done to manage the matching of supply and demand synergisticallyMarketers whose role has always been located at the critical interfacebetween buyers and sellers are well placed to lead the thought processConsumer markets especially offer valuable insight and testing groundfor the development of more appropriate concepts and codes of practiceThere the customer base is usually more numerous remote and capriciousand the use of intermediaries is commonplace As the tremors shaking themarketing landscape grow stronger and more frequent the imperative tofind new meaning for marketers becomes an unenviable unavoidable andurgent responsibility

Implications for Consumer Marketing 21

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 21

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Marketers are operating in a context of fundamental transition Thecertainties of the production-driven economy have been replaced bythe uncertainties of the consumption-led economy

bull Consumption and the servicing of consumption now form the centralmotor of contemporary society

bull Many of the conventional tools and techniques of marketingdeveloped mainly in the production-driven era no longer apply andmarketingrsquos contribution to business is increasingly unclear

bull Relationship Marketing moved marketing focus from customeracquisition to customer retention

bull The implementation of Relationship Marketing through CRMsystems has been largely unsuccessful and there is an outstandingrequirement for greater clarity in terms of CRM definition andpractice

bull Consumer markets offer insight and testing ground for the futuredevelopment of marketing

22 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 22

Consumption and consumption management are being redefined by the NewConsumer

Consumption (the act or process of consuming) has always been acharacteristic of human nature But consumption as it relates to consuminggoods and services that do not merely fulfil needs but satisfy wants anddesires is a modern-day development one that accelerated after the SecondWorld War Since then a growing range of businesses have come to seetheir interactions with consumers as the execution of a formalized processof consumption They have engaged the marketing profession to hone thisprocess to optimum effect In parallel with this development consumerrights have evolved to the point where the advocacy of consumer interestsis no longer the sole remit of consumer organizations consumersthemselves are leading the cause

In order to manage the process of consumption effectively in the contextof transition described in Chapter 1 marketers traditionally have adoptedthe classic marketing approach of the 4Ps (product place price andpromotion) They have used these elements of the marketing mix tofacilitate their command-and-control philosophy However the advent ofa new kind of consumer is showing this traditional marketing approach tobe out of date lsquoNew Consumersrsquo are well informed and highly empoweredThey are increasingly influencing the shape and form of products andservices as well as the future of market players

CONSUMPTION IN TRANSFORMATION

lsquoConsumptionrsquo is often considered a contemporary word whose arrival wasmarked by the conspicuous consumption patterns of the 1980s Yet some

The New Consumer 2

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 23

commentators point to an earlier era the 1950s when the Marshall Planhelped to rebuild Europe The economic boom that followed the SecondWorld War lasting some 25 years ensured that many members of thelower social classes could have all sorts of goods and services their parentscould only dream of

Other commentators look still further back Sociologist GrantMcCracken (1988) for example turns to the reign of Queen Elizabeth I ofEngland and the prosperity of the last quarter of the sixteenth century1 Atthat time an explosion of consumerist behaviour was fuelled by membersof a social elite who became caught up in a lsquoriot of consumptionrsquo as theyvied for the attention of the monarch The accumulation of expenses bynoblemen at court meant they had less to spend on their families ndash and anew phenomenon was born The individual rather than the family beganto feature as the basic unit of consumption motivated rather more by asense of buying for the here-and-now than for the longer term

The beginnings of consumer society might also be found in the wave ofeconomic prosperity that hit eighteenth-century England and promptedthe emergence of a middle class For these consumers the possession offashionable goods represented an important index of their social standingMoreover new marketing and advertising techniques accompanied thesedifferent patterns of buying behaviour by new groups of consumers

Expansion of the Consumer Concept

Regardless of where in time we position the first signs of consumptionwhat is important is to acknowledge its pervasive influence The concept ofthe consumer and the building of businesses around it is no longerconfined to those who produce lsquothingsrsquo ie manufacturers Organizationsas diverse as charities utilities suppliers government bodies and evenreligious orders have become attuned to thinking of the individuals theyinteract with as consumers

British GasBritish Gas was privatized in 1986 and demerged from British Gas plc in1997 Today it is part of Centrica the holding company for a range ofbusinesses including the AA Goldfish and OneTel in the UK and EnergyAmerica and Luminus overseas For most consumers of gas fuel it is an

24 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 24

unexciting product Their gas-fired stoves break down and the bills alwaysseem disproportionately large to the burning small flame in their boilers As apart of Centrica British Gas set out to turn around a loss-making operationoptimize the use of its sales force and maintain brand presence Now thebusiness is highly profitable the result of a strategy that has included detailedwork on customer segmentation and the use of marketing campaigns tosmooth out peaks and troughs in consumer demand for maintenance andinstallation

Caldey IslandOn Caldey Island off the Welsh coast a group of Cistercian monks isdeveloping an e-business in an attempt to make the monastery financiallyself-sufficient The brothers produce a range of perfumes bath oils handcreams and menrsquos aftershaves as well as shortbread made to an old recipeThe idea of a web shop grew from the problem of geographical remotenessthe holy island is only accessible by licensed boat services between themonths of April and October making for a short selling season Earlyindications are that the site (wwwcaldey-islandcouk) is succeeding

Defence of Consumer Rights

Alongside the growth in consumer numbers products and expenditurethere has been growth in a consciousness of consumer rights The process ofadvancing the cause of consumersrsquo interests in relation to the producer orsupplying organization is known as consumerism and should be seen asdistinct from consumption or the act of consuming the products and servicesproduced

The lsquoconsumer movementrsquo loosely defined as the ongoing campaign tosecure consumer rights began in the late 1950s and early 1960s when anincreasing interest in consumer and environmental issues seeded the ideathat consumers possess the power to influence manufacturers (andsubsequently many others such as retailers and service providers)2 TheUK Consumersrsquo Association founded in 1957 set out to emulate theAmerican Consumersrsquo Union (CU) Within a few years consumersrsquoassociations had formed in several other European countries notablyHolland and Belgium All were based on the CU model of an organizationcarrying out product tests and making public the results to informconsumers (see Figure 21) The consumer voice was given further impetusby President John F Kennedyrsquos groundbreaking address to Congress in

Consumption in Transformation 25

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 25

March 1962 where he asserted the rights of consumers lsquoto safety to beinformed to choose and to be heardrsquo

Today consumer advocacy no longer resides solely with consumergroups The language of consumer rights has entered the corporate worldlsquoWhen people pay money for a brand or to a company they feel they arebuying rights to how they are treated ndash rights to be respected treatedhonestly and fairly and to have their points of view appreciatedrsquo This wasa comment made by Lucy Purdy planning director at Publicis when hercommunications agency published its findings on consumer attitudes toregistering complaints about poor goods and services

In order to create a business culture that meets these expectations on thepart of the consumer Mohanibar Sawhney and Philip Kotler from KelloggUniversity advocate implementing a Customer Bill of Rights for theInformation Age (Sawhney and Kotler 2001) Their proposed draft billsupports a consumer right to anonymity to be remembered and to share in pay-offs among other things They warn that lsquoViolating thesefundamental rights while tempting and even profitable in the short runwill be disastrous in the long runrsquo

26 The New Consumer

Figure 21 Which online

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 26

CONSUMPTION MANAGEMENT IN QUESTION

The management of consumption has traditionally been undertakenthrough the adoption of the lsquomakendashsellrsquo approach characteristic of the production-driven economy described in Chapter 1 Supplyingorganizations (ie manufacturers) made things and it was the task of themarketer to persuade consumers to buy them Their instruments ofpersuasion were the 4Ps The challenge for these organizations was tosatisfy customer needs by producing the right product at the right pricemaking it available in the right place at the right time and promoting itswinning features through the right means of communication

This mechanistic model of consumption management was laterenhanced by the principles of Relationship Marketing (RM) born out of afocus on services marketing RM stressed that the management ofconsumption was about far more than simply putting products into themarketplace The dawning realization that a manufacturer is not so much aproduct company but a service company with a product offeringintroduced the idea of building relationships with consumers over timebased on meeting their needs in relation to both the functional aspects ofthe product and the more intangible aspects of the service elements

In parallel with this development a growing consciousness of consumerrights and consumer power has created more confident consumers oneswho are finding their voice and have at their disposal the means ofexpressing it At the point of confluence of these two trends ndash RM on theone hand and consumer rights on the other ndash the way in whichconsumption is managed comes under question The lsquomakendashsellrsquo approachenhanced through RM does not meet with the expectations of this newempowered consumer Organizations need to acknowledge this change anddevise new ways of managing consumption based on consumersthemselves

A NEW KIND OF CONSUMER

The present consumer-driven marketplace is characterized by a new kindof consumer one who has been variously described as lsquoactiversquolsquoknowledgeablersquo and lsquopost-modernrsquo3 In essence this is a lsquoNew Consumerrsquoa creature distinctly different and identifiable from its predecessors

Consumption Management in Question 27

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 27

Marketers need to develop a deep understanding of the attitudes andbehaviours of this New Consumer if they are to break away from themechanistic models of the production-driven era and develop a relevantapproach to exploiting the business potential of current consumer cultureNew Consumers possess a number of distinguishing features the mostsignificant of which are highlighted here

New Consumers Are Exercised By Time

The first step in understanding changing cultures of consumption is torecognize the different ways in which New Consumers relate to the conceptof time Time has become a precious commodity and many products andservices reflect this insight capitalizing on the time-poorcash-rich trade-off many consumers make Consumers with little time and high levels ofdisposable income have become lsquooutsourcersrsquo ndash their clothes go to the drycleaners nannies look after their children cleaners and tradespeople keeptheir house in good order and so on Businesses that have spotted thismarket niche include enterprising property developers whose new-buildhomes come fitted with fake lawns and supermarkets which offer pre-packaged pre-cooked ready-made meals Personal full-service agencyEnviego goes further and has created a PA (personal assistant) service thatwill take care of everything from actively remembering birthdays toorganizing walking the dog

Contemporary consumer behaviour also illustrates that consumersappear to either actively embrace the pace of change and the constantstream of new products and services or want to run and hide The formerare living life to the max and desirous of anything but routine These lsquotimetouristsrsquo give themselves away by their pursuit of agelessness disregard forgender boundaries and delight in the finer things in life For brand ownerstime tourists represent new markets and marketing opportunitiesClinique for example cleverly acknowledges male buyers with theadvertisement lsquoDonrsquot say the word ldquocosmeticsrdquo Cliniquersquos ldquoSkin suppliesfor menrdquorsquo (see Figure 22a)

lsquoTime refugeesrsquo on the other hand display characteristics best describedas defensive in the face of the pace of change These consumers seek securityand a sense of belonging They want to find and maintain a home be itspiritual or physical They want to feel part of a community and form

28 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 28

A New Kind of Consumer 29

Figure 22 (a) Clinique woos the men (b) LrsquoOreal rewards you

(a)

(b)

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 29

relationship bonds with other people Buying certain brands thereforebecomes a way of linking with like-minded consumers The worldwidemarketing success of Harley-Davidson and its 600000-strong HarleyOwnersrsquo Group demonstrates this drive to belong to a tribe or group Forsome time refugees purchases become a sort of reward LrsquoOreal forexample targets this group with the strapline lsquoBecause yoursquore worth itrsquo(see Figure 22b) Time refugees are looking to anchor themselves in atransient world The website wwwfriendsreunitedcom which reunitesformer school friends has successfully captured their imagination

New Consumers Lead Complex Lives

The marketplace of the New Consumer is highly fragmented and this is inlarge part due to the highly complex lives consumers lead On one levelthey display multiple personalities seeming to dip in and out of differentstereotypic personality types The prevalence of this consumer behaviourwas exemplified by a piece of advice from Cosmopolitan magazine to itsfemale readership lsquoBe an it-girl on Saturday a kitten on Sunday a careerwoman on Monday a devoted girlfriend on Tuesday helliprsquo It is as ifconsumers can take on chameleon-like properties and adapt their projectedpersonas to suit the situation

This complex behaviour creates problems for marketers whosesegmentation analyses are constructed on the premise that consumers canbe categorized permanently in one of a number of predefined lsquoboxesrsquoHowever in displaying multiple personalities consumers can appear tooccupy a number of different boxes depending on the occasion Forexample in the airline industry a passenger might choose to fly businessclass or first class for business travel economy class for family holidays andwith a special ticket (discount or promotion) for a long weekendDesigning a marketing strategy to capture or keep this customer is analmost impossible task if simple demographics are used as the basisMaking sense of this apparent chaos requires marketers to abandon theirneed for certainty and to develop a tolerance of ambiguity and a skill inadaptability In addition to recognizing consumersrsquo changing attitudes totime marketers must respect their preferences and different needs anddesires

30 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 30

New Consumers Seek Experiences

Marketing theorists have for some time pointed out that consumers donrsquotbuy product features they buy product benefits As marketing guruTheodore Levitt famously commented lsquoCustomers donrsquot buy frac14 inch drillsthey buy frac14 inch holesrsquo In the case of New Consumers their purchasingbehaviour is further distinguished by the desire to buy an lsquoexperiencersquo It isnow possible to purchase such an experience off the shelf in high streetretailers W H Smith for example offers them in a catalogue Their rangeincludes a day driving a Ferrari or a JCB a visit to a health farm and aphotographic makeover Prices range from pound9999 to pound299999 the latterbuys the thrill of diving with sharks in South Africa Children under 17years of age are offered their own choice of lsquofirstrsquo experiences such asdriving a car or being a TV presenter

In response to this desire to lsquoconsumersquo experiences many retailers havemoved from simply offering ranges of products to also offering ranges ofexperiences In the pub market for example consumers can enjoy an Irishpub experience one evening followed by an Australian bar experience thenext and an American bar experience resembling the television sit-comCheers after that Except that these experiences are not lsquorealrsquo in the sense ofbeing non-contrived Instead they are formulaic and themed reality isdeliberately blurred with hyper-reality

US consultants Joseph Pine and James Gilmore (1998 see also Pine andGilmore 1999) describe this lsquoexperience economyrsquo as one where lsquoInstead ofrelying on our own wherewithal to experience the new and wondrous ndash ashas been done for ages ndash we will increasingly pay companies to stageexperiences for us just as we now pay companies for services we oncedelivered ourselves goods we once made ourselves and commodities weonce extracted ourselvesrsquo Clearly consumer offerings and marketingmessages addressed to New Consumers must take this trend on board

New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding

The command-and-control philosophy traditionally adopted by marketersto manage the consumption process is inappropriate today As everymarketer who engages consumers in research will know consumers arebecoming more marketing literate and less easy to please They candeconstruct marketing activities with almost as much insight as most

A New Kind of Consumer 31

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 31

marketers For example the average consumer can quickly sort the daily postinto three piles personal mail business mail and unsolicited or lsquojunkrsquo mailThey are capable of identifying each without even opening the envelope

Consumers are no longer passive absorbers of marketing messages Inthe words of author Alan Mitchell (2001) lsquoThe observed have startedplaying games with the observerrsquo At one extreme these lsquogamesrsquo take theform of protests and demonstrations against globalization such as thedisruption of the World Trade negotiations in Seattle in 1999 and the G8summit in Genoa in 2001 Naomi Kleinrsquos book No Logo Taking Aim at theBrand Bullies (2000) is another example It is a highly acclaimedassessment of multinational brand-name corporations labour abuses andanti-corporate resistance which quickly became the bible of the anti-globalization movement after its publication in the USA

At the other extreme consumers make their views known in less violentways For example those who are unhappy with their purchases and intentupon standing up for their rights can turn to consumer watchdogs andother advocacy groups which operate through traditional as well aselectronic media In fact consumer redress has become a source oflsquoinfotainmentrsquo ndash part information and part entertainment Consumers alsohave the wherewithal to take direct action such as setting up lsquovigilantersquowebsites Marketers should monitor these sites carefully as they canprovide a rich seam of consumer feedback Equally their impact onconsumer and corporate perception should be managed carefully In 1999Dunkinrsquo Donuts the fast food retailer bought out the lsquogripe sitersquo set uptwo years earlier by a customer who had been upset at the absence of anyskimmed milk for his coffee

Such consumer activity reflects a knowledge on the part of consumersabout how marketing works and a new-found confidence in expressingdissatisfaction It is imperative therefore that the New Consumer beequally involved in the consumption management process and that apartnership of open dialogue and mutual respect be developed between thetrading parties

New Consumers Are IT Enabled

Underpinning the way New Consumers live their lives and make and usetheir purchases are of course developments in information technology

32 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 32

(IT) This fundamental feature of the New Consumer raises issues formarketers about how to connect with consumers who live in atechnologically interactive and integrated world The exponential growthin the use of mobile phones (devices first developed by Bell Laboratories inthe 1940s) has presented particular challenges Consumers worldwide haveneeded little persuading of the benefits of the mobile phone which unlikelandline systems links people rather than locations In the UK 28 millionpeople owned mobile handsets in 2001 and this figure is predicted to rise to405 million by 2005 according to research firm Gartner Thefundamental appeal of the mobile phone is that it extends a basic humanquality ndash the ability to communicate Teenagers in particular havebecome the main conduits through which mobile phones have found theirway into wider society and they were also the first group to realize thepotential of text messaging The Japanese teenage generation has even beendubbed oya yubi sedai meaning the thumb tribe on account of thedexterity with which they text message

Throughout this growth in mobile phone ownership consumers haveshown themselves to be one step ahead of marketers who have yet to reallydemonstrate that they understand the market drivers and how this mobilechannel can be most effectively integrated into the communications mixEquipped with mobile phones and other handheld mobile devicesconsumers are no longer static and fixed in time and space relative tobrands They have a choice of channels through which to connect with abrand and will exercise individual preference in using them For exampleconsumers may prefer to purchase some categories of goods online such asCDs videos books and software but use the Internet to browse for otherproducts and services In the US it is estimated that only 1 of new cars arepurchased online while half of the nationrsquos car buyers use the Internetsolely to research and compare automotive product options

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

In todayrsquos consumption-led economy using the 4Ps (or even the 7Ps of aRelationship Marketing approach) as the basis for marketing strategymisses a fundamental point consumption is enacted by consumers andtherefore they ndash and not products ndash should be the starting point ofmarketing strategy origination Robert Lauterborn (1991) described the

Implications for Consumer Marketing 33

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 33

need to focus instead on the 4Cs consumer needs and wants costs to the consumer (time money effort etc) convenience factors andcommunication (how the consumer wishes to be communicated with bythe supplying organization) With the arrival of the New Consumer thecommand-and-control approach to consumption management so typicalof the production-driven era is no longer applicable

Marketers need to accept that the marketplace is no longer stable andpredictable but is instead dynamic and complex and as a consequencetheir need for certainty must become replaced by a tolerance of ambiguityThis is driven for the most part by the heterogeneity of the NewConsumer Consumers today no longer resemble the conventionalperceptions formed in the era of mass marketing and traditionalapproaches to consumer research and segmentation do not adequatelycapture their essence New Consumers have minds of their own and are notreluctant to make their views known New Consumers are empowered tomake their purchases through an ever-expanding choice of media andchannels Moreover they change suppliers easily and often without anysense of disloyalty They even assemble in groups to influence the offer andget the best price or contract terms The New Consumer demands adifferent kind of customer relationship one that warrants an entirelydifferent approach to strategic consumer marketing

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Consumption today is about the satisfaction of consumer wants anddesires rather than the fulfilment of consumer needs

bull The process of consumption is widely recognized as a managementissue rather than simply a market phenomenon

bull The starting point for managing the consumption process should be theconsumer not the product and marketing strategy needs to reflect this

bull New Consumers are exercised by time lead complex lives seekexperiences are marketing literate and highly demanding and are ITenabled This creates a different set of expectations to be met in the newmarketplace

bull The New Consumer represents unprecedented challenges formarketers

34 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 34

bull Rethinking the consumer means rethinking marketing

bull The traditional command-and-control approach to consumptionmanagement must be replaced by more collaborative methods thatinvolve and value the consumer

Summary Points 35

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 35

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 36

The challenge for brand owners and retailers is lsquoinnovate or diersquo

While many consumer brand owners recognize the symptoms ofrevolutionary change within the marketing environment few have beenable to interpret and respond to them meaningfully because of seeminglymore pressing business demands Among these immediate issues is theneed to address concerns about the manufacturerndashretailer relationshipConsolidation within the retail sector is continuing to increase thedownward pressure on price making it difficult for manufacturers tomanoeuvre in terms of market position Added to this the impact ofglobalization has placed the future of manufacturing in question Overrecent years the focus of producers and retailers has been supply chainmanagement However for many organizations simply improvingefficiencies is no longer enough to achieve sustainability Todayrsquos keybusiness imperative is to balance cost reduction and sales growth

Retailers are facing major challenges Retail spending as a proportion ofgross domestic product (GDP) has fallen significantly over the past coupleof decades This disturbing trend and the emergence of the New Consumerare forcing retailers to abandon their lsquoone size fits allrsquo approach and to focusinstead on managing consumer heterogeneity through marketingstrategies resulting in narrower and deeper retail concepts

KEY ISSUES FOR BRAND OWNERS

Research into the key business issues concerning fmcg brand owners byconsultants Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young1 in 2001 underlined the overridingchallenge of dealing with change in the competitive environment Four

Concerns of Brand Owners 3and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 37

main concerns were identified the force of globalization debate about thefuture of manufacturing the growth in retailer power and the need tomanage the balance between cutting costs and growing sales

The Force of Globalization

Organizational profitability and growth are the key drivers of a marketingstrategy that has at its core the standardization of business structuresproducts and processes along global (or at least regional) lines For manyglobal brand manufacturers a policy of standardization means adoptingthe philosophy that investments in product development and promotionsprovide greater returns if they are not limited to a single national marketThe internationalization or globalization of business activity can lead tothe de-duplication of roles and factories across several countries serving tomake the organization leaner For consumers the first visible sign of such astrategy in operation is often the subtle name change of a well-knownproduct In the UK for example Jif became Cif (see Figure 31) Oil ofUlay became Oil of Olay and Marathon became Snickers

Production-driven supply-chain thinking usually dominates aglobalization strategy as producers seek to rationalize their number ofstock-keeping units (SKUs) so as to avoid adding complexity to the supplychain Several fmcg companies worldwide are involved in programmes thatwill severely reduce the number of SKUs they have to support Unileverfor example is currently amputating its long tail of under-performingbrands a process that will leave it with 400 strong-growth lsquopower brandsrsquoas compared to the heavily diluted pool of 1600 it started with

The main problem with a strategy of standardization is that it seldomacknowledges the consumption-led economy Consumers themselves arenot standard they differ from one market to another Fmcg giants riskalienation by offering a lsquoone size fits allrsquo product range Coca-Colarecognized this when it abandoned the mantra lsquothink global act localrsquo infavour of lsquothink local act localrsquo The company wisely decided thatmanufacturing operations should be embedded in the local culture

Global brand owners also have to deal with the fact that in some nationalmarkets brands can remain strong and profitable even though they maynever become international players This can create conflict between localand global management over whether or not the brand in question should

38 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 38

be retained within the global portfolio Success in managing a globalportfolio is therefore marked by finding the right balance betweenstandardization and customization

The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing

In order to deal with the increasingly competitive environment andrespond effectively to shareholder demands fmcg companies have beenforced to take a long hard look at their businesses Many are questioningthe value brought to their company and brands by retaining ownership ofthe actual manufacturing process and are evaluating outsourcing as aserious proposition That this debate is taking place at all signifies a radicalchange in thinking for fmcg manufacturers who have long regarded themanufacturing process as something of a sacred cow

Nike Ericsson and Sara Lee are among those brand owners providingindications of a possible way forward Nike for example famously sees

Key Issues for Brand Owners 39

Figure 31 Jif changed to Cif as a result of globalization

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 39

itself as a provider of lifestyles conveyed through sportswear innovationdesign and styling It has never regarded production as a core competenceThe manufacturing strategy implied by Nikersquos approach is one focused on coordinating access to external resources and ensuring effectivecollaboration between internal functions and contract manufacturersparticularly in the areas of new product development The management ofthese crucial relationships is therefore key

In taking the decision to follow a manufacturing strategy of lsquoinnovateand coordinatersquo rather than lsquoown and operatersquo the brand owner is makingproduct innovation and development a core competence and is focusing onthe areas that drive growth and shareholder value Use of such a strategyamong fmcg manufacturers also demonstrates that they no longer seethemselves as product companies and are repositioning themselves asservice companies with a product offering This move resonates with theeconomic trend away from a pure manufacturing base to an over-whelmingly services oriented economy Those brand owners treading boldlyinto this new realm are effectively launching themselves into a new way ofthinking to ensure their survival

The Growth in Retailer Power

Brand owners are increasingly feeling the threat posed by industryconsolidation as the balance of power is tipped in favour of savvy retailersIt is becoming commonplace for retailers to use their intermediate positionto negotiate prices trade terms shorter delivery times and tailoredpromotions securing a winndashwin situation for themselves and theircustomers They are also managing to persuade manufacturers to enter intovendor-managed inventory agreements where the supplier activelymanages the customerrsquos inventory The fear factor is intensifying in the UKamid speculation about whether AsdaWal-Mart are planning furtheracquisitions that would bring them head-to-head with Tesco Britainrsquosbiggest supermarket chain Wal-Mart is the worldrsquos biggest retailer withannual sales of more than pound140 billion It possesses massive purchasingpower and can buy goods very cheaply from Asia and developing nations

Further stress in the manufacturerndashretailer relationship stems from thepressure to standardize pricing and trade terms (following the introductionof the Euro) the competitive threat of high-quality own-label products

40 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 40

and the shrinking shelf space available for brands When retailerndashsuppliernegotiations come down to pure muscle power the retailers have the edgesimply because the fmcg sector is more fragmented Manufacturers havetried to improve their position by maximizing the power of their lsquomuststockrsquo brands but very few of these represent brands that retailers wouldgenuinely fear losing

In some cases a more collaborative relationship is developing where themanufacturer recognizes that the retailer incurs an opportunity cost (of notachieving maximum potential sales) and works with the retailer to addressthis by supplying not just products but also value-added services thatsupport the products The key to such cooperation is the mutual sharing ofinformation Private web-based exchanges which require the integrationof both internal systems are often used to share data and ideas In this wayNestleacute improved its on-shelf availability in Sainsburyrsquos stores to 97 whileits overstocking fell by 25

The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth

Brand owners especially food manufacturers are under increasing pressurefrom the large retail multiples to reduce their trade prices and increasetheir service levels In response manufacturers are trying to eliminatewastage and excess costs from all corners of their cost base At the sametime they are trying to find additional sales volumes to meet analystsrsquo salesforecasts and shareholdersrsquo expected return on investment So how well arethey managing the balance between cutting costs and growing sales

Unileverrsquos strategy is typical The company plans to eliminate 100 of its380 manufacturing sites as part of its well-publicized lsquoPath to Growthrsquoinitiative It is targeting top-line growth of 5ndash6 by 2004 through itsfocus on cost reduction and brand rationalization However cost reductionprogrammes come at a price euro6 billion of restructuring costs in Unileverrsquoscase Unilever chairman Niall Fitzgerald is confident the targeted savingsof euro15 billion together with purchasing savings of the same magnitudewill finance the companyrsquos ambitious growth plans

The growth strategies of major fmcg companies all share an emphasis oncost reduction and service improvement Achieving competitive advantageis becoming harder as both quality and cost-efficient production are nolonger distinguishing factors in the marketplace For decades now most

Key Issues for Brand Owners 41

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 41

manufacturers have been addressing the issue of resource wastage and fewwould stand out as inefficient The proportion of savings that they cangenerate for reinvestment in growth therefore depends on the effectivenesswith which they implement their respective cost reduction programmesTaking cost out of a business has historically been a more traumatic ndash butalso a more predictable ndash fiscal strategy than trying to grow revenues Andwhile corporate acquisition can offer significant scope for investmentcapital most would agree that innovation and organic growth representmore prudent options

The Search for Innovation

All of these issues combined with low inflation and price transparencythroughout Europe mean there is no end in sight to the price debate formanufacturers Low-cost production and distribution become theminimum requirements for staying in the game Achieving a step changein performance requires a radical solution and it is focused innovation thatoffers the most promising source of organic growth There should beinnovation in the relationship between manufacturer and retailer and inthe creation of the next wave of products and services The solution lies inadaptability that is the ability to concentrate on short product cycles andproduct innovation based on profound insight into the value consumers areseeking For consumer marketers this means having a value-centricorientation in the business and a way of managing that enables innovation

THE RETAILERSrsquo RESPONSE2

While many brand owners see retailers as the cause of their key businessconcerns retailers themselves face daunting challenges First and foremostamong these is a long-term pattern of declining spend In 1980 the retailsector represented 466 of GDP Today that figure has roughly halvedThis is because most consumers have everything they need and retailexpenditure is essentially concentrated on lsquonon-essentialsrsquo in satisfyingtheir wants and desires As a result retailers compete with an ever-expanding range of competitors encompassing such areas of expenditure asholidays eating out and personal luxuries

42 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 42

A closer look at this trend shows variations across different types ofbusiness In food retail this trend is typical of developed economies asthere is a limit to how much people can eat and eating out of home hasbecome increasingly popular This is why the grocery retailers are so keento develop their non-food businesses In clothing retail there has been aloss of share since the late 1990s probably driven more by a lack ofexcitement in the product offers than anything else In contrast the homeimprovement retail business has been a success story sales in do-it-yourself(DIY) and electrical products and furniture and soft furnishings haveshown significant growth

Retailers are also facing challenges in respect to business location In theUK there has been an escalation in out-of-town shopping forcing manytraditional high-street retailers out of business Non-central sites carrylower rents and opportunities for larger stores making for a more attractiveproposition At the same time the cost of siting businesses in towns andcities is rising for two important reasons the introduction of inflexibleupwards only rental arrangements and the rapid expansion of fast-foodoutlets coffee shops and mobile phone retailers

However this current trend is likely to be reversed with the propertyindustryrsquos proposed introduction of a code of practice that will enableretailers to negotiate more favourable rental agreements and the naturaleffects of market saturation Furthermore out-of-town rents are beingdriven upwards by buoyant demand for DIY and electrical goods as well asnew interest from clothing retailers

In store price is still a significant issue for retailers Continuation in theuse of lsquoevery day low pricingrsquo (EDLP) and promotions to leverage consumerinterest and revenueprofit is being questioned as consumer expectationsheighten and additional demands are placed on finite resources So caughtunder mounting pressure from intensifying competition and lsquomarginsqueezersquo what should the retailerrsquos strategy for survival be Several optionsexist and these may be used in isolation or combination

Trading across Multiple Locations

In the UK the rule of thumb for selecting the right sales location used to bethat if you could see McDonaldrsquos out of one eye and Marks amp Spencer out ofthe other somewhere in the middle was probably just right It is no longer

The Retailersrsquo Response 43

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 43

that simple as location and store format have become linked to segmentationstrategy The major multiples for example are increasingly tapping thepotential of smaller convenience and food-to-go stores in neighbourhoodand suburban locations In 2002 Tesco acquired the convenience storechains One Stop and Nite-and-Day with the intention of rebranding themto increase the number of Tesco Express outlets from 100 to more than 500

Trading across Multiple Formats

Major retailers across a range of industries no longer confine themselves tosingle-store formats but have developed a number of approaches tomaximize trading opportunities Larger store formats are becoming morecommon for retailing groceries clothing DIY and electrical goodsAmong smaller format stores retail growth is expected to come from newbuilds (mainly grocery) concession units (electricals and furniture) andstore lsquoimplantsrsquo such as the Health amp Beauty which Boots is trialling as anlsquoimplantrsquo in Sainsburyrsquos supermarkets

Use of Multiple Channels

With the rapid take-up of new technologies retailers are utilizing an ever-expanding mix of channels For example Next is one of a number ofcompanies to offer its goods across a range of channels online mail andtelephone ordering services are available to its customers Overall thenature of the online offer will probably continue to differ across the range ofproduct categories For example it is transactional in nature in clothinggrocery and electricals and more focused on promotion and the provisionof information to consumers in the areas of DIY furniture and health andbeauty Despite the hype surrounding e-commerce experts predict that by2005 little more than 5 of retail sales will be online The majority ofthese purchases will be made by consumers in the 26ndash45-year-old agebracket and the over 50s or lsquosilver surfersrsquo

Editing Choice in Store

The attention of retail managers is increasingly focusing on how consumersfind their way around product ranges within stores as well as how they

44 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 44

navigate store aisles New Consumers are looking for lsquoedited choicersquo thatis visible guidelines to help them save time and effort Smart retailers whounderstand this particular consumer want are targeting specific groupingsof products to appeal to specific segments of New Consumers For examplea range of specialist additive-free products will be grouped together withina supermarket rather than following the traditional practice of locatingadditive-free biscuits with other biscuits and additive-free bread withother breads

Enhancing Retail Branding

Retailers are developing their brands by creating new retail brandidentities targeted at particular market segments A retail brand such asThe Link a new Dixons Group brand works best in heterogeneousmarkets where economies of scale are of limited significance In contrastretail brand extensions are more commonly used where the core retailbrand has built up a strong level of consumer equity such as the strategyBoots is pursuing with its Boots Opticians brand

Developing Multinational Operations

Taking retail concepts overseas is a seductive proposition but few retailershave made a success of it Failed attempts to recreate business success inother countries usually result from a lack of understanding andappreciation of the way that markets operate There may be crucialdifferences in the way property is owned and managed or how employersand employees interact Sometimes it is a simple misreading of localconsumer needs However some retailers do manage to succeed inestablishing multinational operations and certain markets have becomethe focus of highly competitive activity Tesco and Wal-Mart for instanceare both aggressively expanding in central Europe and the Asia Pacificregion

Pursuing Customer Loyalty

Customer loyalty represents the Holy Grail for retailers who now have thepotential to use consumer data to build powerful knowledge-based

The Retailersrsquo Response 45

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 45

consumer relationships However as market analyst Verdict concludesconsumer loyalty is eroding across most sectors Consumer churn isgrowing most strongly in the areas of clothing housewares and footwearfollowed by DIY and food Figure 32 illustrates this decline in loyalty (thechange in the average number of people saying they were loyal to oneretailer) In order to arrest this trend retailers have introduced a variety ofloyalty schemes and programmes In the UK current benchmarks havebeen set by Tesco and Boots whose Clubcard and Advantage Cardrespectively are carried by a majority of consumers

The launch of Nectar a lsquonext-generationrsquo loyalty scheme backed bySainsburyrsquos BP Debenhams and Barclaycard introduced in 2002invigorated the battle for consumer loyalty (see Table 31) Nectarrsquos rewardsoffer focuses on frequently consumed lsquolow ticketrsquo items Loyalty points maybe redeemed by founding partners Sainsburyrsquos and Argos or by alliancepartners McDonaldrsquos Blockbuster Legoland and Odeon Cinemas

Critics of these loyalty schemes argue that what is being created is alsquoloyalty currencyrsquo rather than any genuine sense of affiliation with andsupport for a particular retailer They claim that successful loyalty schemesonly work because retailers are able to take consumer information and turnit into actions which in turn provide the consumer with recognizablebenefits These benefits strengthen the consumerrsquos bond with the company

46 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

6

4

2

0

ndash2

ndash4

ndash6

ndash8

ndash10

Change ()

Personal Music Electricals Food DIY Footwear House- Clothingcare video grocery ware

64 34

ndash41 ndash48 ndash83 ndash93 ndash99

01

Figure 32 The decline in loyalty 1999ndash2002 Adapted from Verdict 2002

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 46

The Retailersrsquo Response 47

Tab

le 3

1T

he b

attle

of t

he lo

yalty

car

ds (a

t Nec

tarrsquos

laun

ch)

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 47

[Text not available in this electronic edition]

because the consumer can see that the company cares about them enough toreward their business However a scheme that simply rewards theconsumer but fails to capture in a meaningful way the vital flow ofinformation from consumer transactions is a sales promotion schemehowever large it might be

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

The mass markets of the production-driven economy have given way to thediverse demanding markets of the consumption-led economy In responsebrand owners and retailers are replacing their lsquoone size fits allrsquo consumermarketing strategies with ones that are more customized and personalizedThe era of maximizing scale is over and the future of retailing looks to beabout creating retail concepts that appeal to smaller clusters of consumersWhile certain lsquocategory killersrsquo (giant out-of-town superstore brands thatfocus on retailing a single category of products such as BampQ in DIY) willsurvive as they currently stand most retailers are taking radical actionThey are creating a lsquonarrower and deeperrsquo type of offer in the hope ofgaining a higher penetration of consumer spend Micro-retailing whereretailers make a limited range of products available in a small store to ahighly targeted audience can only be successful if it is based on meaningfulinsights into the value being sought by the New Consumer Of course thispresupposes that a value-centric orientation exists within the business

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Both brand owners and retailers need to adopt a value-centricorientation and an approach to marketing that enables adaptabilitycreativity and innovation

bull The impact of globalization and questions surrounding manufactur-ing cost-effectiveness and competition are causing brand owners torationalize their portfolios

bull There is no end in sight to the trade price issue as retailers consolidateand continue to exert downward pressure on prices

bull To achieve improvements in brand performance brand owners mustdeliver consumer-focused innovation

48 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 48

bull Faced with a declining share of GDP and lower levels of consumerloyalty retailers are increasingly adopting multi-location multi-format multi-channel and multinational strategies

bull Micro-retailing is creating narrower and deeper retail offerings

Summary Points 49

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 49

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 50

New Consumer Marketing champions a new and viable way of marketing

New Consumer Marketing (NCM) does not just advocate a new focus formarketing it champions a new way of doing marketing It breaks awayfrom the mechanistic models of the production-driven era and providesfresh thinking on managing new patterns of consumer growth It focuseson the demand side of business taking the consumer as its starting pointnot its final destination As a concept NCM combines the strengths of anorganizationrsquos people and processes and enables marketers to break out ofthe binary thinking that has seen businesses swing between a singularemphasis on process or on people

NCM is at an early stage of development Its evolution as a specificmanagement discipline is being influenced by an eclectic body ofindividuals who recognize that new marketing approaches and attitudesare needed Most established marketing thinking has grown out of themechanistic age of marketing where the certainties of mass marketsprovided a sense of security for brand owners and retailers The presentmarketing environment is no longer as static and certain as it used to beand there is a growing need to find more appropriate marketing tools andtechniques to connect better with consumers

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHAT IS IT

New Consumer Marketing is not simply another way of managing themarketing mix It is an emerging business discipline that addresses a rangeof issues relevant to competing successfully in a particular market Its keyobjective is to establish sustainable competitive advantage through

New Consumer Marketing 4

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 51

superior processes of value definition value creation and value delivery Atthe heart of each of these processes is a core capability ndash insight innovationand agility These capabilities enable the organization to develop consumerresponsiveness that is to deliver the value required by its consumersegments cost-effectively

NCM helps marketers make sense of the complexity and apparent chaosthat defines todayrsquos consumer markets In this post-quake economymanagers find themselves searching for frameworks and tools that willenable them to master very different market conditions NCM providesfresh thinking on where and how to focus marketing attention andresources in this consumption-led economy It is a response by leading-edge marketers to the outstanding challenges posed by the NewConsumer whose arrival is marked by heightened competitiontechnological developments that have created an interactive marketplaceand increasingly irrelevant consumption management practice that isstruggling to succeed through Relationship Marketing (RM) andCustomer Relationship Management (CRM)

A Response to the New Consumer

Consumers today are faced with overwhelming choice For the most parttheir needs are taken care of and their discretionary expenditure is focusedon satisfying their wants and desires As discussed in Chapter 2 NewConsumersrsquo expectations of products services and brands extend beyondlsquofeaturesrsquo and lsquobenefitsrsquo to lsquoexperiencesrsquo Even with this insight brandowners and retailers face an uphill struggle in connecting with consumersTheir brand messages compete for the attention of an increasinglysophisticated audience who are bombarded with information from rivalsources As author Seth Godin (1999) has noted a wealth of data becomes apoverty of attention

Furthermore it is harder to reach consumers who live highlyfragmented lives and display multiple personalities and who changesuppliers at the click of button Such sophisticated and demandingconsumers are not confined to a static marketplace but roam freely withinan interactive one New routes to market emerge all the time making iteasier for consumers to go to market They can research products and maketheir purchases offline or online or both as is their preference For the

52 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 52

consumer controlling the relationship in this interactive marketplaceextends to controlling the value proposition more directly and forcefullythan ever before For instance the web can easily support build-to-ordermanufacturing where consumers specify the colour size or configurationof a product they want

A Response to the Interactive Marketplace

Developments in IT bring with them both opportunities and threats Forexample as we move from a state of interaction into an age of integrationconsumers will increasingly have access to information on the move and theability to demand faster better and cheaper service At the same timemobile commerce makes it possible for marketers to communicate moreeffectively with consumers marketing messages can be targeted andconsistent and consumer feedback can be received and assimilated

For the consumer the costs of doing business are likely to fall as IT offersan opportunity to find the best value for money offers For examplewwwcarsurveyorg and wwwmoneysupermarketcom enable consumersto make comparisons at the click of a mouse while other websites bringindividual consumers together empowering them to use their collectivebargaining power The next step on from this is the development ofpersonal agents or sites that coordinate and control the access of suppliersto meet an individualrsquos specific requirements for example a domesticservices agent that manages suppliers of utilities groceries mortgage andbanking services etc

The Internet opens up business transparency and effectively transfers thepower in the relationship to consumers Economists suggest that underthese conditions firms will end up as price takers in a near perfect market(markets in which conditions of free and open competition more or lessexist) The so-called lsquorate tartrsquo ndash the informed confident consumer whoswitches between companies to gain the benefit of the best financial dealson offer ndash is already a reality for suppliers of personal financial services Inthe music industry consumers have taken control of both production andconsumption Music lovers have exploited the advantages of MP3 astandard file format that enables digital music files to be compressed sothey can be downloaded via the Internet in a reasonable time and withoutlosing too much audio quality Consumers can e-copy songs and entire

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it 53

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 53

audio CDs without having to pay for the music (an opportunity for musicalartists to flaunt their talent a threat to the music industry in lost income)

A significant effect of the pace of change in IT has been the emergenceof time as a competitive dimension Organizations find themselveshaving to operate in lsquoMartini modersquo or ndash in the words of the drinkrsquosadvert ndash lsquoany time any place any wherersquo The term lsquo247rsquo has entered theEnglish language superseding the earlier phrase lsquoopen all hoursrsquoCompeting on the basis of time demands a rapid response capabilityOrganizations need to develop business strategies that ensureadaptability The turbulent marketplace means there is no certainty inlong-term demand forecasts

A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management

While the evolution of the consumer and IT were beginning to challengethe marketing status quo marketing focus shifted from managingindividual transactions to building consumer relationships RelationshipMarketing concentrated on retaining customers rather than acquiringthem simply because there were fewer lsquonewrsquo customers left to acquirecompetition was tougher and the correlation between profitability andlong-term customer relationships had been made

As a framework RM provided much useful learning about the benefitsof focusing on retention and developing relationships over time withcustomers and other stakeholders It introduced the idea that all of theserelationships are interdependent and it has encouraged managers tovisualize the marketing space as a web or network of interconnectedrelationships based on mutual interests However RM falls short ofenabling organizations to deal effectively with the New Consumer in theconsumption-led economy that is characterized by a dynamic complexity

In many organizations developments in IT and computationaltechnology were applied to the business of developing a CRM strategy It isnow widely accepted that the vast majority of expenditure on CRMsystems has failed to meet expectations This is because CRM is a poorlydefined concept and there is little agreement on how to implement itRecent research suggests that CRM should not be attempted by anorganization unless there is congruence between its marketing strategy ITstrategy and corporate culture The challenge for CRM systems is

54 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 54

delivering value into consumer markets characterized by high levels ofheterogeneity

NCM implies that the challenges thrown up by changing cultures ofconsumption and an increasingly competitive environment can only bemet through a step change in strategic thinking which in essence meansmoving the consumer up the corporate agenda The boardrsquos focus mustswitch from supply-chain management to managing the demand systemand that starts with the 4Cs (consumer needs and wants cost convenienceand communication) rather than the 4Ps (price product place andpromotion) Marketers who manage the critical interface between the newmarketplace and the organization are best placed to bring about thischange in focus NCM therefore offers an opportunity to overcome a decadeor so of debate about the contribution marketing makes to the success of abusiness by redefining marketingrsquos role and status in a way that also sendsit to new heights and into a new realm

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHAT DOES IT MEAN

NCM means adopting a value-centric orientation in the organization anddrawing on learning from the new science of complexity In this waymarketing can be conceptualized as a business discipline that enables anorganic approach focused around key processes of value definition creationand delivery and one that combines an emphasis on people and process

Adopting Value-Centricity

As the practice of marketing has evolved in response to market conditionsthe underlying philosophy of a business in relation to the customers itserves has shifted (see Table 41) Transaction marketing was based on asales orientation with the aim of acquiring as many new customers as possible Profit was generated through increased sales volumeRelationship Marketing switched the emphasis to developing greaterprofitability through customer satisfaction underpinned by a retentionorientation The realities of the consumption-led economy demand thatthe focus of a business shift again to insight innovation and agility toachieve profitability based on having a value-centric orientation in thebusiness

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 55

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 55

Value-centricity generates revenue growth and improved profitabilitythrough a focus on the demand side of the business It means movingbeyond a relationship emphasis to one that has at its core the definitioncreation and delivery of value If an organization can meet the valueexpectations of the consumer then a long-term and profitable relationshipis more likely to follow The key is having value as the starting pointotherwise the relationship development strategy (and the CRM toolsperhaps used to deliver it) will not work as intended

In NCM value-centricity therefore replaces the focus on customerretention as the underlying orientation of a business Profitability isgenerated through delivering the value consumers want to buy into and theorganization wants to deliver that is value on the consumerrsquos terms asdemanded and maybe even dictated by them This value component marksthe process of exchange that takes place between the consumer and theorganization it is the lsquothingrsquo that the consumer gets in return for what theygive Organizations must learn how to operate in this consumer lsquospacersquo

In order to meet New Consumersrsquo expectations organizations need tofine-tune their understanding of the factors that create this value thosethat maintain it and equally those that destroy it Understanding thenature of the different value factors is also an opportunity to review thelsquophantomsrsquo that exist in every organization that is those features of a brandthat the organization believes add value but which are not rated at all byconsumers These are the lsquotaken for grantedrsquo elements that can beeliminated from the process resulting in cost savings for the organization

56 New Consumer Marketing

Table 41 The evolution of the marketing orientation

Focus Means End

Sales orientation Transactional marketing Profits through acquiring customers

Retention orientation Relationship Marketing Profits through customerand CRM satisfaction

Value orientation Demand system management Profits through insightinnovation agility

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 56

Applying Science

Organizational understanding of the make-up of value consumers areseeking has to be continuously updated This is because the newmarketplace is dynamically complex The Internet is perhaps the moststriking example of this Experts believe that the speed scope and scale ofmarket change will be driven by two laws relating to technology The firstwas described by Intel founder Gordon Moore who declared that every 18months chip density (and therefore computing power) would double whilecosts would remain unchanged The second law is attributed to RobertMetcalfe the founder of 3Com Corporation and inventor of EthernetWhat he describes as the experienced utility of belonging to an electronicnetwork increases exponentially with the number of users In other wordsthe more who join a network the more sense it makes for others to do thesame Those who choose not to join miss out in more ways than oneMeeting the challenges posed by cheaper computing power and anemphasis on networks are expected to characterize future developments inconsumer marketing strategy

To make a value-centric orientation a reality in this new marketplacerequires a shift in mindset about the way an organization is capable offunctioning It means moving from thinking linearly and mechanisticallyto thinking organically as this holds the key to consumer responsivenessLiving entities are more capable of adaptability the key requirement forsurvival in the new marketplace Marketing needs to adjust to these newrealities and become a systemic holistic and above all dynamicallycomplex activity

This view connects with the new science of complexity in whichinteraction is characterized as a near chaotic state Complexity science isabout searching for patterns among an abundance of seemingly randomphenomena in the universe and about establishing how order emergesfrom the apparent chaos To use an example down in the garden pond in spring a mass of froglets experiencing the growth of new legs and thedisappearance of a tail will emerge from the water in a cacophony ofsound and hop haphazardly on to dry land To an observer this mayappear a chaotic scene but the froglets are actually only demonstratingcomplex adaptive system behaviour based on principles of self-organization

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 57

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 57

Complexity science is aptly named and has spawned two major sub-strands of research chaos theory and complex adaptive systems (Gleick1987 Pascale 1990) It was advances in computational technology in the1960s that made the science possible led by the work of Edward Lorenz onchaos theory His contribution is based on research into weather systemsand left the idea that lsquosmall changes can produce large resultsrsquo in thepopular mind Edification in this field came later in James Gleickrsquos 1987best-seller Chaos Making a New Science although these ideas were nottransferred to the business arena The behaviour of complex adaptivesystems however offers more scope for parallels with the world ofcommerce These systems are found everywhere and comprise independentbut dynamically interacting agents that develop their optimumperformance by continually learning changing and adapting to theirenvironments However chaotic the process looks at any point it alwaysevolves to a state of creative order one famously described by NormanPackard as the lsquoedge of chaosrsquo

The appeal of complexity science to business theorists is that it providesa way of thinking about how the underlying processes and relationships ina company can be organized to enable the company to become as adaptiveand creative as possible in the face of continual change This convergence ofscience and business provides a rich seam to be mined And RichardPascale in his 1990 book Managing on the Edge is credited with leading theway here although other authors also advocate this emerging biologicalthesis Champions of this scientific analogy are not however suggestingthat commerce will start behaving as nature does but instead believe that itcan be helpful in finding a different way of looking at business issuesBusiness may be able to learn how to understand complexity and find a wayof responding dynamically to change

Breaking out of Binary Thinking

NCM emerges at the confluence of these two streams of thinking ndash the newscience of complexity and the evolving discipline of marketing NCM istherefore different from the prevailing marketing paradigm It is abusiness discipline that enables the organization to master the increasinglydynamic and complex process of going to market in a systemic and holisticway It provides managers with a means of identifying and mobilizing

58 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 58

people and processes to help them become as adaptive and creative aspossible against the background of a complex marketing environment

A systemic approach to managing the dynamic complexity of the newmarketplace enables organizations to break out of the binary thinking thathas seen businesses swing between a singular emphasis on process or onpeople Marketing thinking has been heavily influenced by themechanistic models that emerged in the era of the production-driveneconomy These reductionist approaches are epitomized by the 1936 silentmovie Modern Times starring Charlie Chaplin Behind the slapstick and thesentiment in this film the little tramp finds himself at odds with societyand fights to hold onto the remnants of his tattered dignity andindividuality It is a pointed spoof of the dehumanization of man in anindustrialized society It derides mechanization as we see Charlie on theassembly line tightening nuts at breakneck speed ndash the perfect cog in awheel of misfortune Eventually a nervous breakdown forces him to leavethe factory but he cannot stop tightening nuts even when there are none totighten

Frederick Taylor and his book The Principles of Scientific Management aremost closely associated with these approaches to management (Taylor1967) His ideas influenced generations of business theorists from HenryFord and his mass production of the Model T-Ford automobile through toadvocates of more recent marketing trends (including the qualitymovement benchmarking BPR McDonaldization and lean production)right up to the current flirtation with Six Sigma (an approach that focuseson minimizing production errors) At the heart of these developments is abelief that there is only one right way to complete a task and that a businessshould be driven by efficiency based on the standardization of processes

In between these emphases on process the management pendulum hasswung back to a stress on people to achieve business success In the 1950sDouglas McGregor identified two contrasting styles of managementcommand-and-control and self-management which he termed Theory Xand Theory Y (McGregor 1960) He advocated a more participativeapproach and influenced many theorists who followed him among themCharles Handy (1989 1994 1997) These humanist approaches tomanagement found their expression in the concept of empowermentVolvo was among the first to implement them replacing individual carworkers with teams of workers who were given decision-making roles in

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 59

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 59

the business This must have been enough of a change to make Henry Fordturn in his grave

NCM encourages the synergy of both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo combined bytaking a systemic and holistic approach to marketing This way of thinkingoffers an opportunity to identify the key underlying processes andrelationships that help an organization function organically enabling it toadapt create and respond appropriately to the changing marketingenvironment

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHO IS INVOLVED

New Consumer Marketing has come about as result of the thinking of aneclectic body of managers consultants and academics These individuals aredrawn from a number of different spheres These spheres include thedevelopment of networks and network thinking where Tim Berners-Leeinventor of the World Wide Web Bill Gates whose company Microsofttouches all our lives Nicholas Negroponte founder-director of MITrsquos MediaLab Don Tapscott management consultant and John Seely Brown chiefscientist at Xerox PARC have made significant contributions (Berners-Leeand Fischetti 1999 Gates and Hemingway 1999 Negroponte 1995Tapscott 1996 1998 Tapscott et al 2000 Brown and Duguid 2000)

Other ideas have come from insights emanating from work that drawsmanagement closer to the world of the living sciences Stanford professorRichard Pascale for example sets out to draw a new management modelbased on complex living systems in Surfing the Edge of Chaos (Pascale et al2000) while Arie de Geus former head of planning at Shell originated theconcept of the learning organization and presents a gardenerrsquos organic viewof managing business in The Living Company (Geus 1999)

Two further strands of thought have come from academia where firstwork on interpreting contemporary consumer behaviour has thrown lighton the New Consumer1 and second there is a growing body of research andwork that highlights value as the new key driver of strategy2

Finally there are managers and consultants who are simply doing it orpreaching it in some form or another Many of these individuals and thecompanies they work for are mentioned or become the focus of short casestudies in the following chapters What starts to distinguish thosepractising NCM is that they share a common vision of a virtual compass

60 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 60

giving direction as to how best to manage the process of marketing to NewConsumers Unlike a traditional compass where the needle always settles ondue North the New Consumer marketing compass uses lsquovaluersquo as a referencepoint This guides thinking in managing the processes of value definitioncreation and delivery ensuring that the organization produces the value thatconsumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

New Consumer Marketing has important implications for consumermarketing It introduces a new approach and a new way of doing it NCMgoes beyond the management of the marketing mix and concerns itselfwith major business issues relating to the organizationrsquos positioning in themarketplace and the consumers it seeks to serve determining how andwhere it competes These issues are of a company-wide and high-levelnature that will impact the business in the long run How well anorganization masters NCM has significant consequences for its futureprofitability Mastery of NCM is dependent on having a framework inplace to enable the organization to describe and position its marketingstrategy This is considered in Chapter 5

SUMMARY POINTS

bull New Consumer Marketing (NCM) is a response to the arrival of theNew Consumer the development of the interactive marketplace andineffective consumption management

bull NCM is a business discipline whose key objective is creatingsustainable competitive advantage through superior processes of valuedefinition value creation and value delivery It demands a change instrategic thinking that moves the consumer up the corporate agenda

bull NCM draws on thinking from the new science of complexityOrganizations need to develop adaptability to survive in the newdynamic marketplace The key is achieving consumer responsivenessthrough insight innovation and organizational agility

bull NCM means rethinking marketing as a living demand system that hasat its core a value-centric orientation

Implications for Consumer Marketing 61

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 61

bull Value is defined as value on the consumerrsquos terms it is the lsquothingrsquo thatconsumers get in return for what they give Brand owners and retailersmust learn how to operate in this customer lsquospacersquo

62 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 62

A New Consumer Marketing model conceptualizes New ConsumerMarketing practice

No management learning is complete without the development of a modelor two Models help in conveying complex ideas but are more than simplevisual aids Business models normally fall into one of two types operationalor conceptual Operational business models offer a way of linking inputsand outputs within the managerial context to improve performance basedon empirical evidence Conceptual business models on the other handprecede this stage of development and assist in making sense of a large bodyof scholarly knowledge and management insight The New ConsumerMarketing model presented in this book is of the conceptual type Itrepresents a collection of assertions that identify important variables andspecifies how they are interrelated and why As such it provides a usefultool for marketers to formulate the way forward

TO RECAP

Chapter 1 established that businesses today are operating in a time ofradical transition the certainties of the production-driven economy havebeen replaced by the uncertainties of the consumption-led economyConsumption and the servicing of consumption now form the centralmotor of contemporary society The tools and techniques of marketingdeveloped mainly in the production-driven era are no longer applicable inthe marketplace of the New Consumer Furthermore marketingrsquoscontribution to business is unclear

Relationship Marketing (RM) was a strategic response by producerswho found themselves operating in mature markets where greater

A Model of New Consumer 5Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 63

profitability was shown to come from developing long-term relationshipswith customers RM theory shifted marketing focus from customeracquisition to customer retention While RM usefully highlighted theimportance of building relationships with customers consumers and otherstakeholders it fell short of enabling organizations to deal effectively withthe New Consumer in a consumption-led economy The implementationof RM strategies through CRM systems has also failed to meetexpectations leaving many marketers and non-marketers unclear aboutwhether they should be focusing on people or process

Chapter 2 showed that consumption management today is about thesatisfaction of consumersrsquo wants and desires rather than solely thefulfilment of their needs A wide range of organizations is recognizing thatconsumers not products drive the process of consumption and thereforethe consumer should be the starting point for developing strategies tomanage consumption In other words consumer marketers should basetheir activities on the 4Cs rather than the 4Ps

The chapter also introduced New Consumersrsquo characteristic attitudes totime their fragmented lifestyles and their motivating desire forexperiences New Consumers challenge current marketing thinking andpractice because they are marketing literate highly demanding and IT enabled In effect the lsquomakendashsellrsquo model of the old production-driven economy has given way to the lsquotellndashmakersquo model of the newconsumption-led economy To succeed now and in the future marketingstrategy must actively address the heterogeneity of these empoweredconsumers

Chapter 3 looked at the key concerns of brand owners and retailers andfound that despite differences in the challenges they face both are seekingsimilar solutions that focus on innovation The impact of globalization iscausing brand owners to rationalize their product portfolios and toquestion the wisdom of keeping manufacturing in-house Should theylsquoown and operatersquo or lsquoinnovate and coordinatersquo Price is a key issue asretailers consolidate and continue to exert downward pressure on pricesRetailers for their part are suffering a decline in share of GDP matched bya decline in consumer loyalty They are increasingly choosing to tradeacross multiple locations formats channels and countries Their partialsolution to satisfying New Consumers ndash micro-retailing ndash is leading to thecreation of narrower and deeper retail offerings

64 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 64

In Chapter 4 New Consumer Marketing was positioned as a response tothe challenges thrown up by changes in consumer culture and the widercompetitive environment It has emerged at the point where the evolutionof consumer marketing meets with the new science of complexity NewConsumer Marketing places the consumer at the centre of the consumermarketing process and works to ensure that the consumerrsquos perception ofvalue is the yardstick of success But this emergent business disciplinediffers from traditional marketing approaches in that it is about managingconsumer demand in an organic manner rather than managing consumersupply in a mechanistic fashion

KEY CHALLENGES FACING NEW CONSUMER MARKETING

The key challenges facing consumer marketers have been thrown up by thetectonic change that has impacted the macro-marketing environment Inthe shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economyconventional approaches to consumer marketing are not succeeding inenabling organizations to master the dynamic complexity of the newmarketplace These key challenges can be summarized as the need to

bull address the concerns of brand owners and retailersbull embrace the New Consumerbull help organizations develop real consumer responsivenessbull lift marketing out of its crisis

Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

Brand owners are facing a period of significant change as a result ofchanging consumer demand This combined with consolidation amongtheir customer base has put them under increased pressure to satisfy thesechanging needs While they would like to be focusing resources oninnovation and new product development instead they have no choice butto ruthlessly attack their cost base in order to meet retailersrsquo price demandsLow-cost production and distribution become the minimum requirementsfor meeting these demands and staying in the game competitiveadvantage is found elsewhere

Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing 65

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 65

Retailers face their own challenges driven by the declining proportionof GDP now attributed to retail spending As the consumer base becomesmore autonomous and diverse the lsquoone size fits allrsquo approach to developingretail concepts is no longer appropriate Both brand owners and retailersare looking to enrich and expand the strategic options open to them Theyneed to adopt a value-centric orientation and an approach to marketingthat enables adaptability and creativity This will empower manufacturersto manoeuvre within the relationship and work towards deliveringdemand-led profit growth while for retailers it will enable them toprofitably master the point of confluence where societal and economicchanges and changes in consumer culture are being played out

Embracing the New Consumer

What is clear is that there is an urgent need for fresh thinking in consumermarketing to find different ways of managing the realities of the newmarketplace The management of consumption now the driving force inthe economy needs to be rethought in light of the New ConsumerSophisticated and demanding at large in an interactive rather than a staticmarketplace the New Consumer creates new challenges for organizationswhich find the conventional tools of strategy making and tactical solutionsdeveloped in the mechanistic age of marketing of little help

Success or failure will ultimately depend on their abilities to understandconsumer behaviour in a time of continuous economic social andtechnological change and at the same time to manage the organizationrsquosresponse However developing understanding is becoming more difficult asthe approach of the production-driven era which characterized consumersby using basic demographics no longer gets us close enough to reallycomprehending buying motivations The predictive power of thesetraditional categories has been eroded and segmentation analyses that breakbuyers into simple caricatures of five or six types for entire markets oftencreate more barriers to effectively connecting with them than they facilitate

Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness

Growth is a business imperative Organizations have learned that theylsquocannot shrink their way to greatnessrsquo Gary Hamel and CK Prahalad in

66 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 66

their book Competing for the Future (1994) came up with the term lsquocorporateanorexiarsquo to describe the state many organizations found themselves inafter the accountants had seized on concepts such as Business Process Re-engineering (BPR) and lean production (known as lsquoleannessrsquo1) andintroduced rationalization and downsizing programmes which left little toinvest in new growth An internally focused cost-cutting strategy deliversshort-term gains but does not address the issue of long-term growthBreaking out of the cost-cutting cycle requires a more far-reaching strategythat anticipates the broader issues that will influence future performance

Growth comes from the demand side of the business which means doingthe same thing better or doing something new To achieve thisorganizations need to connect better with consumers they need tounderstand how to deliver the value that consumers are seeking in acontinually adaptive and creative way For many supply-chain managementhas been the name of the game over recent years However in contrast tosupply-chain thinking New Consumer Marketing takes the consumer as thepoint of departure for the organization not the final destination In effect thelsquopipelinersquo is reversed and organizations become forced to see the deliverycreation and definition of their offering from the consumerrsquos point of viewNew Consumer Marketing goes beyond simply renaming this lsquodemandchain managementrsquo by advocating drawing on learning from the newsciences and conceptualizing marketing as a demand system

Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis

Criticism about the lack of clarity surrounding marketingrsquos contributionto a business has been a feature of reports and articles over recent years Thisis in part driven by the difficulties surrounding the measurement ofmarketing effectiveness but also by the fact that marketing is both equatedwith business unit strategy and located within the marketing mixWithout a clear emphasis as to its role marketing languishes in a lsquono manrsquoslandrsquo and is badly placed to provide strategic leadership

THE NEW CONSUMER MARKETING MODEL

The NCM model recognizes and tackles ndash on a conceptual level ndash theseoutstanding challenges It advocates that organizations embrace the New

The New Consumer Marketing Model 67

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 67

Consumer by adopting a value-centric orientation and refocus theirstructures on the three key processes of value definition creation anddelivery These make up a demand system The central component of avalue-centric strategy is value on the consumersrsquo terms as demanded ndash maybeeven dictated ndash by them This value component marks the process ofexchange that takes place between consumers and the organization it is thelsquothingrsquo that consumers get in return for what they give

A process is defined as an activity or group of activities that takes aninput adds value to it and provides an output to an internal or externalcustomer At the heart of each of these key processes is a core capability ndashinsight innovation and agility These are the capabilities that enable brandowners and retailers to become adaptable and able to offer real consumerresponsiveness

Adopting a process approach entails a different way of working to thatassociated with traditional vertical hierarchical structures of functionaldepartments These static structures act as a barrier to performance Infocusing on processes organizations take on a flatter horizontal structurethat enables them to be more responsive by speeding up decision-makingprocesses and encouraging cross-functional collaboration which helpsmaximize consumer value and operational cost-effectiveness With anemphasis on understanding consumers and their value preferences value-centric organizations draw key employees together in autonomousmultidisciplinary teams to focus resources around the main processesOften these teams are temporary enabling the organization to combineand recombine assets according to the nature of the opportunities thatarise These are firms that regard the organizational whole as greater thanthe sum of its parts However this does not mean that organizations cannotgrow big Tesco for example is one of a number of organizations that hassucceeded in building the virtues of smallness into a large organization

The NCM model adopts the principles of the new science to suggest anorganic approach to consumer marketing Where marketing is viewed as asystemic holistic and dynamically complex activity adaptability becomesan achievable goal In business systemic thinking offers a way ofidentifying the key underlying processes and relationships that help theorganization to adapt create and respond appropriately to the changingmarketing environment In this way organizations are able to break out ofthe binary thinking that has long constrained management theory and the

68 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 68

model encourages the synergy of both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo combined Inshort the static marketing function of the production-driven economybecomes a living demand system in the consumption-led economy

The NCM model lifts marketing out of its crisis in terms of presenting aconceptual guide for practitioners for generating and managing theexchange process under conditions of competition The NCM modelprovides a framework that enables an organization to describe and positionits marketing strategy In doing this it identifies the consumer segments itseeks to serve determining where and how it will compete Working at thelevel of competitive strategy substantiates NCM as a business discipline

Marketers are best placed to provide strategic leadership in themanagement of this critical interface between the organization and the newmarketplace They oversee the exchange process and the necessary alignmentof internal and external factors They are in the best position to understandand interpret emerging trends for the benefit of the organization

The New Consumer Marketing model is presented in Figure 51 and itshows quite clearly how consumer marketing can be conceptualized asconsisting of the three key processes underpinned by a value-centricorientation The model is organic in nature reflected in the use ofhoneycomb-shaped cells each of which has a nucleus

The honeycomb with its familiar six-sided shape provides a usefulmetaphor for explaining how marketing can be visualized as a livingdemand system The honey-bee is well known to us all This is a creaturethat is renowned for its productivity and the fact that it creates its ownvalue proposition in the form of honey Honey manufacture is a task sharedamong various types of bee and each contributes its own instinctiveexpertise The hive members work in harmony to ensure the survival of thecolony Of course this is just a metaphor and there are limits to how far itcan be taken but because it is dynamic iterative and flexible thehoneycomb offers an example of working where people and process arecombined in a continually productive system

The capabilities at the heart of each key process and the seven elementsthat make up the organizational DNA demonstrate the company-widehigh-level approach that is taken by the NCM model By offering a holisticapproach to managing the exchange process in a dynamic marketplace themodel aims to assist managers in developing and implementing successfulconsumer marketing strategies

The New Consumer Marketing Model 69

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 69

The first cell in the demand system is concerned with the process of valuedefinition that is the process of generating and identifying insight in orderto describe and demonstrate value Chapter 6 covers the traditional andnon-traditional ways of generating insight Segmentation then considershow insight is made actionable Finally the importance of re-evaluatingthe role and status of the insight generators within an organization isexplored

The next cell in the demand system is value creation Chapter 7 exploresthe process of creating value that results in a value proposition for a specificaudience Innovation forms the nucleus of this cell and the strategicsignificance of this is covered Other elements in the process include newproduct development branding positioning and pricing Branding isportrayed as the consumerrsquos experience of value and the implications ofthis are discussed through a number of cases

The third key process in a demand system is value delivery Chapter 8discusses how value is communicated and conveyed by an organization to a

70 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

13

13

13 $

Figure 51 The New Consumer Marketing model

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 70

specific audience Media and channels are explored alongside the roles ofservice technology integration and supply-chain management Thewatchword here is organizational agility

Finally Chapter 9 describes the seven elements of the organizationallsquoDNArsquo that makes a demand system viable This chapter describes how thecells of the living system are managed through an exploration of the natureand interrelationships of intuition culture and structure leadershipvision and values employees knowledge management planning andmeasurement These are the elements that instruct and inform the threecells of the living demand system about how to optimize performance andensure competitive survival

The New Consumer Marketing Model 71

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 71

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 72

The process of defining value from the consumerrsquos perspective

Defining value = generating and identifying insight in order to describeand demonstrate value specifically

Watchword = insight

In the production-driven era marketing was informed by a seller-centricorientation In todayrsquos consumption-led economy New Consumers aremore demanding and sophisticated and they inhabit an interactivemarketplace Marketing in this business environment requires a differentorientation New Consumer Marketing is founded on a value-centricphilosophy that focuses on defining creating and delivering the value thatconsumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver Themutuality of the benefits gained by both parties is recognized and asymbiotic relationship is established

Managing this relationship between organization and New Consumerrequires an alternative approach to the command-and-control practices ofthe production-driven era Mechanistic models are no longer appropriateand more organic models are being developed such as the New ConsumerMarketing model presented in this book

Value definition the first cell in the New Consumer Marketing modelis concerned with the process of defining the value consumers are seekingInsight forms the cellrsquos nucleus Insight is described as lsquothe power of seeinginto and understanding things imaginative penetration practicalknowledge and awarenessrsquo It enables the organization to begin the processof connecting with New Consumers in a way that will deliver sustainablecompetitive advantage

Value Definition 6

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 73

In generating knowledge about New Consumers many organizationsclaim that the traditional tools and techniques of market research do notseem to be working as well as they did in former times and marketers are looking to broaden the range they use The aim is to get underneath the skin of consumers in a way that provides insight into theirunarticulated needs and desires To achieve this organizations areincreasingly adopting a bricolage approach in which investigative andinterpretative market research methods drawn from different disciplinesare pieced together In best-practice organizations the insight generated isapplied to the consumer base through the process of segmentation in orderto identify the value that is required by the organizationrsquos most promisingprospects

THE ROLE OF INSIGHT IN VALUE DEFINITION

Although insight is derived from the obvious it is not the same as factInsight is the capacity to penetrate the human condition and see hiddentruths For example it is a fact that snowboarding is a sport but it is aninsight that snowboarders are the only sportsmen and women who feeltreated like outcasts on the slopes Where an insight is turned into acompelling marketing idea it can work to create a powerful bond betweenthe consumer and the brand Brands of clothing for snowboarders thatpromote the idea of belonging to a rebellious tribe have been highlysuccessful for example

Insight provides the means for defining value from the consumerrsquosperspective To interpret consumer insight in a way that is meaningfulorganizations need to understand what are the component factors thatconstitute value These factors will serve one of three purposes for theconsumer they will enhance value maintain value or destroy value Thisvalue concept is illustrated in Figure 61

Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value

Identifying these value-influencing factors and the way in which theyinterrelate is the fundamental aim of all insight-generation activitiesFactors that create or enhance value for the consumer are those that aremould-breaking or have never before been offered in the marketplace

74 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 74

They are the key discriminating factors that set the organization apart fromcompetitors in the eyes of consumers Occasionally these value-enhancersmay be lsquoadoptedrsquo by consumers and become lsquotalking pointsrsquo creating greatword-of-mouth marketing A good example of this is Krispy KremeDoughnuts

Krispy Kreme DoughnutsKrispy Kreme Doughnuts is one of the top five fastest-growing businesses inthe quick-service restaurant sector in North America with plans for expansioninto Europe Krispy Kreme aficionados swear by the companyrsquos hot OriginalGlazed doughnuts which are lsquomanufacturedrsquo before the customerrsquos eyes inthe Doughnut Theater (a visible conveyor belt-based operation) The KrispyKreme Doughnut experience receives popular acclaim (including thatcontributed by cartoon character Homer Simpson who is famous for hislsquoMmm donuts helliprsquo phrase) This strong word-of-mouth marketing has played asignificant role in building consumer awareness of the brand In Canada forinstance the impulse to purchase fresh hot Krispy Kreme doughnuts is sostrong that according to the Canadian marketing director people will driveon average 14 miles to reach a Krispy Kreme store

The Role of Insight in Value Definition 75

V

V

V

C

I

-

T

Figure 61 The value concept

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 75

Companies offering lsquovalue-enhancersrsquo will build market share quicklyrearranging the competitive forces in the marketplace as they do so Forexample the Woolwich Building Society has seen its business improve atthe expense of rivals as a direct consequence of introducing a new kind ofaccount ndash the Openplan Account Openplan creates value for customers byplacing customers in control of their money and enabling them to managetheir complex financial matters easily through using the one account Itallows customers to personalize the names of their various savings lsquopotsrsquoand to tell the Woolwich when to move funds into higher-interestaccounts For consumers Openplan was a welcome change from thetraditional way of banking where customers would be told how theirmoney was being handled and has now been adopted by the Barclays groupof the Woolwich Building Society

Factors that maintain value are the lsquohygienersquo factors or the core featuresand attributes that all competitors must offer to be considered players inthe marketplace These lsquovalue-maintainersrsquo work in combination with thelsquovalue-enhancersrsquo to affirm value with consumers They should be subject

76 Value Definition

Figure 62 Krispy Kreme Doughnuts are a talking point

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 76

to regular sense checking to ensure that they continue to perform thissupportive role It may be the case that one or more of these value-maintaining factors has the potential to be developed into a value-enhancing factor Alternatively some of these factors may have to bedropped from the offering if they show signs of actually reducing itsconsumer value

The third category of factors that make up the consumerrsquos concept ofvalue encompasses those that diminish and destroy value These are thelsquoturn-offsrsquo for consumers Once identified these lsquovalue-destroyersrsquo shouldbe eliminated from the offering but not before the company has anunderstanding of why they have a destructive influence Their significancecan be overlooked where there is not a dynamic approach to generatinginsight Laura Ashleyrsquos experience provides a useful example

Laura AshleyIn the early 1990s Laura Ashley the fashions and furnishings retail chainresearched the behaviour of its own shoppers and noted that if shoppersmade a purchase of curtains particularly made-to-measure curtains from thestore they had a higher propensity to go on to buy matching wallpaper andother home furnishing items as well A pound300 purchase could easily becomethe first of a series of transactions with a combined value of several thousandpounds The purchase of curtains was in effect a trigger to other salesHowever the study revealed that customers were increasingly put off frompurchasing curtains when expert staff were not available This occurred mostoften on Saturdays when the stores used part-time relatively inexperiencedstaff Clearly ordering made-to-measure curtains involves some fairlycomplicated calculations and there is a wide margin for error Customerswould only place an order with someone they believed was competentenough to check their own calculations and order the curtains correctly OnceLaura Ashley realized the impact of its staffing policy the company made thenecessary changes and this resulted in higher levels of customer satisfactionand greater sales of curtains By removing this particular value-destroyer thecompany was able to uphold its customersrsquo value perceptions of the brand

Source H Peck lsquoRelationship Marketing Lessons from Laura Ashleyrsquo casestudy Cranfield School of Management 1995

In some cases organizations have a misperception themselves about thefactors that create value spuriously believing that certain factors add valuewhen in fact they simply maintain or even destroy it These are thelsquophantom factorsrsquo in the value exchange and can often take on sacred status

The Role of Insight in Value Definition 77

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 77

within a business For example the Ford Motor Company believed for along time that it was necessary to include a spare wheel as part of a new caroffering However insight generated by its small car product strategyteam into the requirements of StreetKa buyers showed that a spare wheelwas not important in the purchase decision With this knowledge themisgivings of Ford engineers were overcome and the company went on tosuccessfully launch a model without a spare wheel Drivers are insteadsupplied with a canister of foam which will enable them to fix a puncturesufficiently well to drive to the nearest garage for repair or replacement

Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors

Having identified the components of value that factor in the consumerrsquosperception of value the organization then needs to understand exactlywhat meaning they have for consumers Consumers typically describe thesevalue factors in terms of tangible or intangible features The task formarketers is to delve deeper and question why consumers consider thesefeatures to be important The answers will lie in the benefits the featuresdeliver and the way in which some of these benefits in turn work at alsquohigher levelrsquo in satisfying consumersrsquo personal values Consumer researchinto how Nike trainers are purchased showed that while the inclusion ofthe air sole was a straightforward physical feature of the shoe manyconsumers considered it to be a value-enhancer Consumers felt that thecushioning effect of the sole would provide greater comfort and protectionon the sports ground and this in turn would enable them to play sportbetter The air sole thus satisfied personal values associated with a sense ofwell-being and keeping fit In this way product features benefits andpersonal values become interlinked in the consumerrsquos mind This is showngraphically in Figure 63

Mapping consumer perceptions of products in this way demonstrateswhy the various components of value are important It is a technique thatcan be used to understand how consumers perceive differences betweenproducts revealing to the organization the competitive set in which itoperates Mapping the component factors of value for consumers is basedon a well-established research approach known as meansndashend theory1 Thetheory suggests that consumers make the value exchange as a means ofachieving something else This lsquosomething elsersquo may be about product

78 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 78

benefits or it may be about the satisfaction of personal values Uncoveringthese linkages is key to creating positioning communicating anddelivering the value offer as explained in the next chapters

Insight then enables the organization to define value from theconsumerrsquos perspective It provides a means of identifying underlyingsources of buyer motivation Current thinking as to how this process ofgenerating insight should be undertaken is in a state of flux as traditionalmarket research is being augmented with a range of alternative practices

THE ROLE OF TRADITIONAL MARKET RESEARCH INVALUE DEFINITION

In seeking to get closer to New Consumers marketing managers todayhave an expanding box of tools and techniques at their disposal Thesegenerally fall into one of two categories traditional market research andnon-traditional approaches to market sensing The former comprisesestablished practices which are being updated by new thinking fromvarious disciplines The latter includes a range of approaches from old-fashioned reliance on front-line staff to the contemporary use of IT

As the staple method of insight generation market research aims toanswer fundamental questions about what makes consumers lsquotickrsquo so thatmanagers can refine existing marketing practice Market research emergedas a formalized business process in the latter part of the last centuryalthough the principles it encapsulates go back much further The primeobjective of the modern survey a standard tool of market research is to

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 79

Figure 63 Linking features benefits and personal values

Niketrainers

lsquoGoodhealthrsquo

lsquoEnhancedperformancersquo

lsquoSole with airpocketsrsquo

lsquoSupportfor footrsquo

Features Benefits Personalvalues

Deliver Satisfy

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 79

recapture the lsquodialoguersquo that took place between buyer and seller in the pre-industrial age where the local market or village shop dominated as theplace of buyerndashseller interactions

Formalized market research was first undertaken by manufacturers inthe fast moving consumer goods (fmcg) sector It enabled companies togain a structured and reliable view of the marketplace which they couldthen use to improve their competitiveness They studied markets byborrowing the statistical methods and principles developed by socialscientists to understand and quantify human behaviour They used these incombination with the sampling methods they already had in place toensure quality control on their production lines Some of the earliest bookson the subject of market research were in fact published by leading brandowners such as Cadbury and Shell These books were used as internaltraining manuals in the days before comprehensive reference texts wereavailable The tools and techniques developed then still form the staple ofmost market research plans today What is changing is the mix oftechniques used qualitative approaches are slowly gaining ground at theexpense of quantitative approaches

Using Quantitative Research

Generating insight means focusing largely on answering the lsquowhyrsquoquestion lsquowhy do people dothinkbuy what they dothinkbuyrsquo Data onlsquowho what where when and how manyrsquo on the other hand providesuseful information on context To generate this data organizations usuallyfall back on the use of quantitative surveys These routinely involve largenumbers of respondents who may be chosen on a quota basis to create astatistically representative selection of the larger population Respondentsare all asked the same questions in highly structured interviews to establishevidence of market preferences and trends Quantitative surveys can beconducted on an ad hoc or ongoing basis ndash the latter are often referred to aspanel surveys Ad hoc surveys can provide insight into a potential solutionto a specific business issue and may be repeated on lsquofreshrsquo groups ofrespondents at regular intervals For example Wallrsquos Ice Cream publishesan annual survey on the topic of childrenrsquos pocket money Panel surveys onthe other hand use the same set of respondents to provide regular (weeklyor monthly) feedback on grocery purchases for example Data is collected

80 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 80

in four main ways by post by telephone in face-to-face interviews andincreasingly via web-based surveys

While many marketing managers profess a preference for quantitativesurveys simply because they contain lsquohard numbersrsquo based on the science ofstatistics and sampling theory the pivotal issue is the robustness of thedata evidence David Smith and Jonathon Fletcher (2001) suggest there areseven questions to be answered before reassurance can be given

bull Was the design free of flawsbull Was the sample representativebull Did the questionnaire lsquoworkrsquobull Was the process free of interviewer biasbull Were there any data preparation errorsbull Were there any presentation andor reporting errorsbull Was the interpretation free of flaws

This traditional quantitative approach to research essentially deals withaverages it tells marketers what an average consumer wants But findingaverage consumers is difficult As is often quoted some consumers like icedtea others like hot tea but very few express a liking for lukewarm tea Thispractice of looking for lsquoaveragesrsquo is typical of an aggregate way of thinkingand as has been made clear so far in this book markets today aredisaggregated and characterized by high levels of heterogeneity The NewConsumer cannot be described as lsquoaveragersquo To generate meaningfulinsight into consumer needs and preferences researchers are turning to agreater use of qualitative approaches

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 81

Small numbers

Exploratorydiagnostic

Quota samples

More flexible

More costly per respondent

Large numbers

Confirmatorydefinitive

Representative samples

Less flexible

Less costly per respondent

Figure 64 Qualitative versus quantitative research

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 81

Using Qualitative Research

In seeking to answer the lsquowhyrsquo question researchers increasingly draw onan eclectic pot-pourri of qualitative techniques The roots of qualitativeresearch can be traced to the 1960s the height of the production-drivenera when marketers began to demand deeper insights into the purchasingbehaviour of consumers and motivational research an approach developedby Ernest Dichter gave birth to contemporary qualitative methods ofenquiry In effect the consumer was lsquoput on the couchrsquo and the researcherrsquosinterpretations of attitudes and behaviour were drawn from the fields ofpsychology and psychoanalysis Projective questioning (lsquoif this brand werean animal what kind of animal would it bersquo) and other techniques adaptedfrom these disciplines became the favoured tools for mainstreamqualitative researchers Over the next two decades researchers from otherdisciplines such as sociology and social anthropology added theircontributions introducing notions of humankind as social animals and asproducts of their culture

Today traditional qualitative research commonly features the use offocus groups and in-depth interviews These methods involve askingcomparatively small samples of respondents questions about what they doand think and listening to and interpreting the response The output ofqualitative research is exploratory or diagnostic in nature respondents arenot meant to be representative of the larger population but are intended toreflect the profile of known or desired consumers (Non-consumers are alsooften consulted for their independent input) The aim is to generateunderstanding of the things that bind groups of consumers together

Sadly the impressionistic and non-confirmatory nature of qualitativeresearch has received bad press over recent years to an extent where focusgroups have become demonized in some quarters of the national mediaSmall-sample statistical theory has never been robust enough to convincemany managers that the evidence produced by 36 or 48 people is asaccurate as the aggregated output of 2000 survey respondents There isoften confusion over the way in which the evidence should be used to shapethe strategy of an organization However the notion that it is acceptable towork with limited numbers of respondents is an accepted method in thesocial sciences Grounded Theory2 as this concept is known states thatresearchers should stop collecting fresh information when they get to a

82 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 82

point where it ceases to add anything to the conceptual understanding ofthe issue under investigation (usually after conducting a limited number ofinterviews)

These traditional approaches to quantitative and qualitative research arebased on an assumption that consumers can ndash and are willing to ndash articulatetheir thoughts beliefs feelings and behaviours Organizations wanting tomake breakthrough developments are rather more concerned withunderstanding latent unarticulated consumer wants and desires To meetthis demand on the part of organizations researchers have added to thetoolbox more lsquoin sitursquo investigative methods such as discourse semioticand ethnographic analyses These provide a deeper understanding of themeaning of value factors to consumers bringing organizations closer to thelsquoAharsquo moment when insight becomes obvious

Discourse Analysis

Discourse analysis is a market research technique that looks for patterns inpeoplersquos language such as the metaphors or figures of speech they use tocommunicate about the world around them It can also mean undertakinga review of individual words to gain a deep understanding of whatconsumers mean when they say something Discourse analysis demands adetailed examination of every utterance including those that aretraditionally discarded in the process of analysis This would include howrespondents use what linguists refer to as lsquodiscourse markersrsquo (non-semantic syntactically empty words such as lsquolikersquo lsquoumrsquo lsquoerrsquo lsquokind of rsquo lsquosortof rsquo lsquoyou knowrsquo in the English language) as they are often carriers of culturalmeaning Insight into how consumers use language can help marketersconnect more effectively with consumers as they can use consumersrsquo ownlanguage in creating and delivering value One of the most outstandingexamples of a business that was built on an insightful understanding ofconsumersrsquo language is the most successful pre-school televisionprogramme ever produced ndash Teletubbies

TeletubbiesTeletubbies was developed by Anne Wood and Andrew Davenport forRagdoll Productions (UK) Ltd Anne Woodrsquos worth today is estimated at pound150 million largely due to the success of the fictional made-for-televisioncharacters The success of the original idea can be traced to a combination ofWoodrsquos ideas and business acumen and Davenportrsquos expertise in speech

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 83

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 83

sciences and his understanding of the world of young children The brightlycoloured characters soon established themselves as firm favourites amongpre-school children and their parents with their empathetic use of the pre-schoolerrsquos language and their childlike wonder at the world around them

Semiotics Analysis

Another set of techniques for generating insight draws on the discipline ofsemiotics This is the science of decoding cultural signs which is used byresearchers to get into consumersrsquo subconscious and to predict whereconsumer trends are heading It is based on a belief that we are all shaped byour culture (and not the other way round) and that goods are charged withcultural meaning Consumers use this meaning as a form of expression tosay something about themselves to develop and sustain their lifestylesand to create and sustain social change The role of the researcher is todecode the symbols as a way of understanding culture and what consumersare saying about themselves This kind of insight provides managers with ameans of understanding the role of brands within a culture both theorganizationrsquos own brands and competitive offerings The well-establisheddrinks brand Guinness has successfully employed semiotics analysis

84 Value Definition

Figure 65 The Teletubbies online

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 84

GuinnessGuinness UDV tasked Malcolm Evans and the Added Value agency withdeveloping a user-friendly marketing tool that could be used around the worldto gain insight into the competitive environment (Evans 2001) Usingsemiotics analysis Evans and his team created a tool kit that guidesmarketers in various local markets through the same process This enablesthem to map an understanding of the meaning of beer to consumers in eachof their markets and then to analyse and interpret the advertisements in orderto understand the advertising proposition Having decoded the marketGuinness executives can then work on refining the positioning of their brandsin that market

Ethnographic Analysis

A third approach to generating insight into consumersrsquo latent wants anddesires that is arousing a lot of interest is brand ethnography This is basedon a technique developed in the social sciences in the late nineteenth andearly twentieth centuries where researchers went overseas to researchtraditional lsquotribesrsquo and cultures The underlying philosophy ofethnographic analysis is that the closer the researcher can get to consumersrsquohabitats the greater the chance he or she has of understanding consumersrsquorelationships with other people or with the things that surround them It isbased on a central belief that the researcherrsquos study of consumer behaviouris most accurate and revealing when consumers are immersed in theirnatural environment

This approach to generating insight means taking an analytical view ofconsumers over a long period of time Longitudinal studies as they areknown are not common in marketing because of the high costs involvedand because research results are generally required sooner than anethnographic study can deliver them However some companies such asUnilever consider the investment worthwhile

UnileverUnilever used this ethnographic analysis to understand the opportunitiesarising from the growth of sales of white goods in developing countries Theresults of its year-long study identified broad areas of opportunity forexample the types of clothes bought and worn how clothes are treated andcared for and consumer expectations of clothes care and product benefitsAll of this was set within a cultural context The study also identified astructured framework of issues that the company had not previously been

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 85

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 85

aware of to do with attitudes and behaviours relating to the process of caringfor clothes This new knowledge presented an opportunity to focussubsequent research more closely on these issues with the aim ofuncovering some latent wants and desires that were not being satisfied Thislater research opened up new commercial opportunities for Unilever

Source Lynn McKay New Futures Consumer Scientist lsquoCreatingcommercial value from ethnographic insightsrsquo presented at the Generatingand Leveraging Consumer Insight Conference IQPC London March 2002

As with more standard approaches to qualitative research these threeanalytical methods ndash discourse semiotic and ethnographic analysis ndash arenot designed to be representative of the wider population of consumersbut are intended instead to generate insight that could never be uncoveredthrough focus groups in-depth interviews and quantitative surveysCritics suggest the techniques are very dependent on the interpretationalskills of the individual researcher can often appear to be using asledgehammer to crack a nut and tend to produce more data than isusefully required However these research techniques can revealframeworks for further consumer analysis leading to meaningfulunderstanding of the value consumers are seeking within a wider culturalcontext

Need-States Analysis

As the consumption-led economy becomes more of a reality fororganizations debate about how best to generate insight intoconsumerndashbrand relationships moves on apace In 1994 qualitativeresearch expert Wendy Gordon revived the concept of need-states toexplain the fact that there are more differences between the same consumermaking a brand choice on two different occasions than between twodifferent consumers choosing the same brand on the same occasion Peoplechoose brands to fit a particular context For example consumers maychoose to buy a cheaper bottle of supermarket own-label wine from thesupermarket to drink with a partner at home yet they will choose a moreexpensive shipperrsquos labelled wine to take as a gift when dining at a friendrsquoshouse Their choice of product is influenced by a variety of factorsincluding the meaning of each occasion the environment in which the

86 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 86

wine will be consumed and the other people involved This leads to theidea that a brand can be positioned against a need-state and througheffective brand communications activity can become the brand mostassociated with that need-state

Need-states analysis has at its core an understanding of how consumersmake sense of the world Consumers create a model of the world in theirminds which psychologists refer to as a lsquomental modelrsquo It is theconsumerrsquos representation of how something is or how something happensA brand can be thought of as a type of mental model and this subject isdiscussed further in the next chapter However the notion of mentalmodels is relevant here as the task of the researcher is one of uncoveringconsumersrsquo mental models of the world Thinking about consumerndashbrandrelationships in this way draws on learning from cognitive science thebranch of psychology that deals with how the mind works from theindividualrsquos perspective

Today Wendy Gordon firmly believes that the future of cognitivescience lies in the newly merged disciplines of neuroscience and cognitivepsychology known as neuro-psychology (Gordon 2001) This branch oflearning brings together an understanding of the science of the brain itsphysiology and functions as well as psychological theories For her thisemerging discipline offers the opportunity to truly get inside theconsumerrsquos mind She believes it holds the promise of a scientific basis forunderstanding how human beings create store recall and relate to brandsin everyday life

What is evident from this discussion of the role of traditional(quantitative and qualitative) market research in generating insight is thatorganizations cannot rely on only one of the techniques to deliver absoluteinsight The reality is that both quantitative and qualitative research offermeaningful insight and they work in complementary ways As Gordon saysin her book on qualitative research Goodthinking (1999) lsquoThe case forusing bricolage (a pieced together set of investigative and interpretativemethods drawn from different disciplines) has never been strongerrsquoApproaches to bricolage also draw on non-traditional market sensingtechniques and these are considered next

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 87

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 87

THE ROLE OF NON-TRADITIONAL MARKET SENSING INVALUE DEFINITION

While market research provides a stream of invaluable knowledge aboutconsumers it is increasingly augmented with information derived fromthe use of database systems and technology that enables front-line staff toprovide instant feedback on consumer behaviour This data works in asupplementary fashion providing the organization with the opportunityto develop a more complete understanding of consumer motivation Thisunderstanding is vital for constructing successful value propositions

Using Database Systems

In the 1970s traditional market research methods were the only real sourceof consumer insight By the 1990s marketers were becoming spoilt forchoice as data flowed in ever greater quantities from scanners loyaltyschemes satisfaction surveys service requests account information and soon The challenge facing organizations today is how to fuse data inmeaningful ways so that a holistic or 360-degree picture of consumers iscreated This means understanding how and in what ways an individualconsumer interacts with an organization over time It entails building acorporate memory of the consumer so that the call centre agent is awarethat the customer on the telephone wrote to the companyrsquos head office twomonths earlier and that a subsequent home visit from a member of thecustomer services team went well Achieving a corporate memory meansadopting the philosophy that every encounter with consumers is a mutuallearning experience If they do this organizations can better managerelationships and in turn customer profitability

Customer databases built up through loyalty card schemes enableorganizations to turn consumer information into knowledge and totransform that knowledge into actionable propositions that provideconsumer benefits These benefits strengthen the consumerrsquos bond with the company From the companyrsquos point of view a loyalty scheme thatsimply rewards the consumer but ignores the vital flow of informationprovided by each transaction is a sales promotion scheme however large it might be Loyalty card information when mined effectively can reveal to the company the distinct and different groups of consumers it

88 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 88

serves In Tescorsquos case loyalty card data is central to the way in which thebusiness is run

Tesco ClubcardTesco Clubcard was introduced in February 1995 and today has over 10 million active members Although its start-up costs were high (judged byanalysts to be in the region of pound10 million in addition to the 1 discount onsales estimated at pound60 million) take-up of the loyalty card was significantWithin one month of its launch over 5 million people had joined the schemeand Tesco recorded a 7 increase in like-for-like sales This propelled Tescoto overtake Sainsburyrsquos as Britainrsquos leading retailer of packaged goods

Over the years Tesco has learned how to manage Clubcard data formaximum strategic effect The company admits to having been overwhelmedinitially at the deluge of data generated by the scheme Clubcard hadeffectively opened up a dialogue with members and hundreds of letters andup to 30000 phone calls a week had to be dealt with Specialist datamanagement consultants were brought in to manage the communicationprocess until Tescorsquos own in-house team had built up the necessaryexpertise In fact data-mining skills are so strongly valued at Tesco that thedata analysis firm engaged to analyse Clubcard data is now a subsidiary ofTesco

David Reid Tescorsquos deputy chairman has claimed that lsquoItrsquos very easy tomalign loyalty cards People are always rubbishing them because of theexpense But if you took our loyalty cards away from us it would be like flyingblind They tell us how to attract customers how secondary customersbehave how specific customers react to specific promotions how you caninfluence competitorsrsquo openings how you can spot new trends how you canconvert customersrsquo (Child 2002)

Source lsquoTesco Clubcard Foreverrsquo case study H Peck Cranfield School ofManagement 2002

Using CRM Systems

The introduction of Tesco Clubcard demonstrates that effective customerrelationship management (CRM) systems are not just about automating orspeeding up operations They are also about using data and information to intelligently manage customer relationships Tesco and otherorganizations have learned how to benefit from collecting and mining dataas well as using other techniques such as analytic profiling segmentationand predictive analyses to identify individuals and uncover consumer

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 89

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 89

preferences and propensities (so that optimal profitability can be attained)However despite the extent of the analysis provided by a CRM system it isonly market research that can provide a qualitative perspective MajorCRM system vendors such as Siebel Systems Oracle SAP and Peoplesoftare working on introducing analytical tools to enable their clientcompanies to understand their customers better in this way

The problem in practice is that mechanisms for generating bothquantitative and qualitative customer understanding have not been a partof the historical development of CRM systems This is because thedevelopment of databases to hold behavioural customer data has usuallybeen managed in organizations as a parallel process to that of marketresearch This way of operating evolved during the production-driven eraIn the new marketplace of the consumption-led economy insightgeneration is looked upon as a total process one that encompasses bothtraditional and non-traditional market sensing processes What isimportant is using consumer insight to inform strategic decisions thatimpact value creation and delivery

It should also be noted that fusing data from multiple sources raisesethical as well as technological issues These issues arise because data thathas been gathered anonymously for use in attitudinal and lifestyle surveyscan now be fused together with loyalty card data that has been collectedtogether with full personal details In the process of fusion it becomespossible to identify those individuals who gave their data anonymouslyThis makes them vulnerable to marketing approaches by companies andraises an ethical dilemma for the market researcher who would have givenan assurance to an individual respondent that the data would be handledconfidentially implying any personal details would not be used by theorganization Overall the market research industry has been careful intreading on what they perceive to be a potential landmine of personalprivacy This is acting as a brake on industry efforts to leverage multipleforms of data to generate total consumer insight

To deal with ethical issues professional codes of conduct relating to thepractice of market research were first established in the early 1960s inEurope by ESOMAR (a European association of market researchprofessionals) in association with the International Chambers ofCommerce and in the UK by the Market Research Society The keyprinciple in both sets of standards and in other codes of research practice

90 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 90

worldwide is consumer confidentiality The identities of surveyparticipants are not disclosed in analysis or reporting processes Theprotection of consumer confidentiality encourages respondents to providehonest responses about their attitudes and opinions It also serves to protectthem from unsolicited marketing approaches

In Europe today the professional bodies are working together with EUlegislators to find a way of regulating data protection The US and otherkey nations however have yet to enact any laws on data privacy therebycreating a potential minefield for global players

Using Front-line Staff

Finally insight can also be generated using a combination of front-linestaff and cutting-edge information technology Zara the Spanish fashioncompany that is rapidly expanding globally provides a useful example ofthe way in which insight generated on the shop floor can be used to createand deliver value for consumers in a seamless process Zararsquos strategy isbuilt on having a value-centric orientation in the business where insightprovides a continual flow of opportunity (Zara is also referred to later inChapter 8 and the management of employees including front-line staff iscovered in Chapter 9)

ZaraIn a sector where the average high-street retailer predicts trends often a yearor more in advance Zara can turn a trend around in a matter of days This ispartly because it has its own factories and also because of the emphasis itplaces on communication between the shop floor and the factory floor AsZara UKrsquos managing director Michael Shearwood points out lsquoWe donrsquot try topersuade customers to buy something we make We sell products that thecustomer wants to buyrsquo Store managers are offered fashion collections twicea week and they can select items according to what they feel will suit theirparticular customers They can also communicate specific customer fashiondesires to Zararsquos Spanish headquarters up to four times a day using handheldkeypads A few days later the requested clothes are delivered to the storeconcerned

The deployment of IT at the front line where it can directly impact customersatisfaction was ably demonstrated in one case involving a white blouse Theshirt was delivered to UK stores bearing decorative epaulettes The shirts didnot sell Feedback from customers indicated that women preferred the shirt

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 91

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 91

plain without the epaulettes This information was passed on to the shirtfactory which promptly manufactured an amended version and sent it out tothe UK stores whereupon it became a best seller

In order to know what trends are about to emerge Zara employs a team ofabout 200 designers dubbed the lsquocreation teamrsquo They travel around theworld and their task is to gather vital fashion intelligence from clubs discosuniversity campuses and catwalks The affordable clothes sold by the Zaramanufacturing and retail chain have become popular among leading fashioneditors who revere their quality fashionability and value-for-money prices

Source Based on lsquoThe mark of Zararsquo Linda Watson Style Magazine 2001

THE ROLE OF SEGMENTATION IN VALUE DEFINITION

In best practice organizations consumer insight is turned into marketingaction through the process of consumer segmentation By segmentingconsumers into groups sharing the same or similar needs on the basis ofvalue as defined in their own terms an organization can acquire up-to-the-minute understanding of its consumer base This can then be used todevelop more cost-effective consumer strategies Because consumerperceptions of value change it is important that both value definition andconsumer segmentation are undertaken on a regular and frequent basisOrganizations that can quickly react to change and anticipate shifts in thevalue demands of consumers have a head start on their competitors Suchflexibility and focus on demand lie at the heart of New ConsumerMarketing

Much of the current discussion about segmentation is informed by themechanistic approach of the production-driven era This is characterizedby the use of scientific and rational language and focuses on the way inwhich the organization should segment its market ie lsquochop it uprsquo intomanageable chunks The reality of the consumption-led economy is thatconsumers themselves unwittingly form loose groups whose members areseeking the same or similar sets of value factors In other words consumerssegment their market and form subgroups with their own sets ofrequirements The language associated with segmentation today is more todo with creativity and insight as organizations wrestle with the challengeof finding a means of exposing these segments of consumers and definingthe value that each is seeking

92 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 92

The process of value definition enables the organization to be confidentabout the market in which it operates Segmentation provides the answerto the simple but strategic question lsquoWhat business are we inrsquo Theimportance of answering this question correctly was highlighted back in1960 by Theodore Levitt in his seminal work Marketing Myopia in whichhe draws attention to the importance of viewing a business in a way that isappropriate to the markets in which it operates His classic exampleinvolved the railroads which defined themselves as being in the railwaybusiness rather than in the transportation business lsquoThe railroads did notstop growing because the need for passenger and freight transportationdeclined That grew The railroads are in trouble today not because theneed was filled by others (cars trucks aeroplanes even telephones) butbecause it was not filled by the railroads themselvesrsquo The railroadcompanies had a product-driven view of the marketplace and failed to seethat the value their customers were looking for was more to do with thebenefits derived from transportation and communication than what therailroads simply had to offer

Today too many businesses still define and segment their markets interms of the products they sell Personal financial services companies forexample typically take this product-driven approach defining markets aslsquoendowment policiesrsquo lsquosavings bondsrsquo or lsquosavings accountsrsquo They fail tounderstand the kinds of value their customers are seeking such as thedesire to save for retirement support a child through higher education orsimply have peace of mind

Correct market definition is crucial to the development of a value-centric orientation as it links directly with the mission vision and values ofthe company It enables the organization to accurately articulate what itaims to achieve and to measure its market share and market growthagainst relevant competitors as it does so These issues are consideredfurther in Chapter 9

Creating a Segmentation Analysis

Customer databases built up through loyalty card schemes such as thoseoperated by the major supermarkets can provide a rich source ofinformation on buying behaviour However it should always beremembered that a segmentation analysis built solely on this sort of data

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 93

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 93

can only reflect the motivations of existing customers It becomes a databasesegmentation and not any form of market segmentation Meaningfulsegmentation analysis takes into consideration different types of data

In terms of the ideal number of clusters or segments to aim for in asegmentation analysis the recommendation used to be no more than half adozen but developments in data analysis and data fusion mean thatcompanies can now work with a greater number Figure 66 illustrates howthis larger number can arise

A major supermarket may start with a small number of lsquosuper segmentsrsquoand then subdivide these further until it has reached a large butmanageable number of micro-segments Developments in IT make themanagement of large numbers of segments possible For example threesuper segments may be uncovered in the segmentation analysis shopperswho are quality oriented family oriented and value oriented These supersegments could then be further subdivided into a larger number of sub-segments known as lsquocategory one segmentsrsquo The quality-orientedsegment for example might be made up of four sub-segments time-poorcash-rich shoppers health conscious shoppers shoppers with apreference for organic foods and lsquofoodiesrsquo or shoppers who favour fine

94 Value Definition

Time poorcash rich

Keen onorganics

Qualityoriented

Healthconscious Foodies

VF

Incr

easi

ng g

ranu

larit

y

Figure 66 Segmenting consumer markets a hypothetical supermarket example

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 94

foods In this way the segmentation process would be continued buildingon insight generated through both traditional and non-traditional researchapproaches until an optimum number of segments is reached Theoptimum number of segments is reached when each segment is of anadequate size to provide the company with the desired return oninvestment members of the segment share a high degree of similarity intheir requirements yet are distinct from the rest of the market thesegments are reachable and they can be serviced by the organization interms of value creation and value delivery

Today in the UK the major supermarkets would typically work at ahigh level of segment granularity with up to as many as 3000 segmentscascaded down from their overarching super segments One-to-onemarketing may be talked about as a viable aim but the commercial realityis rather different as for most organizations the costs of delivering thisoutweigh the returns The challenge is to find new analytic approaches tosubdividing the market to an acceptable level of granularity These morecontemporary approaches to segmentation keep managerial focus onunderstanding the value sought by the individual segments and do so in away that prevents consumer profiling from becoming a barrier to consumerunderstanding Where an organization talks in terms of only four or fiveconsumer profiles these can actually hinder an organizationrsquos ability to dealwith the high levels of heterogeneity characteristic of the new marketplace

Having identified its different consumer segments the organization canthen move on to evaluate which segments offer the best businessopportunities Segments may be assessed in terms of market size andmarket trends market share current and future profitability consumersatisfaction andor consumer loyalty Companies usually manage aportfolio of segments made up of high earners steady earners and futurepotential earners Any low earners need to be managed carefully ndash often asmall increase in the number of times consumers forming this segmentmake a purchase can result in large improvements to the bottom line

Finally continuing with this supermarket segmentation example theanalysis could then be used to understand the shopper profile of existingstores and to define value for example through ascertaining whatpercentage of consumers in each of the category one segments frequentsparticular store types (eg large format versus convenience) or by location(out-of-town versus high-street stores) The resultant insight could be used

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 95

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 95

to specify new store developments and hence tailor the value offering moreclosely to the wants and needs of consumers Given that CRM systems canprovide constant streams of up-to-date consumer data segmentationanalyses can become a dynamic part of a demand system A recent projectjointly undertaken by Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp Gamble demonstrates thispoint

Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp GambleIn an innovative example of collaborative effort Sainsburyrsquos and Procter ampGamble worked together to exploit the wealth of data contained withinSainsburyrsquos Reward Card database in order to deliver a holistic segmentationanalysis of the health and beauty care (HampBC) shopper Their study linkedactual purchasing behaviour to attitudinal data using a big base sample Inthe UK the HampBC market was worth almost pound11 billion in 2002 and is forecastto grow 21 to 2006 with Sainsburyrsquos occupying third place behind Bootsand Tesco for sales A major challenge facing Sainsburyrsquos is the differencebetween the HampBC shopper and the grocery shopper Shoppers atSainsburyrsquos are typically aged 45 years plus while the HampBC shopper isgenerally younger Also the overall store shopper is more upmarket than theSainsburyrsquos HampBC shopper

Using loyalty card data Sainsburyrsquos identified eight segments of shoppersbased on their purchasing affinity to different product categories within theHampBC aisle To complement this understanding two additional pieces ofresearch were jointly carried out to provide data on the wider HampBC shoppingcontext Both Sainsburyrsquos shoppers and non-shoppers of the HampBC categorywere surveyed quantitatively in order to gain insights that would enableSainsburyrsquos to build greater penetration among non-shoppers and strengthenshopper loyalty among existing shoppers

Analysis of this data produced a rich source of insight that enabled bothparties to learn what each of the segments was looking for in terms of HampBCproducts their loyalty to Sainsburyrsquos who they perceived as the competitionand the type of marketing activity they preferred The segmentation analysisresulted in actionable results for both Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp Gamblewhich were then exploited jointly and separately The HampBC strategy that wassubsequently developed encompassed both existing and new shoppersrsquoneeds and helped grow Sainsburyrsquos HampBC category ahead of the market

Source Roger Allford Natalie Evans and Caroline Ward lsquoA step forward inunderstanding shoppers using segmentation techniquesrsquo paper presented at the ESOMAR Conference lsquoConsolidation or renewalrsquo BarcelonaSeptember 2002

96 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 96

As this case example shows an organizationrsquos approach to segmentationis about more than the analytical techniques it employs It makes astatement about the organizationrsquos market orientation the way it sees themarketplace and how well it understands the consumers it chooses to serveSegmentation enables the organization to create competitive advantage foritself by defining value in a way that makes clear how it can profitablycreate greater value for consumers New Consumers raise many challengesfor organizations and as this chapter demonstrates they are impacting theway in which insight into their needs and desires is generated This inturn raises questions about the role and status of the insight generatorswithin a business

THE ROLE OF INSIGHT GENERATORS3 IN VALUEDEFINITION

An acceptance of the vital importance of insight to successful NewConsumer Marketing makes it necessary to review the role and status ofthose people within the organization who are generating the insight Theseare traditionally staff who are members of the market research teamHowever given the wider understanding of how insight can best begenerated this classification should also include those responsible for theanalysis of CRM data All too often market research is perceived to be alow-grade commodity business with an output that does not go beyondcompleting surveys As commentators said over ten years ago there is aneed to prove that market research is about more than clipboards andopinion polls

If insight generators are to assume a real decision-making role then theyneed to be equipped with a skill set that enables them to draw on the mosteffective combination of data generation services externally as well as anability to communicate the learning internally These insight managersmust become proactive consultants within their organizations rather thanacting as simple reactive service providers They need to ensure that theinsight generated becomes the dynamic cornerstone of all marketingactivities In best-practice organizations this appears to be happeningHowever there are perhaps too many junior managers joining the marketresearch profession who are not being trained to take on this enhanced roleThis can only lead to the marginalization of the profession over time

The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition 97

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 97

Insight generators therefore occupy what is known as a lsquoboundary-spanningrsquo role in the New Consumer Marketing model These are staff wholsquoconnect an informal network with other parts of the company or withsimilar networks in other organizationsrsquo (Cross and Prusak 2002) Theyoperate at the periphery of the organization and their roles are strategicallyimportant as facilitators of linkage between the cells of a demand system Itis through their behaviour that the organization adapts (or fails to adapt) tochanges in the marketplace In short they function as lsquosensory organsrsquo Asthis role is seldom recognized within organizations there is no one titlethat identifies these influential staff

These boundary-spanning managers are charged with generating adynamic flow of insight so that insight generation becomes an ongoingprocess and is not simply seen as an annual or six monthly exercise Theyare responsible for ensuring that this insight informs the other two cells ofthe New Consumer Marketing model through the organizationrsquos approachto knowledge management (as explored in Chapter 9) Gaining amomentum in insight generation enables the organization to create aliving demand system as it gains a continuous source of insight on which tofocus its value creation and delivery processes The benefits of this processapproach to insight generation are that brands can retain their currencywith consumers as the organization adapts to shifts in consumerperceptions of value This ability of an organization to shift in line withchanging consumer perceptions of value is well demonstrated in the casesof Lucozade and Skoda

Lucozade and SkodaLucozadersquos success in the drinks industry is underpinned by its expertise inreading value trends and responding to them appropriately The Lucozadebrand has shifted from being a soft drink aimed at people who are unwellsummed up in the strapline lsquoLucozade aids recoveryrsquo to a sports drink thatlsquoreplaces lost energyrsquo to todayrsquos competition-conscious brand that serves asan lsquoenergy boostrsquo

Car manufacturer Skoda has worked in a similar fashion to remain relevantto consumers VW its parent company acquired the brand in 1991 and hasinvested in it alongside its other marques Volkswagen Audi and Seat Thevalue associated with Skoda vehicles has changed dramatically from onethat was the butt of jokes to one that gains consumer trust Skodarsquos popularitytoday builds on a simple but clever message lsquoWersquove changed can yoursquo

98 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 98

This first cell of the New Consumer Marketing model is concerned withthe process of defining the value consumers are seeking Value definitiondrives the demand system by generating relevant insight that provides afocus for the processes of value creation and value delivery To achieve valuedefinition organizations are increasingly adopting a bricolage approachthat pieces together investigative and interpretative methods drawn fromdifferent disciplines

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Insight provides the means of defining value from the consumerrsquosperspective

bull Consumer perceptions of value shift over time Adopting an ongoingdynamic approach to insight generation ensures that the organizationrsquosperspective of the marketplace does not remain fixed in time

bull Value is made up of component factors that work to enhance maintainand destroy value Certain value-enhancers may be adopted byconsumers as talking points delivering valuable word-of-mouthmarketing

bull Insight generation is a total process encompassing traditional marketresearch and non-traditional market sensing

bull Insight is made actionable through the process of segmentation whichhelps the organization answer the question lsquowhat business are we inrsquo

bull Segmentation enables an organization to achieve competitiveadvantage by clarifying how it can create greater value for consumers

bull Insight generators have an influential boundary-spanning role withinthe organization and should be valued as lsquosensory organsrsquo

Summary Points 99

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 99

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 100

The process of creating value resulting in a value proposition for a specificaudience

Creating value = bringing into being or form or investing with new form

Watchword = innovation

Value creation in the consumption-led economy must be informed by anunderstanding of the value that consumers are looking for and assessed interms of consumersrsquo value criteria Satisfying consumer demand today isabout winning the custom of discerning consumers and not simplyproducing good products This second cell of the New ConsumerMarketing model is a fundamental component of a demand system as itmoves the organization from defining value to actually creating andcommunicating that value effectively

Key to the process of creating value in the marketplace is identifying andutilizing the organizationrsquos value-producing resources (eg employeestechnological know-how and capital) to meet consumer needs andexpectations profitably At the heart of this process is the concept ofinnovation Derived from the Latin word innovare meaning to renew oralter innovation in consumer marketing is about creating new solutionsthat offer real value to consumers In many organizations innovation hasbecome separated from marketing giving rise in part to the crisis inmarketing New Consumer Marketing with its emphasis on market-ledinnovation recombines the two and provides a means of addressing both thedemands of New Consumers and the concerns of brand owners and retailers

The desired output of the value creation process is a value propositionthat consumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver The

Value Creation 7

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 101

value proposition sets out the value exchange between buyer and supplierand reinforces the mutuality of the relationship As stated in Chapter 6 theconstruction of a successful value proposition depends on first being able todefine value by generating relevant insight into consumer demand and therelative attractiveness of different consumer segments The organizationcan then work to create this value and ultimately to deliver it

In building a value proposition out of the value-producing resources ofthe organization there are a number of elements to consider These includenew product development branding positioning and price Each plays animportant role in the value creation process Of paramount importancehowever is the role of innovation for innovation is what underpins thesuccess of all the elements of value creation

THE ROLE OF INNOVATION IN VALUE CREATION

The business has two and only these two basic functions marketing andinnovation Marketing and innovation produce results all the rest are costs

(Peter Drucker 1985)

In the opening chapter of this book marketing was presented as adiscipline in crisis whose contribution to business is in question Thisstems from the fact that many managers see marketing as a cost rather thanan investment and this itself is driven by the lack of a common approach tomeasuring marketing effectiveness (a subject considered further in Chapter9) The issue for many managers today is that marketing no longer appearsto be delivering innovation somehow the two have become separatedNew Consumer Marketing which places innovation at the core of valuecreation offers a way of putting strategic intent back into marketing andso providing a means of lifting marketing out of its crisis

The value-centric organization is marked by a corporate environmentthat seeks performance improvement through superior value definitioncreation and delivery Innovation in business provides a way of creatingnew value-producing resources or endowing existing ones with anenhanced potential for yielding profit It is the result of a complex set ofprocesses involving organizational learning culture leadership andmanagement style Innovation is important on a macro-economic levelbecause it is associated with high rates of economic growth and high levels

102 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 102

of employment Within individual firms innovation enhancesorganizational performance The commercial significance of innovation issupported by the findings of PricewaterhouseCoopers (1999) whichsurveyed 80 companies in seven countries in 1999 It found that newproducts and services introduced in the preceding five years accounted for a10 increase in turnover and generated a 25 increase in the annual rateof revenue growth It also found that new products and services wereassociated with a 9 increase in annual total shareholder returns

While the firm that innovates first in a market obtains the early moveradvantage this is only sustainable while competitors cannot imitate orneutralize its lead To stay ahead the firm must ensure that innovation is adynamic capability fully embedded within the culture of the organizationThe roots of culture lie hidden in the deep-seated collection of beliefs andassumptions that are commonly held in an organization They are reflectedin everyday life as lsquothe way things get done around herersquo Innovation shouldnot be treated simply as a series of individual projects but as a continuoussearch for opportunities to improve the value proposition to such an extentthat new market space is opened up A value-centric orientation providesthe foundation for achieving this

Because of the clear business benefits of having an innovative approachto value creation innovation is something of a holy grail for businessesThis is especially true for brand owners and retailers who find themselveshaving to rethink their strategies in line with the macro-market shift froma production-driven to a consumption-led economy As discussed inChapter 3 brand owners are looking for improvements in brandperformance that will give them an opportunity to assert their positionwith retailers and to move away from a position where they can do littleother than ruthlessly attack their cost base in order to meet retailersrsquo pricedemands Brand owners want to outperform their rivals in terms ofcapturing market share developing consumer and brand loyalty andearning a rate of profit higher than the industry norm Retailers for theirpart are seeking step changes that will reverse current trends which haveseen retail decline as a percentage of GDP over recent years They need tofind new and innovative ways to manage retail offerings in highlyfragmented markets

For both brand owners and retailers a focus on innovation in valuecreation offers the most promising source of organic growth This means

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 103

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 103

working to create the next wave of brand and retail experiences based onhaving a consumer-relevant value-centric orientation in the business and amanagement culture that makes innovation possible

Consumers as Innovators

In the production-driven economy the role of the consumer in theinnovation process was highly limited ndash so much so in fact that in somecases of marketing consumers appeared to be forgotten altogether In theconsumption-led economy the active knowledgeable and demandingNew Consumer is the focal point of product and service innovationOrganizations that embrace New Consumer Marketing acknowledge thisand believe that the consumer can be a source of insight and innovationleading to greater business competence Such firms are characterized byhigh levels of consumer involvement they recognize consumers asinnovators

The concept of using consumers in direct interface with businessmanagers was termed lsquoTapping the creativity of consumersrsquoTM by theSynectics Corporation (wwwsynecticsworldcom) an internationalconsultancy specializing in innovation and change Synectics consultantsengage consumers in the problem-solving process in the search forbreakthrough initiatives For example one client the National FarmersrsquoUnion (NFU) was brought together with consumers at the point ofpurchase where it was observed that there was no easy way for consumersto identify the source of the food they were buying This was an issue ofserious concern in the UK following a number of high-profile food scaresThe insight generated from speaking to grocery shoppers directly was thatthey wanted a convenient way to ensure food safety This may seem anobvious requirement but it led to the idea of a new farm-assurancebranding scheme The Farm Assured brand authenticating how the foodhas been produced hit the shelves within a record nine months due to theinvolvement of all stakeholders (farmers consumers NFU staffwholesalers and retailers)

By eliciting consumersrsquo hidden desires and enabling them to participatefully in product development organizations can use consumers as agents ofchange in the same way that a grit of sand can develop into a pearl withinan oysterrsquos shell Cadbury Schweppes and Johnson Controls companies

104 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 104

working in diverse sectors have both made maximum use of consumers toshape and sell products successfully

Cadbury SchweppesCadbury Schweppes confectionery uses a five-stage process known aslsquoALICErsquo to drive innovation in its Consumer Planning and ResearchDepartment The acronym stands for alignment (A) of the objectives of theresearch with the consumer problem leverage (L) of existing knowledgewithin the business immersion (I) in the world of the potential consumerconnection (C) through insight and execution (E) to drive growth The launchof the Boost Guarana chocolate bar in September 2002 followed this strategicdevelopment pathway Its genesis was based on the insight that the highlydemanding lifestyle of todayrsquos consumers takes a heavy toll on their mentalenergy This learning was generated by a cross-functional team andsupported by desk research and consumer surveys that used a raft ofethnographic and direct questioning techniques The stimulant properties ofBoost Guarana match those of energy drinks that claim to deliver improvedattention alertness and concentration

Source Patsy Richardson Head of Consumer Planning and ResearchCadbury Schweppes lsquoHow to maximise the benefits of using consumerinsight to drive innovationrsquo paper presented at the lsquoUsing Consumer Insightfor Profitable Innovationrsquo Conference IQPC London October 2002

Johnson ControlsJohnson Controls is part of an automotive systems group that makes seatsand car interiors It operates in the business-to-business (B2B) sector as asupplier to well-known car manufacturers such as BMW and Nissan Thecompany believes that lsquoconsumer focused innovation and productdevelopment will become an increasingly important competitive differentiatorrsquoRecognizing that cars need to deliver more than lsquojust transportationrsquo and thatcar interiors need to surprise and delight end users Johnson Controls drawson the views of both automotive experts and car drivers to understand themotivating values of car drivers (eg family safety pragmatism harmony)Consumers are consulted on product design and associated issues such aswhat luxury means for car drivers and how drivers actually use the technologyavailable in cars This insight-turned-innovation is then used as a corecompetence by Johnson Controls in its relationships with its immediatecustomers the car manufacturers

Source Jemina Martinez Head of Advanced Consumer Research JohnsonControls lsquoGetting out of the car and into peoplersquos livesrsquo paper presented atthe lsquoUsing Consumer Insight for Profitable Innovationrsquo Conference IQPCLondon October 2002

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 105

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 105

Innovation through Process or People

Many companies take an overtly process-oriented approach to managinginnovation while others regard innovation as a capability vested in peopleManagerial thinking is currently caught between these two contrastingapproaches How should an organization seeking to improve itsperformance by becoming more innovative achieve this New ConsumerMarketing offers a way of seeing these two approaches as part of the samesolution to meeting the needs of New Consumers and providingbreakthrough opportunities in business development for brand owners andretailers

On the one hand there is a clearly identified and well-used process thatwas formalized by Robert Cooper an academic researcher known as thestagendashgate process (Cooper 1993) This is shown in Figure 71 Thestagendashgate process provides a way of screening and monitoring theprogression of projects to ensure that progress is linked to the successfulachievement of business goals It subdivides new product developmentactivities into a series of stages so that managers can lsquoownrsquo specific groups ofactivities and be responsible for achieving the objectives within thoseactivities In order to proceed from one stage to the next the project mustsatisfy the objectives that were set for that stage Failure at any stage in the process will result in the abandonment of the project The definition ofthe developmental stages and the evaluation criteria will be specific to theorganization concerned The stagendashgate process aims to reduce risk and isusually associated with an incremental approach to innovation

Figure 71 The stagendashgate process Adapted from Cooper (1993)

106 Value Creation

Initial Second Decision on Post- Precommercialization Post-screen screen business case development business implementation

review analysis review

Ideation Preliminary Detailed Development Testing and Full production andinvestigation investigation validation market launch

(build businesscase)

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 106

On the other hand there are many examples of organizations whereinnovation is directly attributable to the leadership and management styleof an individual (usually the CEO) whose commitment to innovation isreflected in the culture of the organization A common feature of theseorganizations is a focus on seeing things from the consumerrsquos perspectiveAs a result they tend to be more effective in the marketplace For exampleStelios Haji-Ioannou founder of the low-cost carrier easyJet used to takeup to four flights a week on easyJet to experience what it was like as apassenger using his airline The feedback and insight he gained from thisunusual routine was used to improve consumer value

Michael Dell1 founder and namesake of the worldrsquos leading computerservices provider says lsquoOne of the challenges of a company that issucceeding is that you run the risk of complacencyrsquo He encourages histeam to explore incremental improvements and to experiment with ideasthat add value primarily in terms of efficiency EasyJet and Delldemonstrate that fostering an innovative culture starts from the top it isdriven by the way that senior managers manage and relish risk setchallenging but measurable goals support employees who take a risk intrying something different champion new ideas and encourage diversityof thought and approach

Innovation as a Dynamic Capability

In order to synthesize this binary behaviour (seeking efficiency throughprocess or effectiveness through people) New Consumer Marketingencourages a systemic approach Drawing on learning from the livingsciences it helps in identifying the key underlying processes andrelationships within the organization that enable it to become as adaptiveand creative as possible in a changing market environment This approachis exemplified by 3M(UK)2 a company that continuously and consistentlydemonstrates success in innovation

3M(UK)The story of the 3M Post-itTM probably 3Mrsquos most well-known product hasbecome a classic example of innovation 3M manager Art Fry sought a way ofkeeping the bookmark in his hymn book from slipping out onto the floor Heconnected this desire to his knowledge of an adhesive that had beendiscovered by the company a number of years before but discarded as it was

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 107

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 107

considered to be ineffective at sticking With the support of the company Fryredeveloped the adhesive successfully and this led to the Post-itTM a hugelysuccessful stationery innovation

3M(UK) employees are given the freedom to take risks and try out newideas and this has led to a steady stream of new products John Muellerformer Chairman and CEO of 3M(UK) is quoted as saying lsquoWe want toinstitutionalize a bit of rebellion in our labs It has been said that thecompetition never knows what we are going to come up with next The factis neither do wersquo This is indicative of a mindset that actively encouragesradical innovation The difference between this mindset and one that leadsto incremental innovation is so current research suggests (Dyck 2002) todo with the way in which the organization experiences the complexity ofthe problem it is facing Where an organization perceives the problem tobe lsquouncertainrsquo it is essentially saying that it knows the variables at play butdoes not know how to configure them to find the solution Theorganization that perceives the problem to be one of lsquoambiguityrsquo is goingfarther and saying that it does not know what variables are at play and doesnot know the formula for solving the problem

This latter attitude is reflected in Muellerrsquos words and is associated withcompanies that seek to absorb complexity rather than simply to reduce itOrganizations that work to reduce complexity are constrained to anincremental approach Those whose starting point is that they do not knowhow to solve the problem can work to create options to develop potentialsolutions and in doing so learn as an organization Taking a broader viewof the complexity of the marketplace and the issues facing consumers is lesscomfortable for organizations as it throws up more challenges and greaterrisk but it can lead to more radical innovation where the rewards arepotentially superior

Therefore managers seeking to improve organizational performance bybecoming more innovative need to start by deciding whether they areuncertain or ambiguous about the complexity of the problem they arefacing Their answers will be based on their understanding of themarketplace and will determine whether they then work to reduce orabsorb the complexity This more reflective approach is not a capabilitythat was called for in the production-driven era where a command-and-control attitude dominated Then organizations produced goods andservices and persuaded consumers to buy them In todayrsquos consumption-

108 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 108

led economy where consumer markets are highly fragmented andchanging fast the successful players are those who are able to produce valuein a consistent and cost-effective way The market leaders however go onestep further ndash they constantly seek to differentiate themselves fromcompetitors by offering superior value in the form of new products andservices They are capable of absorbing complexity and mastering theorganizational response to market change

A Radical Approach to Innovation

Organizations can best distance themselves from the competition bychanging the rules of the marketplace This starts with generating insightinto consumersrsquo problems and expectations and then defining them in sucha way that creating the value consumers seek becomes obvious As discussedin the previous chapter this is the desired output of an effectively operatingfirst cell in a demand system To achieve value definition the organizationmay well find itself redefining the consumer needs the industry is focusingon and thus contributing to industry understanding of the value-addingfactors that matter to consumers These might then form the basis of newperformance criteria for companies in that sector Those companies that failto embrace the new criteria may risk losing out

Virgin GroupVirgin Group is an organization that has demonstrated time and again how tobring radically new products and services into the marketplace without beingthe first to market in a particular sector The companyrsquos understanding of thevalue-adding factors that matter to consumers has enabled it to successfullyoperate in markets where it has taken on established giants in a lsquoDavid versusGoliathrsquo battle for consumer loyalty For this reason Virgin has gained areputation as a challenger brand For example Virgin Mobile offeredconsumers a single simple tariff when other operators were confrontingconsumers with an array of complicated tariffs Virginrsquos uncomplicatedapproach won it 17 million customers by mid-2002 and catapulted thecompany into the position of the fifth largest mobile operator in the UK withinthree years of entering the market Virgin Mobilersquos competitors have sincecopied the simple tariff system effectively raising the key performancecriteria for the industry

Other Virgin businesses such as Virgin Atlantic and Virgin One haveimpacted their markets in a similar way When Virgin Atlantic launched its

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 109

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 109

lsquoUpper Classrsquo seating the idea of offering the large seats and legroom oftraditional First Class for the price of a business class ticket was new andwon Virgin Atlantic a lucrative market share of key international routes VirginOne again demonstrated the benefits of keeping it simple when it introducedthe Virgin One bank account (now known as One) which enabled consumersto manage all their finances including mortgages savings and income froma single account The new type of bank account made its mark in an industrythat had formerly offered consumers a range of banking products and wherecorporate emphasis was on persuading consumers to buy these productsrather than developing products to suit consumer needs Virginrsquos consistentlysimple and consumer-focused approach to innovation in value creation isindicative of a true value-orientation within the organization and also of amanagement culture that makes innovation possible

Organizations such as Virgin Group take the consumer as their startingpoint and not the final destination for their products and services They areless interested in simply building advantage over their competitors andrather keener on providing consumers with a step change in value thateffectively creates a new market The competition is left standing as oldsources of advantage are destroyed and new ones are created

W Chan Kim and Renee Mauborgne two professors from the Frenchbusiness school INSEAD have published extensively in this area and theyuse the term lsquovalue pioneersrsquo to describe the Virgin Group and similartypes of organization (1997 1999ab 2000) These are businesses engagedin what Kim and Mauborgne define as lsquovalue innovationrsquo a process thatmakes the competition irrelevant and creates new markets by focusing onwhat value needs to be produced They cite examples such as CallawayGolf the US golf club manufacturer which in 1991 launched its lsquoBigBertharsquo golf club The product rapidly rose to dominance taking marketshare from rivals and expanding the total golf club market because itsradically new design (the club has an unusually large head) offered playersa way of overcoming the difficulties associated with hitting a small golf ballwith a little golf club head For Kim and Mauborgne Callaway likeCharles Schwab amp Co in investment brokerage IKEA in home productsretail and Wal-Mart in discount retailing illustrates their thesis that thereis a clear link between high rates of business growth and a radical approachto innovation

This stance contrasts with the traditional view that consumers canprovide only limited help in innovative product and service development

110 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 110

as they are constrained by their experience and unable to articulateanything other than incremental ideas

THE ROLE OF NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT IN VALUECREATION

There is a lot of debate around the question how new does innovationreally have to be lsquoNewnessrsquo can be understood in a number of differentways The word lsquonewrsquo is often used in marketing communications forexample in advertisements and mailings or on product packagingHowever in many instances consumers could be forgiven for asking whatmight actually be new about certain products or services Newness is oftendefined by an incremental change to an existing product or service It maybe a barely discernible alteration to the pack size or ingredients base Sucha slight improvement in the value offering might make it lsquonew to thecompany but not new to the marketrsquo

Alternatively the newness element might be more extensive to thepoint where consumers change their purchase behaviour For examplewhen Mars launched its new Celebrations brand the Roses and QualityStreet brands already dominated the marketplace for boxed wrappedchocolates for everyday occasions But Mars had undertaken in-depthresearch into potential consumers and used the resulting insight toposition the new brand as lsquoall your favourite countline products inminiaturersquo The launch of Celebrations succeeded in attracting a youngerconsumer compared to rival brands and Mars captured a significant shareof the UKrsquos pound600 million boxed chocolate market within a short period oftime

In essence product newness is a spectrum carrying increasing amountsof business risk for the organization In their report New Product Managementfor the 1980s Booz Allen amp Hamilton (1982) provide a way of looking atinnovation in terms of product newness They identify six categories of newproduct development as defined by the productrsquos level of newness to thefirm and its perceived level of newness to consumers Their grid displayingthe various categories is shown in Figure 72

It is evident from Figure 72 that the new product developments withlowest risk are those created through cost reduction and brandrepositioning Cost reduction involves the organization in paring down the

The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation 111

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 111

content of the value proposition by a specific amount to save on costWhere the reduction is minimal it may not affect consumer perceptions ofvalue However excessive cost reduction or too many small reductions overtime does become noticeable Brand repositioning represents relativelyhigher risk as it usually involves presenting brand revisions of some form tothe consumer The organization may or may not succeed at realigning thebrand with consumer expectations but it is already familiar withmanaging the brand

New product developments that carry intermediate risk include lineextensions and product improvements The usual strategy here is toenhance consumer value by increasing product choice and productperformance respectively For example Muumlller the fourth largest grocerybrand in the UK has consistently increased the range of yoghurt varietiesto more than 20 in order to drive sales volume and market share A numberof other food brands have chosen to focus instead on product performanceand have altered their recipes to include added vitamins and fibre thusmoving their brands into the functional foods or lsquonutraceuticalsrsquo sector ofthe market

The highest risk new product developments are ones that are both newto the company and new to consumers These are known as lsquonew-to-the-

112 Value Creation

Figure 72 Categories of new product development Adapted from Booz Allen ampHamilton (1982)

P

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 112

worldrsquo introductions The annals of marketing are littered with examplesof unsuccessful new-to-the-world products such as Betamax videotape andClive Sinclairrsquos C5 electric car These new products failed to deliver anysubstantial consumer benefit and were therefore not adopted by consumersThese attempts at innovation were not anchored in any form of meaningfulconsumer insight

Many organizations mistakenly believe that adding more technology toa product or service will result in value-adding innovation However whatconsumers want from technology is new or enhanced value that will extendtheir abilities and provide them with greater ease of use and convenienceSuccessful new-to-the-world innovation succeeds because it represents agenuine breakthrough in delivering a value proposition based on a deepunderstanding of the nature of the value consumers seek This new-to-the-world form of innovation is also known as radical or discontinuousinnovation as referred to earlier The introduction of Mars Ice Cream is anexample of this type of approach

Mars Ice CreamIn the late 1980s ice cream was a price-sensitive seasonal commodity Themarket was large (pound587 million) but stagnant and dominated by Walls andLyons Maid which held 45 and 14 market share respectively Most icecream was vegetable-fat based and generally came in the form of ice-lolliescones and family brick packs Until Mars entered the market in 1988 icecream was viewed largely as a childrenrsquos snack and demographics showed itcould be a shrinking market However Mars identified a gap in the existingmarket for a premium-price branded ice cream It was the first to launch sucha product and gained a lead over other ice cream manufacturers The newproduct was sold in the same outlets that stocked the existing range of Marsconfectionery enabling the company to use the same sales force and existingresources This allowed significant economies and lessened the financialburden of entering a new market

THE ROLE OF BRANDING IN VALUE CREATION

Brands play an important role in the value-creation process and thechanging marketing landscape created by the shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy has already brought forth newthinking about them and their meaning for consumers Initially brandsemerged as a simple means of identifying the manufacturer of a product

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 113

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 113

For example in 1266 in medieval England bakers were required by law toput their mark on every loaf of bread sold so that if there were anydiscrepancies in weight the baker at fault could be traced The practice ofbranding a product with an lsquoidentityrsquo has continued and developed Todaythe brand concept is highly complex having evolved beyond the coreproduct to include various kinds of added value Brands are often depictedas a lsquofried eggrsquo with a functional centre surrounded by layers of lesstangible elements such as reputation pack design advertising guaranteesand so on This view of brands typified the approach of marketers in the1950s and 1960s when brands were seen as lsquolifeless manipulable artefactsrsquo(Hanby 1999) and consumers were seen as passive purchasers

Brand thinking moved ahead slowly until the early 1980s whenresearcher Judie Lannon and psychologist Peter Cooper (1983) expressedthe idea that lsquowhat turns a product into a brand is that the physical productis combined with something else ndash symbols images feelings ndash to producean idea which is more than the sum of the parts The two ndash product andsymbolism ndash live and grow with and on one another in a partnership ofmutual exchangersquo This concept began a process of seeing the brand notjust as the producerrsquos idea of the product but also as the consumerrsquos idea ofthe product giving rise to the notion of brands being co-created byproducers together with consumers

By the mid-1990s the nature of the intangible value inherent in thebrand had evolved to the extent that Harvard professor Susan Fournier(1996) described consumersrsquo relationships with mass brands as able tolsquosoothe the ldquoempty selvesrdquo left behind by societyrsquos abandonment of traditionand community and provide stable anchors in an otherwise changingworldrsquo At the close of the twentieth century John Grant author of theinfluential New Marketing Manifesto (1999) observed that lsquoBrands seem tohave taken on a life of their own They have become quite freestandingideas that take hold and spread So that Virgin can span many markets andViagra can become a potent icon even in markets where it is not yetavailable hellip A brand is a popular idea or set of ideas that people live byrsquo

These quotations by leading marketing commentators demonstrate thechanging way in which brands are believed to operate Today themetaphors used to describe the brand-building process are no longermechanistic but organic in nature in keeping with the discipline of NewConsumer Marketing Brands are now thought of as living entities that

114 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 114

take on a life of their own inside consumersrsquo minds creating somethingknown as a lsquomental modelrsquo Mental models as described in the previouschapter provide insight into how consumers create store recall and relateto brands in everyday life In effect a brand becomes a representation of anindividualrsquos collection of experiences at each of the lsquotouchpointsrsquo at whichthe brand wittingly or unwittingly engages the consumer Theseexperiences provide a mix of rational emotional social and culturalbenefits to the individual consumer If the supplying organization isdefining and creating value effectively then this bundle of complementarybenefits will be delivered through the value-adding factors associated withthe brand A brand is therefore the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition

Brands exist because people want them to exist As Niall FitzgeraldChairman of Unilever commented lsquoEven if the word ldquomarketingrdquo hadnever been invented and advertising was banned across the globe therewould still be brands because it is people who need themrsquo3 For consumersbrands provide a way of making a complicated world simpler Consumersbecome so familiar with them that brands provide a shorthand approach todecision making The dependable predisposition of consumers to purchasespecific brands provides brand owners with assets that offer the promise offuture cash flow It is consumers then and not companies who invest abrand with its value

If this is the case how is it that brands go into decline and die Theanswer is that companies kill them though not always deliberately orknowingly The decline and death of a brand can occur in a number ofdifferent ways for example through organizational arrogance greed orcomplacency Underlying this ebbing away of brand value is the absence ofa value-centric orientation in the organization A value-centric orientationenables the company to know understand and anticipate the valueconsumers are seeking so that it can then focus its value-producingresources on satisfying those needs thereby ensuring that brands surviveThe Barbie doll is one such example

BarbieBarbie began as an innovation and has remained relevant to young girlsthroughout the dollrsquos 40-year history The Barbie doll was created in 1959 andover 1 billion Barbies have been sold to date The brand is worth some $2 billion making it the most valuable toy brand in the world Mattel the

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 115

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 115

American toy giant that manufactures the doll claims the average Americangirl aged between 3 and 11 owns ten Barbies

When Barbie burst onto the scene in the 1960s the doll market consistedmainly of baby dolls designed for girls to cradle rock and feed In contrastBarbie had adult features and represented an independent young womanSince Barbiersquos launch as a teenage fashion model Mattel has worked to keepthe dollrsquos image fresh and to deliver the play value its ever-youngerconsumers demand Every year the company devises about 150 differentBarbie dolls and designs some 120 new doll outfits Barbiersquos image isconstantly updated mirroring the changing role of women in society She nowcomes in a multiplicity of guises from astronaut to army officer to dentist andmany more To reflect the growing diversity of populations African AmericanHispanic and Asian variations were introduced as early as the 1960s

Barbie has survived the challenges of lsquoage compressionrsquo or kids gettinglsquoolderrsquo at a younger age Girls now grow out of traditional play patternsincluding playing with dolls earlier than they did in the past Whereas ageneration ago 12-year-olds might have played with Barbie todayrsquos primeaudience is aged three to five Mattel is meeting this challenge head on byintroducing extensions to the Barbie brand For example Barbie in theNutcracker is a computer-animated video that has generated $150 millionfrom sales The company is dedicated to promoting Barbie as a lifestyle notjust a toy In addition to selling the dolls Mattel licenses Barbie in 30 differentproduct categories from furniture to make-up A girl can sleep in Barbiepyjamas under a Barbie duvet-cover in a bedroom covered in Barbiewallpaper There are even Barbie conventions fan clubs websitesmagazines and collectorsrsquo events To many commentators Barbietranscends the product category and is an icon representing lsquothe face of theAmerican dreamrsquo

Source lsquoLife in Plasticrsquo The Economist 21 December 2002

Building Successful Brands

As the meaning of brands has shifted over time so too has organizationalunderstanding of how to build brands In the production-driven era it wasbelieved that brand building was best achieved solely through marketingcommunications activities (namely advertising) Brand development wasseen as the transmission of messages to consumers the aim being to controltheir purchase behaviour Today brands are built on a much widerplatform that may for example involve alliance partners or staff

116 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 116

hellip through alliances ndash i-mode

i-mode is the most successful mobile data service in the world to date Sinceits launch in Japan in February 1999 i-mode has attracted 353 millionsubscribers (58 of market share) who each pay on average yen1540 permonth for services encompassing 3290 official and 59869 unofficial contentsites This success has been achieved through a value-centric approach to thedevelopment implementation and operation of i-mode services By keepingits offer simple maintaining effective content development and being first tomarket i-mode has gained significant competitive advantage and becomethe object of envy among mobile operators worldwide

Domoco the company behind the i-mode brand whose name is derivedfrom lsquodo communications over the mobilersquo has worked to define and satisfyconsumersrsquo needs through a relevant and appealing brand by forgingalliances with leading content providers The brand is based on theunderstanding that compelling entertainment content drives demand andthe technological aspects consequently take a back seat As TakeshiNatsuno director of i-modersquos strategy department explains lsquoWe neveremphasize words such as internet web browsing and mobile computing toconsumers i-mode users can get various information only with simpleoperations without recognizing they are using the internetrsquo

Putting this philosophy into practice Domoco carefully selects andcontrols lsquoofficialrsquo partner sites on the basis of freshness reliability depth ofcontent and clear user benefit and provides them with key services such as user verification joint marketing and technical assistance Thetechnological capabilities of i-mode allow content providers to chargeusers small incremental fees for the services provided These fees are billedby Domoco and then passed on to the content provider but Domocoretains a 9 commission This business model creates a positive feedbackloop whereby good content and compelling services attract fee-payingusers who in turn attract more content providers For example gamesmanufacturer Badai provides a new animated character every day as i-modescreen wallpaper (the background screen image for i-mode) With over 2 million i-mode users signing up for the service at yen100 per month this strategic alliance nets the company more than pound13 million per annum proving the strength of a partnership approach Similar agree-ments have been made with Sony allowing it to provide Playstation style

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 117

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 117

games over i-mode and Coca-Cola whereby i-mode users can use theirhandsets to pay for and acquire items from individual Coca-Cola vendingmachines

through staff ndash Singapore Airlines

Some companies are distinguished in their marketplace by the level of servicethey offer The way in which their employees deal with consumers becomesthe defining characteristic of the brand In essence the staff are the brandWith a proven profitability record over 30 years Singapore Airlines is one ofthe most successful airlines in the world and is consistently used by travellersand competitors as a benchmark for outstanding performance Key to thissuccess has been the delivery of the brand through the airlinersquos staff

The Singapore Airlines brand is intrinsically linked with the SingaporeGirl launched in 1972 whose serene face has become the heart of thecarrierrsquos advertising campaign No other airline has such a strong brandimage one that has even been immortalized in wax at Madame TussaudrsquosMuseum in London Ian Batey the creator of the Singapore Girl took a riskwhen he proposed that adverts should focus on service at a time when otherairlines were selling their tickets on the theme of safety Batey attributesthe success of the brand to its lsquocombination of silk and steel hellip the ever-changing cutting-edge body side of the brand hellip and the softer soul sideTogether you have a certain Asian humility graciousness and warmth aswell as being extremely fit fast modern and contemporaryrsquo The airlineoperates with a ratio of one flight attendant for every 22 passengers thehighest in the world and well above the industry average

Singapore Airlines has more than 14000 staff located in citiesthroughout the world People from different cultures must work togetherto produce a seamless and positive customer experience To unite thediverse and geographically separated workforce the airline has developed anumber of activities to encourage inter-office communication including avariety of department newsletters and a monthly company-wide internalmagazine A lsquoStaff Ideas in Actionrsquo scheme ensures that new suggestionsare constantly put forward The results of these and many other efforts addup to a staff culture that is vigorously committed to the airline toconsumers and to continuous improvement Staff pride and sense ofownership are evident in the way employees work to uphold the airlinersquosreputation which is built on a well-defined set of corporate values

118 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 118

Emerging Brand Issues

An emerging issue for brand owners and retailers in todayrsquos consumption-led economy is the growing debate about the impact of globalization andthe role of business versus government While this may not appear to belinked to the value-creation process in any obvious way it represents abreaking trend that needs to be monitored for its impact on the kind ofvalue that consumers seek and may be seeking in future Brands areincreasingly the targets of anti-corporation campaigns as is evidenced inthe protests against the World Trade Organization (WTO) in Seattle andGenoa and the boycotting of genetically modified (GM) foods In somecases consumer behaviour towards certain brands has been shown to be amore effective political weapon than the ballot box Shell for examplefound itself at the centre of controversy in 1995 when it sought to disposeof the Brent Spar oil platform at sea Consumers expressed their concern forthe environment by not buying Shell petrol especially in Germany whereShell sales declined by 50 on one day

Although these brand issues may seem far removed from their day-to-day remit marketers need to develop some sort of perspective on them Inseveral cases the monetary value of the value-creation activities of somecorporations exceeds that of a number of nation states An acknowledgedauthority in this area is socio-economist Dr Noreena Hertz She explains inher book The Silent Takeover (2001) how corporations are changing peoplersquoslives society and the democratic process She points out that of the worldrsquos100 largest economies 51 are now corporations and only 49 are nationstates Combined sales at General Motors and Ford are greater than theGDP of the whole of sub-Saharan Africa and Wal-Mart now has a turnoverhigher than the revenues of most states of Eastern Europe

At the heart of the debate about growing globalization and the role ofbusiness versus government lies the issue of trust is consumer marketingacting as a trustworthy agent in the economic system Brands are involvedin the economy and the production of national wealth because as discussedearlier they act as a label of guarantee and trust for consumers and thisvalue-enhancing aspect still plays a major role in motivating purchasestoday A small but demanding minority of New Consumers wants to makeinformed purchasing decisions and they have a growing interest in thecompany behind the brand Their concerns focus on wider societal issues

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 119

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 119

such as environmental vulnerability poverty and economic and politicalinstability and they have a desire to link their purchasing habits with thefuture of sustainable development This represents a significant change inthe kind of value that consumers want and challenges traditional value-creation activities

This wider agenda brings to the fore company reputation Brand ownershave always known that strong brands invite earn honour and reward thetrust of consumers but the signs are that to be a strong brand in the newmarketplace a brand has to demonstrate some form of corporate socialresponsibility The response of business has however been limited Whilemost companies are still trying to understand exactly how this trendimpacts the value creation process Body Shop is an example of a companythat has embraced brand ethics from its inception For many consumersBody Shop is not simply a retailer but a cause worth supporting BodyShoprsquos promotion of lsquobeauty without cruelty to animalsrsquo and lsquotrade not aidrsquopositions the brand as environmentally and socially responsible Othercompanies have developed social responsibility programmes as a means ofachieving profitability for their business and the environment in a way thatreflects the values of society Reputation management cannot howeversimply be regarded as a tactical activity Companies have to find ways ofembedding social responsibility into their organizations As researcherLance Moir (2001) comments lsquoThe best firms in this area ndash such as BPShell Johnson amp Johnson ndash are looking at their business processes in orderto ensure that the pure economic motive is not the sole determinant ofbusiness decisionsrsquo

THE ROLE OF POSITIONING IN VALUE CREATION

The positioning of a brand in the marketplace is a manifestation of where itsits vis-agrave-vis the competition and in the same way that consumers invest abrand with its value they also determine the positioning of a brand Just asthey carry in their minds a mental model of an individual brand they alsocarry a mental map of related brands Knowledge of this can reveal to theorganization the competitive set within which it operates The challengefacing the insight generators in a business is to find the right combinationof tools and techniques to uncover these maps (These issues were discussedin Chapter 6) However having generated this knowledge the

120 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 120

organization can then work to create the value proposition and ultimatelyto deliver it Positioning plays an important role in the value creationprocess because it helps build and sustain the value proposition Moreoverit does so in a way that factors in emotion the great intangible aspect ofbrand building

An example of a positioning map is shown in Figure 73 It shows thekey criteria that consumers use to discriminate between branded conceptsin the eating out market in this case the type of food on offer and theatmosphere of the outlet Consumers will then go on to opt for a lsquoFrenchrsquobrasserie versus a lsquodepartment storersquo cafeteria depending on the type ofeating-out occasion they are planning For example they may becontemplating a meal out with a small group of friends to celebrate aspecial occasion or they may be thinking of somewhere to go on their ownto pick up a snack as they are in a hurry New Consumers are ultradiscriminating and value creation should focus on their perceptions ofvalue which here includes type of outlet speed of service ambience etc

Drawing out the Emotional Message

New Consumers are motivated by the desire for experiences over featuresand benefits and the brand positioning process provides an important way of linking an emotional message to the physical characteristics of the brand Brands touch peoplersquos lives and consumers choose brands forthe emotional values they express as much as anything else The moredeeply embedded the emotions are the more strongly the consumer isconnected to the brand The example of Nike trainers given in Chapter 6showed how particular product features delivered certain benefits whichtogether provided an experience that satisfied a higher-level valuerequirement

Similar research4 carried out on purchasers of womenrsquos fine fragrancesshows in more detail how perceived value delivers an experience forconsumers The study illustrates how certain features of a brand ofperfume in this instance Chanel No 5 are linked with specific perceivedbenefits that satisfy personal values It can be seen from Figure 74 how thebrandrsquos country of origin (France) works as a positive feature providingreassurance to consumers Consumers regard Chanel No 5 as a low-riskhigh-quality purchase because of the trustworthy reputation French

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 121

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 121

perfumes have in the marketplace This feeling of reassurance promotes asense of well-being and feeling good about oneself For Chanel thelearning to be drawn from this is that it is important to retain thelsquoFrenchnessrsquo of the brand as it is integral to the brandrsquos positioning andcommunications strategies

These insights linking the physical attributes of the brand to theemotional benefits they deliver and in some cases to the higher-levelpersonal values that are satisfied through ownership can enable brandowners to be more innovative in their positioning strategies Certain brandowners explicitly use these sorts of insights to drive their value-creationprocesses For example motorbike manufacturer Harley-Davidson buildson the idea of ownership conferring a particular way of life From the bikesto the merchandise to the tattoos consumers see Harley-Davidson as a partof their identity enabling the brand to strongly differentiate itself in themarketplace In the personal computer (PC) sector the iMAC is positionedas a sensual product infused with mystery thereby engendering a warmthfor the brand among consumers For consumers of these brands theemotional switching costs are significant For the organizations behind thebrands their brand positioning is the result of an ongoing strategic process

122 Value Creation

Figure 73 A positioning map of the UK eating-out market

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 122

that informs the creation and delivery of the value proposition It is not theresult of an ad hoc tactical communications campaign

The Positioning Process

To guide the efforts of an organization in the positioning process it is usualto create a simple statement of what the brand is about and how thecommunications strategy should support its market positioning For mostorganizations the ease with which this statement is created is directlycorrelated with the way the positioning process is managed As SergioZyman former advertising VP at Coca-Cola once said lsquoIf you want toestablish a clear image in the minds of consumers you first need a clearimage in your own mindrsquo However this is seldom achieved for a numberof different reasons For instance some organizations seek to includeeverything in the positioning statement attempting to be all things to allpeople Others do not know where to start the process of articulation Yetothers insist on allowing everyone in the organization to have an opinionand try to reflect them all in a concise statement This process needs to bedriven by someone who has clear responsibility for the task resulting in anunambiguous brand positioning In addition the adoption of a simple

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 123

P

F

B

Figure 74 Mapping brand linkages

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 123

approach (where less is more) and the ability to take a long-term view aidthe successful completion of the task Burberry exemplifies the ability of anorganization to achieve a turnaround in fortunes based on a firmly managedrepositioning process

BurberryIn recent years Burberry has repositioned itself successfully by redefining thevalue consumers are seeking and creating an improved value proposition forthem In the mid-1990s Burberryrsquos unique British heritage and famoustrademark ndash the red black camel and white check pattern ndash was no longerenough to save the dysfunctional retailer Burberry had become over-relianton tired products and by 1997 trading profit collapsed In October 1997 RoseMarie Bravo took over as CEO and began a process of repositioning thebrand propelling it into luxury status Her aim was to turn the staid Britishbrand that was being eclipsed by competitors into an iconic and aspirationalbrand with cross-generational appeal By February 1999 Burberry was a firmfavourite on the catwalks of Milan Burberry designs ranging from the classictrench coat to funky pink kilts fuelled an explosion of accessories also in thetrademark check Since 1998 Burberry sales have doubled and the brand isnow seen as a financial success

The repositioning of Burberry was achieved by having a clear vision inplace Bravo recognized that although Burberry had become stale the public

124 Value Creation

Figure 75 Repositioning Burberry

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 124

still associated strongly with its heritage and quality Under her guidance thecompany began to reposition itself as the authentic British lifestyle brandThis moved it into competition with high-margin luxury design houses such asGucci Prada and Ralph Lauren with the opportunity for superior returns (seeFigure 75)

Burberryrsquos remarkable recovery was achieved through repositioning thebrand changing and expanding the product mix and changing the structureof distribution and sales channels Concentrating on the repositioning of thebrand Burberry retained its four core values (quality classic heritage iconic)and adopted four more (innovation style aspiration modernity) in order tocreate a modern spin to widen its appeal and raise global recognition A keysuccess factor was a coherent communications strategy across all mediaorchestrated to deliver a consistent image worldwide Leading models suchas Stella Tenant and Kate Moss were used to inspire more fashion-orientedadvertising Product design was improved with the input of RobertoMenichetti and then in 2001 Christopher Bailey as chief designer Sponsor-ship of high-profile events such as the Mario Testino Exhibition at the NationalPortrait Gallery and the Burberry Cup a polo match in association with thePrince of Wales reinforced the brandrsquos high class British pedigree

Other activities reinforced the brandrsquos revitalized position For example theproduct mix was expanded to include high-margin accessories childrens-wear and a perfume The range of menrsquos and womenrsquos apparel wasconsolidated distribution was reviewed and retail channels wererationalized As a part of this process a large number of product licenceswere terminated as they were judged to be inconsistent with the repositionedbrand image

THE ROLE OF PRICE IN VALUE CREATION

Price plays a key role in the value-creation process It can for exampleindicate value and quality In the case of a Rolex watch or a Pret A Mangersandwich the premium price reflects the lsquopremiumnessrsquo of the brandSimilarly price can be used to support brand positioning Stella Artois isadvertised as a lsquoreassuringly expensiversquo lager and easyJet occupies a well-defined value-for-money niche in the air travel market In other wordsprice works in combination with other elements of the marketing mix as a signal of value for consumers

Consumer goods companies are coming under increasing pressure toreview their pricing strategies as both consumers and trade customers

The Role of Price in Value Creation 125

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 125

sharpen their focus on value aided in many cases by the power of theInternet in their search for best value The introduction of the Euro andchanging European legislation have added to pricing complexity Whensetting pricing strategies it is important for managers to understand therole that price plays in the value proposition Price is used by consumers as acriterion for evaluating the value of the offer and by supplying organizationsas a competitive tool The effect of the shift from a production-driven to aconsumption-led economy has forced many organizations to replace theircost-plus approach to pricing with demand-led pricing policies

For brand owners price is a significant lever in ensuring that value isdefined created and delivered at a profit Revenue is after all the outcomeof volume multiplied by price (and volume itself is impacted by price)Increases in profitability can be gained by increasing prices reducing costsor increasing the volume sold However it is changes in price levels thathave the biggest impact on profitability due to the gearing ratio whichmeans that a greater amount of the benefit will flow through to the bottomline compared to the other two strategies Volume increases are counteredby variable costs and reducing costs usually applies to values significantlysmaller than turnover

Brand owners must take account of a number of factors when drawing upa pricing plan As depicted in Figure 76 these include internal coststargets and constraints pricing strategy (to be premium or not)competitor pricing strategy and consumer insight The outputs of thispricing decision-making process will impact the business case andinfluence how performance monitoring and scenario planning areundertaken Current pricing is often driven by past events rather than logicand consistency leading to a situation where pricing is inconsistent acrossmarkets For example prices may be set by individual countries or bycorporate divisions acting in isolation from the rest of the organization Asingle company may use several different approaches to pricing in order torespond to short-term or local market needs or it may be that differentprices have been agreed as part of key account management negotiations

The Evaluation of Value

It is not uncommon for prices to be set without reference to the consumerrsquosevaluation of the value proposition leading to a situation where consumers

126 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 126

believe price is out of line that is too expensive or even too cheap Thisincomplete approach to pricing can also undermine brand-positioningstrategies and may potentially damage the brand Furthermore it can leadto a situation where parallel trading develops leading to lost profitopportunities The way to prevent these issues arising is to base pricingstrategy on a rigorous analysis of all the elements inherent in complex pricedecision making Pricing strategy must take account of both theconsumerrsquos and the organizationrsquos evaluation of value as shown in Figure77 Clearly each player makes a trade-off in the value exchange Brandowners bear the costs of defining creating and delivering value and need ahealthy profit margin to remain in business while consumers incur costsassociated with evaluating the value proposition and gaining ownership ofthe brand

Consumers tend to evaluate the value proposition not in terms of theticket price but in terms of relative value that is whether the offer seemsexpensive cheap or fair to them This notion is not new Price as a reflectionof the value placed on a product or service by the consumer was an idea firstarticulated by the Victorian economist Alfred Marshall His beliefs aboutthe effects of consumer preferences on transactions dominated economic

The Role of Price in Value Creation 127

Figure 76 The complex pricing decision-making process Adapted from MarketingImprovements 2002

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 127

thinking until the middle of the twentieth century The concept of therational consumer or lsquohomo economicusrsquo held sway until the 1950s whenthe idea that product attributes other than price might be influencing thepurchase decision was promulgated It was suggested that price mighthave more than one meaning for consumers At about the same time theidea of psychological price emerged The underlying assumption here isthat price has a double meaning for consumers Besides the maximum pricethat they would be willing to pay it is believed that there is also aminimum price for the product to be credible In other words consumershave an upper and a lower price limit in mind

This concept has been refined through further research and pricingtheorists now talk about consumersrsquo lsquoindifference zonersquo The boundaries ofthis psychological zone are marked by a belief that at the upper limit ifsomething is too expensive then consumers will not buy it because theyfeel the price is unjustified while at the lower limit if something is toocheap they will not buy it because they feel the value is suspectUncovering this indifference zone can form the basis of a successfuldemand-led pricing strategy in line with the tenets of the New Consumer

128 Value Creation

Figure 77 The evaluation of value

C

C

CBP

CMP

PP

E

P

P

T

C

E

T

andandS

LSCO

P

MT

z

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 128

Marketing model Ryanair is one example of an organization that takes thisvalue-centric approach to pricing seriously

RyanairRyanair is now the most valuable and profitable airline in Europe It haspowered its way to success by identifying a large under-served customerbase the leisure traveller Ryanair segmented the travel market and onrecognizing that the key values of the leisure traveller are price andpunctuality implemented a strategy to deliver low prices and on-time flightsIn doing so the company evolved a successful low-yieldhigh-volumebusiness model

Ryanair created its value proposition to appeal to the price-consciousconsumer by choosing to compete on routes served by large full-pricecarriers such as Air France and Lufthansa These airlines are highlysubsidized and therefore have little incentive to reduce their operating costskeeping prices to consumers high By removing non-value-added items suchas meals assigned seating and the use of major airports Ryanair was able tooffer prices up to 80ndash90 lower than the flag carriers on numerous routes Asa result it was able to gain market share and brand recognition within eachroute market Ryanairrsquos low cost base also forms a significant barrier tocompetition from larger airlines with high fixed costs

Taking advantage of the deregulation of the European market and thegrowing demand for affordable and reliable air travel Ryanair has created abrand experience that delivers more for less Pricing is managed in real timeFlights booked months ahead of departure are made available at the lowestprices while those booked nearer to the travel date are more expensive Tokeep processing costs down consumers are also encouraged using financialinducements to book via the airlinersquos website rather than over the phone

This second cell of the New Consumer Marketing model is an essentialbuilding block in a demand system It enables the organization to movefrom defining value to creating and communicating that value effectivelyand eventually to delivering it While the process of value creation isdependent on the interplay of new product development brandingpositioning and pricing it is ultimately the role of innovation thatunderpins its success

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Innovation provides a way of creating new value-producing resources orendowing existing ones with an enhanced potential for yielding profit

The Role of Price in Value Creation 129

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 129

bull It is the consumer and not the competition that lies at the heart ofinnovation Providing consumers with a step change in value thateffectively creates a new market can leave the competition standing asold sources of advantage are destroyed and new ones created

bull Organizations that work to reduce marketplace complexity areconstrained to an incremental approach to innovation Those thatchoose to absorb it can then work to create options and learn as anorganization resulting in more radical forms of innovation

bull Brands have become the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition

bull Brands are no longer built just through advertising to consumers theyutilize other stakeholders including alliances and staff

bull The positioning of a brand in the marketplace is a manifestation ofwhere it sits vis-agrave-vis the competition and in the same way thatconsumers invest a brand with its value they also determine thepositioning of a brand

bull Price represents the evaluation of the value proposition and the effectof the shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy isforcing organizations to switch their strategy from a cost-plusapproach to demand-led pricing policies

130 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 130

The process of delivering value to a specified audience through the mediaand channels of their choice

Delivering value = communicating and distributing the value created

Watchword = agility

In the consumption-led economy value delivery is undergoing rapidchange for two important reasons the emergence of the New Consumerand the proliferation of media and channels This changing marketingenvironment poses new challenges for organizations particularly in respectto how they manage media and channel choices customer service and thesupply chain To be effective organizations must ensure that theirstrategies for each of these key areas are aligned with the overall strategy oftheir demand system As with the first two cells this means having a value-centric orientation in the business

Value delivery is concerned with how consumers get to own the productor service It involves the way in which the offer is presented thetransaction is handled and after-sales service and support are providedThe third cell of the New Consumer model focuses on communicating anddistributing value in order to achieve maximum consumer responsivenessand satisfaction The key to success here is organizational agility

THE ROLE OF AGILITY IN VALUE DELIVERY

For a company to be agile it is to be capable of operating profitably in acustomer environment of continually and unpredictable changing customeropportunities

(S Goldman et al 1995)

Value Delivery 8

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 131

In the new marketplace of proliferating media and channel choicescharacterized by an increasing number of new products and services and adecline in organizational ability to forecast sales organizations need to beable to respond rapidly and flexibly to consumer requirements Thisdemands a capability to change gear and immerse the organization in newopportunities on a continual basis The phrase that resonates withmanagers is lsquothe need to develop organizational agilityrsquo

The notion of organizational agility has its origins in flexiblemanufacturing systems where it was believed that automation alone wouldconfer this capability Over time a wider business application has emergedlargely through developments in supply-chain management Currentthinking defines organizational agility as lsquoa business-wide capability thatembraces organizational structures information systems logistics processesand in particular mindsetsrsquo1 The agile organization creates competitiveadvantage for itself by being able to adapt its people and processes to thecontinually changing needs of the marketplace increasingly with the supportof technical innovation The challenge for consumer-serving companies is tofuse people and process approaches in order to achieve cost-effective valuedelivery Competitive advantage today lies in recruiting and motivating theright people while at the same time constantly improving business processesWhen either element people or process fails to embrace change theorganization is less nimble and thus less able to compete successfully

Organizational culture plays a significant role in achieving andmaintaining such agility The fusion of people and processes can only takeplace in an environment conducive to effective change managementCreating an appropriate organizational culture involves a number of factorsincluding for example the management of employees the sharing ofknowledge and the choice of performance indicators These factors areconsidered in more depth in the next chapter but are raised here as they canbe seen to have an impact on organizational agility in the cases offered in thischapter

New Consumer Marketing promotes organizational agility byencouraging a value-centric orientation in the organization A businessthat is focused on defining creating and delivering value profitably is abusiness that can lsquoturn on a sixpencersquo and exploit opportunities

The Veterans Agency (VA) formerly known as the War PensionsAgency provides a useful example

132 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 132

The Veterans AgencyThe Veterans Agency (VA) is responsible for assessing and paying pensionsto disabled servicemen and women and their spouses in the UK It wasestablished in Elizabethan times (when soldiers were paid pound10 a year) butwas launched as an executive agency in the mid-1990s In November 2000when the UK Prime Minister Tony Blair announced that surviving formerprisoners of war in the Far East were to receive a pound10000 special paymentfrom the Government the VA was faced with the task of tracking downthousands of individuals dispersed across the world As an agileorganization one that had its people and processes focused on consumerresponsiveness its project plan enabled 14000 claims to be processed inless than three months

For many organizations adopting a market-responsive approach tovalue delivery is a daily challenge Building on organizational strengthssegmenting customers in a meaningful way and utilizing IT to meetspecific objectives are a few of the many ways in which organizations canimprove their flexibility and customer responsiveness Lastminutecom is agood example here

LastminutecomIn 2001 the web-based travel company handled some 800000 onlinetransactions which included travel hotel and restaurant bookings and giftpurchases Around 20 of the pound124 million transaction value was generatedoutside its key markets in the UK and France Lastminute constantlyredesigns its website (see Figure 81) brings in new suppliers and improvesthe customer experience Its investment in IT is high due to a concentrationon web design connectivity voice-recognition software and a sophisticatedCRM system that segments 5 million customers on a database according to their purchasing habits The CRM system enables Lastminute to emailspecial offers to selected customers based on the companyrsquos knowledge oftheir previous purchases Since its launch four years ago the company hasgrown quickly through the acquisition of rivals and the involvement of majorplayers (eg BAA Sony Music Deutsche Telekom France Telecom andIntel) who have bought equity stakes in the company

THE ROLE OF MEDIA AND CHANNELS IN VALUE DELIVERY

New Consumers live in a global marketplace where they are increasinglyoffered lower prices greater convenience and more choice This is in large

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 133

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 133

part due to the proliferation of media and channels which organizations useto market their brands products and services Media strategies have to dowith how the value proposition is communicated while channel strategieshave to do with how it is transacted The role of media and channels is ofvital importance in delivering the value proposition as it relates to how andwhere the exchange of value takes place With todayrsquos empoweredconsumers able to go to market more easily than ever before organizationscan no longer afford to manage media and channels as if they were stand-alone entities

In the production-driven era media and channels were distinguishablefrom one another For instance television was considered a medium andretail was considered a channel Now in the consumption-led economymedia and channels have become closely related and even interchangeableFor example the retailer is rapidly becoming the media ownerrsquos biggestcompetitor This is evident in the fact that the lsquobig fourrsquo food retailers ndashTesco Asda Safeway and Sainsburyrsquos ndash currently account for 70 of

134 Value Delivery

Figure 81 Lastminutecom

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 134

household food expenditure and the media issue facing brand owners iswhether to advertise on television or run a gondola end promotion as ameans of reaching a large number of relevant consumers with anappropriate message or offer For many brand owners the answer is to focuspromotional resources in-store thereby communicating directly withconsumers at the point of purchase as opposed to communicating withthem through another medium that is not so closely tied to the point ofpurchase

The convergence of media and channel choice is the result of the comingtogether of two trends progress in brand thinking and the inexorablemarch of developments in IT As outlined in Chapter 7 a brand used to bethought of as a lifeless manipulable entity that was built throughadvertising Today it is seen as a dynamic asset that lives in the consumerrsquosmind an experience of the value proposition that is created throughmultiple touchpoints where the organization wittingly or unwittinglyengages the consumer

As media choices have expanded and become more sophisticatedopportunities for dialogue with the consumer have grown in a stepwisefashion Supplying organizations and consumers are no longer restricted tocommunicating with each other by telephone facsimile or post or throughface-to-face encounters with in-store staff or sales representatives Newtechnologies have given rise to personal and interactive media such asemail the Internet personal digital assistants (PDAs) mobile phones and the next-generation smart phone In the process of enrichingcommunication these developments have expanded the role of IT IT isnow not only concerned with the exchange of information but also withinteraction and with the promise of integration in the near future Wheredialogue can take place so the option to transact also arises and the use ofmedia and channels become interwoven

New Consumer Marketing demands an approach to media and channelsthat builds on the benefits of media and channel integration First amongthese benefits is the ability to develop organizational agility and thusenhance consumer responsiveness The new range of media and channelchoices available offers organizations the opportunity to lower costsprovide better service and personalize the value proposition The collectionand analysis of previously unimaginable kinds of data through increasinglysophisticated technologies makes this possible

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 135

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 135

Making the Most of Media Choices

The proliferation of media choices is causing tectonic shifts in marketingthinking about how they can be used to build brands Media decisions inthe production-driven era were about how to advertise to consumerswhich was a largely one-way exercise motivated by the desire to controlconsumer response In a subsequent phase more interactive media choicessuch as direct response media (eg direct mail offers and direct responsetelephone lines) were used to encourage more continuous communicationbetween consumers and the organization In the consumption-led economythe aim is connectivity or the development of a shared understanding thatcomes from ongoing dialogues experiences and shared values that developbetween a marketer and consumers (Schultz and Lindberg-Repo 2002)The challenge for marketers today is selecting the most effective andefficient combination of media from the wealth of interactive and non-interactive media options The goal is to ensure that consumers have aperfect experience across whatever media they use to interact with theorganization

Connectivity enables brand owners to build deeper and more enduringrelationships with New Consumers These relationships are developedthrough the empowered engagement of both participants in a two-wayinteraction process one that is exemplified by Nokia

NokiaThe Nokia Game is a multimedia adventure-cum-espionage role-playinggame which Nokia has been running for the last four years in 18 countriesattracting over half a million players in 2001 Clues are given out to players ina range of ways including text messaging voicemail email the Internet (seeFigure 82) TV radio and the press The game is based on the lsquofuture ofcommunicationrsquo and it educates players on future technologies and applica-tions Players have to find out about everything from different ringtones andmenu systems through to GSM and GPRS in order to progress from onestage of the game to the next

More than just a form of play the Nokia Game is a marketing platform thatcreates Nokia brand advocates by being particularly relevant and credible toa specifically defined audience The game gets consumers highly involved inthe brand by engaging and rewarding them for their attention and therebycreating a virtual Nokia community In effect players give Nokia permission tomarket the companyrsquos products to them In this way the various levels ofdialogue ndash texting voicemail press for example ndash enable a mutual

136 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 136

understanding and reciprocal generation of the value proposition Playersgain knowledge and excitement from the game while Nokia benefits frombuilding knowledge of its consumers The game grows as the network ofplayers grows and the bonds between Nokia and the players develop

lsquoGaining permissionrsquo is a facet of media strategy that has emerged withthe coming of the consumption-led economy New Consumersrsquo highlyfragmented lifestyles and time pressures mean that they have less time tomeet all the demands on them They are not the passive subjects ofmarketers but discerning and demanding customers Part of the valueexchange in the consumption-led economy relates to the value theseconsumers get out of investing their attention As Herbert Simon NobelPrize winning economist has noted lsquoInformation consumes attention hellip awealth of information creates a poverty of attention hellip the only factor thatbecomes scarce in a world of abundance is human attentionrsquo Permissionmarketing (Godin 1999) has therefore developed out of the problemsassociated with gaining the attention of consumers Where a marketerreceives the consumerrsquos permission the conscious effort required by theconsumer to pay attention more often than not results in dialogue betweenthe two parties

The challenge for brand owners in making the most of media choices hasan external and an internal component Externally they are aiming to

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 137

Figure 82 The Nokia Game

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 137

replicate the experience of a one-to-one relationship where the consumerfeels they are being spoken to by the same person in every encounter Theinternal challenge is to generate data across the various media to create asingle unified view of the consumer This single view ensures thatregardless of the medium or channel through which the consumer interactswith the organization the consumer is recognized and the history of theirrelationship is remembered Achieving this single view demands clearobjectives in the management of data issues that are explored later inChapter 9

From a consumer perspective a perfect experience that replicates thefeeling of being spoken to by the same person in every brand encounter ismost likely to be delivered through a media-neutral strategy Theintegrated brand communications strategies adopted by Volkswagen andStella Artois provide good examples Volkswagenrsquos multimediamulti-agency approach has helped the brand double its new car sales and valueshare within six years The strategy which includes the use of PR directmarketing online marketing cinema and radio led directly to 151000extra sales and pound199 billion extra revenue for VW UK

Stella ArtoisStella Artoisrsquo communications strategy cleverly exploits knowledge ofconsumer lifestyles and the popular medium of film Research into thebrandrsquos largely young male (aged 18ndash34) consumer base had revealed that ahigh majority visited the cinema or rented videos on a regular basis At a timewhen most other lager beers were using sport to communicate their brandvalues Stella adopted the theme of film Its communications strategyincluded advertisements that possessed a cinematic feel film sponsorshipon Channel 4 film events around the UK and on-pack promotions forBlockbuster videos The task of making this theme work across a number ofagencies fell to the marketing manager who appointed a lead agency foreach cycle of the strategy The specialist agencies ndash in advertising salespromotions media buying consumer and trade public relations for examplendash then activated the element of the strategy within their particular mediumCrucial to this way of working is that everyone buys into the same definition ofthe brand echoing the need for brand clarity discussed in Chapter 7

As well as integrating media choices across channels some brand ownersare pioneering integration across a number of brand owners to deliver aperfect experience for consumers The aim of these brand owners is to cross-

138 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 138

promote their own operations and develop long-term marketingpartnerships Disney is one company that has pursued such an integrativeapproach

DisneyDisney has a number of cross-media deals with global partners such asHome Depot and McDonaldrsquos In 2001 the DIY chain Home Depot signed athree-year tie-up across Disneyrsquos ABC network ESPN sports channel andLifetime channel The deal was reported to be worth pound65 million to Disney Aspart of the agreement Disney is launching a range of branded childrenrsquospaints in Home Depot and has also agreed to purchase Home Depot productsfor its own operations Disneyrsquos ten-year deal with McDonaldrsquos successfullycross-promotes Disney films through childrenrsquos Happy Meal promotions inMcDonaldrsquos restaurants

Making the Most of Channel Choices

In the same way that the proliferation of media choices is causing a shift inthinking about how best to communicate the value proposition theexpansion of marketing channels is challenging thinking about how bestto transact value The brand owner must devise a channel strategy that isappealing to its target consumers and profitable to its business This mayinvolve the use of a single channel or a combination of channels The brandowner must choose from an ever-widening range of direct channels (egInternet telephone facsimile) and indirect channels (eg retailersdistributors and service providers)

As with media strategies the goal of channel strategies is to ensure thatthe consumer has a perfect experience across all the channels used One ofthe biggest issues for organizations here is to minimize channel conflictInteractive channels offer organizations the opportunity to transactdirectly with consumers faster and at a lower cost than most non-interactive channels do Consequently many organizations have decided tocut out the middlemen and have ceased using traditional intermediariesFor example call centre technology allows insurance companies such asDirect Line to offer and transact the value proposition by dealing withconsumers directly over the telephone This obviates the need for expensivenetworks of insurance brokers and keeps the premiums low creatingmutual benefit for both seller and buyer

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 139

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 139

While a strategy of lsquodisintermediationrsquo may appear seductive at firstsight channel strategy development should be based upon the optimumcombination of channels necessary to provide the most effective and efficientmeans of delivering the value proposition Different channels offer differentadvantages (see Figure 83) Norwich Union for example sells financialproducts directly to consumers through independent financial advisers(IFAs) The Guardian newspaper produces and sells newspapers throughintermediaries and also offers an online news service free of chargeThorntonrsquos the confectioner transacts its value proposition through anetwork of shops by phone fax and post and via the Internet

It is crucial for organizations to understand why their consumers preferto use one channel rather than another why for example some favourremote interaction while others prefer transacting face-to-face Identifyingand satisfying the channel preferences of New Consumers is particularlychallenging as these may change according to the type of purchase or thetime at which the transaction takes place For instance consumers may becontent to book a weekend trip to Europe using the online facility of adiscount airline but may prefer completing the transaction for a lengthiersummer trip abroad in a face-to-face encounter Above all New Consumersare looking for organizational agility ndash a supplier who can adapt to theirdiffering needs on different purchasing occasions Channel strategydecisions therefore need to be reviewed regularly and adjusted asappropriate

Another popular channel strategy in the consumption-led economy isreintermediation or the introduction of new types of intermediaryExamples of this include the use of web-enabled information agents alsoknown as lsquoinfomediariesrsquo who carry out information searches on behalf ofprospective purchasers Some infomediaries not only research products andservices on behalf of consumers but also manage sales transactions and post-sales service agreements Autobytel for example providesinformation about car prices and purchase availability and will evenfacilitate the sale and organize delivery This one-stop-shop approach isattractive to many New Consumers who have little time to shop aroundfor best value Some even engage lsquopersonal shoppersrsquo such as TenUK to actas their own purchasing agents across a number of sectors

Organizations such as Conciera which offers clients a technology platformon which to transform their businesses in line with this buyer-centric

140 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 140

philosophy believe that this is where the future of channel strategydevelopment lies ndash that by acting as the consumerrsquos partner and providingaccess to a new set of information tools across new media and telephonechannels agent-based businesses will create and deliver new forms ofsuperior customer service and consumer value

THE ROLE OF SERVICE IN VALUE DELIVERY

The arrival of the consumption-led economy has elevated the role of servicein the creation and delivery of the value proposition Increasinglyorganizations are recognizing service as a source of competitivedifferentiation Service excellence is seen as a key profitability driverSouthwest Airlines (SWA) and First Direct are examples of organizationsthat have used service to enhance the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition SWA has transformed cabin service into a form ofentertainment that is regularly promoted by word-of-mouthrecommendation Similarly First Direct now offers a remote bankingservice that consumers have warmed to and are keen to advocate In boththese cases the consumerrsquos experience of the brand is delivered through theactions and attitudes of staff In effect the service delivered by staff is thebrand

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 141

Figure 83 This Royal Mail advertisement shows the extent of channel choice

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 141

Despite wide acknowledgement of the value of providing high levels ofservice many customer-care activities fail to meet buyer and supplierexpectations New Consumers are more demanding and sophisticated intheir expectations of service and organizations need to be able to respondaccordingly This requires an ethos of consumer responsiveness within thebusiness and New Consumer Marketing proposes a living demand systemto enable this to flourish The NCM model acknowledges the importanceof employeesrsquo contribution to value creation and delivery this was exploredin Chapter 7 and is emphasized further in Chapter 9

Creating a Service Strategy

To optimize the role of service in the delivery process it is useful to breakservice down into its three component stages pre-transaction transactionand post-transaction The pre-transaction elements of service relate tocorporate policies or programmes involving written statements of servicepolicy and the planning of strategies for dealing with different types ofconsumers at various points in their relationship with the organization Thetransaction elements comprise the customer service variables that aredirectly involved in the delivery of the value proposition such as productavailability order cycle times service ambience and so on Post-transactionelements have to do with the support consumers receive once they takeownership of the product or service These may include warranties partsand repair services complaint procedures loyalty clubs and so on

To ensure a consistent approach across these three stages of the serviceencounter exemplary organizations create a service strategy As suggestedby Professor Martin Christopher in his book The Customer Service Planner(1992) service strategy involves the identification of a service mission inwhich the organization articulates its service pledge and the setting ofservice objectives These objectives should link back to the insightgenerated by the organization into the nature of the value consumers areseeking and the consequent analysis of opportunities available They willthus serve to highlight the importance of service quality variables such asreliability responsiveness assurance and empathy Service strategy canthen be refined for different consumer segments as different clusters ofconsumers will be looking for different service packages Once a servicepackage has been developed for each segment service programmes can be

142 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 142

implemented The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company is extremely focused oncreating exactly the right service levels for its customers

The Ritz-Carlton HotelThe Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company has created a value-centric service strategythat is implemented across the world by its 22000 employees The companywas awarded the Malcolm Baldridge National Quality Award in 1992 and1999 and is one of only two companies to have received the award twiceThis is a considerable achievement given that the company operates in anindustry where high staff turnover rates are the norm The companyrsquos strategyis characterized by an emphasis on generating employee satisfaction basedon a belief that this results in customer satisfaction which in turn deliversgreater profitability The strategy is pursued in a number of ways Forexample each day every member of staff has a meeting with their supervisormanager the vice-president or the chief executive at the start of their shiftAlthough the meeting lasts only 15 minutes it covers all the essential itemsfrom which VIPs are staying in the hotel to staff suggestions about serviceimprovements What sets this pre-shift briefing apart from the way other hotelchains organize is that every employee of the company across the worlddiscusses the same subject on the same day Each day the briefings focus onone of 20 basic service principles standards that were laid down when thecompany was formed The following are a few examples

No 10 ndash Each employee is empowered For example when a guest has aproblem or needs something special you should break away from yourregular duties to address and resolve the issueNo 11 ndash Uncompromising levels of cleanliness are the responsibility ofevery employeeNo 12 ndash To provide the finest personal service for our guests eachemployee is responsible for identifying and recording individual guestpreferences

Source Tony Mosely lsquoAre you being served The route to good customercarersquo Consumer Policy Review NovDec 2002

Recruiting and Motivating Staff

Acknowledgement of the importance of people in delivering service has ledto a greater interest in the recruitment motivation and retention of staffResearch shows that when employees identify with the norms and values ofan organization that reflect a commitment to customer service they are less

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 143

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 143

inclined to leave their jobs This reduction in employee turnover serves tostrengthen the organization It promotes a culture where service valuesbecome embedded in the way things are done and are more easily transmittedto successive generations of employees Recruitment is therefore of crucialimportance to organizations In order to attract and retain the highest qualityrecruits ndash those who share the organizationrsquos values and will make a majorcontribution to its future success ndash organizations have to market themselvesto potential recruits as employers of choice With changing demographicsthreatening the supply of young people in the West the so-called lsquowar fortalentrsquo (Michaels et al 2001) is an everyday reality for many companies

At the Ritz-Carlton recruitment is carried out using a number oftechniques Psychometric tests are used to identify candidates with theright work attitude and by matching their test scores against those of thebest performing staff the company is able to allocate jobs according toindividual suitability New employees undergo a minimum of fiveinterviews but provisional job offers are normally issued within 48 hours ofthe first interview so that good people are not lost to the competition

The Ritz-Carltonrsquos approach provides a rich contrast with the way Pret AManger recruits its staff Following application and interview Pret AMangerrsquos prospective candidates are paid to work for one day in one of thecompanyrsquos stores Staff already working in that store then make the finaldecision as to whether the candidate is employed This has the effect of

144 Value Delivery

Figure 84 Pret A Manger

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 144

empowering staff and ensuring only people with the lsquoPret attitudersquo (seeFigure 84) who are able to demonstrate they would uphold Pret AMangerrsquos values and ethos are taken on In fact only about 20 ofcandidates pass this exacting test

Staff motivation is another important part of retaining employees Mostorganizations use employment benefits and training and development toreward and motivate their employees As Singapore Airlines demonstratesthese need to fit with the values and culture of the organization and betailored to improving the overall value-centric ethos and practice of theorganization

Singapore AirlinesSingapore Airlines employs about 8 of Singaporersquos working population andis consistently voted one of the top local employers The training ofemployees is comprehensive ndash the programme for new stewardesses hasbeen referred to as a lsquodebutante boot camprsquo involving four months of socialas well as operational skills training Career development opportunities arestrong and staff are regularly appraised as a means of improving theirperformance In an effort to retain trained staff who have taken maternityleave the company operates a lsquoFlying Momrsquo scheme which enablesstewardesses with long service records to spend more time at home with theirfamilies

Other successful organizations have evolved similarly unique approachesto motivating staff which often depend on cross-functional collaborationbetween marketing operations and human resources management It isimportant that there is alignment between the value proposition offered toconsumers and that offered to employees For example Countrywide PorterNovelli (CPN) is a successful business-to-business PR consultancy thatoperates what it calls the 4Is culture

bull Imagination ndash making our work memorablebull Irreverence ndash challenging the status quobull Improvement ndash a little better every timebull Initiative ndash making the first move

This articulation of principles does not simply take the form of a brightlogo to be used in communications but provides a framework formanaging delivery of the value proposition both internally and externallyIt represents the distinctive advantage CPN believes it offers clients and

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 145

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 145

guides the recruitment training and promotion of staff internallyUnusually the director of personnel and development and the marketingdirector sit down together and discuss joint implementation of the internaland external marketing strategy on a regular basis

Empowering Employees to Live the Brand

A New Consumer Marketing approach to service requires the highestlevels of consumer responsiveness and service providers have a greatopportunity to make this a differentiated part of the value propositionWhat New Consumers are looking for is an individual response to theirparticular requirements and those on the so-called front-line of a businessare in a position to customize the experience for them The way employeesfeel about their job often defines the way they view the brand and the waythey communicate it to consumers For this reason many organizations seethe empowerment of employees as a business priority

The secret of success here is not so much a mechanistic prescription or aseries of instructions to staff but rather a dialogue where organizationshelp staff understand what the brand stands for and seeks to accomplishand what their individual role is in achieving the brand objectives It isimportant that employees receive information about organizationalperformance and that they are rewarded for contributing to it Whilelsquoliving the brandrsquo is a common corporate goal few organizations actuallyachieve it A MORI survey carried out in 2002 reported that 30 of UKemployees are brand neutral or are not interested in their companyrsquos brandwhile a further 22 are brand saboteurs actively working against thebrand culture This means less than half of the countryrsquos employees can beconsidered as brand champions who will spread their companiesrsquo brandvalues Of these 33 would talk positively about the brand if asked andonly 15 would talk positively about the brand spontaneously

Formal communication programmes that aim to market the brandinternally are used by many organizations to endow staff with an enhancedpotential for yielding profit For example Land Rover launched the latestRange Rover with a series of coordinated events for employees dealers andthe press Part of the strategy was the placement of the car in the TombRaider movie Around 20000 employees at Land Rover were invited toprivate screenings of the film and encouraged to bring their families

146 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 146

creating great word-of-mouth marketing British Airways when facedwith orchestrating 50000 articulations of the brand through its 50000staff worldwide launched the lsquoPassion for Servicersquo initiative It isessentially a training session to teach staff about brands and the BA brandin particular Having spent pound1 million developing Club World and pound200 million implementing it the internal marketing programme is a wayof protecting and enhancing that investment Brand clarity as discussedearlier in Chapter 7 is a necessary precondition of making staffempowerment work

Staff empowerment requires trust and courage on the part of theorganization as employees are given autonomy to interpret the brand in away that is both meaningful to them and their job and to consumersTesco for example empowers staff to respond to legitimate customercomplaints by giving them the authority to replace products or issuereimbursements without having to refer to supervisors In doing so thecompany demonstrates a respect for their employeesrsquo ability to assesssituations and manage customers In a similar move Abbey National hasgiven its front-line staff the power to take decisions such as reimbursingcustomers who feel they have been charged unfairly In both these cases bynot passing problem resolution up the chain of command consumers aremade to feel valued and respected The issue is dealt with quickly savingexpensive company time and ensuring customer satisfaction

Speed of response in resolving consumer problems is all-important asNew Consumers are becoming more marketing literate and less easy toplease Those whose issues are not dealt with swiftly and satisfactorily havethe confidence and wherewithal to make their views known across a rangeof media (as described in Chapter 2) Studies have shown that while up to98 of dissatisfied customers never complain when they receive poorservice 90 will not return to the disappointing vendor in future as aresult of the poor service Furthermore consumers who are dissatisfied arelikely to tell at least ten others about their poor service experience whereasa good service experience will be related to only three others This makes itdoubly hard for organizations to gain a reputation for good service and allthe more reason for an organization to work hard to maintain a goodreputation

The processes within an organization that are concerned with creatingdeveloping and maintaining an internal service culture and an orientation

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 147

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 147

that enables the organization to achieve its service goals are usuallymanaged as part of an internal marketing strategy The fundamental aim isto develop awareness of the value proposition sought by both internal andexternal customers and to remove functional barriers to organizationalperformance The organization must ensure that every employee whetherthey are directly or indirectly frequently or infrequently in contact withexternal customers contributes to the delivery of a superior valueproposition Despite the fact that for many organizations internalmarketing programmes are a formal part of the way value is transactedthere is no consensus on how these programmes should best beimplemented This is because the importance of internal marketing hasonly recently been acknowledged and because of the debate that has arisenabout exactly who within an organization should have responsibility for itThis topic is returned to in Chapter 9

THE ROLE OF TECHNOLOGY INTEGRATION IN VALUEDELIVERY

The integration of technology into service delivery is transforming manybusinesses and Petcareco Limited is a useful example of this Petcareco is aone-stop pet resort and care centre based in Washington Tyne and Wearwhich looks after pets (mainly cats and dogs) while their owners are onholiday (see Figure 85) As part of the service all sorts of creature comforts ndashfrom TVs to sofas ndash can be added to a petrsquos temporary lsquoapartmentrsquo Ahydrotherapy pool and a bespoke vet service complement the pet careservices The business is staffed by a team of dedicated animal lovers who aresupported in their work by a sophisticated but easily manageable range oftechnology For example handheld devices are used to carry daily pet careschedules and a back office system records data on every pet enabling thecompany to instantly recognize and recall any previous lsquoguestrsquo history anduse it to make the pet feel welcome and at home The aim is to ensure thatevery animal gets the right service at the right time in the right place

The aim of integrating technology into service delivery is to optimizethe use of available media and channels Again the goal is to ensure thatthe consumer has a perfect experience across all media and channels usedIntegration in todayrsquos complex and demanding marketing environmentrequires moving away from the conventional approach to media and

148 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 148

channel strategy which has been to have different specialist agenciesmanage various elements of the marketing mix while consumer enquiriesare dealt with at an external call centre

When call centres first appeared in the UK they were held up as thefuture of customer service By offering a central point of customer contactthe call centre was seen as the answer to a comprehensive approach tocustomer service It is estimated that there are currently around 6000 callcentres in Britain and the number is expected to rise to 8000 by 2005 TheUK call centre industry now employs almost 500000 people or 17 ofthe working population However laudable and popular an idea the callcentrersquos reputation has tarnished over time due to adverse publicity anddreadful consumer experiences In too many cases these centres have beenexposed as a means of cutting costs rather than improving service levelsSome organizations however go to great lengths to make their call centresas lsquohumanrsquo and customer-friendly as possible Virgin Mobilersquos call centre islocated at its headquarters in Wiltshire The centre is light airy anddivided into sections staffed by different teams that work in light-heartedcompetition with each other Eggrsquos communications centre in Derby hasalso employed new concepts in lighting colour and space Its teams workin mini-communities and comfy chillout zones create a positive workingenvironment A pleasant working environment helps keep staff motivationhigh and this in turn has a positive impact on customer satisfaction

The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery 149

Figure 85 Petcareco Limited (formerly known as Triple lsquoArsquo)

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 149

The unique feature of these two companiesrsquo call centres is that they usetechnology as a means to an end to enhance the delivery of the valueproposition When organizations focus on technology as an end in itselfvalue-centricity is unattainable The challenge is deciding where and howto integrate technology into the implementation of service strategy Thedecision-making process is made easier where the organization has a serviceblueprint or map of its service processes2 This effectively reduces serviceencounters ndash or all points of contact between the consumer and theorganization ndash to a series of interrelated steps and sequences as the examplein Figure 86 shows It offers an opportunity to review service strengths andweaknesses and plan resource allocation more appropriately as well as tocommunicate responsibilities throughout the organization

Multichannel centres are now emerging as the next generation ofcontact centre Call centres are becoming web enabled and consumers canmake contact with the organization according to their channel preferenceIn some cases in the US for example call-centre staff are being replaced bytechnology that plugs into the software that runs the companyrsquos websiteVirtual call-centre operators or V-Reprsquos who can talk to and understandcustomers are taking their places The range of options now available to anorganization affords a high level of flexibility as the case of Nestleacutedemonstrates

NestleacuteNestleacute is testing this new approach to multichannel customer managementThe company is seeking to manage and execute everything ndash from thecreation of one-to-one consumer communications through to generating andresponding to phone fax post and email enquiries ndash from a dedicatedcommunications centre The project has been piloted in France at alsquorelationship centrersquo set up by McCann Relationship Marketing Paris (MRM)a division of McCann Erickson World Group Nestleacutersquos advertising agency

Nestleacute has promoted details about how to contact the company on productssince the 1960s However in 2000 this became a more forceful invitation forFrench consumers to make contact when Nestleacute introduced its Nestleacute enDirect scheme This initiative along with Club Nestleacute a club for consumersforms the basis of Nestleacutersquos consumer relationship activity in France Both activities are used to encourage consumers to communicate with the company and provide their personal details Nestleacute uses this data to segment consumers and to tailor one-to-one promotional and marketingactivity

150 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 150

Fig

ure

86

Cus

tom

er c

onta

ct c

omm

unic

atio

ns a

nd re

latio

nshi

p pr

oces

s S

ourc

e D

r Ray

mon

d P

ettit

New

Jer

sey

Inst

itute

of T

echn

olog

y

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 151

To manage all these activities more effectively Nestleacute has taken theinnovative step of creating a multichannel communications centre under oneroof All forms of enquiry made by French consumers to the company ndash anestimated 200000 a year ndash are handled by MRMrsquos relationship centre Inmoving response handlers alongside advertising creatives customerintelligence experts new media branding and management consultants theconsumer is put at the heart of the business Nestleacute foresees a number ofbenefits from this new approach It is more flexible and allows betterintegration between different communications channels as well as givingcontrol over the quality of all one-to-one consumer communications

Source Meg Carter lsquoTowards a closer relationship with customersrsquoFinancial Times 11 March 2002

THE ROLE OF THE SUPPLY CHAIN IN VALUE DELIVERY

As we have seen New Consumers demand goods and services through anever-changing mix of media and channels Meeting their requirements forfaster better and cheaper service and delivery depends heavily on themake-up and robustness of the supply chain Only those organizationswhose supply chains are capable of responding rapidly to volatile demandwill thrive in this post-quake business environment

Increasingly business theorists are talking about developing demand-led supply chains to deliver the required level of consumer responsivenessThis means moving away from the simplistic approach that characterizedsupply-chain management in the production-driven era Then supplychains were relatively unsophisticated extending forwards throughdistributors and retailers to the consumer and then stretching backwardsthrough component assemblers to the suppliers of the raw materialsSupply chains were linear and supply-chain management was to do withmanaging delivery trucks and storage sheds (or so it seemed) Over the pasttwo decades supply chains have grown in complexity and many nowresemble lsquowebsrsquo or lsquonetworksrsquo of collaborative relationships The evolutionof the supply-chain network has been accelerated by the application of ITThe impact of the Internet in particular has enabled widely distributedoperations to be brought together at a relatively low cost

This network or lsquoextended enterprisersquo approach to managing thesupply chain has developed in response to the downward pressures on pricearising from global overcapacity growing competition and more powerful

152 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 152

customers (issues that were discussed in Chapter 3) Falling market pricescompel organizations to turn their focus inwards and to concentrate onreducing costs Over the past decade rationalization within the supplychain has been a major source of cost savings The idea of lsquoleanmanufacturingrsquo promulgated by James Womack3 at MIT in the early1990s has attracted considerable interest Based on the production systemused in Japanese-owned automobile manufacturing plants particularlythat of Toyota the idea was later extended to form the wider concept of thelsquolean enterprisersquo The focus of this approach is the elimination of waste andthe creation of competitive advantage through lower cost prices Criticsargue that it only works well where demand is relatively stable and hencepredictable and where the requirement for variety is low In todayrsquos morevolatile markets where consumer requirements stipulate more productvariety and where the ability to forecast demand is diminishing a differentapproach is called for

Competing through the Supply Chain

As pointed out by Professor Martin Christopher of Cranfield School ofManagement nowadays it is supply chains rather than companies thatcompete in the marketplace (Christopher and Peck 1997 Christopher1998) One of the clearest examples of an organization that competesthrough its supply chain is Dell

DellMichael Dell eschewed the use of conventional channels to distribute his PCsand focused instead on direct sales Consumers can select their own PCconfiguration online at Dellcom and within just 90 minutes their personallycustomized lsquogrey boxrsquo will roll off the factoryrsquos production line Dellrsquos suppliershave built their factories close by and inventory is down to four days makingDell the number one computer service provider in the world When Dell didattempt to break into established retail distribution channels in the early1990s it all went badly wrong and the company pulled out after suffering itsfirst ever loss The direct sales model offers Dell a structural advantage thatrivals IBM and Hewlett-Packard do not have

Source Amanda Hall lsquoThe boy who lived the American dreamrsquo The SundayTimes 1 December 2002 Michael Dell and Catherine Fredman (1999)Michael Dell (2002)

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 153

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 153

Acceptance of the philosophy that it is supply chains that compete withone another rather than companies has led organizations to acknowledgetheir strengths and weaknesses and to outsource those activities theybelieve can be performed more cost-effectively by others The supply chainhas in effect become a confederation of closely linked specialists whosecooperative behaviour creates a highly differentiated value chain

Often it is not technology that is the barrier to making these complexpartnerships work but lack of trust As highlighted in Chapter 3 thesharing of information and expertise previously considered confidential isessential in building the degree of trust necessary for collaboration Anumber of major retailers have already begun the process of implementingthis collaborative approach to strategy making setting up private web-based exchanges requiring the integration of both partiesrsquo internal systemsto share data and ideas Building these closer relationships betweenbusinesses can be very beneficial Some estimate that the introduction of e-procurement systems founded on joint working arrangements can shortenorder fulfilment cycles by 70 and cut administration costs by 50ndash70 Itis even believed that inventory costs can be halved ndash a significant benefitconsidering that holding stocks of unsold goods is a primary cost escalator

Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression

Consumer responsiveness is dependent on superior levels of insightinnovation and agility As far as the supply chain goes the focus has to beon the elimination of time rather than of waste The aim of timecompression in supply chains is to shorten the total pipeline time betweenthe procurement of materials and payment for the finished goods In mostorganizations it takes longer to procure make and deliver the finishedproduct to the customer than the customer is prepared to wait giving riseto a mismatch in expectations that is known to as the lsquolead-time gaprsquoNormally organizations overcome this problem by carrying lsquobufferrsquo orsurplus stock The amount of inventory is typically based on a forecast ofwhat the market will require However forecasting is a far from accuratescience As Martin Christopher says organizations that manage to closethis lead-time gap lsquoneed neither forecasts nor inventory making themmore responsive to customer demand and able to reduce the cost offinancing the pipelinersquo (Christopher 2001)

154 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 154

Establishing partnerships with other members of the supply chain is one ofthe most critical ways in which organizations can develop a more responsivesupply chain This usually involves a rationalization of the supplier base as itis easier to develop closer relationships with a smaller number of strategicsuppliers rather than trying to manage closer relationships with hundreds orthousands of suppliers These relationships are characterized by synchronizedoperations and the transparency of information The Zip Project at Marks ampSpencer is an example of this new way of working

ZipZip is a joint venture between Marks amp Spencer and Desmond a long-standingsupplier to Marks amp Spencer based in Northern Ireland that was created as partof a wider plan to enable Marks amp Spencer to escape its well-publicized woes ofthe late 1990s The company had to face up to the fact that it was not deliveringfashion fast enough to the shop floor and its prices were not competitive Zip isdesigned to provide Marks amp Spencer with greater competitive advantage inthe area of childrenrsquos clothing through improved supply-chain managementMarks amp Spencer has made cost savings by changing its traditionalrelationships with suppliers eliminating areas of duplication and increasing thespeed with which its goods come to market Traditionally suppliers created thegoods and brought them to the buying teams at Marks amp Spencer who thendecided which goods had the greatest appeal Marks amp Spencer has nowbrought much of this design function in-house

Under the new arrangements Ziprsquos London office is responsible for thedesign work and fabric development while samples are developed inNorthern Ireland Samples are costed and different suppliers includingDesmond itself then bid to produce the finished garment The advantage ofthis approach is that Zip retains the copyright on the designs and theirmanufacture can therefore be shifted from supplier to supplier as required oras capacity becomes available ndash Marks amp Spencer uses 120 differentsuppliers in 28 countries Having greater consistency and control overproduction realizes savings that can be passed on to consumers The biggestadvantage however lies in the reduced amount of time it takes to get adesign on to the shop floor the organization can react quickly to thefickleness of pre-teen fashion Traditionally this process has taken 28 weeksZip aims to reduce this to 12 weeks The potential rewards are great aschildrenrsquos wear accounts for about 10 of Marks amp Spencerrsquos non-food salesworth between pound300 and pound400 million

Source Martin Waller lsquoMampS takes a fresh route to childhoodrsquo The Times7 September 2002

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 155

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 155

Another way of closing the lead-time gap is through rationalizinginternal processes The key here is to remove all non-value-addingprocesses lsquoValue-adding timersquo activities create a benefit for whichconsumers are prepared to pay lsquoNon-value-adding timersquo activities do notcreate customer benefit and are a drain on company resources One of themost effective means of creating a value-adding culture within theorganization is to focus externally on the value proposition that consumersare seeking Guinness achieved this in the mid-1990s by basing anoverhaul of its business processes on insight generated into what consumerswanted from the company

GuinnessIn the mid-1990s Guinness was one of the few large brewers not to own anylicensed premises (pubs and clubs) in the UK The company relied onconsumer demand to persuade its trade customers (those who owned theroutes to market largely other brewery companies) to stock its productsGuinness stout held sales remarkably well in a declining market for darkcoloured beers but in the early 1990s competition was heightened by thelaunch of rival stouts such as Murphyrsquos and the rising popularity of importedbottled beers Faced with the threat of more vigorous competition Guinnessundertook a review of its business and as a consequence set aboutimproving its performance in the marketplace

Guinness invested heavily in a brewery upgrade to ensure the quality of itsproduct but was dissatisfied with the results of its insight generation activitywhich revealed that consumers were often disappointed with the quality of apint of Guinness consumed in different outlets Guinness like other cask

156 Value Delivery

Figure 87 Guinnessrsquo lsquoPerfect Pintrsquo

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 156

beers is a lsquoliversquo product and needs to be stored and handled carefully Whereprocedures are not followed the result is an experience of variable quality forconsumers What consumers were looking for was expressed as lsquothe perfectpint in every pubrsquo

Guinness used this insight to inform internal decision making about whichprocesses needed to be in place to ensure consistent delivery of the perfectpint enabling them to create a cross-functional approach to businessGuinness worked with its partners in the supply chain to educate the pubtrade about the importance of looking after the product and serving itcorrectly This was a three-stage operation known as lsquothe pour the settle thetop uprsquo and it provided a focus for training in-house staff in pubs and clubs(see Figure 87) Consumers were also targeted with an award-winningadvertising campaign that extolled the virtues of waiting for a perfect pint Thiscoordinated range of activities based on a clear strategy propelled Guinnessto achieve its highest ever share of the total draught market

Source Presentation by Julian Spooner at Cranfield School of ManagementJanuary 1996

A third method of improving consumer responsiveness through supply-chain management is by maximizing the potential of each customerinterface The aim is to be able to capture information on probable demandfrom consumers as close to the final point of consumption as possible Areal breakthrough in data collection has been achieved by linking buyersrsquoand suppliersrsquo information systems through initiatives such as EfficientConsumer Response (ECR) Quick Response (QR) and Electronic DataInterchange (EDI) ECR an attempt to bring about more effectivecollaboration across all supply-chain members is most closely associatedwith the grocery industry where it is designed to integrate and rationalizeproduct assortment promotions new product development andreplenishment across the supply chain QR was developed in the USA tohelp clothing businesses compete against lower priced imports By takinga total supply chain view of an industry QR makes it possible tounderstand overall performance and the causes of poor performance and toidentify opportunities for improvement EDI a technology forbroadcasting demand data was the forerunner of web-enabled systems andis still widely used by larger suppliers

The advantage of systems integration among supply-chain partners isthat it enables the different parties to act on the same aggregate data in areal-time environment Each partner can gain a clearer picture of consumer

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 157

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 157

demand than they would otherwise be able to obtain independently andgreater consumer responsiveness can be achieved throughout the supplychain The benefits of such collaboration within knowledge managementand operational systems are especially important in developing keyaccounts4 as these normally command a higher strategic value

The importance of being able to act on real-time demand data becomesmore acute the more volatile the market This is particularly the case withsuppliers of fashionable or weather-dependent goods and services whosecompetitive survival depends on rapid reactions to unpredictable marketchanges For an organization like Britvic which markets and manufacturesits own brands such as Tango as well as canning and distributing Pepsi-Cola in the UK demand for soft drinks can double on hot days Insituations where the product has a limited shelf life or the organization hasan obligation to meet high trade-customer service levels stock-outs cannotbe tolerated Access to instant accurate and complete demand data iscritical to the running of flexible manufacturing operations that aim toensure constant availability Indeed availability becomes a more criticalmeasure of consumer responsiveness than productivity in todayrsquosmarketplace

While some suppliers favour a strategy of rapid stock replenishment as away of managing the amount of inventory they carry others follow astrategy of postponement or delaying the finishing or value-addingactivities until customer orders have been received The clothingmanufacturer and retailer Zara for example purchases a high proportion ofits fabric in an undyed (or grey) state On receipt of incoming orders thefabric is dyed patterned and finished by a fully owned subsidiary which isa supplier to Zara as well as to other manufacturers By working in thisway Zara is able to originate a design and have the finished goods in itsstores within weeks as opposed to the traditional industry model whichmay take up to six months

Advances in supply-chain thinking are driving the concept moretowards the notion of demand-chain management which is totally inkeeping with New Consumer Marketing (Gattorna 1998) By its verynature a supply chain focuses on making the flow of product from source toend user as efficient as possible In contrast a demand chain focuses onmeeting market needs in the most relevant timely and cost-effective wayIn other words a demand system sees the lsquopipelinersquo as driven from the

158 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 158

consumer end placing the emphasis on consumer responsiveness ratherthan vendor efficiency The differences between these two approaches aresummarized in Table 81

Table 81 Agile supply chain management versus a traditional approach

This third cell of the New Consumer Marketing model marks the pointat which the symbiotic relationship with the consumer is developed Thevalue that has been defined and created is finally delivered to themarketplace and exchanged with the consumer While the process of valuedelivery is contingent on the interplay of media and channels servicetechnology integration and the supply chain it is the role of organizationalagility that is of fundamental importance

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Organizational agility is an enterprise-wide concept that demands anability to change gear and immerse the organization in newopportunities on a continual basis

bull Media choice is to do with how the value proposition is communicatedwhile channel choice is about how it is transacted However at

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 159

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 159

[Text not available in this electronic edition]

touchpoints where consumers can be engaged in dialogue theopportunity for transaction arises leading to the interrelationship ofthe two as an integrated media and channel strategy

bull The goal of a multimediamulti-channel strategy is to ensure that theconsumer has a perfect experience across all the media and channelsused Each time the consumer comes into contact with a brand theyshould feel like they are talking to the same person

bull Service is an important differentiator in the marketplace The way inwhich service staff deal with consumers simultaneously creates anddelivers value at the point of consumption In effect the valueexperience is the brand

bull The recruitment motivation and retention of staff are key elements ina successful service strategy

bull Empowering employees takes trust and courage on the part of theorganization as employees are given autonomy to interpret the brandin a way that is both meaningful to them and their job and toconsumers

bull Supply chains play a major role in determining consumerresponsiveness and competitive advantage In the new marketplacesupply chains must become demand-led

bull Consumer responsiveness requires a supply-chain focus on theelimination of time rather than of waste Availability becomes the keymeasure rather than productivity

160 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 160

Seven elements of organizational lsquoDNArsquo make a demand system viable

Managing a demand system is fundamentally different to managing asupply system It requires turning the supply chain on its head and takingthe consumer as the organizationrsquos starting point and not its finaldestination As established early on in this book New Consumers aresophisticated and demanding and they inhabit an interactive rather thana static marketplace To succeed in this challenging and ever-changingmarketing environment organizations must adopt a value-centricorientation By focusing on delivering the value consumers actually needand want organizations can make the radical transition from operating ina production-driven to operating in a consumption-led economy

The New Consumer Marketing model (see Figure 91) draws onlearning from the living sciences and conceptualizes the marketing processas three organic cells of a living demand system Having discussed thenature and function of each of the three cells ndash value definition valuecreation and value delivery ndash in Chapters 6ndash8 it is now appropriate toexamine how the cells work together and what organizational elementscontrol and inform their performance

The way in which these cells collaborate to keep the demand systemalive and effective is dependent on the make-up of the lsquoorganizationalDNArsquo In biology DNA is the material that carries an organismrsquos geneticinformation such as that needed by cells to make enzymes Enzymes areimportant because they control the processes that occur within cells Theydetermine which chemicals are made in a cell and what the cell will do Theinformation about which enzyme to make and when has to be permanentlystored in each cell so that it can be drawn upon as necessary The

Demand System Management 9

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 161

relationship between biological DNA and enzymes provides a goodmetaphor for understanding the elements that inform and trigger whathappens in a market-driven organization

Organizational DNA consists of seven elements that fall into two typesthose that are people related (intuition culture and structure leadershipvision and values employees) and those that are process related (knowledgemanagement planning measurement) Each element carries informationto the three cells value definition value delivery and value creation Thisinformation enables each cell to optimize performance thereby ensuringthe competitive survival of the organization as a whole Operating aneffective demand system requires an understanding of the role and impactof all of these elements in order that they can be expertly managed Themain challenges facing New Consumer Marketing (to meet the needs ofbrand owners and retailers to embrace the New Consumer to develop realconsumer responsiveness and to arrest the crisis in marketing) reinforcethe imperative of addressing these business aspects in a systemic manner

162 Demand System Management

13

13

13 $

Figure 91 The New Consumer Marketing model

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 162

New Consumer Marketing breaks out of the binary thinking that has seenbusinesses swing between a focus on process and a focus on people Insteadit combines the two by identifying the key processes and relationships thatunderpin the organization and using them to help the organizationbecome as adaptable and competitive as possible

The seven elements of organizational DNA are

bull Intuitionbull Culture and structurebull Leadership vision and valuesbull Employeesbull Knowledge managementbull Planningbull Measurement

THE ROLE OF INTUITION IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

The mechanistic approach to management so characteristic of theproduction-driven era was based on rational systems that appealed to thereasoning skills of managers These systems were presented as if there weresome underlying algorithm for doing business Today management isabout engaging both our rational and our creative abilities Increasingimportance is being placed on corporate intuition and imaginationIntuitive ability plays a major role in demand system management bycontributing to the development of insight innovation and organizationalagility

In the definition creation and delivery of the value proposition thecapacity to instantly understand other peoplersquos behaviour thoughtswishes feelings and beliefs is a means of gaining additional perspectiveThrough intuitive understanding managers and staff can perceive thetruth of things without reasoning or analysis They can put themselves inthe consumerrsquos shoes and see the benefit of taking a particular course ofaction without needing any rational validation

Anthropologists believe that this capability is linked to the early socialdevelopment of humans particularly with our ability to interact with andinfluence others The ability of managers to understand mental states ndashboth their own and those of others ndash is known as Theory of Mind Theory of

The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management 163

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 163

Mind has been described as lsquoa start-up kit for learning about the mentalworldrsquo1 It is a kind of lsquomind readingrsquo which psychologists refer to asintuitive mentalizing Encouraging intuitive input in a demand systemstimulates innovative thought and a sense of empathy with consumersThis can lead to improvements in the market relevance of the valueproposition and thus enhancement of the consumerrsquos experience of thebrand

Most successful entrepreneurs have strong intuitive mentalizing skillsand they use these to put their lsquogood ideasrsquo about what consumers want intothe marketplace They are able to imagine what the value propositionshould look like and to marshal the organizationrsquos resources to deliver it Inheavily managed organizations this ability is often repressed Take forexample Woburn Safari Park part of the Woburn estate in BedfordEngland where the importance of intuition is fully recognized

Woburn Safari ParkAt Woburn Safari Park this elusive lsquosecond sightrsquo has been developed underthe leadership of chief executive Chris Webster Ten years ago the park wasin severe decline but a remarkable turnaround in performance has beenachieved through some radical thinking On the basis of gut feel the decisionwas taken to introduce a junior board of 11-year-olds to shadow the parkrsquos

164 Demand System Management

Figure 92 Woburn Safari Park

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 164

management board For the family-oriented attraction engaging the input ofyoung imaginations in strategy making was a wise move children of coursedo not hold back in asking the whywhy not questions Benchmarking visitsare made by the junior board to rival attractions and the childrenrsquos ideas areassimilated into the way Woburn Safari Park defines creates and delivers itsvalue proposition

Intuitive mentalizing is a very necessary ability in the delivery of serviceAs discussed in Chapter 8 front-line staff need to be able to demonstrateempathy with consumers if they are to convey consumer value in aconsistent and personalized way Where intuitive ability is lacking theorganization will have difficulty in predicting the behaviour of consumersreading their intentions and understanding their motives and emotions Atworst the organization will suffer from lack of commitment andmotivation to please The key challenge is to find ways of unleashing thepotential for corporate intuition Intuition is an ability not a function itmust be embedded within the organization and cannot sit isolated in onedepartment The development of corporate intuition lies in making it ashared approach to defining creating and delivering value and this canbest be achieved through the organizational culture and structure

THE ROLE OF CULTURE AND STRUCTURE IN DEMANDSYSTEM MANAGEMENT

Culture

Organizational culture is one of the most intangible elements of a demandsystem Its roots reach deep into the collection of beliefs and assumptionsthat are commonly held in the organization and its influence onorganizational performance is all pervasive Organizational cultureprovides a guide to acceptable internal behaviour summarized as lsquothe waythings are done around herersquo Culture therefore underpins a value-centricbusiness strategy

Trying to understand organizational culture can be as difficult for thoseinside the organization as for those outside it A useful tool for surfacingthe behaviours and artefacts that characterize a particular organization isthe culture web developed by academic researchers Professor GerryJohnson and Kevin Scholes (1992) This is shown in Figure 93 The

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 165

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 165

culture web makes explicit the rituals of organizational life ndash the dailyroutines that are often taken for granted but which all employees mustlearn when they join the organization It captures the stories told aboutpeople ndash the lsquoheroesrsquo and the lsquomavericksrsquo ndash whose fate symbolizes what theorganization is all about The culture web also notes the symbols thatconvey meaning within the organization ndash the use of logos the allocationof offices and car parking spaces etc

Depicting cultural aspects in this way helps in identifying themanagerial groups closely associated with the essence of organizationalculture a power structure that may not accord with the official companyorganigram The formalized ways in which the organization works ndash usingcommittees or working parties for example ndash also reflect the powerstructure and send signals throughout the company and its supply chainabout what is deemed important In many organizations there is anincongruity between the values that are promoted and the behaviours thatare rewarded A familiar example is the sales team that is told to maximizecustomer profitability while being rewarded on the basis of unit sales Theteam is tempted to offer discounts and inducements to customers as the

166 Demand System Management

Mythsand

stories

Routinesand

rituals

Controlsystems

Organizationalstructures

Powerstructures

Symbols

Paradigm

Figure 93 The cultural web of an organization Adapted from Johnson and Scholes(1992)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 166

overriding message is lsquomaximize volume rather than profitsrsquo Each of theseaspects that make up the cultural web can be characterized for anindividual organization As Figure 93 shows at the heart of culture is anunderlying paradigm within which the organization operates made up ofthe core beliefs assumptions and values that matter to it

Closely related to culture is the climate within the organization Thishas been summed up by researchers as lsquothe feeling in the airrsquo that one getsfrom walking around a company (Clark 1999) Organizational climate canbe created by employees observing what happens to them and what goes onaround them and drawing their own conclusions about the organizationrsquospriorities and what it values Employees then set their own prioritiesaccordingly about where they should focus their energies andcompetencies which in turn feed back into the organizational climateOrganizational culture and climate are therefore dynamic and sensitive tomanagerial influence Tesco is an example of an organization that hasmastered the management of these intangible aspects and used them toguide the development of a value-centric strategy

TescoIn 1992 the issue of organizational culture formed one of the foundationblocks of Tescorsquos lsquoFirst Class Servicersquo initiative which has since propelled thecompany to a dominant market position It represented a shift from thecompanyrsquos previous command-and-control approach to management Eachmember of Tescorsquos then 130000 staff was empowered to look aftercustomers in the way they thought best At the same time managers wereencouraged to recognize staff achievements and to set an example bytreating them as individuals so that they would in turn treat customers asindividuals This initiative was highly successful not least because staff weremade aware through internal marketing programmes that the averagepotential lifetime spend of a Tesco customer was significant amounting toaround pound90000

Source lsquoTesco Clubcard Foreverrsquo case study H Peck Cranfield School ofManagement 2002

There are however pitfalls in encouraging everyone in the company tothink in the same way which can easily happen when everyone is focusedon the same goals The danger is that the organization can fall into the trapof approaching every problem no matter how different in the same wayWhat is required is a management body that supports an innovative

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 167

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 167

culture one that encourages staff to think and respond differently but thatis nonetheless focused on the organizationrsquos vision and informed by itsvalues A value-centric orientation within the organization ensures thesedifferent ways of working are still legitimate Dell is one organization thatmanages its organizational culture very effectively

DellDellrsquos innovative culture supports risk taking and learning from failure AsMichael Dell says lsquoto encourage people to innovate more you have to makeit safe for them to failrsquo Dell achieves this by creating an internal culture thatquestions the status quo and encourages smart experimentation At Dellfailure is seen as a learning experience and is typically considered animportant milestone on the road to achieving success The nature of thebusiness means there is little relevant history for it to draw upon forcing theorganization to create its own response to the challenges it faces Dellmanagers also embrace an experimental attitude to decision makingSometimes it is not possible to wait for the relevant data before making adecision Under these circumstances managers are encouraged to make thebest possible decisions based on experience intuition available data and anassessment of risk

Source Amanda Hall lsquoThe boy who lived the American dreamrsquo The SundayTimes 1 December 2002 Michael Dell and Catherine Fredman (1999)Michael Dell (2002)

Tesco and Dell have used organizational culture as the basis ofcompetitive advantage Organizations that do not heed the importance ofmanaging internal culture effectively can fall prey to strategic drift andbecome increasingly incapable of self-renewal and self-determination Ineffect organizational culture determines business fate It is critical to thesuccessful implementation of a demand system that the prevailing culturein the organization supports and drives the development of insightinnovation and agility ndash the competencies that lie at the heart of each of thethree cells of the New Consumer Marketing model

Structure

The culture of an organization is embodied within the structure of theorganization Traditional vertical organizations which are hierarchicallystructured and functionally oriented work to optimize individual

168 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 168

functions at the expense of the entire business and the relationship with theconsumer Hierarchical structures work well when the marketingenvironment is stable and demand is predictable Now that the certaintiesof the production-driven era have been replaced by the uncertainties of theconsumption-led economy flatter horizontal organizational structures areemerging

These flatter horizontal structures enable organizations to be moreresponsive by speeding up decision-making processes and encouragingcross-functional collaboration which helps maximize consumer value andoperational cost-effectiveness Value-centric organizations draw keyemployees together in autonomous multidisciplinary teams to focusresources around value definition creation and delivery Often these teamsare temporary enabling the organization to combine and recombine assetsaccording to the nature of the opportunities that arise These are firms thatregard the organizational whole as greater than the sum of its parts

However this does not mean that organizations cannot grow big Tescofor example is one of a small number of organizations that has succeeded inbuilding the virtues of smallness into a large organization one that nownumbers around 200000 employees The company achieves this in partby having a shared understanding of what the business is aiming for Thisdraws from the companyrsquos clearly stated mission ndash lsquoto continually increasevalue for customers to earn their lifetime loyaltyrsquo ndash and its corporatevalues These values are embedded into the organization through a varietyof HR practices that focus on appraisal and reward systems

The strength of less hierarchically structured organizations lies not justin what they achieve as a single entity but in the power of the network theybuild around them through joint ventures strategic alliances andpartnerships This is the concept of the lsquoextended enterprisersquo and its successdepends on a new type of logic one that demands openness and cooperation(with consumers customers suppliers and competitors) The extended ornetworked enterprise places greater emphasis on the role of leadershipvision and values

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 169

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 169

THE ROLE OF LEADERSHIP VISION AND VALUES INDEMAND SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

Leadership

Leadership in organizational management is more important than everbefore in this post-quake business environment Businesses must aligntheir organizational philosophy and practices with the realities of theconsumption-led economy How an organization is led and managed inthis time of transition is a key differentiator in the marketplace Whilethere is no standard formula for what makes an effective leader NewConsumer Marketing demands a number of essential leadership skills2

First among these skills is the ability to engage others in the businessrsquosmission Leaders like Howard Schultz whose Starbucks business grewprofits by 92 to $1812 million on sales of $3 billion in 2001 have to beable to engage their employees in providing exceptional service tonumerous consumers every day Starbucks for example serves 20 millionpeople a week across 5000 outlets Key to achieving a dedicated workforceis the ability to communicate the corporate vision effectively to allstakeholders with a distinctive and compelling voice Internalcommunications form the most important part of this task and marketersare well placed to manage them as the essence of the internalcommunications process is similar to that of the external communicationsprocess It is also important for strategic reasons that both processes arealigned and marketers possess all the relevant skills for managing this

Secondly effective leadership provides focus inspiration and meaningwhich need to be communicated to everyone within the organization Themeasure of a leaderrsquos effectiveness can often be seen in the way he or shemanages this communication process Powerful communicators are goodat telling stories utilizing the potency of metaphors and language KjellNordstroumlm and Jonas Ridderstraringle the Swedish economics experts who co-authored the best-selling book Funky Business (2000) suggest thatlsquocommunicating a vision not only involves repetition and a carefullydistilled message it demands the ability to tell a story True leaders areCSOs ndash Chief Storytelling Officersrsquo

Senior managers at TGI Fridayrsquos restaurants have been telling the samestories for many years many of them based on the original stories told byfounder Dan Skoggins These work-related stories serve to convey the

170 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 170

vision and ethos of the company The lsquoemployee cloak theoryrsquo for examplesays lsquoYou were hired for your personality When you put on your uniformdonrsquot let it become a cloak and hide yourself behind it You are notexpected to be a robot in fact we believe our success comes from ourinteraction with the guests Work hard have fun make moneyrsquo

The third essential leadership skill required for New ConsumerMarketing to succeed is integrity including a strong set of personal valuesA sense of virtuousness is vital because organizational leaders become thede facto keepers of their companyrsquos vision and values In todayrsquos moretransparent business environment they need to be able to inspirecommitment among employees This will not be forthcoming whereprofessional integrity is lacking as a number of CEOs who havetransgressed the boundaries of honourable behaviour have found Carelessremarks made in public that appear to denigrate the companyrsquos vision andvalues may be seized upon by the media making the task of motivatingemployees much harder

Finally it goes without saying that business leadership demands anability to grasp the importance of the tectonic shift that has taken place inthe marketing environment This in turn implies a steadfast ability toweigh a number of factors and make appropriate decisions to ensure theorganization operates effectively and efficiently in defining creating anddelivering the value consumers are seeking

Vision

All organizations need a shared idea of why they exist and what they aremeant to achieve Vision and values work to support the organizationrsquosmission by providing answers to those key questions lsquowhere are we goingrsquoand lsquohow are we going to get therersquo Answering them becomes more of animperative in todayrsquos volatile marketplace This is because vision andvalues play an important part in realizing a value-centric orientation Theyforce the organization to think strategically about the long term whileproviding a framework for coping with turbulence in the short term Witha strong vision and firm values in place senior managers can delegateresponsibilities with more confidence local managers can get a clearerpicture of how to approach decisions and front-line staff can be guided incustomizing the value proposition for consumers

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values 171

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 171

The purpose of having good leadership is to create and regularly updatethe corporate vision and direct the organization towards its realization Inorder to provide unequivocal direction the business vision needs to beclear distinctive memorable motivating and meaningful to both staffand consumers Microsoftrsquos original vision was very strong (lsquoa computer onevery desk and in every homersquo) as is Disneyrsquos (lsquoto make people happyrsquo) andthat of the International Red Cross (lsquoto serve the most vulnerablersquo) The testof a strong vision is to see if people can recognize the organization from itsvision statement Many organizations either have no vision or have a visionthat is weak that is to say it is unclear too complex or simply irrelevant

It has been estimated that making a business vision work is 5 creationand 95 implementation Activating the vision starts at the top of theorganization and is a process that must involve all employees It is not untilpeople can see the vision in terms of what it means to them that it starts tobecome embedded within the organization This draws on the ability of the leader to communicate to employees the meaning of where theorganization is heading and what their role in this journey will beMarketers need to play their part by managing internal communicationsprogrammes effectively in order to support the organizational leadershipand to clarify and reinforce employee understanding Only then can visionbe translated into relevant and achievable strategies

Values

Values are a powerful and omnipresent part of organizational lifeAcademic researcher Milton Rokeach defines values as enduring beliefsabout preferable ways of behaving and a value system as an enduring wayof organizing those beliefs (1973) In the New Consumer Marketing modelcorporate values support the implementation of the corporate vision Theymake up the integral beliefs that guide organizational behaviourMoreover as their definition suggests values are not fashion items to bechanged on a regular basis values should stand the test of time SingaporeAirlines is one company that understands this well

Singapore AirlinesSingapore Airlines has six core values which support its mission statementlsquoWe are a global company dedicated to providing air transportation servicesof the highest quality and earning good returns for shareholdersrsquo Although

172 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 172

these words are rooted in operational and financial performance marketinghas transformed the airline into Fortune Magazinersquos most admired airline in2002 The key to Singapore Airlinersquos achievement are these core values (seeTable 91) which permeate every area of business strategy By translatingthese values into actionable and measurable practices within theorganization the company is able to build value-centricity and give realsubstance to its brand The airlinersquos employees see themselves as a part ofthe brand and this is reflected in their work performance adding significantvalue to the consumerrsquos experience

Table 91 Singapore Airlinesrsquo core values

1 Pursuit of excellence We strive for the highest professional standards in our workand aim to be the best in everything we do

2 Safety We regard safety as an essential part of all our operations Wemaintain and adopt practices that promote the safety of ourcustomers and staff

3 Customer first Our customers are foremost in our minds all the time We gothe extra mile to exceed their expectations

4 Concern for staff We value our staff and care for their well-being We treatthem with respect and dignity and seek to provide them withappropriate training and development so that they can leadfulfilling careers

5 Integrity We strive for fairness in all our business and workingrelationships

6 Teamwork We work with pride as a worldwide team to achieve successtogether

Where management action is not aligned with corporate values thevalues become meaningless as demonstrated in the fall from grace ofindustry giants Enron and Andersen in 2002 An organizationrsquos values arethe principles that the company abides by and is willing to enforce they arenot simply the words printed on the pages of company brochures It is allvery well drawing up carefully crafted values statements and codes ofpractice but these become pointless if employees are permitted tocontravene them Actions speak louder than words and an organizationrsquosvalues should be seen as non-negotiable minimum standards

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values 173

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 173

Business adviser and best-selling author Hugh Davidson pulls togetherthe role of leadership vision and values in his model of the lsquocommittedenterprisersquo (2002) This is shown in Figure 94 and is based on the formula

Committed customers + Motivated employees = Satisfied resourcefinanceproviders

Davidson believes that an enterprisersquos vision and values bind these threeconstituent parties (customers employees resource providers) byproviding future direction and governing everyday decision making andbehaviour Through vision and values the needs of the three parties arealigned and they are able to move forward together Davidson expressesthis through the use of a visual symbol that dates back to Roman times theThree Legs of Man lsquoWhichever way you throw me I standrsquo is the symbolrsquosaccompanying motto

Vision and values need to be embedded in the organization and this canonly be done by making them measurable and converting them intopersonal objectives for every member of staff Together with leadershipthey make up a complex but vital element in organizational DNAWhether or not an organizationrsquos vision and values are realized depends onappropriate leadership and on the management of employees

174 Demand System Management

Figure 94 The committed enterprise Adapted from Davidson (2002)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 174

[Image not available in this electronic edition]

THE ROLE OF EMPLOYEES IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

While marketers are confronting the shift from a production-driven to aconsumption-led economy human resource (HR) professionals are facing asimilar tectonic change as employees are increasingly perceived as anorganizational asset rather than a production cost This redefinition of therole of employees is a response to the decline in manufacturing and the riseof the Information Age which demands a radically different approach toHR management The role of employees is a matter of concern formarketers because the impact of an organization externally is tied to whatgoes on internally

The move away from manufacturing and the emergence of theknowledge worker brings in its wake a change in the asset base of theorganization As Peter Drucker says lsquothe most valuable assets of a 20th-century company were its production equipment The most valuable assetof a 21st-century institution whether business or non-business will be its knowledge workers and their productivityrsquo (Drucker 2002) Thisperspective forces a shift in the way in which people are evaluated withinthe organization In the manufacturing economy manual workers wereregarded as a cost which needed to be controlled and reduced andemployee management reflected this Employee productivity wasincreased through investment in plant and technology Knowledgeworkers in contrast are seen as a capital asset whose intrinsic value can begrown Their productivity is achieved in a very different way by placingresponsibility with the knowledge workers themselves The emphasis inHR management today therefore tends towards self-management andautonomy This ethos plays a crucial part in empowering staff to deliverbetter service as was mentioned in Chapter 8

The underlying assumption here is that unlike the manual workers ofthe production-driven era knowledge workers own the means ofproduction and enjoy greater levels of mobility in their careers thanprevious generations This is the thesis explored in the book Funky Business(Nordstroumlm and Ridderstraringle 2000) The authors write lsquoKarl Marx wasright The workers do control the means of production 13 kilograms ofbrain holds the key to all our futuresrsquo In their words lsquoItrsquos talent that makescapital dancersquo

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 175

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 175

Harnessing this talent means adopting a different approach tomanaging people Best-practice organizations whose thinking has movedout of the industrial age adopt the philosophy that they are in a more orless symbiotic relationship with employees and they create an internalvalue proposition to inform HR practice The organization employs peopleto define create and deliver value in the marketplace at a profit In returnfor their intellectual application development of potential and loyalty tothe organization employees receive a range of benefits

In the same way that the external value proposition described inChapter 6 is made up of component factors so too is the internal valueproposition It takes the form of a mix of two sorts of benefits andincentives There are extrinsic ones such as pay and promotion andintrinsic ones which lie deep within human nature Research shows thatlsquowhile traditional rewards and punishments can if ill-managed severelydamage motivation they have little beneficial effect under even the best ofcircumstances It is the fuzzier things ndash to do with feelings of purposebelonging engagement ndash that push people to do their bestrsquo (HarvardBusiness Review 2003)

Just as the factors that create added value for the consumer are those thatare mould breaking and have never before been offered in the marketplacethe factors that create added value for employees are similarly innovativeand special These key discriminating factors set the organization apartfrom competitors in the eyes of employees Occasionally some of thesedifferentiating factors may be lsquoadoptedrsquo by staff and become lsquotalkingpointsrsquo creating great word-of-mouth marketing for the organization as anemployer of choice Examples here include the free ice creams and picnicblankets made available in the summer to Microsoftrsquos staff at their Readingfacility the three-month unpaid winter holiday known as a lsquoBenidormbreakrsquo made available to older staff at Asda and Pret A Mangerrsquosmaternity package which includes pound20 towards a pair of maternity jeansand health spa vouchers upon return to work

The internal value proposition provides the focus for the full range ofHR practices These cover recruitment training appraisal promotion andsuccession planning as well as redundancy and dismissal In the lsquowar fortalentrsquo (Michaels et al 2001) recruitment is critical Best-practiceorganizations are looking not only for competency in prospectiveemployees but also alignment with the organizationrsquos vision and values

176 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 176

For many organizations the most effective and efficient way to recruit theright people is to encourage existing staff to introduce new employees

Once recruited into a best-practice organization employees participatein the acculturation and learning processes Whereas these two processesbarely made it on to organizational agendas in the industrial age they arenow seen as key to motivating and retaining staff Personalized andtargeted learning is offered on a continuous basis and organizationssometimes formalize this within their own learning institutions forexample the lsquouniversitiesrsquo run by McDonaldrsquos Disney and Unipart Othercompanies are working more virtually and taking advantage ofdevelopments in IT to create learning academies on their intranets Thereis also an emerging trend to provide non-work-related courses andopportunities to fulfil personal development goals Many organizationsrealize the value of providing benefits related to achieving a sense ofpersonal well-being such as sponsoring employee memberships to sportscentres and the provision of health services Team- and company-basedactivities that benefit the local community or charities also characterizebest-practice HR systems Expenditure on these less-traditional HRdevelopment activities is viewed as an investment in the organizationrsquosknowledge base and is assessed accordingly Ongoing appraisalspromotion and reward systems provide a further means of reinforcingdesired internal behaviours and attitudes

Where all of these elements of HR practice work effectively employeeswill be motivated and happy to stay with the organization This approachto HR management does not simply equate with paying them highsalaries as the winners of the 2002 lsquo100 best companies to work forrsquo show(McCall 2002) Asdarsquos experience is a good example

AsdaTop-rated superstore Asda has annual sales of pound97 billion and employs117000 people Salaries start at pound8833 In the 1980s the company reversedits declining fortunes by adopting a culture based on Wal-Martrsquos customer-friendly style When the Asda chain was bought by the American giant Wal-Mart in 1999 the value-centric orientation in both organizations ensured asmooth transition despite staff fears that the two cultures would clash Theunderlying philosophy is that everyone must be treated as an individual andstaff incentives are targeted to keep employee motivation high For exampleAsda recently introduced an employee health insurance scheme to cover

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 177

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 177

male cancers The scheme follows on from the companyrsquos lsquoWell Womanrsquocover which has had a 50 take-up Asdarsquos share option scheme will see the16000 staff who were given shares in 1995 share an estimated pound25 millionwhen their shares schemes mature Other loyalty incentives include a lawclub that provides Asda employees with legal advice for 10 pence a weekand a free investment advice service from Bradford amp Bingley Thesepractices have helped keep the companyrsquos staff turnover down to anabnormally low figure for the sector

Asda and other organizations that define create and deliver a valueproposition for staff that makes them an employer of choice base theirstrategy on a simple model that links employee satisfaction and retentionwith customer satisfaction and retention Research suggests that a satisfiedand stable workforce is more capable of delivering higher service quality at

178 Demand System Management

Figure 95 The cycle of success Adapted from Schlesinger and Heskett (1991)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 178

lower cost (Schlesinger and Heskett 1991) This leads to higher levels ofcustomer satisfaction which in turn impacts customer retention levels andincreased profitability This virtuous circle is shown in Figure 95

THE ROLE OF KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT IN DEMANDSYSTEM MANAGEMENT

In todayrsquos consumption-led economy brand owners and retailers areconcentrating on becoming more productive by managing their responseto consumer demand better They are increasingly switching their businessfocus from cutting costs to adding value A key means of adding value isthrough knowledge management processes As a consequence knowledgemanagement has emerged as a major business discipline It is driven byadvances in IT and growth in the use of the Internet which allowinformation to be exchanged across the world 24 hours a day seven days aweek all at the touch of a button Failure to adapt knowledge managementpractices to this continually changing environment leads to what ArnoldKransdorff (19992000) has termed lsquocorporate amnesiarsquo a phenomenonthat prevents organizations learning from their own experienceslsquoCharacterized by knowledge loss it stems from short memory selectiverecall and the flexible labour marketrsquo

In order to create differential advantage a business needs to master theflows of information and knowledge that exist within its organization andthroughout its value chain As Lew Platt former CEO of Hewlett-Packardhas often been quoted as saying lsquoIf Hewlett-Packard knew what Hewlett-Packard knows wersquod be three times as profitablersquo The aim of knowledgemanagement is to build a collective and dynamic corporate memory Thefirst step is to establish a process for capturing knowledge about theorganization and the marketing environment

There are two main types of knowledge explicit knowledge and tacitknowledge Explicit knowledge is the more tangible of the two Itrepresents the type of knowledge that can be captured in written or processform and easily reused The lsquowhatrsquo dimension of corporate know-how islargely explicit knowledge Tacit knowledge refers to the implicit andoften ambiguous knowledge that is acquired mainly through personalexperience It is usually context-specific and provides the lsquohowrsquo dimensionof corporate know-how Tacit knowledge is difficult to formalize and hard

The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System Management 179

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 179

to capture As people are generally better at talking about experiences thanwriting them down new techniques to capture tacit knowledge areemerging Based on the art of storytelling these techniques amount toformalized oral debriefings following important organizational events Thedebriefing process allows employees to create accurate records of how whyand when they performed their tasks It requires a climate of trust asemployees need to feel that they are not relinquishing personal advantagebut are adding to the greater gain from which they too will benefit Ittherefore calls for a supportive organizational culture and value system

Knowledge itself has no intrinsic value as its value comes from beingused and unlike other resources knowledge grows with use Extractingand exploiting the value of knowledge is a core competence withindemand-led organizations In managing a demand system the knowledgemanagement process should reflect the value-centric orientation of theorganization Knowledge about consumers and their wants and desirescompetitors and internal competencies must be captured and managed toenable the superior definition creation and delivery of the valueproposition As Professor George Day from Wharton writes lsquoWhatdistinguishes a market-driven firm is the depth and timeliness of marketknowledge that enables it to anticipate market opportunities and respondfaster than its rivals When this knowledge is widely shared it is a commonreference point and assumption set that ensures the strategy is coherentrather than a disconnected set of activitiesrsquo (Day 1999)

New Consumer Marketing is concerned with generating and exploitingfour kinds of knowledge The first is knowledge about consumers for thisenables the organization to define and create a value proposition that isrelevant and appealing to consumers These subjects were covered inChapters 6 and 7 Chapter 6 covered the generation of insight and makingit actionable through segmentation while Chapter 7 explored the processof value creation and the role of new product development brandingpositioning and pricing in achieving this

The second kind of knowledge used in New Consumer Marketing isderived from competitor activity Awareness and understanding of whatcompetitors are doing and planning can help in making strategicmarketing plans work Of particular importance is an understanding of theorganizationrsquos competitive position as seen from the consumerrsquos point ofview

180 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 180

The third kind of knowledge which underpins the functioning of ademand system is process knowledge In the New Consumer Marketingmodel this relates to knowledge about the three cells ndash value definitionvalue creation and value delivery The aim is to make the core process ineach cell more efficient and effective Process knowledge comes fromimproved organization of the activities that support the development ofinsight innovation and agility Tacit process knowledge may well be agreater source of advantage here than explicit process knowledge

Finally there is the need to know about IT and how to use it smartlySystems knowledge guides the application of IT in both externally andinternally facing systems Decisions made regarding the deployment of ITwill have a fundamental impact on the success of a New ConsumerMarketing approach

Making the most of all four kinds of knowledge requires anorganizational culture that recognizes the value of knowledge enables theformulation and implementation of a strategy for knowledge managementthat is tied to a value-centric orientation and creates a climate thatencourages the acquisition and sharing of knowledge Without thissupporting culture the organizational DNA is fatally flawed

THE ROLE OF PLANNING IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

Increasing turbulence in the marketplace more demanding andsophisticated consumers increasing environmental complexity and thespeed of technological advancement all raise questions about the wisdom ofsetting down in a plan the three- to five-year ambitions of an organizationHow can planning be of use when times are changing so fast Areconventional approaches agile enough to capture the dynamic complexityof the marketplace except in the very short term In the pre-quake businessenvironment planning was presented as an orderly and linear sequence ofsteps For many organizations it was a-once-a-year fill-in-the-box activityThe conventional approach started with corporate and strategic planningwhich covered the identification of corporate goals (including missionvision values financial objectives and shareholder requirements) All ofthis was distilled down into a strategic marketing plan that consisted of asituational analysis leading to a summary presented in a SWOT analysis

The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 181

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 181

Marketing objectives and strategy were then defined on the basis of thisanalysis as well as factors previously noted as relevant to the organizationThe fourth and final stage of marketing planning involved creating atactical plan setting out the immediate 12 monthsrsquo activity This approachwas a reflection of the makendashsell model that characterized the production-driven economy

The arrival of the New Consumer and the consumption-led economy hasforced organizations to rethink their marketing planning Business gurussuch as Gary Hamel are asking questions about how useful thisconventional planning exercise is when e-commerce has so dramaticallyforeshortened planning cycles His 1994 book co-authored with C KPrahalad Competing for the Future introduced the concept of corecompetencies and lsquoindustry foresightrsquo or the art of anticipating marketsand customers five or ten years ahead Some six years on Hamelrsquos laterbook Leading the Revolution (2000) places far less emphasis on foresightbecause of the fast-paced nature of market development Instead he advisesadopting lsquonon-linear strategiesrsquo to create entirely new business models Hisfocus has therefore shifted from foresight to continuous innovation Hisargument is that organizations need to make the critical shift fromstewardship to entrepreneurship they should lsquobring Silicon Valley insidersquothe organization and create internal markets for ideas capital and talent ndasha philosophy borrowed from the firms at the epicentre of the dotcomrevolution where success is based on resource attraction not resourceallocation

However in this time of transition and in the wake of the dotcomdisasters many managers feel that ideas are not enough without soundplanning As Professor Malcolm McDonald of Cranfield School ofManagement explains plans inform employees in all parts of theorganization (McDonald 1999) They are needed in order to obtainresources and support gain commitment and set objectives and strategyIn a demand system planning is an important element of organizationalDNA as it serves to turn the value proposition into a coherent marketingprogramme The aim is to create an ongoing process approach to planningThis assists in the delivery of organizational agility As John CoudronCEO of Yell the publisher of Yellow Pages says lsquoWe set ourselves thetarget that on any Monday morning I could walk in and ask to see anupdated marketing plan on a Friday So our marketing plan was being

182 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 182

continually refreshed to take account of changing customer requirementsrsquo(McDonald 2001)

This process approach to marketing planning is explained in more detailby Professor Nigel Piercy also from Cranfield School of ManagementPiercy writes that planning in this way is a lsquosource of leverage for workingon achieving market-led strategic change and actually making marketstrategy and marketing programmes happenrsquo (Piercy 2002) He seeselements such as corporate culture management style information flowsorganizational structures participation and so on treated as eitherinsignificant facilitating mechanisms or lsquocontextrsquo in conventional planningapproaches He believes these issues are not mere context but that they arethe process and that the way the process of planning is managed will havea direct impact on what goes into the plan and will determine the outputsHis advice to organizations is that they should focus on commitment andownership rather than techniques and formal methods as this is what willultimately drive the value-centric strategy and deliver the valueproposition

This holistic approach to managing the marketing planning processshould result in the creation of more than a physical plan It should ensurethat plans are achievable actionable and capable of being implementedthat they are owned within the organization and that they work to gain thecommitment of executives to make them happen A major benefit of takinga process approach to planning is that it should cease to be a once-a-yearritual and should instead operate continuously The planning processshould identify real information needs and become a means of sharingunderstanding of organizational strategy and challenging perceivedwisdom within the organization

For this to happen Piercy suggests an alternative model for managingthe planning process This is shown in Figure 96 The model identifiesthree process dimensions analytical behavioural and organizational Theanalytical dimension covers the techniques procedures systems andplanning models that essentially analyse and integrate data and thinkingThe process of managing planning is made more comprehensive byincluding a behavioural aspect to do with how things get done Thiscomprises people-related elements such as managerial perceptionsparticipation levels strategic assumptions motivation commitment andownership The third dimension focuses on the nature of the organization

The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 183

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 183

incorporating organizational structure and culture and managementsignals about what actually gets priority within the organization

Budgeting is the next step (following the creation of a plan) in makingthe planning process a reality Whether a top-downbottom-up or abottom-uptop-down approach is taken the budget marks the point atwhich the organization signals its commitment to a demand system byallocating the resources financial and non-financial that will make ithappen For Piercy it is equally important that budgeting is managed as aprocess that also takes into account the wider analytical behavioural andorganizational dimensions discussed in relation to creating a plan

Taking a broader approach to planning that assimilates these analyticalbehavioural and organizational dimensions naturally makes the planningprocess more complex and less easy to manage The danger of a poorlymanaged planning process is that it might result in a plan that is toofocused on analysis or one that does not carry enough information in bothcases leading to a plan that is neither achievable nor actionable Equallyvested interests may dominate the planning process causing limitedownership and commitment on the part of other managers and making itharder to implement Other planning problems revolve around a lack ofresources and organizational resistance to change It is therefore importantthat there are agreed measures of marketing performance in place and thatthe measurement results inform future strategy and practice

184 Demand System Management

Figure 96 A multidimensional model of marketing planning Adapted from Piercy(2002)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 184

[Image not available in this electronic edition]

THE ROLE OF MEASUREMENT IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

An important aspect of New Consumer Marketing is the need to address theissue of measuring marketing performance The model makes measurementa necessary part of the way the organization defines creates and delivers thevalue proposition As with the other six elements of organizational DNAmeasurement plays a role in improving the performance of each of the threecells Without an ongoing assessment of performance against specificcriteria the organization has no way of determining whether it isperforming well that is whether the processes at work in the three cells arebeing carried out optimally Performance results become an essential flow ofinformation around the demand system which serve to support the drive forinsight innovation and agility

Marketing measurement enables marketers to become more accountableAn improvement in marketing accountability would address a key issuenon-marketers have with their marketing colleagues Many senior non-marketers perceive marketers as being lsquounaccountable untouchableslippery and expensiversquo as confirmed in research using the cultural web(Baker 2000) The research results are shown in Figure 97 This view gives

The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management 185

Stories and mythsmiddot mud doesnrsquot stickmiddot golden childmiddot quick promotionmiddot no loyaltymiddot expensive

Symbolsmiddot carsmiddot office location(window)middot stats and terminologymiddot lunch

Ritualsmiddot planning and organizingmiddot delegatingmiddot deadlinesmiddot off-site meetings

Control systemsmiddot 9ndash430middot lunchtravelmiddot entertainingmiddot networking ndash for self

Organizationstructuremiddot lack of structuremiddot internal focusmiddot always in metings

Power structuresmiddot research withheldmiddot they must be rightmiddot jargonmiddot credit taken ndash ifnecessary

Paradigmmiddot unaccountablemiddot untouchablemiddot slipperymiddot expensive

Figure 97 Senior non-marketersrsquo perceptions of marketers

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 185

rise in part to the debate about whether and in what ways marketingcontributes to a business (as first outlined in Chapter 1) Improvement inthe ability of organizations to measure marketing performance would gosome way towards arresting the current crisis in marketing

Techniques to evaluate the marketing process are at present in anembryonic state and lack universal agreement This is largely because themeasures have not yet been developed fully and the organizationalcommitment to measurement is often weak or lacking Essentiallyapproaches to marketing measurement strive to find acceptable ways ofmeasuring both lsquohardrsquo and lsquosoftrsquo marketing data Hard marketing dataincludes sales volume and value market size market share and profitmargins whereas soft marketing data is less tangible and more judgmentalin nature

However a number of organizations are working with professionalbodies to understand how performance measurement can best beaccomplished Current debate revolves around metrics that linkleadership employee satisfaction employee retention customer satis-faction customer retention sales and profitability The emphasis on suchmetrics is driven by developments in customer relationship management(CRM) systems that enable organizations to measure and evaluatecustomer relationships as never before For example a growing number ofaccounting techniques are being used to measure customer value Theserange from historic profitability analyses through lifetime value calcula-tions to links with shareholder value and to the computation of futurevalue creation The aim is to find a measurement approach that accom-modates the wider interpretation of marketing

3M(UK) referred to earlier in Chapter 7 is an example of a companythat manages to balance marketing creativity without sacrificing financialcontrol (Bowman and Gleadle 2002) Its marketing performance isassessed by evaluating innovation in the definition creation and delivery ofthe value proposition Thirty per cent of annual company sales must begenerated from products less than four years old and 10 from productsless than one year old This distinction is refined in two further categorieswith new-to-the-world developments being looked upon as lsquothe idealrsquoversus the substitution of new products for old This represents an analysisof performance at a base level that can then be extracted down to smallersegments of customers

186 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 186

As New Consumer Marketing attains lsquomission-criticalrsquo status in theemerging consumption-led economy marketing investment is gainingincreasing attention from finance professionals This trend marks part of awider revolution in thinking about what kind of corporate assets areimportant in todayrsquos business environment Intangible business assetssuch as knowledge about consumers and markets and corporate know-howabout defining creating and delivering the value proposition areassuming new importance The race is now on to find robust methods ofevaluating and quantifying such assets for the benefit of corporatemanagement and the wider investment community

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Demand system management is about managing a lsquolivingrsquo system ofcells that house the key processes which drive insight innovation andagility and enable the organization to be responsive to the complexdemands of the New Consumer

bull There are seven elements of organizational DNA which make a demandsystem viable Each enables the three cells to optimize performancethus ensuring competitive survival

bull Intuition is the spark that enables employees to base decisions on anunderstanding of consumersrsquo behaviour thoughts and feelings

bull Culture surfaces in everyday organizational life as knowledge about thelsquoway things are done around herersquo

bull Leadership is about demonstrating an ability to engage others inachieving the organizationrsquos mission communicating the corporatevision and upholding the corporate values

bull Corporate vision answers the question lsquowhere are we goingrsquo whilecorporate values are embedded standards and behaviours that provideguidance on how to get there Corporate vision has to be created andrefreshed whereas corporate values endure

bull Employees today are valued as a capital asset and are wooed by aninternal value proposition that informs all aspects of HR practice

bull Knowledge management is about building an organizational memorymade up of explicit and tacit knowledge It requires an organizationalclimate of trust

Summary Points 187

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 187

bull Planning is an ongoing process that encompasses analytical behav-ioural and organizational aspects which extend beyond the physicalmarketing plan

bull Measurement enables marketers to become accountable and providesknowledge about the effectiveness and efficacy of the demand system

CONCLUDING REMARKS

Establishing the case for New Consumer Marketing as a business disciplineand presenting a framework for its conceptualization has been the mainaim of this book The fundamental argument for advancing NewConsumer Marketing is that a value-centric orientation needs to replacethe retention orientation that has dominated marketing practice for thepast decade or so The shift in the macro-marketing environment from aproduction-driven to a consumption-led economy means taking theconsumer as the point of departure for the organization and not its finaldestination In this dynamically complex new marketplace marketingpractice needs to be viewed as systemic and holistic By offering such anapproach to managing the definition creation and delivery of value theNew Consumer Marketing model aims to assist managers in developingand implementing successful consumer marketing strategies Thereremains however considerable scope for debate and for further research inthis important area

Feedback from readers is welcomed and should be directed toslbakercranfieldacuk

188 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 188

Chapter 11 Discussion of CRM in this chapter is informed by the work of the Cranfield

CRM Research Forum directed by Dr Moira Clark Visit wwwcranfield-crmorg2 Statistics used in this section are drawn from EIU Viewswire (2002)

wwwskillbasedfeegovuk wwwhesaacuk and Nellis and Figuera (2002)

Chapter 21 For more on the history and sociology of consumption see Corrigan (1997)2 For the background to consumerism see John (1994) For more on todayrsquos

consumer rights agenda visit wwwwhichcouk3 For more on the post-modern condition refer to the following academic

authors Stephen Brown (author of the very readable Postmodern Marketing) JeanBaurillard Bernard Cova and Maurice Holbrook

Chapter 31 The Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young research referred to in the chapter was

carried out for the Insight Programme (directed by Andre Klimczak) Visitwwwcgeycom

2 The Verdict research was reported at the Marketing Societyrsquos Retail ForumApril 2002 and in Hyman (2002) Other references for this chapter rely on dataand analysis carried in Verdict publications Visit wwwverdictcouk See alsoSeth and Randall (2001) which contains useful analysis of trends in internationalgrocery retailing

Chapter 41 For more on a post-modern approach to consumer behaviour see the

following academic authors Stephen Brown Jean Baurillard Bernard Cova andMaurice Holbrook

2 Treacy and Wiersema (1995) Doyle (2000) Capon and Hulbert (2001) andPiercy (2002) highlight value as the new key driver of strategy in marketing

Notes

12 Baker Endnotes FINAL 5603 245 pm Page 189

Chapter 51 Womack et al (1990) describe the concept of leanness See also references in

Chapter 8

Chapter 61 For an overview of meansndashend theory see Baker (2002) The key academic

paper to refer to is Gutman (1982)2 For an overview of grounded theory see Glaser and Strauss (1967)3 Discussion here and elsewhere in this chapter draws on Baker and Mouncey

(2002)

Chapter 71 The Dell case study referred to in this book is based on the following sources

(Hall 2002 Dell and Fredman 1999 Dell 2002)2 Background reference paper Bowman and Gleadle (2002)3 Taken from the Annual Marketing Society Lecture given by Niall

FitzGerald Chairman of Unilever in London on 19 June 20014 Taken from the authorrsquos PhD research For an overview of meansndashend theory

see Baker (2002)

Chapter 81 The agile supply chain is a concept that has been developed at Cranfield

School of Management within the Cranfield Centre for Logistics and SupplyChain Management This definition of agility comes from Christopher and Towill(2000) See also the work of Professor Alan Harrison including Harrison andHoek (2002)

2 Service blueprinting is associated with the work of Lynn Shostack SeeShostack (1987)

3 The philosophy and implementation of leanness as a management conceptwas set out in Womack et al (1990)

4 Key Account Management is a concept that has been developed at CranfieldSchool of Management and is most closely associated with Professor MalcolmMcDonald See McDonald et al (2002)

Chapter 91 This definition of Theory of Mind is taken from lsquoPsychology of autismrsquo a

presentation made by Professor Uta Frith at the National Autistic Societyrsquos 40thAnniversary International Conference London September 2002 See also thereferences to Theory of Mind made by Professor Jean Aitchison in the 1996 BBCReith Lectures published as The Language Web by Cambridge University Press1996

2 See Bennis and Thomas (2002) for an overview on what makes a great leader

190 Notes

12 Baker Endnotes FINAL 5603 245 pm Page 190

Allford R Evans N and Ward C (2002) A step forward in understandingshoppers using segmentation techniques presented at the ESOMARConference Consolidation or Renewal Barcelona September

Baker S (2000) What non-marketers think about you Marketing Businesssupplement on Better Marketing Measurement September

Baker S (2002) Laddering making sense of meaning in Partington D (ed)Essential Skills for Management Research Sage London ch 12

Baker S and Mouncey P (2002) New Consumer Marketing The implicationsfor market research presented at the ESOMAR Conference Consolidation orRenewal Barcelona September

Bennis W and Thomas R (2002) Crucibles of leadership Harvard BusinessReview 80(9) 39ndash45 September

Berners-Lee T and Fischetti M (1999) Weaving the Web the Original Design andUltimate Destiny of the World Wide Web By Its Inventor HarperSanFrancisco SanFrancisco CA

Booz Allen amp Hamilton (1982) New Product Management for the 1980s BoozAllen amp Hamilton New York

Bowman C and Gleadle P (2002) Culture as a dynamic capability the case of3M in the UK US Academy of Management conference paper presented atAOM2002 Denver Colorado

Brown JS and Duguid P (2000) The Social Life of Information Harvard BusinessSchool Press Boston MA

Brown S (1995) Postmodern Marketing Routledge LondonCapon N and Hulbert JM (2001) Marketing Management in the 21st Century

Prentice Hall Upper Saddle River NJChartered Institute of Marketing (1994) Marketing ndash The Challenge of Change A

Major Study into the Future of Marketing in Key British Enterprises CharteredInstitute of Marketing London

References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 191

Child P (2002) Taking Tesco global The McKinsey Quarterly 3

Christopher M (1992) The Customer Service Planner Butterworth-HeinemannOxford

Christopher M (1998) Logistics and Supply Chain Management 2nd edn FTPrentice Hall Harlow

Christopher M (2001) Breaking down the boundaries the supply chainmanagement process in M McDonald M Christopher S Knox and A Payne(eds) Creating a Company for Customers FT Prentice Hall Harlow

Christopher M and Peck H (1997) Marketing Logistics Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Christopher M and Towill D (2000) Donrsquot lean too far - distinguishing between thelean and agile manufacturing paradigms Proceedings MIM Conference Aston(ISSN 1359-8546)

Christopher M Payne A and Ballantyne D (1991) Relationship MarketingBringing Quality Customer Service and Marketing Together Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Christopher M Payne A and Ballantyne D (2002) Relationship MarketingCreating Stakeholder Value Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Clark M (1999) The recruitment and internal marketing domains in H PeckA Payne M Christopher and M Clark (eds) Relationship Marketing Strategyand Implementation Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Cooper R (1993) Winning at New Products Accelerating the Process from Idea toLaunch Addison-Wesley Reading MA

Corrigan P (1997) The Sociology of Consumption Sage London

Cross R and Prusak L (2002) The people who make organisations go ndash or stopHarvard Business Review 80(6) 104ndash112 June

Davidson H (2002) The Committed Enterprise Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Day G (1999) The Market Driven Organisation Free Press New York

Dell M (2002) Inspiring innovation Harvard Business Review 80(8) 41 August

Dell M and Fredman C (1999) Direct from Dell Strategies that Revolutionized anIndustry HarperBusiness New York

Doyle P (2000) Value Based Marketing ndash Marketing Strategies for Corporate Growthand Shareholder Value John Wiley amp Sons Chichester

Drucker P (1985) Innovation and Entrepreneurship Practice and Principles Harperamp Row New York

Drucker P (2002) Management Challenges for the 21st Century Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

192 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 192

Dyck W van (2002) Managing Complexity in Radical Innovation Projects The Needfor Paradigm Shifts Paper presented at Cranfield School of Management

EIU Viewswire (2002) The Decline of Manufacturing 8 March

Evans M (2001) Decoding competitive propositions a semiotic alternative totraditional advertising research presented at the MRS Conference 169ndash181

Fournier S (1996) Understanding consumerndashbrand relationships HarvardBusiness School working paper 98-018

Gates B and Hemingway C (1999) Business the Speed of Thought WarnerBooks New York

Gattorna J (ed) (1998) Strategic Supply Chain Alignment Gower Aldershot

Geus A de (1999) The Living Company Growth Learning and Longevity in BusinessNicholas Brealey London

Glaser BG and Strauss AL (1967) The Discovery of Grounded Theory Strategies forQualitative Research Aldine Chicago IL

Gleick J (1987) Chaos Making a New Science Viking New York

Godin S (1999) Permission Marketing Turning Strangers into Friends and Friendsinto Customers Simon amp Schuster New York

Goldman S Nagel R and Preiss K (1995) Agile Competitors and VirtualOrganizations Strategies for Enriching the Customer Van Nostrand Reinhold NewYork

Gordon W (1999) Goodthinking ndash A Guide to Qualitative Research AdmapHenley on Thames

Gordon W (2001) The dark room of the mind ndash what does neuro-psychologynow tell us about brands presented at AQRQRCA Conference ndash QualitativeResearch in the 21st Century Paris 18ndash20 April

Grant J (1999) The New Marketing Manifesto Texere London

Gutman J (1982) A meansndashend chain model based on consumer categorizationprocesses Journal of Marketing 46(2) 60ndash62

Hall A (2002) The boy who lived the American dream The Sunday Times 1December

Hamel G (2000) Leading the Revolution Harvard Business School Press BostonMA

Hamel G and Prahalad CK (1994) Competing for the Future Harvard BusinessSchool Press Boston MA

Hanby T (1999) Brands ndash dead or alive Journal of the Market Research Society41(1) 7ndash18

References 193

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 193

Handy C (1989) The Age of Unreason Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Handy C (1994) The Empty Raincoat Making Sense of the Future HutchinsonLondon

Handy C (1997) The Hungry Spirit Beyond Capitalism ndash A Quest for Purpose in theModern World Hutchinson London

Harrison A and Hoek RI van (2002) Logistics Management and Strategy FTPrentice Hall Harlow

Harvard Business Review (2003) The Best of HBR on Motivation 81(1) 8 January

Hertz N (2001) Silent Takeover Global Capitalism and the Death of Democracy FreePress New York

Hyman R (2002) The retail roller-coaster message from the high street MarketLeader (17) 46ndash50

John R (ed) (1994) The Consumer Revolution Redressing the Balance Hodder ampStoughton London

Johnson G and Scholes K (1992) Exploring Corporate Strategy Prentice HallLondon

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1997) Value innovation the strategic logic ofhigh growth Harvard Business Review 75(1) 102ndash112 JanuaryFebruary

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1999a) Creating new market space HarvardBusiness Review 77(1) 83ndash93 JanuaryFebruary

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1999b) Strategy value innovation and theknowledge economy Sloan Management Review 40(3) 41ndash54

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (2000) Knowing a winning business idea whenyou see one Harvard Business Review 78(5) 129ndash141 SeptemberOctober

Klein N (2000) No Logo Taking Aim at the Brand Bullies Picador New York

Kransdorff A (19992000) The other lsquovirusrsquo that is bugging industry MarketLeader (7) 27ndash29 Winter

Lannon J and Cooper P (1983) Humanistic advertising a holistic culturalperspective International Journal of Advertising 2(3) 195ndash213

Lauterborn R (1991) From 4Ps to 4Cs Advertising Age 61(41) 26 1 October

McCall A (ed) (2002) The Sunday Times 100 Best Companies to Work For TheSunday Times 24 March

McCracken GD (1988) Culture and Consumption New Approaches to the SymbolicCharacter of Consumer Goods and Activities Indiana University PressBloomington IN

194 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 194

McDonald M (1999) Marketing Plans How To Prepare Them How To Use ThemButterworth-Heinemann Oxford

McDonald M (2001) Getting back to basics the market understanding processin M McDonald M Christopher S Knox and A Payne (eds) Creating aCompany for Customers FT Prentice Hall Harlow ch 2

McDonald M Rogers B and Woodburn D (2002) Key Customers How ToManage them Profitably Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

McGregor D (1960) The Human Side of Enterprise McGraw-Hill New York

Michaels E Handfield-Jones H and Axelrod B (2001) The War for TalentHarvard Business School Press Boston MA

Mitchell A (2001) Right Side Up Building Brands in the Age of the OrganizedConsumer HarperCollinsBusiness London

Moir L (2001) Why managers and organisations must embrace CSR ManagementFocus Cranfield School of Management (17)13 Winter

Negroponte N (1995) Being Digital Knopf New York

Nellis J and Figueira C (2002) Is there a future for UK ManufacturingManagement Focus Cranfield School of Management (19) 19ndash21 Winter

Nordstroumlm K and Ridderstraringle J (2000) Funky Business Talent Makes CapitalDance ftcom Harlow

Pascale RT (1990) Managing on the Edge How the Smartest Companies Use Conflictto Stay Ahead Viking New York

Pascale RT Millemann M and Gioja L (2000) Surfing the Edge of Chaos TheLaws of Nature and the New Laws of Business Crown Business New York

Piercy N (2002) Market-Led Strategic Change A Guide to Transforming the Process ofGoing to Market 3rd edn Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Pine BJ and Gilmore JH (1998) Welcome to the experience economyHarvard Business Review 76(4) 97ndash105 JulyAugust

Pine BJ and Gilmore JH (1999) The Experience Economy Work is Theatre andEvery Business a Stage Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

PricewaterhouseCoopers (1999) Global Growth and Innovation surveyPricewaterhouseCoopers London

Reichheld FF and Teal T (1996) The Loyalty Effect The Hidden Force BehindGrowth Profits and Lasting Value Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Rokeach M (1973) The Nature of Human Values Free Press New York

Sawhney M and Kotler P (2001) Marketing in the age of informationdemocracy in a chapter in D Iacobucci (ed) Kellogg on Marketing John Wileyamp Sons Chichester

References 195

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 195

Schlesinger LA and Heskett JL (1991) Breaking the cycle of failure in servicesSloan Management Review Spring 17ndash28

Schultz DE and Lindberg-Repo K (2002) Building holistic relationshipcommunication programs in an interactive marketplace presented at theESOMAR Conference Consolidation or Renewal Barcelona September2002

Seth A and Randall G (2001) The Grocers The Rise and Rise of the SupermarketChains London Kogan Page

Seybold P Lewis JM and Marshak RT (2001) The Customer Revolution How toThrive When Customers Are in Control Random House New York

Shostack L (1987) Service positioning through structural change Journal ofMarketing (51) 34ndash43 January

Smith D and Fletcher J (2001) Inside Information John Wiley amp SonsChichester

Tapscott D (1996) The Digital Economy Promise and Peril in the Age of NetworkedIntelligence McGraw-Hill New York

Tapscott D (1998) Growing Up Digital The Rise of the Net Generation McGraw-Hill New York

Tapscott D Lowy A and Ticoll D (2000) Digital Capital Harnessing the Powerof Business Webs Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Taylor FW (1967) Principles of Scientific Management WW Norton New York(first published 1911)

Toffler A (1970) Future Shock Random House New York (out of print)Treacy M and Wiersema FD (1995) The Discipline of Market Leaders Choose

Your Customers Narrow Your Focus Dominate Your Market Addison-WesleyReading MA

Womack JP Jones DT and Roos D (1990) The Machine that Changed theWorld Rawson Associates New York

196 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 196

AA 24Abbey National 147Advantage Card 46agility

in supply chain management 159in value delivery 131ndash3

Air France 129Andersen 173anti-globalization movement 32Argos 46Asda 40 134 176 177ndash8Ashley Laura 77Autobytel 140

BampQ 48BAA 133Badai 117Bailey Christopher 125Barbie 115ndash16Barclaycard 46Batey Ian 118Bell Laboratories 33benchmarking 59betamax 113binary thinking 58ndash60Blair Tony 133Blockbuster 46BMW 105Body Shop 120Boots 44 45 46Boots Opticians brand 45

Booz Allen amp Hamilton New ProductManagement 111

Boston Consulting Group (BCG) 12Boston Matrix 12ndash13boundary-spanning role 98BP 46 120Bradford amp Bingley 178brand owners 64

concerns of 65ndash6key issues 37ndash42

brand repositioning 111 112branding in value creation 113ndash20Bravo Marie 124bricolage 87British Airways 147British Gas 24ndash5Britvic 158Brown John Seely 60budgeting 184Burberry 124ndash5Burberry Cup 125Business Process Re-engineering (BPR)

59 67

Cadbury 80Cadbury Schweppes 104 105Caldey Island 25call centres 139 149ndash50Callaway Golf 110Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young 37category killers 48

Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 197

category one segments 94Centrica 24ndash5C5 electric car (Sinclair) 113Chan Kim W 110Chanel No 5 122channels in value delivery 133ndash41chaos theory 58Chaplin Charlie 59Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM)

Challenge of Change The 10Cheers (television programme) 31Christopher Martin 154

Customer Service Planner The 142Clinique 28Club Nestleacute 150Clubcard 46Coca-Cola 38 118 123committed enterprise 174complex adaptive systems 58complexity science 57ndash8consumer churn 46consumer concept 24ndash5consumer confidentiality 91consumer marketing implications for 48

61consumer movement 25consumer responsiveness

developing 66ndash7through time compression 154ndash9

consumer rights defence of 25ndash6consumerism 25Consumersrsquo Association (UK) 25consumersrsquo indifference zone 128Consumersrsquo Union (CU) (USA) 25consumption

management 27 54ndash5in transformation 23ndash6

Cooper Peter 114core capability 52corporate amnesia 179corporate anorexia 67corporate memory 88cost reduction 41ndash2 111ndash12

Coudron John 182Countrywide Porter Novelli (CPN)

145ndash6cultural web of an organization 166culture 165ndash8Customer Bill of Rights for the

Information Age 26customer lifetime value 14customer loyalty 14 45ndash8customer-managed relationships (CMR)

17Customer Relationship Management

(CRM) 15 21 186failure of 1systems 89ndash91test of 15ndash17

customer retention rates 15customer value 14

database segmentation 93ndash4Davidson Hugh 174Day George 180Debenhams 46Dell Michael 107 153Dell 18 19 153 168Dell-com 153demand chain management 67demand system management 161ndash88

culture in 165ndash8employees in 175ndash9intuition in 163ndash5knowledge management in 179ndash81leadership in 170ndash4measurement in 185ndash7planning in 181ndash4structure in 168ndash9values in 172ndash4vision in 171ndash2

Deutsche Telekom 133Dichter Ernest 82Direct Line 139Directional Policy Matrix (DPM) 12discourse analysis 83ndash4

198 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 198

disintermediation 140Disney 139 172 177Dixons Group 45Domoco 117Drucker Peter 102 175Dunkinrsquo Donuts 32

easyJet 107edit choice in store 44ndash5Efficient Consumer Response (ECR) 157Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) 157email 135employee cloak theory 171employment patterns 20empowerment 59endowment policies 93Energy America 24Enron 173Enviego 28Ericsson 39ESOMAR 90ethnographic analysis 83 85ndash6euro 41every day low pricing (ELDP) 43evolution of marketing 12ndash17experience economy 31explicit knowledge 179ndash80extended enterprise approach 152ndash3 169

fast moving consumer goods (fmcg) sector10 12 38 40 41 80

Fetchmax 141First Direct 141Fitzgerald Niall 41 115Fletcher Jonathon 81focus groups 86Ford Henry 59 60Ford Motor Company 78 1194Cs 34 55 644Is culture 1454Ps (Product Place Price and Promotion)

11 23 27 34 55 64Fournier Susan 114

France Telecom 133Fry Art 107

Gartner 33Gates Bill 60General Electric 12General Motors 119genetically modified (GM) foods 119Geus Arie de Living Company The 60Gleick James Chaos Making a New Science

58globalization 11 38ndash9Godin Seth 52Goldfish 24Gordon Wendy 86 87

Goodthinking 87Grant John New Marketing Manifesto 114gross domestic product (GDP) 2 37 64

103Grounded Theory 82Guinness 84 85 156ndash7

Haji-Ioannou Stelios 107Hamel Gary

Competing for the Future (and CKPrahalad) 66ndash7 182

Leading the Revolution 182Handy Charles 59Harley-Davidson 30 123Hertz Di Noreena Silent Takeover The

119Hewlett-Packard 153 179Home Depot 139homoeconomicus 128human resource (HR) professionals 175hygiene factors 76

IBM 153IKEA 110iMAC 123i-mode 117ndash18independent financial advisers (IFAs) 140in-depth interviews 86

Index 199

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 199

infomediaries 140information technology 16 17 53ndash4 91

179 181role of 135New Consumer and 33

infotainment 32innovation

as a dynamic capability 107ndash9radical approach to 109ndash11search for 42through process or people 106ndash7in value creation 102ndash11

INSEAD 110insight in value definition 74ndash9 97ndash9Intel 57 133interactive marketplace response to 53ndash4International Chambers of Commerce 90International Red Cross 172Internet 11 33 53 57 135 179interviews 144intuition in demand system management

163ndash5intuitive mentalizing 165

Johnson Gerry 165Johnson amp Johnson 120Johnson Controls 104 105

Kennedy President John F 25Klein Naomi No Logo 32knowledge management 98 179ndash81knowledge worker 175Kotler Philip 26Krispy Kreme Doughnuts 75 76

Land Rover 146Landsrsquo End 18 19Lannon Judie 114Lastminutecom 133 134Lauterborn Robert 34lead-time gap 154leadership 170ndash4lean enterprise 153

lean production (leanness) 59 67learning organization 60Lee Tim Berners 60Legoland 46Levitt Theodore 31

Marketing Myopia 93Lew Platt 179Lorenz Edward 58loyalty cardsschemes 46 47 88ndash9Lucozade 98Lufthansa 129Luminus 24Lyons Maid 113

makendashsell approach 27 64 182manufacturing future of 39ndash40Mario Testino Exhibition 125Market Research Society 90market segmentation 94market share 14marketing

in crisis 10ndash11evolution of 12ndash17life cycle 16planning 182ndash4

Marketing Forum 11Marks amp Spencer 43 155Mars 111Mars Ice Cream 113Marshall Alfred 128Marshall Plan 24Marx Karl 175Mattel 116Mauborgne Renee 110McCann Erickson World Group 150McCann Relationship Marketing Paris

(MRM)150 152McCracken Grant 24McDonald Professor Malcolm 182McDonaldization 59McDonaldrsquos 43 46 139 177McGregor Douglas 59McKinsey amp Co 12

200 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 200

meansndashend theory 78measurement in demand system

management 185ndash7media in value delivery 133ndash41Menichetti Roberto 125mental models 87 115Metcalfe Robert 57micro-retailing 48 64Microsoft 60 172 176MIT 153Mitchell Alan 32mobile phones 33 135Modern Times (film) 59Moir Lance 120Moore Gordon 57Moss Kate 125MP3 53Mueller John 108Muumlller 112multichannel centres 150multinational operations 45multiple channels 44multiple formats trade cross 44multiple locations trade across 43ndash4Multiple Markets Model 15Murphyrsquos 156

National Farmersrsquo Union (NFU) 104Natsuno Takeshi 117Nectar 46needs-states analysis 86ndash7Negroponte Nicholas 60Nestleacute 41 150neuro-psychology 87New Consumer 27ndash33

complex lives of 30embracing 66experiences of 31information technology and 33marketing literacy and demands of

31ndash2response to 52ndash3time and 28ndash30

New Consumer Marketing 51ndash62 92114

definition 51ndash5meaning 55ndash60model 4 5 63ndash71 161 162

new product development in valuecreation 111ndash13

new-to-the-world introductions 112ndash13next-generation smart phone 135Nike 39 40 78 122Nissan 105Nite-and-Day 44Nokia 136ndash7non-traditional market sensing in value

definition 88ndash92using CRM systems 89ndash91using database systems 88ndash9using frontline staff 91ndash2

Nordstroumlm Kjell (and JonasRidderstraringle) Funky Business 170175

Norwich Union 140

Odeon Cinemas 46One Stop 44OneTel 24Open Plan Account 76Oracle 90Oreal Lrsquo 30organizational agility 5 132 140organizational culture 132organizational DNA 5 69 71 161ndash3

185

Pascale RichardManaging on the Edge 58Surfing the Edge of Chaos 60

Pearson 18 19Peoplesoft 90Pepsi-Cola 158personal digital assistants (PDAs) 135Petcareco Limited 148 149phantom factors 77

Index 201

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 201

Piercy Professor Nigel 183 184PIMS (Profit Impact of Market Strategy)

14planning in knowledge system

management 181ndash4Pop Idol (television programme) 19ndash20positioning in value creation 120ndash5

emotional message 121ndash2process 123ndash5

power brands 38Prahalad CK (and Gary Hamel)

Competing for the Future 66ndash7 182Pret A Manger 125 144ndash5 176price in value creation 125ndash9process knowledge 181Procter amp Gamble 12 18 19 96product life cycle (PLC) 12prosumption 18psychometric tests 144Purdy Lucy 26

quality movement 59qualitative research 82ndash6quantitative research 80ndash1 86Quick Response (QR) 157

Range Rover 146rate tart 53rational consumer 128reductionist approaches 59Reichheld Frederick 14Relationship Marketing (RM) 3 21 27

54 55 63ndash4rise of 14ndash15

retail branding 45retailers

concerns of 65ndash6power growth in 40ndash1response 42ndash8

Ridderstraringle Jonas (and KjellNordstroumlm) Funky Business 170175

Ritz-Carlton Hotel 143 144

Rokeach Milton 172Rolex 125Ryanair 129

Safeway 134Sainsburyrsquos 41 44 46 89 96 134sales growth 41ndash2SAP 90Sara Lee 39Sasser Earl 14savings accounts 93savings bonds 93Sawhney Mohanibar 26Scholes Kevin 165Schultz Howard 170Schwab Charles amp Co 110segmentation analysis 93ndash7semiotics analysis 83 84ndash5September 11th 2001 20service in value delivery 141ndash8Seybold Patricia 177Ps of Relationship Marketing 34Shearwood Michael 91Shell 12 60 80 119 120Siebel Systems 90Simon Herbert 137Sinclair Clive 113Singapore Airlines 118 145 172ndash3Six Sigma 59Skoda 98Skoggins Dan 170Smith David 81Smith WH 31Sony 117Sony Music 133Southwest Airlines (SWA) 141sponsorship 125staff

in demand system management 175ndash9empowerment 146ndash8motivation 145recruitment 143ndash6

stagendashgate process 106

202 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 202

Starbucks 170Stella Artois 125 138stock-keeping units (SKUs) 38StreetKa buyers 78supply chain in value delivery 152ndash9supply-chain management 5 67SWOT analysis 181Synectics Corporation 104

tacit knowledge 179ndash80tacit process knowledge 181Tango 158lsquoTapping the creativity of consumersrsquo 104Tapscott Don 60Taylor Frederick Principles of Scientific

Management The 59technology integration in value delivery

148ndash52teenagers 33Teletubbies 83ndash4Tennant Stella 125Tesco 40 44 45 46 68 134 147 167

168 169Tesco Clubcard 89text messaging 33TGI Friday 170Theory of Mind 163ndash4Theory X and Y 59Thortonrsquos 1403Com Corporation 573M(UK) 107ndash8 186time 54

compression 154ndash9refugees 28ndash30

Toffler Alvin Future Shock 18Toyota 153trade

across multiple formats 44across multiple locations 43ndash4

transaction marketing 3 55

Unilever 12 41 85ndash6 115Unipart 177

value-adding time 156value-centric orientation 3 55ndash6 57 66

68 115value concept 75value creation 4 70 101ndash30

branding in 113ndash20innovation in 102ndash11new product development in 111ndash13positioning in 120ndash5price in 125ndash9

value definition 4 70 73ndash99insight generators in 97ndash9insight in 74ndash9needs-states analysis 86ndash7non-traditional market sensing in

88ndash92qualitative research 82ndash6quantitative research 80ndash1segmentation in 92ndash7traditional market research in 79ndash87

value delivery 4 70 131ndash60agility in 131ndash3media and channels in 133ndash41service in 141ndash8technology integration in 148ndash52supply chain in 152ndash9

value-destroyers 77value-enhancing factors 74 76 77 78value evaluation of 127ndash9value-influencing factors 74ndash8value innovation 110value-maintaining factors 76 77values in knowledge system management

172ndash4Veterans Agency (VA) 132 133Virgin Atlantic 109Virgin Group 109ndash10 114Virgin Mobile 109 149Virgin One 109ndash10virtual call-centre operators (V-Reprsquos)

150vision in knowledge system management

171ndash2

Index 203

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 203

Volkswagen 138Volvo 59

Walls 80 113Wal-Mart 40 45 110 119War Pensions Agency 132Woburn Safari Park 164ndash5Womack James 153Woolwich Building Society 76World Trade Organization 32 119

World Wide Web 60wwwcarsurveyorg 53wwwfriendsreunitedcom 30wwwmoneysupermarketcom 53wwwsyneticsworldcom 104

Zara 91ndash2 158Zip Project 155Zyman Sergio 123

204 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 204

  • New Consumer Marketing
    • Contents
    • Foreword
    • Acknowledgements
    • About the Author
    • Introduction
      • Meeting the Challenges
      • Overview of the Book
        • 1 Earthquake
          • Marketing in Crisis
          • The Evolution of Marketing
            • The Rise of Relationship Marketing
            • The Test of CRM
              • Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment
              • Implications for Consumer Marketing
              • Summary Points
                • 2 The New Consumer
                  • Consumption in Transformation
                    • Expansion of the Consumer Concept
                    • Defence of Consumer Rights
                      • Consumption Management in Question
                      • A New Kind of Consumer
                        • New Consumers Are Exercised By Time
                        • New Consumers Lead Complex Lives
                        • New Consumers Seek Experiences
                        • New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding
                        • New Consumers Are IT Enabled
                          • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                          • Summary Points
                            • 3 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers
                              • Key Issues for Brand Owners
                                • The Force of Globalization
                                • The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing
                                • The Growth in Retailer Power
                                • The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth
                                • The Search for Innovation
                                  • The Retailersrsquo Response
                                    • Trading across Multiple Locations
                                    • Trading across Multiple Formats
                                    • Use of Multiple Channels
                                    • Editing Choice in Store
                                    • Enhancing Retail Branding
                                    • Developing Multinational Operations
                                    • Pursuing Customer Loyalty
                                      • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                                      • Summary Points
                                        • 4 New Consumer Marketing
                                          • New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it
                                            • A Response to the New Consumer
                                            • A Response to the Interactive Marketplace
                                            • A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management
                                              • New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean
                                                • Adopting Value-Centricity
                                                • Applying Science
                                                • Breaking out of Binary Thinking
                                                  • New Consumer Marketing ndash Who Is Involved
                                                  • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                                                  • Summary Points
                                                    • 5 A Model of New Consumer Marketing
                                                      • To Recap
                                                      • Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing
                                                        • Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers
                                                        • Embracing the New Consumer
                                                        • Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness
                                                        • Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis
                                                          • The New Consumer Marketing Model
                                                            • 6 Value Definition
                                                              • The Role of Insight in Value Definition
                                                                • Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value
                                                                • Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors
                                                                  • The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition
                                                                    • Using Quantitative Research
                                                                    • Using Qualitative Research
                                                                    • Need-States Analysis
                                                                      • The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition
                                                                        • Using Database Systems
                                                                        • Using CRM Systems
                                                                        • Using Front-line Staff
                                                                          • The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition
                                                                            • Creating a Segmentation Analysis
                                                                              • The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition
                                                                              • Summary Points
                                                                                • 7 Value Creation
                                                                                  • The Role of Innovation in Value Creation
                                                                                    • Consumers as Innovators
                                                                                    • Innovation through Process or People
                                                                                    • Innovation as a Dynamic Capability
                                                                                    • A Radical Approach to Innovation
                                                                                      • The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation
                                                                                      • The Role of Branding in Value Creation
                                                                                        • Building Successful Brands
                                                                                        • Emerging Brand Issues
                                                                                          • The Role of Positioning in Value Creation
                                                                                            • Drawing out the Emotional Message
                                                                                            • The Positioning Process
                                                                                              • The Role of Price in Value Creation
                                                                                                • The Evaluation of Value
                                                                                                  • Summary Points
                                                                                                    • 8 Value Delivery
                                                                                                      • The Role of Agility in Value Delivery
                                                                                                      • The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery
                                                                                                        • Making the Most of Media Choices
                                                                                                        • Making the Most of Channel Choices
                                                                                                          • The Role of Service in Value Delivery
                                                                                                            • Creating a Service Strategy
                                                                                                            • Recruiting and Motivating Staff
                                                                                                            • Empowering Employees to Live the Brand
                                                                                                              • The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery
                                                                                                              • The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery
                                                                                                                • Competing through the Supply Chain
                                                                                                                • Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression
                                                                                                                  • Summary Points
                                                                                                                    • 9 Demand System Management
                                                                                                                      • The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                      • The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                        • Culture
                                                                                                                        • Structure
                                                                                                                          • The Role of Leadership Vision and Values in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                            • Leadership
                                                                                                                            • Vision
                                                                                                                            • Values
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Employees in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Planning in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • Summary Points
                                                                                                                              • Concluding Remarks
                                                                                                                                • Notes
                                                                                                                                • References
                                                                                                                                • Index
Page 5: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System

New Consumer Marketing

Managing a Living Demand System

Susan Baker

with

Margrit Bass

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page iii

Copyright copy 2003 John Wiley amp Sons Ltd The Atrium Southern Gate ChichesterWest Sussex PO19 8SQ England

Telephone (+44) 1243 779777

Email (for orders and customer service enquiries) cs-bookswileycoukVisit our Home Page on wwwwileyeuropecom or wwwwileycom

All Rights Reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system ortransmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording scanning orotherwise except under the terms of the Copyright Designs and Patents Act 1988 or under the terms ofa licence issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency Ltd 90 Tottenham Court Road London W1T 4LPUK without the permission in writing of the Publisher Requests to the Publisher should be addressedto the Permissions Department John Wiley amp Sons Ltd The Atrium Southern Gate Chichester WestSussex PO19 8SQ England or emailed to permreqwileycouk or faxed to (+44) 1243 770620

This publication is designed to provide accurate and authoritative information in regard to the subjectmatter covered It is sold on the understanding that the Publisher is not engaged in renderingprofessional services If professional advice or other expert assistance is required the services of acompetent professional should be sought

Other Wiley Editorial Offices

John Wiley amp Sons Inc 111 River Street Hoboken NJ 07030 USA

Jossey-Bass 989 Market Street San Francisco CA 94103-1741 USA

Wiley-VCH Verlag GmbH Boschstr 12 D-69469 Weinheim Germany

John Wiley amp Sons Australia Ltd 33 Park Road Milton Queensland 4064 Australia

John Wiley amp Sons (Asia) Pte Ltd 2 Clementi Loop 02-01 Jin Xing Distripark Singapore 129809

John Wiley amp Sons Canada Ltd 22 Worcester Road Etobicoke Ontario Canada M9W 1L1

Wiley also publishes its books in a variety of electronic formats Some content that appears in print maynot be available in electronic books

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Baker SusanNew consumer marketing managing a living demand systemby Susan Baker

p cmIncludes bibliographical references and index

ISBN 0-470-84482-5 (cloth alk paper)1 Marketing I Title

HF5415B279 20036588mdashdc21 2003007455

British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data

A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library

ISBN 0-470-84482-5

Typeset in 1214 Garamond by Footnote Graphics Ltd Warminster WiltshirePrinted and bound in Great Britain by TJ International Ltd Padstow CornwallThis book is printed on acid-free paper responsibly manufactured from sustainable forestry in which at least two trees are planted for each one used for paper production

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page iv

Contents

Foreword ixAcknowledgements xiAbout the Author xiii

Introduction 1Meeting the Challenges 3Overview of the Book 6

1 Earthquake 9Marketing in Crisis 10The Evolution of Marketing 12

The Rise of Relationship Marketing 14The Test of CRM 15

Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment 18Implications for Consumer Marketing 21Summary Points 22

2 The New Consumer 23Consumption in Transformation 23

Expansion of the Consumer Concept 24Defence of Consumer Rights 25

Consumption Management in Question 27A New Kind of Consumer 27

New Consumers Are Exercised By Time 28New Consumers Lead Complex Lives 30New Consumers Seek Experiences 31New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding 31New Consumers Are IT Enabled 32

Implications for Consumer Marketing 33Summary Points 34

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page v

3 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers 37Key Issues for Brand Owners 37

The Force of Globalization 38The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing 39The Growth in Retailer Power 40The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth 41The Search for Innovation 42

The Retailersrsquo Response 42Trading across Multiple Locations 43Trading across Multiple Formats 44Use of Multiple Channels 44Editing Choice in Store 44Enhancing Retail Branding 45Developing Multinational Operations 45Pursuing Customer Loyalty 45

Implications for Consumer Marketing 48Summary Points 48

4 New Consumer Marketing 51New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it 51

A Response to the New Consumer 52A Response to the Interactive Marketplace 53A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management 54

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 55Adopting Value-Centricity 55Applying Science 57Breaking out of Binary Thinking 58

New Consumer Marketing ndash Who Is Involved 60Implications for Consumer Marketing 61Summary Points 61

5 A Model of New Consumer Marketing 63To Recap 63Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing 65

Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers 65Embracing the New Consumer 66Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness 66Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis 67

The New Consumer Marketing Model 67

vi Contents

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page vi

6 Value Definition 73The Role of Insight in Value Definition 74

Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value 74Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors 78

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 79Using Quantitative Research 80Using Qualitative Research 82Need-States Analysis 86

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 88Using Database Systems 88Using CRM Systems 89Using Front-line Staff 91

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 91Creating a Segmentation Analysis 93

The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition 97Summary Points 99

7 Value Creation 101The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 102

Consumers as Innovators 104Innovation through Process or People 106Innovation as a Dynamic Capability 107A Radical Approach to Innovation 109

The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation 111The Role of Branding in Value Creation 113

Building Successful Brands 116Emerging Brand Issues 119

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 120Drawing out the Emotional Message 121The Positioning Process 123

The Role of Price in Value Creation 125The Evaluation of Value 127

Summary Points 129

8 Value Delivery 131The Role of Agility in Value Delivery 131The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 133

Making the Most of Media Choices 136Making the Most of Channel Choices 139

Contents vii

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page vii

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 141Creating a Service Strategy 142Recruiting and Motivating Staff 143Empowering Employees to Live the Brand 146

The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery 148The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 152

Competing through the Supply Chain 153Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression 154

Summary Points 159

9 Demand System Management 161The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management 163The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 165

Culture 165Structure 168

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values in Demand System Management 170

Leadership 170Vision 171Values 172

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 175The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System

Management 179The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 181The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management 185Summary Points 187Concluding Remarks 188

Notes 189References 191Index 197

viii Contents

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page viii

Foreword

Samuel Curtis Johnson first built his reputation as a maker of parquet floorsand then became better known for creating a new way to care for them Hislegacy was a company with a small portfolio of wax-based products whichevolved into the global concern that SC Johnson is today with its globalhousehold name brands such as PledgeGlade and Mr Muscle

One of the basic principles that has guided the successful developmentof the company since its founding over a hundred years ago has been thebelief that we must earn the enduring goodwill of consumers and users ofour products and services

Consumers make up one of five key groups of people to whom we believewe are responsible and whose trust we have to earn (the others beingemployees the general public neighbours and hosts in the countries andcommunities where we conduct business and the world community) Inparticular we are committed to providing useful products and servicesthroughout the world by

Monitoring the changing wants and needs of consumers and users Maintaining close and effective business relationships with the trade to

ensure that our products and services are readily available to consumersand users

Continuing our research and development commitment to provide a strong technical base for innovative and superior products andservices

With our strong corporate emphasis on understanding consumers andproviding them with what they want I found this book enormously appeal-ing because it offers a very clear summary of todayrsquos context for consumermarketing and identifies the real challenges facing those of us seeking toexpand markets market share and profits

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page ix

Susan depicts for us the tectonic shift that has taken place in theeconomy describing this as a move from production-driven to consumption-led In doing so she raises relevant questions about how marketing needs toundergo a consequent shift Most of the marketing frameworks wersquore alltoo familiar with emerged in the production-driven era and we have to askhow relevant they are in this age of the lsquonew consumerrsquo This is a consumerwho is active confident and knowledgeable one who looks for brandexperiences and whose life is being transformed by developments in IT

The marketplace before us is no longer static and homogenous andSusan links neatly into business trends that are being played out here Sheoffers a framework for organising marketing to deliver the value thatconsumers are looking for In doing so she draws on thinking from theemerging discipline of complexity science

This is a timely and relevant book Its stimulating content makesabsorbing reading for both practitioners and scholars Irsquom delighted to becontinuing an SC Johnson tradition of championing consumer marketingin robustly endorsing this thought-provoking work

Steven P StanbrookPresidentndashAsia PacificSC Johnson

x Foreword

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page x

Acknowledgements

lsquoWhy have you got so many books in herersquo asked my son Mark then aged five and ahalf years on entering my study at home one day lsquoBecause Irsquom writing a bookrsquo I replied lsquoWhy do you need so many books to write a bookrsquo he asked

It was a good question and I went on to explain that it wasnrsquot just the booksI needed as reference material but copies of academic papers notes ofmeetings with leading practitioners conference presentations seminarnotes copies of student projects and dissertations and so on and so forthFor the fact of the matter is that this book has emerged out of my years asboth a practitioner and an academic and a debt of gratitude is due to theeclectic group that has contributed to my thinking Working at CranfieldSchool of Management has been a particular source of inspiration and manyof my colleagues will find themselves quoted for good reason My work inestablishing the New Marketing Research Group at the School (visitwwwnew-marketingorg) has helped in pulling many of my ideastogether Irsquom grateful to Professor Malcolm McDonald for supporting mein this venture and to Dr Louise Humphries and Debbie Roberts forhelping me make the Group happen

In making this book a reality Irsquod like to acknowledge the patience ofClaire Plimmer and her team at Wiley the secretarial assistance fromHayley Tedder at Cranfield the creative effort on the graphics from JoannaEnglish and the help given by Marion Cooper with several of the casestudies Margrit Bass who edited this as I wrote it was always encouragingand the book has benefited enormously from her input

Finally I would like to dedicate this book to the three most importantpeople in my life ndash my husband Chris and our sons James and Mark Thankyou for living this book with me

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xi

My concluding words are again attributed to Mark He came into mystudy again a week or so ago and asked why the can of polish was sitting onthe floor lsquoBecause now the bookrsquos finished Irsquom clearing uprsquo I replied Helooked about and then said disdainfully lsquoWell you havenrsquot finished yethave yoursquo Proving therersquos nothing like children to keep your feet on theground

Susan BakerMay 2003

xii Acknowledgements

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xii

About the Author

Dr Susan BakerAt Cranfield School of Management where she is a full time member offaculty Susan specializes in consumer marketing in particular under-standing consumer markets branding and international marketing Shefounded and directs the New Marketing Research Group which workstogether with a consortium of client organizations to understand theimpact on marketing of the New Consumer (wwwnew-marketingorg)

A frequent keynote speaker at conferences and seminars Susan teacheson the MBA programme and works on a variety of management develop-ment programmes for companies across all sectors ndash consumer business-to-business and professional services

Prior to Cranfield Susan pursued a ten-year career in services marketingin leisure retailing from which she gained senior management experienceon both client and agency sides of the business in the UK and overseas

Outside Cranfield she was a trustee of Consumersrsquo Association for manyyears and has more recently become a trustee of Beating Bowel Cancer

She can be contacted at slbakercranfieldacuk

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xiii

01 Baker Prelims Final 5603 151 pm Page xiv

As a member of faculty at Cranfield School of Management I have metmany senior marketers over recent years who have become frustrated thatlsquomarketing doesnrsquot seem to be working any morersquo Companies are finding itharder to connect with consumers CRM systems that promised so muchhave delivered so little The conventional tools and techniques ofmarketing no longer appear to be relevant Added to all of this market-ingrsquos contribution to a business is constantly under question In effect thecertainties of the marketing environment have been replaced with theuncertainties of a dynamically complex marketplace

So what has changedThe answer is a lot The ground beneath our feet feels shaky because we

are experiencing the after effects of an lsquoearthquakersquo Almost imperceptiblythe economic plates are shifting sending tremors through the players(brand owners and retailers on the one side and consumers on the other)rearranging a landscape that had appeared static and immovable for so longEquilibrium is being replaced with a state of continual change anduncertainty In a variety of small ways the fault lines are emerging withsudden clarity We are moving from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy where the nature of the exchange is different and thisdifference is exacerbated by the force of the internet and e-commerce Thisshift is creating a number of key challenges for consumer marketing

These challenges can be summarized as the need to

bull embrace the New Consumerbull address the concerns of brand owners and retailersbull help organizations develop real consumer responsivenessbull lift marketing out of its crisis

Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 1

Companies are confronted with a new kind of consumer one that hasvariously been described as lsquoactiversquo lsquoknowledgeablersquo and lsquopostmodernrsquo Inessence this is a New Consumer a creature distinctly different andidentifiable from its predecessors For this New Consumer time is aprecious commodity in lives that are becoming increasingly complex Intheir purchasing behaviour New Consumers now look for brandlsquoexperiencesrsquo over and above bundles of features and benefits They are moremarketing literate than ever before and IT enabled New Consumersinhabit an interactive marketplace characterized by high levels ofheterogeneity which disputes the assumptions of conventional marketingthinking

Faced with this new marketplace brand owners and retailers are lookingto enrich and expand the strategic options open to them The growth ofretailer power is of particular concern to brand owners who have beenfeeling the threat posed by industry consolidation Further stress in therelationship stems from the continuing downward pressure on price Andadding to this is the force of globalization and debate about the viability ofmanufacturing Above all there is an imperative to balance cost reductionand sales growth

Retailers are themselves facing daunting challenges and first and fore-most among these is a long-term pattern of declining spend Over the pastten years the retail sector has come to represent less than half the percentageof GDP it used to command This trend varies across sectors forcingretailers to shift their strategies to remain profitable Other challenges havearisen in respect to the difficulties associated with acquiring a businesslocation and consumer expectations of price

The aim for both brand owners and retailers is to develop greater con-sumer responsiveness This means focusing on the demand side of theirbusinesses doing the same thing better or doing something new Toachieve this organizations need to connect better with consumers theyneed to get close enough to consumers to understand how to deliver thevalue that consumers are seeking in a continually adaptive and innovativeway Organizations need to learn how to work in the consumerrsquos lsquospacersquo

Finally criticism about the lack of clarity surrounding marketingrsquoscontribution to a business has been a feature of reports and articles overrecent years This is in part driven by the difficulties surrounding themeasurement of marketing effectiveness but also by the fact that

2 Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 2

marketing is both equated with business unit strategy and located withinthe marketing mix Without a clear emphasis as to its role marketinglanguishes in a lsquono manrsquos landrsquo and is badly placed to provide strategicleadership

MEETING THE CHALLENGES

Meeting these challenges head on requires a different way ofconceptualizing the marketing process and a different approach toimplementation This book proposes the adoption of a value-centricapproach to marketing and connecting with the new science of complexityto enable business to find a way of surviving in the face of continual change

As the practice of marketing has evolved in response to market con-ditions the underlying philosophy of a business in relation to the customersit serves has shifted Transaction marketing was based on a sales orientationwith the aim of acquiring as many new customers as possible Profit wasgenerated through increased sales volume Relationship Marketing thenswitched the emphasis to developing greater profitability through customersatisfaction underpinned by a retention orientation The realities of theconsumption-led economy demand that the focus of a business shifts againto consumer responsiveness based on superior processes of insight innova-tion and agility to achieve profitability This means replacing the focus oncustomer retention with a value-centric orientation

A value-centric orientation means delivering the value consumers wantto buy into and the organization wants to deliver that is value on theconsumerrsquos terms as demanded and maybe even dictated by them This valuecomponent marks the process of exchange that takes place between theconsumer and the organization it is the lsquothingrsquo that consumers get inreturn for what they give It means moving beyond a relationship emphasisto one that has at its core the definition creation and delivery of value If anorganization can meet the value expectations of the consumer then a long-term and profitable relationship is more likely to follow The key is havingvalue as the starting point otherwise the relationship developmentstrategy (and the CRM tools perhaps used to deliver it) will not work asintended

This however is not sufficient on its own to make marketing moreeffective Organizations need to reconceptualize the marketing process to

Meeting the Challenges 3

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 3

take account of the dynamically complex new marketplace Business needsto learn how to understand complexity and find ways of respondingdynamically to change This is where marketing connects with the newscience of complexity The appeal of this to business theorists is that itprovides a way of thinking about how the underlying processes andrelationships in a company can be organized to survive in the face ofcontinual change

New Consumer Marketing emerges at the confluence of these twostreams of thinking ndash the evolving discipline of marketing and the scienceof complexity New Consumer Marketing is therefore different from theprevailing marketing paradigm It is a business discipline that enables theorganization to master the increasingly dynamic and complex process ofgoing to market in a systemic and holistic way It provides managers witha means of identifying and mobilizing people and processes to help thembecome as adaptive and creative as possible against the background of acomplex marketing environment

The New Consumer Marketing model is presented in Figure 01 and itshows quite clearly how consumer marketing can be conceptualized asconsisting of the three key processes underpinned by a value-centric orienta-tion The model is organic in nature reflected in the use of honeycomb-shaped cells each of which has a nucleus The model encourages the synergyof emphasizing both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo enabling organizations to breakout of the binary thinking that has long constrained management theory Inshort the static marketing function of the production-driven economybecomes a living demand system in the consumption-led economy leavingbehind the mechanistic approaches of the former era

The first cell in the demand system is concerned with the process of valuedefinition that is the process of generating and identifying insight inorder to describe and demonstrate value This covers both traditional andnon-traditional ways of generating insight and the process of turning thatinsight into something actionable through segmentation

The next cell is concerned with the process of value creation Innovationforms the nucleus of this cell and is of strategic significance Other sub-processes include new product development branding positioning andpricing

The third key process in a demand system is value delivery This is to dowith how value is communicated and conveyed by an organization to a

4 Introduction

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 4

specific audience Media and channels obviously play a role alongsideservice technology integration and supply-chain management Thewatchword here is organizational agility

The seven elements needed to make a demand system viable aredescribed as the organizational DNA The interrelationships of intuitionculture and structure leadership vision and values employees knowledgemanagement planning and measurement work within the cells tooptimize performance and ensure competitive survival

The New Consumer Marketing model therefore lifts marketing out ofits crisis in terms of presenting a conceptual guide for practitioners forgenerating and managing the exchange process under conditions ofcompetition The model provides a framework that enables an organizationto describe and position its marketing strategy In doing this it identifiesthe consumer segments it seeks to serve determining where and how itwill compete

Meeting the Challenges 5

Figure 01 The New Consumer Marketing model

13

13

13 $

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 5

OVERVIEW OF THE BOOK

The structure of this book is outlined below

Figure 02 Structure of the book

6 Introduction

A

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 6

Chapter 1 provides an overview of the changing competitive landscapeand places marketing within the business context Chapter 2 describes theprofile of New Consumers highlighting the challenges they pose tobusiness Chapter 3 then explores the concerns of brand owners andretailers who in the face of change must meet these challenges in order tosurvive

Chapter 4 introduces New Consumer Marketing as an emergingbusiness discipline New Consumer Marketing is not simply another wayof managing the marketing mix but a viable means of addressing the rangeof issues that enable an organization to compete successfully in a particularmarket Its key objective is to help the organization establish sustainablecompetitive advantage by means of superior performance High levels ofperformance are achieved and maintained through the processes of valuedefinition value creation and value delivery

A framework for conceptualizing New Consumer Marketing as themanagement of a demand system is presented in Chapter 5 Chapters 6 7and 8 then focus on each of the three key processes that form the workinglsquocellsrsquo of the New Consumer Marketing model value definition valuecreation and value delivery The concluding chapter Chapter 9 identifiesthe elements that make up the organizational DNA ndash the genetic code thatdrives the cellsrsquo performance and determines the overall success of thedemand system

References to source material and Notes on further reading are to befound at the back of the book

Overview of the Book 7

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 7

02 Baker intro FINAL 5603 228 pm Page 8

The current crisis in marketing is underscored by profound change in themarketing environment

A new marketplace is emerging and bringing with it a host of challengesnever before encountered For marketers this event is both exciting andunnerving opportunities for innovation and growth parallel threats toproven methodologies and the status quo The challenges posed by thechanging competitive arena are not restricted to a particular industry orsector but span the gamut of enterprises operating today All businessesare being affected to some degree by the root-and-branch upheaval that isoccurring in the wider marketing environment At the start of the thirdmillennium a paradigm shift in commerce is clear we have moved from aproduction-driven to a consumption-led economy

While the forces of demand and supply continue to regulate theeconomy the nature of the exchange has altered beyond all recognitionThe lsquothem and usrsquo adversarial approach to trade is giving way to consumerinvolvement in all aspects of product and service development anddelivery Supplying organizations use increasingly clever methods to wooconsumer loyalty and maintain competitive edge High-powered anddynamic data technology helps produce finely tuned marketing strategieswhich can be implemented on a one-to-one basis through an ever-expanding choice of traditional and electronic media Customers andconsumers exploit this greater access to information and the ability toachieve dialogue with suppliers exercising their new found empowermentby increasingly leveraging sales propositions in their own favour Theresult is a mutually influenced beneficial interaction

Earthquake 1

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 9

This radical transition in the way commercial transactions areconducted is evident no more so than in the rise of the buyerndashsellerrelationship Managing an ongoing relationship is an entirely differentmatter to managing a single transaction and the challenge for marketerstoday is compounded by the growing complexity of the context in which ittakes place Marketing especially consumer marketing faces a dauntingprospect quickly undergo profound change or prepare for certain death

MARKETING IN CRISIS

hellip there was a moment of pregnant stillness then a sibilant whisper a sort offaint seismic exhalation and then the world lurched

Ben Macintyre The Times 23 March 2002

This is the description a journalist gave after experiencing a majorearthquake If one had been listening in the mid-1990s they would haveheard similar rumblings throughout the marketing profession An articlepublished in the McKinsey Quarterly in 1993 claimed lsquoMany consumergoods CEOs are beginning to think that marketing is no longerdeliveringrsquo suggesting that lsquomarketers are simply not picking up the rightsignals any morersquo A Coopers amp Lybrand survey of the same year foundcomparable consensus among senior executives within fast movingconsumer goods (fmcg) retail and service sector organizations Quotingtheir non-marketing managers respondents expressed concern about therole and value of marketing lsquoMarketing is increasingly living a lie in myorganizationrsquo lsquoIf marketing departments disappeared would anybodynotice Would it really matterrsquo

A growing number of articles on the subject of marketing then appearedin the media stimulating debate among academics and practitioners as towhether or not this lsquobad pressrsquo was warranted In late 1993 the UKrsquosChartered Institute of Marketing (CIM) commissioned a report on thefuture of marketing in key British enterprises (Chartered Institute ofMarketing 1994) Boldly entitled The Challenge of Change the CIMinvestigation into marketingrsquos performance and promise delivered mixedtidings A multitude of research reports and commentaries from precedingdecades as well as the then current clutch revealed that marketing was set tobecome increasingly relevant and strategically important as a managementfunction but that it remained on the whole poorly executed in Britain

10 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 10

The last decade of the twentieth century was symbolically brought to aclose with a decisive report by the Marketing Forum the UKrsquos leadingauthority on the role and status of marketing With the objectives ofidentifying the key drivers and core responsibilities of the marketingdiscipline the report sought to address the growing unease amongmarketers Original research attempted to answer the following questions

In the post-dotcom boom what are the new drivers of marketing focus How does the arrival of the information era affect how we as marketers

operate What is our remit now and what new responsibilities can we expect to

assume in future

From the strength of response the message was clear the conventionaltools of marketing were no longer applicable and there was a pressing needfor fresh thinking The research showed that marketing appeared to belosing its way thrown off course by the myriad of unprecedented pressuresand developments in the now global marketplace It was felt that the futureof marketing if there was to be one rested firmly on the adoption of newapproaches and new attitudes While the underlying principles ofmarketing remained for the most part intact the practical tools andtechniques employed required radical revision

Traditional marketing devices such as the 4Ps (product place price andpromotion) had emerged in the production-driven era of the 1950sndash1970sThe subsequent globalization of market activity and explosion in theavailability and use of new-wave technologies particularly the Internet toname but two key drivers of change turned the existing business premiseon its head Instead of being the focus of persuasion to buy what producerswished to produce consumers became the focus of production itself theycould influence to a great extent the nature of products Business prosperityrelied on retaining valuable customer relationships not revving theengines of production

To grasp the full weight of this seismic shift in the rules of commercialengagement it is useful to look back briefly at the development ofmarketing as an established management discipline Its evolution issuffused with hard lessons and valuable learning Only by understandingmarketingrsquos role at different points in time can we anchor the debate aboutits future in a meaningful context

Marketing in Crisis 11

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 11

THE EVOLUTION OF MARKETING

While the application of marketing has existed since people first tradedwith one another its emergence as a distinct business discipline hashappened relatively recently in the period between the First and SecondWorld Wars In the UK for example modern-day marketing becamesynonymous with brand marketing as practised in the 1950s and 1960s byfmcg companies such as Unilever and Procter amp Gamble Marketing stoodfor a business philosophy based on meeting the needs of customers andcreating sustainable competitive advantage It was supported by a businessfunction bearing the same name

Marketers drew on an operational framework rooted in the 4Ps and themost knowledgeable had at their disposal an expanding toolbox ofconceptual diagnostic and predictive tools It is worth considering some ofthese briefly to appreciate marketingrsquos integral role The product life cycle(PLC) introduced in 1950 promulgated the notion that products passthrough typical phases from lsquolaunchrsquo to lsquomaturityrsquo to lsquodeclinersquo and finallylsquoexitrsquo from the marketplace The PLC was followed by a range of modelsdeveloped by rival management consultancies such as the BostonConsulting Group (BCG) and McKinsey amp Co to aid the marketer in themanagement of both single products and product portfolios The mostenduring of these analytical devices are BCGrsquos Boston Matrix andMcKinseyrsquos Directional Policy Matrix (DPM) designed in conjunctionwith General Electric in the USA and Shell in Europe

The four-box Boston Matrix (see Figure 11a) considered products interms of their relative market share and market growth rate It held thatthe perfect conglomerate needed a mix of three types of product Profitfrom the steady earners (lsquocash cowsrsquo) could be used to invest in productswith huge growth potential (lsquostarsrsquo) and underwrite those underdevelopment (lsquoquestion marksrsquo) The fourth quadrant of the matrix wasallocated to product failures (lsquodogsrsquo) whose poor performance or excessivecash consumption justifies their being discarded altogether The DPM (seeFigure 11b) expanded the number of variables used in the Boston Matrixadding market attractiveness and business strengths in order to analyseproduct performance in greater depth

As marketing tools and techniques aimed at understanding productbehaviour became more refined the need to understand consumer

12 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 12

behaviour became more pronounced Demand in consumer markets in the1950s and 1960s was buoyant due to rising levels of disposable income andthe influence of new forms of communication notably televisionMarketing was harnessed as a means of persuading masses of consumers tobuy what was manufactured and the lsquomakendashsellrsquo philosophy of businessestablished itself as consonant with the production-driven era

The guiding principle for developing mass consumer markets was toacquire ever-greater numbers of consumers and take maximum market share

The Evolution of Marketing 13

Figure 11 (a) The Boston Matrix and (b) the Directional Policy Matrix

lsquoStarsrsquo

A selected few

lsquoCash cowsrsquo lsquoDogsrsquo

lsquoQuestion marksrsquo

Marketgrowthshare

Relative competitive position (market share)

Remainder

divested

Liquidated

(a)

(b)

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 13

This strategy was underpinned by research from PIMS (Profit Impact ofMarket Strategy) which showed that the greater the market share achievedthe bigger the profits that would accrue to the company The pace and scopeof mass marketing were set by the American consumer goods giants forwhom the market appeared to be an ever-climbing sales curve until theworld was jolted out of this misapprehension by a series of oil crises in the1970s The consequent international economic downturn followed by highinflation at home had a serious impact on consumers Consumer spendinghabits displayed prudence and sophistication in much larger measure

The Rise of Relationship Marketing

Supplying organizations responded to the constrained economicenvironment of the 1970s by re-examining what they were offering tocustomers To increase product appeal differentiation and value formoney many augmented their product offerings by incorporating a serviceelement This spawned the development of services marketing as a businessfunction In mature markets where the rate of growth had slowed or evenstopped it became more difficult for organizations to pursue a strategy ofgaining market share With the pool of new prospects diminishedmarketing attention steered towards retaining and growing existingcustomer relationships Consequently lsquocustomer loyaltyrsquo achievedpriority and its prime strategic importance remains to this day

The shift in marketing emphasis from customer acquisition to customerretention became enshrined in the principles of Relationship Marketing(RM) RM unlike transaction marketing recognizes that commercialtransactions are not isolated events but that they take place within a liveand continuous context of engagement ndash a lsquorelationshiprsquo between buyerand seller Underpinning the idea of an enduring and potentiallylsquogrowablersquo relationship with a customer is the concept of customer valuethat is the customer has an intrinsic and dynamic value to the supplyingorganization and vice versa

Measures of marketing success then turned from numbers of customers(market share) to share of customer expenditure (share of lsquowalletrsquo) andpotential customer value (customer lifetime value) The work of Bainconsultants Frederick Reichheld and Earl Sasser was seminal indemonstrating the large impact on profitability of small increases in

14 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 14

customer retention rates Further research by Reichheld and Teal (1996)showing the increasing profitability of customers the longer therelationship lasts added strength to the argument for a relationshipmarketing approach

Issues surrounding RM implementation were less clear and businesstheorists usually advocated relationship building via the identification of anumber of key groups or market domains For example the MultipleMarkets Model developed by Christopher Payne and Ballantyne (19912002) recommends that marketing activity should be focused on six mainmarkets

1 consumer markets (or customer markets in the business-to-businesssector)

2 internal markets ie employees3 supplier and alliance markets eg business partners suppliers

consultants contractors4 influencer markets eg venture capitalists regulators lobbyists and

litigators5 referral markets eg customer advocates intermediaries business

advisors6 recruitment markets eg employment agencies graduates the pool of

potential employees

This multiple-markets approach embraces a more holistic view of themarketplace It forces marketers to think beyond managing one marketmade up of consumers (or customers) and extends the marketing mix toinclude the increasingly important elements of people process and theprovision of customer service

As RM became more widely accepted during the 1990s developmentscontinued apace in IT and computational methodologies resulting in theconvergence of database marketing and customer service delivery This ledto the concept of Customer Relationship Management (CRM)

The Test of CRM1

CRM was the last big idea of the twentieth century to grab the attention ofmarketers It appeared to present the magic formula for marketing successndash the opportunity to galvanize the business behind a marketing-led

The Evolution of Marketing 15

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 15

strategy Moreover as commentators have observed it offered lsquothemystique of new technologies and a new three letter acronymrsquo The theorybehind CRM is that managing customer relationships is an integratedbusiness process involving the consolidation of individual customer datafrom multiple sources to create a mutually valuable proposition CRMrsquosemphasis on using IT to monitor customersrsquo transaction histories andexploit their purchasing behaviour serves to reinforce the impact ofcustomer retention strategies With real-time access to customer-specificinformation organizations can segment customers by value targetmarketing strategies towards the most promising opportunities andpersonalize marketing communications Consequently service levels areguided by customer profitability CRM seemed to provide at last themeans of implementing RM effectively and as an incrementaldevelopment served to extend the marketing life cycle (see Figure 12)

Investment in CRM systems across Europe is such that it is one of thefastest growing markets in the IT industry However those organizationsthat interpreted CRM as simply the purchase of an expensive softwareprogram found little succour in the smart new technology It has beenclaimed that up to 97 of CRM installations fail to deliver the anticipated

16 Earthquake

Figure 12 The marketing life cycle

Production-driven economy Consumption-led economy

Marketingemerges asa business

function

Post-warconsumer

boom

Series ofoil crises

Functionalmarketing

Servicesmarketing

Relationshipmarketing

1920s30s 1950s60s 1970s 1980s 1990s 2000

Demandsystem

marketing

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 16

benefits Problems stem from a lack of clarity about what CRM actually isand how to implement it successfully For some it has meant bettermarketing communications providing a means of escaping from theconstraints of mass communications and of achieving more personalizeddialogue Others have taken a broader view using the terms CRM andmarketing almost interchangeably A third school of thought hashighlighted the IT aspect regarding CRM as the technologicalenhancement of business processes Each interpretation of CRM offers anequal number of implementation models and with so many options andinterpretations it is little wonder that CRM has failed to meetexpectations

Current research shows that there are a number of preconditions thatneed to be satisfied prior to implementing a CRM strategy Organizationsmust have a clearly defined marketing strategy in place IT systems that arealigned to the goals of the marketing strategy and an organizationalculture which ably supports the implementation of CRM A misalignmentin any of these relationships leads to a failure of CRM creating waste anddisappointing performance

It is clear that most CRM systems are not conceived with the activedemanding IT-literate consumer in mind Their main focus is onproviding information about the customer to the company They seldomoffer the consumer direct access to information about the supplier orvendor or their own account As business theorist Patricia Seybold assertslsquoCRM systems should be designed with customers as the design centerCustomers should have the ability to maintain (though not theresponsibility of maintaining) information related to their relationshipsrsquo(Seybold et al 2001) This view is in keeping with the prediction ofresearch firm Gartner that by 2005 consumers will start to take control of their own data Together these assertions suggest that CMR ndash orcustomer-managed relationships ndash rather than CRM should be theguiding notion in devising relationship management systems

Whether or not CRM survives as a formal discipline it has been avaluable step in marketingrsquos development It has established the businesscase for adopting the customerrsquos perspective and involving the customer inthe formulation of product and service strategies The timing of thisrealization is no coincidence it is a creative response to the eruption ofdramatic change within the macro-marketing environment

The Evolution of Marketing 17

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 17

CHANGES IN THE MACRO-MARKETING ENVIRONMENT2

The present trend towards more customer-centric ways of doing business isbeing propelled and directed by a fundamental change in the marketingenvironment Using the earthquake metaphor the two lsquotectonic platesrsquothat shape the marketing landscape are the production-driven economyand the consumption-led economy As our manufacturing base declines wecan see that it is consumption and not production which is emerging asthe central motor of contemporary society

Of course we have to look at production and consumption as two sidesof the same coin Production does not take place without a correspondinglevel of consumption and similarly no consumption can take place unlesssomething is produced For some supplying organizations the boundarybetween these two sets of activities erodes and they fuse into what AlvinToffler so presciently described as lsquoprosumptionrsquo in his best-seller FutureShock As long ago as 1970 Toffler foresaw that consumers would soon befaced with the greatest variety of unstandardized goods and services everseen He believed this increasing diversity of products would beencouraged by two economic factors lsquoFirst consumers have more money tolavish on their specialized wants second and even more important astechnology becomes more sophisticated the cost of introducing variations declinesrsquo[his italics]

Today leading organizations such as Landsrsquo End Dell Procter ampGamble and Pearson the TV company demonstrate the wisdom ofTofflerrsquos vision

bull Clothing retailer Landsrsquo End started offering online tailoring inOctober 2000 in the USA A year later the company claimed that 40of all chino and jeans sales on its website were custom ordersCustomers would enter their measurements onscreen including theirweight height and hipndashthigh proportions An inbuilt computerprogram would analyse the information given and calculate the idealdimensions of the trousers The order specifications would be sentdirect to a manufacturing plant in Mexico where the fabric patternwould be produced by a computerized cutting machine and thenpassed to a sewing machinist Two to four weeks after the order wasplaced the customer would receive the trousers

18 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 18

bull Dell one of Fortune magazinersquos top ten lsquomost admiredrsquo companiesdesigns manufactures and customizes computing products andservices to customersrsquo requirements Using the online lsquoConfigure ampBuyrsquo facility customers can create the computer system that best meetstheir needs by a process of selecting options from drop-down menusAs they do so the total price changes accordingly at the bottom of theirscreen

bull Procter amp Gamble has a website called lsquoCommunity Cornerrsquo that it usesto build relationships with consumers or marketing partners as theyare known internally The website is an online forum in whichconsumers can talk about existing brands suggest ideas and changesand contribute to surveys There is also a chance for people with patentsfor new products to discuss them with Procter amp Gamble

bull The television programme Pop Idol created by Pearson enabledviewers to vote in their favourite pop star from a preselected shortlist

Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment 19

Figure 13 Landsrsquo Endcom online tailoring

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 19

In the final show of the UK series nine million viewers voted bytelephone awarding Will Young celebrity status Young thenachieved the fastest-selling debut single in the UK as more than 11 million fans went out to buy the record by the star they had createdThe programmersquos format has since been adopted by televisionproducers in the USA with similar success

The predominance of a consumption-led economy is reflected in a numberof macro market statistics For example in the UK the proportion of grossdomestic product (GDP) provided by manufacturing has been on adownward trend since the mid-1970s This position is reflected in each ofthe G7 industrialized economies (Germany France Italy Japan Canadathe USA and the UK) In the case of the UK manufacturing accounted foraround one third of the economyrsquos total output in 1960 However by thestart of the new millennium this had fallen to less than one fifth with onlythe USA showing a fall below this figure This has been driven in part bythe allocation of an increasing proportion of disposable income to expend-iture on a wide range of services and luxury goods Sectors such as bankingtourism leisure entertainment and telecommunications have been themain beneficiaries

This economic position is mirrored in employment patterns Significantjob losses are expected in the primary sector of the economy (agriculturemining and utilities) over the next couple of years while manufacturingcan expect to lose around 80000 employees each year between 2000 and2005 when the loss is expected to slow to 50000 employees per annumThe decline in engineering will be seen as the biggest contributor to theselosses On the other hand distribution hotels the transport sector andcommunications can expect an increase of 40000 new jobs annually to2005 However the biggest job increases are expected to come in othermarket sectors where growth in professional services in particular willmean an increase of around 140000 new jobs each year to 2005

Not surprisingly these employment trends find equal expression inqualification statistics The number of students graduating in engineeringand technology are down by 9 from 35700 to 32400 over the period1997 to 2001 In contrast degrees received in law and the arts both showincreases Graduates in business and administration now dominate the jobmarket growing from 61700 in 1997 to 65300 in 2001 Those with

20 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 20

degrees in creative arts and design however show the biggestproportionate jump from 24800 in 1997 to 29500 in 2001

These facts and figures stress the fundamental change in marketdynamics from a production to a consumption focus Consumption andthe servicing of consumption increasingly form the basis of businessplanning The economic sector becomes ever more tightly tied tobusinesses that have an asset base made up of intangible services asopposed to hard and fast production This shift has significantramifications for marketers ndash consumer marketers in particular ndash who needactively to acknowledge that new ways of thinking and operating areneeded if we are to meet unrivalled market and management demands

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

A substantial amount of soul searching has gone on in marketing circlesover the past decade as marketingrsquos role and contribution to businessperformance have been challenged by both change and a lack of it Thediminished sense of influence power and value among marketingpractitioners and shared frustration about what to do next is rooted in thefact that the certainties of the production-driven economy have beenreplaced with the uncertainties of the consumption-led economy andmarketing thinking has not kept pace The tools techniques and theoriestaught in business schools today largely promote a mechanistic approach tomarketing which as the following chapters will show is not relevant tothe organic nature of present-day trade relations

While Relationship Marketing and its offshoot Customer RelationshipManagement have revolutionized marketing practice much more needsto be done to manage the matching of supply and demand synergisticallyMarketers whose role has always been located at the critical interfacebetween buyers and sellers are well placed to lead the thought processConsumer markets especially offer valuable insight and testing groundfor the development of more appropriate concepts and codes of practiceThere the customer base is usually more numerous remote and capriciousand the use of intermediaries is commonplace As the tremors shaking themarketing landscape grow stronger and more frequent the imperative tofind new meaning for marketers becomes an unenviable unavoidable andurgent responsibility

Implications for Consumer Marketing 21

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 21

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Marketers are operating in a context of fundamental transition Thecertainties of the production-driven economy have been replaced bythe uncertainties of the consumption-led economy

bull Consumption and the servicing of consumption now form the centralmotor of contemporary society

bull Many of the conventional tools and techniques of marketingdeveloped mainly in the production-driven era no longer apply andmarketingrsquos contribution to business is increasingly unclear

bull Relationship Marketing moved marketing focus from customeracquisition to customer retention

bull The implementation of Relationship Marketing through CRMsystems has been largely unsuccessful and there is an outstandingrequirement for greater clarity in terms of CRM definition andpractice

bull Consumer markets offer insight and testing ground for the futuredevelopment of marketing

22 Earthquake

03 Baker chapter 1 FINAL 5603 230 pm Page 22

Consumption and consumption management are being redefined by the NewConsumer

Consumption (the act or process of consuming) has always been acharacteristic of human nature But consumption as it relates to consuminggoods and services that do not merely fulfil needs but satisfy wants anddesires is a modern-day development one that accelerated after the SecondWorld War Since then a growing range of businesses have come to seetheir interactions with consumers as the execution of a formalized processof consumption They have engaged the marketing profession to hone thisprocess to optimum effect In parallel with this development consumerrights have evolved to the point where the advocacy of consumer interestsis no longer the sole remit of consumer organizations consumersthemselves are leading the cause

In order to manage the process of consumption effectively in the contextof transition described in Chapter 1 marketers traditionally have adoptedthe classic marketing approach of the 4Ps (product place price andpromotion) They have used these elements of the marketing mix tofacilitate their command-and-control philosophy However the advent ofa new kind of consumer is showing this traditional marketing approach tobe out of date lsquoNew Consumersrsquo are well informed and highly empoweredThey are increasingly influencing the shape and form of products andservices as well as the future of market players

CONSUMPTION IN TRANSFORMATION

lsquoConsumptionrsquo is often considered a contemporary word whose arrival wasmarked by the conspicuous consumption patterns of the 1980s Yet some

The New Consumer 2

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 23

commentators point to an earlier era the 1950s when the Marshall Planhelped to rebuild Europe The economic boom that followed the SecondWorld War lasting some 25 years ensured that many members of thelower social classes could have all sorts of goods and services their parentscould only dream of

Other commentators look still further back Sociologist GrantMcCracken (1988) for example turns to the reign of Queen Elizabeth I ofEngland and the prosperity of the last quarter of the sixteenth century1 Atthat time an explosion of consumerist behaviour was fuelled by membersof a social elite who became caught up in a lsquoriot of consumptionrsquo as theyvied for the attention of the monarch The accumulation of expenses bynoblemen at court meant they had less to spend on their families ndash and anew phenomenon was born The individual rather than the family beganto feature as the basic unit of consumption motivated rather more by asense of buying for the here-and-now than for the longer term

The beginnings of consumer society might also be found in the wave ofeconomic prosperity that hit eighteenth-century England and promptedthe emergence of a middle class For these consumers the possession offashionable goods represented an important index of their social standingMoreover new marketing and advertising techniques accompanied thesedifferent patterns of buying behaviour by new groups of consumers

Expansion of the Consumer Concept

Regardless of where in time we position the first signs of consumptionwhat is important is to acknowledge its pervasive influence The concept ofthe consumer and the building of businesses around it is no longerconfined to those who produce lsquothingsrsquo ie manufacturers Organizationsas diverse as charities utilities suppliers government bodies and evenreligious orders have become attuned to thinking of the individuals theyinteract with as consumers

British GasBritish Gas was privatized in 1986 and demerged from British Gas plc in1997 Today it is part of Centrica the holding company for a range ofbusinesses including the AA Goldfish and OneTel in the UK and EnergyAmerica and Luminus overseas For most consumers of gas fuel it is an

24 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 24

unexciting product Their gas-fired stoves break down and the bills alwaysseem disproportionately large to the burning small flame in their boilers As apart of Centrica British Gas set out to turn around a loss-making operationoptimize the use of its sales force and maintain brand presence Now thebusiness is highly profitable the result of a strategy that has included detailedwork on customer segmentation and the use of marketing campaigns tosmooth out peaks and troughs in consumer demand for maintenance andinstallation

Caldey IslandOn Caldey Island off the Welsh coast a group of Cistercian monks isdeveloping an e-business in an attempt to make the monastery financiallyself-sufficient The brothers produce a range of perfumes bath oils handcreams and menrsquos aftershaves as well as shortbread made to an old recipeThe idea of a web shop grew from the problem of geographical remotenessthe holy island is only accessible by licensed boat services between themonths of April and October making for a short selling season Earlyindications are that the site (wwwcaldey-islandcouk) is succeeding

Defence of Consumer Rights

Alongside the growth in consumer numbers products and expenditurethere has been growth in a consciousness of consumer rights The process ofadvancing the cause of consumersrsquo interests in relation to the producer orsupplying organization is known as consumerism and should be seen asdistinct from consumption or the act of consuming the products and servicesproduced

The lsquoconsumer movementrsquo loosely defined as the ongoing campaign tosecure consumer rights began in the late 1950s and early 1960s when anincreasing interest in consumer and environmental issues seeded the ideathat consumers possess the power to influence manufacturers (andsubsequently many others such as retailers and service providers)2 TheUK Consumersrsquo Association founded in 1957 set out to emulate theAmerican Consumersrsquo Union (CU) Within a few years consumersrsquoassociations had formed in several other European countries notablyHolland and Belgium All were based on the CU model of an organizationcarrying out product tests and making public the results to informconsumers (see Figure 21) The consumer voice was given further impetusby President John F Kennedyrsquos groundbreaking address to Congress in

Consumption in Transformation 25

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 25

March 1962 where he asserted the rights of consumers lsquoto safety to beinformed to choose and to be heardrsquo

Today consumer advocacy no longer resides solely with consumergroups The language of consumer rights has entered the corporate worldlsquoWhen people pay money for a brand or to a company they feel they arebuying rights to how they are treated ndash rights to be respected treatedhonestly and fairly and to have their points of view appreciatedrsquo This wasa comment made by Lucy Purdy planning director at Publicis when hercommunications agency published its findings on consumer attitudes toregistering complaints about poor goods and services

In order to create a business culture that meets these expectations on thepart of the consumer Mohanibar Sawhney and Philip Kotler from KelloggUniversity advocate implementing a Customer Bill of Rights for theInformation Age (Sawhney and Kotler 2001) Their proposed draft billsupports a consumer right to anonymity to be remembered and to share in pay-offs among other things They warn that lsquoViolating thesefundamental rights while tempting and even profitable in the short runwill be disastrous in the long runrsquo

26 The New Consumer

Figure 21 Which online

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 26

CONSUMPTION MANAGEMENT IN QUESTION

The management of consumption has traditionally been undertakenthrough the adoption of the lsquomakendashsellrsquo approach characteristic of the production-driven economy described in Chapter 1 Supplyingorganizations (ie manufacturers) made things and it was the task of themarketer to persuade consumers to buy them Their instruments ofpersuasion were the 4Ps The challenge for these organizations was tosatisfy customer needs by producing the right product at the right pricemaking it available in the right place at the right time and promoting itswinning features through the right means of communication

This mechanistic model of consumption management was laterenhanced by the principles of Relationship Marketing (RM) born out of afocus on services marketing RM stressed that the management ofconsumption was about far more than simply putting products into themarketplace The dawning realization that a manufacturer is not so much aproduct company but a service company with a product offeringintroduced the idea of building relationships with consumers over timebased on meeting their needs in relation to both the functional aspects ofthe product and the more intangible aspects of the service elements

In parallel with this development a growing consciousness of consumerrights and consumer power has created more confident consumers oneswho are finding their voice and have at their disposal the means ofexpressing it At the point of confluence of these two trends ndash RM on theone hand and consumer rights on the other ndash the way in whichconsumption is managed comes under question The lsquomakendashsellrsquo approachenhanced through RM does not meet with the expectations of this newempowered consumer Organizations need to acknowledge this change anddevise new ways of managing consumption based on consumersthemselves

A NEW KIND OF CONSUMER

The present consumer-driven marketplace is characterized by a new kindof consumer one who has been variously described as lsquoactiversquolsquoknowledgeablersquo and lsquopost-modernrsquo3 In essence this is a lsquoNew Consumerrsquoa creature distinctly different and identifiable from its predecessors

Consumption Management in Question 27

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 27

Marketers need to develop a deep understanding of the attitudes andbehaviours of this New Consumer if they are to break away from themechanistic models of the production-driven era and develop a relevantapproach to exploiting the business potential of current consumer cultureNew Consumers possess a number of distinguishing features the mostsignificant of which are highlighted here

New Consumers Are Exercised By Time

The first step in understanding changing cultures of consumption is torecognize the different ways in which New Consumers relate to the conceptof time Time has become a precious commodity and many products andservices reflect this insight capitalizing on the time-poorcash-rich trade-off many consumers make Consumers with little time and high levels ofdisposable income have become lsquooutsourcersrsquo ndash their clothes go to the drycleaners nannies look after their children cleaners and tradespeople keeptheir house in good order and so on Businesses that have spotted thismarket niche include enterprising property developers whose new-buildhomes come fitted with fake lawns and supermarkets which offer pre-packaged pre-cooked ready-made meals Personal full-service agencyEnviego goes further and has created a PA (personal assistant) service thatwill take care of everything from actively remembering birthdays toorganizing walking the dog

Contemporary consumer behaviour also illustrates that consumersappear to either actively embrace the pace of change and the constantstream of new products and services or want to run and hide The formerare living life to the max and desirous of anything but routine These lsquotimetouristsrsquo give themselves away by their pursuit of agelessness disregard forgender boundaries and delight in the finer things in life For brand ownerstime tourists represent new markets and marketing opportunitiesClinique for example cleverly acknowledges male buyers with theadvertisement lsquoDonrsquot say the word ldquocosmeticsrdquo Cliniquersquos ldquoSkin suppliesfor menrdquorsquo (see Figure 22a)

lsquoTime refugeesrsquo on the other hand display characteristics best describedas defensive in the face of the pace of change These consumers seek securityand a sense of belonging They want to find and maintain a home be itspiritual or physical They want to feel part of a community and form

28 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 28

A New Kind of Consumer 29

Figure 22 (a) Clinique woos the men (b) LrsquoOreal rewards you

(a)

(b)

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 29

relationship bonds with other people Buying certain brands thereforebecomes a way of linking with like-minded consumers The worldwidemarketing success of Harley-Davidson and its 600000-strong HarleyOwnersrsquo Group demonstrates this drive to belong to a tribe or group Forsome time refugees purchases become a sort of reward LrsquoOreal forexample targets this group with the strapline lsquoBecause yoursquore worth itrsquo(see Figure 22b) Time refugees are looking to anchor themselves in atransient world The website wwwfriendsreunitedcom which reunitesformer school friends has successfully captured their imagination

New Consumers Lead Complex Lives

The marketplace of the New Consumer is highly fragmented and this is inlarge part due to the highly complex lives consumers lead On one levelthey display multiple personalities seeming to dip in and out of differentstereotypic personality types The prevalence of this consumer behaviourwas exemplified by a piece of advice from Cosmopolitan magazine to itsfemale readership lsquoBe an it-girl on Saturday a kitten on Sunday a careerwoman on Monday a devoted girlfriend on Tuesday helliprsquo It is as ifconsumers can take on chameleon-like properties and adapt their projectedpersonas to suit the situation

This complex behaviour creates problems for marketers whosesegmentation analyses are constructed on the premise that consumers canbe categorized permanently in one of a number of predefined lsquoboxesrsquoHowever in displaying multiple personalities consumers can appear tooccupy a number of different boxes depending on the occasion Forexample in the airline industry a passenger might choose to fly businessclass or first class for business travel economy class for family holidays andwith a special ticket (discount or promotion) for a long weekendDesigning a marketing strategy to capture or keep this customer is analmost impossible task if simple demographics are used as the basisMaking sense of this apparent chaos requires marketers to abandon theirneed for certainty and to develop a tolerance of ambiguity and a skill inadaptability In addition to recognizing consumersrsquo changing attitudes totime marketers must respect their preferences and different needs anddesires

30 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 30

New Consumers Seek Experiences

Marketing theorists have for some time pointed out that consumers donrsquotbuy product features they buy product benefits As marketing guruTheodore Levitt famously commented lsquoCustomers donrsquot buy frac14 inch drillsthey buy frac14 inch holesrsquo In the case of New Consumers their purchasingbehaviour is further distinguished by the desire to buy an lsquoexperiencersquo It isnow possible to purchase such an experience off the shelf in high streetretailers W H Smith for example offers them in a catalogue Their rangeincludes a day driving a Ferrari or a JCB a visit to a health farm and aphotographic makeover Prices range from pound9999 to pound299999 the latterbuys the thrill of diving with sharks in South Africa Children under 17years of age are offered their own choice of lsquofirstrsquo experiences such asdriving a car or being a TV presenter

In response to this desire to lsquoconsumersquo experiences many retailers havemoved from simply offering ranges of products to also offering ranges ofexperiences In the pub market for example consumers can enjoy an Irishpub experience one evening followed by an Australian bar experience thenext and an American bar experience resembling the television sit-comCheers after that Except that these experiences are not lsquorealrsquo in the sense ofbeing non-contrived Instead they are formulaic and themed reality isdeliberately blurred with hyper-reality

US consultants Joseph Pine and James Gilmore (1998 see also Pine andGilmore 1999) describe this lsquoexperience economyrsquo as one where lsquoInstead ofrelying on our own wherewithal to experience the new and wondrous ndash ashas been done for ages ndash we will increasingly pay companies to stageexperiences for us just as we now pay companies for services we oncedelivered ourselves goods we once made ourselves and commodities weonce extracted ourselvesrsquo Clearly consumer offerings and marketingmessages addressed to New Consumers must take this trend on board

New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding

The command-and-control philosophy traditionally adopted by marketersto manage the consumption process is inappropriate today As everymarketer who engages consumers in research will know consumers arebecoming more marketing literate and less easy to please They candeconstruct marketing activities with almost as much insight as most

A New Kind of Consumer 31

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 31

marketers For example the average consumer can quickly sort the daily postinto three piles personal mail business mail and unsolicited or lsquojunkrsquo mailThey are capable of identifying each without even opening the envelope

Consumers are no longer passive absorbers of marketing messages Inthe words of author Alan Mitchell (2001) lsquoThe observed have startedplaying games with the observerrsquo At one extreme these lsquogamesrsquo take theform of protests and demonstrations against globalization such as thedisruption of the World Trade negotiations in Seattle in 1999 and the G8summit in Genoa in 2001 Naomi Kleinrsquos book No Logo Taking Aim at theBrand Bullies (2000) is another example It is a highly acclaimedassessment of multinational brand-name corporations labour abuses andanti-corporate resistance which quickly became the bible of the anti-globalization movement after its publication in the USA

At the other extreme consumers make their views known in less violentways For example those who are unhappy with their purchases and intentupon standing up for their rights can turn to consumer watchdogs andother advocacy groups which operate through traditional as well aselectronic media In fact consumer redress has become a source oflsquoinfotainmentrsquo ndash part information and part entertainment Consumers alsohave the wherewithal to take direct action such as setting up lsquovigilantersquowebsites Marketers should monitor these sites carefully as they canprovide a rich seam of consumer feedback Equally their impact onconsumer and corporate perception should be managed carefully In 1999Dunkinrsquo Donuts the fast food retailer bought out the lsquogripe sitersquo set uptwo years earlier by a customer who had been upset at the absence of anyskimmed milk for his coffee

Such consumer activity reflects a knowledge on the part of consumersabout how marketing works and a new-found confidence in expressingdissatisfaction It is imperative therefore that the New Consumer beequally involved in the consumption management process and that apartnership of open dialogue and mutual respect be developed between thetrading parties

New Consumers Are IT Enabled

Underpinning the way New Consumers live their lives and make and usetheir purchases are of course developments in information technology

32 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 32

(IT) This fundamental feature of the New Consumer raises issues formarketers about how to connect with consumers who live in atechnologically interactive and integrated world The exponential growthin the use of mobile phones (devices first developed by Bell Laboratories inthe 1940s) has presented particular challenges Consumers worldwide haveneeded little persuading of the benefits of the mobile phone which unlikelandline systems links people rather than locations In the UK 28 millionpeople owned mobile handsets in 2001 and this figure is predicted to rise to405 million by 2005 according to research firm Gartner Thefundamental appeal of the mobile phone is that it extends a basic humanquality ndash the ability to communicate Teenagers in particular havebecome the main conduits through which mobile phones have found theirway into wider society and they were also the first group to realize thepotential of text messaging The Japanese teenage generation has even beendubbed oya yubi sedai meaning the thumb tribe on account of thedexterity with which they text message

Throughout this growth in mobile phone ownership consumers haveshown themselves to be one step ahead of marketers who have yet to reallydemonstrate that they understand the market drivers and how this mobilechannel can be most effectively integrated into the communications mixEquipped with mobile phones and other handheld mobile devicesconsumers are no longer static and fixed in time and space relative tobrands They have a choice of channels through which to connect with abrand and will exercise individual preference in using them For exampleconsumers may prefer to purchase some categories of goods online such asCDs videos books and software but use the Internet to browse for otherproducts and services In the US it is estimated that only 1 of new cars arepurchased online while half of the nationrsquos car buyers use the Internetsolely to research and compare automotive product options

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

In todayrsquos consumption-led economy using the 4Ps (or even the 7Ps of aRelationship Marketing approach) as the basis for marketing strategymisses a fundamental point consumption is enacted by consumers andtherefore they ndash and not products ndash should be the starting point ofmarketing strategy origination Robert Lauterborn (1991) described the

Implications for Consumer Marketing 33

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 33

need to focus instead on the 4Cs consumer needs and wants costs to the consumer (time money effort etc) convenience factors andcommunication (how the consumer wishes to be communicated with bythe supplying organization) With the arrival of the New Consumer thecommand-and-control approach to consumption management so typicalof the production-driven era is no longer applicable

Marketers need to accept that the marketplace is no longer stable andpredictable but is instead dynamic and complex and as a consequencetheir need for certainty must become replaced by a tolerance of ambiguityThis is driven for the most part by the heterogeneity of the NewConsumer Consumers today no longer resemble the conventionalperceptions formed in the era of mass marketing and traditionalapproaches to consumer research and segmentation do not adequatelycapture their essence New Consumers have minds of their own and are notreluctant to make their views known New Consumers are empowered tomake their purchases through an ever-expanding choice of media andchannels Moreover they change suppliers easily and often without anysense of disloyalty They even assemble in groups to influence the offer andget the best price or contract terms The New Consumer demands adifferent kind of customer relationship one that warrants an entirelydifferent approach to strategic consumer marketing

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Consumption today is about the satisfaction of consumer wants anddesires rather than the fulfilment of consumer needs

bull The process of consumption is widely recognized as a managementissue rather than simply a market phenomenon

bull The starting point for managing the consumption process should be theconsumer not the product and marketing strategy needs to reflect this

bull New Consumers are exercised by time lead complex lives seekexperiences are marketing literate and highly demanding and are ITenabled This creates a different set of expectations to be met in the newmarketplace

bull The New Consumer represents unprecedented challenges formarketers

34 The New Consumer

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 34

bull Rethinking the consumer means rethinking marketing

bull The traditional command-and-control approach to consumptionmanagement must be replaced by more collaborative methods thatinvolve and value the consumer

Summary Points 35

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 35

04 Baker chapter 2 FINAL 5603 232 pm Page 36

The challenge for brand owners and retailers is lsquoinnovate or diersquo

While many consumer brand owners recognize the symptoms ofrevolutionary change within the marketing environment few have beenable to interpret and respond to them meaningfully because of seeminglymore pressing business demands Among these immediate issues is theneed to address concerns about the manufacturerndashretailer relationshipConsolidation within the retail sector is continuing to increase thedownward pressure on price making it difficult for manufacturers tomanoeuvre in terms of market position Added to this the impact ofglobalization has placed the future of manufacturing in question Overrecent years the focus of producers and retailers has been supply chainmanagement However for many organizations simply improvingefficiencies is no longer enough to achieve sustainability Todayrsquos keybusiness imperative is to balance cost reduction and sales growth

Retailers are facing major challenges Retail spending as a proportion ofgross domestic product (GDP) has fallen significantly over the past coupleof decades This disturbing trend and the emergence of the New Consumerare forcing retailers to abandon their lsquoone size fits allrsquo approach and to focusinstead on managing consumer heterogeneity through marketingstrategies resulting in narrower and deeper retail concepts

KEY ISSUES FOR BRAND OWNERS

Research into the key business issues concerning fmcg brand owners byconsultants Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young1 in 2001 underlined the overridingchallenge of dealing with change in the competitive environment Four

Concerns of Brand Owners 3and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 37

main concerns were identified the force of globalization debate about thefuture of manufacturing the growth in retailer power and the need tomanage the balance between cutting costs and growing sales

The Force of Globalization

Organizational profitability and growth are the key drivers of a marketingstrategy that has at its core the standardization of business structuresproducts and processes along global (or at least regional) lines For manyglobal brand manufacturers a policy of standardization means adoptingthe philosophy that investments in product development and promotionsprovide greater returns if they are not limited to a single national marketThe internationalization or globalization of business activity can lead tothe de-duplication of roles and factories across several countries serving tomake the organization leaner For consumers the first visible sign of such astrategy in operation is often the subtle name change of a well-knownproduct In the UK for example Jif became Cif (see Figure 31) Oil ofUlay became Oil of Olay and Marathon became Snickers

Production-driven supply-chain thinking usually dominates aglobalization strategy as producers seek to rationalize their number ofstock-keeping units (SKUs) so as to avoid adding complexity to the supplychain Several fmcg companies worldwide are involved in programmes thatwill severely reduce the number of SKUs they have to support Unileverfor example is currently amputating its long tail of under-performingbrands a process that will leave it with 400 strong-growth lsquopower brandsrsquoas compared to the heavily diluted pool of 1600 it started with

The main problem with a strategy of standardization is that it seldomacknowledges the consumption-led economy Consumers themselves arenot standard they differ from one market to another Fmcg giants riskalienation by offering a lsquoone size fits allrsquo product range Coca-Colarecognized this when it abandoned the mantra lsquothink global act localrsquo infavour of lsquothink local act localrsquo The company wisely decided thatmanufacturing operations should be embedded in the local culture

Global brand owners also have to deal with the fact that in some nationalmarkets brands can remain strong and profitable even though they maynever become international players This can create conflict between localand global management over whether or not the brand in question should

38 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 38

be retained within the global portfolio Success in managing a globalportfolio is therefore marked by finding the right balance betweenstandardization and customization

The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing

In order to deal with the increasingly competitive environment andrespond effectively to shareholder demands fmcg companies have beenforced to take a long hard look at their businesses Many are questioningthe value brought to their company and brands by retaining ownership ofthe actual manufacturing process and are evaluating outsourcing as aserious proposition That this debate is taking place at all signifies a radicalchange in thinking for fmcg manufacturers who have long regarded themanufacturing process as something of a sacred cow

Nike Ericsson and Sara Lee are among those brand owners providingindications of a possible way forward Nike for example famously sees

Key Issues for Brand Owners 39

Figure 31 Jif changed to Cif as a result of globalization

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 39

itself as a provider of lifestyles conveyed through sportswear innovationdesign and styling It has never regarded production as a core competenceThe manufacturing strategy implied by Nikersquos approach is one focused on coordinating access to external resources and ensuring effectivecollaboration between internal functions and contract manufacturersparticularly in the areas of new product development The management ofthese crucial relationships is therefore key

In taking the decision to follow a manufacturing strategy of lsquoinnovateand coordinatersquo rather than lsquoown and operatersquo the brand owner is makingproduct innovation and development a core competence and is focusing onthe areas that drive growth and shareholder value Use of such a strategyamong fmcg manufacturers also demonstrates that they no longer seethemselves as product companies and are repositioning themselves asservice companies with a product offering This move resonates with theeconomic trend away from a pure manufacturing base to an over-whelmingly services oriented economy Those brand owners treading boldlyinto this new realm are effectively launching themselves into a new way ofthinking to ensure their survival

The Growth in Retailer Power

Brand owners are increasingly feeling the threat posed by industryconsolidation as the balance of power is tipped in favour of savvy retailersIt is becoming commonplace for retailers to use their intermediate positionto negotiate prices trade terms shorter delivery times and tailoredpromotions securing a winndashwin situation for themselves and theircustomers They are also managing to persuade manufacturers to enter intovendor-managed inventory agreements where the supplier activelymanages the customerrsquos inventory The fear factor is intensifying in the UKamid speculation about whether AsdaWal-Mart are planning furtheracquisitions that would bring them head-to-head with Tesco Britainrsquosbiggest supermarket chain Wal-Mart is the worldrsquos biggest retailer withannual sales of more than pound140 billion It possesses massive purchasingpower and can buy goods very cheaply from Asia and developing nations

Further stress in the manufacturerndashretailer relationship stems from thepressure to standardize pricing and trade terms (following the introductionof the Euro) the competitive threat of high-quality own-label products

40 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 40

and the shrinking shelf space available for brands When retailerndashsuppliernegotiations come down to pure muscle power the retailers have the edgesimply because the fmcg sector is more fragmented Manufacturers havetried to improve their position by maximizing the power of their lsquomuststockrsquo brands but very few of these represent brands that retailers wouldgenuinely fear losing

In some cases a more collaborative relationship is developing where themanufacturer recognizes that the retailer incurs an opportunity cost (of notachieving maximum potential sales) and works with the retailer to addressthis by supplying not just products but also value-added services thatsupport the products The key to such cooperation is the mutual sharing ofinformation Private web-based exchanges which require the integrationof both internal systems are often used to share data and ideas In this wayNestleacute improved its on-shelf availability in Sainsburyrsquos stores to 97 whileits overstocking fell by 25

The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth

Brand owners especially food manufacturers are under increasing pressurefrom the large retail multiples to reduce their trade prices and increasetheir service levels In response manufacturers are trying to eliminatewastage and excess costs from all corners of their cost base At the sametime they are trying to find additional sales volumes to meet analystsrsquo salesforecasts and shareholdersrsquo expected return on investment So how well arethey managing the balance between cutting costs and growing sales

Unileverrsquos strategy is typical The company plans to eliminate 100 of its380 manufacturing sites as part of its well-publicized lsquoPath to Growthrsquoinitiative It is targeting top-line growth of 5ndash6 by 2004 through itsfocus on cost reduction and brand rationalization However cost reductionprogrammes come at a price euro6 billion of restructuring costs in Unileverrsquoscase Unilever chairman Niall Fitzgerald is confident the targeted savingsof euro15 billion together with purchasing savings of the same magnitudewill finance the companyrsquos ambitious growth plans

The growth strategies of major fmcg companies all share an emphasis oncost reduction and service improvement Achieving competitive advantageis becoming harder as both quality and cost-efficient production are nolonger distinguishing factors in the marketplace For decades now most

Key Issues for Brand Owners 41

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 41

manufacturers have been addressing the issue of resource wastage and fewwould stand out as inefficient The proportion of savings that they cangenerate for reinvestment in growth therefore depends on the effectivenesswith which they implement their respective cost reduction programmesTaking cost out of a business has historically been a more traumatic ndash butalso a more predictable ndash fiscal strategy than trying to grow revenues Andwhile corporate acquisition can offer significant scope for investmentcapital most would agree that innovation and organic growth representmore prudent options

The Search for Innovation

All of these issues combined with low inflation and price transparencythroughout Europe mean there is no end in sight to the price debate formanufacturers Low-cost production and distribution become theminimum requirements for staying in the game Achieving a step changein performance requires a radical solution and it is focused innovation thatoffers the most promising source of organic growth There should beinnovation in the relationship between manufacturer and retailer and inthe creation of the next wave of products and services The solution lies inadaptability that is the ability to concentrate on short product cycles andproduct innovation based on profound insight into the value consumers areseeking For consumer marketers this means having a value-centricorientation in the business and a way of managing that enables innovation

THE RETAILERSrsquo RESPONSE2

While many brand owners see retailers as the cause of their key businessconcerns retailers themselves face daunting challenges First and foremostamong these is a long-term pattern of declining spend In 1980 the retailsector represented 466 of GDP Today that figure has roughly halvedThis is because most consumers have everything they need and retailexpenditure is essentially concentrated on lsquonon-essentialsrsquo in satisfyingtheir wants and desires As a result retailers compete with an ever-expanding range of competitors encompassing such areas of expenditure asholidays eating out and personal luxuries

42 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 42

A closer look at this trend shows variations across different types ofbusiness In food retail this trend is typical of developed economies asthere is a limit to how much people can eat and eating out of home hasbecome increasingly popular This is why the grocery retailers are so keento develop their non-food businesses In clothing retail there has been aloss of share since the late 1990s probably driven more by a lack ofexcitement in the product offers than anything else In contrast the homeimprovement retail business has been a success story sales in do-it-yourself(DIY) and electrical products and furniture and soft furnishings haveshown significant growth

Retailers are also facing challenges in respect to business location In theUK there has been an escalation in out-of-town shopping forcing manytraditional high-street retailers out of business Non-central sites carrylower rents and opportunities for larger stores making for a more attractiveproposition At the same time the cost of siting businesses in towns andcities is rising for two important reasons the introduction of inflexibleupwards only rental arrangements and the rapid expansion of fast-foodoutlets coffee shops and mobile phone retailers

However this current trend is likely to be reversed with the propertyindustryrsquos proposed introduction of a code of practice that will enableretailers to negotiate more favourable rental agreements and the naturaleffects of market saturation Furthermore out-of-town rents are beingdriven upwards by buoyant demand for DIY and electrical goods as well asnew interest from clothing retailers

In store price is still a significant issue for retailers Continuation in theuse of lsquoevery day low pricingrsquo (EDLP) and promotions to leverage consumerinterest and revenueprofit is being questioned as consumer expectationsheighten and additional demands are placed on finite resources So caughtunder mounting pressure from intensifying competition and lsquomarginsqueezersquo what should the retailerrsquos strategy for survival be Several optionsexist and these may be used in isolation or combination

Trading across Multiple Locations

In the UK the rule of thumb for selecting the right sales location used to bethat if you could see McDonaldrsquos out of one eye and Marks amp Spencer out ofthe other somewhere in the middle was probably just right It is no longer

The Retailersrsquo Response 43

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 43

that simple as location and store format have become linked to segmentationstrategy The major multiples for example are increasingly tapping thepotential of smaller convenience and food-to-go stores in neighbourhoodand suburban locations In 2002 Tesco acquired the convenience storechains One Stop and Nite-and-Day with the intention of rebranding themto increase the number of Tesco Express outlets from 100 to more than 500

Trading across Multiple Formats

Major retailers across a range of industries no longer confine themselves tosingle-store formats but have developed a number of approaches tomaximize trading opportunities Larger store formats are becoming morecommon for retailing groceries clothing DIY and electrical goodsAmong smaller format stores retail growth is expected to come from newbuilds (mainly grocery) concession units (electricals and furniture) andstore lsquoimplantsrsquo such as the Health amp Beauty which Boots is trialling as anlsquoimplantrsquo in Sainsburyrsquos supermarkets

Use of Multiple Channels

With the rapid take-up of new technologies retailers are utilizing an ever-expanding mix of channels For example Next is one of a number ofcompanies to offer its goods across a range of channels online mail andtelephone ordering services are available to its customers Overall thenature of the online offer will probably continue to differ across the range ofproduct categories For example it is transactional in nature in clothinggrocery and electricals and more focused on promotion and the provisionof information to consumers in the areas of DIY furniture and health andbeauty Despite the hype surrounding e-commerce experts predict that by2005 little more than 5 of retail sales will be online The majority ofthese purchases will be made by consumers in the 26ndash45-year-old agebracket and the over 50s or lsquosilver surfersrsquo

Editing Choice in Store

The attention of retail managers is increasingly focusing on how consumersfind their way around product ranges within stores as well as how they

44 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 44

navigate store aisles New Consumers are looking for lsquoedited choicersquo thatis visible guidelines to help them save time and effort Smart retailers whounderstand this particular consumer want are targeting specific groupingsof products to appeal to specific segments of New Consumers For examplea range of specialist additive-free products will be grouped together withina supermarket rather than following the traditional practice of locatingadditive-free biscuits with other biscuits and additive-free bread withother breads

Enhancing Retail Branding

Retailers are developing their brands by creating new retail brandidentities targeted at particular market segments A retail brand such asThe Link a new Dixons Group brand works best in heterogeneousmarkets where economies of scale are of limited significance In contrastretail brand extensions are more commonly used where the core retailbrand has built up a strong level of consumer equity such as the strategyBoots is pursuing with its Boots Opticians brand

Developing Multinational Operations

Taking retail concepts overseas is a seductive proposition but few retailershave made a success of it Failed attempts to recreate business success inother countries usually result from a lack of understanding andappreciation of the way that markets operate There may be crucialdifferences in the way property is owned and managed or how employersand employees interact Sometimes it is a simple misreading of localconsumer needs However some retailers do manage to succeed inestablishing multinational operations and certain markets have becomethe focus of highly competitive activity Tesco and Wal-Mart for instanceare both aggressively expanding in central Europe and the Asia Pacificregion

Pursuing Customer Loyalty

Customer loyalty represents the Holy Grail for retailers who now have thepotential to use consumer data to build powerful knowledge-based

The Retailersrsquo Response 45

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 45

consumer relationships However as market analyst Verdict concludesconsumer loyalty is eroding across most sectors Consumer churn isgrowing most strongly in the areas of clothing housewares and footwearfollowed by DIY and food Figure 32 illustrates this decline in loyalty (thechange in the average number of people saying they were loyal to oneretailer) In order to arrest this trend retailers have introduced a variety ofloyalty schemes and programmes In the UK current benchmarks havebeen set by Tesco and Boots whose Clubcard and Advantage Cardrespectively are carried by a majority of consumers

The launch of Nectar a lsquonext-generationrsquo loyalty scheme backed bySainsburyrsquos BP Debenhams and Barclaycard introduced in 2002invigorated the battle for consumer loyalty (see Table 31) Nectarrsquos rewardsoffer focuses on frequently consumed lsquolow ticketrsquo items Loyalty points maybe redeemed by founding partners Sainsburyrsquos and Argos or by alliancepartners McDonaldrsquos Blockbuster Legoland and Odeon Cinemas

Critics of these loyalty schemes argue that what is being created is alsquoloyalty currencyrsquo rather than any genuine sense of affiliation with andsupport for a particular retailer They claim that successful loyalty schemesonly work because retailers are able to take consumer information and turnit into actions which in turn provide the consumer with recognizablebenefits These benefits strengthen the consumerrsquos bond with the company

46 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

6

4

2

0

ndash2

ndash4

ndash6

ndash8

ndash10

Change ()

Personal Music Electricals Food DIY Footwear House- Clothingcare video grocery ware

64 34

ndash41 ndash48 ndash83 ndash93 ndash99

01

Figure 32 The decline in loyalty 1999ndash2002 Adapted from Verdict 2002

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 46

The Retailersrsquo Response 47

Tab

le 3

1T

he b

attle

of t

he lo

yalty

car

ds (a

t Nec

tarrsquos

laun

ch)

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 47

[Text not available in this electronic edition]

because the consumer can see that the company cares about them enough toreward their business However a scheme that simply rewards theconsumer but fails to capture in a meaningful way the vital flow ofinformation from consumer transactions is a sales promotion schemehowever large it might be

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

The mass markets of the production-driven economy have given way to thediverse demanding markets of the consumption-led economy In responsebrand owners and retailers are replacing their lsquoone size fits allrsquo consumermarketing strategies with ones that are more customized and personalizedThe era of maximizing scale is over and the future of retailing looks to beabout creating retail concepts that appeal to smaller clusters of consumersWhile certain lsquocategory killersrsquo (giant out-of-town superstore brands thatfocus on retailing a single category of products such as BampQ in DIY) willsurvive as they currently stand most retailers are taking radical actionThey are creating a lsquonarrower and deeperrsquo type of offer in the hope ofgaining a higher penetration of consumer spend Micro-retailing whereretailers make a limited range of products available in a small store to ahighly targeted audience can only be successful if it is based on meaningfulinsights into the value being sought by the New Consumer Of course thispresupposes that a value-centric orientation exists within the business

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Both brand owners and retailers need to adopt a value-centricorientation and an approach to marketing that enables adaptabilitycreativity and innovation

bull The impact of globalization and questions surrounding manufactur-ing cost-effectiveness and competition are causing brand owners torationalize their portfolios

bull There is no end in sight to the trade price issue as retailers consolidateand continue to exert downward pressure on prices

bull To achieve improvements in brand performance brand owners mustdeliver consumer-focused innovation

48 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 48

bull Faced with a declining share of GDP and lower levels of consumerloyalty retailers are increasingly adopting multi-location multi-format multi-channel and multinational strategies

bull Micro-retailing is creating narrower and deeper retail offerings

Summary Points 49

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 49

05 Baker chapter 3 FINAL 5603 234 pm Page 50

New Consumer Marketing champions a new and viable way of marketing

New Consumer Marketing (NCM) does not just advocate a new focus formarketing it champions a new way of doing marketing It breaks awayfrom the mechanistic models of the production-driven era and providesfresh thinking on managing new patterns of consumer growth It focuseson the demand side of business taking the consumer as its starting pointnot its final destination As a concept NCM combines the strengths of anorganizationrsquos people and processes and enables marketers to break out ofthe binary thinking that has seen businesses swing between a singularemphasis on process or on people

NCM is at an early stage of development Its evolution as a specificmanagement discipline is being influenced by an eclectic body ofindividuals who recognize that new marketing approaches and attitudesare needed Most established marketing thinking has grown out of themechanistic age of marketing where the certainties of mass marketsprovided a sense of security for brand owners and retailers The presentmarketing environment is no longer as static and certain as it used to beand there is a growing need to find more appropriate marketing tools andtechniques to connect better with consumers

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHAT IS IT

New Consumer Marketing is not simply another way of managing themarketing mix It is an emerging business discipline that addresses a rangeof issues relevant to competing successfully in a particular market Its keyobjective is to establish sustainable competitive advantage through

New Consumer Marketing 4

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 51

superior processes of value definition value creation and value delivery Atthe heart of each of these processes is a core capability ndash insight innovationand agility These capabilities enable the organization to develop consumerresponsiveness that is to deliver the value required by its consumersegments cost-effectively

NCM helps marketers make sense of the complexity and apparent chaosthat defines todayrsquos consumer markets In this post-quake economymanagers find themselves searching for frameworks and tools that willenable them to master very different market conditions NCM providesfresh thinking on where and how to focus marketing attention andresources in this consumption-led economy It is a response by leading-edge marketers to the outstanding challenges posed by the NewConsumer whose arrival is marked by heightened competitiontechnological developments that have created an interactive marketplaceand increasingly irrelevant consumption management practice that isstruggling to succeed through Relationship Marketing (RM) andCustomer Relationship Management (CRM)

A Response to the New Consumer

Consumers today are faced with overwhelming choice For the most parttheir needs are taken care of and their discretionary expenditure is focusedon satisfying their wants and desires As discussed in Chapter 2 NewConsumersrsquo expectations of products services and brands extend beyondlsquofeaturesrsquo and lsquobenefitsrsquo to lsquoexperiencesrsquo Even with this insight brandowners and retailers face an uphill struggle in connecting with consumersTheir brand messages compete for the attention of an increasinglysophisticated audience who are bombarded with information from rivalsources As author Seth Godin (1999) has noted a wealth of data becomes apoverty of attention

Furthermore it is harder to reach consumers who live highlyfragmented lives and display multiple personalities and who changesuppliers at the click of button Such sophisticated and demandingconsumers are not confined to a static marketplace but roam freely withinan interactive one New routes to market emerge all the time making iteasier for consumers to go to market They can research products and maketheir purchases offline or online or both as is their preference For the

52 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 52

consumer controlling the relationship in this interactive marketplaceextends to controlling the value proposition more directly and forcefullythan ever before For instance the web can easily support build-to-ordermanufacturing where consumers specify the colour size or configurationof a product they want

A Response to the Interactive Marketplace

Developments in IT bring with them both opportunities and threats Forexample as we move from a state of interaction into an age of integrationconsumers will increasingly have access to information on the move and theability to demand faster better and cheaper service At the same timemobile commerce makes it possible for marketers to communicate moreeffectively with consumers marketing messages can be targeted andconsistent and consumer feedback can be received and assimilated

For the consumer the costs of doing business are likely to fall as IT offersan opportunity to find the best value for money offers For examplewwwcarsurveyorg and wwwmoneysupermarketcom enable consumersto make comparisons at the click of a mouse while other websites bringindividual consumers together empowering them to use their collectivebargaining power The next step on from this is the development ofpersonal agents or sites that coordinate and control the access of suppliersto meet an individualrsquos specific requirements for example a domesticservices agent that manages suppliers of utilities groceries mortgage andbanking services etc

The Internet opens up business transparency and effectively transfers thepower in the relationship to consumers Economists suggest that underthese conditions firms will end up as price takers in a near perfect market(markets in which conditions of free and open competition more or lessexist) The so-called lsquorate tartrsquo ndash the informed confident consumer whoswitches between companies to gain the benefit of the best financial dealson offer ndash is already a reality for suppliers of personal financial services Inthe music industry consumers have taken control of both production andconsumption Music lovers have exploited the advantages of MP3 astandard file format that enables digital music files to be compressed sothey can be downloaded via the Internet in a reasonable time and withoutlosing too much audio quality Consumers can e-copy songs and entire

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it 53

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 53

audio CDs without having to pay for the music (an opportunity for musicalartists to flaunt their talent a threat to the music industry in lost income)

A significant effect of the pace of change in IT has been the emergenceof time as a competitive dimension Organizations find themselveshaving to operate in lsquoMartini modersquo or ndash in the words of the drinkrsquosadvert ndash lsquoany time any place any wherersquo The term lsquo247rsquo has entered theEnglish language superseding the earlier phrase lsquoopen all hoursrsquoCompeting on the basis of time demands a rapid response capabilityOrganizations need to develop business strategies that ensureadaptability The turbulent marketplace means there is no certainty inlong-term demand forecasts

A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management

While the evolution of the consumer and IT were beginning to challengethe marketing status quo marketing focus shifted from managingindividual transactions to building consumer relationships RelationshipMarketing concentrated on retaining customers rather than acquiringthem simply because there were fewer lsquonewrsquo customers left to acquirecompetition was tougher and the correlation between profitability andlong-term customer relationships had been made

As a framework RM provided much useful learning about the benefitsof focusing on retention and developing relationships over time withcustomers and other stakeholders It introduced the idea that all of theserelationships are interdependent and it has encouraged managers tovisualize the marketing space as a web or network of interconnectedrelationships based on mutual interests However RM falls short ofenabling organizations to deal effectively with the New Consumer in theconsumption-led economy that is characterized by a dynamic complexity

In many organizations developments in IT and computationaltechnology were applied to the business of developing a CRM strategy It isnow widely accepted that the vast majority of expenditure on CRMsystems has failed to meet expectations This is because CRM is a poorlydefined concept and there is little agreement on how to implement itRecent research suggests that CRM should not be attempted by anorganization unless there is congruence between its marketing strategy ITstrategy and corporate culture The challenge for CRM systems is

54 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 54

delivering value into consumer markets characterized by high levels ofheterogeneity

NCM implies that the challenges thrown up by changing cultures ofconsumption and an increasingly competitive environment can only bemet through a step change in strategic thinking which in essence meansmoving the consumer up the corporate agenda The boardrsquos focus mustswitch from supply-chain management to managing the demand systemand that starts with the 4Cs (consumer needs and wants cost convenienceand communication) rather than the 4Ps (price product place andpromotion) Marketers who manage the critical interface between the newmarketplace and the organization are best placed to bring about thischange in focus NCM therefore offers an opportunity to overcome a decadeor so of debate about the contribution marketing makes to the success of abusiness by redefining marketingrsquos role and status in a way that also sendsit to new heights and into a new realm

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHAT DOES IT MEAN

NCM means adopting a value-centric orientation in the organization anddrawing on learning from the new science of complexity In this waymarketing can be conceptualized as a business discipline that enables anorganic approach focused around key processes of value definition creationand delivery and one that combines an emphasis on people and process

Adopting Value-Centricity

As the practice of marketing has evolved in response to market conditionsthe underlying philosophy of a business in relation to the customers itserves has shifted (see Table 41) Transaction marketing was based on asales orientation with the aim of acquiring as many new customers as possible Profit was generated through increased sales volumeRelationship Marketing switched the emphasis to developing greaterprofitability through customer satisfaction underpinned by a retentionorientation The realities of the consumption-led economy demand thatthe focus of a business shift again to insight innovation and agility toachieve profitability based on having a value-centric orientation in thebusiness

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 55

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 55

Value-centricity generates revenue growth and improved profitabilitythrough a focus on the demand side of the business It means movingbeyond a relationship emphasis to one that has at its core the definitioncreation and delivery of value If an organization can meet the valueexpectations of the consumer then a long-term and profitable relationshipis more likely to follow The key is having value as the starting pointotherwise the relationship development strategy (and the CRM toolsperhaps used to deliver it) will not work as intended

In NCM value-centricity therefore replaces the focus on customerretention as the underlying orientation of a business Profitability isgenerated through delivering the value consumers want to buy into and theorganization wants to deliver that is value on the consumerrsquos terms asdemanded and maybe even dictated by them This value component marksthe process of exchange that takes place between the consumer and theorganization it is the lsquothingrsquo that the consumer gets in return for what theygive Organizations must learn how to operate in this consumer lsquospacersquo

In order to meet New Consumersrsquo expectations organizations need tofine-tune their understanding of the factors that create this value thosethat maintain it and equally those that destroy it Understanding thenature of the different value factors is also an opportunity to review thelsquophantomsrsquo that exist in every organization that is those features of a brandthat the organization believes add value but which are not rated at all byconsumers These are the lsquotaken for grantedrsquo elements that can beeliminated from the process resulting in cost savings for the organization

56 New Consumer Marketing

Table 41 The evolution of the marketing orientation

Focus Means End

Sales orientation Transactional marketing Profits through acquiring customers

Retention orientation Relationship Marketing Profits through customerand CRM satisfaction

Value orientation Demand system management Profits through insightinnovation agility

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 56

Applying Science

Organizational understanding of the make-up of value consumers areseeking has to be continuously updated This is because the newmarketplace is dynamically complex The Internet is perhaps the moststriking example of this Experts believe that the speed scope and scale ofmarket change will be driven by two laws relating to technology The firstwas described by Intel founder Gordon Moore who declared that every 18months chip density (and therefore computing power) would double whilecosts would remain unchanged The second law is attributed to RobertMetcalfe the founder of 3Com Corporation and inventor of EthernetWhat he describes as the experienced utility of belonging to an electronicnetwork increases exponentially with the number of users In other wordsthe more who join a network the more sense it makes for others to do thesame Those who choose not to join miss out in more ways than oneMeeting the challenges posed by cheaper computing power and anemphasis on networks are expected to characterize future developments inconsumer marketing strategy

To make a value-centric orientation a reality in this new marketplacerequires a shift in mindset about the way an organization is capable offunctioning It means moving from thinking linearly and mechanisticallyto thinking organically as this holds the key to consumer responsivenessLiving entities are more capable of adaptability the key requirement forsurvival in the new marketplace Marketing needs to adjust to these newrealities and become a systemic holistic and above all dynamicallycomplex activity

This view connects with the new science of complexity in whichinteraction is characterized as a near chaotic state Complexity science isabout searching for patterns among an abundance of seemingly randomphenomena in the universe and about establishing how order emergesfrom the apparent chaos To use an example down in the garden pond in spring a mass of froglets experiencing the growth of new legs and thedisappearance of a tail will emerge from the water in a cacophony ofsound and hop haphazardly on to dry land To an observer this mayappear a chaotic scene but the froglets are actually only demonstratingcomplex adaptive system behaviour based on principles of self-organization

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 57

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 57

Complexity science is aptly named and has spawned two major sub-strands of research chaos theory and complex adaptive systems (Gleick1987 Pascale 1990) It was advances in computational technology in the1960s that made the science possible led by the work of Edward Lorenz onchaos theory His contribution is based on research into weather systemsand left the idea that lsquosmall changes can produce large resultsrsquo in thepopular mind Edification in this field came later in James Gleickrsquos 1987best-seller Chaos Making a New Science although these ideas were nottransferred to the business arena The behaviour of complex adaptivesystems however offers more scope for parallels with the world ofcommerce These systems are found everywhere and comprise independentbut dynamically interacting agents that develop their optimumperformance by continually learning changing and adapting to theirenvironments However chaotic the process looks at any point it alwaysevolves to a state of creative order one famously described by NormanPackard as the lsquoedge of chaosrsquo

The appeal of complexity science to business theorists is that it providesa way of thinking about how the underlying processes and relationships ina company can be organized to enable the company to become as adaptiveand creative as possible in the face of continual change This convergence ofscience and business provides a rich seam to be mined And RichardPascale in his 1990 book Managing on the Edge is credited with leading theway here although other authors also advocate this emerging biologicalthesis Champions of this scientific analogy are not however suggestingthat commerce will start behaving as nature does but instead believe that itcan be helpful in finding a different way of looking at business issuesBusiness may be able to learn how to understand complexity and find a wayof responding dynamically to change

Breaking out of Binary Thinking

NCM emerges at the confluence of these two streams of thinking ndash the newscience of complexity and the evolving discipline of marketing NCM istherefore different from the prevailing marketing paradigm It is abusiness discipline that enables the organization to master the increasinglydynamic and complex process of going to market in a systemic and holisticway It provides managers with a means of identifying and mobilizing

58 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 58

people and processes to help them become as adaptive and creative aspossible against the background of a complex marketing environment

A systemic approach to managing the dynamic complexity of the newmarketplace enables organizations to break out of the binary thinking thathas seen businesses swing between a singular emphasis on process or onpeople Marketing thinking has been heavily influenced by themechanistic models that emerged in the era of the production-driveneconomy These reductionist approaches are epitomized by the 1936 silentmovie Modern Times starring Charlie Chaplin Behind the slapstick and thesentiment in this film the little tramp finds himself at odds with societyand fights to hold onto the remnants of his tattered dignity andindividuality It is a pointed spoof of the dehumanization of man in anindustrialized society It derides mechanization as we see Charlie on theassembly line tightening nuts at breakneck speed ndash the perfect cog in awheel of misfortune Eventually a nervous breakdown forces him to leavethe factory but he cannot stop tightening nuts even when there are none totighten

Frederick Taylor and his book The Principles of Scientific Management aremost closely associated with these approaches to management (Taylor1967) His ideas influenced generations of business theorists from HenryFord and his mass production of the Model T-Ford automobile through toadvocates of more recent marketing trends (including the qualitymovement benchmarking BPR McDonaldization and lean production)right up to the current flirtation with Six Sigma (an approach that focuseson minimizing production errors) At the heart of these developments is abelief that there is only one right way to complete a task and that a businessshould be driven by efficiency based on the standardization of processes

In between these emphases on process the management pendulum hasswung back to a stress on people to achieve business success In the 1950sDouglas McGregor identified two contrasting styles of managementcommand-and-control and self-management which he termed Theory Xand Theory Y (McGregor 1960) He advocated a more participativeapproach and influenced many theorists who followed him among themCharles Handy (1989 1994 1997) These humanist approaches tomanagement found their expression in the concept of empowermentVolvo was among the first to implement them replacing individual carworkers with teams of workers who were given decision-making roles in

New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean 59

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 59

the business This must have been enough of a change to make Henry Fordturn in his grave

NCM encourages the synergy of both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo combined bytaking a systemic and holistic approach to marketing This way of thinkingoffers an opportunity to identify the key underlying processes andrelationships that help an organization function organically enabling it toadapt create and respond appropriately to the changing marketingenvironment

NEW CONSUMER MARKETING ndash WHO IS INVOLVED

New Consumer Marketing has come about as result of the thinking of aneclectic body of managers consultants and academics These individuals aredrawn from a number of different spheres These spheres include thedevelopment of networks and network thinking where Tim Berners-Leeinventor of the World Wide Web Bill Gates whose company Microsofttouches all our lives Nicholas Negroponte founder-director of MITrsquos MediaLab Don Tapscott management consultant and John Seely Brown chiefscientist at Xerox PARC have made significant contributions (Berners-Leeand Fischetti 1999 Gates and Hemingway 1999 Negroponte 1995Tapscott 1996 1998 Tapscott et al 2000 Brown and Duguid 2000)

Other ideas have come from insights emanating from work that drawsmanagement closer to the world of the living sciences Stanford professorRichard Pascale for example sets out to draw a new management modelbased on complex living systems in Surfing the Edge of Chaos (Pascale et al2000) while Arie de Geus former head of planning at Shell originated theconcept of the learning organization and presents a gardenerrsquos organic viewof managing business in The Living Company (Geus 1999)

Two further strands of thought have come from academia where firstwork on interpreting contemporary consumer behaviour has thrown lighton the New Consumer1 and second there is a growing body of research andwork that highlights value as the new key driver of strategy2

Finally there are managers and consultants who are simply doing it orpreaching it in some form or another Many of these individuals and thecompanies they work for are mentioned or become the focus of short casestudies in the following chapters What starts to distinguish thosepractising NCM is that they share a common vision of a virtual compass

60 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 60

giving direction as to how best to manage the process of marketing to NewConsumers Unlike a traditional compass where the needle always settles ondue North the New Consumer marketing compass uses lsquovaluersquo as a referencepoint This guides thinking in managing the processes of value definitioncreation and delivery ensuring that the organization produces the value thatconsumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver

IMPLICATIONS FOR CONSUMER MARKETING

New Consumer Marketing has important implications for consumermarketing It introduces a new approach and a new way of doing it NCMgoes beyond the management of the marketing mix and concerns itselfwith major business issues relating to the organizationrsquos positioning in themarketplace and the consumers it seeks to serve determining how andwhere it competes These issues are of a company-wide and high-levelnature that will impact the business in the long run How well anorganization masters NCM has significant consequences for its futureprofitability Mastery of NCM is dependent on having a framework inplace to enable the organization to describe and position its marketingstrategy This is considered in Chapter 5

SUMMARY POINTS

bull New Consumer Marketing (NCM) is a response to the arrival of theNew Consumer the development of the interactive marketplace andineffective consumption management

bull NCM is a business discipline whose key objective is creatingsustainable competitive advantage through superior processes of valuedefinition value creation and value delivery It demands a change instrategic thinking that moves the consumer up the corporate agenda

bull NCM draws on thinking from the new science of complexityOrganizations need to develop adaptability to survive in the newdynamic marketplace The key is achieving consumer responsivenessthrough insight innovation and organizational agility

bull NCM means rethinking marketing as a living demand system that hasat its core a value-centric orientation

Implications for Consumer Marketing 61

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 61

bull Value is defined as value on the consumerrsquos terms it is the lsquothingrsquo thatconsumers get in return for what they give Brand owners and retailersmust learn how to operate in this customer lsquospacersquo

62 New Consumer Marketing

06 Baker chapter 4 FINAL 5603 235 pm Page 62

A New Consumer Marketing model conceptualizes New ConsumerMarketing practice

No management learning is complete without the development of a modelor two Models help in conveying complex ideas but are more than simplevisual aids Business models normally fall into one of two types operationalor conceptual Operational business models offer a way of linking inputsand outputs within the managerial context to improve performance basedon empirical evidence Conceptual business models on the other handprecede this stage of development and assist in making sense of a large bodyof scholarly knowledge and management insight The New ConsumerMarketing model presented in this book is of the conceptual type Itrepresents a collection of assertions that identify important variables andspecifies how they are interrelated and why As such it provides a usefultool for marketers to formulate the way forward

TO RECAP

Chapter 1 established that businesses today are operating in a time ofradical transition the certainties of the production-driven economy havebeen replaced by the uncertainties of the consumption-led economyConsumption and the servicing of consumption now form the centralmotor of contemporary society The tools and techniques of marketingdeveloped mainly in the production-driven era are no longer applicable inthe marketplace of the New Consumer Furthermore marketingrsquoscontribution to business is unclear

Relationship Marketing (RM) was a strategic response by producerswho found themselves operating in mature markets where greater

A Model of New Consumer 5Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 63

profitability was shown to come from developing long-term relationshipswith customers RM theory shifted marketing focus from customeracquisition to customer retention While RM usefully highlighted theimportance of building relationships with customers consumers and otherstakeholders it fell short of enabling organizations to deal effectively withthe New Consumer in a consumption-led economy The implementationof RM strategies through CRM systems has also failed to meetexpectations leaving many marketers and non-marketers unclear aboutwhether they should be focusing on people or process

Chapter 2 showed that consumption management today is about thesatisfaction of consumersrsquo wants and desires rather than solely thefulfilment of their needs A wide range of organizations is recognizing thatconsumers not products drive the process of consumption and thereforethe consumer should be the starting point for developing strategies tomanage consumption In other words consumer marketers should basetheir activities on the 4Cs rather than the 4Ps

The chapter also introduced New Consumersrsquo characteristic attitudes totime their fragmented lifestyles and their motivating desire forexperiences New Consumers challenge current marketing thinking andpractice because they are marketing literate highly demanding and IT enabled In effect the lsquomakendashsellrsquo model of the old production-driven economy has given way to the lsquotellndashmakersquo model of the newconsumption-led economy To succeed now and in the future marketingstrategy must actively address the heterogeneity of these empoweredconsumers

Chapter 3 looked at the key concerns of brand owners and retailers andfound that despite differences in the challenges they face both are seekingsimilar solutions that focus on innovation The impact of globalization iscausing brand owners to rationalize their product portfolios and toquestion the wisdom of keeping manufacturing in-house Should theylsquoown and operatersquo or lsquoinnovate and coordinatersquo Price is a key issue asretailers consolidate and continue to exert downward pressure on pricesRetailers for their part are suffering a decline in share of GDP matched bya decline in consumer loyalty They are increasingly choosing to tradeacross multiple locations formats channels and countries Their partialsolution to satisfying New Consumers ndash micro-retailing ndash is leading to thecreation of narrower and deeper retail offerings

64 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 64

In Chapter 4 New Consumer Marketing was positioned as a response tothe challenges thrown up by changes in consumer culture and the widercompetitive environment It has emerged at the point where the evolutionof consumer marketing meets with the new science of complexity NewConsumer Marketing places the consumer at the centre of the consumermarketing process and works to ensure that the consumerrsquos perception ofvalue is the yardstick of success But this emergent business disciplinediffers from traditional marketing approaches in that it is about managingconsumer demand in an organic manner rather than managing consumersupply in a mechanistic fashion

KEY CHALLENGES FACING NEW CONSUMER MARKETING

The key challenges facing consumer marketers have been thrown up by thetectonic change that has impacted the macro-marketing environment Inthe shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economyconventional approaches to consumer marketing are not succeeding inenabling organizations to master the dynamic complexity of the newmarketplace These key challenges can be summarized as the need to

bull address the concerns of brand owners and retailersbull embrace the New Consumerbull help organizations develop real consumer responsivenessbull lift marketing out of its crisis

Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers

Brand owners are facing a period of significant change as a result ofchanging consumer demand This combined with consolidation amongtheir customer base has put them under increased pressure to satisfy thesechanging needs While they would like to be focusing resources oninnovation and new product development instead they have no choice butto ruthlessly attack their cost base in order to meet retailersrsquo price demandsLow-cost production and distribution become the minimum requirementsfor meeting these demands and staying in the game competitiveadvantage is found elsewhere

Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing 65

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 65

Retailers face their own challenges driven by the declining proportionof GDP now attributed to retail spending As the consumer base becomesmore autonomous and diverse the lsquoone size fits allrsquo approach to developingretail concepts is no longer appropriate Both brand owners and retailersare looking to enrich and expand the strategic options open to them Theyneed to adopt a value-centric orientation and an approach to marketingthat enables adaptability and creativity This will empower manufacturersto manoeuvre within the relationship and work towards deliveringdemand-led profit growth while for retailers it will enable them toprofitably master the point of confluence where societal and economicchanges and changes in consumer culture are being played out

Embracing the New Consumer

What is clear is that there is an urgent need for fresh thinking in consumermarketing to find different ways of managing the realities of the newmarketplace The management of consumption now the driving force inthe economy needs to be rethought in light of the New ConsumerSophisticated and demanding at large in an interactive rather than a staticmarketplace the New Consumer creates new challenges for organizationswhich find the conventional tools of strategy making and tactical solutionsdeveloped in the mechanistic age of marketing of little help

Success or failure will ultimately depend on their abilities to understandconsumer behaviour in a time of continuous economic social andtechnological change and at the same time to manage the organizationrsquosresponse However developing understanding is becoming more difficult asthe approach of the production-driven era which characterized consumersby using basic demographics no longer gets us close enough to reallycomprehending buying motivations The predictive power of thesetraditional categories has been eroded and segmentation analyses that breakbuyers into simple caricatures of five or six types for entire markets oftencreate more barriers to effectively connecting with them than they facilitate

Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness

Growth is a business imperative Organizations have learned that theylsquocannot shrink their way to greatnessrsquo Gary Hamel and CK Prahalad in

66 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 66

their book Competing for the Future (1994) came up with the term lsquocorporateanorexiarsquo to describe the state many organizations found themselves inafter the accountants had seized on concepts such as Business Process Re-engineering (BPR) and lean production (known as lsquoleannessrsquo1) andintroduced rationalization and downsizing programmes which left little toinvest in new growth An internally focused cost-cutting strategy deliversshort-term gains but does not address the issue of long-term growthBreaking out of the cost-cutting cycle requires a more far-reaching strategythat anticipates the broader issues that will influence future performance

Growth comes from the demand side of the business which means doingthe same thing better or doing something new To achieve thisorganizations need to connect better with consumers they need tounderstand how to deliver the value that consumers are seeking in acontinually adaptive and creative way For many supply-chain managementhas been the name of the game over recent years However in contrast tosupply-chain thinking New Consumer Marketing takes the consumer as thepoint of departure for the organization not the final destination In effect thelsquopipelinersquo is reversed and organizations become forced to see the deliverycreation and definition of their offering from the consumerrsquos point of viewNew Consumer Marketing goes beyond simply renaming this lsquodemandchain managementrsquo by advocating drawing on learning from the newsciences and conceptualizing marketing as a demand system

Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis

Criticism about the lack of clarity surrounding marketingrsquos contributionto a business has been a feature of reports and articles over recent years Thisis in part driven by the difficulties surrounding the measurement ofmarketing effectiveness but also by the fact that marketing is both equatedwith business unit strategy and located within the marketing mixWithout a clear emphasis as to its role marketing languishes in a lsquono manrsquoslandrsquo and is badly placed to provide strategic leadership

THE NEW CONSUMER MARKETING MODEL

The NCM model recognizes and tackles ndash on a conceptual level ndash theseoutstanding challenges It advocates that organizations embrace the New

The New Consumer Marketing Model 67

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 67

Consumer by adopting a value-centric orientation and refocus theirstructures on the three key processes of value definition creation anddelivery These make up a demand system The central component of avalue-centric strategy is value on the consumersrsquo terms as demanded ndash maybeeven dictated ndash by them This value component marks the process ofexchange that takes place between consumers and the organization it is thelsquothingrsquo that consumers get in return for what they give

A process is defined as an activity or group of activities that takes aninput adds value to it and provides an output to an internal or externalcustomer At the heart of each of these key processes is a core capability ndashinsight innovation and agility These are the capabilities that enable brandowners and retailers to become adaptable and able to offer real consumerresponsiveness

Adopting a process approach entails a different way of working to thatassociated with traditional vertical hierarchical structures of functionaldepartments These static structures act as a barrier to performance Infocusing on processes organizations take on a flatter horizontal structurethat enables them to be more responsive by speeding up decision-makingprocesses and encouraging cross-functional collaboration which helpsmaximize consumer value and operational cost-effectiveness With anemphasis on understanding consumers and their value preferences value-centric organizations draw key employees together in autonomousmultidisciplinary teams to focus resources around the main processesOften these teams are temporary enabling the organization to combineand recombine assets according to the nature of the opportunities thatarise These are firms that regard the organizational whole as greater thanthe sum of its parts However this does not mean that organizations cannotgrow big Tesco for example is one of a number of organizations that hassucceeded in building the virtues of smallness into a large organization

The NCM model adopts the principles of the new science to suggest anorganic approach to consumer marketing Where marketing is viewed as asystemic holistic and dynamically complex activity adaptability becomesan achievable goal In business systemic thinking offers a way ofidentifying the key underlying processes and relationships that help theorganization to adapt create and respond appropriately to the changingmarketing environment In this way organizations are able to break out ofthe binary thinking that has long constrained management theory and the

68 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 68

model encourages the synergy of both lsquopeoplersquo and lsquoprocessrsquo combined Inshort the static marketing function of the production-driven economybecomes a living demand system in the consumption-led economy

The NCM model lifts marketing out of its crisis in terms of presenting aconceptual guide for practitioners for generating and managing theexchange process under conditions of competition The NCM modelprovides a framework that enables an organization to describe and positionits marketing strategy In doing this it identifies the consumer segments itseeks to serve determining where and how it will compete Working at thelevel of competitive strategy substantiates NCM as a business discipline

Marketers are best placed to provide strategic leadership in themanagement of this critical interface between the organization and the newmarketplace They oversee the exchange process and the necessary alignmentof internal and external factors They are in the best position to understandand interpret emerging trends for the benefit of the organization

The New Consumer Marketing model is presented in Figure 51 and itshows quite clearly how consumer marketing can be conceptualized asconsisting of the three key processes underpinned by a value-centricorientation The model is organic in nature reflected in the use ofhoneycomb-shaped cells each of which has a nucleus

The honeycomb with its familiar six-sided shape provides a usefulmetaphor for explaining how marketing can be visualized as a livingdemand system The honey-bee is well known to us all This is a creaturethat is renowned for its productivity and the fact that it creates its ownvalue proposition in the form of honey Honey manufacture is a task sharedamong various types of bee and each contributes its own instinctiveexpertise The hive members work in harmony to ensure the survival of thecolony Of course this is just a metaphor and there are limits to how far itcan be taken but because it is dynamic iterative and flexible thehoneycomb offers an example of working where people and process arecombined in a continually productive system

The capabilities at the heart of each key process and the seven elementsthat make up the organizational DNA demonstrate the company-widehigh-level approach that is taken by the NCM model By offering a holisticapproach to managing the exchange process in a dynamic marketplace themodel aims to assist managers in developing and implementing successfulconsumer marketing strategies

The New Consumer Marketing Model 69

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 69

The first cell in the demand system is concerned with the process of valuedefinition that is the process of generating and identifying insight in orderto describe and demonstrate value Chapter 6 covers the traditional andnon-traditional ways of generating insight Segmentation then considershow insight is made actionable Finally the importance of re-evaluatingthe role and status of the insight generators within an organization isexplored

The next cell in the demand system is value creation Chapter 7 exploresthe process of creating value that results in a value proposition for a specificaudience Innovation forms the nucleus of this cell and the strategicsignificance of this is covered Other elements in the process include newproduct development branding positioning and pricing Branding isportrayed as the consumerrsquos experience of value and the implications ofthis are discussed through a number of cases

The third key process in a demand system is value delivery Chapter 8discusses how value is communicated and conveyed by an organization to a

70 A Model of New Consumer Marketing

13

13

13 $

Figure 51 The New Consumer Marketing model

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 70

specific audience Media and channels are explored alongside the roles ofservice technology integration and supply-chain management Thewatchword here is organizational agility

Finally Chapter 9 describes the seven elements of the organizationallsquoDNArsquo that makes a demand system viable This chapter describes how thecells of the living system are managed through an exploration of the natureand interrelationships of intuition culture and structure leadershipvision and values employees knowledge management planning andmeasurement These are the elements that instruct and inform the threecells of the living demand system about how to optimize performance andensure competitive survival

The New Consumer Marketing Model 71

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 71

07 Baker chapter 5 FINAL 5603 237 pm Page 72

The process of defining value from the consumerrsquos perspective

Defining value = generating and identifying insight in order to describeand demonstrate value specifically

Watchword = insight

In the production-driven era marketing was informed by a seller-centricorientation In todayrsquos consumption-led economy New Consumers aremore demanding and sophisticated and they inhabit an interactivemarketplace Marketing in this business environment requires a differentorientation New Consumer Marketing is founded on a value-centricphilosophy that focuses on defining creating and delivering the value thatconsumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver Themutuality of the benefits gained by both parties is recognized and asymbiotic relationship is established

Managing this relationship between organization and New Consumerrequires an alternative approach to the command-and-control practices ofthe production-driven era Mechanistic models are no longer appropriateand more organic models are being developed such as the New ConsumerMarketing model presented in this book

Value definition the first cell in the New Consumer Marketing modelis concerned with the process of defining the value consumers are seekingInsight forms the cellrsquos nucleus Insight is described as lsquothe power of seeinginto and understanding things imaginative penetration practicalknowledge and awarenessrsquo It enables the organization to begin the processof connecting with New Consumers in a way that will deliver sustainablecompetitive advantage

Value Definition 6

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 73

In generating knowledge about New Consumers many organizationsclaim that the traditional tools and techniques of market research do notseem to be working as well as they did in former times and marketers are looking to broaden the range they use The aim is to get underneath the skin of consumers in a way that provides insight into theirunarticulated needs and desires To achieve this organizations areincreasingly adopting a bricolage approach in which investigative andinterpretative market research methods drawn from different disciplinesare pieced together In best-practice organizations the insight generated isapplied to the consumer base through the process of segmentation in orderto identify the value that is required by the organizationrsquos most promisingprospects

THE ROLE OF INSIGHT IN VALUE DEFINITION

Although insight is derived from the obvious it is not the same as factInsight is the capacity to penetrate the human condition and see hiddentruths For example it is a fact that snowboarding is a sport but it is aninsight that snowboarders are the only sportsmen and women who feeltreated like outcasts on the slopes Where an insight is turned into acompelling marketing idea it can work to create a powerful bond betweenthe consumer and the brand Brands of clothing for snowboarders thatpromote the idea of belonging to a rebellious tribe have been highlysuccessful for example

Insight provides the means for defining value from the consumerrsquosperspective To interpret consumer insight in a way that is meaningfulorganizations need to understand what are the component factors thatconstitute value These factors will serve one of three purposes for theconsumer they will enhance value maintain value or destroy value Thisvalue concept is illustrated in Figure 61

Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value

Identifying these value-influencing factors and the way in which theyinterrelate is the fundamental aim of all insight-generation activitiesFactors that create or enhance value for the consumer are those that aremould-breaking or have never before been offered in the marketplace

74 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 74

They are the key discriminating factors that set the organization apart fromcompetitors in the eyes of consumers Occasionally these value-enhancersmay be lsquoadoptedrsquo by consumers and become lsquotalking pointsrsquo creating greatword-of-mouth marketing A good example of this is Krispy KremeDoughnuts

Krispy Kreme DoughnutsKrispy Kreme Doughnuts is one of the top five fastest-growing businesses inthe quick-service restaurant sector in North America with plans for expansioninto Europe Krispy Kreme aficionados swear by the companyrsquos hot OriginalGlazed doughnuts which are lsquomanufacturedrsquo before the customerrsquos eyes inthe Doughnut Theater (a visible conveyor belt-based operation) The KrispyKreme Doughnut experience receives popular acclaim (including thatcontributed by cartoon character Homer Simpson who is famous for hislsquoMmm donuts helliprsquo phrase) This strong word-of-mouth marketing has played asignificant role in building consumer awareness of the brand In Canada forinstance the impulse to purchase fresh hot Krispy Kreme doughnuts is sostrong that according to the Canadian marketing director people will driveon average 14 miles to reach a Krispy Kreme store

The Role of Insight in Value Definition 75

V

V

V

C

I

-

T

Figure 61 The value concept

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 75

Companies offering lsquovalue-enhancersrsquo will build market share quicklyrearranging the competitive forces in the marketplace as they do so Forexample the Woolwich Building Society has seen its business improve atthe expense of rivals as a direct consequence of introducing a new kind ofaccount ndash the Openplan Account Openplan creates value for customers byplacing customers in control of their money and enabling them to managetheir complex financial matters easily through using the one account Itallows customers to personalize the names of their various savings lsquopotsrsquoand to tell the Woolwich when to move funds into higher-interestaccounts For consumers Openplan was a welcome change from thetraditional way of banking where customers would be told how theirmoney was being handled and has now been adopted by the Barclays groupof the Woolwich Building Society

Factors that maintain value are the lsquohygienersquo factors or the core featuresand attributes that all competitors must offer to be considered players inthe marketplace These lsquovalue-maintainersrsquo work in combination with thelsquovalue-enhancersrsquo to affirm value with consumers They should be subject

76 Value Definition

Figure 62 Krispy Kreme Doughnuts are a talking point

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 76

to regular sense checking to ensure that they continue to perform thissupportive role It may be the case that one or more of these value-maintaining factors has the potential to be developed into a value-enhancing factor Alternatively some of these factors may have to bedropped from the offering if they show signs of actually reducing itsconsumer value

The third category of factors that make up the consumerrsquos concept ofvalue encompasses those that diminish and destroy value These are thelsquoturn-offsrsquo for consumers Once identified these lsquovalue-destroyersrsquo shouldbe eliminated from the offering but not before the company has anunderstanding of why they have a destructive influence Their significancecan be overlooked where there is not a dynamic approach to generatinginsight Laura Ashleyrsquos experience provides a useful example

Laura AshleyIn the early 1990s Laura Ashley the fashions and furnishings retail chainresearched the behaviour of its own shoppers and noted that if shoppersmade a purchase of curtains particularly made-to-measure curtains from thestore they had a higher propensity to go on to buy matching wallpaper andother home furnishing items as well A pound300 purchase could easily becomethe first of a series of transactions with a combined value of several thousandpounds The purchase of curtains was in effect a trigger to other salesHowever the study revealed that customers were increasingly put off frompurchasing curtains when expert staff were not available This occurred mostoften on Saturdays when the stores used part-time relatively inexperiencedstaff Clearly ordering made-to-measure curtains involves some fairlycomplicated calculations and there is a wide margin for error Customerswould only place an order with someone they believed was competentenough to check their own calculations and order the curtains correctly OnceLaura Ashley realized the impact of its staffing policy the company made thenecessary changes and this resulted in higher levels of customer satisfactionand greater sales of curtains By removing this particular value-destroyer thecompany was able to uphold its customersrsquo value perceptions of the brand

Source H Peck lsquoRelationship Marketing Lessons from Laura Ashleyrsquo casestudy Cranfield School of Management 1995

In some cases organizations have a misperception themselves about thefactors that create value spuriously believing that certain factors add valuewhen in fact they simply maintain or even destroy it These are thelsquophantom factorsrsquo in the value exchange and can often take on sacred status

The Role of Insight in Value Definition 77

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 77

within a business For example the Ford Motor Company believed for along time that it was necessary to include a spare wheel as part of a new caroffering However insight generated by its small car product strategyteam into the requirements of StreetKa buyers showed that a spare wheelwas not important in the purchase decision With this knowledge themisgivings of Ford engineers were overcome and the company went on tosuccessfully launch a model without a spare wheel Drivers are insteadsupplied with a canister of foam which will enable them to fix a puncturesufficiently well to drive to the nearest garage for repair or replacement

Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors

Having identified the components of value that factor in the consumerrsquosperception of value the organization then needs to understand exactlywhat meaning they have for consumers Consumers typically describe thesevalue factors in terms of tangible or intangible features The task formarketers is to delve deeper and question why consumers consider thesefeatures to be important The answers will lie in the benefits the featuresdeliver and the way in which some of these benefits in turn work at alsquohigher levelrsquo in satisfying consumersrsquo personal values Consumer researchinto how Nike trainers are purchased showed that while the inclusion ofthe air sole was a straightforward physical feature of the shoe manyconsumers considered it to be a value-enhancer Consumers felt that thecushioning effect of the sole would provide greater comfort and protectionon the sports ground and this in turn would enable them to play sportbetter The air sole thus satisfied personal values associated with a sense ofwell-being and keeping fit In this way product features benefits andpersonal values become interlinked in the consumerrsquos mind This is showngraphically in Figure 63

Mapping consumer perceptions of products in this way demonstrateswhy the various components of value are important It is a technique thatcan be used to understand how consumers perceive differences betweenproducts revealing to the organization the competitive set in which itoperates Mapping the component factors of value for consumers is basedon a well-established research approach known as meansndashend theory1 Thetheory suggests that consumers make the value exchange as a means ofachieving something else This lsquosomething elsersquo may be about product

78 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 78

benefits or it may be about the satisfaction of personal values Uncoveringthese linkages is key to creating positioning communicating anddelivering the value offer as explained in the next chapters

Insight then enables the organization to define value from theconsumerrsquos perspective It provides a means of identifying underlyingsources of buyer motivation Current thinking as to how this process ofgenerating insight should be undertaken is in a state of flux as traditionalmarket research is being augmented with a range of alternative practices

THE ROLE OF TRADITIONAL MARKET RESEARCH INVALUE DEFINITION

In seeking to get closer to New Consumers marketing managers todayhave an expanding box of tools and techniques at their disposal Thesegenerally fall into one of two categories traditional market research andnon-traditional approaches to market sensing The former comprisesestablished practices which are being updated by new thinking fromvarious disciplines The latter includes a range of approaches from old-fashioned reliance on front-line staff to the contemporary use of IT

As the staple method of insight generation market research aims toanswer fundamental questions about what makes consumers lsquotickrsquo so thatmanagers can refine existing marketing practice Market research emergedas a formalized business process in the latter part of the last centuryalthough the principles it encapsulates go back much further The primeobjective of the modern survey a standard tool of market research is to

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 79

Figure 63 Linking features benefits and personal values

Niketrainers

lsquoGoodhealthrsquo

lsquoEnhancedperformancersquo

lsquoSole with airpocketsrsquo

lsquoSupportfor footrsquo

Features Benefits Personalvalues

Deliver Satisfy

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 79

recapture the lsquodialoguersquo that took place between buyer and seller in the pre-industrial age where the local market or village shop dominated as theplace of buyerndashseller interactions

Formalized market research was first undertaken by manufacturers inthe fast moving consumer goods (fmcg) sector It enabled companies togain a structured and reliable view of the marketplace which they couldthen use to improve their competitiveness They studied markets byborrowing the statistical methods and principles developed by socialscientists to understand and quantify human behaviour They used these incombination with the sampling methods they already had in place toensure quality control on their production lines Some of the earliest bookson the subject of market research were in fact published by leading brandowners such as Cadbury and Shell These books were used as internaltraining manuals in the days before comprehensive reference texts wereavailable The tools and techniques developed then still form the staple ofmost market research plans today What is changing is the mix oftechniques used qualitative approaches are slowly gaining ground at theexpense of quantitative approaches

Using Quantitative Research

Generating insight means focusing largely on answering the lsquowhyrsquoquestion lsquowhy do people dothinkbuy what they dothinkbuyrsquo Data onlsquowho what where when and how manyrsquo on the other hand providesuseful information on context To generate this data organizations usuallyfall back on the use of quantitative surveys These routinely involve largenumbers of respondents who may be chosen on a quota basis to create astatistically representative selection of the larger population Respondentsare all asked the same questions in highly structured interviews to establishevidence of market preferences and trends Quantitative surveys can beconducted on an ad hoc or ongoing basis ndash the latter are often referred to aspanel surveys Ad hoc surveys can provide insight into a potential solutionto a specific business issue and may be repeated on lsquofreshrsquo groups ofrespondents at regular intervals For example Wallrsquos Ice Cream publishesan annual survey on the topic of childrenrsquos pocket money Panel surveys onthe other hand use the same set of respondents to provide regular (weeklyor monthly) feedback on grocery purchases for example Data is collected

80 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 80

in four main ways by post by telephone in face-to-face interviews andincreasingly via web-based surveys

While many marketing managers profess a preference for quantitativesurveys simply because they contain lsquohard numbersrsquo based on the science ofstatistics and sampling theory the pivotal issue is the robustness of thedata evidence David Smith and Jonathon Fletcher (2001) suggest there areseven questions to be answered before reassurance can be given

bull Was the design free of flawsbull Was the sample representativebull Did the questionnaire lsquoworkrsquobull Was the process free of interviewer biasbull Were there any data preparation errorsbull Were there any presentation andor reporting errorsbull Was the interpretation free of flaws

This traditional quantitative approach to research essentially deals withaverages it tells marketers what an average consumer wants But findingaverage consumers is difficult As is often quoted some consumers like icedtea others like hot tea but very few express a liking for lukewarm tea Thispractice of looking for lsquoaveragesrsquo is typical of an aggregate way of thinkingand as has been made clear so far in this book markets today aredisaggregated and characterized by high levels of heterogeneity The NewConsumer cannot be described as lsquoaveragersquo To generate meaningfulinsight into consumer needs and preferences researchers are turning to agreater use of qualitative approaches

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 81

Small numbers

Exploratorydiagnostic

Quota samples

More flexible

More costly per respondent

Large numbers

Confirmatorydefinitive

Representative samples

Less flexible

Less costly per respondent

Figure 64 Qualitative versus quantitative research

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 81

Using Qualitative Research

In seeking to answer the lsquowhyrsquo question researchers increasingly draw onan eclectic pot-pourri of qualitative techniques The roots of qualitativeresearch can be traced to the 1960s the height of the production-drivenera when marketers began to demand deeper insights into the purchasingbehaviour of consumers and motivational research an approach developedby Ernest Dichter gave birth to contemporary qualitative methods ofenquiry In effect the consumer was lsquoput on the couchrsquo and the researcherrsquosinterpretations of attitudes and behaviour were drawn from the fields ofpsychology and psychoanalysis Projective questioning (lsquoif this brand werean animal what kind of animal would it bersquo) and other techniques adaptedfrom these disciplines became the favoured tools for mainstreamqualitative researchers Over the next two decades researchers from otherdisciplines such as sociology and social anthropology added theircontributions introducing notions of humankind as social animals and asproducts of their culture

Today traditional qualitative research commonly features the use offocus groups and in-depth interviews These methods involve askingcomparatively small samples of respondents questions about what they doand think and listening to and interpreting the response The output ofqualitative research is exploratory or diagnostic in nature respondents arenot meant to be representative of the larger population but are intended toreflect the profile of known or desired consumers (Non-consumers are alsooften consulted for their independent input) The aim is to generateunderstanding of the things that bind groups of consumers together

Sadly the impressionistic and non-confirmatory nature of qualitativeresearch has received bad press over recent years to an extent where focusgroups have become demonized in some quarters of the national mediaSmall-sample statistical theory has never been robust enough to convincemany managers that the evidence produced by 36 or 48 people is asaccurate as the aggregated output of 2000 survey respondents There isoften confusion over the way in which the evidence should be used to shapethe strategy of an organization However the notion that it is acceptable towork with limited numbers of respondents is an accepted method in thesocial sciences Grounded Theory2 as this concept is known states thatresearchers should stop collecting fresh information when they get to a

82 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 82

point where it ceases to add anything to the conceptual understanding ofthe issue under investigation (usually after conducting a limited number ofinterviews)

These traditional approaches to quantitative and qualitative research arebased on an assumption that consumers can ndash and are willing to ndash articulatetheir thoughts beliefs feelings and behaviours Organizations wanting tomake breakthrough developments are rather more concerned withunderstanding latent unarticulated consumer wants and desires To meetthis demand on the part of organizations researchers have added to thetoolbox more lsquoin sitursquo investigative methods such as discourse semioticand ethnographic analyses These provide a deeper understanding of themeaning of value factors to consumers bringing organizations closer to thelsquoAharsquo moment when insight becomes obvious

Discourse Analysis

Discourse analysis is a market research technique that looks for patterns inpeoplersquos language such as the metaphors or figures of speech they use tocommunicate about the world around them It can also mean undertakinga review of individual words to gain a deep understanding of whatconsumers mean when they say something Discourse analysis demands adetailed examination of every utterance including those that aretraditionally discarded in the process of analysis This would include howrespondents use what linguists refer to as lsquodiscourse markersrsquo (non-semantic syntactically empty words such as lsquolikersquo lsquoumrsquo lsquoerrsquo lsquokind of rsquo lsquosortof rsquo lsquoyou knowrsquo in the English language) as they are often carriers of culturalmeaning Insight into how consumers use language can help marketersconnect more effectively with consumers as they can use consumersrsquo ownlanguage in creating and delivering value One of the most outstandingexamples of a business that was built on an insightful understanding ofconsumersrsquo language is the most successful pre-school televisionprogramme ever produced ndash Teletubbies

TeletubbiesTeletubbies was developed by Anne Wood and Andrew Davenport forRagdoll Productions (UK) Ltd Anne Woodrsquos worth today is estimated at pound150 million largely due to the success of the fictional made-for-televisioncharacters The success of the original idea can be traced to a combination ofWoodrsquos ideas and business acumen and Davenportrsquos expertise in speech

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 83

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 83

sciences and his understanding of the world of young children The brightlycoloured characters soon established themselves as firm favourites amongpre-school children and their parents with their empathetic use of the pre-schoolerrsquos language and their childlike wonder at the world around them

Semiotics Analysis

Another set of techniques for generating insight draws on the discipline ofsemiotics This is the science of decoding cultural signs which is used byresearchers to get into consumersrsquo subconscious and to predict whereconsumer trends are heading It is based on a belief that we are all shaped byour culture (and not the other way round) and that goods are charged withcultural meaning Consumers use this meaning as a form of expression tosay something about themselves to develop and sustain their lifestylesand to create and sustain social change The role of the researcher is todecode the symbols as a way of understanding culture and what consumersare saying about themselves This kind of insight provides managers with ameans of understanding the role of brands within a culture both theorganizationrsquos own brands and competitive offerings The well-establisheddrinks brand Guinness has successfully employed semiotics analysis

84 Value Definition

Figure 65 The Teletubbies online

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 84

GuinnessGuinness UDV tasked Malcolm Evans and the Added Value agency withdeveloping a user-friendly marketing tool that could be used around the worldto gain insight into the competitive environment (Evans 2001) Usingsemiotics analysis Evans and his team created a tool kit that guidesmarketers in various local markets through the same process This enablesthem to map an understanding of the meaning of beer to consumers in eachof their markets and then to analyse and interpret the advertisements in orderto understand the advertising proposition Having decoded the marketGuinness executives can then work on refining the positioning of their brandsin that market

Ethnographic Analysis

A third approach to generating insight into consumersrsquo latent wants anddesires that is arousing a lot of interest is brand ethnography This is basedon a technique developed in the social sciences in the late nineteenth andearly twentieth centuries where researchers went overseas to researchtraditional lsquotribesrsquo and cultures The underlying philosophy ofethnographic analysis is that the closer the researcher can get to consumersrsquohabitats the greater the chance he or she has of understanding consumersrsquorelationships with other people or with the things that surround them It isbased on a central belief that the researcherrsquos study of consumer behaviouris most accurate and revealing when consumers are immersed in theirnatural environment

This approach to generating insight means taking an analytical view ofconsumers over a long period of time Longitudinal studies as they areknown are not common in marketing because of the high costs involvedand because research results are generally required sooner than anethnographic study can deliver them However some companies such asUnilever consider the investment worthwhile

UnileverUnilever used this ethnographic analysis to understand the opportunitiesarising from the growth of sales of white goods in developing countries Theresults of its year-long study identified broad areas of opportunity forexample the types of clothes bought and worn how clothes are treated andcared for and consumer expectations of clothes care and product benefitsAll of this was set within a cultural context The study also identified astructured framework of issues that the company had not previously been

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 85

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 85

aware of to do with attitudes and behaviours relating to the process of caringfor clothes This new knowledge presented an opportunity to focussubsequent research more closely on these issues with the aim ofuncovering some latent wants and desires that were not being satisfied Thislater research opened up new commercial opportunities for Unilever

Source Lynn McKay New Futures Consumer Scientist lsquoCreatingcommercial value from ethnographic insightsrsquo presented at the Generatingand Leveraging Consumer Insight Conference IQPC London March 2002

As with more standard approaches to qualitative research these threeanalytical methods ndash discourse semiotic and ethnographic analysis ndash arenot designed to be representative of the wider population of consumersbut are intended instead to generate insight that could never be uncoveredthrough focus groups in-depth interviews and quantitative surveysCritics suggest the techniques are very dependent on the interpretationalskills of the individual researcher can often appear to be using asledgehammer to crack a nut and tend to produce more data than isusefully required However these research techniques can revealframeworks for further consumer analysis leading to meaningfulunderstanding of the value consumers are seeking within a wider culturalcontext

Need-States Analysis

As the consumption-led economy becomes more of a reality fororganizations debate about how best to generate insight intoconsumerndashbrand relationships moves on apace In 1994 qualitativeresearch expert Wendy Gordon revived the concept of need-states toexplain the fact that there are more differences between the same consumermaking a brand choice on two different occasions than between twodifferent consumers choosing the same brand on the same occasion Peoplechoose brands to fit a particular context For example consumers maychoose to buy a cheaper bottle of supermarket own-label wine from thesupermarket to drink with a partner at home yet they will choose a moreexpensive shipperrsquos labelled wine to take as a gift when dining at a friendrsquoshouse Their choice of product is influenced by a variety of factorsincluding the meaning of each occasion the environment in which the

86 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 86

wine will be consumed and the other people involved This leads to theidea that a brand can be positioned against a need-state and througheffective brand communications activity can become the brand mostassociated with that need-state

Need-states analysis has at its core an understanding of how consumersmake sense of the world Consumers create a model of the world in theirminds which psychologists refer to as a lsquomental modelrsquo It is theconsumerrsquos representation of how something is or how something happensA brand can be thought of as a type of mental model and this subject isdiscussed further in the next chapter However the notion of mentalmodels is relevant here as the task of the researcher is one of uncoveringconsumersrsquo mental models of the world Thinking about consumerndashbrandrelationships in this way draws on learning from cognitive science thebranch of psychology that deals with how the mind works from theindividualrsquos perspective

Today Wendy Gordon firmly believes that the future of cognitivescience lies in the newly merged disciplines of neuroscience and cognitivepsychology known as neuro-psychology (Gordon 2001) This branch oflearning brings together an understanding of the science of the brain itsphysiology and functions as well as psychological theories For her thisemerging discipline offers the opportunity to truly get inside theconsumerrsquos mind She believes it holds the promise of a scientific basis forunderstanding how human beings create store recall and relate to brandsin everyday life

What is evident from this discussion of the role of traditional(quantitative and qualitative) market research in generating insight is thatorganizations cannot rely on only one of the techniques to deliver absoluteinsight The reality is that both quantitative and qualitative research offermeaningful insight and they work in complementary ways As Gordon saysin her book on qualitative research Goodthinking (1999) lsquoThe case forusing bricolage (a pieced together set of investigative and interpretativemethods drawn from different disciplines) has never been strongerrsquoApproaches to bricolage also draw on non-traditional market sensingtechniques and these are considered next

The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition 87

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 87

THE ROLE OF NON-TRADITIONAL MARKET SENSING INVALUE DEFINITION

While market research provides a stream of invaluable knowledge aboutconsumers it is increasingly augmented with information derived fromthe use of database systems and technology that enables front-line staff toprovide instant feedback on consumer behaviour This data works in asupplementary fashion providing the organization with the opportunityto develop a more complete understanding of consumer motivation Thisunderstanding is vital for constructing successful value propositions

Using Database Systems

In the 1970s traditional market research methods were the only real sourceof consumer insight By the 1990s marketers were becoming spoilt forchoice as data flowed in ever greater quantities from scanners loyaltyschemes satisfaction surveys service requests account information and soon The challenge facing organizations today is how to fuse data inmeaningful ways so that a holistic or 360-degree picture of consumers iscreated This means understanding how and in what ways an individualconsumer interacts with an organization over time It entails building acorporate memory of the consumer so that the call centre agent is awarethat the customer on the telephone wrote to the companyrsquos head office twomonths earlier and that a subsequent home visit from a member of thecustomer services team went well Achieving a corporate memory meansadopting the philosophy that every encounter with consumers is a mutuallearning experience If they do this organizations can better managerelationships and in turn customer profitability

Customer databases built up through loyalty card schemes enableorganizations to turn consumer information into knowledge and totransform that knowledge into actionable propositions that provideconsumer benefits These benefits strengthen the consumerrsquos bond with the company From the companyrsquos point of view a loyalty scheme thatsimply rewards the consumer but ignores the vital flow of informationprovided by each transaction is a sales promotion scheme however large it might be Loyalty card information when mined effectively can reveal to the company the distinct and different groups of consumers it

88 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 88

serves In Tescorsquos case loyalty card data is central to the way in which thebusiness is run

Tesco ClubcardTesco Clubcard was introduced in February 1995 and today has over 10 million active members Although its start-up costs were high (judged byanalysts to be in the region of pound10 million in addition to the 1 discount onsales estimated at pound60 million) take-up of the loyalty card was significantWithin one month of its launch over 5 million people had joined the schemeand Tesco recorded a 7 increase in like-for-like sales This propelled Tescoto overtake Sainsburyrsquos as Britainrsquos leading retailer of packaged goods

Over the years Tesco has learned how to manage Clubcard data formaximum strategic effect The company admits to having been overwhelmedinitially at the deluge of data generated by the scheme Clubcard hadeffectively opened up a dialogue with members and hundreds of letters andup to 30000 phone calls a week had to be dealt with Specialist datamanagement consultants were brought in to manage the communicationprocess until Tescorsquos own in-house team had built up the necessaryexpertise In fact data-mining skills are so strongly valued at Tesco that thedata analysis firm engaged to analyse Clubcard data is now a subsidiary ofTesco

David Reid Tescorsquos deputy chairman has claimed that lsquoItrsquos very easy tomalign loyalty cards People are always rubbishing them because of theexpense But if you took our loyalty cards away from us it would be like flyingblind They tell us how to attract customers how secondary customersbehave how specific customers react to specific promotions how you caninfluence competitorsrsquo openings how you can spot new trends how you canconvert customersrsquo (Child 2002)

Source lsquoTesco Clubcard Foreverrsquo case study H Peck Cranfield School ofManagement 2002

Using CRM Systems

The introduction of Tesco Clubcard demonstrates that effective customerrelationship management (CRM) systems are not just about automating orspeeding up operations They are also about using data and information to intelligently manage customer relationships Tesco and otherorganizations have learned how to benefit from collecting and mining dataas well as using other techniques such as analytic profiling segmentationand predictive analyses to identify individuals and uncover consumer

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 89

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 89

preferences and propensities (so that optimal profitability can be attained)However despite the extent of the analysis provided by a CRM system it isonly market research that can provide a qualitative perspective MajorCRM system vendors such as Siebel Systems Oracle SAP and Peoplesoftare working on introducing analytical tools to enable their clientcompanies to understand their customers better in this way

The problem in practice is that mechanisms for generating bothquantitative and qualitative customer understanding have not been a partof the historical development of CRM systems This is because thedevelopment of databases to hold behavioural customer data has usuallybeen managed in organizations as a parallel process to that of marketresearch This way of operating evolved during the production-driven eraIn the new marketplace of the consumption-led economy insightgeneration is looked upon as a total process one that encompasses bothtraditional and non-traditional market sensing processes What isimportant is using consumer insight to inform strategic decisions thatimpact value creation and delivery

It should also be noted that fusing data from multiple sources raisesethical as well as technological issues These issues arise because data thathas been gathered anonymously for use in attitudinal and lifestyle surveyscan now be fused together with loyalty card data that has been collectedtogether with full personal details In the process of fusion it becomespossible to identify those individuals who gave their data anonymouslyThis makes them vulnerable to marketing approaches by companies andraises an ethical dilemma for the market researcher who would have givenan assurance to an individual respondent that the data would be handledconfidentially implying any personal details would not be used by theorganization Overall the market research industry has been careful intreading on what they perceive to be a potential landmine of personalprivacy This is acting as a brake on industry efforts to leverage multipleforms of data to generate total consumer insight

To deal with ethical issues professional codes of conduct relating to thepractice of market research were first established in the early 1960s inEurope by ESOMAR (a European association of market researchprofessionals) in association with the International Chambers ofCommerce and in the UK by the Market Research Society The keyprinciple in both sets of standards and in other codes of research practice

90 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 90

worldwide is consumer confidentiality The identities of surveyparticipants are not disclosed in analysis or reporting processes Theprotection of consumer confidentiality encourages respondents to providehonest responses about their attitudes and opinions It also serves to protectthem from unsolicited marketing approaches

In Europe today the professional bodies are working together with EUlegislators to find a way of regulating data protection The US and otherkey nations however have yet to enact any laws on data privacy therebycreating a potential minefield for global players

Using Front-line Staff

Finally insight can also be generated using a combination of front-linestaff and cutting-edge information technology Zara the Spanish fashioncompany that is rapidly expanding globally provides a useful example ofthe way in which insight generated on the shop floor can be used to createand deliver value for consumers in a seamless process Zararsquos strategy isbuilt on having a value-centric orientation in the business where insightprovides a continual flow of opportunity (Zara is also referred to later inChapter 8 and the management of employees including front-line staff iscovered in Chapter 9)

ZaraIn a sector where the average high-street retailer predicts trends often a yearor more in advance Zara can turn a trend around in a matter of days This ispartly because it has its own factories and also because of the emphasis itplaces on communication between the shop floor and the factory floor AsZara UKrsquos managing director Michael Shearwood points out lsquoWe donrsquot try topersuade customers to buy something we make We sell products that thecustomer wants to buyrsquo Store managers are offered fashion collections twicea week and they can select items according to what they feel will suit theirparticular customers They can also communicate specific customer fashiondesires to Zararsquos Spanish headquarters up to four times a day using handheldkeypads A few days later the requested clothes are delivered to the storeconcerned

The deployment of IT at the front line where it can directly impact customersatisfaction was ably demonstrated in one case involving a white blouse Theshirt was delivered to UK stores bearing decorative epaulettes The shirts didnot sell Feedback from customers indicated that women preferred the shirt

The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition 91

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 91

plain without the epaulettes This information was passed on to the shirtfactory which promptly manufactured an amended version and sent it out tothe UK stores whereupon it became a best seller

In order to know what trends are about to emerge Zara employs a team ofabout 200 designers dubbed the lsquocreation teamrsquo They travel around theworld and their task is to gather vital fashion intelligence from clubs discosuniversity campuses and catwalks The affordable clothes sold by the Zaramanufacturing and retail chain have become popular among leading fashioneditors who revere their quality fashionability and value-for-money prices

Source Based on lsquoThe mark of Zararsquo Linda Watson Style Magazine 2001

THE ROLE OF SEGMENTATION IN VALUE DEFINITION

In best practice organizations consumer insight is turned into marketingaction through the process of consumer segmentation By segmentingconsumers into groups sharing the same or similar needs on the basis ofvalue as defined in their own terms an organization can acquire up-to-the-minute understanding of its consumer base This can then be used todevelop more cost-effective consumer strategies Because consumerperceptions of value change it is important that both value definition andconsumer segmentation are undertaken on a regular and frequent basisOrganizations that can quickly react to change and anticipate shifts in thevalue demands of consumers have a head start on their competitors Suchflexibility and focus on demand lie at the heart of New ConsumerMarketing

Much of the current discussion about segmentation is informed by themechanistic approach of the production-driven era This is characterizedby the use of scientific and rational language and focuses on the way inwhich the organization should segment its market ie lsquochop it uprsquo intomanageable chunks The reality of the consumption-led economy is thatconsumers themselves unwittingly form loose groups whose members areseeking the same or similar sets of value factors In other words consumerssegment their market and form subgroups with their own sets ofrequirements The language associated with segmentation today is more todo with creativity and insight as organizations wrestle with the challengeof finding a means of exposing these segments of consumers and definingthe value that each is seeking

92 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 92

The process of value definition enables the organization to be confidentabout the market in which it operates Segmentation provides the answerto the simple but strategic question lsquoWhat business are we inrsquo Theimportance of answering this question correctly was highlighted back in1960 by Theodore Levitt in his seminal work Marketing Myopia in whichhe draws attention to the importance of viewing a business in a way that isappropriate to the markets in which it operates His classic exampleinvolved the railroads which defined themselves as being in the railwaybusiness rather than in the transportation business lsquoThe railroads did notstop growing because the need for passenger and freight transportationdeclined That grew The railroads are in trouble today not because theneed was filled by others (cars trucks aeroplanes even telephones) butbecause it was not filled by the railroads themselvesrsquo The railroadcompanies had a product-driven view of the marketplace and failed to seethat the value their customers were looking for was more to do with thebenefits derived from transportation and communication than what therailroads simply had to offer

Today too many businesses still define and segment their markets interms of the products they sell Personal financial services companies forexample typically take this product-driven approach defining markets aslsquoendowment policiesrsquo lsquosavings bondsrsquo or lsquosavings accountsrsquo They fail tounderstand the kinds of value their customers are seeking such as thedesire to save for retirement support a child through higher education orsimply have peace of mind

Correct market definition is crucial to the development of a value-centric orientation as it links directly with the mission vision and values ofthe company It enables the organization to accurately articulate what itaims to achieve and to measure its market share and market growthagainst relevant competitors as it does so These issues are consideredfurther in Chapter 9

Creating a Segmentation Analysis

Customer databases built up through loyalty card schemes such as thoseoperated by the major supermarkets can provide a rich source ofinformation on buying behaviour However it should always beremembered that a segmentation analysis built solely on this sort of data

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 93

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 93

can only reflect the motivations of existing customers It becomes a databasesegmentation and not any form of market segmentation Meaningfulsegmentation analysis takes into consideration different types of data

In terms of the ideal number of clusters or segments to aim for in asegmentation analysis the recommendation used to be no more than half adozen but developments in data analysis and data fusion mean thatcompanies can now work with a greater number Figure 66 illustrates howthis larger number can arise

A major supermarket may start with a small number of lsquosuper segmentsrsquoand then subdivide these further until it has reached a large butmanageable number of micro-segments Developments in IT make themanagement of large numbers of segments possible For example threesuper segments may be uncovered in the segmentation analysis shopperswho are quality oriented family oriented and value oriented These supersegments could then be further subdivided into a larger number of sub-segments known as lsquocategory one segmentsrsquo The quality-orientedsegment for example might be made up of four sub-segments time-poorcash-rich shoppers health conscious shoppers shoppers with apreference for organic foods and lsquofoodiesrsquo or shoppers who favour fine

94 Value Definition

Time poorcash rich

Keen onorganics

Qualityoriented

Healthconscious Foodies

VF

Incr

easi

ng g

ranu

larit

y

Figure 66 Segmenting consumer markets a hypothetical supermarket example

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 94

foods In this way the segmentation process would be continued buildingon insight generated through both traditional and non-traditional researchapproaches until an optimum number of segments is reached Theoptimum number of segments is reached when each segment is of anadequate size to provide the company with the desired return oninvestment members of the segment share a high degree of similarity intheir requirements yet are distinct from the rest of the market thesegments are reachable and they can be serviced by the organization interms of value creation and value delivery

Today in the UK the major supermarkets would typically work at ahigh level of segment granularity with up to as many as 3000 segmentscascaded down from their overarching super segments One-to-onemarketing may be talked about as a viable aim but the commercial realityis rather different as for most organizations the costs of delivering thisoutweigh the returns The challenge is to find new analytic approaches tosubdividing the market to an acceptable level of granularity These morecontemporary approaches to segmentation keep managerial focus onunderstanding the value sought by the individual segments and do so in away that prevents consumer profiling from becoming a barrier to consumerunderstanding Where an organization talks in terms of only four or fiveconsumer profiles these can actually hinder an organizationrsquos ability to dealwith the high levels of heterogeneity characteristic of the new marketplace

Having identified its different consumer segments the organization canthen move on to evaluate which segments offer the best businessopportunities Segments may be assessed in terms of market size andmarket trends market share current and future profitability consumersatisfaction andor consumer loyalty Companies usually manage aportfolio of segments made up of high earners steady earners and futurepotential earners Any low earners need to be managed carefully ndash often asmall increase in the number of times consumers forming this segmentmake a purchase can result in large improvements to the bottom line

Finally continuing with this supermarket segmentation example theanalysis could then be used to understand the shopper profile of existingstores and to define value for example through ascertaining whatpercentage of consumers in each of the category one segments frequentsparticular store types (eg large format versus convenience) or by location(out-of-town versus high-street stores) The resultant insight could be used

The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition 95

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 95

to specify new store developments and hence tailor the value offering moreclosely to the wants and needs of consumers Given that CRM systems canprovide constant streams of up-to-date consumer data segmentationanalyses can become a dynamic part of a demand system A recent projectjointly undertaken by Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp Gamble demonstrates thispoint

Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp GambleIn an innovative example of collaborative effort Sainsburyrsquos and Procter ampGamble worked together to exploit the wealth of data contained withinSainsburyrsquos Reward Card database in order to deliver a holistic segmentationanalysis of the health and beauty care (HampBC) shopper Their study linkedactual purchasing behaviour to attitudinal data using a big base sample Inthe UK the HampBC market was worth almost pound11 billion in 2002 and is forecastto grow 21 to 2006 with Sainsburyrsquos occupying third place behind Bootsand Tesco for sales A major challenge facing Sainsburyrsquos is the differencebetween the HampBC shopper and the grocery shopper Shoppers atSainsburyrsquos are typically aged 45 years plus while the HampBC shopper isgenerally younger Also the overall store shopper is more upmarket than theSainsburyrsquos HampBC shopper

Using loyalty card data Sainsburyrsquos identified eight segments of shoppersbased on their purchasing affinity to different product categories within theHampBC aisle To complement this understanding two additional pieces ofresearch were jointly carried out to provide data on the wider HampBC shoppingcontext Both Sainsburyrsquos shoppers and non-shoppers of the HampBC categorywere surveyed quantitatively in order to gain insights that would enableSainsburyrsquos to build greater penetration among non-shoppers and strengthenshopper loyalty among existing shoppers

Analysis of this data produced a rich source of insight that enabled bothparties to learn what each of the segments was looking for in terms of HampBCproducts their loyalty to Sainsburyrsquos who they perceived as the competitionand the type of marketing activity they preferred The segmentation analysisresulted in actionable results for both Sainsburyrsquos and Procter amp Gamblewhich were then exploited jointly and separately The HampBC strategy that wassubsequently developed encompassed both existing and new shoppersrsquoneeds and helped grow Sainsburyrsquos HampBC category ahead of the market

Source Roger Allford Natalie Evans and Caroline Ward lsquoA step forward inunderstanding shoppers using segmentation techniquesrsquo paper presented at the ESOMAR Conference lsquoConsolidation or renewalrsquo BarcelonaSeptember 2002

96 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 96

As this case example shows an organizationrsquos approach to segmentationis about more than the analytical techniques it employs It makes astatement about the organizationrsquos market orientation the way it sees themarketplace and how well it understands the consumers it chooses to serveSegmentation enables the organization to create competitive advantage foritself by defining value in a way that makes clear how it can profitablycreate greater value for consumers New Consumers raise many challengesfor organizations and as this chapter demonstrates they are impacting theway in which insight into their needs and desires is generated This inturn raises questions about the role and status of the insight generatorswithin a business

THE ROLE OF INSIGHT GENERATORS3 IN VALUEDEFINITION

An acceptance of the vital importance of insight to successful NewConsumer Marketing makes it necessary to review the role and status ofthose people within the organization who are generating the insight Theseare traditionally staff who are members of the market research teamHowever given the wider understanding of how insight can best begenerated this classification should also include those responsible for theanalysis of CRM data All too often market research is perceived to be alow-grade commodity business with an output that does not go beyondcompleting surveys As commentators said over ten years ago there is aneed to prove that market research is about more than clipboards andopinion polls

If insight generators are to assume a real decision-making role then theyneed to be equipped with a skill set that enables them to draw on the mosteffective combination of data generation services externally as well as anability to communicate the learning internally These insight managersmust become proactive consultants within their organizations rather thanacting as simple reactive service providers They need to ensure that theinsight generated becomes the dynamic cornerstone of all marketingactivities In best-practice organizations this appears to be happeningHowever there are perhaps too many junior managers joining the marketresearch profession who are not being trained to take on this enhanced roleThis can only lead to the marginalization of the profession over time

The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition 97

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 97

Insight generators therefore occupy what is known as a lsquoboundary-spanningrsquo role in the New Consumer Marketing model These are staff wholsquoconnect an informal network with other parts of the company or withsimilar networks in other organizationsrsquo (Cross and Prusak 2002) Theyoperate at the periphery of the organization and their roles are strategicallyimportant as facilitators of linkage between the cells of a demand system Itis through their behaviour that the organization adapts (or fails to adapt) tochanges in the marketplace In short they function as lsquosensory organsrsquo Asthis role is seldom recognized within organizations there is no one titlethat identifies these influential staff

These boundary-spanning managers are charged with generating adynamic flow of insight so that insight generation becomes an ongoingprocess and is not simply seen as an annual or six monthly exercise Theyare responsible for ensuring that this insight informs the other two cells ofthe New Consumer Marketing model through the organizationrsquos approachto knowledge management (as explored in Chapter 9) Gaining amomentum in insight generation enables the organization to create aliving demand system as it gains a continuous source of insight on which tofocus its value creation and delivery processes The benefits of this processapproach to insight generation are that brands can retain their currencywith consumers as the organization adapts to shifts in consumerperceptions of value This ability of an organization to shift in line withchanging consumer perceptions of value is well demonstrated in the casesof Lucozade and Skoda

Lucozade and SkodaLucozadersquos success in the drinks industry is underpinned by its expertise inreading value trends and responding to them appropriately The Lucozadebrand has shifted from being a soft drink aimed at people who are unwellsummed up in the strapline lsquoLucozade aids recoveryrsquo to a sports drink thatlsquoreplaces lost energyrsquo to todayrsquos competition-conscious brand that serves asan lsquoenergy boostrsquo

Car manufacturer Skoda has worked in a similar fashion to remain relevantto consumers VW its parent company acquired the brand in 1991 and hasinvested in it alongside its other marques Volkswagen Audi and Seat Thevalue associated with Skoda vehicles has changed dramatically from onethat was the butt of jokes to one that gains consumer trust Skodarsquos popularitytoday builds on a simple but clever message lsquoWersquove changed can yoursquo

98 Value Definition

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 98

This first cell of the New Consumer Marketing model is concerned withthe process of defining the value consumers are seeking Value definitiondrives the demand system by generating relevant insight that provides afocus for the processes of value creation and value delivery To achieve valuedefinition organizations are increasingly adopting a bricolage approachthat pieces together investigative and interpretative methods drawn fromdifferent disciplines

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Insight provides the means of defining value from the consumerrsquosperspective

bull Consumer perceptions of value shift over time Adopting an ongoingdynamic approach to insight generation ensures that the organizationrsquosperspective of the marketplace does not remain fixed in time

bull Value is made up of component factors that work to enhance maintainand destroy value Certain value-enhancers may be adopted byconsumers as talking points delivering valuable word-of-mouthmarketing

bull Insight generation is a total process encompassing traditional marketresearch and non-traditional market sensing

bull Insight is made actionable through the process of segmentation whichhelps the organization answer the question lsquowhat business are we inrsquo

bull Segmentation enables an organization to achieve competitiveadvantage by clarifying how it can create greater value for consumers

bull Insight generators have an influential boundary-spanning role withinthe organization and should be valued as lsquosensory organsrsquo

Summary Points 99

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 99

08 Baker chapter 6 FINAL 5603 238 pm Page 100

The process of creating value resulting in a value proposition for a specificaudience

Creating value = bringing into being or form or investing with new form

Watchword = innovation

Value creation in the consumption-led economy must be informed by anunderstanding of the value that consumers are looking for and assessed interms of consumersrsquo value criteria Satisfying consumer demand today isabout winning the custom of discerning consumers and not simplyproducing good products This second cell of the New ConsumerMarketing model is a fundamental component of a demand system as itmoves the organization from defining value to actually creating andcommunicating that value effectively

Key to the process of creating value in the marketplace is identifying andutilizing the organizationrsquos value-producing resources (eg employeestechnological know-how and capital) to meet consumer needs andexpectations profitably At the heart of this process is the concept ofinnovation Derived from the Latin word innovare meaning to renew oralter innovation in consumer marketing is about creating new solutionsthat offer real value to consumers In many organizations innovation hasbecome separated from marketing giving rise in part to the crisis inmarketing New Consumer Marketing with its emphasis on market-ledinnovation recombines the two and provides a means of addressing both thedemands of New Consumers and the concerns of brand owners and retailers

The desired output of the value creation process is a value propositionthat consumers want to buy into and the organization wants to deliver The

Value Creation 7

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 101

value proposition sets out the value exchange between buyer and supplierand reinforces the mutuality of the relationship As stated in Chapter 6 theconstruction of a successful value proposition depends on first being able todefine value by generating relevant insight into consumer demand and therelative attractiveness of different consumer segments The organizationcan then work to create this value and ultimately to deliver it

In building a value proposition out of the value-producing resources ofthe organization there are a number of elements to consider These includenew product development branding positioning and price Each plays animportant role in the value creation process Of paramount importancehowever is the role of innovation for innovation is what underpins thesuccess of all the elements of value creation

THE ROLE OF INNOVATION IN VALUE CREATION

The business has two and only these two basic functions marketing andinnovation Marketing and innovation produce results all the rest are costs

(Peter Drucker 1985)

In the opening chapter of this book marketing was presented as adiscipline in crisis whose contribution to business is in question Thisstems from the fact that many managers see marketing as a cost rather thanan investment and this itself is driven by the lack of a common approach tomeasuring marketing effectiveness (a subject considered further in Chapter9) The issue for many managers today is that marketing no longer appearsto be delivering innovation somehow the two have become separatedNew Consumer Marketing which places innovation at the core of valuecreation offers a way of putting strategic intent back into marketing andso providing a means of lifting marketing out of its crisis

The value-centric organization is marked by a corporate environmentthat seeks performance improvement through superior value definitioncreation and delivery Innovation in business provides a way of creatingnew value-producing resources or endowing existing ones with anenhanced potential for yielding profit It is the result of a complex set ofprocesses involving organizational learning culture leadership andmanagement style Innovation is important on a macro-economic levelbecause it is associated with high rates of economic growth and high levels

102 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 102

of employment Within individual firms innovation enhancesorganizational performance The commercial significance of innovation issupported by the findings of PricewaterhouseCoopers (1999) whichsurveyed 80 companies in seven countries in 1999 It found that newproducts and services introduced in the preceding five years accounted for a10 increase in turnover and generated a 25 increase in the annual rateof revenue growth It also found that new products and services wereassociated with a 9 increase in annual total shareholder returns

While the firm that innovates first in a market obtains the early moveradvantage this is only sustainable while competitors cannot imitate orneutralize its lead To stay ahead the firm must ensure that innovation is adynamic capability fully embedded within the culture of the organizationThe roots of culture lie hidden in the deep-seated collection of beliefs andassumptions that are commonly held in an organization They are reflectedin everyday life as lsquothe way things get done around herersquo Innovation shouldnot be treated simply as a series of individual projects but as a continuoussearch for opportunities to improve the value proposition to such an extentthat new market space is opened up A value-centric orientation providesthe foundation for achieving this

Because of the clear business benefits of having an innovative approachto value creation innovation is something of a holy grail for businessesThis is especially true for brand owners and retailers who find themselveshaving to rethink their strategies in line with the macro-market shift froma production-driven to a consumption-led economy As discussed inChapter 3 brand owners are looking for improvements in brandperformance that will give them an opportunity to assert their positionwith retailers and to move away from a position where they can do littleother than ruthlessly attack their cost base in order to meet retailersrsquo pricedemands Brand owners want to outperform their rivals in terms ofcapturing market share developing consumer and brand loyalty andearning a rate of profit higher than the industry norm Retailers for theirpart are seeking step changes that will reverse current trends which haveseen retail decline as a percentage of GDP over recent years They need tofind new and innovative ways to manage retail offerings in highlyfragmented markets

For both brand owners and retailers a focus on innovation in valuecreation offers the most promising source of organic growth This means

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 103

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 103

working to create the next wave of brand and retail experiences based onhaving a consumer-relevant value-centric orientation in the business and amanagement culture that makes innovation possible

Consumers as Innovators

In the production-driven economy the role of the consumer in theinnovation process was highly limited ndash so much so in fact that in somecases of marketing consumers appeared to be forgotten altogether In theconsumption-led economy the active knowledgeable and demandingNew Consumer is the focal point of product and service innovationOrganizations that embrace New Consumer Marketing acknowledge thisand believe that the consumer can be a source of insight and innovationleading to greater business competence Such firms are characterized byhigh levels of consumer involvement they recognize consumers asinnovators

The concept of using consumers in direct interface with businessmanagers was termed lsquoTapping the creativity of consumersrsquoTM by theSynectics Corporation (wwwsynecticsworldcom) an internationalconsultancy specializing in innovation and change Synectics consultantsengage consumers in the problem-solving process in the search forbreakthrough initiatives For example one client the National FarmersrsquoUnion (NFU) was brought together with consumers at the point ofpurchase where it was observed that there was no easy way for consumersto identify the source of the food they were buying This was an issue ofserious concern in the UK following a number of high-profile food scaresThe insight generated from speaking to grocery shoppers directly was thatthey wanted a convenient way to ensure food safety This may seem anobvious requirement but it led to the idea of a new farm-assurancebranding scheme The Farm Assured brand authenticating how the foodhas been produced hit the shelves within a record nine months due to theinvolvement of all stakeholders (farmers consumers NFU staffwholesalers and retailers)

By eliciting consumersrsquo hidden desires and enabling them to participatefully in product development organizations can use consumers as agents ofchange in the same way that a grit of sand can develop into a pearl withinan oysterrsquos shell Cadbury Schweppes and Johnson Controls companies

104 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 104

working in diverse sectors have both made maximum use of consumers toshape and sell products successfully

Cadbury SchweppesCadbury Schweppes confectionery uses a five-stage process known aslsquoALICErsquo to drive innovation in its Consumer Planning and ResearchDepartment The acronym stands for alignment (A) of the objectives of theresearch with the consumer problem leverage (L) of existing knowledgewithin the business immersion (I) in the world of the potential consumerconnection (C) through insight and execution (E) to drive growth The launchof the Boost Guarana chocolate bar in September 2002 followed this strategicdevelopment pathway Its genesis was based on the insight that the highlydemanding lifestyle of todayrsquos consumers takes a heavy toll on their mentalenergy This learning was generated by a cross-functional team andsupported by desk research and consumer surveys that used a raft ofethnographic and direct questioning techniques The stimulant properties ofBoost Guarana match those of energy drinks that claim to deliver improvedattention alertness and concentration

Source Patsy Richardson Head of Consumer Planning and ResearchCadbury Schweppes lsquoHow to maximise the benefits of using consumerinsight to drive innovationrsquo paper presented at the lsquoUsing Consumer Insightfor Profitable Innovationrsquo Conference IQPC London October 2002

Johnson ControlsJohnson Controls is part of an automotive systems group that makes seatsand car interiors It operates in the business-to-business (B2B) sector as asupplier to well-known car manufacturers such as BMW and Nissan Thecompany believes that lsquoconsumer focused innovation and productdevelopment will become an increasingly important competitive differentiatorrsquoRecognizing that cars need to deliver more than lsquojust transportationrsquo and thatcar interiors need to surprise and delight end users Johnson Controls drawson the views of both automotive experts and car drivers to understand themotivating values of car drivers (eg family safety pragmatism harmony)Consumers are consulted on product design and associated issues such aswhat luxury means for car drivers and how drivers actually use the technologyavailable in cars This insight-turned-innovation is then used as a corecompetence by Johnson Controls in its relationships with its immediatecustomers the car manufacturers

Source Jemina Martinez Head of Advanced Consumer Research JohnsonControls lsquoGetting out of the car and into peoplersquos livesrsquo paper presented atthe lsquoUsing Consumer Insight for Profitable Innovationrsquo Conference IQPCLondon October 2002

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 105

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 105

Innovation through Process or People

Many companies take an overtly process-oriented approach to managinginnovation while others regard innovation as a capability vested in peopleManagerial thinking is currently caught between these two contrastingapproaches How should an organization seeking to improve itsperformance by becoming more innovative achieve this New ConsumerMarketing offers a way of seeing these two approaches as part of the samesolution to meeting the needs of New Consumers and providingbreakthrough opportunities in business development for brand owners andretailers

On the one hand there is a clearly identified and well-used process thatwas formalized by Robert Cooper an academic researcher known as thestagendashgate process (Cooper 1993) This is shown in Figure 71 Thestagendashgate process provides a way of screening and monitoring theprogression of projects to ensure that progress is linked to the successfulachievement of business goals It subdivides new product developmentactivities into a series of stages so that managers can lsquoownrsquo specific groups ofactivities and be responsible for achieving the objectives within thoseactivities In order to proceed from one stage to the next the project mustsatisfy the objectives that were set for that stage Failure at any stage in the process will result in the abandonment of the project The definition ofthe developmental stages and the evaluation criteria will be specific to theorganization concerned The stagendashgate process aims to reduce risk and isusually associated with an incremental approach to innovation

Figure 71 The stagendashgate process Adapted from Cooper (1993)

106 Value Creation

Initial Second Decision on Post- Precommercialization Post-screen screen business case development business implementation

review analysis review

Ideation Preliminary Detailed Development Testing and Full production andinvestigation investigation validation market launch

(build businesscase)

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 106

On the other hand there are many examples of organizations whereinnovation is directly attributable to the leadership and management styleof an individual (usually the CEO) whose commitment to innovation isreflected in the culture of the organization A common feature of theseorganizations is a focus on seeing things from the consumerrsquos perspectiveAs a result they tend to be more effective in the marketplace For exampleStelios Haji-Ioannou founder of the low-cost carrier easyJet used to takeup to four flights a week on easyJet to experience what it was like as apassenger using his airline The feedback and insight he gained from thisunusual routine was used to improve consumer value

Michael Dell1 founder and namesake of the worldrsquos leading computerservices provider says lsquoOne of the challenges of a company that issucceeding is that you run the risk of complacencyrsquo He encourages histeam to explore incremental improvements and to experiment with ideasthat add value primarily in terms of efficiency EasyJet and Delldemonstrate that fostering an innovative culture starts from the top it isdriven by the way that senior managers manage and relish risk setchallenging but measurable goals support employees who take a risk intrying something different champion new ideas and encourage diversityof thought and approach

Innovation as a Dynamic Capability

In order to synthesize this binary behaviour (seeking efficiency throughprocess or effectiveness through people) New Consumer Marketingencourages a systemic approach Drawing on learning from the livingsciences it helps in identifying the key underlying processes andrelationships within the organization that enable it to become as adaptiveand creative as possible in a changing market environment This approachis exemplified by 3M(UK)2 a company that continuously and consistentlydemonstrates success in innovation

3M(UK)The story of the 3M Post-itTM probably 3Mrsquos most well-known product hasbecome a classic example of innovation 3M manager Art Fry sought a way ofkeeping the bookmark in his hymn book from slipping out onto the floor Heconnected this desire to his knowledge of an adhesive that had beendiscovered by the company a number of years before but discarded as it was

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 107

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 107

considered to be ineffective at sticking With the support of the company Fryredeveloped the adhesive successfully and this led to the Post-itTM a hugelysuccessful stationery innovation

3M(UK) employees are given the freedom to take risks and try out newideas and this has led to a steady stream of new products John Muellerformer Chairman and CEO of 3M(UK) is quoted as saying lsquoWe want toinstitutionalize a bit of rebellion in our labs It has been said that thecompetition never knows what we are going to come up with next The factis neither do wersquo This is indicative of a mindset that actively encouragesradical innovation The difference between this mindset and one that leadsto incremental innovation is so current research suggests (Dyck 2002) todo with the way in which the organization experiences the complexity ofthe problem it is facing Where an organization perceives the problem tobe lsquouncertainrsquo it is essentially saying that it knows the variables at play butdoes not know how to configure them to find the solution Theorganization that perceives the problem to be one of lsquoambiguityrsquo is goingfarther and saying that it does not know what variables are at play and doesnot know the formula for solving the problem

This latter attitude is reflected in Muellerrsquos words and is associated withcompanies that seek to absorb complexity rather than simply to reduce itOrganizations that work to reduce complexity are constrained to anincremental approach Those whose starting point is that they do not knowhow to solve the problem can work to create options to develop potentialsolutions and in doing so learn as an organization Taking a broader viewof the complexity of the marketplace and the issues facing consumers is lesscomfortable for organizations as it throws up more challenges and greaterrisk but it can lead to more radical innovation where the rewards arepotentially superior

Therefore managers seeking to improve organizational performance bybecoming more innovative need to start by deciding whether they areuncertain or ambiguous about the complexity of the problem they arefacing Their answers will be based on their understanding of themarketplace and will determine whether they then work to reduce orabsorb the complexity This more reflective approach is not a capabilitythat was called for in the production-driven era where a command-and-control attitude dominated Then organizations produced goods andservices and persuaded consumers to buy them In todayrsquos consumption-

108 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 108

led economy where consumer markets are highly fragmented andchanging fast the successful players are those who are able to produce valuein a consistent and cost-effective way The market leaders however go onestep further ndash they constantly seek to differentiate themselves fromcompetitors by offering superior value in the form of new products andservices They are capable of absorbing complexity and mastering theorganizational response to market change

A Radical Approach to Innovation

Organizations can best distance themselves from the competition bychanging the rules of the marketplace This starts with generating insightinto consumersrsquo problems and expectations and then defining them in sucha way that creating the value consumers seek becomes obvious As discussedin the previous chapter this is the desired output of an effectively operatingfirst cell in a demand system To achieve value definition the organizationmay well find itself redefining the consumer needs the industry is focusingon and thus contributing to industry understanding of the value-addingfactors that matter to consumers These might then form the basis of newperformance criteria for companies in that sector Those companies that failto embrace the new criteria may risk losing out

Virgin GroupVirgin Group is an organization that has demonstrated time and again how tobring radically new products and services into the marketplace without beingthe first to market in a particular sector The companyrsquos understanding of thevalue-adding factors that matter to consumers has enabled it to successfullyoperate in markets where it has taken on established giants in a lsquoDavid versusGoliathrsquo battle for consumer loyalty For this reason Virgin has gained areputation as a challenger brand For example Virgin Mobile offeredconsumers a single simple tariff when other operators were confrontingconsumers with an array of complicated tariffs Virginrsquos uncomplicatedapproach won it 17 million customers by mid-2002 and catapulted thecompany into the position of the fifth largest mobile operator in the UK withinthree years of entering the market Virgin Mobilersquos competitors have sincecopied the simple tariff system effectively raising the key performancecriteria for the industry

Other Virgin businesses such as Virgin Atlantic and Virgin One haveimpacted their markets in a similar way When Virgin Atlantic launched its

The Role of Innovation in Value Creation 109

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 109

lsquoUpper Classrsquo seating the idea of offering the large seats and legroom oftraditional First Class for the price of a business class ticket was new andwon Virgin Atlantic a lucrative market share of key international routes VirginOne again demonstrated the benefits of keeping it simple when it introducedthe Virgin One bank account (now known as One) which enabled consumersto manage all their finances including mortgages savings and income froma single account The new type of bank account made its mark in an industrythat had formerly offered consumers a range of banking products and wherecorporate emphasis was on persuading consumers to buy these productsrather than developing products to suit consumer needs Virginrsquos consistentlysimple and consumer-focused approach to innovation in value creation isindicative of a true value-orientation within the organization and also of amanagement culture that makes innovation possible

Organizations such as Virgin Group take the consumer as their startingpoint and not the final destination for their products and services They areless interested in simply building advantage over their competitors andrather keener on providing consumers with a step change in value thateffectively creates a new market The competition is left standing as oldsources of advantage are destroyed and new ones are created

W Chan Kim and Renee Mauborgne two professors from the Frenchbusiness school INSEAD have published extensively in this area and theyuse the term lsquovalue pioneersrsquo to describe the Virgin Group and similartypes of organization (1997 1999ab 2000) These are businesses engagedin what Kim and Mauborgne define as lsquovalue innovationrsquo a process thatmakes the competition irrelevant and creates new markets by focusing onwhat value needs to be produced They cite examples such as CallawayGolf the US golf club manufacturer which in 1991 launched its lsquoBigBertharsquo golf club The product rapidly rose to dominance taking marketshare from rivals and expanding the total golf club market because itsradically new design (the club has an unusually large head) offered playersa way of overcoming the difficulties associated with hitting a small golf ballwith a little golf club head For Kim and Mauborgne Callaway likeCharles Schwab amp Co in investment brokerage IKEA in home productsretail and Wal-Mart in discount retailing illustrates their thesis that thereis a clear link between high rates of business growth and a radical approachto innovation

This stance contrasts with the traditional view that consumers canprovide only limited help in innovative product and service development

110 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 110

as they are constrained by their experience and unable to articulateanything other than incremental ideas

THE ROLE OF NEW PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT IN VALUECREATION

There is a lot of debate around the question how new does innovationreally have to be lsquoNewnessrsquo can be understood in a number of differentways The word lsquonewrsquo is often used in marketing communications forexample in advertisements and mailings or on product packagingHowever in many instances consumers could be forgiven for asking whatmight actually be new about certain products or services Newness is oftendefined by an incremental change to an existing product or service It maybe a barely discernible alteration to the pack size or ingredients base Sucha slight improvement in the value offering might make it lsquonew to thecompany but not new to the marketrsquo

Alternatively the newness element might be more extensive to thepoint where consumers change their purchase behaviour For examplewhen Mars launched its new Celebrations brand the Roses and QualityStreet brands already dominated the marketplace for boxed wrappedchocolates for everyday occasions But Mars had undertaken in-depthresearch into potential consumers and used the resulting insight toposition the new brand as lsquoall your favourite countline products inminiaturersquo The launch of Celebrations succeeded in attracting a youngerconsumer compared to rival brands and Mars captured a significant shareof the UKrsquos pound600 million boxed chocolate market within a short period oftime

In essence product newness is a spectrum carrying increasing amountsof business risk for the organization In their report New Product Managementfor the 1980s Booz Allen amp Hamilton (1982) provide a way of looking atinnovation in terms of product newness They identify six categories of newproduct development as defined by the productrsquos level of newness to thefirm and its perceived level of newness to consumers Their grid displayingthe various categories is shown in Figure 72

It is evident from Figure 72 that the new product developments withlowest risk are those created through cost reduction and brandrepositioning Cost reduction involves the organization in paring down the

The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation 111

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 111

content of the value proposition by a specific amount to save on costWhere the reduction is minimal it may not affect consumer perceptions ofvalue However excessive cost reduction or too many small reductions overtime does become noticeable Brand repositioning represents relativelyhigher risk as it usually involves presenting brand revisions of some form tothe consumer The organization may or may not succeed at realigning thebrand with consumer expectations but it is already familiar withmanaging the brand

New product developments that carry intermediate risk include lineextensions and product improvements The usual strategy here is toenhance consumer value by increasing product choice and productperformance respectively For example Muumlller the fourth largest grocerybrand in the UK has consistently increased the range of yoghurt varietiesto more than 20 in order to drive sales volume and market share A numberof other food brands have chosen to focus instead on product performanceand have altered their recipes to include added vitamins and fibre thusmoving their brands into the functional foods or lsquonutraceuticalsrsquo sector ofthe market

The highest risk new product developments are ones that are both newto the company and new to consumers These are known as lsquonew-to-the-

112 Value Creation

Figure 72 Categories of new product development Adapted from Booz Allen ampHamilton (1982)

P

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 112

worldrsquo introductions The annals of marketing are littered with examplesof unsuccessful new-to-the-world products such as Betamax videotape andClive Sinclairrsquos C5 electric car These new products failed to deliver anysubstantial consumer benefit and were therefore not adopted by consumersThese attempts at innovation were not anchored in any form of meaningfulconsumer insight

Many organizations mistakenly believe that adding more technology toa product or service will result in value-adding innovation However whatconsumers want from technology is new or enhanced value that will extendtheir abilities and provide them with greater ease of use and convenienceSuccessful new-to-the-world innovation succeeds because it represents agenuine breakthrough in delivering a value proposition based on a deepunderstanding of the nature of the value consumers seek This new-to-the-world form of innovation is also known as radical or discontinuousinnovation as referred to earlier The introduction of Mars Ice Cream is anexample of this type of approach

Mars Ice CreamIn the late 1980s ice cream was a price-sensitive seasonal commodity Themarket was large (pound587 million) but stagnant and dominated by Walls andLyons Maid which held 45 and 14 market share respectively Most icecream was vegetable-fat based and generally came in the form of ice-lolliescones and family brick packs Until Mars entered the market in 1988 icecream was viewed largely as a childrenrsquos snack and demographics showed itcould be a shrinking market However Mars identified a gap in the existingmarket for a premium-price branded ice cream It was the first to launch sucha product and gained a lead over other ice cream manufacturers The newproduct was sold in the same outlets that stocked the existing range of Marsconfectionery enabling the company to use the same sales force and existingresources This allowed significant economies and lessened the financialburden of entering a new market

THE ROLE OF BRANDING IN VALUE CREATION

Brands play an important role in the value-creation process and thechanging marketing landscape created by the shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy has already brought forth newthinking about them and their meaning for consumers Initially brandsemerged as a simple means of identifying the manufacturer of a product

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 113

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 113

For example in 1266 in medieval England bakers were required by law toput their mark on every loaf of bread sold so that if there were anydiscrepancies in weight the baker at fault could be traced The practice ofbranding a product with an lsquoidentityrsquo has continued and developed Todaythe brand concept is highly complex having evolved beyond the coreproduct to include various kinds of added value Brands are often depictedas a lsquofried eggrsquo with a functional centre surrounded by layers of lesstangible elements such as reputation pack design advertising guaranteesand so on This view of brands typified the approach of marketers in the1950s and 1960s when brands were seen as lsquolifeless manipulable artefactsrsquo(Hanby 1999) and consumers were seen as passive purchasers

Brand thinking moved ahead slowly until the early 1980s whenresearcher Judie Lannon and psychologist Peter Cooper (1983) expressedthe idea that lsquowhat turns a product into a brand is that the physical productis combined with something else ndash symbols images feelings ndash to producean idea which is more than the sum of the parts The two ndash product andsymbolism ndash live and grow with and on one another in a partnership ofmutual exchangersquo This concept began a process of seeing the brand notjust as the producerrsquos idea of the product but also as the consumerrsquos idea ofthe product giving rise to the notion of brands being co-created byproducers together with consumers

By the mid-1990s the nature of the intangible value inherent in thebrand had evolved to the extent that Harvard professor Susan Fournier(1996) described consumersrsquo relationships with mass brands as able tolsquosoothe the ldquoempty selvesrdquo left behind by societyrsquos abandonment of traditionand community and provide stable anchors in an otherwise changingworldrsquo At the close of the twentieth century John Grant author of theinfluential New Marketing Manifesto (1999) observed that lsquoBrands seem tohave taken on a life of their own They have become quite freestandingideas that take hold and spread So that Virgin can span many markets andViagra can become a potent icon even in markets where it is not yetavailable hellip A brand is a popular idea or set of ideas that people live byrsquo

These quotations by leading marketing commentators demonstrate thechanging way in which brands are believed to operate Today themetaphors used to describe the brand-building process are no longermechanistic but organic in nature in keeping with the discipline of NewConsumer Marketing Brands are now thought of as living entities that

114 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 114

take on a life of their own inside consumersrsquo minds creating somethingknown as a lsquomental modelrsquo Mental models as described in the previouschapter provide insight into how consumers create store recall and relateto brands in everyday life In effect a brand becomes a representation of anindividualrsquos collection of experiences at each of the lsquotouchpointsrsquo at whichthe brand wittingly or unwittingly engages the consumer Theseexperiences provide a mix of rational emotional social and culturalbenefits to the individual consumer If the supplying organization isdefining and creating value effectively then this bundle of complementarybenefits will be delivered through the value-adding factors associated withthe brand A brand is therefore the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition

Brands exist because people want them to exist As Niall FitzgeraldChairman of Unilever commented lsquoEven if the word ldquomarketingrdquo hadnever been invented and advertising was banned across the globe therewould still be brands because it is people who need themrsquo3 For consumersbrands provide a way of making a complicated world simpler Consumersbecome so familiar with them that brands provide a shorthand approach todecision making The dependable predisposition of consumers to purchasespecific brands provides brand owners with assets that offer the promise offuture cash flow It is consumers then and not companies who invest abrand with its value

If this is the case how is it that brands go into decline and die Theanswer is that companies kill them though not always deliberately orknowingly The decline and death of a brand can occur in a number ofdifferent ways for example through organizational arrogance greed orcomplacency Underlying this ebbing away of brand value is the absence ofa value-centric orientation in the organization A value-centric orientationenables the company to know understand and anticipate the valueconsumers are seeking so that it can then focus its value-producingresources on satisfying those needs thereby ensuring that brands surviveThe Barbie doll is one such example

BarbieBarbie began as an innovation and has remained relevant to young girlsthroughout the dollrsquos 40-year history The Barbie doll was created in 1959 andover 1 billion Barbies have been sold to date The brand is worth some $2 billion making it the most valuable toy brand in the world Mattel the

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 115

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 115

American toy giant that manufactures the doll claims the average Americangirl aged between 3 and 11 owns ten Barbies

When Barbie burst onto the scene in the 1960s the doll market consistedmainly of baby dolls designed for girls to cradle rock and feed In contrastBarbie had adult features and represented an independent young womanSince Barbiersquos launch as a teenage fashion model Mattel has worked to keepthe dollrsquos image fresh and to deliver the play value its ever-youngerconsumers demand Every year the company devises about 150 differentBarbie dolls and designs some 120 new doll outfits Barbiersquos image isconstantly updated mirroring the changing role of women in society She nowcomes in a multiplicity of guises from astronaut to army officer to dentist andmany more To reflect the growing diversity of populations African AmericanHispanic and Asian variations were introduced as early as the 1960s

Barbie has survived the challenges of lsquoage compressionrsquo or kids gettinglsquoolderrsquo at a younger age Girls now grow out of traditional play patternsincluding playing with dolls earlier than they did in the past Whereas ageneration ago 12-year-olds might have played with Barbie todayrsquos primeaudience is aged three to five Mattel is meeting this challenge head on byintroducing extensions to the Barbie brand For example Barbie in theNutcracker is a computer-animated video that has generated $150 millionfrom sales The company is dedicated to promoting Barbie as a lifestyle notjust a toy In addition to selling the dolls Mattel licenses Barbie in 30 differentproduct categories from furniture to make-up A girl can sleep in Barbiepyjamas under a Barbie duvet-cover in a bedroom covered in Barbiewallpaper There are even Barbie conventions fan clubs websitesmagazines and collectorsrsquo events To many commentators Barbietranscends the product category and is an icon representing lsquothe face of theAmerican dreamrsquo

Source lsquoLife in Plasticrsquo The Economist 21 December 2002

Building Successful Brands

As the meaning of brands has shifted over time so too has organizationalunderstanding of how to build brands In the production-driven era it wasbelieved that brand building was best achieved solely through marketingcommunications activities (namely advertising) Brand development wasseen as the transmission of messages to consumers the aim being to controltheir purchase behaviour Today brands are built on a much widerplatform that may for example involve alliance partners or staff

116 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 116

hellip through alliances ndash i-mode

i-mode is the most successful mobile data service in the world to date Sinceits launch in Japan in February 1999 i-mode has attracted 353 millionsubscribers (58 of market share) who each pay on average yen1540 permonth for services encompassing 3290 official and 59869 unofficial contentsites This success has been achieved through a value-centric approach to thedevelopment implementation and operation of i-mode services By keepingits offer simple maintaining effective content development and being first tomarket i-mode has gained significant competitive advantage and becomethe object of envy among mobile operators worldwide

Domoco the company behind the i-mode brand whose name is derivedfrom lsquodo communications over the mobilersquo has worked to define and satisfyconsumersrsquo needs through a relevant and appealing brand by forgingalliances with leading content providers The brand is based on theunderstanding that compelling entertainment content drives demand andthe technological aspects consequently take a back seat As TakeshiNatsuno director of i-modersquos strategy department explains lsquoWe neveremphasize words such as internet web browsing and mobile computing toconsumers i-mode users can get various information only with simpleoperations without recognizing they are using the internetrsquo

Putting this philosophy into practice Domoco carefully selects andcontrols lsquoofficialrsquo partner sites on the basis of freshness reliability depth ofcontent and clear user benefit and provides them with key services such as user verification joint marketing and technical assistance Thetechnological capabilities of i-mode allow content providers to chargeusers small incremental fees for the services provided These fees are billedby Domoco and then passed on to the content provider but Domocoretains a 9 commission This business model creates a positive feedbackloop whereby good content and compelling services attract fee-payingusers who in turn attract more content providers For example gamesmanufacturer Badai provides a new animated character every day as i-modescreen wallpaper (the background screen image for i-mode) With over 2 million i-mode users signing up for the service at yen100 per month this strategic alliance nets the company more than pound13 million per annum proving the strength of a partnership approach Similar agree-ments have been made with Sony allowing it to provide Playstation style

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 117

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 117

games over i-mode and Coca-Cola whereby i-mode users can use theirhandsets to pay for and acquire items from individual Coca-Cola vendingmachines

through staff ndash Singapore Airlines

Some companies are distinguished in their marketplace by the level of servicethey offer The way in which their employees deal with consumers becomesthe defining characteristic of the brand In essence the staff are the brandWith a proven profitability record over 30 years Singapore Airlines is one ofthe most successful airlines in the world and is consistently used by travellersand competitors as a benchmark for outstanding performance Key to thissuccess has been the delivery of the brand through the airlinersquos staff

The Singapore Airlines brand is intrinsically linked with the SingaporeGirl launched in 1972 whose serene face has become the heart of thecarrierrsquos advertising campaign No other airline has such a strong brandimage one that has even been immortalized in wax at Madame TussaudrsquosMuseum in London Ian Batey the creator of the Singapore Girl took a riskwhen he proposed that adverts should focus on service at a time when otherairlines were selling their tickets on the theme of safety Batey attributesthe success of the brand to its lsquocombination of silk and steel hellip the ever-changing cutting-edge body side of the brand hellip and the softer soul sideTogether you have a certain Asian humility graciousness and warmth aswell as being extremely fit fast modern and contemporaryrsquo The airlineoperates with a ratio of one flight attendant for every 22 passengers thehighest in the world and well above the industry average

Singapore Airlines has more than 14000 staff located in citiesthroughout the world People from different cultures must work togetherto produce a seamless and positive customer experience To unite thediverse and geographically separated workforce the airline has developed anumber of activities to encourage inter-office communication including avariety of department newsletters and a monthly company-wide internalmagazine A lsquoStaff Ideas in Actionrsquo scheme ensures that new suggestionsare constantly put forward The results of these and many other efforts addup to a staff culture that is vigorously committed to the airline toconsumers and to continuous improvement Staff pride and sense ofownership are evident in the way employees work to uphold the airlinersquosreputation which is built on a well-defined set of corporate values

118 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 118

Emerging Brand Issues

An emerging issue for brand owners and retailers in todayrsquos consumption-led economy is the growing debate about the impact of globalization andthe role of business versus government While this may not appear to belinked to the value-creation process in any obvious way it represents abreaking trend that needs to be monitored for its impact on the kind ofvalue that consumers seek and may be seeking in future Brands areincreasingly the targets of anti-corporation campaigns as is evidenced inthe protests against the World Trade Organization (WTO) in Seattle andGenoa and the boycotting of genetically modified (GM) foods In somecases consumer behaviour towards certain brands has been shown to be amore effective political weapon than the ballot box Shell for examplefound itself at the centre of controversy in 1995 when it sought to disposeof the Brent Spar oil platform at sea Consumers expressed their concern forthe environment by not buying Shell petrol especially in Germany whereShell sales declined by 50 on one day

Although these brand issues may seem far removed from their day-to-day remit marketers need to develop some sort of perspective on them Inseveral cases the monetary value of the value-creation activities of somecorporations exceeds that of a number of nation states An acknowledgedauthority in this area is socio-economist Dr Noreena Hertz She explains inher book The Silent Takeover (2001) how corporations are changing peoplersquoslives society and the democratic process She points out that of the worldrsquos100 largest economies 51 are now corporations and only 49 are nationstates Combined sales at General Motors and Ford are greater than theGDP of the whole of sub-Saharan Africa and Wal-Mart now has a turnoverhigher than the revenues of most states of Eastern Europe

At the heart of the debate about growing globalization and the role ofbusiness versus government lies the issue of trust is consumer marketingacting as a trustworthy agent in the economic system Brands are involvedin the economy and the production of national wealth because as discussedearlier they act as a label of guarantee and trust for consumers and thisvalue-enhancing aspect still plays a major role in motivating purchasestoday A small but demanding minority of New Consumers wants to makeinformed purchasing decisions and they have a growing interest in thecompany behind the brand Their concerns focus on wider societal issues

The Role of Branding in Value Creation 119

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 119

such as environmental vulnerability poverty and economic and politicalinstability and they have a desire to link their purchasing habits with thefuture of sustainable development This represents a significant change inthe kind of value that consumers want and challenges traditional value-creation activities

This wider agenda brings to the fore company reputation Brand ownershave always known that strong brands invite earn honour and reward thetrust of consumers but the signs are that to be a strong brand in the newmarketplace a brand has to demonstrate some form of corporate socialresponsibility The response of business has however been limited Whilemost companies are still trying to understand exactly how this trendimpacts the value creation process Body Shop is an example of a companythat has embraced brand ethics from its inception For many consumersBody Shop is not simply a retailer but a cause worth supporting BodyShoprsquos promotion of lsquobeauty without cruelty to animalsrsquo and lsquotrade not aidrsquopositions the brand as environmentally and socially responsible Othercompanies have developed social responsibility programmes as a means ofachieving profitability for their business and the environment in a way thatreflects the values of society Reputation management cannot howeversimply be regarded as a tactical activity Companies have to find ways ofembedding social responsibility into their organizations As researcherLance Moir (2001) comments lsquoThe best firms in this area ndash such as BPShell Johnson amp Johnson ndash are looking at their business processes in orderto ensure that the pure economic motive is not the sole determinant ofbusiness decisionsrsquo

THE ROLE OF POSITIONING IN VALUE CREATION

The positioning of a brand in the marketplace is a manifestation of where itsits vis-agrave-vis the competition and in the same way that consumers invest abrand with its value they also determine the positioning of a brand Just asthey carry in their minds a mental model of an individual brand they alsocarry a mental map of related brands Knowledge of this can reveal to theorganization the competitive set within which it operates The challengefacing the insight generators in a business is to find the right combinationof tools and techniques to uncover these maps (These issues were discussedin Chapter 6) However having generated this knowledge the

120 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 120

organization can then work to create the value proposition and ultimatelyto deliver it Positioning plays an important role in the value creationprocess because it helps build and sustain the value proposition Moreoverit does so in a way that factors in emotion the great intangible aspect ofbrand building

An example of a positioning map is shown in Figure 73 It shows thekey criteria that consumers use to discriminate between branded conceptsin the eating out market in this case the type of food on offer and theatmosphere of the outlet Consumers will then go on to opt for a lsquoFrenchrsquobrasserie versus a lsquodepartment storersquo cafeteria depending on the type ofeating-out occasion they are planning For example they may becontemplating a meal out with a small group of friends to celebrate aspecial occasion or they may be thinking of somewhere to go on their ownto pick up a snack as they are in a hurry New Consumers are ultradiscriminating and value creation should focus on their perceptions ofvalue which here includes type of outlet speed of service ambience etc

Drawing out the Emotional Message

New Consumers are motivated by the desire for experiences over featuresand benefits and the brand positioning process provides an important way of linking an emotional message to the physical characteristics of the brand Brands touch peoplersquos lives and consumers choose brands forthe emotional values they express as much as anything else The moredeeply embedded the emotions are the more strongly the consumer isconnected to the brand The example of Nike trainers given in Chapter 6showed how particular product features delivered certain benefits whichtogether provided an experience that satisfied a higher-level valuerequirement

Similar research4 carried out on purchasers of womenrsquos fine fragrancesshows in more detail how perceived value delivers an experience forconsumers The study illustrates how certain features of a brand ofperfume in this instance Chanel No 5 are linked with specific perceivedbenefits that satisfy personal values It can be seen from Figure 74 how thebrandrsquos country of origin (France) works as a positive feature providingreassurance to consumers Consumers regard Chanel No 5 as a low-riskhigh-quality purchase because of the trustworthy reputation French

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 121

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 121

perfumes have in the marketplace This feeling of reassurance promotes asense of well-being and feeling good about oneself For Chanel thelearning to be drawn from this is that it is important to retain thelsquoFrenchnessrsquo of the brand as it is integral to the brandrsquos positioning andcommunications strategies

These insights linking the physical attributes of the brand to theemotional benefits they deliver and in some cases to the higher-levelpersonal values that are satisfied through ownership can enable brandowners to be more innovative in their positioning strategies Certain brandowners explicitly use these sorts of insights to drive their value-creationprocesses For example motorbike manufacturer Harley-Davidson buildson the idea of ownership conferring a particular way of life From the bikesto the merchandise to the tattoos consumers see Harley-Davidson as a partof their identity enabling the brand to strongly differentiate itself in themarketplace In the personal computer (PC) sector the iMAC is positionedas a sensual product infused with mystery thereby engendering a warmthfor the brand among consumers For consumers of these brands theemotional switching costs are significant For the organizations behind thebrands their brand positioning is the result of an ongoing strategic process

122 Value Creation

Figure 73 A positioning map of the UK eating-out market

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 122

that informs the creation and delivery of the value proposition It is not theresult of an ad hoc tactical communications campaign

The Positioning Process

To guide the efforts of an organization in the positioning process it is usualto create a simple statement of what the brand is about and how thecommunications strategy should support its market positioning For mostorganizations the ease with which this statement is created is directlycorrelated with the way the positioning process is managed As SergioZyman former advertising VP at Coca-Cola once said lsquoIf you want toestablish a clear image in the minds of consumers you first need a clearimage in your own mindrsquo However this is seldom achieved for a numberof different reasons For instance some organizations seek to includeeverything in the positioning statement attempting to be all things to allpeople Others do not know where to start the process of articulation Yetothers insist on allowing everyone in the organization to have an opinionand try to reflect them all in a concise statement This process needs to bedriven by someone who has clear responsibility for the task resulting in anunambiguous brand positioning In addition the adoption of a simple

The Role of Positioning in Value Creation 123

P

F

B

Figure 74 Mapping brand linkages

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 123

approach (where less is more) and the ability to take a long-term view aidthe successful completion of the task Burberry exemplifies the ability of anorganization to achieve a turnaround in fortunes based on a firmly managedrepositioning process

BurberryIn recent years Burberry has repositioned itself successfully by redefining thevalue consumers are seeking and creating an improved value proposition forthem In the mid-1990s Burberryrsquos unique British heritage and famoustrademark ndash the red black camel and white check pattern ndash was no longerenough to save the dysfunctional retailer Burberry had become over-relianton tired products and by 1997 trading profit collapsed In October 1997 RoseMarie Bravo took over as CEO and began a process of repositioning thebrand propelling it into luxury status Her aim was to turn the staid Britishbrand that was being eclipsed by competitors into an iconic and aspirationalbrand with cross-generational appeal By February 1999 Burberry was a firmfavourite on the catwalks of Milan Burberry designs ranging from the classictrench coat to funky pink kilts fuelled an explosion of accessories also in thetrademark check Since 1998 Burberry sales have doubled and the brand isnow seen as a financial success

The repositioning of Burberry was achieved by having a clear vision inplace Bravo recognized that although Burberry had become stale the public

124 Value Creation

Figure 75 Repositioning Burberry

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 124

still associated strongly with its heritage and quality Under her guidance thecompany began to reposition itself as the authentic British lifestyle brandThis moved it into competition with high-margin luxury design houses such asGucci Prada and Ralph Lauren with the opportunity for superior returns (seeFigure 75)

Burberryrsquos remarkable recovery was achieved through repositioning thebrand changing and expanding the product mix and changing the structureof distribution and sales channels Concentrating on the repositioning of thebrand Burberry retained its four core values (quality classic heritage iconic)and adopted four more (innovation style aspiration modernity) in order tocreate a modern spin to widen its appeal and raise global recognition A keysuccess factor was a coherent communications strategy across all mediaorchestrated to deliver a consistent image worldwide Leading models suchas Stella Tenant and Kate Moss were used to inspire more fashion-orientedadvertising Product design was improved with the input of RobertoMenichetti and then in 2001 Christopher Bailey as chief designer Sponsor-ship of high-profile events such as the Mario Testino Exhibition at the NationalPortrait Gallery and the Burberry Cup a polo match in association with thePrince of Wales reinforced the brandrsquos high class British pedigree

Other activities reinforced the brandrsquos revitalized position For example theproduct mix was expanded to include high-margin accessories childrens-wear and a perfume The range of menrsquos and womenrsquos apparel wasconsolidated distribution was reviewed and retail channels wererationalized As a part of this process a large number of product licenceswere terminated as they were judged to be inconsistent with the repositionedbrand image

THE ROLE OF PRICE IN VALUE CREATION

Price plays a key role in the value-creation process It can for exampleindicate value and quality In the case of a Rolex watch or a Pret A Mangersandwich the premium price reflects the lsquopremiumnessrsquo of the brandSimilarly price can be used to support brand positioning Stella Artois isadvertised as a lsquoreassuringly expensiversquo lager and easyJet occupies a well-defined value-for-money niche in the air travel market In other wordsprice works in combination with other elements of the marketing mix as a signal of value for consumers

Consumer goods companies are coming under increasing pressure toreview their pricing strategies as both consumers and trade customers

The Role of Price in Value Creation 125

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 125

sharpen their focus on value aided in many cases by the power of theInternet in their search for best value The introduction of the Euro andchanging European legislation have added to pricing complexity Whensetting pricing strategies it is important for managers to understand therole that price plays in the value proposition Price is used by consumers as acriterion for evaluating the value of the offer and by supplying organizationsas a competitive tool The effect of the shift from a production-driven to aconsumption-led economy has forced many organizations to replace theircost-plus approach to pricing with demand-led pricing policies

For brand owners price is a significant lever in ensuring that value isdefined created and delivered at a profit Revenue is after all the outcomeof volume multiplied by price (and volume itself is impacted by price)Increases in profitability can be gained by increasing prices reducing costsor increasing the volume sold However it is changes in price levels thathave the biggest impact on profitability due to the gearing ratio whichmeans that a greater amount of the benefit will flow through to the bottomline compared to the other two strategies Volume increases are counteredby variable costs and reducing costs usually applies to values significantlysmaller than turnover

Brand owners must take account of a number of factors when drawing upa pricing plan As depicted in Figure 76 these include internal coststargets and constraints pricing strategy (to be premium or not)competitor pricing strategy and consumer insight The outputs of thispricing decision-making process will impact the business case andinfluence how performance monitoring and scenario planning areundertaken Current pricing is often driven by past events rather than logicand consistency leading to a situation where pricing is inconsistent acrossmarkets For example prices may be set by individual countries or bycorporate divisions acting in isolation from the rest of the organization Asingle company may use several different approaches to pricing in order torespond to short-term or local market needs or it may be that differentprices have been agreed as part of key account management negotiations

The Evaluation of Value

It is not uncommon for prices to be set without reference to the consumerrsquosevaluation of the value proposition leading to a situation where consumers

126 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 126

believe price is out of line that is too expensive or even too cheap Thisincomplete approach to pricing can also undermine brand-positioningstrategies and may potentially damage the brand Furthermore it can leadto a situation where parallel trading develops leading to lost profitopportunities The way to prevent these issues arising is to base pricingstrategy on a rigorous analysis of all the elements inherent in complex pricedecision making Pricing strategy must take account of both theconsumerrsquos and the organizationrsquos evaluation of value as shown in Figure77 Clearly each player makes a trade-off in the value exchange Brandowners bear the costs of defining creating and delivering value and need ahealthy profit margin to remain in business while consumers incur costsassociated with evaluating the value proposition and gaining ownership ofthe brand

Consumers tend to evaluate the value proposition not in terms of theticket price but in terms of relative value that is whether the offer seemsexpensive cheap or fair to them This notion is not new Price as a reflectionof the value placed on a product or service by the consumer was an idea firstarticulated by the Victorian economist Alfred Marshall His beliefs aboutthe effects of consumer preferences on transactions dominated economic

The Role of Price in Value Creation 127

Figure 76 The complex pricing decision-making process Adapted from MarketingImprovements 2002

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 127

thinking until the middle of the twentieth century The concept of therational consumer or lsquohomo economicusrsquo held sway until the 1950s whenthe idea that product attributes other than price might be influencing thepurchase decision was promulgated It was suggested that price mighthave more than one meaning for consumers At about the same time theidea of psychological price emerged The underlying assumption here isthat price has a double meaning for consumers Besides the maximum pricethat they would be willing to pay it is believed that there is also aminimum price for the product to be credible In other words consumershave an upper and a lower price limit in mind

This concept has been refined through further research and pricingtheorists now talk about consumersrsquo lsquoindifference zonersquo The boundaries ofthis psychological zone are marked by a belief that at the upper limit ifsomething is too expensive then consumers will not buy it because theyfeel the price is unjustified while at the lower limit if something is toocheap they will not buy it because they feel the value is suspectUncovering this indifference zone can form the basis of a successfuldemand-led pricing strategy in line with the tenets of the New Consumer

128 Value Creation

Figure 77 The evaluation of value

C

C

CBP

CMP

PP

E

P

P

T

C

E

T

andandS

LSCO

P

MT

z

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 128

Marketing model Ryanair is one example of an organization that takes thisvalue-centric approach to pricing seriously

RyanairRyanair is now the most valuable and profitable airline in Europe It haspowered its way to success by identifying a large under-served customerbase the leisure traveller Ryanair segmented the travel market and onrecognizing that the key values of the leisure traveller are price andpunctuality implemented a strategy to deliver low prices and on-time flightsIn doing so the company evolved a successful low-yieldhigh-volumebusiness model

Ryanair created its value proposition to appeal to the price-consciousconsumer by choosing to compete on routes served by large full-pricecarriers such as Air France and Lufthansa These airlines are highlysubsidized and therefore have little incentive to reduce their operating costskeeping prices to consumers high By removing non-value-added items suchas meals assigned seating and the use of major airports Ryanair was able tooffer prices up to 80ndash90 lower than the flag carriers on numerous routes Asa result it was able to gain market share and brand recognition within eachroute market Ryanairrsquos low cost base also forms a significant barrier tocompetition from larger airlines with high fixed costs

Taking advantage of the deregulation of the European market and thegrowing demand for affordable and reliable air travel Ryanair has created abrand experience that delivers more for less Pricing is managed in real timeFlights booked months ahead of departure are made available at the lowestprices while those booked nearer to the travel date are more expensive Tokeep processing costs down consumers are also encouraged using financialinducements to book via the airlinersquos website rather than over the phone

This second cell of the New Consumer Marketing model is an essentialbuilding block in a demand system It enables the organization to movefrom defining value to creating and communicating that value effectivelyand eventually to delivering it While the process of value creation isdependent on the interplay of new product development brandingpositioning and pricing it is ultimately the role of innovation thatunderpins its success

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Innovation provides a way of creating new value-producing resources orendowing existing ones with an enhanced potential for yielding profit

The Role of Price in Value Creation 129

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 129

bull It is the consumer and not the competition that lies at the heart ofinnovation Providing consumers with a step change in value thateffectively creates a new market can leave the competition standing asold sources of advantage are destroyed and new ones created

bull Organizations that work to reduce marketplace complexity areconstrained to an incremental approach to innovation Those thatchoose to absorb it can then work to create options and learn as anorganization resulting in more radical forms of innovation

bull Brands have become the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition

bull Brands are no longer built just through advertising to consumers theyutilize other stakeholders including alliances and staff

bull The positioning of a brand in the marketplace is a manifestation ofwhere it sits vis-agrave-vis the competition and in the same way thatconsumers invest a brand with its value they also determine thepositioning of a brand

bull Price represents the evaluation of the value proposition and the effectof the shift from a production-driven to a consumption-led economy isforcing organizations to switch their strategy from a cost-plusapproach to demand-led pricing policies

130 Value Creation

09 Baker chapter 7 FINAL 5603 239 pm Page 130

The process of delivering value to a specified audience through the mediaand channels of their choice

Delivering value = communicating and distributing the value created

Watchword = agility

In the consumption-led economy value delivery is undergoing rapidchange for two important reasons the emergence of the New Consumerand the proliferation of media and channels This changing marketingenvironment poses new challenges for organizations particularly in respectto how they manage media and channel choices customer service and thesupply chain To be effective organizations must ensure that theirstrategies for each of these key areas are aligned with the overall strategy oftheir demand system As with the first two cells this means having a value-centric orientation in the business

Value delivery is concerned with how consumers get to own the productor service It involves the way in which the offer is presented thetransaction is handled and after-sales service and support are providedThe third cell of the New Consumer model focuses on communicating anddistributing value in order to achieve maximum consumer responsivenessand satisfaction The key to success here is organizational agility

THE ROLE OF AGILITY IN VALUE DELIVERY

For a company to be agile it is to be capable of operating profitably in acustomer environment of continually and unpredictable changing customeropportunities

(S Goldman et al 1995)

Value Delivery 8

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 131

In the new marketplace of proliferating media and channel choicescharacterized by an increasing number of new products and services and adecline in organizational ability to forecast sales organizations need to beable to respond rapidly and flexibly to consumer requirements Thisdemands a capability to change gear and immerse the organization in newopportunities on a continual basis The phrase that resonates withmanagers is lsquothe need to develop organizational agilityrsquo

The notion of organizational agility has its origins in flexiblemanufacturing systems where it was believed that automation alone wouldconfer this capability Over time a wider business application has emergedlargely through developments in supply-chain management Currentthinking defines organizational agility as lsquoa business-wide capability thatembraces organizational structures information systems logistics processesand in particular mindsetsrsquo1 The agile organization creates competitiveadvantage for itself by being able to adapt its people and processes to thecontinually changing needs of the marketplace increasingly with the supportof technical innovation The challenge for consumer-serving companies is tofuse people and process approaches in order to achieve cost-effective valuedelivery Competitive advantage today lies in recruiting and motivating theright people while at the same time constantly improving business processesWhen either element people or process fails to embrace change theorganization is less nimble and thus less able to compete successfully

Organizational culture plays a significant role in achieving andmaintaining such agility The fusion of people and processes can only takeplace in an environment conducive to effective change managementCreating an appropriate organizational culture involves a number of factorsincluding for example the management of employees the sharing ofknowledge and the choice of performance indicators These factors areconsidered in more depth in the next chapter but are raised here as they canbe seen to have an impact on organizational agility in the cases offered in thischapter

New Consumer Marketing promotes organizational agility byencouraging a value-centric orientation in the organization A businessthat is focused on defining creating and delivering value profitably is abusiness that can lsquoturn on a sixpencersquo and exploit opportunities

The Veterans Agency (VA) formerly known as the War PensionsAgency provides a useful example

132 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 132

The Veterans AgencyThe Veterans Agency (VA) is responsible for assessing and paying pensionsto disabled servicemen and women and their spouses in the UK It wasestablished in Elizabethan times (when soldiers were paid pound10 a year) butwas launched as an executive agency in the mid-1990s In November 2000when the UK Prime Minister Tony Blair announced that surviving formerprisoners of war in the Far East were to receive a pound10000 special paymentfrom the Government the VA was faced with the task of tracking downthousands of individuals dispersed across the world As an agileorganization one that had its people and processes focused on consumerresponsiveness its project plan enabled 14000 claims to be processed inless than three months

For many organizations adopting a market-responsive approach tovalue delivery is a daily challenge Building on organizational strengthssegmenting customers in a meaningful way and utilizing IT to meetspecific objectives are a few of the many ways in which organizations canimprove their flexibility and customer responsiveness Lastminutecom is agood example here

LastminutecomIn 2001 the web-based travel company handled some 800000 onlinetransactions which included travel hotel and restaurant bookings and giftpurchases Around 20 of the pound124 million transaction value was generatedoutside its key markets in the UK and France Lastminute constantlyredesigns its website (see Figure 81) brings in new suppliers and improvesthe customer experience Its investment in IT is high due to a concentrationon web design connectivity voice-recognition software and a sophisticatedCRM system that segments 5 million customers on a database according to their purchasing habits The CRM system enables Lastminute to emailspecial offers to selected customers based on the companyrsquos knowledge oftheir previous purchases Since its launch four years ago the company hasgrown quickly through the acquisition of rivals and the involvement of majorplayers (eg BAA Sony Music Deutsche Telekom France Telecom andIntel) who have bought equity stakes in the company

THE ROLE OF MEDIA AND CHANNELS IN VALUE DELIVERY

New Consumers live in a global marketplace where they are increasinglyoffered lower prices greater convenience and more choice This is in large

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 133

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 133

part due to the proliferation of media and channels which organizations useto market their brands products and services Media strategies have to dowith how the value proposition is communicated while channel strategieshave to do with how it is transacted The role of media and channels is ofvital importance in delivering the value proposition as it relates to how andwhere the exchange of value takes place With todayrsquos empoweredconsumers able to go to market more easily than ever before organizationscan no longer afford to manage media and channels as if they were stand-alone entities

In the production-driven era media and channels were distinguishablefrom one another For instance television was considered a medium andretail was considered a channel Now in the consumption-led economymedia and channels have become closely related and even interchangeableFor example the retailer is rapidly becoming the media ownerrsquos biggestcompetitor This is evident in the fact that the lsquobig fourrsquo food retailers ndashTesco Asda Safeway and Sainsburyrsquos ndash currently account for 70 of

134 Value Delivery

Figure 81 Lastminutecom

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 134

household food expenditure and the media issue facing brand owners iswhether to advertise on television or run a gondola end promotion as ameans of reaching a large number of relevant consumers with anappropriate message or offer For many brand owners the answer is to focuspromotional resources in-store thereby communicating directly withconsumers at the point of purchase as opposed to communicating withthem through another medium that is not so closely tied to the point ofpurchase

The convergence of media and channel choice is the result of the comingtogether of two trends progress in brand thinking and the inexorablemarch of developments in IT As outlined in Chapter 7 a brand used to bethought of as a lifeless manipulable entity that was built throughadvertising Today it is seen as a dynamic asset that lives in the consumerrsquosmind an experience of the value proposition that is created throughmultiple touchpoints where the organization wittingly or unwittinglyengages the consumer

As media choices have expanded and become more sophisticatedopportunities for dialogue with the consumer have grown in a stepwisefashion Supplying organizations and consumers are no longer restricted tocommunicating with each other by telephone facsimile or post or throughface-to-face encounters with in-store staff or sales representatives Newtechnologies have given rise to personal and interactive media such asemail the Internet personal digital assistants (PDAs) mobile phones and the next-generation smart phone In the process of enrichingcommunication these developments have expanded the role of IT IT isnow not only concerned with the exchange of information but also withinteraction and with the promise of integration in the near future Wheredialogue can take place so the option to transact also arises and the use ofmedia and channels become interwoven

New Consumer Marketing demands an approach to media and channelsthat builds on the benefits of media and channel integration First amongthese benefits is the ability to develop organizational agility and thusenhance consumer responsiveness The new range of media and channelchoices available offers organizations the opportunity to lower costsprovide better service and personalize the value proposition The collectionand analysis of previously unimaginable kinds of data through increasinglysophisticated technologies makes this possible

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 135

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 135

Making the Most of Media Choices

The proliferation of media choices is causing tectonic shifts in marketingthinking about how they can be used to build brands Media decisions inthe production-driven era were about how to advertise to consumerswhich was a largely one-way exercise motivated by the desire to controlconsumer response In a subsequent phase more interactive media choicessuch as direct response media (eg direct mail offers and direct responsetelephone lines) were used to encourage more continuous communicationbetween consumers and the organization In the consumption-led economythe aim is connectivity or the development of a shared understanding thatcomes from ongoing dialogues experiences and shared values that developbetween a marketer and consumers (Schultz and Lindberg-Repo 2002)The challenge for marketers today is selecting the most effective andefficient combination of media from the wealth of interactive and non-interactive media options The goal is to ensure that consumers have aperfect experience across whatever media they use to interact with theorganization

Connectivity enables brand owners to build deeper and more enduringrelationships with New Consumers These relationships are developedthrough the empowered engagement of both participants in a two-wayinteraction process one that is exemplified by Nokia

NokiaThe Nokia Game is a multimedia adventure-cum-espionage role-playinggame which Nokia has been running for the last four years in 18 countriesattracting over half a million players in 2001 Clues are given out to players ina range of ways including text messaging voicemail email the Internet (seeFigure 82) TV radio and the press The game is based on the lsquofuture ofcommunicationrsquo and it educates players on future technologies and applica-tions Players have to find out about everything from different ringtones andmenu systems through to GSM and GPRS in order to progress from onestage of the game to the next

More than just a form of play the Nokia Game is a marketing platform thatcreates Nokia brand advocates by being particularly relevant and credible toa specifically defined audience The game gets consumers highly involved inthe brand by engaging and rewarding them for their attention and therebycreating a virtual Nokia community In effect players give Nokia permission tomarket the companyrsquos products to them In this way the various levels ofdialogue ndash texting voicemail press for example ndash enable a mutual

136 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 136

understanding and reciprocal generation of the value proposition Playersgain knowledge and excitement from the game while Nokia benefits frombuilding knowledge of its consumers The game grows as the network ofplayers grows and the bonds between Nokia and the players develop

lsquoGaining permissionrsquo is a facet of media strategy that has emerged withthe coming of the consumption-led economy New Consumersrsquo highlyfragmented lifestyles and time pressures mean that they have less time tomeet all the demands on them They are not the passive subjects ofmarketers but discerning and demanding customers Part of the valueexchange in the consumption-led economy relates to the value theseconsumers get out of investing their attention As Herbert Simon NobelPrize winning economist has noted lsquoInformation consumes attention hellip awealth of information creates a poverty of attention hellip the only factor thatbecomes scarce in a world of abundance is human attentionrsquo Permissionmarketing (Godin 1999) has therefore developed out of the problemsassociated with gaining the attention of consumers Where a marketerreceives the consumerrsquos permission the conscious effort required by theconsumer to pay attention more often than not results in dialogue betweenthe two parties

The challenge for brand owners in making the most of media choices hasan external and an internal component Externally they are aiming to

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 137

Figure 82 The Nokia Game

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 137

replicate the experience of a one-to-one relationship where the consumerfeels they are being spoken to by the same person in every encounter Theinternal challenge is to generate data across the various media to create asingle unified view of the consumer This single view ensures thatregardless of the medium or channel through which the consumer interactswith the organization the consumer is recognized and the history of theirrelationship is remembered Achieving this single view demands clearobjectives in the management of data issues that are explored later inChapter 9

From a consumer perspective a perfect experience that replicates thefeeling of being spoken to by the same person in every brand encounter ismost likely to be delivered through a media-neutral strategy Theintegrated brand communications strategies adopted by Volkswagen andStella Artois provide good examples Volkswagenrsquos multimediamulti-agency approach has helped the brand double its new car sales and valueshare within six years The strategy which includes the use of PR directmarketing online marketing cinema and radio led directly to 151000extra sales and pound199 billion extra revenue for VW UK

Stella ArtoisStella Artoisrsquo communications strategy cleverly exploits knowledge ofconsumer lifestyles and the popular medium of film Research into thebrandrsquos largely young male (aged 18ndash34) consumer base had revealed that ahigh majority visited the cinema or rented videos on a regular basis At a timewhen most other lager beers were using sport to communicate their brandvalues Stella adopted the theme of film Its communications strategyincluded advertisements that possessed a cinematic feel film sponsorshipon Channel 4 film events around the UK and on-pack promotions forBlockbuster videos The task of making this theme work across a number ofagencies fell to the marketing manager who appointed a lead agency foreach cycle of the strategy The specialist agencies ndash in advertising salespromotions media buying consumer and trade public relations for examplendash then activated the element of the strategy within their particular mediumCrucial to this way of working is that everyone buys into the same definition ofthe brand echoing the need for brand clarity discussed in Chapter 7

As well as integrating media choices across channels some brand ownersare pioneering integration across a number of brand owners to deliver aperfect experience for consumers The aim of these brand owners is to cross-

138 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 138

promote their own operations and develop long-term marketingpartnerships Disney is one company that has pursued such an integrativeapproach

DisneyDisney has a number of cross-media deals with global partners such asHome Depot and McDonaldrsquos In 2001 the DIY chain Home Depot signed athree-year tie-up across Disneyrsquos ABC network ESPN sports channel andLifetime channel The deal was reported to be worth pound65 million to Disney Aspart of the agreement Disney is launching a range of branded childrenrsquospaints in Home Depot and has also agreed to purchase Home Depot productsfor its own operations Disneyrsquos ten-year deal with McDonaldrsquos successfullycross-promotes Disney films through childrenrsquos Happy Meal promotions inMcDonaldrsquos restaurants

Making the Most of Channel Choices

In the same way that the proliferation of media choices is causing a shift inthinking about how best to communicate the value proposition theexpansion of marketing channels is challenging thinking about how bestto transact value The brand owner must devise a channel strategy that isappealing to its target consumers and profitable to its business This mayinvolve the use of a single channel or a combination of channels The brandowner must choose from an ever-widening range of direct channels (egInternet telephone facsimile) and indirect channels (eg retailersdistributors and service providers)

As with media strategies the goal of channel strategies is to ensure thatthe consumer has a perfect experience across all the channels used One ofthe biggest issues for organizations here is to minimize channel conflictInteractive channels offer organizations the opportunity to transactdirectly with consumers faster and at a lower cost than most non-interactive channels do Consequently many organizations have decided tocut out the middlemen and have ceased using traditional intermediariesFor example call centre technology allows insurance companies such asDirect Line to offer and transact the value proposition by dealing withconsumers directly over the telephone This obviates the need for expensivenetworks of insurance brokers and keeps the premiums low creatingmutual benefit for both seller and buyer

The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery 139

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 139

While a strategy of lsquodisintermediationrsquo may appear seductive at firstsight channel strategy development should be based upon the optimumcombination of channels necessary to provide the most effective and efficientmeans of delivering the value proposition Different channels offer differentadvantages (see Figure 83) Norwich Union for example sells financialproducts directly to consumers through independent financial advisers(IFAs) The Guardian newspaper produces and sells newspapers throughintermediaries and also offers an online news service free of chargeThorntonrsquos the confectioner transacts its value proposition through anetwork of shops by phone fax and post and via the Internet

It is crucial for organizations to understand why their consumers preferto use one channel rather than another why for example some favourremote interaction while others prefer transacting face-to-face Identifyingand satisfying the channel preferences of New Consumers is particularlychallenging as these may change according to the type of purchase or thetime at which the transaction takes place For instance consumers may becontent to book a weekend trip to Europe using the online facility of adiscount airline but may prefer completing the transaction for a lengthiersummer trip abroad in a face-to-face encounter Above all New Consumersare looking for organizational agility ndash a supplier who can adapt to theirdiffering needs on different purchasing occasions Channel strategydecisions therefore need to be reviewed regularly and adjusted asappropriate

Another popular channel strategy in the consumption-led economy isreintermediation or the introduction of new types of intermediaryExamples of this include the use of web-enabled information agents alsoknown as lsquoinfomediariesrsquo who carry out information searches on behalf ofprospective purchasers Some infomediaries not only research products andservices on behalf of consumers but also manage sales transactions and post-sales service agreements Autobytel for example providesinformation about car prices and purchase availability and will evenfacilitate the sale and organize delivery This one-stop-shop approach isattractive to many New Consumers who have little time to shop aroundfor best value Some even engage lsquopersonal shoppersrsquo such as TenUK to actas their own purchasing agents across a number of sectors

Organizations such as Conciera which offers clients a technology platformon which to transform their businesses in line with this buyer-centric

140 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 140

philosophy believe that this is where the future of channel strategydevelopment lies ndash that by acting as the consumerrsquos partner and providingaccess to a new set of information tools across new media and telephonechannels agent-based businesses will create and deliver new forms ofsuperior customer service and consumer value

THE ROLE OF SERVICE IN VALUE DELIVERY

The arrival of the consumption-led economy has elevated the role of servicein the creation and delivery of the value proposition Increasinglyorganizations are recognizing service as a source of competitivedifferentiation Service excellence is seen as a key profitability driverSouthwest Airlines (SWA) and First Direct are examples of organizationsthat have used service to enhance the consumerrsquos experience of the valueproposition SWA has transformed cabin service into a form ofentertainment that is regularly promoted by word-of-mouthrecommendation Similarly First Direct now offers a remote bankingservice that consumers have warmed to and are keen to advocate In boththese cases the consumerrsquos experience of the brand is delivered through theactions and attitudes of staff In effect the service delivered by staff is thebrand

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 141

Figure 83 This Royal Mail advertisement shows the extent of channel choice

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 141

Despite wide acknowledgement of the value of providing high levels ofservice many customer-care activities fail to meet buyer and supplierexpectations New Consumers are more demanding and sophisticated intheir expectations of service and organizations need to be able to respondaccordingly This requires an ethos of consumer responsiveness within thebusiness and New Consumer Marketing proposes a living demand systemto enable this to flourish The NCM model acknowledges the importanceof employeesrsquo contribution to value creation and delivery this was exploredin Chapter 7 and is emphasized further in Chapter 9

Creating a Service Strategy

To optimize the role of service in the delivery process it is useful to breakservice down into its three component stages pre-transaction transactionand post-transaction The pre-transaction elements of service relate tocorporate policies or programmes involving written statements of servicepolicy and the planning of strategies for dealing with different types ofconsumers at various points in their relationship with the organization Thetransaction elements comprise the customer service variables that aredirectly involved in the delivery of the value proposition such as productavailability order cycle times service ambience and so on Post-transactionelements have to do with the support consumers receive once they takeownership of the product or service These may include warranties partsand repair services complaint procedures loyalty clubs and so on

To ensure a consistent approach across these three stages of the serviceencounter exemplary organizations create a service strategy As suggestedby Professor Martin Christopher in his book The Customer Service Planner(1992) service strategy involves the identification of a service mission inwhich the organization articulates its service pledge and the setting ofservice objectives These objectives should link back to the insightgenerated by the organization into the nature of the value consumers areseeking and the consequent analysis of opportunities available They willthus serve to highlight the importance of service quality variables such asreliability responsiveness assurance and empathy Service strategy canthen be refined for different consumer segments as different clusters ofconsumers will be looking for different service packages Once a servicepackage has been developed for each segment service programmes can be

142 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 142

implemented The Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company is extremely focused oncreating exactly the right service levels for its customers

The Ritz-Carlton HotelThe Ritz-Carlton Hotel Company has created a value-centric service strategythat is implemented across the world by its 22000 employees The companywas awarded the Malcolm Baldridge National Quality Award in 1992 and1999 and is one of only two companies to have received the award twiceThis is a considerable achievement given that the company operates in anindustry where high staff turnover rates are the norm The companyrsquos strategyis characterized by an emphasis on generating employee satisfaction basedon a belief that this results in customer satisfaction which in turn deliversgreater profitability The strategy is pursued in a number of ways Forexample each day every member of staff has a meeting with their supervisormanager the vice-president or the chief executive at the start of their shiftAlthough the meeting lasts only 15 minutes it covers all the essential itemsfrom which VIPs are staying in the hotel to staff suggestions about serviceimprovements What sets this pre-shift briefing apart from the way other hotelchains organize is that every employee of the company across the worlddiscusses the same subject on the same day Each day the briefings focus onone of 20 basic service principles standards that were laid down when thecompany was formed The following are a few examples

No 10 ndash Each employee is empowered For example when a guest has aproblem or needs something special you should break away from yourregular duties to address and resolve the issueNo 11 ndash Uncompromising levels of cleanliness are the responsibility ofevery employeeNo 12 ndash To provide the finest personal service for our guests eachemployee is responsible for identifying and recording individual guestpreferences

Source Tony Mosely lsquoAre you being served The route to good customercarersquo Consumer Policy Review NovDec 2002

Recruiting and Motivating Staff

Acknowledgement of the importance of people in delivering service has ledto a greater interest in the recruitment motivation and retention of staffResearch shows that when employees identify with the norms and values ofan organization that reflect a commitment to customer service they are less

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 143

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 143

inclined to leave their jobs This reduction in employee turnover serves tostrengthen the organization It promotes a culture where service valuesbecome embedded in the way things are done and are more easily transmittedto successive generations of employees Recruitment is therefore of crucialimportance to organizations In order to attract and retain the highest qualityrecruits ndash those who share the organizationrsquos values and will make a majorcontribution to its future success ndash organizations have to market themselvesto potential recruits as employers of choice With changing demographicsthreatening the supply of young people in the West the so-called lsquowar fortalentrsquo (Michaels et al 2001) is an everyday reality for many companies

At the Ritz-Carlton recruitment is carried out using a number oftechniques Psychometric tests are used to identify candidates with theright work attitude and by matching their test scores against those of thebest performing staff the company is able to allocate jobs according toindividual suitability New employees undergo a minimum of fiveinterviews but provisional job offers are normally issued within 48 hours ofthe first interview so that good people are not lost to the competition

The Ritz-Carltonrsquos approach provides a rich contrast with the way Pret AManger recruits its staff Following application and interview Pret AMangerrsquos prospective candidates are paid to work for one day in one of thecompanyrsquos stores Staff already working in that store then make the finaldecision as to whether the candidate is employed This has the effect of

144 Value Delivery

Figure 84 Pret A Manger

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 144

empowering staff and ensuring only people with the lsquoPret attitudersquo (seeFigure 84) who are able to demonstrate they would uphold Pret AMangerrsquos values and ethos are taken on In fact only about 20 ofcandidates pass this exacting test

Staff motivation is another important part of retaining employees Mostorganizations use employment benefits and training and development toreward and motivate their employees As Singapore Airlines demonstratesthese need to fit with the values and culture of the organization and betailored to improving the overall value-centric ethos and practice of theorganization

Singapore AirlinesSingapore Airlines employs about 8 of Singaporersquos working population andis consistently voted one of the top local employers The training ofemployees is comprehensive ndash the programme for new stewardesses hasbeen referred to as a lsquodebutante boot camprsquo involving four months of socialas well as operational skills training Career development opportunities arestrong and staff are regularly appraised as a means of improving theirperformance In an effort to retain trained staff who have taken maternityleave the company operates a lsquoFlying Momrsquo scheme which enablesstewardesses with long service records to spend more time at home with theirfamilies

Other successful organizations have evolved similarly unique approachesto motivating staff which often depend on cross-functional collaborationbetween marketing operations and human resources management It isimportant that there is alignment between the value proposition offered toconsumers and that offered to employees For example Countrywide PorterNovelli (CPN) is a successful business-to-business PR consultancy thatoperates what it calls the 4Is culture

bull Imagination ndash making our work memorablebull Irreverence ndash challenging the status quobull Improvement ndash a little better every timebull Initiative ndash making the first move

This articulation of principles does not simply take the form of a brightlogo to be used in communications but provides a framework formanaging delivery of the value proposition both internally and externallyIt represents the distinctive advantage CPN believes it offers clients and

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 145

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 145

guides the recruitment training and promotion of staff internallyUnusually the director of personnel and development and the marketingdirector sit down together and discuss joint implementation of the internaland external marketing strategy on a regular basis

Empowering Employees to Live the Brand

A New Consumer Marketing approach to service requires the highestlevels of consumer responsiveness and service providers have a greatopportunity to make this a differentiated part of the value propositionWhat New Consumers are looking for is an individual response to theirparticular requirements and those on the so-called front-line of a businessare in a position to customize the experience for them The way employeesfeel about their job often defines the way they view the brand and the waythey communicate it to consumers For this reason many organizations seethe empowerment of employees as a business priority

The secret of success here is not so much a mechanistic prescription or aseries of instructions to staff but rather a dialogue where organizationshelp staff understand what the brand stands for and seeks to accomplishand what their individual role is in achieving the brand objectives It isimportant that employees receive information about organizationalperformance and that they are rewarded for contributing to it Whilelsquoliving the brandrsquo is a common corporate goal few organizations actuallyachieve it A MORI survey carried out in 2002 reported that 30 of UKemployees are brand neutral or are not interested in their companyrsquos brandwhile a further 22 are brand saboteurs actively working against thebrand culture This means less than half of the countryrsquos employees can beconsidered as brand champions who will spread their companiesrsquo brandvalues Of these 33 would talk positively about the brand if asked andonly 15 would talk positively about the brand spontaneously

Formal communication programmes that aim to market the brandinternally are used by many organizations to endow staff with an enhancedpotential for yielding profit For example Land Rover launched the latestRange Rover with a series of coordinated events for employees dealers andthe press Part of the strategy was the placement of the car in the TombRaider movie Around 20000 employees at Land Rover were invited toprivate screenings of the film and encouraged to bring their families

146 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 146

creating great word-of-mouth marketing British Airways when facedwith orchestrating 50000 articulations of the brand through its 50000staff worldwide launched the lsquoPassion for Servicersquo initiative It isessentially a training session to teach staff about brands and the BA brandin particular Having spent pound1 million developing Club World and pound200 million implementing it the internal marketing programme is a wayof protecting and enhancing that investment Brand clarity as discussedearlier in Chapter 7 is a necessary precondition of making staffempowerment work

Staff empowerment requires trust and courage on the part of theorganization as employees are given autonomy to interpret the brand in away that is both meaningful to them and their job and to consumersTesco for example empowers staff to respond to legitimate customercomplaints by giving them the authority to replace products or issuereimbursements without having to refer to supervisors In doing so thecompany demonstrates a respect for their employeesrsquo ability to assesssituations and manage customers In a similar move Abbey National hasgiven its front-line staff the power to take decisions such as reimbursingcustomers who feel they have been charged unfairly In both these cases bynot passing problem resolution up the chain of command consumers aremade to feel valued and respected The issue is dealt with quickly savingexpensive company time and ensuring customer satisfaction

Speed of response in resolving consumer problems is all-important asNew Consumers are becoming more marketing literate and less easy toplease Those whose issues are not dealt with swiftly and satisfactorily havethe confidence and wherewithal to make their views known across a rangeof media (as described in Chapter 2) Studies have shown that while up to98 of dissatisfied customers never complain when they receive poorservice 90 will not return to the disappointing vendor in future as aresult of the poor service Furthermore consumers who are dissatisfied arelikely to tell at least ten others about their poor service experience whereasa good service experience will be related to only three others This makes itdoubly hard for organizations to gain a reputation for good service and allthe more reason for an organization to work hard to maintain a goodreputation

The processes within an organization that are concerned with creatingdeveloping and maintaining an internal service culture and an orientation

The Role of Service in Value Delivery 147

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 147

that enables the organization to achieve its service goals are usuallymanaged as part of an internal marketing strategy The fundamental aim isto develop awareness of the value proposition sought by both internal andexternal customers and to remove functional barriers to organizationalperformance The organization must ensure that every employee whetherthey are directly or indirectly frequently or infrequently in contact withexternal customers contributes to the delivery of a superior valueproposition Despite the fact that for many organizations internalmarketing programmes are a formal part of the way value is transactedthere is no consensus on how these programmes should best beimplemented This is because the importance of internal marketing hasonly recently been acknowledged and because of the debate that has arisenabout exactly who within an organization should have responsibility for itThis topic is returned to in Chapter 9

THE ROLE OF TECHNOLOGY INTEGRATION IN VALUEDELIVERY

The integration of technology into service delivery is transforming manybusinesses and Petcareco Limited is a useful example of this Petcareco is aone-stop pet resort and care centre based in Washington Tyne and Wearwhich looks after pets (mainly cats and dogs) while their owners are onholiday (see Figure 85) As part of the service all sorts of creature comforts ndashfrom TVs to sofas ndash can be added to a petrsquos temporary lsquoapartmentrsquo Ahydrotherapy pool and a bespoke vet service complement the pet careservices The business is staffed by a team of dedicated animal lovers who aresupported in their work by a sophisticated but easily manageable range oftechnology For example handheld devices are used to carry daily pet careschedules and a back office system records data on every pet enabling thecompany to instantly recognize and recall any previous lsquoguestrsquo history anduse it to make the pet feel welcome and at home The aim is to ensure thatevery animal gets the right service at the right time in the right place

The aim of integrating technology into service delivery is to optimizethe use of available media and channels Again the goal is to ensure thatthe consumer has a perfect experience across all media and channels usedIntegration in todayrsquos complex and demanding marketing environmentrequires moving away from the conventional approach to media and

148 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 148

channel strategy which has been to have different specialist agenciesmanage various elements of the marketing mix while consumer enquiriesare dealt with at an external call centre

When call centres first appeared in the UK they were held up as thefuture of customer service By offering a central point of customer contactthe call centre was seen as the answer to a comprehensive approach tocustomer service It is estimated that there are currently around 6000 callcentres in Britain and the number is expected to rise to 8000 by 2005 TheUK call centre industry now employs almost 500000 people or 17 ofthe working population However laudable and popular an idea the callcentrersquos reputation has tarnished over time due to adverse publicity anddreadful consumer experiences In too many cases these centres have beenexposed as a means of cutting costs rather than improving service levelsSome organizations however go to great lengths to make their call centresas lsquohumanrsquo and customer-friendly as possible Virgin Mobilersquos call centre islocated at its headquarters in Wiltshire The centre is light airy anddivided into sections staffed by different teams that work in light-heartedcompetition with each other Eggrsquos communications centre in Derby hasalso employed new concepts in lighting colour and space Its teams workin mini-communities and comfy chillout zones create a positive workingenvironment A pleasant working environment helps keep staff motivationhigh and this in turn has a positive impact on customer satisfaction

The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery 149

Figure 85 Petcareco Limited (formerly known as Triple lsquoArsquo)

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 149

The unique feature of these two companiesrsquo call centres is that they usetechnology as a means to an end to enhance the delivery of the valueproposition When organizations focus on technology as an end in itselfvalue-centricity is unattainable The challenge is deciding where and howto integrate technology into the implementation of service strategy Thedecision-making process is made easier where the organization has a serviceblueprint or map of its service processes2 This effectively reduces serviceencounters ndash or all points of contact between the consumer and theorganization ndash to a series of interrelated steps and sequences as the examplein Figure 86 shows It offers an opportunity to review service strengths andweaknesses and plan resource allocation more appropriately as well as tocommunicate responsibilities throughout the organization

Multichannel centres are now emerging as the next generation ofcontact centre Call centres are becoming web enabled and consumers canmake contact with the organization according to their channel preferenceIn some cases in the US for example call-centre staff are being replaced bytechnology that plugs into the software that runs the companyrsquos websiteVirtual call-centre operators or V-Reprsquos who can talk to and understandcustomers are taking their places The range of options now available to anorganization affords a high level of flexibility as the case of Nestleacutedemonstrates

NestleacuteNestleacute is testing this new approach to multichannel customer managementThe company is seeking to manage and execute everything ndash from thecreation of one-to-one consumer communications through to generating andresponding to phone fax post and email enquiries ndash from a dedicatedcommunications centre The project has been piloted in France at alsquorelationship centrersquo set up by McCann Relationship Marketing Paris (MRM)a division of McCann Erickson World Group Nestleacutersquos advertising agency

Nestleacute has promoted details about how to contact the company on productssince the 1960s However in 2000 this became a more forceful invitation forFrench consumers to make contact when Nestleacute introduced its Nestleacute enDirect scheme This initiative along with Club Nestleacute a club for consumersforms the basis of Nestleacutersquos consumer relationship activity in France Both activities are used to encourage consumers to communicate with the company and provide their personal details Nestleacute uses this data to segment consumers and to tailor one-to-one promotional and marketingactivity

150 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 150

Fig

ure

86

Cus

tom

er c

onta

ct c

omm

unic

atio

ns a

nd re

latio

nshi

p pr

oces

s S

ourc

e D

r Ray

mon

d P

ettit

New

Jer

sey

Inst

itute

of T

echn

olog

y

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 151

To manage all these activities more effectively Nestleacute has taken theinnovative step of creating a multichannel communications centre under oneroof All forms of enquiry made by French consumers to the company ndash anestimated 200000 a year ndash are handled by MRMrsquos relationship centre Inmoving response handlers alongside advertising creatives customerintelligence experts new media branding and management consultants theconsumer is put at the heart of the business Nestleacute foresees a number ofbenefits from this new approach It is more flexible and allows betterintegration between different communications channels as well as givingcontrol over the quality of all one-to-one consumer communications

Source Meg Carter lsquoTowards a closer relationship with customersrsquoFinancial Times 11 March 2002

THE ROLE OF THE SUPPLY CHAIN IN VALUE DELIVERY

As we have seen New Consumers demand goods and services through anever-changing mix of media and channels Meeting their requirements forfaster better and cheaper service and delivery depends heavily on themake-up and robustness of the supply chain Only those organizationswhose supply chains are capable of responding rapidly to volatile demandwill thrive in this post-quake business environment

Increasingly business theorists are talking about developing demand-led supply chains to deliver the required level of consumer responsivenessThis means moving away from the simplistic approach that characterizedsupply-chain management in the production-driven era Then supplychains were relatively unsophisticated extending forwards throughdistributors and retailers to the consumer and then stretching backwardsthrough component assemblers to the suppliers of the raw materialsSupply chains were linear and supply-chain management was to do withmanaging delivery trucks and storage sheds (or so it seemed) Over the pasttwo decades supply chains have grown in complexity and many nowresemble lsquowebsrsquo or lsquonetworksrsquo of collaborative relationships The evolutionof the supply-chain network has been accelerated by the application of ITThe impact of the Internet in particular has enabled widely distributedoperations to be brought together at a relatively low cost

This network or lsquoextended enterprisersquo approach to managing thesupply chain has developed in response to the downward pressures on pricearising from global overcapacity growing competition and more powerful

152 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 152

customers (issues that were discussed in Chapter 3) Falling market pricescompel organizations to turn their focus inwards and to concentrate onreducing costs Over the past decade rationalization within the supplychain has been a major source of cost savings The idea of lsquoleanmanufacturingrsquo promulgated by James Womack3 at MIT in the early1990s has attracted considerable interest Based on the production systemused in Japanese-owned automobile manufacturing plants particularlythat of Toyota the idea was later extended to form the wider concept of thelsquolean enterprisersquo The focus of this approach is the elimination of waste andthe creation of competitive advantage through lower cost prices Criticsargue that it only works well where demand is relatively stable and hencepredictable and where the requirement for variety is low In todayrsquos morevolatile markets where consumer requirements stipulate more productvariety and where the ability to forecast demand is diminishing a differentapproach is called for

Competing through the Supply Chain

As pointed out by Professor Martin Christopher of Cranfield School ofManagement nowadays it is supply chains rather than companies thatcompete in the marketplace (Christopher and Peck 1997 Christopher1998) One of the clearest examples of an organization that competesthrough its supply chain is Dell

DellMichael Dell eschewed the use of conventional channels to distribute his PCsand focused instead on direct sales Consumers can select their own PCconfiguration online at Dellcom and within just 90 minutes their personallycustomized lsquogrey boxrsquo will roll off the factoryrsquos production line Dellrsquos suppliershave built their factories close by and inventory is down to four days makingDell the number one computer service provider in the world When Dell didattempt to break into established retail distribution channels in the early1990s it all went badly wrong and the company pulled out after suffering itsfirst ever loss The direct sales model offers Dell a structural advantage thatrivals IBM and Hewlett-Packard do not have

Source Amanda Hall lsquoThe boy who lived the American dreamrsquo The SundayTimes 1 December 2002 Michael Dell and Catherine Fredman (1999)Michael Dell (2002)

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 153

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 153

Acceptance of the philosophy that it is supply chains that compete withone another rather than companies has led organizations to acknowledgetheir strengths and weaknesses and to outsource those activities theybelieve can be performed more cost-effectively by others The supply chainhas in effect become a confederation of closely linked specialists whosecooperative behaviour creates a highly differentiated value chain

Often it is not technology that is the barrier to making these complexpartnerships work but lack of trust As highlighted in Chapter 3 thesharing of information and expertise previously considered confidential isessential in building the degree of trust necessary for collaboration Anumber of major retailers have already begun the process of implementingthis collaborative approach to strategy making setting up private web-based exchanges requiring the integration of both partiesrsquo internal systemsto share data and ideas Building these closer relationships betweenbusinesses can be very beneficial Some estimate that the introduction of e-procurement systems founded on joint working arrangements can shortenorder fulfilment cycles by 70 and cut administration costs by 50ndash70 Itis even believed that inventory costs can be halved ndash a significant benefitconsidering that holding stocks of unsold goods is a primary cost escalator

Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression

Consumer responsiveness is dependent on superior levels of insightinnovation and agility As far as the supply chain goes the focus has to beon the elimination of time rather than of waste The aim of timecompression in supply chains is to shorten the total pipeline time betweenthe procurement of materials and payment for the finished goods In mostorganizations it takes longer to procure make and deliver the finishedproduct to the customer than the customer is prepared to wait giving riseto a mismatch in expectations that is known to as the lsquolead-time gaprsquoNormally organizations overcome this problem by carrying lsquobufferrsquo orsurplus stock The amount of inventory is typically based on a forecast ofwhat the market will require However forecasting is a far from accuratescience As Martin Christopher says organizations that manage to closethis lead-time gap lsquoneed neither forecasts nor inventory making themmore responsive to customer demand and able to reduce the cost offinancing the pipelinersquo (Christopher 2001)

154 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 154

Establishing partnerships with other members of the supply chain is one ofthe most critical ways in which organizations can develop a more responsivesupply chain This usually involves a rationalization of the supplier base as itis easier to develop closer relationships with a smaller number of strategicsuppliers rather than trying to manage closer relationships with hundreds orthousands of suppliers These relationships are characterized by synchronizedoperations and the transparency of information The Zip Project at Marks ampSpencer is an example of this new way of working

ZipZip is a joint venture between Marks amp Spencer and Desmond a long-standingsupplier to Marks amp Spencer based in Northern Ireland that was created as partof a wider plan to enable Marks amp Spencer to escape its well-publicized woes ofthe late 1990s The company had to face up to the fact that it was not deliveringfashion fast enough to the shop floor and its prices were not competitive Zip isdesigned to provide Marks amp Spencer with greater competitive advantage inthe area of childrenrsquos clothing through improved supply-chain managementMarks amp Spencer has made cost savings by changing its traditionalrelationships with suppliers eliminating areas of duplication and increasing thespeed with which its goods come to market Traditionally suppliers created thegoods and brought them to the buying teams at Marks amp Spencer who thendecided which goods had the greatest appeal Marks amp Spencer has nowbrought much of this design function in-house

Under the new arrangements Ziprsquos London office is responsible for thedesign work and fabric development while samples are developed inNorthern Ireland Samples are costed and different suppliers includingDesmond itself then bid to produce the finished garment The advantage ofthis approach is that Zip retains the copyright on the designs and theirmanufacture can therefore be shifted from supplier to supplier as required oras capacity becomes available ndash Marks amp Spencer uses 120 differentsuppliers in 28 countries Having greater consistency and control overproduction realizes savings that can be passed on to consumers The biggestadvantage however lies in the reduced amount of time it takes to get adesign on to the shop floor the organization can react quickly to thefickleness of pre-teen fashion Traditionally this process has taken 28 weeksZip aims to reduce this to 12 weeks The potential rewards are great aschildrenrsquos wear accounts for about 10 of Marks amp Spencerrsquos non-food salesworth between pound300 and pound400 million

Source Martin Waller lsquoMampS takes a fresh route to childhoodrsquo The Times7 September 2002

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 155

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 155

Another way of closing the lead-time gap is through rationalizinginternal processes The key here is to remove all non-value-addingprocesses lsquoValue-adding timersquo activities create a benefit for whichconsumers are prepared to pay lsquoNon-value-adding timersquo activities do notcreate customer benefit and are a drain on company resources One of themost effective means of creating a value-adding culture within theorganization is to focus externally on the value proposition that consumersare seeking Guinness achieved this in the mid-1990s by basing anoverhaul of its business processes on insight generated into what consumerswanted from the company

GuinnessIn the mid-1990s Guinness was one of the few large brewers not to own anylicensed premises (pubs and clubs) in the UK The company relied onconsumer demand to persuade its trade customers (those who owned theroutes to market largely other brewery companies) to stock its productsGuinness stout held sales remarkably well in a declining market for darkcoloured beers but in the early 1990s competition was heightened by thelaunch of rival stouts such as Murphyrsquos and the rising popularity of importedbottled beers Faced with the threat of more vigorous competition Guinnessundertook a review of its business and as a consequence set aboutimproving its performance in the marketplace

Guinness invested heavily in a brewery upgrade to ensure the quality of itsproduct but was dissatisfied with the results of its insight generation activitywhich revealed that consumers were often disappointed with the quality of apint of Guinness consumed in different outlets Guinness like other cask

156 Value Delivery

Figure 87 Guinnessrsquo lsquoPerfect Pintrsquo

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 156

beers is a lsquoliversquo product and needs to be stored and handled carefully Whereprocedures are not followed the result is an experience of variable quality forconsumers What consumers were looking for was expressed as lsquothe perfectpint in every pubrsquo

Guinness used this insight to inform internal decision making about whichprocesses needed to be in place to ensure consistent delivery of the perfectpint enabling them to create a cross-functional approach to businessGuinness worked with its partners in the supply chain to educate the pubtrade about the importance of looking after the product and serving itcorrectly This was a three-stage operation known as lsquothe pour the settle thetop uprsquo and it provided a focus for training in-house staff in pubs and clubs(see Figure 87) Consumers were also targeted with an award-winningadvertising campaign that extolled the virtues of waiting for a perfect pint Thiscoordinated range of activities based on a clear strategy propelled Guinnessto achieve its highest ever share of the total draught market

Source Presentation by Julian Spooner at Cranfield School of ManagementJanuary 1996

A third method of improving consumer responsiveness through supply-chain management is by maximizing the potential of each customerinterface The aim is to be able to capture information on probable demandfrom consumers as close to the final point of consumption as possible Areal breakthrough in data collection has been achieved by linking buyersrsquoand suppliersrsquo information systems through initiatives such as EfficientConsumer Response (ECR) Quick Response (QR) and Electronic DataInterchange (EDI) ECR an attempt to bring about more effectivecollaboration across all supply-chain members is most closely associatedwith the grocery industry where it is designed to integrate and rationalizeproduct assortment promotions new product development andreplenishment across the supply chain QR was developed in the USA tohelp clothing businesses compete against lower priced imports By takinga total supply chain view of an industry QR makes it possible tounderstand overall performance and the causes of poor performance and toidentify opportunities for improvement EDI a technology forbroadcasting demand data was the forerunner of web-enabled systems andis still widely used by larger suppliers

The advantage of systems integration among supply-chain partners isthat it enables the different parties to act on the same aggregate data in areal-time environment Each partner can gain a clearer picture of consumer

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 157

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 157

demand than they would otherwise be able to obtain independently andgreater consumer responsiveness can be achieved throughout the supplychain The benefits of such collaboration within knowledge managementand operational systems are especially important in developing keyaccounts4 as these normally command a higher strategic value

The importance of being able to act on real-time demand data becomesmore acute the more volatile the market This is particularly the case withsuppliers of fashionable or weather-dependent goods and services whosecompetitive survival depends on rapid reactions to unpredictable marketchanges For an organization like Britvic which markets and manufacturesits own brands such as Tango as well as canning and distributing Pepsi-Cola in the UK demand for soft drinks can double on hot days Insituations where the product has a limited shelf life or the organization hasan obligation to meet high trade-customer service levels stock-outs cannotbe tolerated Access to instant accurate and complete demand data iscritical to the running of flexible manufacturing operations that aim toensure constant availability Indeed availability becomes a more criticalmeasure of consumer responsiveness than productivity in todayrsquosmarketplace

While some suppliers favour a strategy of rapid stock replenishment as away of managing the amount of inventory they carry others follow astrategy of postponement or delaying the finishing or value-addingactivities until customer orders have been received The clothingmanufacturer and retailer Zara for example purchases a high proportion ofits fabric in an undyed (or grey) state On receipt of incoming orders thefabric is dyed patterned and finished by a fully owned subsidiary which isa supplier to Zara as well as to other manufacturers By working in thisway Zara is able to originate a design and have the finished goods in itsstores within weeks as opposed to the traditional industry model whichmay take up to six months

Advances in supply-chain thinking are driving the concept moretowards the notion of demand-chain management which is totally inkeeping with New Consumer Marketing (Gattorna 1998) By its verynature a supply chain focuses on making the flow of product from source toend user as efficient as possible In contrast a demand chain focuses onmeeting market needs in the most relevant timely and cost-effective wayIn other words a demand system sees the lsquopipelinersquo as driven from the

158 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 158

consumer end placing the emphasis on consumer responsiveness ratherthan vendor efficiency The differences between these two approaches aresummarized in Table 81

Table 81 Agile supply chain management versus a traditional approach

This third cell of the New Consumer Marketing model marks the pointat which the symbiotic relationship with the consumer is developed Thevalue that has been defined and created is finally delivered to themarketplace and exchanged with the consumer While the process of valuedelivery is contingent on the interplay of media and channels servicetechnology integration and the supply chain it is the role of organizationalagility that is of fundamental importance

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Organizational agility is an enterprise-wide concept that demands anability to change gear and immerse the organization in newopportunities on a continual basis

bull Media choice is to do with how the value proposition is communicatedwhile channel choice is about how it is transacted However at

The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery 159

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 159

[Text not available in this electronic edition]

touchpoints where consumers can be engaged in dialogue theopportunity for transaction arises leading to the interrelationship ofthe two as an integrated media and channel strategy

bull The goal of a multimediamulti-channel strategy is to ensure that theconsumer has a perfect experience across all the media and channelsused Each time the consumer comes into contact with a brand theyshould feel like they are talking to the same person

bull Service is an important differentiator in the marketplace The way inwhich service staff deal with consumers simultaneously creates anddelivers value at the point of consumption In effect the valueexperience is the brand

bull The recruitment motivation and retention of staff are key elements ina successful service strategy

bull Empowering employees takes trust and courage on the part of theorganization as employees are given autonomy to interpret the brandin a way that is both meaningful to them and their job and toconsumers

bull Supply chains play a major role in determining consumerresponsiveness and competitive advantage In the new marketplacesupply chains must become demand-led

bull Consumer responsiveness requires a supply-chain focus on theelimination of time rather than of waste Availability becomes the keymeasure rather than productivity

160 Value Delivery

10 Baker chapter 8 FINAL 5603 242 pm Page 160

Seven elements of organizational lsquoDNArsquo make a demand system viable

Managing a demand system is fundamentally different to managing asupply system It requires turning the supply chain on its head and takingthe consumer as the organizationrsquos starting point and not its finaldestination As established early on in this book New Consumers aresophisticated and demanding and they inhabit an interactive rather thana static marketplace To succeed in this challenging and ever-changingmarketing environment organizations must adopt a value-centricorientation By focusing on delivering the value consumers actually needand want organizations can make the radical transition from operating ina production-driven to operating in a consumption-led economy

The New Consumer Marketing model (see Figure 91) draws onlearning from the living sciences and conceptualizes the marketing processas three organic cells of a living demand system Having discussed thenature and function of each of the three cells ndash value definition valuecreation and value delivery ndash in Chapters 6ndash8 it is now appropriate toexamine how the cells work together and what organizational elementscontrol and inform their performance

The way in which these cells collaborate to keep the demand systemalive and effective is dependent on the make-up of the lsquoorganizationalDNArsquo In biology DNA is the material that carries an organismrsquos geneticinformation such as that needed by cells to make enzymes Enzymes areimportant because they control the processes that occur within cells Theydetermine which chemicals are made in a cell and what the cell will do Theinformation about which enzyme to make and when has to be permanentlystored in each cell so that it can be drawn upon as necessary The

Demand System Management 9

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 161

relationship between biological DNA and enzymes provides a goodmetaphor for understanding the elements that inform and trigger whathappens in a market-driven organization

Organizational DNA consists of seven elements that fall into two typesthose that are people related (intuition culture and structure leadershipvision and values employees) and those that are process related (knowledgemanagement planning measurement) Each element carries informationto the three cells value definition value delivery and value creation Thisinformation enables each cell to optimize performance thereby ensuringthe competitive survival of the organization as a whole Operating aneffective demand system requires an understanding of the role and impactof all of these elements in order that they can be expertly managed Themain challenges facing New Consumer Marketing (to meet the needs ofbrand owners and retailers to embrace the New Consumer to develop realconsumer responsiveness and to arrest the crisis in marketing) reinforcethe imperative of addressing these business aspects in a systemic manner

162 Demand System Management

13

13

13 $

Figure 91 The New Consumer Marketing model

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 162

New Consumer Marketing breaks out of the binary thinking that has seenbusinesses swing between a focus on process and a focus on people Insteadit combines the two by identifying the key processes and relationships thatunderpin the organization and using them to help the organizationbecome as adaptable and competitive as possible

The seven elements of organizational DNA are

bull Intuitionbull Culture and structurebull Leadership vision and valuesbull Employeesbull Knowledge managementbull Planningbull Measurement

THE ROLE OF INTUITION IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

The mechanistic approach to management so characteristic of theproduction-driven era was based on rational systems that appealed to thereasoning skills of managers These systems were presented as if there weresome underlying algorithm for doing business Today management isabout engaging both our rational and our creative abilities Increasingimportance is being placed on corporate intuition and imaginationIntuitive ability plays a major role in demand system management bycontributing to the development of insight innovation and organizationalagility

In the definition creation and delivery of the value proposition thecapacity to instantly understand other peoplersquos behaviour thoughtswishes feelings and beliefs is a means of gaining additional perspectiveThrough intuitive understanding managers and staff can perceive thetruth of things without reasoning or analysis They can put themselves inthe consumerrsquos shoes and see the benefit of taking a particular course ofaction without needing any rational validation

Anthropologists believe that this capability is linked to the early socialdevelopment of humans particularly with our ability to interact with andinfluence others The ability of managers to understand mental states ndashboth their own and those of others ndash is known as Theory of Mind Theory of

The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management 163

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 163

Mind has been described as lsquoa start-up kit for learning about the mentalworldrsquo1 It is a kind of lsquomind readingrsquo which psychologists refer to asintuitive mentalizing Encouraging intuitive input in a demand systemstimulates innovative thought and a sense of empathy with consumersThis can lead to improvements in the market relevance of the valueproposition and thus enhancement of the consumerrsquos experience of thebrand

Most successful entrepreneurs have strong intuitive mentalizing skillsand they use these to put their lsquogood ideasrsquo about what consumers want intothe marketplace They are able to imagine what the value propositionshould look like and to marshal the organizationrsquos resources to deliver it Inheavily managed organizations this ability is often repressed Take forexample Woburn Safari Park part of the Woburn estate in BedfordEngland where the importance of intuition is fully recognized

Woburn Safari ParkAt Woburn Safari Park this elusive lsquosecond sightrsquo has been developed underthe leadership of chief executive Chris Webster Ten years ago the park wasin severe decline but a remarkable turnaround in performance has beenachieved through some radical thinking On the basis of gut feel the decisionwas taken to introduce a junior board of 11-year-olds to shadow the parkrsquos

164 Demand System Management

Figure 92 Woburn Safari Park

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 164

management board For the family-oriented attraction engaging the input ofyoung imaginations in strategy making was a wise move children of coursedo not hold back in asking the whywhy not questions Benchmarking visitsare made by the junior board to rival attractions and the childrenrsquos ideas areassimilated into the way Woburn Safari Park defines creates and delivers itsvalue proposition

Intuitive mentalizing is a very necessary ability in the delivery of serviceAs discussed in Chapter 8 front-line staff need to be able to demonstrateempathy with consumers if they are to convey consumer value in aconsistent and personalized way Where intuitive ability is lacking theorganization will have difficulty in predicting the behaviour of consumersreading their intentions and understanding their motives and emotions Atworst the organization will suffer from lack of commitment andmotivation to please The key challenge is to find ways of unleashing thepotential for corporate intuition Intuition is an ability not a function itmust be embedded within the organization and cannot sit isolated in onedepartment The development of corporate intuition lies in making it ashared approach to defining creating and delivering value and this canbest be achieved through the organizational culture and structure

THE ROLE OF CULTURE AND STRUCTURE IN DEMANDSYSTEM MANAGEMENT

Culture

Organizational culture is one of the most intangible elements of a demandsystem Its roots reach deep into the collection of beliefs and assumptionsthat are commonly held in the organization and its influence onorganizational performance is all pervasive Organizational cultureprovides a guide to acceptable internal behaviour summarized as lsquothe waythings are done around herersquo Culture therefore underpins a value-centricbusiness strategy

Trying to understand organizational culture can be as difficult for thoseinside the organization as for those outside it A useful tool for surfacingthe behaviours and artefacts that characterize a particular organization isthe culture web developed by academic researchers Professor GerryJohnson and Kevin Scholes (1992) This is shown in Figure 93 The

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 165

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 165

culture web makes explicit the rituals of organizational life ndash the dailyroutines that are often taken for granted but which all employees mustlearn when they join the organization It captures the stories told aboutpeople ndash the lsquoheroesrsquo and the lsquomavericksrsquo ndash whose fate symbolizes what theorganization is all about The culture web also notes the symbols thatconvey meaning within the organization ndash the use of logos the allocationof offices and car parking spaces etc

Depicting cultural aspects in this way helps in identifying themanagerial groups closely associated with the essence of organizationalculture a power structure that may not accord with the official companyorganigram The formalized ways in which the organization works ndash usingcommittees or working parties for example ndash also reflect the powerstructure and send signals throughout the company and its supply chainabout what is deemed important In many organizations there is anincongruity between the values that are promoted and the behaviours thatare rewarded A familiar example is the sales team that is told to maximizecustomer profitability while being rewarded on the basis of unit sales Theteam is tempted to offer discounts and inducements to customers as the

166 Demand System Management

Mythsand

stories

Routinesand

rituals

Controlsystems

Organizationalstructures

Powerstructures

Symbols

Paradigm

Figure 93 The cultural web of an organization Adapted from Johnson and Scholes(1992)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 166

overriding message is lsquomaximize volume rather than profitsrsquo Each of theseaspects that make up the cultural web can be characterized for anindividual organization As Figure 93 shows at the heart of culture is anunderlying paradigm within which the organization operates made up ofthe core beliefs assumptions and values that matter to it

Closely related to culture is the climate within the organization Thishas been summed up by researchers as lsquothe feeling in the airrsquo that one getsfrom walking around a company (Clark 1999) Organizational climate canbe created by employees observing what happens to them and what goes onaround them and drawing their own conclusions about the organizationrsquospriorities and what it values Employees then set their own prioritiesaccordingly about where they should focus their energies andcompetencies which in turn feed back into the organizational climateOrganizational culture and climate are therefore dynamic and sensitive tomanagerial influence Tesco is an example of an organization that hasmastered the management of these intangible aspects and used them toguide the development of a value-centric strategy

TescoIn 1992 the issue of organizational culture formed one of the foundationblocks of Tescorsquos lsquoFirst Class Servicersquo initiative which has since propelled thecompany to a dominant market position It represented a shift from thecompanyrsquos previous command-and-control approach to management Eachmember of Tescorsquos then 130000 staff was empowered to look aftercustomers in the way they thought best At the same time managers wereencouraged to recognize staff achievements and to set an example bytreating them as individuals so that they would in turn treat customers asindividuals This initiative was highly successful not least because staff weremade aware through internal marketing programmes that the averagepotential lifetime spend of a Tesco customer was significant amounting toaround pound90000

Source lsquoTesco Clubcard Foreverrsquo case study H Peck Cranfield School ofManagement 2002

There are however pitfalls in encouraging everyone in the company tothink in the same way which can easily happen when everyone is focusedon the same goals The danger is that the organization can fall into the trapof approaching every problem no matter how different in the same wayWhat is required is a management body that supports an innovative

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 167

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 167

culture one that encourages staff to think and respond differently but thatis nonetheless focused on the organizationrsquos vision and informed by itsvalues A value-centric orientation within the organization ensures thesedifferent ways of working are still legitimate Dell is one organization thatmanages its organizational culture very effectively

DellDellrsquos innovative culture supports risk taking and learning from failure AsMichael Dell says lsquoto encourage people to innovate more you have to makeit safe for them to failrsquo Dell achieves this by creating an internal culture thatquestions the status quo and encourages smart experimentation At Dellfailure is seen as a learning experience and is typically considered animportant milestone on the road to achieving success The nature of thebusiness means there is little relevant history for it to draw upon forcing theorganization to create its own response to the challenges it faces Dellmanagers also embrace an experimental attitude to decision makingSometimes it is not possible to wait for the relevant data before making adecision Under these circumstances managers are encouraged to make thebest possible decisions based on experience intuition available data and anassessment of risk

Source Amanda Hall lsquoThe boy who lived the American dreamrsquo The SundayTimes 1 December 2002 Michael Dell and Catherine Fredman (1999)Michael Dell (2002)

Tesco and Dell have used organizational culture as the basis ofcompetitive advantage Organizations that do not heed the importance ofmanaging internal culture effectively can fall prey to strategic drift andbecome increasingly incapable of self-renewal and self-determination Ineffect organizational culture determines business fate It is critical to thesuccessful implementation of a demand system that the prevailing culturein the organization supports and drives the development of insightinnovation and agility ndash the competencies that lie at the heart of each of thethree cells of the New Consumer Marketing model

Structure

The culture of an organization is embodied within the structure of theorganization Traditional vertical organizations which are hierarchicallystructured and functionally oriented work to optimize individual

168 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 168

functions at the expense of the entire business and the relationship with theconsumer Hierarchical structures work well when the marketingenvironment is stable and demand is predictable Now that the certaintiesof the production-driven era have been replaced by the uncertainties of theconsumption-led economy flatter horizontal organizational structures areemerging

These flatter horizontal structures enable organizations to be moreresponsive by speeding up decision-making processes and encouragingcross-functional collaboration which helps maximize consumer value andoperational cost-effectiveness Value-centric organizations draw keyemployees together in autonomous multidisciplinary teams to focusresources around value definition creation and delivery Often these teamsare temporary enabling the organization to combine and recombine assetsaccording to the nature of the opportunities that arise These are firms thatregard the organizational whole as greater than the sum of its parts

However this does not mean that organizations cannot grow big Tescofor example is one of a small number of organizations that has succeeded inbuilding the virtues of smallness into a large organization one that nownumbers around 200000 employees The company achieves this in partby having a shared understanding of what the business is aiming for Thisdraws from the companyrsquos clearly stated mission ndash lsquoto continually increasevalue for customers to earn their lifetime loyaltyrsquo ndash and its corporatevalues These values are embedded into the organization through a varietyof HR practices that focus on appraisal and reward systems

The strength of less hierarchically structured organizations lies not justin what they achieve as a single entity but in the power of the network theybuild around them through joint ventures strategic alliances andpartnerships This is the concept of the lsquoextended enterprisersquo and its successdepends on a new type of logic one that demands openness and cooperation(with consumers customers suppliers and competitors) The extended ornetworked enterprise places greater emphasis on the role of leadershipvision and values

The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management 169

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 169

THE ROLE OF LEADERSHIP VISION AND VALUES INDEMAND SYSTEM MANAGEMENT

Leadership

Leadership in organizational management is more important than everbefore in this post-quake business environment Businesses must aligntheir organizational philosophy and practices with the realities of theconsumption-led economy How an organization is led and managed inthis time of transition is a key differentiator in the marketplace Whilethere is no standard formula for what makes an effective leader NewConsumer Marketing demands a number of essential leadership skills2

First among these skills is the ability to engage others in the businessrsquosmission Leaders like Howard Schultz whose Starbucks business grewprofits by 92 to $1812 million on sales of $3 billion in 2001 have to beable to engage their employees in providing exceptional service tonumerous consumers every day Starbucks for example serves 20 millionpeople a week across 5000 outlets Key to achieving a dedicated workforceis the ability to communicate the corporate vision effectively to allstakeholders with a distinctive and compelling voice Internalcommunications form the most important part of this task and marketersare well placed to manage them as the essence of the internalcommunications process is similar to that of the external communicationsprocess It is also important for strategic reasons that both processes arealigned and marketers possess all the relevant skills for managing this

Secondly effective leadership provides focus inspiration and meaningwhich need to be communicated to everyone within the organization Themeasure of a leaderrsquos effectiveness can often be seen in the way he or shemanages this communication process Powerful communicators are goodat telling stories utilizing the potency of metaphors and language KjellNordstroumlm and Jonas Ridderstraringle the Swedish economics experts who co-authored the best-selling book Funky Business (2000) suggest thatlsquocommunicating a vision not only involves repetition and a carefullydistilled message it demands the ability to tell a story True leaders areCSOs ndash Chief Storytelling Officersrsquo

Senior managers at TGI Fridayrsquos restaurants have been telling the samestories for many years many of them based on the original stories told byfounder Dan Skoggins These work-related stories serve to convey the

170 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 170

vision and ethos of the company The lsquoemployee cloak theoryrsquo for examplesays lsquoYou were hired for your personality When you put on your uniformdonrsquot let it become a cloak and hide yourself behind it You are notexpected to be a robot in fact we believe our success comes from ourinteraction with the guests Work hard have fun make moneyrsquo

The third essential leadership skill required for New ConsumerMarketing to succeed is integrity including a strong set of personal valuesA sense of virtuousness is vital because organizational leaders become thede facto keepers of their companyrsquos vision and values In todayrsquos moretransparent business environment they need to be able to inspirecommitment among employees This will not be forthcoming whereprofessional integrity is lacking as a number of CEOs who havetransgressed the boundaries of honourable behaviour have found Carelessremarks made in public that appear to denigrate the companyrsquos vision andvalues may be seized upon by the media making the task of motivatingemployees much harder

Finally it goes without saying that business leadership demands anability to grasp the importance of the tectonic shift that has taken place inthe marketing environment This in turn implies a steadfast ability toweigh a number of factors and make appropriate decisions to ensure theorganization operates effectively and efficiently in defining creating anddelivering the value consumers are seeking

Vision

All organizations need a shared idea of why they exist and what they aremeant to achieve Vision and values work to support the organizationrsquosmission by providing answers to those key questions lsquowhere are we goingrsquoand lsquohow are we going to get therersquo Answering them becomes more of animperative in todayrsquos volatile marketplace This is because vision andvalues play an important part in realizing a value-centric orientation Theyforce the organization to think strategically about the long term whileproviding a framework for coping with turbulence in the short term Witha strong vision and firm values in place senior managers can delegateresponsibilities with more confidence local managers can get a clearerpicture of how to approach decisions and front-line staff can be guided incustomizing the value proposition for consumers

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values 171

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 171

The purpose of having good leadership is to create and regularly updatethe corporate vision and direct the organization towards its realization Inorder to provide unequivocal direction the business vision needs to beclear distinctive memorable motivating and meaningful to both staffand consumers Microsoftrsquos original vision was very strong (lsquoa computer onevery desk and in every homersquo) as is Disneyrsquos (lsquoto make people happyrsquo) andthat of the International Red Cross (lsquoto serve the most vulnerablersquo) The testof a strong vision is to see if people can recognize the organization from itsvision statement Many organizations either have no vision or have a visionthat is weak that is to say it is unclear too complex or simply irrelevant

It has been estimated that making a business vision work is 5 creationand 95 implementation Activating the vision starts at the top of theorganization and is a process that must involve all employees It is not untilpeople can see the vision in terms of what it means to them that it starts tobecome embedded within the organization This draws on the ability of the leader to communicate to employees the meaning of where theorganization is heading and what their role in this journey will beMarketers need to play their part by managing internal communicationsprogrammes effectively in order to support the organizational leadershipand to clarify and reinforce employee understanding Only then can visionbe translated into relevant and achievable strategies

Values

Values are a powerful and omnipresent part of organizational lifeAcademic researcher Milton Rokeach defines values as enduring beliefsabout preferable ways of behaving and a value system as an enduring wayof organizing those beliefs (1973) In the New Consumer Marketing modelcorporate values support the implementation of the corporate vision Theymake up the integral beliefs that guide organizational behaviourMoreover as their definition suggests values are not fashion items to bechanged on a regular basis values should stand the test of time SingaporeAirlines is one company that understands this well

Singapore AirlinesSingapore Airlines has six core values which support its mission statementlsquoWe are a global company dedicated to providing air transportation servicesof the highest quality and earning good returns for shareholdersrsquo Although

172 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 172

these words are rooted in operational and financial performance marketinghas transformed the airline into Fortune Magazinersquos most admired airline in2002 The key to Singapore Airlinersquos achievement are these core values (seeTable 91) which permeate every area of business strategy By translatingthese values into actionable and measurable practices within theorganization the company is able to build value-centricity and give realsubstance to its brand The airlinersquos employees see themselves as a part ofthe brand and this is reflected in their work performance adding significantvalue to the consumerrsquos experience

Table 91 Singapore Airlinesrsquo core values

1 Pursuit of excellence We strive for the highest professional standards in our workand aim to be the best in everything we do

2 Safety We regard safety as an essential part of all our operations Wemaintain and adopt practices that promote the safety of ourcustomers and staff

3 Customer first Our customers are foremost in our minds all the time We gothe extra mile to exceed their expectations

4 Concern for staff We value our staff and care for their well-being We treatthem with respect and dignity and seek to provide them withappropriate training and development so that they can leadfulfilling careers

5 Integrity We strive for fairness in all our business and workingrelationships

6 Teamwork We work with pride as a worldwide team to achieve successtogether

Where management action is not aligned with corporate values thevalues become meaningless as demonstrated in the fall from grace ofindustry giants Enron and Andersen in 2002 An organizationrsquos values arethe principles that the company abides by and is willing to enforce they arenot simply the words printed on the pages of company brochures It is allvery well drawing up carefully crafted values statements and codes ofpractice but these become pointless if employees are permitted tocontravene them Actions speak louder than words and an organizationrsquosvalues should be seen as non-negotiable minimum standards

The Role of Leadership Vision and Values 173

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 173

Business adviser and best-selling author Hugh Davidson pulls togetherthe role of leadership vision and values in his model of the lsquocommittedenterprisersquo (2002) This is shown in Figure 94 and is based on the formula

Committed customers + Motivated employees = Satisfied resourcefinanceproviders

Davidson believes that an enterprisersquos vision and values bind these threeconstituent parties (customers employees resource providers) byproviding future direction and governing everyday decision making andbehaviour Through vision and values the needs of the three parties arealigned and they are able to move forward together Davidson expressesthis through the use of a visual symbol that dates back to Roman times theThree Legs of Man lsquoWhichever way you throw me I standrsquo is the symbolrsquosaccompanying motto

Vision and values need to be embedded in the organization and this canonly be done by making them measurable and converting them intopersonal objectives for every member of staff Together with leadershipthey make up a complex but vital element in organizational DNAWhether or not an organizationrsquos vision and values are realized depends onappropriate leadership and on the management of employees

174 Demand System Management

Figure 94 The committed enterprise Adapted from Davidson (2002)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 174

[Image not available in this electronic edition]

THE ROLE OF EMPLOYEES IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

While marketers are confronting the shift from a production-driven to aconsumption-led economy human resource (HR) professionals are facing asimilar tectonic change as employees are increasingly perceived as anorganizational asset rather than a production cost This redefinition of therole of employees is a response to the decline in manufacturing and the riseof the Information Age which demands a radically different approach toHR management The role of employees is a matter of concern formarketers because the impact of an organization externally is tied to whatgoes on internally

The move away from manufacturing and the emergence of theknowledge worker brings in its wake a change in the asset base of theorganization As Peter Drucker says lsquothe most valuable assets of a 20th-century company were its production equipment The most valuable assetof a 21st-century institution whether business or non-business will be its knowledge workers and their productivityrsquo (Drucker 2002) Thisperspective forces a shift in the way in which people are evaluated withinthe organization In the manufacturing economy manual workers wereregarded as a cost which needed to be controlled and reduced andemployee management reflected this Employee productivity wasincreased through investment in plant and technology Knowledgeworkers in contrast are seen as a capital asset whose intrinsic value can begrown Their productivity is achieved in a very different way by placingresponsibility with the knowledge workers themselves The emphasis inHR management today therefore tends towards self-management andautonomy This ethos plays a crucial part in empowering staff to deliverbetter service as was mentioned in Chapter 8

The underlying assumption here is that unlike the manual workers ofthe production-driven era knowledge workers own the means ofproduction and enjoy greater levels of mobility in their careers thanprevious generations This is the thesis explored in the book Funky Business(Nordstroumlm and Ridderstraringle 2000) The authors write lsquoKarl Marx wasright The workers do control the means of production 13 kilograms ofbrain holds the key to all our futuresrsquo In their words lsquoItrsquos talent that makescapital dancersquo

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 175

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 175

Harnessing this talent means adopting a different approach tomanaging people Best-practice organizations whose thinking has movedout of the industrial age adopt the philosophy that they are in a more orless symbiotic relationship with employees and they create an internalvalue proposition to inform HR practice The organization employs peopleto define create and deliver value in the marketplace at a profit In returnfor their intellectual application development of potential and loyalty tothe organization employees receive a range of benefits

In the same way that the external value proposition described inChapter 6 is made up of component factors so too is the internal valueproposition It takes the form of a mix of two sorts of benefits andincentives There are extrinsic ones such as pay and promotion andintrinsic ones which lie deep within human nature Research shows thatlsquowhile traditional rewards and punishments can if ill-managed severelydamage motivation they have little beneficial effect under even the best ofcircumstances It is the fuzzier things ndash to do with feelings of purposebelonging engagement ndash that push people to do their bestrsquo (HarvardBusiness Review 2003)

Just as the factors that create added value for the consumer are those thatare mould breaking and have never before been offered in the marketplacethe factors that create added value for employees are similarly innovativeand special These key discriminating factors set the organization apartfrom competitors in the eyes of employees Occasionally some of thesedifferentiating factors may be lsquoadoptedrsquo by staff and become lsquotalkingpointsrsquo creating great word-of-mouth marketing for the organization as anemployer of choice Examples here include the free ice creams and picnicblankets made available in the summer to Microsoftrsquos staff at their Readingfacility the three-month unpaid winter holiday known as a lsquoBenidormbreakrsquo made available to older staff at Asda and Pret A Mangerrsquosmaternity package which includes pound20 towards a pair of maternity jeansand health spa vouchers upon return to work

The internal value proposition provides the focus for the full range ofHR practices These cover recruitment training appraisal promotion andsuccession planning as well as redundancy and dismissal In the lsquowar fortalentrsquo (Michaels et al 2001) recruitment is critical Best-practiceorganizations are looking not only for competency in prospectiveemployees but also alignment with the organizationrsquos vision and values

176 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 176

For many organizations the most effective and efficient way to recruit theright people is to encourage existing staff to introduce new employees

Once recruited into a best-practice organization employees participatein the acculturation and learning processes Whereas these two processesbarely made it on to organizational agendas in the industrial age they arenow seen as key to motivating and retaining staff Personalized andtargeted learning is offered on a continuous basis and organizationssometimes formalize this within their own learning institutions forexample the lsquouniversitiesrsquo run by McDonaldrsquos Disney and Unipart Othercompanies are working more virtually and taking advantage ofdevelopments in IT to create learning academies on their intranets Thereis also an emerging trend to provide non-work-related courses andopportunities to fulfil personal development goals Many organizationsrealize the value of providing benefits related to achieving a sense ofpersonal well-being such as sponsoring employee memberships to sportscentres and the provision of health services Team- and company-basedactivities that benefit the local community or charities also characterizebest-practice HR systems Expenditure on these less-traditional HRdevelopment activities is viewed as an investment in the organizationrsquosknowledge base and is assessed accordingly Ongoing appraisalspromotion and reward systems provide a further means of reinforcingdesired internal behaviours and attitudes

Where all of these elements of HR practice work effectively employeeswill be motivated and happy to stay with the organization This approachto HR management does not simply equate with paying them highsalaries as the winners of the 2002 lsquo100 best companies to work forrsquo show(McCall 2002) Asdarsquos experience is a good example

AsdaTop-rated superstore Asda has annual sales of pound97 billion and employs117000 people Salaries start at pound8833 In the 1980s the company reversedits declining fortunes by adopting a culture based on Wal-Martrsquos customer-friendly style When the Asda chain was bought by the American giant Wal-Mart in 1999 the value-centric orientation in both organizations ensured asmooth transition despite staff fears that the two cultures would clash Theunderlying philosophy is that everyone must be treated as an individual andstaff incentives are targeted to keep employee motivation high For exampleAsda recently introduced an employee health insurance scheme to cover

The Role of Employees in Demand System Management 177

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 177

male cancers The scheme follows on from the companyrsquos lsquoWell Womanrsquocover which has had a 50 take-up Asdarsquos share option scheme will see the16000 staff who were given shares in 1995 share an estimated pound25 millionwhen their shares schemes mature Other loyalty incentives include a lawclub that provides Asda employees with legal advice for 10 pence a weekand a free investment advice service from Bradford amp Bingley Thesepractices have helped keep the companyrsquos staff turnover down to anabnormally low figure for the sector

Asda and other organizations that define create and deliver a valueproposition for staff that makes them an employer of choice base theirstrategy on a simple model that links employee satisfaction and retentionwith customer satisfaction and retention Research suggests that a satisfiedand stable workforce is more capable of delivering higher service quality at

178 Demand System Management

Figure 95 The cycle of success Adapted from Schlesinger and Heskett (1991)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 178

lower cost (Schlesinger and Heskett 1991) This leads to higher levels ofcustomer satisfaction which in turn impacts customer retention levels andincreased profitability This virtuous circle is shown in Figure 95

THE ROLE OF KNOWLEDGE MANAGEMENT IN DEMANDSYSTEM MANAGEMENT

In todayrsquos consumption-led economy brand owners and retailers areconcentrating on becoming more productive by managing their responseto consumer demand better They are increasingly switching their businessfocus from cutting costs to adding value A key means of adding value isthrough knowledge management processes As a consequence knowledgemanagement has emerged as a major business discipline It is driven byadvances in IT and growth in the use of the Internet which allowinformation to be exchanged across the world 24 hours a day seven days aweek all at the touch of a button Failure to adapt knowledge managementpractices to this continually changing environment leads to what ArnoldKransdorff (19992000) has termed lsquocorporate amnesiarsquo a phenomenonthat prevents organizations learning from their own experienceslsquoCharacterized by knowledge loss it stems from short memory selectiverecall and the flexible labour marketrsquo

In order to create differential advantage a business needs to master theflows of information and knowledge that exist within its organization andthroughout its value chain As Lew Platt former CEO of Hewlett-Packardhas often been quoted as saying lsquoIf Hewlett-Packard knew what Hewlett-Packard knows wersquod be three times as profitablersquo The aim of knowledgemanagement is to build a collective and dynamic corporate memory Thefirst step is to establish a process for capturing knowledge about theorganization and the marketing environment

There are two main types of knowledge explicit knowledge and tacitknowledge Explicit knowledge is the more tangible of the two Itrepresents the type of knowledge that can be captured in written or processform and easily reused The lsquowhatrsquo dimension of corporate know-how islargely explicit knowledge Tacit knowledge refers to the implicit andoften ambiguous knowledge that is acquired mainly through personalexperience It is usually context-specific and provides the lsquohowrsquo dimensionof corporate know-how Tacit knowledge is difficult to formalize and hard

The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System Management 179

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 179

to capture As people are generally better at talking about experiences thanwriting them down new techniques to capture tacit knowledge areemerging Based on the art of storytelling these techniques amount toformalized oral debriefings following important organizational events Thedebriefing process allows employees to create accurate records of how whyand when they performed their tasks It requires a climate of trust asemployees need to feel that they are not relinquishing personal advantagebut are adding to the greater gain from which they too will benefit Ittherefore calls for a supportive organizational culture and value system

Knowledge itself has no intrinsic value as its value comes from beingused and unlike other resources knowledge grows with use Extractingand exploiting the value of knowledge is a core competence withindemand-led organizations In managing a demand system the knowledgemanagement process should reflect the value-centric orientation of theorganization Knowledge about consumers and their wants and desirescompetitors and internal competencies must be captured and managed toenable the superior definition creation and delivery of the valueproposition As Professor George Day from Wharton writes lsquoWhatdistinguishes a market-driven firm is the depth and timeliness of marketknowledge that enables it to anticipate market opportunities and respondfaster than its rivals When this knowledge is widely shared it is a commonreference point and assumption set that ensures the strategy is coherentrather than a disconnected set of activitiesrsquo (Day 1999)

New Consumer Marketing is concerned with generating and exploitingfour kinds of knowledge The first is knowledge about consumers for thisenables the organization to define and create a value proposition that isrelevant and appealing to consumers These subjects were covered inChapters 6 and 7 Chapter 6 covered the generation of insight and makingit actionable through segmentation while Chapter 7 explored the processof value creation and the role of new product development brandingpositioning and pricing in achieving this

The second kind of knowledge used in New Consumer Marketing isderived from competitor activity Awareness and understanding of whatcompetitors are doing and planning can help in making strategicmarketing plans work Of particular importance is an understanding of theorganizationrsquos competitive position as seen from the consumerrsquos point ofview

180 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 180

The third kind of knowledge which underpins the functioning of ademand system is process knowledge In the New Consumer Marketingmodel this relates to knowledge about the three cells ndash value definitionvalue creation and value delivery The aim is to make the core process ineach cell more efficient and effective Process knowledge comes fromimproved organization of the activities that support the development ofinsight innovation and agility Tacit process knowledge may well be agreater source of advantage here than explicit process knowledge

Finally there is the need to know about IT and how to use it smartlySystems knowledge guides the application of IT in both externally andinternally facing systems Decisions made regarding the deployment of ITwill have a fundamental impact on the success of a New ConsumerMarketing approach

Making the most of all four kinds of knowledge requires anorganizational culture that recognizes the value of knowledge enables theformulation and implementation of a strategy for knowledge managementthat is tied to a value-centric orientation and creates a climate thatencourages the acquisition and sharing of knowledge Without thissupporting culture the organizational DNA is fatally flawed

THE ROLE OF PLANNING IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

Increasing turbulence in the marketplace more demanding andsophisticated consumers increasing environmental complexity and thespeed of technological advancement all raise questions about the wisdom ofsetting down in a plan the three- to five-year ambitions of an organizationHow can planning be of use when times are changing so fast Areconventional approaches agile enough to capture the dynamic complexityof the marketplace except in the very short term In the pre-quake businessenvironment planning was presented as an orderly and linear sequence ofsteps For many organizations it was a-once-a-year fill-in-the-box activityThe conventional approach started with corporate and strategic planningwhich covered the identification of corporate goals (including missionvision values financial objectives and shareholder requirements) All ofthis was distilled down into a strategic marketing plan that consisted of asituational analysis leading to a summary presented in a SWOT analysis

The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 181

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 181

Marketing objectives and strategy were then defined on the basis of thisanalysis as well as factors previously noted as relevant to the organizationThe fourth and final stage of marketing planning involved creating atactical plan setting out the immediate 12 monthsrsquo activity This approachwas a reflection of the makendashsell model that characterized the production-driven economy

The arrival of the New Consumer and the consumption-led economy hasforced organizations to rethink their marketing planning Business gurussuch as Gary Hamel are asking questions about how useful thisconventional planning exercise is when e-commerce has so dramaticallyforeshortened planning cycles His 1994 book co-authored with C KPrahalad Competing for the Future introduced the concept of corecompetencies and lsquoindustry foresightrsquo or the art of anticipating marketsand customers five or ten years ahead Some six years on Hamelrsquos laterbook Leading the Revolution (2000) places far less emphasis on foresightbecause of the fast-paced nature of market development Instead he advisesadopting lsquonon-linear strategiesrsquo to create entirely new business models Hisfocus has therefore shifted from foresight to continuous innovation Hisargument is that organizations need to make the critical shift fromstewardship to entrepreneurship they should lsquobring Silicon Valley insidersquothe organization and create internal markets for ideas capital and talent ndasha philosophy borrowed from the firms at the epicentre of the dotcomrevolution where success is based on resource attraction not resourceallocation

However in this time of transition and in the wake of the dotcomdisasters many managers feel that ideas are not enough without soundplanning As Professor Malcolm McDonald of Cranfield School ofManagement explains plans inform employees in all parts of theorganization (McDonald 1999) They are needed in order to obtainresources and support gain commitment and set objectives and strategyIn a demand system planning is an important element of organizationalDNA as it serves to turn the value proposition into a coherent marketingprogramme The aim is to create an ongoing process approach to planningThis assists in the delivery of organizational agility As John CoudronCEO of Yell the publisher of Yellow Pages says lsquoWe set ourselves thetarget that on any Monday morning I could walk in and ask to see anupdated marketing plan on a Friday So our marketing plan was being

182 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 182

continually refreshed to take account of changing customer requirementsrsquo(McDonald 2001)

This process approach to marketing planning is explained in more detailby Professor Nigel Piercy also from Cranfield School of ManagementPiercy writes that planning in this way is a lsquosource of leverage for workingon achieving market-led strategic change and actually making marketstrategy and marketing programmes happenrsquo (Piercy 2002) He seeselements such as corporate culture management style information flowsorganizational structures participation and so on treated as eitherinsignificant facilitating mechanisms or lsquocontextrsquo in conventional planningapproaches He believes these issues are not mere context but that they arethe process and that the way the process of planning is managed will havea direct impact on what goes into the plan and will determine the outputsHis advice to organizations is that they should focus on commitment andownership rather than techniques and formal methods as this is what willultimately drive the value-centric strategy and deliver the valueproposition

This holistic approach to managing the marketing planning processshould result in the creation of more than a physical plan It should ensurethat plans are achievable actionable and capable of being implementedthat they are owned within the organization and that they work to gain thecommitment of executives to make them happen A major benefit of takinga process approach to planning is that it should cease to be a once-a-yearritual and should instead operate continuously The planning processshould identify real information needs and become a means of sharingunderstanding of organizational strategy and challenging perceivedwisdom within the organization

For this to happen Piercy suggests an alternative model for managingthe planning process This is shown in Figure 96 The model identifiesthree process dimensions analytical behavioural and organizational Theanalytical dimension covers the techniques procedures systems andplanning models that essentially analyse and integrate data and thinkingThe process of managing planning is made more comprehensive byincluding a behavioural aspect to do with how things get done Thiscomprises people-related elements such as managerial perceptionsparticipation levels strategic assumptions motivation commitment andownership The third dimension focuses on the nature of the organization

The Role of Planning in Demand System Management 183

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 183

incorporating organizational structure and culture and managementsignals about what actually gets priority within the organization

Budgeting is the next step (following the creation of a plan) in makingthe planning process a reality Whether a top-downbottom-up or abottom-uptop-down approach is taken the budget marks the point atwhich the organization signals its commitment to a demand system byallocating the resources financial and non-financial that will make ithappen For Piercy it is equally important that budgeting is managed as aprocess that also takes into account the wider analytical behavioural andorganizational dimensions discussed in relation to creating a plan

Taking a broader approach to planning that assimilates these analyticalbehavioural and organizational dimensions naturally makes the planningprocess more complex and less easy to manage The danger of a poorlymanaged planning process is that it might result in a plan that is toofocused on analysis or one that does not carry enough information in bothcases leading to a plan that is neither achievable nor actionable Equallyvested interests may dominate the planning process causing limitedownership and commitment on the part of other managers and making itharder to implement Other planning problems revolve around a lack ofresources and organizational resistance to change It is therefore importantthat there are agreed measures of marketing performance in place and thatthe measurement results inform future strategy and practice

184 Demand System Management

Figure 96 A multidimensional model of marketing planning Adapted from Piercy(2002)

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 184

[Image not available in this electronic edition]

THE ROLE OF MEASUREMENT IN DEMAND SYSTEMMANAGEMENT

An important aspect of New Consumer Marketing is the need to address theissue of measuring marketing performance The model makes measurementa necessary part of the way the organization defines creates and delivers thevalue proposition As with the other six elements of organizational DNAmeasurement plays a role in improving the performance of each of the threecells Without an ongoing assessment of performance against specificcriteria the organization has no way of determining whether it isperforming well that is whether the processes at work in the three cells arebeing carried out optimally Performance results become an essential flow ofinformation around the demand system which serve to support the drive forinsight innovation and agility

Marketing measurement enables marketers to become more accountableAn improvement in marketing accountability would address a key issuenon-marketers have with their marketing colleagues Many senior non-marketers perceive marketers as being lsquounaccountable untouchableslippery and expensiversquo as confirmed in research using the cultural web(Baker 2000) The research results are shown in Figure 97 This view gives

The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management 185

Stories and mythsmiddot mud doesnrsquot stickmiddot golden childmiddot quick promotionmiddot no loyaltymiddot expensive

Symbolsmiddot carsmiddot office location(window)middot stats and terminologymiddot lunch

Ritualsmiddot planning and organizingmiddot delegatingmiddot deadlinesmiddot off-site meetings

Control systemsmiddot 9ndash430middot lunchtravelmiddot entertainingmiddot networking ndash for self

Organizationstructuremiddot lack of structuremiddot internal focusmiddot always in metings

Power structuresmiddot research withheldmiddot they must be rightmiddot jargonmiddot credit taken ndash ifnecessary

Paradigmmiddot unaccountablemiddot untouchablemiddot slipperymiddot expensive

Figure 97 Senior non-marketersrsquo perceptions of marketers

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 185

rise in part to the debate about whether and in what ways marketingcontributes to a business (as first outlined in Chapter 1) Improvement inthe ability of organizations to measure marketing performance would gosome way towards arresting the current crisis in marketing

Techniques to evaluate the marketing process are at present in anembryonic state and lack universal agreement This is largely because themeasures have not yet been developed fully and the organizationalcommitment to measurement is often weak or lacking Essentiallyapproaches to marketing measurement strive to find acceptable ways ofmeasuring both lsquohardrsquo and lsquosoftrsquo marketing data Hard marketing dataincludes sales volume and value market size market share and profitmargins whereas soft marketing data is less tangible and more judgmentalin nature

However a number of organizations are working with professionalbodies to understand how performance measurement can best beaccomplished Current debate revolves around metrics that linkleadership employee satisfaction employee retention customer satis-faction customer retention sales and profitability The emphasis on suchmetrics is driven by developments in customer relationship management(CRM) systems that enable organizations to measure and evaluatecustomer relationships as never before For example a growing number ofaccounting techniques are being used to measure customer value Theserange from historic profitability analyses through lifetime value calcula-tions to links with shareholder value and to the computation of futurevalue creation The aim is to find a measurement approach that accom-modates the wider interpretation of marketing

3M(UK) referred to earlier in Chapter 7 is an example of a companythat manages to balance marketing creativity without sacrificing financialcontrol (Bowman and Gleadle 2002) Its marketing performance isassessed by evaluating innovation in the definition creation and delivery ofthe value proposition Thirty per cent of annual company sales must begenerated from products less than four years old and 10 from productsless than one year old This distinction is refined in two further categorieswith new-to-the-world developments being looked upon as lsquothe idealrsquoversus the substitution of new products for old This represents an analysisof performance at a base level that can then be extracted down to smallersegments of customers

186 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 186

As New Consumer Marketing attains lsquomission-criticalrsquo status in theemerging consumption-led economy marketing investment is gainingincreasing attention from finance professionals This trend marks part of awider revolution in thinking about what kind of corporate assets areimportant in todayrsquos business environment Intangible business assetssuch as knowledge about consumers and markets and corporate know-howabout defining creating and delivering the value proposition areassuming new importance The race is now on to find robust methods ofevaluating and quantifying such assets for the benefit of corporatemanagement and the wider investment community

SUMMARY POINTS

bull Demand system management is about managing a lsquolivingrsquo system ofcells that house the key processes which drive insight innovation andagility and enable the organization to be responsive to the complexdemands of the New Consumer

bull There are seven elements of organizational DNA which make a demandsystem viable Each enables the three cells to optimize performancethus ensuring competitive survival

bull Intuition is the spark that enables employees to base decisions on anunderstanding of consumersrsquo behaviour thoughts and feelings

bull Culture surfaces in everyday organizational life as knowledge about thelsquoway things are done around herersquo

bull Leadership is about demonstrating an ability to engage others inachieving the organizationrsquos mission communicating the corporatevision and upholding the corporate values

bull Corporate vision answers the question lsquowhere are we goingrsquo whilecorporate values are embedded standards and behaviours that provideguidance on how to get there Corporate vision has to be created andrefreshed whereas corporate values endure

bull Employees today are valued as a capital asset and are wooed by aninternal value proposition that informs all aspects of HR practice

bull Knowledge management is about building an organizational memorymade up of explicit and tacit knowledge It requires an organizationalclimate of trust

Summary Points 187

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 187

bull Planning is an ongoing process that encompasses analytical behav-ioural and organizational aspects which extend beyond the physicalmarketing plan

bull Measurement enables marketers to become accountable and providesknowledge about the effectiveness and efficacy of the demand system

CONCLUDING REMARKS

Establishing the case for New Consumer Marketing as a business disciplineand presenting a framework for its conceptualization has been the mainaim of this book The fundamental argument for advancing NewConsumer Marketing is that a value-centric orientation needs to replacethe retention orientation that has dominated marketing practice for thepast decade or so The shift in the macro-marketing environment from aproduction-driven to a consumption-led economy means taking theconsumer as the point of departure for the organization and not its finaldestination In this dynamically complex new marketplace marketingpractice needs to be viewed as systemic and holistic By offering such anapproach to managing the definition creation and delivery of value theNew Consumer Marketing model aims to assist managers in developingand implementing successful consumer marketing strategies Thereremains however considerable scope for debate and for further research inthis important area

Feedback from readers is welcomed and should be directed toslbakercranfieldacuk

188 Demand System Management

11 Baker chapter 9 FINAL 5603 244 pm Page 188

Chapter 11 Discussion of CRM in this chapter is informed by the work of the Cranfield

CRM Research Forum directed by Dr Moira Clark Visit wwwcranfield-crmorg2 Statistics used in this section are drawn from EIU Viewswire (2002)

wwwskillbasedfeegovuk wwwhesaacuk and Nellis and Figuera (2002)

Chapter 21 For more on the history and sociology of consumption see Corrigan (1997)2 For the background to consumerism see John (1994) For more on todayrsquos

consumer rights agenda visit wwwwhichcouk3 For more on the post-modern condition refer to the following academic

authors Stephen Brown (author of the very readable Postmodern Marketing) JeanBaurillard Bernard Cova and Maurice Holbrook

Chapter 31 The Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young research referred to in the chapter was

carried out for the Insight Programme (directed by Andre Klimczak) Visitwwwcgeycom

2 The Verdict research was reported at the Marketing Societyrsquos Retail ForumApril 2002 and in Hyman (2002) Other references for this chapter rely on dataand analysis carried in Verdict publications Visit wwwverdictcouk See alsoSeth and Randall (2001) which contains useful analysis of trends in internationalgrocery retailing

Chapter 41 For more on a post-modern approach to consumer behaviour see the

following academic authors Stephen Brown Jean Baurillard Bernard Cova andMaurice Holbrook

2 Treacy and Wiersema (1995) Doyle (2000) Capon and Hulbert (2001) andPiercy (2002) highlight value as the new key driver of strategy in marketing

Notes

12 Baker Endnotes FINAL 5603 245 pm Page 189

Chapter 51 Womack et al (1990) describe the concept of leanness See also references in

Chapter 8

Chapter 61 For an overview of meansndashend theory see Baker (2002) The key academic

paper to refer to is Gutman (1982)2 For an overview of grounded theory see Glaser and Strauss (1967)3 Discussion here and elsewhere in this chapter draws on Baker and Mouncey

(2002)

Chapter 71 The Dell case study referred to in this book is based on the following sources

(Hall 2002 Dell and Fredman 1999 Dell 2002)2 Background reference paper Bowman and Gleadle (2002)3 Taken from the Annual Marketing Society Lecture given by Niall

FitzGerald Chairman of Unilever in London on 19 June 20014 Taken from the authorrsquos PhD research For an overview of meansndashend theory

see Baker (2002)

Chapter 81 The agile supply chain is a concept that has been developed at Cranfield

School of Management within the Cranfield Centre for Logistics and SupplyChain Management This definition of agility comes from Christopher and Towill(2000) See also the work of Professor Alan Harrison including Harrison andHoek (2002)

2 Service blueprinting is associated with the work of Lynn Shostack SeeShostack (1987)

3 The philosophy and implementation of leanness as a management conceptwas set out in Womack et al (1990)

4 Key Account Management is a concept that has been developed at CranfieldSchool of Management and is most closely associated with Professor MalcolmMcDonald See McDonald et al (2002)

Chapter 91 This definition of Theory of Mind is taken from lsquoPsychology of autismrsquo a

presentation made by Professor Uta Frith at the National Autistic Societyrsquos 40thAnniversary International Conference London September 2002 See also thereferences to Theory of Mind made by Professor Jean Aitchison in the 1996 BBCReith Lectures published as The Language Web by Cambridge University Press1996

2 See Bennis and Thomas (2002) for an overview on what makes a great leader

190 Notes

12 Baker Endnotes FINAL 5603 245 pm Page 190

Allford R Evans N and Ward C (2002) A step forward in understandingshoppers using segmentation techniques presented at the ESOMARConference Consolidation or Renewal Barcelona September

Baker S (2000) What non-marketers think about you Marketing Businesssupplement on Better Marketing Measurement September

Baker S (2002) Laddering making sense of meaning in Partington D (ed)Essential Skills for Management Research Sage London ch 12

Baker S and Mouncey P (2002) New Consumer Marketing The implicationsfor market research presented at the ESOMAR Conference Consolidation orRenewal Barcelona September

Bennis W and Thomas R (2002) Crucibles of leadership Harvard BusinessReview 80(9) 39ndash45 September

Berners-Lee T and Fischetti M (1999) Weaving the Web the Original Design andUltimate Destiny of the World Wide Web By Its Inventor HarperSanFrancisco SanFrancisco CA

Booz Allen amp Hamilton (1982) New Product Management for the 1980s BoozAllen amp Hamilton New York

Bowman C and Gleadle P (2002) Culture as a dynamic capability the case of3M in the UK US Academy of Management conference paper presented atAOM2002 Denver Colorado

Brown JS and Duguid P (2000) The Social Life of Information Harvard BusinessSchool Press Boston MA

Brown S (1995) Postmodern Marketing Routledge LondonCapon N and Hulbert JM (2001) Marketing Management in the 21st Century

Prentice Hall Upper Saddle River NJChartered Institute of Marketing (1994) Marketing ndash The Challenge of Change A

Major Study into the Future of Marketing in Key British Enterprises CharteredInstitute of Marketing London

References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 191

Child P (2002) Taking Tesco global The McKinsey Quarterly 3

Christopher M (1992) The Customer Service Planner Butterworth-HeinemannOxford

Christopher M (1998) Logistics and Supply Chain Management 2nd edn FTPrentice Hall Harlow

Christopher M (2001) Breaking down the boundaries the supply chainmanagement process in M McDonald M Christopher S Knox and A Payne(eds) Creating a Company for Customers FT Prentice Hall Harlow

Christopher M and Peck H (1997) Marketing Logistics Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Christopher M and Towill D (2000) Donrsquot lean too far - distinguishing between thelean and agile manufacturing paradigms Proceedings MIM Conference Aston(ISSN 1359-8546)

Christopher M Payne A and Ballantyne D (1991) Relationship MarketingBringing Quality Customer Service and Marketing Together Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Christopher M Payne A and Ballantyne D (2002) Relationship MarketingCreating Stakeholder Value Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Clark M (1999) The recruitment and internal marketing domains in H PeckA Payne M Christopher and M Clark (eds) Relationship Marketing Strategyand Implementation Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Cooper R (1993) Winning at New Products Accelerating the Process from Idea toLaunch Addison-Wesley Reading MA

Corrigan P (1997) The Sociology of Consumption Sage London

Cross R and Prusak L (2002) The people who make organisations go ndash or stopHarvard Business Review 80(6) 104ndash112 June

Davidson H (2002) The Committed Enterprise Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Day G (1999) The Market Driven Organisation Free Press New York

Dell M (2002) Inspiring innovation Harvard Business Review 80(8) 41 August

Dell M and Fredman C (1999) Direct from Dell Strategies that Revolutionized anIndustry HarperBusiness New York

Doyle P (2000) Value Based Marketing ndash Marketing Strategies for Corporate Growthand Shareholder Value John Wiley amp Sons Chichester

Drucker P (1985) Innovation and Entrepreneurship Practice and Principles Harperamp Row New York

Drucker P (2002) Management Challenges for the 21st Century Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

192 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 192

Dyck W van (2002) Managing Complexity in Radical Innovation Projects The Needfor Paradigm Shifts Paper presented at Cranfield School of Management

EIU Viewswire (2002) The Decline of Manufacturing 8 March

Evans M (2001) Decoding competitive propositions a semiotic alternative totraditional advertising research presented at the MRS Conference 169ndash181

Fournier S (1996) Understanding consumerndashbrand relationships HarvardBusiness School working paper 98-018

Gates B and Hemingway C (1999) Business the Speed of Thought WarnerBooks New York

Gattorna J (ed) (1998) Strategic Supply Chain Alignment Gower Aldershot

Geus A de (1999) The Living Company Growth Learning and Longevity in BusinessNicholas Brealey London

Glaser BG and Strauss AL (1967) The Discovery of Grounded Theory Strategies forQualitative Research Aldine Chicago IL

Gleick J (1987) Chaos Making a New Science Viking New York

Godin S (1999) Permission Marketing Turning Strangers into Friends and Friendsinto Customers Simon amp Schuster New York

Goldman S Nagel R and Preiss K (1995) Agile Competitors and VirtualOrganizations Strategies for Enriching the Customer Van Nostrand Reinhold NewYork

Gordon W (1999) Goodthinking ndash A Guide to Qualitative Research AdmapHenley on Thames

Gordon W (2001) The dark room of the mind ndash what does neuro-psychologynow tell us about brands presented at AQRQRCA Conference ndash QualitativeResearch in the 21st Century Paris 18ndash20 April

Grant J (1999) The New Marketing Manifesto Texere London

Gutman J (1982) A meansndashend chain model based on consumer categorizationprocesses Journal of Marketing 46(2) 60ndash62

Hall A (2002) The boy who lived the American dream The Sunday Times 1December

Hamel G (2000) Leading the Revolution Harvard Business School Press BostonMA

Hamel G and Prahalad CK (1994) Competing for the Future Harvard BusinessSchool Press Boston MA

Hanby T (1999) Brands ndash dead or alive Journal of the Market Research Society41(1) 7ndash18

References 193

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 193

Handy C (1989) The Age of Unreason Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Handy C (1994) The Empty Raincoat Making Sense of the Future HutchinsonLondon

Handy C (1997) The Hungry Spirit Beyond Capitalism ndash A Quest for Purpose in theModern World Hutchinson London

Harrison A and Hoek RI van (2002) Logistics Management and Strategy FTPrentice Hall Harlow

Harvard Business Review (2003) The Best of HBR on Motivation 81(1) 8 January

Hertz N (2001) Silent Takeover Global Capitalism and the Death of Democracy FreePress New York

Hyman R (2002) The retail roller-coaster message from the high street MarketLeader (17) 46ndash50

John R (ed) (1994) The Consumer Revolution Redressing the Balance Hodder ampStoughton London

Johnson G and Scholes K (1992) Exploring Corporate Strategy Prentice HallLondon

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1997) Value innovation the strategic logic ofhigh growth Harvard Business Review 75(1) 102ndash112 JanuaryFebruary

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1999a) Creating new market space HarvardBusiness Review 77(1) 83ndash93 JanuaryFebruary

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (1999b) Strategy value innovation and theknowledge economy Sloan Management Review 40(3) 41ndash54

Kim WC and Mauborgne R (2000) Knowing a winning business idea whenyou see one Harvard Business Review 78(5) 129ndash141 SeptemberOctober

Klein N (2000) No Logo Taking Aim at the Brand Bullies Picador New York

Kransdorff A (19992000) The other lsquovirusrsquo that is bugging industry MarketLeader (7) 27ndash29 Winter

Lannon J and Cooper P (1983) Humanistic advertising a holistic culturalperspective International Journal of Advertising 2(3) 195ndash213

Lauterborn R (1991) From 4Ps to 4Cs Advertising Age 61(41) 26 1 October

McCall A (ed) (2002) The Sunday Times 100 Best Companies to Work For TheSunday Times 24 March

McCracken GD (1988) Culture and Consumption New Approaches to the SymbolicCharacter of Consumer Goods and Activities Indiana University PressBloomington IN

194 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 194

McDonald M (1999) Marketing Plans How To Prepare Them How To Use ThemButterworth-Heinemann Oxford

McDonald M (2001) Getting back to basics the market understanding processin M McDonald M Christopher S Knox and A Payne (eds) Creating aCompany for Customers FT Prentice Hall Harlow ch 2

McDonald M Rogers B and Woodburn D (2002) Key Customers How ToManage them Profitably Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

McGregor D (1960) The Human Side of Enterprise McGraw-Hill New York

Michaels E Handfield-Jones H and Axelrod B (2001) The War for TalentHarvard Business School Press Boston MA

Mitchell A (2001) Right Side Up Building Brands in the Age of the OrganizedConsumer HarperCollinsBusiness London

Moir L (2001) Why managers and organisations must embrace CSR ManagementFocus Cranfield School of Management (17)13 Winter

Negroponte N (1995) Being Digital Knopf New York

Nellis J and Figueira C (2002) Is there a future for UK ManufacturingManagement Focus Cranfield School of Management (19) 19ndash21 Winter

Nordstroumlm K and Ridderstraringle J (2000) Funky Business Talent Makes CapitalDance ftcom Harlow

Pascale RT (1990) Managing on the Edge How the Smartest Companies Use Conflictto Stay Ahead Viking New York

Pascale RT Millemann M and Gioja L (2000) Surfing the Edge of Chaos TheLaws of Nature and the New Laws of Business Crown Business New York

Piercy N (2002) Market-Led Strategic Change A Guide to Transforming the Process ofGoing to Market 3rd edn Butterworth-Heinemann Oxford

Pine BJ and Gilmore JH (1998) Welcome to the experience economyHarvard Business Review 76(4) 97ndash105 JulyAugust

Pine BJ and Gilmore JH (1999) The Experience Economy Work is Theatre andEvery Business a Stage Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

PricewaterhouseCoopers (1999) Global Growth and Innovation surveyPricewaterhouseCoopers London

Reichheld FF and Teal T (1996) The Loyalty Effect The Hidden Force BehindGrowth Profits and Lasting Value Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Rokeach M (1973) The Nature of Human Values Free Press New York

Sawhney M and Kotler P (2001) Marketing in the age of informationdemocracy in a chapter in D Iacobucci (ed) Kellogg on Marketing John Wileyamp Sons Chichester

References 195

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 195

Schlesinger LA and Heskett JL (1991) Breaking the cycle of failure in servicesSloan Management Review Spring 17ndash28

Schultz DE and Lindberg-Repo K (2002) Building holistic relationshipcommunication programs in an interactive marketplace presented at theESOMAR Conference Consolidation or Renewal Barcelona September2002

Seth A and Randall G (2001) The Grocers The Rise and Rise of the SupermarketChains London Kogan Page

Seybold P Lewis JM and Marshak RT (2001) The Customer Revolution How toThrive When Customers Are in Control Random House New York

Shostack L (1987) Service positioning through structural change Journal ofMarketing (51) 34ndash43 January

Smith D and Fletcher J (2001) Inside Information John Wiley amp SonsChichester

Tapscott D (1996) The Digital Economy Promise and Peril in the Age of NetworkedIntelligence McGraw-Hill New York

Tapscott D (1998) Growing Up Digital The Rise of the Net Generation McGraw-Hill New York

Tapscott D Lowy A and Ticoll D (2000) Digital Capital Harnessing the Powerof Business Webs Harvard Business School Press Boston MA

Taylor FW (1967) Principles of Scientific Management WW Norton New York(first published 1911)

Toffler A (1970) Future Shock Random House New York (out of print)Treacy M and Wiersema FD (1995) The Discipline of Market Leaders Choose

Your Customers Narrow Your Focus Dominate Your Market Addison-WesleyReading MA

Womack JP Jones DT and Roos D (1990) The Machine that Changed theWorld Rawson Associates New York

196 References

13 Baker refs FINAL 5603 246 pm Page 196

AA 24Abbey National 147Advantage Card 46agility

in supply chain management 159in value delivery 131ndash3

Air France 129Andersen 173anti-globalization movement 32Argos 46Asda 40 134 176 177ndash8Ashley Laura 77Autobytel 140

BampQ 48BAA 133Badai 117Bailey Christopher 125Barbie 115ndash16Barclaycard 46Batey Ian 118Bell Laboratories 33benchmarking 59betamax 113binary thinking 58ndash60Blair Tony 133Blockbuster 46BMW 105Body Shop 120Boots 44 45 46Boots Opticians brand 45

Booz Allen amp Hamilton New ProductManagement 111

Boston Consulting Group (BCG) 12Boston Matrix 12ndash13boundary-spanning role 98BP 46 120Bradford amp Bingley 178brand owners 64

concerns of 65ndash6key issues 37ndash42

brand repositioning 111 112branding in value creation 113ndash20Bravo Marie 124bricolage 87British Airways 147British Gas 24ndash5Britvic 158Brown John Seely 60budgeting 184Burberry 124ndash5Burberry Cup 125Business Process Re-engineering (BPR)

59 67

Cadbury 80Cadbury Schweppes 104 105Caldey Island 25call centres 139 149ndash50Callaway Golf 110Cap Gemini Ernst amp Young 37category killers 48

Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 197

category one segments 94Centrica 24ndash5C5 electric car (Sinclair) 113Chan Kim W 110Chanel No 5 122channels in value delivery 133ndash41chaos theory 58Chaplin Charlie 59Chartered Institute of Marketing (CIM)

Challenge of Change The 10Cheers (television programme) 31Christopher Martin 154

Customer Service Planner The 142Clinique 28Club Nestleacute 150Clubcard 46Coca-Cola 38 118 123committed enterprise 174complex adaptive systems 58complexity science 57ndash8consumer churn 46consumer concept 24ndash5consumer confidentiality 91consumer marketing implications for 48

61consumer movement 25consumer responsiveness

developing 66ndash7through time compression 154ndash9

consumer rights defence of 25ndash6consumerism 25Consumersrsquo Association (UK) 25consumersrsquo indifference zone 128Consumersrsquo Union (CU) (USA) 25consumption

management 27 54ndash5in transformation 23ndash6

Cooper Peter 114core capability 52corporate amnesia 179corporate anorexia 67corporate memory 88cost reduction 41ndash2 111ndash12

Coudron John 182Countrywide Porter Novelli (CPN)

145ndash6cultural web of an organization 166culture 165ndash8Customer Bill of Rights for the

Information Age 26customer lifetime value 14customer loyalty 14 45ndash8customer-managed relationships (CMR)

17Customer Relationship Management

(CRM) 15 21 186failure of 1systems 89ndash91test of 15ndash17

customer retention rates 15customer value 14

database segmentation 93ndash4Davidson Hugh 174Day George 180Debenhams 46Dell Michael 107 153Dell 18 19 153 168Dell-com 153demand chain management 67demand system management 161ndash88

culture in 165ndash8employees in 175ndash9intuition in 163ndash5knowledge management in 179ndash81leadership in 170ndash4measurement in 185ndash7planning in 181ndash4structure in 168ndash9values in 172ndash4vision in 171ndash2

Deutsche Telekom 133Dichter Ernest 82Direct Line 139Directional Policy Matrix (DPM) 12discourse analysis 83ndash4

198 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 198

disintermediation 140Disney 139 172 177Dixons Group 45Domoco 117Drucker Peter 102 175Dunkinrsquo Donuts 32

easyJet 107edit choice in store 44ndash5Efficient Consumer Response (ECR) 157Electronic Data Interchange (EDI) 157email 135employee cloak theory 171employment patterns 20empowerment 59endowment policies 93Energy America 24Enron 173Enviego 28Ericsson 39ESOMAR 90ethnographic analysis 83 85ndash6euro 41every day low pricing (ELDP) 43evolution of marketing 12ndash17experience economy 31explicit knowledge 179ndash80extended enterprise approach 152ndash3 169

fast moving consumer goods (fmcg) sector10 12 38 40 41 80

Fetchmax 141First Direct 141Fitzgerald Niall 41 115Fletcher Jonathon 81focus groups 86Ford Henry 59 60Ford Motor Company 78 1194Cs 34 55 644Is culture 1454Ps (Product Place Price and Promotion)

11 23 27 34 55 64Fournier Susan 114

France Telecom 133Fry Art 107

Gartner 33Gates Bill 60General Electric 12General Motors 119genetically modified (GM) foods 119Geus Arie de Living Company The 60Gleick James Chaos Making a New Science

58globalization 11 38ndash9Godin Seth 52Goldfish 24Gordon Wendy 86 87

Goodthinking 87Grant John New Marketing Manifesto 114gross domestic product (GDP) 2 37 64

103Grounded Theory 82Guinness 84 85 156ndash7

Haji-Ioannou Stelios 107Hamel Gary

Competing for the Future (and CKPrahalad) 66ndash7 182

Leading the Revolution 182Handy Charles 59Harley-Davidson 30 123Hertz Di Noreena Silent Takeover The

119Hewlett-Packard 153 179Home Depot 139homoeconomicus 128human resource (HR) professionals 175hygiene factors 76

IBM 153IKEA 110iMAC 123i-mode 117ndash18independent financial advisers (IFAs) 140in-depth interviews 86

Index 199

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 199

infomediaries 140information technology 16 17 53ndash4 91

179 181role of 135New Consumer and 33

infotainment 32innovation

as a dynamic capability 107ndash9radical approach to 109ndash11search for 42through process or people 106ndash7in value creation 102ndash11

INSEAD 110insight in value definition 74ndash9 97ndash9Intel 57 133interactive marketplace response to 53ndash4International Chambers of Commerce 90International Red Cross 172Internet 11 33 53 57 135 179interviews 144intuition in demand system management

163ndash5intuitive mentalizing 165

Johnson Gerry 165Johnson amp Johnson 120Johnson Controls 104 105

Kennedy President John F 25Klein Naomi No Logo 32knowledge management 98 179ndash81knowledge worker 175Kotler Philip 26Krispy Kreme Doughnuts 75 76

Land Rover 146Landsrsquo End 18 19Lannon Judie 114Lastminutecom 133 134Lauterborn Robert 34lead-time gap 154leadership 170ndash4lean enterprise 153

lean production (leanness) 59 67learning organization 60Lee Tim Berners 60Legoland 46Levitt Theodore 31

Marketing Myopia 93Lew Platt 179Lorenz Edward 58loyalty cardsschemes 46 47 88ndash9Lucozade 98Lufthansa 129Luminus 24Lyons Maid 113

makendashsell approach 27 64 182manufacturing future of 39ndash40Mario Testino Exhibition 125Market Research Society 90market segmentation 94market share 14marketing

in crisis 10ndash11evolution of 12ndash17life cycle 16planning 182ndash4

Marketing Forum 11Marks amp Spencer 43 155Mars 111Mars Ice Cream 113Marshall Alfred 128Marshall Plan 24Marx Karl 175Mattel 116Mauborgne Renee 110McCann Erickson World Group 150McCann Relationship Marketing Paris

(MRM)150 152McCracken Grant 24McDonald Professor Malcolm 182McDonaldization 59McDonaldrsquos 43 46 139 177McGregor Douglas 59McKinsey amp Co 12

200 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 200

meansndashend theory 78measurement in demand system

management 185ndash7media in value delivery 133ndash41Menichetti Roberto 125mental models 87 115Metcalfe Robert 57micro-retailing 48 64Microsoft 60 172 176MIT 153Mitchell Alan 32mobile phones 33 135Modern Times (film) 59Moir Lance 120Moore Gordon 57Moss Kate 125MP3 53Mueller John 108Muumlller 112multichannel centres 150multinational operations 45multiple channels 44multiple formats trade cross 44multiple locations trade across 43ndash4Multiple Markets Model 15Murphyrsquos 156

National Farmersrsquo Union (NFU) 104Natsuno Takeshi 117Nectar 46needs-states analysis 86ndash7Negroponte Nicholas 60Nestleacute 41 150neuro-psychology 87New Consumer 27ndash33

complex lives of 30embracing 66experiences of 31information technology and 33marketing literacy and demands of

31ndash2response to 52ndash3time and 28ndash30

New Consumer Marketing 51ndash62 92114

definition 51ndash5meaning 55ndash60model 4 5 63ndash71 161 162

new product development in valuecreation 111ndash13

new-to-the-world introductions 112ndash13next-generation smart phone 135Nike 39 40 78 122Nissan 105Nite-and-Day 44Nokia 136ndash7non-traditional market sensing in value

definition 88ndash92using CRM systems 89ndash91using database systems 88ndash9using frontline staff 91ndash2

Nordstroumlm Kjell (and JonasRidderstraringle) Funky Business 170175

Norwich Union 140

Odeon Cinemas 46One Stop 44OneTel 24Open Plan Account 76Oracle 90Oreal Lrsquo 30organizational agility 5 132 140organizational culture 132organizational DNA 5 69 71 161ndash3

185

Pascale RichardManaging on the Edge 58Surfing the Edge of Chaos 60

Pearson 18 19Peoplesoft 90Pepsi-Cola 158personal digital assistants (PDAs) 135Petcareco Limited 148 149phantom factors 77

Index 201

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 201

Piercy Professor Nigel 183 184PIMS (Profit Impact of Market Strategy)

14planning in knowledge system

management 181ndash4Pop Idol (television programme) 19ndash20positioning in value creation 120ndash5

emotional message 121ndash2process 123ndash5

power brands 38Prahalad CK (and Gary Hamel)

Competing for the Future 66ndash7 182Pret A Manger 125 144ndash5 176price in value creation 125ndash9process knowledge 181Procter amp Gamble 12 18 19 96product life cycle (PLC) 12prosumption 18psychometric tests 144Purdy Lucy 26

quality movement 59qualitative research 82ndash6quantitative research 80ndash1 86Quick Response (QR) 157

Range Rover 146rate tart 53rational consumer 128reductionist approaches 59Reichheld Frederick 14Relationship Marketing (RM) 3 21 27

54 55 63ndash4rise of 14ndash15

retail branding 45retailers

concerns of 65ndash6power growth in 40ndash1response 42ndash8

Ridderstraringle Jonas (and KjellNordstroumlm) Funky Business 170175

Ritz-Carlton Hotel 143 144

Rokeach Milton 172Rolex 125Ryanair 129

Safeway 134Sainsburyrsquos 41 44 46 89 96 134sales growth 41ndash2SAP 90Sara Lee 39Sasser Earl 14savings accounts 93savings bonds 93Sawhney Mohanibar 26Scholes Kevin 165Schultz Howard 170Schwab Charles amp Co 110segmentation analysis 93ndash7semiotics analysis 83 84ndash5September 11th 2001 20service in value delivery 141ndash8Seybold Patricia 177Ps of Relationship Marketing 34Shearwood Michael 91Shell 12 60 80 119 120Siebel Systems 90Simon Herbert 137Sinclair Clive 113Singapore Airlines 118 145 172ndash3Six Sigma 59Skoda 98Skoggins Dan 170Smith David 81Smith WH 31Sony 117Sony Music 133Southwest Airlines (SWA) 141sponsorship 125staff

in demand system management 175ndash9empowerment 146ndash8motivation 145recruitment 143ndash6

stagendashgate process 106

202 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 202

Starbucks 170Stella Artois 125 138stock-keeping units (SKUs) 38StreetKa buyers 78supply chain in value delivery 152ndash9supply-chain management 5 67SWOT analysis 181Synectics Corporation 104

tacit knowledge 179ndash80tacit process knowledge 181Tango 158lsquoTapping the creativity of consumersrsquo 104Tapscott Don 60Taylor Frederick Principles of Scientific

Management The 59technology integration in value delivery

148ndash52teenagers 33Teletubbies 83ndash4Tennant Stella 125Tesco 40 44 45 46 68 134 147 167

168 169Tesco Clubcard 89text messaging 33TGI Friday 170Theory of Mind 163ndash4Theory X and Y 59Thortonrsquos 1403Com Corporation 573M(UK) 107ndash8 186time 54

compression 154ndash9refugees 28ndash30

Toffler Alvin Future Shock 18Toyota 153trade

across multiple formats 44across multiple locations 43ndash4

transaction marketing 3 55

Unilever 12 41 85ndash6 115Unipart 177

value-adding time 156value-centric orientation 3 55ndash6 57 66

68 115value concept 75value creation 4 70 101ndash30

branding in 113ndash20innovation in 102ndash11new product development in 111ndash13positioning in 120ndash5price in 125ndash9

value definition 4 70 73ndash99insight generators in 97ndash9insight in 74ndash9needs-states analysis 86ndash7non-traditional market sensing in

88ndash92qualitative research 82ndash6quantitative research 80ndash1segmentation in 92ndash7traditional market research in 79ndash87

value delivery 4 70 131ndash60agility in 131ndash3media and channels in 133ndash41service in 141ndash8technology integration in 148ndash52supply chain in 152ndash9

value-destroyers 77value-enhancing factors 74 76 77 78value evaluation of 127ndash9value-influencing factors 74ndash8value innovation 110value-maintaining factors 76 77values in knowledge system management

172ndash4Veterans Agency (VA) 132 133Virgin Atlantic 109Virgin Group 109ndash10 114Virgin Mobile 109 149Virgin One 109ndash10virtual call-centre operators (V-Reprsquos)

150vision in knowledge system management

171ndash2

Index 203

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 203

Volkswagen 138Volvo 59

Walls 80 113Wal-Mart 40 45 110 119War Pensions Agency 132Woburn Safari Park 164ndash5Womack James 153Woolwich Building Society 76World Trade Organization 32 119

World Wide Web 60wwwcarsurveyorg 53wwwfriendsreunitedcom 30wwwmoneysupermarketcom 53wwwsyneticsworldcom 104

Zara 91ndash2 158Zip Project 155Zyman Sergio 123

204 Index

14 Baker Index FINAL 5603 247 pm Page 204

  • New Consumer Marketing
    • Contents
    • Foreword
    • Acknowledgements
    • About the Author
    • Introduction
      • Meeting the Challenges
      • Overview of the Book
        • 1 Earthquake
          • Marketing in Crisis
          • The Evolution of Marketing
            • The Rise of Relationship Marketing
            • The Test of CRM
              • Changes in the Macro-Marketing Environment
              • Implications for Consumer Marketing
              • Summary Points
                • 2 The New Consumer
                  • Consumption in Transformation
                    • Expansion of the Consumer Concept
                    • Defence of Consumer Rights
                      • Consumption Management in Question
                      • A New Kind of Consumer
                        • New Consumers Are Exercised By Time
                        • New Consumers Lead Complex Lives
                        • New Consumers Seek Experiences
                        • New Consumers Are Marketing Literate and Highly Demanding
                        • New Consumers Are IT Enabled
                          • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                          • Summary Points
                            • 3 Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers
                              • Key Issues for Brand Owners
                                • The Force of Globalization
                                • The Debate about the Future of Manufacturing
                                • The Growth in Retailer Power
                                • The Need to Balance Cost Reduction and Sales Growth
                                • The Search for Innovation
                                  • The Retailersrsquo Response
                                    • Trading across Multiple Locations
                                    • Trading across Multiple Formats
                                    • Use of Multiple Channels
                                    • Editing Choice in Store
                                    • Enhancing Retail Branding
                                    • Developing Multinational Operations
                                    • Pursuing Customer Loyalty
                                      • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                                      • Summary Points
                                        • 4 New Consumer Marketing
                                          • New Consumer Marketing ndash What Is it
                                            • A Response to the New Consumer
                                            • A Response to the Interactive Marketplace
                                            • A Response to Ineffective Consumption Management
                                              • New Consumer Marketing ndash What Does it Mean
                                                • Adopting Value-Centricity
                                                • Applying Science
                                                • Breaking out of Binary Thinking
                                                  • New Consumer Marketing ndash Who Is Involved
                                                  • Implications for Consumer Marketing
                                                  • Summary Points
                                                    • 5 A Model of New Consumer Marketing
                                                      • To Recap
                                                      • Key Challenges Facing New Consumer Marketing
                                                        • Addressing the Concerns of Brand Owners and Retailers
                                                        • Embracing the New Consumer
                                                        • Developing Real Consumer Responsiveness
                                                        • Lifting Marketing Out of its Crisis
                                                          • The New Consumer Marketing Model
                                                            • 6 Value Definition
                                                              • The Role of Insight in Value Definition
                                                                • Identifying the Factors that Enhance Maintain and Destroy Value
                                                                • Understanding the Meaning of the Value Factors
                                                                  • The Role of Traditional Market Research in Value Definition
                                                                    • Using Quantitative Research
                                                                    • Using Qualitative Research
                                                                    • Need-States Analysis
                                                                      • The Role of Non-Traditional Market Sensing in Value Definition
                                                                        • Using Database Systems
                                                                        • Using CRM Systems
                                                                        • Using Front-line Staff
                                                                          • The Role of Segmentation in Value Definition
                                                                            • Creating a Segmentation Analysis
                                                                              • The Role of Insight Generators in Value Definition
                                                                              • Summary Points
                                                                                • 7 Value Creation
                                                                                  • The Role of Innovation in Value Creation
                                                                                    • Consumers as Innovators
                                                                                    • Innovation through Process or People
                                                                                    • Innovation as a Dynamic Capability
                                                                                    • A Radical Approach to Innovation
                                                                                      • The Role of New Product Development in Value Creation
                                                                                      • The Role of Branding in Value Creation
                                                                                        • Building Successful Brands
                                                                                        • Emerging Brand Issues
                                                                                          • The Role of Positioning in Value Creation
                                                                                            • Drawing out the Emotional Message
                                                                                            • The Positioning Process
                                                                                              • The Role of Price in Value Creation
                                                                                                • The Evaluation of Value
                                                                                                  • Summary Points
                                                                                                    • 8 Value Delivery
                                                                                                      • The Role of Agility in Value Delivery
                                                                                                      • The Role of Media and Channels in Value Delivery
                                                                                                        • Making the Most of Media Choices
                                                                                                        • Making the Most of Channel Choices
                                                                                                          • The Role of Service in Value Delivery
                                                                                                            • Creating a Service Strategy
                                                                                                            • Recruiting and Motivating Staff
                                                                                                            • Empowering Employees to Live the Brand
                                                                                                              • The Role of Technology Integration in Value Delivery
                                                                                                              • The Role of the Supply Chain in Value Delivery
                                                                                                                • Competing through the Supply Chain
                                                                                                                • Consumer Responsiveness through Time Compression
                                                                                                                  • Summary Points
                                                                                                                    • 9 Demand System Management
                                                                                                                      • The Role of Intuition in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                      • The Role of Culture and Structure in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                        • Culture
                                                                                                                        • Structure
                                                                                                                          • The Role of Leadership Vision and Values in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                            • Leadership
                                                                                                                            • Vision
                                                                                                                            • Values
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Employees in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Knowledge Management in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Planning in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • The Role of Measurement in Demand System Management
                                                                                                                              • Summary Points
                                                                                                                              • Concluding Remarks
                                                                                                                                • Notes
                                                                                                                                • References
                                                                                                                                • Index
Page 6: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 7: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 8: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 9: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 10: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 11: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 12: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 13: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 14: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 15: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 16: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 17: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 18: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 19: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 20: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 21: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 22: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 23: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 24: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 25: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 26: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 27: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 28: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 29: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 30: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 31: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 32: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 33: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 34: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 35: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 36: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 37: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 38: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 39: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 40: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 41: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 42: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 43: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 44: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 45: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 46: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 47: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 48: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 49: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 50: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 51: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 52: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 53: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 54: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 55: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 56: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 57: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 58: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 59: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 60: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 61: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 62: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 63: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 64: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 65: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 66: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 67: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 68: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 69: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 70: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 71: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 72: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 73: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 74: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 75: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 76: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 77: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 78: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 79: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 80: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 81: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 82: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 83: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 84: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 85: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 86: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 87: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 88: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 89: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 90: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 91: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 92: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 93: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 94: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 95: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 96: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 97: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 98: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 99: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 100: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 101: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 102: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 103: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 104: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 105: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 106: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 107: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 108: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 109: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 110: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 111: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 112: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 113: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 114: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 115: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 116: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 117: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 118: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 119: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 120: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 121: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 122: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 123: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 124: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 125: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 126: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 127: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 128: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 129: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 130: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 131: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 132: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 133: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 134: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 135: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 136: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 137: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 138: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 139: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 140: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 141: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 142: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 143: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 144: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 145: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 146: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 147: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 148: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 149: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 150: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 151: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 152: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 153: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 154: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 155: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 156: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 157: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 158: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 159: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 160: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 161: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 162: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 163: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 164: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 165: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 166: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 167: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 168: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 169: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 170: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 171: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 172: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 173: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 174: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 175: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 176: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 177: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 178: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 179: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 180: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 181: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 182: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 183: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 184: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 185: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 186: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 187: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 188: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 189: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 190: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 191: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 192: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 193: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 194: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 195: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 196: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 197: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 198: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 199: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 200: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 201: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 202: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 203: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 204: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 205: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 206: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 207: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 208: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 209: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 210: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 211: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 212: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 213: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 214: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 215: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 216: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 217: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 218: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 219: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System
Page 220: New Consumer Marketing: Managing a Living Demand System